MCGM PDF

Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code.
: GMLR/000
Design and Construction of Twin Tube Road Tunnel including approach road at
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR)
Volume 1
Bidding Guidelines
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai
Mumbai, Maharashtra, India
Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),

Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar,
Near National Park, Borivali (E), Mumbai, 400066
India Website: http://portal.mcgm.gov.in
1|Page
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code.: GMLR/000
GOREGAON MULUND LINK ROAD PROJECT (GMLR)
Outline of Tender Documents
Disclaimer
Volume 1 Bidding Guidelines
Section I Notice of Intimation to RFP e – Tender Notice
Section II Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)
Section III Form of Tenders
Volume 2 Condition of Contracts

General Conditions of Contract shall be “FIDIC Conditions of Contract for
Section IV Plant and Design-Build – First Edition 1999” (GCC)
Section V Particular Condition of Contract
Volume 3 Employer’s Requirement
Section VI Section A – General

Section B – Functional
Section C – Design
Section D – Construction
Appendices 1 to 19
Volume 4 Outline Design Specification

Volume 5 Outline Construction Specification
Volume 6 Tender Drawings
Volume 7 Pricing Document
Volume 8 Reference Document
Section VII Engineering and Geotechnical Investigation Report.
Section VIII Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Report
Section IX Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report.
Note: The Tenderers, whilst compiling their rates, must carefully consider all the requirements of
the documents listed above, and the Request for Qualification (RFQ) documents for the Package
concerned, as all these documents will form part of the Contract.
2|Page
DISCLAIMER
The information contained in this Request for Proposal Tender Document (the “RFP”) or
subsequently provided to Applicant(s), whether verbally or in documentary or any other form, by
or on behalf of the Employer or any of ,is provided to Applicant(s) on the terms and conditions
set out in this RFP and such other terms and conditions subject to which such information is
provided.
This RFP is not an agreement and is neither an offer nor invitation by the Employer to the
prospective Applicant(s) (“the tenderer(s)”) or any other person. The purpose of this RFP is to
provide interested parties with information that may be useful to them in the formulation of their
application for proposal pursuant to this RFP (the “Application”). This RFP includes statements,
which reflect various assumptions and assessments arrived at by the Employer in relation to the
Project. Such assumptions, assessments and statements do not purport to contain all the
information that each Applicant may require. This RFP may not be appropriate for all persons, and
it is not possible for the Employer, its employees or advisors to consider the investment objectives,
financial situation and needs of each party who reads or uses this RFP. The assumptions,
assessments, statements and information contained in this RFP may not be complete, accurate,
adequate or correct. Each Applicant should therefore, conduct its own investigations and analysis
and should check the accuracy, adequacy, correctness, reliability and completeness of the
assumptions, assessments, statements and information contained in this RFP and obtain
independent advice from appropriate sources.
Information provided in this RFP to the Applicant(s) is on a wide range of matters, some of which
may depend upon interpretation of law. The information given is not intended to be an exhaustive
account of statutory requirements and should not be regarded as a complete or authoritative
statement of law. The Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy or otherwise for any
interpretation or opinion on law expressed herein.
The Employer, its employees and advisors make no representation or warranty and shall have no
liability to any person, including any Applicant, under any law, statute, rules or regulations or tort,
principles of restitution or unjust enrichment or otherwise for any loss, damages, cost or expense
which may arise from or be incurred or suffered on account of anything contained in this RFP or
otherwise, including the accuracy, adequacy, correctness, completeness or reliability of the RFP
and any assessment, assumption, statement or information contained therein or deemed to form
part of this RFP or arising in any way with pre-qualification of Applicants for participation in the
Tendering Process.
3|Page
The Employer also accepts no liability of any nature whether resulting from negligence or
otherwise howsoever caused arising from reliance of any Applicant upon the statements contained
in this RFP.
The Employer may, in its absolute discretion but without being under any obligation to do so,
update, amend or supplement the information, assessment or assumptions contained in this RFP.
The issue of this RFP does not imply that the Employer is bound to appoint the selected Tenderer
or Tenderers for the Project and the Employer reserves the right to reject all or any of the
Applications or Tender without assigning any reasons whatsoever.
The Applicant shall bear all its costs associated with or relating to the preparation and submission
of its Application including but not limited to preparation, copying, postage, delivery fees, expenses
associated with any demonstrations or presentations which may be required by the Employer or
any other costs incurred in connection with or relating to its Application. All such costs and
expenses will remain with the Applicant and the Employer shall not be liable in any manner
whatsoever for the same or for any other costs or other expenses incurred by an Applicant in
preparation for submission of the Application, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the
Tendering Process.
4|Page
Volume 1
Bidding Guidelines
Section -I
Notice of Intimation to RFP -Tender Notice

5|Page
MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI

Approval Letter No XX
Notice Inviting Tenderer (NIT)
1. Consequent upon your selection as per e-tender RFQ (Bid Invitation No. XX) under public
notice No.XX dated XX, as an eligible pre-qualified Tenderer for participation in the second
stage of the Tendering Process (RFP) comprising submission of e-Packet A & technical e-
Packet B and commercial (e-Packet C & e-Packet C1) proposals (referred as “RFP”); you are
invited to submit the e-tender (Bid Invitation No. XX) for this project Goregaon Mulund Link
Road (GMLR).
2. In continuation to EOI-stage I, II & e-RFQ as above, the Municipal Corporation of Greater

Mumbai (MCGM) invites online e-RFP for second stage bidding process for the work of “The
Goregaon Mulund Link Road” on Design and Construction basis via International Competitive
Bid (ICB) through the e-tender process.
3. The selected Tenderer, who is either a company incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956
or undertakes to incorporate as such prior to execution of the Contract agreement (the
“Tenderers”) shall be responsible for designing, engineering, procurement and construction
of the Project under and in accordance with the provisions of a long - term Contract
agreement (the “Contract Agreement”) to be entered into between the Tenderers and the
Employer as part of the Tendering Documents pursuant hereto.
4. The assessment of actual costs for designing, engineering, procurement and construction of
the Project (the “Project Cost”) inclusive of all taxes, duties, GST will have to be made by the
Tenderers at this RFP stage.
5. The Employer shall receive Applications (“the tender”) pursuant to this RFP in accordance
with the terms set forth herein as modified, altered, amended and clarified from time to time
by the Employer, and all Applications shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with
such terms (including terms of RFQ, Bid Invitation No. XX) on or before the date specified for
submission of Applications (the “Application Due Date”)
6. Prior to making an Application, the Applicant (“the tenderer”) shall pay online through
payment gateway from e-wallet to the Employer a non-refundable sum of INR. 10,000+VAT
as the cost of the RFP Documents and process downloading. The Employer shall not entertain
any query or clarification from Applicants who fail to qualify.
7. The Applicants are advised to visit the site and familiarize themselves with the Project.
6|Page
8. All the conditions whatsoever stipulated in e-tender RFQ (Bid Invitation No. XX) till its final
set of modifications, as a part of tendering under public notice No. XX dated XX, are
mandatorily applicable for this RFP unless specifically added or amended by the Employer
(MCGM) herein.
9. Any queries or request for additional information concerning this RFP shall be submitted by
e-mail to the Engineer as below.
Applicants may obtain further information from -
Chief Engineer
Office of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),
India
Website: http://portal.mcgm.gov.in
10. All pre-qualified tenderers shall login with MCGM for e-tendering process on the above-
mentioned portal under “e- procurement”.
11. Detailed procedure for e-Tendering process is displayed under e-tender tab on MCGM
website. The tender documents may be downloaded from the MCGM Portal:
http://portal.mcgm.gov.in by clicking the links C-(collaboration) “Folder” in “MCGM
Documents”, which includes the RFP documents along with other relevant documents.
12. Although Applicant get qualified for one or more works, the Applicant (s)/ bidder(s) shall be
awarded two works as stated in Clause 4.5.8, Section II of this Volume, if they satisfy
individually all the package wise qualifying criteria as per RFQ/RFP. However, for award of
two packages, financial resources, solvency and bid capacity shall be aggregated for meeting
financial criteria of maximum two packages, considering the offer beneficial to the MCGM.
13. Tenderers are required to pay the EMD of INR XX through online gateway of Municipal
Corporation of Greater Mumbai and rest of INR XX in the form of Bank Guarantee (Valid for
180 days from the date of submission of the tender), on or before the end date and time of
submission specified in the tender, failing which, the Tenders shall be treated as not
submitted and any sort of submissions of such Tenderer shall not be considered.
14. On line EMD of INR XX including encashment of Bank Guarantee of INR XX paid by the
Tenderer shall be forfeited by MCGM, if the tenderer fails to furnish required information in
e-Packet-B after intimation is given to him.
7|Page
15. Key Details and Schedule of Submission are as follows: -
Sr.No. Particulars Schedule

1 Request for Proposal of the Goregaon
Mulund Link Road
2 Tender Security Amount INR XX Crore online and INR XX Crore in
(EMD) (Refundable) the form of bank guarantee (valid for 180
days from date of submission of the
tender) as per Annexure 4
3 Cost of Tender (Tender Fee) 10,000 + VAT
(Non-Refundable)
4 Contract Period XX days (Inclusive of monsoon)
5 Sale of e-RFP starts from 00.00.2017 From 16:00 hrs. onwards
6 Pre-RFP conference 00.00.2017 at 11:00 hrs.
7 Venue of Pre-RFP conference Office of the Municipal Commissioner or
the Additional Municipal Commissioner
(Projects) ,Municipal Head Office,
Mahapalika Marg, Fort, Mumbai-400001,
Maharashtra, India
Clarifications of queries: The re-qualified Up to 13:00 hrs. on 00.00.2017
tenderers have to download RFP
documents and raise all the queries
8 including technical, design etc. and shall
be submitted by e-mail to the Engineer
within stipulated time. Email Id:
che.gmlr@mcgm.gov.in
9 Last Date & Time of e-RFP Sale Up to or before 13:00 hrs. on 00.00.2017
10 Date & Time of uploading document in e-
Packet ‘A’, and Technical submission in e- Up to or before 13:00 hrs. on 00.00.2017
Packet ‘B’
11 End Date & Time of entire submission Up to or before 16:00 hrs. on
uploading with Commercial Proposal, e- 00.00.2017 (No Physical submission)
Packet ‘C’ and e-Packet ‘C1’, (Discount, if
any)
12 Date & Time of submission of Bank Up to or before 16:00 hrs. on
Guarantee of Tender Security Amount 00.00.2017(Physical Submission)
8|Page
Sr.No. Particulars Schedule

(EMD)in Physical Packet ‘A’ Office of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C)
13 Date & Time of Opening of e- Packet ‘A’, In the Office of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. &
Physical packet ‘A ‘and Technical e- R.C) From 16:30 hrs. on 00.00.2017
Packet‘B’
14 Date & Time of opening of e-RFP, e-Packet In the Office of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. &
‘C’ (Commercial Bid) and e-Packet ‘C1’ R.C)From 17:00 hrs. on 00.00.2017
(Discount, if any)
Note: - Any change in Venue of Pre-RFP conference will be published on

http://portal.mcgm.gov.in under Tab → Business → Tenders & Quotations → Tenders &
Quotations → Select Department → GMLR OR
(1) (URL: http://www.mcgm.gov.in/irj/portal/anonymous/qletenders_new) → Select
Department → GMLR OR
(2) (URL: http://www.mcgm.gov.in/irj/portal/anonymous/qlmProject) → Select
Department → GMLR
16. The dates and time for submission and opening of the packets are as above in the Key Details;
if there are any changes to the dates the same will be displayed on the MCGM Portal:
http://portal.mcgm.gov.in under Tabs mentioned above.
17. Tenderer should follow the special instruction to e-tendering provided in Instruction to the
Tenderers.
18. All bids shall be submitted online in e-tendering module only, unless instructed specifically.
Chief Engineer
MCGM, Mumbai
9|Page
Volume 1
Bidding Guidelines
Section -II
Instruction to Tenderers (ITT)

10 | P a g e
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS FOR e-TENDERING
1. The e-Tendering process of MCGM is enabled through its Portal ‘http://www.mcgm.gov.in’.

(URL: https://tender.mcgm.gov.in/sap/bc/gui/sap/its/bbpstart?sap-client=900)
2. All the information documents are published under the ‘e-Procurement’ section of MCGM
Portal.
3. Prequalified tenderers are required to login under the same registered details as at the
participation/submission in e-RFQ with MCGM for e-Tendering (RFP) process.
4. No manual offers sent by Post/Fax or in person shall be accepted against e-tenders. Physical
submissions are not allowed unless instructed specifically. Otherwise all such physical
submissions shall be treated as invalid offers and will not be considered.
5. Affixing of digital signature at any one place in the bid document while submitting the tender
shall be deemed to mean acceptance of the terms and conditions contained in the tender
document as well as confirmation of the tender offered by the Tenderer which shall include
acceptance of special directions/terms and conditions incorporated, if any;
6. All the documents, data uploaded and submitted by the Tenderer online shall be digitally
signed by the authorized signatory; the system will be prompting for digital signature
certificate. Thus, it is mandatory for the Tenderer to participating in the e-Tendering to
procure digital signature certificate of Class-2/Class-3 and ‘Company’ Type.
7. Digital Signature Certificates: Tenderer can procure digital signature certificate from any of
the certifying authorities in India.
8. The browser settings required for digitally signing the uploaded documents are listed in the
document ‘Browser Settings’ in the e-Procurement section.
9. In order to participate in an e-Tender, the registered Tenderers need to follow the steps given
below:
a) Open the e-Tendering application by clicking the link available in ‘e-Tendering’

section of MCGM Portal.
b) Download the ‘Browser Settings’ document and carry out the necessary setting and
root certificates installation as mention in the document. Please note that the
computer user should have administrative rights to the computer to be able to work
with e-Tendering application.
11 | P a g e
c) Login to the application with your credentials and follow the instructions given in the
document ‘User Manual for Vendors–Tendering Process’ which is available in the ‘e-
Procurement’ section of the MCGM Portal.
d) Make payment of tender fee online and the same can be done by accessing ‘Pay Tender
Fees’ option. By this, one will be able to pay the Tender fee through Payment Gateway.
If the transaction is successful, the Tenderer can register his interest to participate.
Without Registration one cannot quote for the Bid/Tender. Download all the
documents by clicking the links Folder “MCGM’s Documents”, which includes the
tender documents along with other relevant information documents.
e) Pay earnest money deposit (EMD) as per the instructions given in the Tender
Document.
f) Upload the tender (bid) documents as specified in this document, in the same folder
names “Tenderer’s Documents”. System will prompt for digital signature certificate
while uploading these documents.
g) The Tenderer shall download the relevant documents where the information is to be
filled in, take out the print, fill up the required information and sign, scan the
documents and upload the same in the folder named “Tenderer’s Documents”.
h) Before submission, Tenderers to verify/ensure that the documents are uploaded

properly.
i) Submit the Commercial bid (e-Packet C) by filling in the values on the screen. All the
inputs given on this screen need to be digitally signed and saved.
j) e-Packet A shall comprise Documents as per clause 19 (a) and 19 (b) and technical e-
Packet B shall comprise of the technical bids as per clause 19(c), and Commercial Bids
e-Packet C (Commercial Proposal) as per clause 19(d), and e-Packet C1 (Discount, if
any) as per clauses 19 a to e of Section-I of this Volume, and shall be submitted online
on or before the end date and time mentioned for submission of the bids via items 10,
11 & 12 of Schedule of Submission given in Clause 15 of NIT. Submission of e-Packets
A, B & C is mandatory, and that of e-Packet C1 is optional. Physical submissions are
not allowed unless instructed specifically.
k) All the documents shall be uploaded before the End Date and Time for uploading the
e-Packets mentioned in items 10, 11 & 12 of the Schedule of Submission (Clause 15,
NIT).
12 | P a g e
l) The bids can be modified by the Tenderer till the End Date and Time for Bid
Submission. However, if a new version of a document is to be uploaded, old version
shall be deleted. Tender creator (MCGM) starts Tender Opening of e-Packet A after
the End Date and Time specified. After which, the Tender Evaluation process starts.
m) Tenderer to ensure that his bid is submitted by verifying the ‘Bid Status’ of the tender
in the initial tenders listing screen as ‘Tender submitted’.
10. Intimations about any additional documents will be informed to Tenderers by e-mail through
their mail ID given in the RFQ, OR as mentioned in NIT Clause 15.0, unless if it is changed with
a written intimation. The Tenderers should also send reply e-mail acknowledging the receipt
of such documents within the stipulated time to the Email: che.gmlr@mcgm.gov.in
11. In case of any difficulty while uploading the data in the online process, the tenderer should
refer to the mail IDs given on the MCGM Portal, under the e-tendering tab. Also for any query
related to e-tender, System Analyst, MCGM should be contacted at Email: -
etendering.it@mcgm.gov.in; Tel No: - 022 24811275.
12. All Tenderers shall ensure that they have access to the latest available standard documents
published by other organizations including, but not limited to, FIDIC Conditions of Contract
for Plant and Design-Build, First Edition 1999 (General Conditions of Contract), all relevant
Indian Standards, the relevant IRC and MORTH publications (as applicable) for Roads and
Bridges, along with the concerned utility departments specifications (Electric supply
companies, Water supply companies ,Tele communication companies etc.).
The recommended design criteria and specifications shall be in accordance with the Codes
and Standards specified in this tender document and relevant Indian Codes of
Practices/Standards. Where the standards and specifications are not available within the
Indian Codes of Practices/Standards, the best international industrial practices/standards in
the industry shall be adopted with the approval of the Engineer. Where international
standards are specifically noted in the tender documents, they shall be followed. The entire
proposal including the design shall be robust and techno-economical.
13. The Contract shall be governed by the documents given in this Tender including Outline
Design Specifications, Outline Construction Specifications and the Employer’s Requirements
and the Employer’s Drawings and the Codes and Standards mentioned therein.
13 | P a g e
14. Tender Submissions
All Tenderers are hereby cautioned that the Tenders containing any material deviations or
reservations or conditions as described in Sub-Clause 4.4.1 of Section II of this Volume, shall
be considered as non-compliant, and the Employer reserves the right to disqualify such
Tenders.
15. The Tender prices shall be inclusive of all taxes, duties, cess, insurance, royalty for excavated
material etc., i.e. total cost to the Employer.
16. The Tenderer shall note that multiple Tenders, namely Contract Codes. -
_____________________________ and _________________ are also being invited along with this Tender.
The Tenderers are allowed to tender for more than one contract if they are prequalified, and
if they wish. Tenders may be awarded as stated in Clause 4.5.8 of Section II of this Volume.
17. If any additional information is requested by MCGM, then such additional information should
be e-mailed within the period stipulated. If such additional information is not received within
the stipulated time, for such lapses MCGM shall not be responsible and it will be treated as
Non-compliance of the Tenderer with respect to the said additional information.
18. Tenderers may note that the Employer shall reject a Tender if the Tenderer submits a
conditional tender, stipulates hedging condition/own conditions, and also stipulates a
validity period less than what is stated in the Tender.
19. MCGM reserves the right to reject any or all Tenders without assigning any reason. No
Tenderer shall have any cause of action or claim against MCGM for rejection of his Tender.
20. Following documents shall be uploaded by the Tenderers in the folder named “Vendors
Folders” in the online e-Tender:
(a) The e-Packet ‘A’ shall contain the following –
▪ A scanned copy of pre-qualification e-mail or letter of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.

& R.C) duly signed by the tenderer’s Authorized Signatory with company seal
shall be uploaded.
▪ A copy of the Bank Guarantee for the EMD shall be scanned and uploaded.
(b) The Physical Packet ‘A’ shall contain the following –
▪ The Original Bank Guarantee referred in 20 (a) above, in wax-sealed packets

clearly mentioning the Bid Invitation No. and Name of the Work shall be
submitted physically to the Office of the Engineer, before date and time specified
in the Schedule of Submission (Clause 15, NIT).
14 | P a g e
(c) The e-Packet “B” shall contain the following –
▪ Complete set of Technical Proposals for as per the Employer’s Requirements,

the Outline Design and Construction Specifications, the Employer’s Drawings
and Standard Forms as per ITT shall be submitted. A list of items to be included,
as a minimum is given in Clause 3.2.1 and Clause 4.1.4 of Section II of this
Volume. It is mandatory to submit e-Packet B.
(d) The e-Packet ‘C’ shall contain the following –
▪ The Tenderer shall submit the Commercial bid (e-Packet C) via online
“Commercial Quote” by filling Complete Financial Proposals. It is mandatory to
submit e-Packet C (Commercial Bid) in the system.
(e) e-Packet C1(Discount Quote)
▪ The tenderers at their wish may quote discounts as stated in Appendix FT-2, in
the e-Packet C1. There is no provision to input for “Discount Quote” for e- Packet
C1 into the system.
▪ The tenderers shall fill the above Discount Quote for combination of packages
depending upon the number of packages they are qualified for. The Discount
Quote shall be duly filled, signed by the Authorized Signatory with the
company’s authorized seal, scanned and uploaded as Commercial Bid e-Packet
C1 with encrypted secured RAR/WIN Zip file with file locking code for opening
by the tenderer. This secured file locking code shall be submitted in sealed
packet to the commercial bid opening authority at the time of opening of e-
Packet C. The file locking code shall be correct and the tenderers shall remember
and submit correctly, failing which the Employer shall not be responsible for
non-opening of Discount Quote (s) due to incorrect file locking code.
▪ The selection will be as per the “Least Cost Selection” method amongst the
commercial quotes. Subsequently, at the discretion of the Employer, the
selection for one or maximum two packages, if the tenderer is qualified, will be
considered as per Clause 4.5.8 of Section-II of this Volume, and through the
“Least Cost Selection” method beneficial to the Employer.
▪ “Discount Quote” will be opened only if a Tenderer is found lowest (L1) in two
packages.
21. If the information, data, design to be uploaded by tenderer in e-tender submission is of more
than 10 MB size, the files (information, data and design) shall be split into 9.5 MB or lesser
15 | P a g e
size and uploaded serially to form a sequential part of submission as understandable

document.
Note:
▪ e -Tendering process is covered under Information Technology ACT & Cyber Laws as
applicable. In e-tendering process some of the terms and its definitions are to be read
as under wherever it reflects in online e -Tendering process.
Start Date read as “Sale Date”
End Date read as “Submission Date”
Supplier read as “Contractor/ Tenderer”
Vendor read as “Contractor/Tenderer”
Vendor Quotation read as “Contractor’s Bid/ Tenderer’s Offer”
Purchaser read as “Department/MCGM”
▪ The terms ‘bid’ and ‘tender’ are used interchangeably in this document. The terms
‘bidder’ and ‘tenderer’ are also used interchangeably in this document. The term RFP
also means tender.
16 | P a g e
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

In connection with the Request for Proposal (RFP) document issues for " Design and
Construction of Twin Tube Road Tunnel including approach road at Goregaon
Mulund Link Road (GMLR), and as specified in Volume 3 - Employer’s requirements. The
name, identification, and number of lots (contracts) of this International Competitive
Bidding (ICB) process are specified in the BDS.
1.1 Relevant information and scope of the works
1.1.1 Key Relevant information and address for downloading of documents, correspondence
and submission of Tenders are provided in the Notice of Intimation to RFP.
More details are as follows:

(a) Period for which the Tender is to be kept valid and open, is 180 (One hundred eighty)
days from the date of submission of Tender. Tenderers shall unconditionally extend
the validity when intimated and warranted by the Employer, and if required in
exceptional cases.
(b) Time to commence the works, refer to Item 4 of Appendix FT-1 to Form of Tender, is
15 (Fifteen) days from the date of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
(c) Time for Completion of the Works, refer to Item 5 of Appendix FT-1 to Form of Tender
is 1461 (One Thousand Four Hundred Sixty-One) days inclusive of monsoon periods
from the Commencement Date.
1.1.2 The Permanent and Temporary works shall comprise the Design and Construction of
Tunnel including Bored and Cut and Cover Tunnels, road works etc. all as per the
Employer’s Requirements, the outline Design and Construction Specifications and the
Employer’s Drawings including but not limited to, the following:
a) Survey and Investigation including Soil Investigation, Topographic Survey, Existing
Building Survey, Utilities Investigation, Existing Water Wells Investigation as
necessary (information given in Volume 7 could be used as a reference); and
b) Site clearance, including tree felling, tree transplanting, and the fencing, barricading
and securing of the site areas and works areas as per norms; and
c) The demolition of existing buildings, which may or may not be as shown on the
drawings, the exact numbers and locations to be confirmed by the Contractor; and
d) Protecting existing buildings above tunnel alignments, and also adjacent to the
tunnel alignment (50m on either side from edge of the tunnel), which may or may
17 | P a g e
not be as shown on the drawings, the exact numbers and locations to be confirmed
by the Contractor; and
e) Twin Bored Tunnels of minimum 13.6 m internal diameter (finish) accommodating

carriageways for two lanes together with an emergency lane among others, all as
per the specified standards.
f) Cross passages complete with auxiliary services as per the International standards;
and
g) Cut and Cover Tunnel; and
h) Transition Ramp with clear glazed Stainless-Steel Roof with protection of crash
barriers; and
i) Auxiliary utilities systems for tunnels and cross passages including emergency
lighting and power; and
j) Supply and installation of power system support in tunnel; and
k) Cable trays and ducts in tunnels; and
l) Emergency and maintenance walkways and railings within tunnels; and
m) Drainage channels, sumps, pipes and pumps within tunnels and cross passages; and
n) Fire proofing and Finishes for tunnels including design and casting of segments; and
o) Protection and relocation of existing utilities; and
p) Traffic management and road works, both temporary and permanent including
diversions of roads and footpaths, temporary decking, pedestrian walkways, and
restoration of pavements and road facilities, etc.; and
q) Monitoring, protection, etc. for structures adjacent to and above the tunnels,
Monitoring, protection and /or re-provision, removal of existing water wells; and
r) All Temporary works necessary including tunnel segment casting yard and
procurement of equipment, including the tunnel boring machine; and
s) Fire detection and suppression system and all other control and safety services
within the tunnels; and
t) Make all provisions for accommodating the requirements for LV and MV supply
routes and cable galleries/cable ways/inserts to fix for all the cableways, or
equipment’s;
18 | P a g e
u) Supply, installation and testing of Pumps including pipes for drainage/sewerage;

and
v) Supply, installation, commissioning and testing of Mechanical Ventilation systems

including elements of the fire detection and firefighting systems as per the
international standards noted in the Specifications; and
w) Monitoring system for all equipment provided by this Contract; and
x) Design, manufacture, delivery and installation of signage systems including

uninterrupted communication facility through tunnels; and
y) Architectural works including finishes to Civil Works structures; and
z) Provision of intermodal transport facilities; and
aa) Survey instrumentation, ground treatment, ground and building monitoring, risk
analysis, settlement prediction, underpinning and protection to existing buildings
and structures wherever required, preventative and corrective actions, pre-
conditional surveys and reports;
bb) Construction and maintenance of new and existing roads and diversions, including
restoration to original condition; and
cc) Removal, storage and reinstatement of road furniture such as street lighting, traffic
signals, bus shelters/stands, footpaths including stone kerbs, boundary walls,
horticulture works, and any other work to restore the site to its original condition
as stated in the Contract; and
dd) Construction of road works; and
ee) All other works as stated in the Employer’s Requirements, the Outline Design and
Construction Specifications and the Employer’s Drawings.
ff) Any other work essential for any component as per the standards, the relevant IRC
and MORTH publications (as applicable) and norms with best international
industrial practices/specifications in conformity with Indian or international
codes.
gg) Design and construction of power supply facilities including for high voltage,
medium voltage, auxiliary power supply distribution, Plant Supervisory Control
and Data Acquisition (SCADA), UPC & DG Set and civil works for the DG set if any.
hh) All other allied works necessary as requirement of the project as per the tenderers
proposal in consonant with the Employer’s Requirements. Requirements of
19 | P a g e
various stake holders including government departments, specialist agencies or

institutions noted elsewhere in the tender documents shall be considered.
1.1.3 The following are some of works which are to be designed, supplied, installed, and
commissioned by the Contractor and shall co-ordinate all E&M requirements at the design
stage, during his construction and integrated testing activities. However, making
provisions for all their requirements, including, but not limited to, fixing points, etc. shall
be within the scope of this Contract.
(a) Interface with all adjacent and Interfacing Contractors employed by the Employer
(MCGM) at any point of time during construction;
(b) Traffic Management and Communication SCADA (TMCS) shall be part of a separate
tender and it shall be a common tender for all three packages. All associated enabling
civil works shall be part of this Contract.
1.1.4 The Scope of Work is also described in Volume 3.
1.2 Source of Funds
1.2.1 MCGM has earmarked funds towards eligible payments under the contract(s) for which
these Tendering Documents are issued.
1.2.2 MCGM will take appropriate measures for financing and resource mobilization.
1.3 Eligible Tenderer
1.3.1 Unless otherwise approved by the Employer, the Tenders for this Contract will only be
considered from those companies, corporation, partnerships, and Joint Ventures which
have been pre-qualified and invited to tender following the assessment of information
supplied during the Pre-Qualification (RFQ) process. The Tenderers shall submit a signed
certificate as contained in Annexure 2 of this ITT with their tender, which confirms that
the information submitted at the prequalification stage remains valid and that the
Tenderer continues to meet the prequalification requirements.
In addition, Tenderers are required to submit the following with their Tender;
(i) Information to fulfil the conditional prequalification requirements as stated in the

Tenderers Prequalification Letter from the Employer, if any.
1.3.2 The Employer may request Tenderers to clarify, the information submitted as part of their
20 | P a g e
Tender, during the course of the Tender evaluation process.
1.4 Qualifications of the Tenderer
1.4.1 The Tenderer, to qualify for award of Contract, shall submit written Powers of Attorney
authorizing the signatories of the Tender to commit the Tenderer as stated in RFQ.
1.4.2 Each Tenderer (each member in the case of a partnership or Joint Venture) is required to
confirm and declare, as stated in the Form of Tender, that no agent, middleman or any
intermediary has been, or will be, engaged to provide any services, or any other item or
work related to the award and performance of this Contract. The Tenderer will have to
further confirm and declare, as stated in the Form of Tender, that no agency commission
or any payment which may be construed as an agency commission has been, or will be,
paid and that the financial statements will not include any such amount. If the Employer
subsequently finds to the contrary, the Employer reserves the right to declare the
Tenderer as non-compliant, and declare any Contract null and void, if already awarded to
the Tenderer.
1.4.3 Canvassing or offer of an advantage or any other inducement by any person with a view
to influencing acceptance of a Tender is an offence under the laws of India and any such
action will result in the rejection of the Tender, in addition to other punitive measures.
1.5 Cost of Tendering
The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his
Tender and the Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the Tendering process.
1.6 Site Visits
1.6.1 The Tenderer is advised to visit and examine the Site of Works and its surroundings and
obtain for himself on his own responsibility all information that may be necessary for
preparing the Tender and entering into a contract for the proposed Works. The costs of
visiting the Site shall be borne by the Tenderer. It shall be deemed that the Tenderer has
undertaken a visit to the Site of Works and is aware of the site conditions and all other
relevant matters, prior to the submission of his Tender.
1.6.2 The Tenderer and any of his personnel will be granted permission by the Employer to
enter upon his premises and lands for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the
express condition that the Tenderer, and his personnel, will release and indemnify the
Employer and his personnel from and against all liability in respect thereof and will be
responsible for death or personal injury, loss of or damage to property and any other loss,
21 | P a g e
damage, costs and expenses incurred as a result of the inspection.
1.6.3 The Tenderer shall take note of the General Conditions of Contract Sub-Clause 4.10,
according to which the Tenderer shall be deemed to have taken into account all the Site
Data. The tenderer shall also consider the social and the cultural environment of India
that may affect his Tender or Works.
1.7 Site Information
1.7.1 Work Site
1.7.1.1 The project site is in Mumbai, the Capital of State of Maharashtra in India. The location of
the work and the general site particulars are shown in the General Arrangement Drawings
enclosed in Volume 6.
1.7.1.2 The proposed Works are in the vicinity of Sanjay Gandhi National Park (SGNP) close to
Film City, Goregaon.
1.7.1.3 The Contractor shall plan his works taking into account restrictions of approach to site, if
any, imposed by the local Authorities and availability of space and time.
1.7.2 General Climatic Condition
The climate of Mumbai is a tropical wet and dry climate. The high temperature in Mumbai
is approximately 30-33 degrees Celsius without changing dramatically throughout the
year. Since Mumbai faces the Arabian Sea, it does not experience extremely high or low
temperatures.
1.7.2.1 Summer season is from March to May, the South-West monsoon from May to mid-
October and the winter season is from Mid-October to February End.
1.7.2.2 Mean average annual rainfall in the area over a five-year period is of the order of 2100
mm, when about 80% of the annual rainfall occurs during May to October. The heaviest
rainfall recorded in a span of 24 hours is 944 mm.
1.7.2.3 Prevailing wind direction is from NW. Seasonal variation in the wind speed and
direction is given below:
Feb-May-NW direction- Speed Max. 62 to 102 kmph, Substantial 20 to 50 kmph
June-Sep- WNW direction- Speed Max. 62 to 102 kmph, Substantial 40 to 62 kmph
Oct-Jan -NNW direction- Speed Max. 40 to 60 kmph, Substantial 7 to 50 kmph
1.7.2.4 Cyclones may occur in the period of May/June or October/November. The storms are
mostly confined to the months of June and September, and the months of July and August
are almost free of storms. The last severe cyclonic storm having winds of above 48 knots
22 | P a g e
was experienced in 1982. Occasionally, sudden high winds also occur during the fine
weather periods, from the NE direction.
1.7.2.5 The diurnal range of humidity variation is around 50% maximum is 95% in July and
minimum 86% around Jan around the year. The visibility, in general, on the West Coast,
above latitude 160 N mist sometimes develops during sunrise but disperses thereafter.
At Mumbai from November to March smog hangs over the land, obscuring everything in
view. This happens only for short periods most often shortly after sunrise but also
occasionally in the evenings. Visibility is generally good for most part of the year.
1.7.2.6 The Contractor shall collect all necessary information regarding climate condition, wind,
rainfall, cyclone, humidity, visibility, high tide & low tide information etc. from the
approved sources, and design and construct accordingly.
1.7.3 Seismic Zone
Mumbai falls in Seismic Zone III.
2. TENDER DOCUMENTS
2.1. Content of Tender Document
2.1.1. Tender Documents, as listed in Page 3 of the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT), have been
prepared for the purpose of inviting Tenders for Contract Code XX, as more particularly
described in these Tender Documents.
2.1.2. The Tenderer is expected to examine carefully the contents of each document in the Tender
Documents. Failure to comply with the requirements of the Tender Documents will be at
the Tenderer’s own risk.
2.1.3. The Tenderer shall not make or cause to be made any alteration, erasure or obliteration to
the text of the Tender Documents.
2.2. Content of Supporting Documents

2.2.1. The Geotechnical Investigation Reports, Topographic Report, Traffic Studies as well as
Environmental and Safety Reports and other Reference Documents, are included in Volume
7 of the Tender Documents. The contents of these reports are for general information only
and any interpretation of the results shall be construed as opinions only and not as
representations or warranties as to the actual site or sub-soil conditions. The Tenderer’s
attention is specifically drawn to Sub-Clause 2.2.3 of this ITT.
2.2.2. The Tenderer shall note the existence of over ground, at grade and underground structures,
utilities and infrastructure in the near vicinity of the Works to be maintained, repaired,
diverted, replaced and constructed as directed by the Engineer.
23 | P a g e
2.2.3. The accuracy or reliability of the documents and reports referred to in this Sub-Clause 2.2
of this ITT and of any other information supplied, prepared or commissioned at any time by
the Employer or others in connection with the Contract, is not warranted. The Tenderer's
attention is drawn to Sub-Clause 4.10 of General Conditions of Contract in this regard. The
Tenderer should visit, examine and assess the Site including working conditions and will be
deemed to have satisfied himself of the risks and obligations under the Contract.
2.2.4. This RFP includes statements, which reflect various assumptions and assessments arrived
at by the Employer in relation to the Project. Such assumptions, assessments and
statements do not purport to contain all the information that each Applicant may require.
This RFP may not be appropriate for all persons, and it is not possible for the Employer, its
employees or advisors to consider the investment objectives, financial situation and
particular needs of each party who reads or uses this RFP. The assumptions, assessments,
statements and information contained in this RFP may not be complete, accurate, adequate
or correct. Each Applicant should therefore, conduct its own investigations and analysis and
should check the accuracy, adequacy, correctness, reliability and completeness of the
assumptions, assessments, statements and information contained in this RFP, and obtain
independent advice from the appropriate sources as required.
2.2.5. Information provided in this RFP to the Tenderer(s) is on a wide range of matters, some of
which may depend upon interpretation of law. The information given is not intended to be
an exhaustive account of statutory requirements and should not be regarded as a complete
or authoritative statement of law. The Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy
or otherwise for any interpretation or opinion on law expressed herein.
2.3. Clarification of Tender Documents

2.3.1. The Tenderer shall check the pages of all documents against page numbers given in the
Index to each Volume, and in the event of discovery of any discrepancy, the Tenderer shall
inform the Employer forthwith.
2.3.2. Should the Tenderer for any reason whatsoever, be in doubt about the meaning of anything
contained in the NIT, Tender Documents or the extent of detail in the Employer's
Requirements, Outline Specifications and Tender Drawings, the Tenderer shall seek
clarification from the Employer, not later than the last date of seeking clarification given in
Clause 15 Key Details and Schedule of submission in the Notice of Intimation to Tender. Any
such clarification, together with all details on which clarification had been sought, will be
copied to all Tenderers without disclosing the identity of the Tenderer seeking clarification.
All communications between the Tenderer and the Employer shall be conducted through e-
mails.
24 | P a g e
2.3.3. Except for any such written clarification by the Employer, which is expressly stated to be by
way of an addendum to the documents referred to in Sub-Clause 2.4.1 of this ITT, and/or
for any other document issued by the Employer, which is similarly described, no written or
verbal communication, representation or explanation by any employee of the Employer
shall be taken to bind or fetter the Employer under the Contract.
2.3.4. The Tenderer may be required to amplify, explain and develop the Tenderer's Technical
Proposals in substantially greater detail during the Tender evaluation period such that they
may be confirmed as complying clearly with all aspects of Volume 3 Employer's
Requirements and in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.4.2 of this ITT, and can be incorporated
into the Contract.
2.4. Amendment to Tender Documents

2.4.1. The Tenderer is advised that further instructions to Tenderers, corrigenda and addenda
may be issued during the Tender Period by Amendments to the Tender documents. Without
prejudice to the general order of precedence prescribed by Sub-Clause 1.5 of the General
Conditions of Contract, as amended by Clause 1.1 of the Particular Conditions of Contract,
the provisions in any such addenda shall take priority over the Notice of Intimation to
Tender and Tender Documents previously issued. The Tenderer shall confirm receipt of
such documents and list them in the Tender Submittal.
2.4.2. The Tenderer should note that there might be aspects of his Tender and/or the evaluation
documents submitted with the Tender that will necessitate further discussion and
clarification. It is intended that any aspect of the said evaluation documents and any
amendments or clarification, which may have a contractual effect, will be incorporated into
the Contract either:
▪ by way of Part II Particular Conditions of Contract to be prepared by the Employer

and agreed in writing by the Tenderer prior to and conditional upon acceptance of
the Tender; or
▪ by the Tenderer submitting, at the written request to the Employer, documents

which are expressly stated to form part of the Tender, whether requested before
or after submission of the documents forming part of the Tender and whether as
supplements to or amended versions of such documents.
25 | P a g e
3. PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF TENDERS

3.1. Language
The language of the bid shall be English (India). Documents/information in any other
language shall be accepted only if accompanied by Translations certified by Consulates /
Embassies in case of foreign Tenderers or gazette officers conversant with language of
the document. Only English text shall be governing in e-tendering.
3.2. Format of Bid

3.2.1. The Tenderer shall include and submit Technical Proposal as part of e-Packet B, the
documents that are identified under clause 4.1.4 of this Section II. These documents ought
to be used for the purposes of evaluating and analyzing the Tender but will not form part of
the Contract unless the same shall have been expressly incorporated into the Contract in
accordance with Sub-Clauses 2.4.1 or 2.4.2 of this Section II.
3.2.2. There is no exemption of Custom/Excise duties, taxes, GST, Cess or other levies and
royalties for excavated material for this Project. In case, if there are exemptions or
concessions in taxes or rate structure in future, the same shall be passed on to the Employer.
3.2.3. The Tenderer shall quote all prices, rates and costs inclusive of all taxes, duties etc.
3.2.4. The Form of Tender, which shall be completed by the Tenderer by completing/filling in the
blanks, shall be signed by a duly authorized and empowered representative of the Tenderer
with company’s seal. If the Tenderer comprises of a partnership, or a Joint Venture, the
Form of Tender shall be signed by a duly authorized representative of each member or
participant thereof. Signatures on the Form of Tender shall be witnessed and dated. Copies
of relevant Powers of Attorney and a copy of the agreement entered into by the Joint
Venture members shall be attached.
3.2.5. Tenders submitted by a Joint Venture of two or more firms (as per RFQ) as partners shall
confirm that all the information submitted as part of their Pre-Qualification application is
still relevant for each Joint Venture partner and that no changes or revisions have occurred,
refer to the Form to be completed in Annexure 2.
3.3. Sub-Contractor for Tunnel Ventilation and E&M Works

3.3.1. The tenderer should appoint a Sub-Contractor meeting qualification criterio after
obtaining approval of the Employer/ Engineer or Engineer’s Authorized Representative
for executing the specialized work of “Design, execution of Tunnel Ventilation Fire
Protection and E&M Works”.
3.3.2. The Tender shall furnish the details of the Sub-Contractor, his experience in the relevant
field as per Annexure 8.
26 | P a g e
3.3.3. The Employer will evaluate the Sub-Contractor’s Design and Construction Experience
based on his past performance and capability of executing similar works as per Technical
Specifications provided in Volumes 3 & 4.
3.4. Quality Assurance and Quality Plan

3.4.1. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a Quality Assurance System in accordance with
Appendix 6 of Volume 3 Employer's Requirements for design, construction procedures and
the interfaces between him and the Interfacing Contractors. This Quality Assurance system
shall be applied without prejudice to, or without in any way limiting, any Quality Assurance
Systems which the Tenderer already maintains.
3.4.2. The Tenderer shall submit Appendix FT-3 of the Form of Tender as part of his Tender
Outline Quality Assurance and Quality Plans illustrating the intended means of compliance
with Appendix 6 of Volume 3 Employer's Requirements. The Outline Quality Assurance and
Quality Plan shall contain sufficient information to clearly demonstrate the proposed
method of achieving the Tenderer's quality objectives with regard to the requirements of
the Contract.
3.5. Outline Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Plan
3.5.1 The Tenderer shall submit Appendix FT-4 of the Form of Tender as part of its Tender an
Outline Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Plan which shall contain sufficient
information to demonstrate clearly the Tenderer's proposals for achieving effective and
efficient health, safety & environment procedures. The Outline Occupational Health,
Safety and Environment Plan should include an outline of the safety procedures and
regulations to be developed and the mechanism by which they will be implemented for
ensuring safety as required by Appendix 17 of Volume 3 Employer's Requirements,
Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Plan, and as stated in GCC Clause 6.7, and PCC
Clause 6.19.
3.5.2 The Outline Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Plan shall be headed with a
formal statement of policy in relation to health, safety & environment and shall be
sufficiently informative to define the Tenderer's safety plans and set out in summary an
adequate basis for the development of the Site Occupational Health, Safety and
Environment Plan to be submitted in accordance with GCC Clause 6.7 and PCC Clauses 4.8,
4.18, 4.22 & 6.19.
3.5.3 The Tenderer may be requested to amplify, explain or develop his Outline Occupational
Health, Safety and Environmental Plan and to provide more details with a view to reaching
27 | P a g e
provisional acceptance of such a plan during the Tender Evaluation process.
3.6. Tenderer's Technical Proposals

3.6.1. The Tenderer shall submit as part of his Tender, the Tenderer's Technical Proposals as
described in Clauses 3.2.1, 3.5.2 and Annexure 3 of this ITT.
3.6.2. The Tenderer shall be required to amplify, explain and develop the Tenderer's Technical
Proposals in substantially greater detail during the Tender evaluation period such that they
may be confirmed as complying clearly with Volume 3 Employer's Requirements and in
accordance with Sub-Clause 2.4.2 of this ITT, can be incorporated into the Contract.
3.7. Project Management Plan

3.7.1. In order to ensure satisfactory execution, achievement of Key Dates and timely completion
of the Works, the Tenderer shall submit an outline Project Management Plan as part of his
Tender. This Plan, in co-ordination with the Tender Programme, shall clearly demonstrate
the Tenderer’s proposed management system, methods, procedures, processes,
organization, sequences of activities etc., required to meet the Key Dates and the
Completion Date. A narrative shall describe the sequence, nature and inter-relationship of
the main activities including timing for exchange of information.
3.7.2. Within 90 days of the commencement Date of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a
detailed Project Management Plan (works programme), based on his outline Project
Management Plan submitted as part of his Tender, which shall be subject to a Notice to
proceed by the Employer. The Employer has the right to require necessary amendments to
ensure that Key Dates will be met and that the requirements for the activities of the
Interfacing Contractors have been catered for.
3.8. Outline Tender Programme and Proposed Design Submission and Construction
Programmes
3.8.1. The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender, an Outline Tender Programme, including a
narrative, which shall indicate how the Tenderer intends to organise and carry out the
Works and achieve Stages and complete the whole of the Works by the appropriate Key
Dates. Detailed requirements for the Outline Tender Programme are set out in Annexure 1
to these Instructions to Tenderers and Appendix 4 of Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements.
3.8.2. The Outline Tender Programme shall be prepared in terms of weeks from the Date for
Commencement of the Works.
3.8.3. The Outline Tender Programme shall not in any event be construed as a submission of the
Works Programme under GCC Clause 8.3.
3.8.4. The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender his proposed Outline Design Submission
28 | P a g e
Programme, including a narrative, to cover the Design Phase. Such proposed programme
shall:
▪ be consistent with the Tender Programme and accord with Appendix 4 of Volume 3
Employer's Requirements;
▪ Make adequate allowance for periods of time for review by authorities whose
approval is necessary;
▪ Include a schedule identifying, describing, cross-referencing and explaining the

Design Packages and Submissions which the Tenderer intends to submit;
▪ take due account of the design co-ordination interface periods during which the
Contractor shall be required to undertake and complete all aspects of design co-
ordination with Interfacing Contractors if any; engaged in the design of the Project
such that each contractor can complete his co-ordinate design/construction in the
knowledge that such design will be compatible and co-ordinate with others and
allowing adequate time for the Employer issuance of a Notice to proceed.
The proposed Outline Design Submission Programme submitted at the time of Tender shall
be modified and developed as necessary to incorporate the Employer's programme
requirements during the submission of works programme.
3.8.5. The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender his proposed Outline Construction Programme,
including a narrative, to cover the Construction Phase. Such proposed programme shall
include the following:
▪ Tender Programme shall be prepared using software, Primavera latest version
▪ Key Milestones must be linked to the proper Activities of Tender Outline Programme
▪ Tender Program should cover the Detail Design Schedule as per the Key Milestone
dates
▪ Logistics plan and programme of for all the Plant and Equipment, pre cast elements,
material need to be submitted along with programme.
▪ Tender Programme should be correlated with the Construction Methods and Logistics
Programme
▪ Recourses Chart and Productivity Assumption Narrative shall be submitted along

with the Tender Programme.
The proposed Outline Construction Programme submitted at the time of Tender shall be
modified and developed as necessary to incorporate the Employer's Key Dates
29 | P a g e
requirements during the submission of the works programme.
3.8.6. The Tenderer's attention is drawn to the requirements of PCC Clause 8.3 of Part II Particular
Conditions of Contract and Sub-Clauses A7, A8, C5 to C10 inclusive of Volume 3 Employer's
Requirements and the requirements that the proposed Initial Works Programme and
Design Submission Programme shall be submitted within 90 days of the Commencement
Date respectively. However, the Tenderer should note that he may be required to amplify,
explain and develop his Outline Tender Programme and the proposed Outline Design
Submission Programme prior to any award of Contract.
3.8.7. The tenderer should furnish the details of the Lead Designers (Detailed Design Consultant)
whose names are submitted in RFQ with their past experience in similar works of detailed
design. This submission will be evaluated along with the Technical proposal for their
capacity to undertake the work of Lead Designer. On award of the Contract to the successful
tenderer, the Employer/ the Engineer or the Engineer’s Authorized Representative will
approve one of the Lead Designers proposed by the Tenderer, whom the Contractor will
appoint within 30 days of receipt of approval. The Employer / the Engineer or the
Engineer’s Authorized Representative’s decision will be final in choosing and approving one
of the competent Lead Designer from the list of Lead Designers proposed by the Tenderer.
3.9. Manufacture, Installation and Methods

Deleted
3.10. Operation and Maintenance

3.10.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the Works, until the issuance of the
Taking-Over Certificate and for the provision of relevant maintenance manuals and
drawings.
3.10.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good any and all defects of materials and
workmanship, in the Works during the Defects Liability Period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site during the construction
phase of the Contract, until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site during the construction
phase of the Contract, until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
The Contractor shall operate and maintain the following facilities till the end of the
Defects Liability Period:
• Mechanical Ventilation for Tunnels
• Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) related to Plant
30 | P a g e
• Providing Interface of SCADA with MCGM’s Disaster Control Room
3.10.3. UPS & DG Set
3.11. Sub-Contracts
3.11.1. The terms and conditions of sub-contracts and/or suppliers and the payments due to them
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in tune with this contract.
3.11.2. The Contractor shall ensure that any warranties or guarantees from subcontractors and/or
suppliers, still in force at the expiry of the Contract Period or termination of the Contract,
are capable of being assigned to the Employer/ the Engineer.
3.11.3. The Terms and Conditions of the sub-contract are the sole prerogative of the Contractor and
are deemed to be included in the Lump Sum Price.
3.11.4. The sub-contractor shall only be appointed with the prior approval of the Employer/ the
Engineer.
3.12. Proposals for Use and Reinstatement of Work Areas.

3.12.1. The Tenderer shall note the requirements of the Land Acquisition Act 2008 as amended
time to time
3.12.2. The Tenderer shall note the provisions contained in Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements –
Construction relating to Works Areas.
3.12.3. The Tenderer shall show, in outline, his proposed site layouts for:
▪ accommodation and other facilities.
▪ fabrication and storage areas.
▪ concrete batching plants.
The Tenderer shall indicate his proposals for the provision of utility services to his Work
Site(s).
The Contractor will be fully responsible for the provision of all utility services necessary for
the construction and completion of the Works as described in Appendix 8 of Volume 3
Employer's Requirements.
3.13. Financial
3.13.1. The Financial Pricing Document is included in Volume 8. The Tenderer shall complete the
Document in accordance with the instructions given therein and elsewhere in these Tender
Documents.
31 | P a g e
3.13.2. The Tenderer shall submit as part of the Financial Packets, a signed certificate, as contained
in Annexure 2 of this ITT, that the information submitted at the Prequalification stage
remains valid, as per Clause 1.3.1 of this ITT.
3.13.3. The Tenderer is to note the Key Dates given in Appendix 2B of Volume 3 Employer’s
Requirements. These are to be adhered to strictly, failing which Penalty for not achieving
Key Dates as per item 36 of Appendix FT-1 to the Form of Tender of this ITT shall be applied.
3.14. Currencies of Tender

3.14.1. The Tenderer shall quote the price for the Works, including taxes, royalties, duties, cess,
Octroi/ Entry Tax, and other levies including new taxes, e.g. GST etc. as amended by the
Government Authority, in Indian Rupees.
3.14.2. Interim payments will be certified and paid in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause
14 of the General Conditions of Contract and Clause Nos. 14.2 to 14.9 of the Particular
Conditions of Contract. All payments and deductions made by the Employer shall be in
Indian Rupees.
3.15. Tender Validity

The Tender shall be valid for a period of 180 (one hundred and eighty) days from the Date
of Submission of the Tenders. In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original
Tender validity period, the Employer may request that the Tenderers to extend the period
of validity for a specified additional period. The request and the responses thereto shall be
made by e-mail. A Tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting his Tender Security.
A Tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his Tender
but will be required to extend the validity of his Tender Security for the period of the
extension, at no additional cost to the Employer.
3.16. Tender Security

3.16.1. On line Payment: The Tenderer shall submit acknowledgment for having paid the Tender
Security (EMD) with his Tender, as per the sums stated in Item 2 of Key Details of the NIT.
Tenderer are required to pay the above EMD of INR INRXX through online gateway of
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, on or before the end date & time of submission
of tender in e-tendering system, failing which, the Tender shall be treated as non-submitted
and any sort of the submissions of such Tenderer shall not be considered.
Tenderers are requested to keep sufficient amount in their e-wallet to facilitate EMD
payments
3.16.2. Physical Submission: In addition to the online payment of EMD as mentioned in 3.16.1
above, the tenderers shall submit Bank Guarantee (valid for 180 days from the date of
32 | P a g e
submission) for rest of the amount of EMD of INR XX on or before the date & time of
submission specified in Clause 15.0, Notice of Intimation to RFP, to the Office of the Chief
Engineer (CTI & RC),Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near
National Park, Borivali, Mumbai-400 066, Maharashtra, India.
Failing 3.16.1 & 3.16.1 above shall be treated as Non-submittal of the tenders.
3.16.3. The tenderer is required to furnish Bank Guarantee for the amount stated in Item 2 of Key
Details of the NIT towards EMD. The Bank Guarantee shall be in INR, from a Scheduled Bank
in India (meaning a Bank which has been included in the second schedule of Reserve Bank
of India Act 1934 including RBI approved Scheduled Commercial Foreign Banks) in the form
given in the Annexure 4 to this Volume. The bank guarantee shall be valid for 180 days from
the date of submission of the tender.
3.16.4. A scanned copy of the Bank Guarantee towards EMD shall be submitted by uploading in e-
Packet A and the original Bank Guarantee shall be submitted as specified above in 3.15.1
3.16.5. Any Tender not accompanied by an acceptable Tender Security (EMD) shall be considered
as non-complaint by the Employer/Engineer and rejected. The Technical package and
financial package shall not be processed further.
3.16.6. The Tender Security shall be forfeited, and Bank Guarantee shall be en-cashed:
▪ if tenderer becomes non-responsive or fails to furnish required information in e-

Packet-B even after intimation is given to him,
▪ if the Tenderer withdraws his Tender during the period of Tender validity specified
in the Form of Tender,
▪ if the Tenderer having been notified of the acceptance of his Tender by the Employer
during the period of Tender validity,
a) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Guarantee and Contract Deposit;

and/or
b) fails or refuses to enter into a Contract within the time limit specified.
3.17. Performance Guarantee, Undertaking and Warranties

3.17.1. If the Tenderer comprises of a partnership or Joint Venture, each member or participant
will be required to execute the Guarantees, Undertakings and Warranties.
3.17.2. The Tenderer should note that in the event of award, all Guarantees are required to be
executed prior to the signing of the Contract.
3.18. Labour
33 | P a g e
The Tenderer's attention is especially drawn to Sub-Clause 6 of Part 1 General Conditions

of the Contract in relation to the responsibility of the Contractor for obtaining an adequate
supply of labour and complying with the statutory Employment Conditions and all clauses
of labour given in the Particular Conditions of the Contract.
3.19. Sharing with the Other Contractors

The Tenderer's attention is drawn to the requirement that access to the Site or parts of the
Site will, from time to time, have to be shared with Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing
Agencies and their Contractors carrying out works on, or in the vicinity of the Site including,
without limitation, works relating to the Project Contractors, Utility Undertakers or
Government Authorities or other statutory bodies.
3.20. Insurance
The Tenderer's attention is drawn to the provisions contained in Clause 18 of Part I General
Conditions of Contract as well as Clauses 18.1 to 18.5 of Part II Particular Conditions of the
Contract, and item 27 of Appendix FT-1 Contract Data.
3.21. Request for Clarification and Enquiries and Addenda

3.21.1. Pre-RFP Conference shall be held on the date and time specified in the Schedule of
Submission (Clause 15, NIT). However, the tender queries shall be submitted to the Office
of the Chief Engineer as specified via e-mail within the stipulated time prior to Pre-RFP
Conference.
3.21.2. The questions raised by all the Tenderers and the responses given, will be transmitted to
all purchasers of the Tender Documents. Any modification of the Tender Documents listed
in Sub-Clause 2.4 of this ITT which may become necessary as a result of these questions
shall be made by the Employer / the Engineer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum
pursuant to Sub-Clause 2.4 of this ITT. At any time prior to the Submission Deadline, the
Employer may issue an Addendum giving sufficient time by the means set out in ITT to all
Tenderers who have received the Tender Documents, to amend the Tender Documents.
Tenderers shall immediately acknowledge the receipt of each such Addendum and ask for
clarifications if any via email addressed to the Contact Person. Any such Addendum shall
then become part of the Tender Documents and shall be treated as such by the Tenderer.
No statement issued or made by the Employer or its representatives, whether orally or in
writing, during the Tender period shall have any contractual validity unless they are
included in an Addendum on MCGM portal.
3.21.3. The Tenderer shall incorporate any Addenda to the Tender Documents issued in
accordance with these Instructions to Tenderers into its e-Tender Submission and the
34 | P a g e
Tenderer shall acknowledge issued Addenda in the Letter of Tender.
3.21.4. Enquiries and responses will be supplied to all Tenderers without identifying the source of
the enquiry.
Tenderers may submit requests for revision to the Tender Documents and, in particular,
to the Contract, within the stipulated time. Tenderers shall not submit requests for
revision or comments on the Tender Documents as part of their e-Tender Submission.
Requests for revisions or comments on the Tender Documents are to be provided in a
table form with columns for document name, relevant section numbers, proposed
changes, and rationale in a separate column for the proposed changes. The Employer is
not obliged to respond to each comment made by the Tenderers, and the Employer is not
obliged to provide all the comments made by Tenderers to the other Tenderers. If the
Employer accepts a comment, or part of a comment, and that acceptance requires a
change to the Tender Documents, the Employer/the Engineer shall implement that
change by issuing an Addendum
The above ITT shall apply unless otherwise notified by the Employer/the Engineer in
writing during the Tender period.
3.22. Late or Delayed Tenders

3.22.1. Being e-tender, the Tenderer will not be able to upload the Tender submissions beyond the
date and time specified in Clause 15, Key Details of NIT. Tenders must be uploaded by the
Tenderer on or before the date and time specified in the Key Details of NIT. And the
Employer/the Engineer shall not be responsible for any kind of delays. The Employer/the
Engineer may, at his discretion, extend the deadline for submission of Tenders by issuing
an amendment in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.4 of this ITT, in which case all rights and
obligations of the Employer and the Tenderer previously subject to the original deadline
will thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.
3.22.2. The questions raised by all the Tenderers and the responses given, will be transmitted to
all purchasers of the Tender Documents. Any modification of the Tender Documents listed
in Sub-Clause 2.4 of this ITT which may become necessary as a result of these questions
shall be made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to
Sub-Clause 2.4 of this ITT. At any time prior to the Submission Deadline, the Employer may
issue an Addendum giving sufficient time by the means set out in ITT to all Tenderers who
have received the Tender Documents, to amend the Tender Documents. Tenderers shall
immediately acknowledge the receipt of each such Addendum and ask for clarifications if
any via email addressed to the Contact Person. Any such Addendum shall then become part
of the Tender Documents and shall be treated as such by the Tenderer. No statement issued
35 | P a g e
or made by the Employer/Engineer or its representatives, whether orally or in writing,

during the Tender period shall have any contractual validity unless they are included in an
Addendum on MCGM portal.
3.22.3. The Tenderer shall incorporate all Addenda to the Tender Documents issued in accordance
with these Instructions to Tenderers into its e-Tender Submission and the Tenderer shall
acknowledge issued Addenda in the Letter of Tender.
36 | P a g e
4. TENDER OPENING AND EVALUATION

4.1. Tender Opening
4.1.1. Tests of responsiveness
Prior to evaluation of tenders, the Authority shall determine whether each tenderer is
responsive to the requirements of the conditions in this tender document. A tender shall be
considered responsive only if:
▪ it is received as per format specified in Clause 3.2;
▪ it is received as e-tender within the due date including any extension thereof;
▪ it is submitted as stipulated in Clauses 3.1 to 3.12;
▪ it is accompanied by the Power of Attorney as specified in Clause 1.4.1 of Section II

of ITT and in the case of Joint Venture, the Power of Attorney as specified in Clause
3.2.4 and RFQ documents;
▪ it contains all the information and documents (complete in all respects) as

requested in this tender Annexures 1 to 8, Form of Tender - Appendices FT-1 to FT
- 5;
▪ it is accompanied by the Joint Tendering Agreement (for Joint Venture), specific to

the Project, as stipulated in Clause 3.2.5;
▪ it does not contain any condition or qualification.
4.1.2. e-Technical Packet: The Tenderer is advised that the Employer's policy in respect of
comparison of Tenders is that the Technical Packets will be opened and assessed to
determine their acceptability and responsiveness to the Employer's Requirements, Outline
Specifications and Tender Drawings. Unacceptable and unresponsive Tenders will be
rejected, and the corresponding Financial Packet will not be processed. Only after the
technical evaluation has been completed, the financial Packets will be opened for those
technical Packets found to be acceptable.
A responsive Tender is one, which conforms to all the terms, conditions and specifications
of the Tender Documents without material deviation or reservations or which does not
include conditions, exceptions, exclusions and qualifications.
A material deviation or reservation is one which affects in any substantial way the scope,
quality, performance or administration of the works to be undertaken by the Tenderer
under the Contract, or which limits in any substantial way, the Employer's rights or the
Tenderers obligations under the Contract as provided for in the Tender Documents and/or
is of an essential condition, the rectification of which would affect unfairly the competitive
37 | P a g e
position of other Tenderers presenting responsive tenders at a reasonable price.
The decision of the Employer as to which of the Tenders are not substantially responsive
shall be final and binding.
4.1.3. e-Packet Opening
(i) e-Packet ‘A’ and Physical Submission:
e-Packet ‘A’ and physical submission shall start at the specified Date & Time as
mentioned in Schedule.
Firstly, the online e-Packet ‘A’ shall be verified for following contents –
1) A scanned copy of pre-qualification e-mail or Letter of the Chief Engineer (CTI

& RC) duly signed by the tenderer’s Authorized signatory with company seal
2) A scanned copy of the Bank Guarantee (Valid for 180 days from date of
submission) for the EMD.
And
3) The Original Bank Guarantee referred in (2) above submitted physically in

sealed packets clearly mentioning the Bid Invitation No. & Name of the Work.
(ii) The Technical e-Packet “B” shall contain the following – Complete set of
Technical Proposals as per the Employer’s Requirements, the Outline Design and
Construction Specifications, the Employer’s Drawings and Standard Forms as per
ITT shall be submitted. A list of items to be included, as a minimum is given in
Clauses 3.2.1 & 4.1.4 of Section II and Annexure 3 of this Volume. It is mandatory
to submit Technical e-Packet B. To assist in the evaluation, MCGM may ask for
clarifications on the submitted proposals. The request and the response to
clarification will be communicated via e-mail and change in Price or Specification
of the offer is not permitted in e-tendering. The Tenderers found responsive shall
be asked to produce the original documents, of the scanned copies which are
uploaded, if required. The original documents shall be produced for verification
in stipulated time from the date of intimation.
Technical packets will be evaluated as per Technical Merit Criteria. Only the
tenderer who qualifies in the Technical Merit Criteria (Clause 4.1.4 of this Section)
will be considered as responsive for opening the corresponding financial bid, i.e.
e-Packet ‘C’.
Any effort by any prospective firm to influence the MCGM’s processing of
38 | P a g e
proposals and/or award decisions may result in rejection of the proposal of that
firm.
4.1.4. The Technical proposal in the e-Tender will be evaluated for the Technical Merit
Sr.
Technical Merit Criteria Reference**
No.
Overall Tender Submission
1 General Curable
Quality
Drawings (Layouts, GAD,
Volume 6, Annexure 3
2 Preliminary design and typical Curable
of ITT
detail drawings)
Technical Proposals with Section B-Volume 3,
3 Curable
preliminary Design Calculations Annexure 3 of ITT
Tunnel work shall be
by TBM, and 13.6m
diameter twin tunnel.
Deviation is non-
curable.
Modification to
Compliance of Volume 3 Horizontal alignment
Not
4 Employer’s Requirements Clause 3.6 of ITT is non-curable.
Curable
including Scope of Works Any deviation from
proposed
development
boundary for road or
any other work
mentioned is non-
curable.
Any deviation to
design parameters,
Validating Employer’s Outline
Not design criteria, design
5 Design and Construction Volume 4 & Volume 5
Curable load and material
Specifications
specification will be
non-curable.
E&M and Tunnel Ventilation Annexure 8 of ITT,
6 Curable
Works Sub-Contractor Clause 3.3 of ITT
Clause 3.8.7of ITT
7 Lead Designer (DDC) Curable
Annexure 9 of ITT
8 Project Management Plan Clause 3.7 of ITT Curable
Outline Tender Programme and
Annexure 1 of ITT, Deviation from
Proposed Design Submission
Volume 1 & Not completion time and
9 Programme and Proposed
Appendix 2B of Curable key dates will be non-
Construction Programme & Key
Volume 3 curable.
Dates confirmation
Deviation from
environmental
Control of Environmental Impacts Annexure 17, Volume Not
10 requirements
and Plan 3 Curable
specified will be non-
curable
39 | P a g e
Sr.
Technical Merit Criteria Reference**
No.
11 Plan for Casting Yard, Quarry Sites Annexure 3 of ITT Curable
Quality Assurance and Quality
Appendix 6, Appendix
12 Plan, Quality Control, Outline Curable
8 of Volume 3
OHSE Plans
Construction Plan and Curable
Methodology including launching
and retrieval shafts, Tunnels,
13 Annexure 3 of ITT
Ramps, Approach Roads,
etc. including traffic and utility
diversion proposals
14 Organisation and staffing Clause A15-Volume 3 Curable
Deployment of Plant and Curable
15 Machinery & Specialist Sub
Contractor
Power Point Presentation as per Curable
16 proposed designs and Technical Clause 4.4.2 of ITT
submission by the Tenderer.
Proposals for Use and Curable
17 Section 3.12 of ITT
Reinstatement of Work
18 Maintenance Plan Section 3.10 of ITT Curable
Logistics covering transportation Curable
19 of TBM, segments, fill material, Annexure 3 of ITT
plant and equipment.
Any other Additional Technical Curable
20
Requirements for the proposal
A Power Point Presentation based on the proposed designs and technical submission by the
Tenderer will be the last part of the Technical Evaluation. The tenderers will be intimated
Date & Timing of the presentation. 30-minute duration will be allotted for each tenderer to
present their proposal. It is mandatory that the Project Manager whose name is proposed
in the tender should make the above presentation to the Committee chaired by the
Municipal Commissioner or the Additional Municipal Commissioner (Projects).
The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any or all proposals without assigning
any reason. No Tenderer shall have any cause of action or claim against the Employer for
rejection of his proposal.
4.1.5. Financial Package: The date, time and place of opening of Financial Packages will be
informed to the Tenderers whose Technical Packages have been found responsive, so that
they can be present at the time of opening of the Financial Packages.
4.1.6. Financial Packet Opening
On the opening date and time (Price Tender opener filled online date and time) of the e-
40 | P a g e
Packet C, the Employer will open the commercial online Tender submitted by the
Tenderers. A bid comparison report would be generated by the system which will give
ranking of the Tenderers according to the lump sum price quoted. The e-Packet C1
(Discount Quote for two packages) (if submitted) will be opened on the date and time
notified, only if tenderer is lowest (L1) in two packages.
4.1.7. Tenders will be checked for compliance in accordance with these Instructions to
Tenderers.
1) The tender will be evaluated as follows:
a) Technical evaluation: - The tenderers qualifying in the technical evaluation

will only be eligible for the financial bid opening (i.e. Packet C). If the
tenderer’s submission is not in accordance with the Employer’s
Requirements including overall design based on Clause 13 of Section I and
Clause 1.1 of Section II of this Volume, the tenders will be disqualified in the
technical evaluation.
b) Financial evaluation: - Financial bid comparison report will be generated

by the system amongst the commercial quotes of the Commercial bid e-
Packet C. Over which, discounts for combined packages from e-Packet C1
(discount, if offered by L1 tenderer only) will be applied by the Employer.
For award of two packages, the final selection will be as per the “Least Cost
Selection” amongst the commercial quotes, and then the discount, if offered
by the L1 tenderer will be applicable.
c) If the successful tenderer refuses to accept the work allotted to him, further
the next lowest tenderer (L2) in the ranking list of the responsive tender
shall be given the chance at the discretion of the Employer, and “Discount
Quote” of such tenderer then will be opened, if applicable.
4.2. Confidentiality of Tender Information and Copyright

4.2.1. The Tender Documents, as listed in Page 2 of the Notice of Intimation to RFP Tender of this
Volume 1, and any addenda thereto, together with any further communications, are issued
for the purpose of inviting Tenders only.
Tenderers shall keep, and shall cause their employees, subcontractors, advisors,
representatives and agents to keep, the Tender/ RFP Documents and all other information
and correspondence with respect to either the Project or the Tender Process confidential
and shall not disclose any such documents or information to any third party without the
Employer’s prior written approval; provided, however, that a Tenderer may disclose such
41 | P a g e
information to third parties to the extent necessary for such Tenderer to prepare its e-
Tender/ RFP Submission if such third party agrees in writing to keep all such information
and documents confidential. Tender/ RFP Documents are the property of the Employer and
are lent to the Tenderers for the purpose of preparation and submission of their e- Tender/
RFP Submissions only. In the event that a participant does not submit an e- Tender/ RFP
Submission, such participant shall promptly return the Tender/ RFP Documents to the
Employer. The Tender/ RFP Documents may not be copied or used for any other purpose.
The Tenderer shall maintain complete confidentiality until the Contract is awarded. In the
event that such confidentiality is breached, the Employer may, at his sole discretion, reject
his Tender. The Tender Drawings and documentation prepared by the Employer shall be
used solely for the design of the works. They shall not be used in part, whole or altered form
for any other purpose without the express permission in writing of the Employer. A Letter
of Undertaking is attached in Annexure 5 of this ITT and shall be completed by the Tenderer
and submitted with the Technical Package.
4.2.2. Information relating to the evaluation of Tenders and recommendation of Contract Award
shall not be disclosed to Tenderers or any other persons not officially concerned with such
process until such information on Contract award is communicated to successful Tenderer.
4.2.3. Any attempt by a Tenderer to influence the Employer or any of his staff in the evaluation of
the Tenders or Contract Award decisions will result in the rejection of his Tender.
4.2.4. Right to Information ACT 2005
Tenderers are advised that the Employer is subject to the requirements of the Right to
Information Act 2005 (the “Act”). If a Tenderer considers that any of the information
supplied with their e-Tender Submission is either commercially sensitive or confidential in
nature, this shall be highlighted and the reasons for its sensitivity specified. In such cases,
the relevant material shall, in response to a request under the Act, be examined in the light
of the exemptions provided for in the Act.
The Employer will consult with the Tenderer about any such sensitive information before
making a decision on any freedom of information request received.
In the event that the Employer determines that it must release, in accordance with the Act,
particular information relating to the e-Tender Submission which has been identified as
sensitive, the Tenderer will have the option of appealing this determination. Tenderers are
advised to obtain advice with respect to the Act, and if no information is identified by the
Tenderer as sensitive, with supporting reasons, then it is likely to be released in response
to a request under the Act.
42 | P a g e
The Tenderers shall note that the Employer may make public the amount of all e-Tender
Submissions and may publish the name of the successful Tenderer.
4.3. Clarification of Tenders

4.3.1. To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of Tenders, the Employer may, at
his discretion, ask any Tenderer for clarification of his Tender. The request for clarification
and the response shall be via email, but no change in the substance of the Tender shall be
sought, offered or permitted.
4.3.2. If a tenderer does not provide clarifications sought under Clause 4.3.1 above, within the
prescribed time, the Employer will proceed to evaluate the tender by construing that the
particulars requiring clarification to the best of understanding. After which, the tender may
become non-responsive.
4.4. Evaluation of Tenders on Conformity

4.4.1. The Technical Proposal shall be subjected to detailed evaluation under the following heads:
(a) Conformity
The Employer will determine whether the Technical Proposal conforms

substantially to the requirements of the Tender Document Volumes 2 to 6.
(b) Material Deviation or Reservation
A material deviation or reservation is one:
▪ which affects in any substantial way, the scope, quality or performance of the
Contract; or
▪ which limits in any substantial way, the Employer's rights or the Tenderer's
obligations under the Contract; or
▪ whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other

Tenderers.
(c) Conditional Proposal
A Technical Proposal will be deemed unacceptable if it contains any qualification

which:
▪ seeks to shift to the liability allocated to the Contractor; or
▪ includes a deviation from the Tender Documents which would render the
Works, or any part thereof, unfit for their intended purpose; or
43 | P a g e
▪ fails to submit a Project Management Plan and/or Outline Tender

Programme; or
▪ fails to commit to the Key Dates as specified in Volume 3.
(d) The Tenderer shall be required to amplify, explain and develop the Tenderer's
Technical Proposals in substantially greater detail such that they may be
confirmed as complying clearly with Volume 3 Employer's Requirements and in
accordance with Sub-Clause 2.4.2 of this ITT, can be incorporated into the
Contract.
4.4.2. The proposed Project Manager of the Tenderer shall make a presentation to the Employer
to demonstrate their understating of the project. The presentation shall cover all the design
and construction aspects, the programme, the logistics, environmental and OHS&E aspects,
and statutory regulations. The presentation may include a 3D walk through. The date, time
and venue for such presentation will be conveyed separately to the qualified tenderers via
email.
4.4.3. Technical Proposals considered being non-conforming, not substantially compliant and not
fulfilling the requirements of the Tender Documents, evaluated as per Sub-Clause 4.1 and
4.2 of this ITT shall be rejected by the Employer and the Tenderer shall not subsequently
be permitted to make any changes or corrections to, or withdrawals of the non-conforming
deviation or reservation.
4.4.4. If any Technical Proposal is rejected, pursuant to Sub-Clause 4.4 of this ITT, the Financial
Package(s) of such Tender will not be opened.
4.5. Evaluation of Financial Proposals

4.5.1. The Employer shall notify all technically qualified Tenderers to attend the opening of the
financial proposals. The Financial proposals will then be opened in front of the attending
Tenderers, as per Sub-Clause 4.5.2 of this ITT.
4.5.2. For all those technical proposals which are turned responsive, Commercial proposal will be
opened.
4.5.3. The Financial packet will then be evaluated as stated in Clauses 4.1.5 to 4.1.7 of Section II of
this Volume.
4.5.4. The Tenderer will submit the Commercial bid (e-Packet C) via online in “Commercial Quote”
by filling Complete Financial Proposals.
4.5.5. On the opening date and time (Price Bid opener filled online date and time) of the e-Packet
C, the Employer will open the commercial online Bid submitted by the Tenderer in which
44 | P a g e
bid comparison report would be generated by the system which will give ranking of the
Tenderers according to the lump sum price quoted.
4.5.6. A comparison report of the Commercial Bid (e-Packet C) will be generated by the system,
and a discount, if offered in e-Packet C1 will be manually applied by the Employer, Subject
to clause 4.1.6, Section II of this volume.
Subsequently, at the discretion of the Employer, the selection for one or two packages will
be considered as per Clause 4.5.8 of Section-II of this Volume. Discounts, if offered, shall be
considered only for L1 tenderers through the “Least Cost Selection” method beneficial to
the Employer.
4.5.7. Duties and Taxes
4.5.7.1. The overall cost to the Employer shall include all duties and taxes such as customs duty,
central excise duty, sales tax/ GST etc. as detailed below.
▪ the price of an imported item, the price has to be determined inclusive of

customs duty and levies.
▪ the price of articles which are subject to excise duty, the price has to be
determined inclusive of such excise duty.
▪ And other levies including new taxes e.g. GST etc. as amended time to time by
the Government Authority.
4.5.7.2. Offers, deviations and other factors which are in excess of the requirements of the Tender
documents or otherwise which result in the accrual of unsolicited benefits to the Employer
shall not be taken into account in the Tender evaluation.
4.5.7.3. Price adjustment provisions applicable during the period of execution of the Contract shall
not be taken into account in the Tender evaluation.
4.5.8. Combined Evaluation with Other Tenders
Tenders for multiple packages are being invited simultaneously and will be evaluated at the
same time, based on the least overall cost to the Employer, refer to clause 20 (d) and 20 (e)
of section II.
If a Tenderer is found L1 in two packages, for award of the said two packages, the financial
resources, the solvency and the bid capacity shall be aggregated for meeting the combined
criteria for the said two packages. “Discount Quote” will be opened only if a tenderer is L1
in two packages. The award of two Packages to a tenderer will be at the sole discretion of
45 | P a g e
the Employer.
If a tenderer is found L1 in two packages but found eligible for only one package based the
financial resources, the solvency and the bid capacity, only one of the two packages will be
awarded which is financially beneficial to the Employer.
4.5.9. Refund of Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
(a) EMD of all the tenderers except the lowest bidder (L1) and the second lowest bidder
(L2) will be refunded after evaluation of technical and commercial proposals.
(b) EMD of the second lowest bidder (L2) will be refunded after issuance of the Letter
of Acceptance to the lowest bidder (L1).
(c) The EMD of the successful bidder will be refunded only after submission of all
documents, and the Contract Agreement is executed.
(d) If tenderer becomes non-responsive or fails to furnish the required information in

e-Packet-B even after intimation is given to him, the on line EMD of INR XX shall be
forfeited and Bank Guarantee of INR XX shall be encashed by MCGM.
(e) If the successful tenderer refuses to accept the work allotted to them, their EMD will
be forfeited.
46 | P a g e
5. AWARD OF CONTRACT
5.1. Award
5.1.1. Subject to Sub-Clause 5.2 of this ITT, the Employer may award the Contract to the Tenderer
whose Tender has been determined to be responsive and compliant to the requirements
contained in the Tender Documents as per Sub-Clause 4.4 of this ITT and who has offered
the lowest evaluated Tender price as per Sub-Clause 4.5 of this ITT.
5.1.2. In case, if Tenderers have quoted equal Financial Price, the following criteria for award will
be taken into consideration: -
The precedence will be given in the following order
(a) The largest Available Bid Capacity;
(b) Post tender opening, offers maximum discount on quoted price in sealed packets.
5.2. Employer’s Right to accept any Tender and to reject any or all Tenders
5.2.1. The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender and may at any time, by notice
in writing to the Tenderers, terminate the Tendering process.
5.2.2. The Tenderer should note in particular that without prejudice to the Employer’s other
rights under the Contract and the Tender Security in the event that the Tender is accepted
but the Tenderer fails to provide the Performance Security required under Sub-Clause 5.5
below, and Sub-Clause 4.2 of Part I - General Conditions or other specified documents or
fails to execute the Contract Agreement as per Sub-Clause 5.4 of this ITT, the Employer may
terminate the Contract and the Tender Security shall be forfeited.
5.2.3. The Employer will reject any tender if it determines not to be in accordance with Sub-Clause
5.6 of this ITT.
5.2.4. The Employer may, at his sole discretion, accept or reject any Tender/RFP, and annul the
Tender Process and reject all e-Tender/RFP Submissions at any time prior to Contract
award, without thereby incurring any liability to Tenderers. In case of annulment after the
Submission Deadline, all e- Tender/RFP Submissions submitted and specifically, tender
securities shall be promptly returned to the Tenderers.
5.2.5. MCGM shall have right to reject any Tender/ Tenderers at any stage if the Govt. of India and
any of its departments or agencies do not accord clearance to the pre-qualified Tenderers.
MCGM will assist the Tenderers for applying to the Govt. of India; however, it shall be the
responsibility of the pre-qualified Tenderers to obtain such Security or any Clearances from
the Govt. of India at their risk and cost.
47 | P a g e
5.3. Notification of Award

5.3.1. Prior to the expiration of the period of Tender validity prescribed in Sub-Clause Nos. 1.1.1
and 3.14 of this ITT or any extended period pursuant to Sub-Clause 3.14 of this ITT, the
Employer will notify the successful Tenderer by an email confirmed by letter, that his
Tender has been accepted. This letter (hereinafter and in Part 1 of the General Conditions
called the “Letter of Acceptance-LoA") shall name the amount which the Employer will pay
the Contractor in consideration of the design, construction, completion, and remedying of
any defects in the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract.
5.4. Signing of Agreement

The Employer shall prepare the Contract Agreement as per the proforma in Annexure 7,
duly incorporating all the terms of the agreement between the two parties. The Tenderer
should note that in the event of acceptance of his Tender, the Tenderer within a period of
30 days from the date of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, and receipt of the documents
as mentioned in Sub-Clause 5.5 of this ITT, the successful Tenderer will be required to
execute the Contract Agreement. The payments towards legal charges, stamp duty as
applicable (on Contract Agreement & Bank Guarantees), supply of bill forms & Tax
certificates as per the prevailing rates shall be borne by successful Tenderers. At present
the legal & stationary charges are as Rs.6660/-
Failure of the successful Tenderer to sign the Contract shall constitute sufficient grounds
for the annulment of the award and the Employer may draw upon the Tenderer’s Tender
Security. In that event, the Employer may award the Contract to the Tenderer with the next
most economically advantageous compliant e-Tender Submission
5.4.1. Contract Documentation
The Contract that will be executed by the Employer and successful Tenderer consists of the
contract documents attached to these Tender Documents, as may be modified by the
Employer to reflect relevant aspects of the e-Tender/RFP Submission acceptable to the
Employer, and clarifications post receipt of e- Tender/RFP Submission acceptable to the
Employer. Those aspects of the e- Tender/RFP Submission that are acceptable to the
Employer will be included in the executed Contract as e- Tender/RFP Submission Extracts.
For clarity, the Employer may, in his sole discretion, require that further revisions be made
to the Conditions of Contract to take into account the Tenderer’s structure, whether that
structure is a JV, partnership or other legal entity or association of legal entities.
The Employer shall prepare a combined and final version of the Contract to reflect ITT and
by submitting an e- Tender/RFP Submission, the Tenderer shall be deemed to have agreed
48 | P a g e
with the terms of these ITT’s.
5.5. Performance Security

5.5.1. The Performance Security required in accordance with Sub-Clause 4.2 of Part I General
Conditions of Contract shall be for 10% of the Contract Sum, in Indian Rupees and shall
comprise the following:
1) Performance Guarantee - 3%
2) Contract Deposit - 2%
3) Retention Money - 5%
5.5.2. The Tenderer shall furnish all other Guarantees, Undertakings, and Warranties, in
accordance with the provisions of the Part I General Conditions of Contract and Part II
Particular Conditions of Contract.
5.5.3. Failure of the successful Tenderer to comply with the requirements of Sub-Clauses 5.4 and
5.5 of this ITT within the time limit specified therein shall constitute sufficient grounds for
the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Tender Security.
5.5.4. Retention Money: In addition to the Performance Guarantee, Retention Money (Security
Deposit) will be 5% of the Contract Sum. The percentage of retention money that will be
recovered in each interim payment as stated in item 22 of FT - 1.
5.5.5. 2% of the Contract Sum shall be paid as the Contract Deposit in the form of Bank Guarantee
similar to item (ii) (e) below.
The PG (Performance Guarantee) shall be paid in one the following forms.
a) Cash
b) Demand Draft
c) Government securities
d) Fixed Deposit Receipts (FDR) of a Schedule Bank.
e) An electronically issued irrevocable bank guarantee bond of any Schedule

bank, or in the prescribed form given in Annexure 6. The bank guarantee
shall be from a Scheduled Bank in India (meaning a bank which has been
included in the Second Schedule of Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934)
(including Scheduled Commercial Foreign Banks). The Performance
Guarantee shall be furnished to the Employer within twenty-eight (28)
days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance.
Performance Guarantee is applicable over and above the clause of Security Deposit.
49 | P a g e
Performance Guarantee will have to be paid and shall be valid till the defect liability period
or finalization of final bill whichever is later. This deposit will be allowed in the form of (a)
to (e) as mentioned above and shall be paid as prescribed after receipt of Letter of
Acceptance.
5.5.6. Refund of Performance Security
Contract Deposit and Performance Guarantee shall be released upon issue of Taking
Over Certificate.
Retention Money shall be released upon issue of Performance Certificate.
5.6. Fraudulent OR Corrupt Practices

The Employer will reject a Tender during the evaluation process and Contract Award if
he determines that the Tenderer has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices during
the compilation of their Tender, the evaluation period of the Tender, or in competing for
the Contract.
1) The Employer requires that Tenderers observe the highest standard of ethics
during the Tender Process. In pursuance of this, the Employer:
2) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
3) corrupt practice is the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or indirectly,

of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party;
4) fraudulent practice is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation or hiding

of legal status, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a
party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;
5) collusive practice is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to

achieve an improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of
another party; and
6) coercive practice is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or harm,

directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
7) Will reject an e-Tender Submission if the Employer determines that the Tenderer
recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract.
50 | P a g e
5.7. Employers of Administration and Hierarchy

1) “Employer” means:
1. Municipal Commissioner, Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai
(MCGM), 2nd Floor, Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Marg, Fort,
Mumbai – 400 001;
2. Additional Municipal Commissioner to whom the powers of the Municipal
Commissioner, have been delegated under Section 56 and 56B of the
Mumbai Municipal Corporation Act
2) “Engineer” means: -
The Chief Engineer (CTI & RC), Civic Training Institute & Research Centre
Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali, Mumbai – 400 066 OR
Any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified in writing
to the Contractor to act in replacement of the Engineer from time to time.
3) “Employer’s Representative” means:-
The General Consultant (GC) who is any consultant or a person appointed from
time to time by “Employer” to assist and perform specified duty as per contract
entered in between the Employer and the consultant or the person for entire
stretch of Goregaon Mulund Link Road Project.
The General Consultant (GC) appointed to assist the Employer/ the Engineer shall
carry out the following works:
▪ co-ordinate and monitor the project through PMC;
▪ vetting and issuing “Good for Construction” certificate of the
Contractor’s drawings after checked and approved by PMC;
▪ co-ordinate with various consultants and contractors and review the
progress;
▪ prepare and update combined project implementation schedule;
▪ monitor and approve logistics and construction methods, submitted by
Contractor through PMC;
▪ Carryout all other works as assigned by the Employer/the Engineer.
4) “Employer’s Personnel” means: -

The Project Management Consultant (PMC) who is any consultant or the person
appointed from time to time by “Employer” to assist the Engineer and the General
Consultant and to perform specified duty as per contract entered in between the
Employer and the consultant or the person as PMC appointed separately by
51 | P a g e
Employer, for Goregaon Mulund Link Road Project, for all sections of the work.
The Project Management Consultant (PMC) shall carry out the following works:
▪ administer the contract under the guidance of the General Consultant
(GC)
▪ review designs, drawings, and specifications with respect to actual site
conditions;
▪ conduct road safety audit;
▪ ensure requisite insurances are received and comply with contract
requirements;
▪ review the Contractor’s detailed Work Program, Contractor’s
superintendence, Contractor’s personnel and Contractor’s
construction methods;
▪ review the horizontal and vertical alignment of the work;
▪ Notice the Contractor’s designs and drawings and submit to GC for
vetting;
▪ supervise the Contractor’s work in all respects including quality, safety,
environmental aspects and labour welfare;
▪ measure quantities of work, record measurements, and verify
items/works quantities executed in the contractor's monthly
statements;
▪ review and approve ‘as-built’ drawings prepared by the Contractor;
▪ advise & recommend on variation, extra items and claims to the
Employer;
▪ conducting / attending all review meetings;
▪ checking/ certification of Running and Final Bills and submitting RA
bills for payment to the Employer.
▪ prepare the Acceptance Certificates/ Completion Certificate/ Taking-
Over Certificate and submitting the same to the Employer for review
and issue;
▪ Follow instructions of General Consultant (GC) on behalf of the
Employer as per duties assigned to them
▪ Carry out all other works as assigned by the Employer/the Engineer.
5) Any other consultants: third party auditors or vigilance officer as the Employer
may find essential shall be appointed time to time at any stage of works.
6) MCGM’s internal Vigilance Department and Auditors shall be inspecting the
works at any stage as per instructions of the Employer.
52 | P a g e
Design and Construction of Twin Tube Road Tunnel including approach road at Goregaon
Mulund Link Road (GMLR)
Volume 1
Bidding Guidelines
Section -III
Form of Tenders and Appendix

53 | P a g e
TABLE OF ANNEXURES
ANNEXURES Page No.

ANNEXURE 1 : REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTLINE TENDER PROGRAMME
ANNEXURE 2 : PREQUALIFICATION CRITERIA UNDERTAKING
ANNEXURE 3 : REQUIREMENTS FOR TENDERER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
ANNEXURE 4 : FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR TENDER SECURITY
ANNEXURE 5 : COPYRIGHT UNDERTAKING
ANNEXURE 6 : FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY (GUARANTEE) BY BANK
ANNEXURE 7 : FORM OF CONRACT AGREEMENT
ANNEXURE 8 : STATEMENT OF COMPETENCY OF THE E&M & TUNNEL SUB-

CONTRACTOR
ANNEXURE 9 : STATEMENT OF COMPETENCY OF THE LEAD DESIGNER
54 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 1
REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTLINE TENDER PROGRAMME
(1) The Outline Tender Programme shall show how the Tenderer proposes to organise and
carry out the Design and Construction Works and to achieve Stages and complete the
whole of the Works by the given Key Dates.
(2) The Outline Tender Programme or Programmes shall be developed as a critical path
network using suitable software. The network must be fully resourced and show co-
ordination with all Interfacing Contractors. The Outline Tender Programme shall show
achievement of all Key Dates and Works Area Access Dates.
(3) The Outline Tender Programme shall take account of the Tenderer's proposed Design
Submission Programme and should indicate, as far as possible, dates and periods relating
to interfaces with and between Interfacing Contractors including dates for submission of
further documents as required by the Contract and periods for their acceptance.
(4) The Outline Tender Programme shall contain sufficient detail to assure the Employer of
the feasibility of the plan and approach proposed by the Tenderer.
(5) The Tenderer should have regard to the possibility, that during the Tender Evaluation
Period, the Tenderer may be required to use the Outline Tender Programme and develop
it into a Programme which, in the event of award, would be the initial submission of the
Works Programme. To facilitate this process, the Tenderer shall, in the preparation of the
Tender Programme, take due account of the provisions of Appendix 4 of Volume 3
Employer's Requirements, in so far as they concern the Works Programme.
(6) The Outline Tender Programme shall be accompanied by a narrative statement that shall
describe Programme activities, assumptions and logic, and highlight the Tenderer's
perception of the major constraints and critical areas of concern in the Organization,
construction and completion of the Works. This narrative statement shall also indicate
which elements of the Works the Tenderer intends to carry out off-Site and/or outside
India with details of the proposed locations of where any such work is to be carried out,
and the facilities available.
(7) The Tenderer shall prepare logic diagrams providing the philosophy for shared access,
shared areas with co-incident and adjacent work areas and submit as part of his Tender.
55 | P a g e
These logic diagrams shall be developed and submitted along with the Works
Programmes as submitted during the course of the Contract.
(8) All programmes shall include design, procurement periods, major material, offsite
production / prefabrication, temporary construction, interface and periods for all
Interfacing Contractors, whether system wide, utility or statutory contractors etc.
56 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 2
PREQUALIFICATION CRITERIA UNDERTAKING
Date ………………..
To:
The Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM)
2nd Floor, Municipal Head Office,
Mahapalika Fort
Mumbai – 400 001.
LETTER OF UNDERTAKING
We, (name of Tenderer / Joint Venture) hereby confirm that the information submitted at the
Prequalification (RFQ) Stage remains valid and up to date, and that we continue to meet all of the
prequalification requirements, and that no changes have occurred to any of the items submitted
at the time of RFP.
If the Employer subsequently finds that any of the prequalification criteria have changed,
contrary to the Tenderers confirmation, the Employer reserves the right to declare the Tenderer
as non-compliant, and to declare any Contract, if already awarded to the Tenderer, to be null and
void.
Signed……
For and on behalf of

(name of Tenderer)
[with Company Seal]
57 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 3
REQUIREMENTS FOR TENDERER'S TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
1. The Tenderer's attention is drawn to Sub-Clause A2 of Volume 3 Employer's

Requirements – Section A General and to Sub-Clause 1 of the General Conditions of
Contract in which words and expressions are defined.
2. The Tenderer's Technical Proposals shall comply or, subject to reasonable development,
be capable of complying with the Employer's Requirements in all respects. The Tenderer's
Technical Proposals shall establish firmly the intended design and methodology, and, in
accordance with Sub-Clause 4.2 of this Annexure 3 of this ITT, the Specifications for the
Permanent Works.
3. The Tenderer's Technical Proposals shall cover the following:
A) Underground tunnels.
i. details and number off tunnel boring machines and back up equipment
proposed to be used for the work with details of ownership, lease
agreement, MOU to assure availability;
ii. Sequence, design and outline programme for procurement of TBMs,

launching of TBMs and construction of each bored tunnel drives;
iii. Proposals for TBM launch shaft and back-up facilities including tentative
site layout.
iv. Size, location and layout of bored tunnel segment casting and storage yard.
v. Delivery Provisions of segments to site and removal of spoil from site.
vi. Method Proposed for forming cross passages.
vii. Approach for existing water well protection/ replacement works.
C) Road construction method
D) Design and Construction method for cut and cover tunnel, and transition ramp
with clear glazed stainless-steel roof with crash barrier protection.
4. The Tenderer's Technical Proposal shall also include the following documents:
4.1 Drawings
Drawings shall illustrate, where appropriate, aspects of the Construction Works identified
in Sub-Clause 3 of this Annexure 3 of this ITT, including layouts, appearance, main
structural features, general arrangements, plans, elevations, principal sections and typical
58 | P a g e
details of critical areas. In particular, the drawings shall indicate the proposed
arrangements with the Interfacing Contractors.
4.2 Outline Specifications

4.2.1 The Outline Specifications to be submitted by the Tenderer shall comprise two parts, i)
the Outline Design Specifications and ii) the Outline Construction Specifications. Each part
shall consist of the Outline Specification, which shall be identical to those contained in the
Tender Documents, and a Particular Specification which is to be compiled by the
Tenderer. The Particular Specification shall draw attention to any part or parts of the
Outline Specification which the Tenderer intends to amend or omit and shall contain
further material such that the design of the Permanent Works is fully specified, and the
construction of the Permanent Works is specified at least in outline at this stage.
4.2.2 In producing the Particular Specifications, the Tenderer shall ensure that Clauses, Sub-
Clauses and any appendices therein are identified by their numbering as uniquely
belonging to the Particular Specifications and shall not in any event amend or change the
numbering in the Outline Specifications.
4.2.3 The Tenderer should note that the Specifications submitted with the Tender as part of the
Tenderer's Technical Proposals will, prior to acceptance of the Tender, be merged and
consolidated into a single document for incorporation into the Contract.
4.2.4 The Tenderer should note that the Particular Specifications form a crucial part of the
Tenderer’s Technical Proposals and shall be prepared in sufficient detail to demonstrate
full compliance with the Employer’s Requirements. The quality of the Particular
Specifications will be paramount in evaluating the technical compliance of Tenders.
4.3 Statement of Compliance

A joint statement from the Tenderer and the proposed Lead Designer is required to be
furnished to the effect that the Tenderer's Technical Proposals comply with the
Employer's Requirements and can be developed to become the Definitive Design of the
Permanent Works without significant change other than amplification.
4.4 Statement of Maintainability

The Tenderer shall state the maintenance objectives and the anticipated operational life
associated with the principal elements and components of the Permanent Works and in
particular how these apply in the selection and use of proposed materials. The Tenderer
shall demonstrate the effect of its proposals on the lifetime costs of the Permanent Works.
The Tenderer shall include in this statement a schedule of the main maintenance
operations, for each major component of the Tunnels and other works including intervals
59 | P a g e
between such operations, for all aspects of the required construction and of main spares
and stores required and their rates of use.
5. The Tender shall be accompanied by documents in amplification of the Tenderer's

Technical Proposals, which shall include:
5.1 Technical Notes

Such technical notes or notes on calculations necessary for understanding and explaining
the Tenderer's Technical Proposals.
5.2 Codes and Standards

A list of all codes of practice and standards to be used in the design shall be provided.
Except for those codes and standards available in Hindi, all other codes and standards
shall be available in certified English translation. The Tenderer shall provide justification,
in accordance with Sub-Clause 1 of the Outline Design Specification of Volume 4 of this
Tender Document, for any Codes or Standards it proposes in its list as alternatives or in
addition to those specified in the Employer’s Requirements, Outline Design Specifications
and Outline Construction Specifications. The Tenderer will be required, during the Tender
process, to provide a certified English translation of any codes or standards it proposes
to use, and which are not normally available in English.
6. Casting Yard
The tenderer shall propose suitable casting yard locations with a site plan. The facilities
required such as casting yard, batching plant etc. shall also be shown. In a separate plan
project site shall be indicated and logistics of moving the precast elements shall be
discussed.
7. Logistics planning and programme for TBM, material required for precast elements, etc.
shall be discussed. All the material shall be transported to site via sea.
8. Aesthetic design proposal shall be presented for the above ground structures like
transition ramps with stated roof, land scape and recreational facilities. Also, refer to
Section B13 of Volume 3. The internal tunnel space shall also be aesthetically enhanced.
9. This tunnel is designed with maximum permissible stresses given by WSP Department as
Annexed in Volume 7. The methodology of construction shall be approved by the
Engineer/the Employer’s Representative/ the Employer’s Personnel. Further, this
transportation tunnel is travelling underneath the Sanjay Gandhi National Park; for which
the maximum permissible stresses given by WSP Department are Annexed in Volume 7.
The Contractor shall take due care in safeguarding this Reservoir and this will be at his
risk and cost.
60 | P a g e
10. Method of protection of all existing utilities shall be proposed.
61 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 4
FORM OF BANK GAURANTEE FOR TENDER SECURITY
(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act, if any, of the country of issuing bank)
KNOW ALL MEN by these presents that we _______________________________ (Name of Bank) of India,
having our registered office at _____________________ (hereinafter called “the Bank”) are bound unto
(Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (hereinafter called “The Employer”) in sum of
_____________________________________________ (Specify currency and amount in figures and words) for
which payment will and truly to be made to the said Employer, the Bank binds himself, his
successors and assigns by these presents.
WHEREAS ________________________________ (Name of Tenderer) (hereinafter called “the Tenderer”)
has submitted his Tender dated ___________________ for the Contract Code:_____________ (hereinafter
called “the Tender”)
WHEREAS the Tenderer is required to furnish a Bank Guarantee for the sum of
___________________________________ (specify currency and amount in figures and words) Tender
Security against the Tenderer’s offer as aforesaid.
AND WHEREAS _______________________________________ (Name of Bank) have, at the request of the

Tenderer, agreed to give this guarantee as hereinafter contained.
We further agree as follows:
(1) That the Employer may without affecting this guarantee grant time or other indulgence
to or negotiate further with the Tenderer in regard to the conditions contained in the said
Tender and thereby modify these conditions or add thereto any further conditions as may
be mutually agreed upon between the Employer and the Tenderer.
(2) That the guarantee herein before contained shall not be affected by any change in
constitution of our Bank or in the constitution of the Tenderer.
(3) That this guarantee commences from the date hereof and shall remain in force until:
a) The Tenderer, in case his Tender is accepted by the Employer, executes a formal
agreement after furnishing the Performance Security from RBI approved a Scheduled
Bank (including Scheduled Commercial Foreign Banks) or
b) Twenty-eight days after the date of validity or the extended date of validity of the Tender,
as the case may be, whichever is earlier.
(4) That the expression “the Tenderer” and “the Bank” herein used shall, unless such an
interpretation is repugnant to the subject or context, include their respective successors
and assigns.
62 | P a g e
THE CONDITIONS of this obligations are:

(i) if the Tenderer withdraws his Tender during this period of tender validity specified in the
Form of Tender, or
(ii) if the Tenderer having been notified of the acceptance of his Tender by the Employer
during the period of Tender validity:
a) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security as required by Sub-Clause 3.16.6 of

the “Instructions to Tenderers” – Section II; and / or
b) fails or refuses to enter into a Contract within the time limit specified in Sub-Clause 5.4 of
the “Instructions to Tenderers” – Section II.
We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first
written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate his demand provided that
in his demand the Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing
to the occurrence of any one or more of the conditions (i), (ii) a) or (ii) b) mentioned
above, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.
Signature of
Authorized Official
Of the Bank: __________________________
SIGNATURE OF WITNESS Name of Official :

__________________________
__________________________ Designation :
__________________________
NAME OF WITNESS STAMP / SEAL OF BANK
__________________________
Address of Witness
__________________________
63 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 5
COPYRIGHT UNDERTAKING
Date ………………..
To:
Mahapalika Fort
Mumbai – 400 001.
LETTER OF UNDERTAKING
We, (name of Tenderer / Joint Venture) hereby undertake that the Tender Drawings, both in
soft copy and digitised format, and the Tender Documents downloaded as a necessary part of
our preparation of this Tender shall be used solely for the preparation of the Tender and that if
the Tender is successful, shall be used solely for the design of the temporary and permanent
Works.
We further undertake that the aforesaid Tender Drawings and Documents prepared by
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM) shall not be used in whole, in part or in any
altered form on any other project, scheme, design or proposal that the firm, partnership, Joint
Venture, the Joint Venture parent companies or sub-contractors of the Joint Venture are, or will
be involved with either in India or any other country.
Signed……

(name of Tenderer / Joint Venture)
[with Company Seal]
64 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 6
FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY (GUARANTEE) BY BANK
(Refer Sub-Clause5.5 of Section II of ITT)
1. This deed of Guarantee made this day of_________ between Bank of_______________
(hereinafter called the “Bank”) of the one part, and Municipal Corporation of Greater
Mumbai (MCGM) (hereinafter called “the Employer”) of the other part.
2. Whereas Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM), has awarded the contract
for ______ (Name of work as per the title page of the NIT) (hereinafter called the Contract)
to ______________ (Name of the Contractor) hereinafter called the Contractor.
3. AND WHEREAS the Contractor is bound by the said Contract to submit to the Employer a
Performance Security for a total amount of
__________________________________________________________ (Specify all currencies and their
amounts in figures and words)
4. Now we the Undersigned __________________________________________ (Full Name of the Bank)

being fully authorized to sign and to incur obligations for and on behalf of and in the name
of_______________________________(Full name of Bank), hereby declare that the said Bank will
guarantee the Employer the full amount of
amounts in figures and words) as stated above.
5. After the Contractor has signed the aforementioned Contract with the Employer, the Bank
is engaged to pay the Employer, any amount up to and inclusive of the aforementioned
full amount upon written order from the Employer to indemnify the Employer for any
liability of damage resulting from any defects or shortcomings of the Contractor or the
debts he may have incurred to any parties involved in the Works under the Contract
mentioned above, whether these defects or shortcomings or debts are actual or estimated
or expected. The Bank will deliver the money required by the Employer immediately on
demand without delay and demur and without reference to the Contractor and without
the necessity of a previous notice or of judicial or administrative procedures and without
it being necessary to prove to the Bank the liability or damages resulting from any defects
or shortcomings or debts of the Contractor. The Bank shall pay to the Employer any
money so demanded notwithstanding any dispute/disputes raised by the Contractor in
any suit or proceedings pending before any Court, Tribunal or Arbitrator/s relating
thereto and the liability under this guarantee shall be absolute and unequivocal.
6. This Guarantee is valid until ………………….. (The initial period for which this Guarantee
65 | P a g e
will be valid must be for at least twenty-eight (28) days longer than the anticipated date
of issue of the Performance Certificate as stated in Sub-Clause 11.9 of the “Conditions of
Contract Part I”.)
7. At any time during the period in which this Guarantee is still valid, if the Employer agrees
to grant a time extension to the Contractor or if the Contractor fails to complete the Works
within the time of completion as stated in the Contract, or fails to discharge himself of the
liability or damages or debts as stated under Sub-Clause 5 above, it is understood that the
Bank will extend his Guarantee under the same conditions for the required time on
demand by the Employer and at the cost of the Contractor.
8. The Guarantee hereinbefore contained shall not be affected by any change in the
Constitution of the Bank or of the Contractor.
9. The neglect or forbearance of the Employer in enforcement of payment of any moneys,

the payment whereof is intended to be hereby secured or the giving of time by the
Employer for the payment hereof shall in no way relieve the bank of their liability under
this deed.
10. The expressions “the Employer”, “the Bank” and “the Contractor” hereinbefore used shall
include their respective successors and assigns.
11. Notwithstanding anything contained herein:
a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed

amounts in figures and words), and
b) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid up to ……………………………….……., and
c) We are liable to pay the guarantee amount or part thereof under this Bank
Guarantee only & only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or
before………………………………….
In witness whereof, I/We of the bank have signed and sealed this Guarantee on
the_____________ (day) of __________ (Month) 201x being herewith duly authorized.
The………………………….Bank.
66 | P a g e
Signature of Authorized Bank official
Name: …………………………….. ……………………………..

Designation: ……………………… ……………………………..
Stamp/Seal of the Bank: ………..
Signed, sealed and delivered
for and on behalf of the
Bank by the above
Named _____________________in the presence of:
Witness 1 Witness 2.
Signature ………………..……………. Signature ………………..…………….
Name ………………..……………. Name ………………..…………….
Address ………………..……………. Address ………………..…………….
67 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 7
FORM OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT
(Refer Sub-Clause5.4 of Section II of ITT)
This Agreement is made at Mumbai on the ___________ day of _____________ 201x Municipal
Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM) , Mumbai hereinafter called “the Employer” of the one
part and _________________ (Name of Contractor*) (Address of Contractor*)
______________________________________ ____________________ of ____________ hereinafter called “the
Contractor” of the other part.
Whereas the Employer is desirous that (*** certain Goods and Services should be provided
and) the Works should be executed, viz. ---------- (Name of work as mentioned in the title of the
NIT) hereinafter called “the Works” and has accepted a Tender by the Contractor for the
execution and completion of such works (*** as well as a Guarantee of such works) and the
remedying of defects therein. NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSED as follows:
1. In this Agreement words and expression shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract Parts I and II hereinafter referred
to.
1. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of
this Agreement, viz:
i) Contract Agreement
ii) Letter of Acceptance (LoA)
iii) Letter of Clarifications (LoC), if any
iv) Addenda to the Tender document, if any
v) Notice of Intimation to RFP (NIT)
vi) Instructions to Tenderers (ITT) (Including Annexures)
vii) Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
viii) Conditions of Contract for Plant Design–Build Contract Part I – FIDIC First Edition 1999
68 | P a g e
(GCC)
ix) Employer’s Requirements
x) Outline Design Specifications
xi) Outline Construction Specifications
xii) All RFQ Documents till its last amendments
xiii) Safety, Health & Environmental Management Requirements
xiv) Quality Assurance Requirements
xv) Tender Drawings
xvi) Pricing Document
xvii) Reference Documents
xviii) Contractor’s Proposal
xix) Any other items as applicable
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as

hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute
and complete the works by **________ and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all
respects with the provisions of the Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution
and completion of the works and the remedying of defects therein, the Total Contract
Price of ** of ____________________________________ ______________________ (currencies and their
amounts in figures and words) being the sum stated in the letter of acceptance subject to
such additions thereto or deductions there from as may be made under the provisions of
the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
5. OBLIGATION OF THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall ensure full compliance with tax laws of India with regard to this
Contract and shall be solely responsible for the same. The Contractor shall submit copies
of acknowledgements evidencing filing of returns every year and shall keep the
Employer fully indemnified against liability of tax, interest, penalty etc. of the Contractor
in respect thereof, which may arise.
69 | P a g e
6. JURISDICTION OF COURT
For settlement of disputes, the Courts at Mumbai shall have the jurisdiction to try all
disputes arising out of this agreement between the parties, as noted in PCC Clause
20.11.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused their respective Common Seals to be
hereunto affixed / (or have hereunto set their respective hands and seals) the day and year
first above written
For and on behalf of the Contractor For and on behalf of the Employer
Signature of the authorized official Signature of the authorized official
70 | P a g e
Name of the official Name of the official
Stamp/Seal of the Contractor Stamp/Seal of the Employer
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED

By the said
________________________ Name ___________________
on behalf of the Contractor in the presence of:
Witness _____________________
Name _______________________
Address_______________________________
_____________________________________
By the said
_________________________ Name ____________________
on behalf of the Employer in the presence of:
Witness ______________________
Name ________________________
Address__________________________________
________________________________________
The Common seal of the Municipal )

Corporation of Greater Mumbai was hereunto )
affixed on the_______________________________ )
in the presence of two members of the )
Standing Committee of the Corporation
1.) ________________ 1.) __________________ )
2.) ________________ 2.) __________________ )
And in the presence of the Municipal Secretary
71 | P a g e
___________________________________________ )
Notes :
* To be made out by the Employer at the time of finalization of the Form of Contract
Agreement.
** Blanks to be completed by the Employer at the time of finalization of the Form of
Contract Agreement.
*** TO BE DELETED IF NOT APPLICABLE
72 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 8
STATEMENT OF COMPETENCY OF THE E&M AND TUNNEL VENTILATION SUB-
CONTRACTOR
The sub-contractor proposed for Tunnel Ventilation and E&M works, should have the following
experience and capabilities:
1. Should have executed similar work i.e. design, build, testing and commissioning of
tunnel ventilation, E&M & fire protection works for Road Tunnel or Metro Rail or Rail
Tunnel, covering at least five projects costing not less than INR 100 crore, in the last 10
years. Details to be provided in the table are given below.
Description of the Year Name of the

Sl. No. Status
project From To Client
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
.
2. Out of the above at least two projects should have been in operation for three years.
3. Average annual turnover for the last three years should be more than INR 150 crores.
4. The sub-contractor should have a design office or establish one in Mumbai.
5. The relevant experience should cover mechanical ventilation, supervisory control and
data acquisition (SCADA), UPS & DG Set,
6. Should have adequate Technical Staff.
7. Should submit an organisation staff of the company and the organisation proposed for
the project
The subcontractor shall provide evidences including Employer’s certificates for the above.
Authorised Signature of Sub-contractor and Company Seal
Authorised Signature of Tenderer and Company Seal
73 | P a g e
ANNEXURE 9
STATEMENT OF COMPETENCY OF THE LEAD DESIGNER
The Lead Designer (Detailed Design Consultant) proposed by the Contractor shall have the
following qualifications.
1. Should have executed at least 3 similar projects in urban environment i.e. design of
Road, Tunnel, Bridges, in the last 10 years. Details to be provided in the table are given
below.
Description of the Year Name of the

Sl. No. Status
project From To Client
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2. Out of the above 3 projects at least one project should have been in operation for 3
years.
3. The average annual turnover in the last 3 years should be more than 30 crores. .
4. The DDC should have a design office or establish one in Mumbai.
5. Should have adequate Technical Staff.
6. Should submit an organisation staff of the company and the organisation proposed for
the project
The subcontractor shall provide evidence including Employer’s certificates for the above.
Authorised Signature of Lead Designer and Company Seal
Authorised Signature of Tenderer and Company Seal
74 | P a g e
FORM OF TENDER / LETTER OF TENDER

Name of Work: Consultancy Service for peer review of the Draft Project Report Finalization of
Most suitable alignment for GMLR and its Bid Process Management.
Date: …………………….
To:
Mahapalika Fort
Mumbai – 400 001.
CONTRACT PACKAGE ---- (The Contract)
Dear Sirs,
1. Having inspected the Site, examined and taken account of, Volumes One to Eight (inclusive) and
addenda and all other information thereto (if any) issued by Municipal Corporation of Greater
Mumbai (MCGM) for the design and construction of the above-mentioned Works, and the
matters set out in Appendix FT-1 hereto, and having prepared, completed and signed, with
accompanying Company Seal, Appendices FT-1, FT-2, FT-3, FT-4 and FT-5 hereto, we hereby
(jointly and severally)* offer to design, construct and complete the whole of the said Works and
Commissioning and remedying any defects therein, in conformity with the Contract, the
Appendix to Tender and the Addenda within the completion period of 1461 days (from the
Commencement Date)
for the lump sum price of; ___________________________________________ ______________________ (currencies
and their amounts in figures and words) for Contract - Design and Construction Contract which
may be ascertained in accordance with the said conditions.
2. We acknowledge that the Appendices to the Form of Tender will form an integral part of the
Tender.
3. We undertake (jointly and severally) *:
(a) to keep this Tender open for acceptance for a minimum period of 180 days from
the date fixed for receiving the same without unilaterally varying or amending its
terms [and without any member withdrawing or any other change being made in
the composition of the Partnership/Joint Venture/Consortium on whose behalf
this Tender is submitted, which shall constitute a breach of this undertaking*] and
it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiry
of that period or any extended period mutually agreed to; and
75 | P a g e
(b) if our Tender is accepted, to provide Guarantees, Undertakings & Warranties for
the due performance of the Contract as stipulated in this ITT, Volume 2 Conditions
of Particular Application and Appendix FT-1 hereto; and
(c) to hold in confidence all documents and information whether technical or
commercial supplied to us at any time by or on behalf of the Employer in connection
with this Tender or
(d) with the above-mentioned Works and, without your written authority or as
otherwise required by law, not to publish or otherwise disclose the same.
4. We submit with this Tender a duly executed Tender Security Guarantee in respect of our
obligations under this Tender.
5. If our Tender is accepted, we will furnish a Bank Guarantee for the Performance Security for the
due performance of the Contract. The amount and form of such Guarantee or Bond will be in
accordance with Clause 4.2 of the Conditions of the Contract Part I and as indicated in Appendix
FT-1 of the Form of Tender.
6. Unless and until a formal agreement is prepared and executed, this Tender together with your
written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding contract between us.
7. Whether or not this Tender is accepted, to hold in confidence all documents and information
whether technical or commercial supplied to us at any time by or on behalf of the Municipal
Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM) in connection with this Tender or with the above-
mentioned Works and, without your written authority or as otherwise required by law, not to
publish or otherwise disclose the same.
8. We have independently considered Clause 8.6 of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Plant,
Design & Build 1999, and the amounts shown in the Appendix FT-1 Item 16, as Penalty for Delay
in achieving Key Dates and agree that it represents the damages likely to be suffered by the
Employer in the event of the work not being completed in time.
9. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender you may receive.
10. We declare that the submission of this Tender confirms that no agent, middleman or any
intermediary has been, or will be engaged to provide any services, or any other item of
work related to the award and performance of this Contract. We further confirm and
declare that no agency commission or any payment which may be construed as an
agency commission has been, or will be, paid and that the Tender price does not include
any such amount. We acknowledge the right of the Employer, if he finds to the contrary,
to declare our Tender to be non-compliant and if the Contract has been awarded to
declare the Contract null and void.
11. If our Tender is accepted we understand that we are to be held solely responsible for the due
performance of the Contract.
76 | P a g e
12. We further understand that all costs and expenses incurred by us in preparing this Tender and
participating in this Tender will be borne solely by us.
13. This Tender shall be governed by and construed in all respects according to the laws for the
time being in force in the Republic of India. For settlement of disputes, the courts at Mumbai
will have jurisdiction in the matter as noted in PCC Clause 107.
We are, Gentlemen,
Yours faithfully,
Signature______________________________ Signature______________________
Name_________________________________ Name_________________________
For and on behalf of _____________________ For and on behalf of ______________

_____________________________________ _______________________________
Address______________________________ Address_______________________
_____________________________________ _______________________________
Date: ________________________________ Date: ___________________________
Before (signature of witness) Before (signature of witness)

_____________________________________ _______________________________
Name of witness ________________________ Name of witness
Date: _________________________________ _______________________
Date: ___________________________
[ with Company Seal(s)]
* Notes:
If the Tenderer comprises a Partnership, Joint Venture or Consortium:
(a) The provisions marked with an asterisk are to be retained subject to deletion of the
brackets and inapplicable descriptions (i.e. Partnership, Joint Venture or Consortium)
(b) The liability of each member under the Tender, and under any Contract formed upon
its acceptance, will be joint and several.
(c) An authorised representative of each member must sign the Tender, with Company Seal.
(d) Signatures on the Form of Tender shall be witnessed and dated.
(e) Copies of the relevant Power of Attorney shall be attached.
77 | P a g e
FORM / LETTER OF TENDER - APPENDIX FT-1

CONTRACT DATA
Sl.
Item CoC Sub-Clause Description
No.
Employer
(1) The Municipal Commissioner,
Municipal Corporation of Greater
Mumbai (MCGM), 2nd Floor,
Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika,
Fort, Mumbai – 400 001.
(2) The Additional Municipal
Commissioner to whom the powers
of the Municipal Commissioner, have
Employer’s and
1.1.2.2 been delegated under Section 56 and
1. Engineer’s Name and Part I
& 1.1.2.4 56B of the Mumbai Municipal
Address
Corporation Act.
The Engineer: -
The Chief Engineer (CTI & RC)
Civic Training Institute & Research
Centre Abhinav Nagar,
Near National Park, Borivali,
Mumbai – 400 066.
Email: che.gmlr@mcgm.gov.in
Portal: http://portal.mcgm.gov.in
Contractor’s name and
2. Part I 1.1.2.3
address
General Consultant (GC) means any
consultant or the person appointed from
time to time by the Employer to perform
“Employer’s
specified duty as per the contract
Representative”
3a. Part II 1.1 (g) entered in between the Employer and
means General
the consultant or the person as “General
Consultant(GC)
Consultant” for the entire stretch of
Goregaon Mulund Link Road Tunnel
Project of the work.
“Employer’s Project Management PMC (PMC) means
3b. Part I 1.1 (g)
Personnel” means any consultant or the person appointed
78 | P a g e
Sl.
No.
Project Management from time to time by the Employer to
Consultant(PMC) perform specified duty as per contract
entered in between the Employer and
the consultant or the person appointed
separately by Employer, Goregaon
Mulund Link Road Tunnel Project for all
sections of the work.
Time for 15 days from
4. commencement of Part I 8.1 the date of receipt of Letter of
works Acceptance (LOA)
Time for Completion 1461 days (inclusive of Monsoon) from
5. Part I 1.1.3.3
of the Works the time of commencement
Foreign
6. Part I 1.1.4.6 Nil
Currency/Currencies
The law applicable is Law of Union of
7. Law of the Contract Part I 1.4
India
8. Ruling language Part I 1.4 English (India)
Language for
9. Part I 1.4 English (India)
communications
By Fax/ Electronic mail followed by
Electronic
10. Part I 1.8 hand delivery/ airmail/ courier/ speed
transmission systems
post.
Details which are not related to the
11. Confidential details Part I 1.12 Contract and not required by the Tender
documents or Contract documents
Time for access to the
12. Part I 2.2 Refer to Volume 3 Appendix 2A.
Site
Amount of
3% of the Contract Price
13. Performance Part I 4.2
Refer to Clause 5.5 of Volume 1
Guarantee
Time for submission of Part I 8.3
14. 90 days from the Commencement Date
Programme Part II and 8.3
Day or night (24 hours) subject to local
15. Normal working hours Part I 6.5
Authority regulations
79 | P a g e
Sl.
No.
Penalty for the delay
Refer to item No. 36 of this Appendix FT-
16. in achieving the Key Part I 8.6
1.
Dates for the Works
Limit of Penalty for
17. the delay in achieving Part I 8.6 10 % of the Contract Price
the Key Dates
Liquidated damages
18. for failing Tests after Part I 11.4 1% of the Contract Price
Completion
Total amount of
19.
advance payments
a) Mobilisation
Part II PCC 14.2 10% of the Contract Price
Advance
b) Advance against
procurement of
Part II PCC 14.2 10% of the Contract Price
tunnel boring
machine
Number and timing of
20.
instalments
In two equal instalments.
First instalment paid on submission of
a) Mobilisation BG and after mobilization has started
Part II PCC 14.2
Advance and second instalment paid after
satisfactory utilization of the first
instalment.
b) Advance against
Shall be paid against hypothecation of
procurement of
Part II PCC 14.2 plant and machinery to the Employer /
tunnel boring
the Engineer.
machine
Recovery of the In equal instalments starting from when
Mobilisation and Plant 20% of the original Contract Value of the
21. Part II PCC 14.2
and Machinery Work has been paid, and complete
Advances before 85% of Work is paid or the
80 | P a g e
Sl.
No.
original Date of Completion, whichever
is earlier.
Interest rate shall be at 13%.
10% from each Interim Payment
Recovery of Retention Part I 14.9 Certificate (IPC) starting from 1st
22.
Money Part II PCC 14.9 running bill till it reaches 5% of the
Contract Sum
Limit of Retention
23. Part I 13.3 5% of the Contract Sum
Money
Minimum amount of
24. Interim Payment Part I 14.6 2% of the Contract Price
Certificates
Payments in Local and

25. 1.1.4.8 & 14.15 In Indian Rupees.
Foreign Currencies Part I
If there are Provisional

Sums:
26. Percentage for Part I 13.5 Not Applicable
adjustment of
Provisional Sums
Amount of insurance
27. Part I 18.1 3% of the Contract
for design
Amount of third party Rs. 10 Lakhs for any one incident, with
28. Part I 18.3
insurance number of incidents unlimited.
Periods for
submission of
insurance
29. Part II PCC 18.5 14 days
(a) evidence of
insurance
30 days
(b) relevant policies
Part I 20.2, 20.3 & 20.4 Dispute or Difference to be referred to
30. Dispute Adjudication the Commissioner:
Part II PCC 20.2
81 | P a g e
Sl.
No.
Refer to PCC 20.2
Indian Arbitration and Conciliation Act,

31. Arbitration rules Part I 20.6 1996, as amended in 2015 and from time
to time
Part I 20.6 Arbitration
32 Number of arbitrators and
Part II PCC 20.6 Refer to PCC 20.6
Language of
33. Part I 20.6 English (India)
arbitration
34. Place of arbitration Part I 20.6 Mumbai, India
13.1
Part I
Price Variation
35. Refer Tables 2, 3 and 4 below.
Formula PCC 13.8
Part II
Penalty for the delay

36. for not achieving the Part I 8.7 Refer Table 1 below.
Key Dates
Table 1. (Refer Item 36)

Penalty for the delay Penalty for the delay in Penalty for the delay
Key Dates
in achieving the Key achieving the Key in achieving the Key
(Refer Appendix 2B of
Dates, for first 28 Dates, between Dates, from Day 57
Volume 3)
days. Day 29 and Day 56. onwards
Key Date KD1 Rs. 50,000 per day Rs. 250,000 per day Rs. 5,000,000 per day
82 | P a g e
Table 2 (Refer Item 38)
Factor and
% of weightage
Description
(a) Fixed 0.15
(b) Labour 0.25
(c) Steel 0.25
(d) Cement 0.15
(e) Fuel 0.10
(f) Plant and
0.10
Machinery
Table 3. (Refer Item 38)

Indices Published by
Index for: Origin of Input Currency of
Economic Adviser to Base Value on
(factor) (country) Index
Govt. of India/ RBI
India INR Industrial Workers 28 days prior to
Labour
India INR Mild Steel Long date of
Steel
India INR Cement & Lime and submission of
Cement
India INR plaster Tender
Fuel
Fuel and Power
Plant and
India INR Construction
Machinery
Machinery- (RBI)
83 | P a g e
Note: If indices from the above-mentioned sources are not available, alternate equivalent
indices published by Director of Industrial Affairs or other sources of Government of India may
be used, subject to the Notice of the Engineer
Authorised Signatory for the Tenderer with Company Seal.
Date ………………………….……… Name ………………..…………….
Address …………………..………………………..………………………..……….
84 | P a g e
FORM OF TENDER - APPENDIX FT-2

FINANCIAL DOCUMENT / PRICING DOCUMENT
The Pricing Document Volume 8 of the Tender documents, duly completed in all respects is
to be submitted, and shall be included in the Financial Package.
Tenderers may offer a tender discount:
Tenderers who are pre-qualified for two contracts may offer tender discount for:
i) Package ________ awarded in combination with Package _____; or

ii) Package _________ awarded in combination with Package ______.
Such discounts shall be quoted as a separate Commercial Proposal, namely e- Packet C1.
Discounts will be calculated against the combined Tender amounts for the discounts offered
by the “L1” Tenderers only.
Note: - There is no provision in the system to input the “Discount Quote” for e- Packet C1. The
tenderers shall fill the above Discount Quote for combination of packages depending upon
number of packages they qualify. The Discount Quote shall be duly filled, signed by the
Authorized Signatory with the company’s authorized seal, scan it and upload as Commercial
Bid e-Packet C1 with encrypted secured RAR/WIN Zip file with file locking code for opening
by the tenderer. This secured file locking code shall be submitted in sealed packet to the
commercial bid opening authority at the time of opening of e-Packet C. The file locking code
shall be correct, and the tenderers shall remember and submit correctly, failing which the
Employer shall not be responsible for non-opening of Discount Quote (s) due to incorrect file
locking code.
85 | P a g e

QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM and OUTLINE QUALITY PLAN
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a Quality Assurance System in accordance with
Appendix 6 of Volume 3 Employer's Requirements, for design and construction procedures and
the interfaces between them and other Interface Contractors. This Quality Assurance system shall
be applied without prejudice to, or without in any way limiting, any Quality Assurance Systems
that the Tenderer already maintains.
The Tenderer shall submit as part of his Tender an Outline Quality Plan which shall contain
sufficient information to demonstrate clearly the Tenderer's proposals for achieving effective and
efficient Quality Assurance System. The Outline Quality Plan should include an outline of the
procedures and regulations to be developed and the mechanism by which they will be
implemented for ensuring Quality as required by Appendix 6 of the Employer's Requirements –
Design.
The Tenderer may be requested to amplify, explain or develop its Outline Quality Plan prior to
the date of acceptance of the Tender and to provide more details with a view to reaching
provisional acceptance of such a Plan.
86 | P a g e

OUTLINE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT PLAN
The Tenderer shall submit as part of his Tender an Outline Occupational Health, Safety &
Environment Plan which shall contain sufficient information to demonstrate clearly the
Tenderer's proposals for achieving effective and efficient compliance to the requirements of the
Tender on Occupational Health, Safety and Environment (OHS&E). The Outline Occupational
Health, Safety and Environment Plan should include an outline of the procedures and regulations
to be developed and the mechanism by which they will be implemented for ensuring Safety as
required by Sub-Clause Nos. B16, D5, D6 and Appendix 17 of Volume 3 of the Employer's
Requirements, Sub-Clause 6.7 of Part I General Conditions of Contract, and PCC Clause 35 of Part
II Particular Conditions of Contract.
The Outline Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Plan shall be headed with the
firms/Joint Venture’s formal statement of policy in relation to Occupational Health, Safety and
Environment protection. The Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Plan shall be
sufficiently informative to define the Tenderer's plans and set out in summary an adequate basis
for the development of the Site Occupational Health, Safety & Environment Plan to be submitted
in accordance with Sub-Clause Nos. B16, D5, D6 and Appendix 17 of Volume 3 of the Employer's
Requirements, Sub-Clause 6.7 of Part I General Conditions of Contract and PCC Clause 35 of Part
II Particular Conditions of Contract.
The Tenderer may be requested to amplify, explain or develop his Outline Occupational Health,
Safety & Environment Plan prior to the date of acceptance of the Tender and to provide more
details with a view to reaching provisional acceptance of such a plan.
87 | P a g e
Pricing Schedule
88 | P a g e
Instructions for Financial Quotes
The Tenderer shall submit the Commercial bid (e-Packet C) via online “Commercial
Quote” by filling the Complete Financial Proposals. It is mandatory to submit e-Packet C.
89 | P a g e
Online Pricing Schedule
Subject: Design and Construction of Twin Tube Road Tunnel including approach road at
Description Quantity Rate Total Price

Design and Construction of Twin Tube
Road Tunnel including approach road at
1 Lump Sum NOT TO BE FILLED
Signature of the Authorized Signatory
Note: - 1) This form is only for reference, applicant/ tenderers should not enter any cost
in this form and the cost shall be entered online in “Commercial Quote” tab
generated in the e-tendering system only.
(Please see Instructions)
2) There is no provision in the system for “Discount Quote” APPENDIX FT-2 in
e- Packet C1. The tenderers shall fill the above Discount Quote for combination
of packages depending upon number of packages they qualifies. The Discount
Quote shall be duly filled, signed by the authorized signatory with the
company’s authorized seal, scan it and upload as Commercial Bid e-Packet C1
with encrypted secured RAR/WIN Zip file with file locking code for opening by
the tenderer. This secured file locking code shall be submitted in sealed packet
to the commercial bid opening authority at the time of opening of e-Packet C.
The file locking code shall be correct, and the tenderers shall remember and
submit correctly, failing which the Employer shall not be responsible for non-
opening of Discount Quote (s) due to incorrect file locking code
90 | P a g e

TENDERER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
The Tenderer shall prepare his Technical Proposals based on the contents of Annexure 3 to the
Instructions to Tenderers.
91 | P a g e
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code : GMLR/ 000
Design and Construction of Twin Tube Road Tunnel including approach road at Goregaon Mulund Link Road
(GMLR)
Volume 3
Employer’s Requirment
Appendices 1 to 19
1|Page
Sr. Description Page

No. No.
APPENDIX – 1 : DRAWING LIST ................................................................................................................................. 4

APPENDIX – 2A : WORK AREA.................................................................................................................................... 8
APPENDIX – 2B : CONTRACT KEY DATES AND COMPLETION DATE ........................................................ 9
APPENDIX – 3 : PROJECT CALENDAR .................................................................................................................... 12
APPENDIX – 4 : PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 14
APPENDIX – 5 : MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS ............................................................................................. 27
APPENDIX – 6 : QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 34
APPENDIX – 7 : DRAUGHTING AND CAD STANDARDS .................................................................................. 60
APPENDIX – 8 : WORKS AREAS & TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY............................................................. 70
APPENDIX – 9 : MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS ............................................................................................ 78
APPENDIX – 10 : CURVES AND GRADIENT DETAILS ...................................................................................... 80
APPENDIX-11 : UTILITIES .......................................................................................................................................... 82
APPENDIX – 12 : SITE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER ............................................................... 92
APPENDIX – 13 :CONTRACTORS SITE LABORATORY .................................................................................... 95
APPENDIX – 14 : EARTHING AND GRID ............................................................................................................ 101
APPENDIX - 15 : ADJACENT WORKS CONTRACTS ........................................................................................ 115
APPENDIX – 16 : DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION INTERFACE MANAGEMENT ................................. 116
APPENDIX – 17 : OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ................................ 149
APPENDIX – 18 : DOCUMENT IDENTIFICAITON AND NUMBERING ..................................................... 182
APPENDIX – 19 : NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES .......................................................................................... 190
2|Page
VOLUME 3
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX-1
DRAWING LIST
3|Page
APPENDIX – 1: DRAWING LIST
DRAWING LIST
Goregaon Mulund Link Road
SL No Discipline Drawing Number Drawing Title

GMLR/MCGM/34055/AL/01 Tunnel Alignment
1 Alignment
GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/01 Tunnel Portal at Goregaon and
2 Mulund End
Typical Cross
Section of GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/01A Detail specifications of left and right
3 Tunnel Portal tunnel
and Cross
passage GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/02 Typical Cross-Section-Vehicular Cross
4 Passage
GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/03 Plan Showing GAD for GMLR Tunnel

5 CH:0+000 to 0+600

6 CH:0+600 to 1+200

7 CH:1+200 to 1+800

8 CH:1+800 to 2+400

9 Tunnel Plan CH:2+400 to 3+000

10 CH:3+000 to 3+600

11 CH:3+600 to 4+200

12 CH:4+200 to 4+800

13 CH:4+800 to 5+400
4|Page
DRAWING LIST

14 CH:5+400 to 5+945
GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/13 Vertical Profile for GMLR Alignment

15 CH:0+000 to 0+975

16 CH:0+975 to 1+950

17 CH:1+950 to 2+925

18 CH:2+925 to 3+900
Vertical Profile
of Tunnel GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/17 Vertical Profile for GMLR Alignment
19 CH:3+900 to 4+875

20 CH:4+875 to 5+955
GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/501 Plan & Curve Block Details for GMLR

21
CH: 0+000 TO 0+600
22
CH: 0+600 TO 1+200
23
CH: 1+200 TO 1+800
24
CH: 1+800 TO 2+400
25
Road Plan & CH: 2+400 TO 3+000
Curve Details GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/506 Plan & Curve Block Details for GMLR
26
CH: 3+000 TO 3+600
27
CH: 3+600 TO 4+200
28
CH: 4+200 TO 4+800
29
CH: 4+800 TO 5+400
30
CH: 5+400 TO 5+966
31
Vertical Profile Vertical Profile for GMLR Alignment
GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/511
of Road Ch. 0+000m to 1+130m
5|Page
DRAWING LIST

Vertical Profile for GMLR Alignment
32 GMLR/MCGM/34055/CIVIL/512
Ch. 1+130m to 2+250m
Ch. 2+250m to 3+380m
Ch. 3+380m to 4+510m
Ch. 4+510m to 5+640m
Ch. 5+640m to 5+945m
37 GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/01 Power Temple Layout
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/02 SLD Power Supply

38
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/03 General Power supply Arrangement
39
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/03A Power Room LT Panel
40
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/03B Tunnel Middle Substation LT Panel
41
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/03C LT Panel for Fire Fighting Pump
42
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/04 Substation 33KV/433 V at Mulund &
43 Goregaon Ends
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/05 Control Room on the first floor of

44 E&M & Tunnel
Mulund End substation
Ventilation
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/06 Layout of Equipment in LT Power
45 panel room
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/07 Fire Fighting Pump Room

46
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/08 Different Light Zones and Lengths
47
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/09 Requirement of Lighting Levels in
48 Different zones
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/10 Cable Tray Layout for Lighting

49 Different Light zones and Lengths
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/11 Layout of LDB & ELDB for Tunnel

50 Lighting
6|Page
DRAWING LIST

GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/12 Transverse Ventilation System
51
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/13 Tentative Jet fan and VFD Locations
52
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/14 Mounting Arrangement of Jet Fan
53
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/15 Grouting of HDPE pipes on the
side wall of Tunnel for laying power
54
and control cables
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/16 Tentative Location of various Sensors

55 inside the Tunnel
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/17 LED Variable messages Sign Display

56
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/17A LED Signage and cross passage
57 Diversion Indication
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/18 CC TV Layout
58
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/19 Layout of Speakers and Telephones
59 inside the Tunnel
GMLR/MCGM/34055/E&M/20 Bypass Rolling shutter

60
7|Page
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX – 2A
WORK AREA
Refer to Section D3, Volume 03
8|Page
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX – 2B
CONTRACT KEY DATES AND COMPLETION DATE
9|Page
CONTRACT No. GMLR /

CONTRACT KEY DATES FOR ROAD & ROAD TUNNEL
Number of Days
Key
Description from
Dates
Commencement
KD-01 Site Set Up
KD-02 Excavation for TBM launching Area
KD-03 Construction of Portals
KD-04 Initial drive of Tunnel TBM-1
KD-05 Initial drive of Tunnel TBM-2
KD-05 Completion of Tunnel to one Km for both TBM-1 & 2
KD-06 Completion of Tunnel to Four Km for both TBM-1 & 2
KD-07 Construction of Cross passage
KD-08 Different package of Tunnel
Completion of Road work and Drainage within Tunnel, Cross passages

KD-09
and approach roads including road furniture
KD-10 Completion of Ventilation and Scada work including ancillary building
KD-11 Completion of E&M Works and Signage’s

KD-12 Handing over of Entire Work
KD-13 Defects Liability Period (DLP)
Notes to Key Dates

• The achievement of Key Date shall be subject to the issuing of a Notice of No Objection from the Engineer.
• The achievement of a Degree of Completion for a Key Date shall require the completion of the works for
that particular Degree of Completion and all preceding ones.
• The Degree of Completion shall be read in conjunction with the Interface Specifications to establish access
requirements for Interfacing Contractors.
• The access and order for completion of the work specified within each Degree of Completion shall be
coordinated among the Interfacing Contractors and E&M Subcontractor in the development of the
Coordinated Installation Programme (CIP).
10 | P a g e
SPECIFIED DEGREES OF COMPLETION
Degree 1 Degree 2 Degree 3

▪ Permanent cross-passage ▪ Complete all works
▪ Tunnel structure complete,
doors ironmongery including testing
clean, dry and watertight
installed and commissioning
▪ Wearing Coat concrete,
walkway, cable trough / duct
▪ All graphics and signage
complete and surveyed. As-
complete
built records on road level
and alignment available
▪ Complete all cable ▪ Permanent Power system
containment, cable supports, including Uninterruptible
and all mounting facilities for Power supply
Interfacing contractors (UPS)system complete
▪ Earthing and bonding ▪ Permanent Tunnel
connections complete Lighting system complete
▪ Drainage system and
discharge connection ▪ Permanent E&M system
complete with temporary complete
pumps
▪ Temporary tunnel
▪ Energisation of main LV
ventilation, background
switchboards complete
lighting, power, and water,
and permanent LV supply
available for Interfacing
available
Contractors
▪ Permanent pumps
▪ Clear routes available for
installed and
plant access
commissioned
▪ Lifting facilities installed and
certified
▪ Permanent cross-passage
and door installed
▪ Contractor's Equipment
removed
11 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 3
PROJECT CALENDAR
12 | P a g e
PROJECT CALENDAR
(1) The Project Week shall commence on a Monday. A day shall be deemed to commence at 0001
hour on the morning of the day in question. Where reference is made to the completion of an
activity or Milestone by a particular week, this shall mean by midnight on the Sunday of that
week.
(2) Requirements for the computation of Key Dates are given in Appendix 2B to the Employer's
Requirements, Volume 3.
(3) A 7-day week calendar shall be adopted for various (Work) programme schedules for
scheduling purposes. Any non-work restriction shall be deemed to have been taken into
account in the calendar to plan and programme the Works.
(4) For Project purposes, the presentation shall be in ‘Week’ units.
13 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX – 4
PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS
14 | P a g e
PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
i. Purpose of Programme
There are two primary purposes for the requirement of Programme (Scheduling)
information described in this document:
1. Evaluation of Tender (Tender Programme)
2. Progress Status Reports during Construction (Construction Work Programme)
To provide the Engineer with progress status reports for managing,

monitoring and coordinating the awarded contracts during their execution
within the overall multi-contract project schedule.
The requirements are organized in two stages. The first stage is a requirement
for all Tenderers and shall be submitted as part of Tender. The second stage is
a requirement of the Employer and describes a series of reports to be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer during the execution of the
contract, following the award of Contract.
ii. The Tenderer/ Contractor shall programme his work at all times to meet the Key
Dates and the Works Areas Access Dates stated in Appendices 2A and 2B respectively
to the Employer's Requirements, and the specified interface periods for the design
and installation of the Works with those of the Interfacing Contractors. The
Tenderer/ Contractor shall during the progress of the Works constantly monitor his
progress against the programmes described below.
iii. The Tenderer/ Contractor shall include in all programmes his work obligations
towards shared access, shared Site areas and other coincident or adjacent work areas
with regard to all interfacing parties.
iv. The Works Programme, and all more detailed or revised versions, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for his Notice in accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of
Contract.
2. METHODOLOGY
a. The computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) network using the Precedence
Diagramming Method (PDM), has been selected by the Employer as the technique
for contract management system and in co-ordinating the multi-contract project.
This technique shall also be employed by the Tenderer in preparing their Tender
submissions and by the Contractor in their Construction Stage submissions.
15 | P a g e
b. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all programmes submitted by the

Contractor shall be produced using computerized Critical Path Method (CPM)
Networks developed implementing the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM)
with Cost Loaded Charts and Tables, using the required software stated in Clause 3
below.
The Contractor shall implement and use throughout the duration of the Contract, a
computerized system to plan, execute, maintain and manage the planning, design, pre-
construction, construction, and sub-contracts in executing the CPM scheduling by PDM.
The reports, documents and data provided shall be an accurate representation of the
current status of the Works and of the work remaining to be accomplished; shall provide
a sound basis for identifying problems, deviations from the planned works, and for
making decisions; and shall enable timely preparation of the same for presentation to the
Engineer.
3. PROGRAMME MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
CPM programming software used shall be Primavera Project Planning (P6) Program or
latest version. Scheduling software and relevant instruction manuals, licensed for use in
connection with the contract, shall be provided by the Contractor according to the
Employer’s specifications. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with three original
licensed copies, including manuals and approved training of the software and any
subsequent versions thereof at no extra cost.
4. POST CONTRACT AWARD
5.1 The Contractor shall develop his Tender Programme into the Initial Works
Programme including an outline Narrative Statement and submit within 4 weeks of
the date of commencement and a more detailed version within 7 weeks of receiving
the Engineer ’s Notice to proceed to the proposed Initial Works Programme. Refer
Clause 7.0.
5.2 The first Three Month Rolling Programme shall be submitted within 4 weeks of the
date of Commencement and all subsequent editions shall accompany the Monthly
Progress Report. The Monthly Progress Reports shall also include a Programme
Update as described below. These programmes shall subsequently be updated as
described below. Refer Clause 9.0.
5.3 Following the Contractor's Initial Works Programme submission but in any case, no
later than 21 weeks from the date of commencement of the Contract, the Contractor
shall submit a detailed Works Programme suitably amended to take into account
16 | P a g e
the programmes of Interfacing Contractors, Interfacing Agencies and E&M and TVS
Subcontractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure timely co-ordination
with all relevant Parties. The resubmitted Works Programme when given a Notice
by the Engineer shall form the Baseline Programme which shall solely be used for
monitoring and evaluating all facets of the Contractor’s performance including, but
not limited to, actual progress and the effects of variations and delays. The
Contractor shall monitor his own performance against the Baseline Programme on
a weekly basis and shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written and
computerised monthly reports including all supporting data. As the work
progresses, it may be necessary to update/ revise the Baseline programme, but such
updating shall only be carried out with the prior consent of the Engineer or when
directed by them.
5.4 For the Initial & Detailed Works Programme submission, one (1) original and six
(6) colour copies, with a softcopy on a CD, each of the following programmes and
reports shall be submitted to the Engineer:
a) Programme: Baseline CPM Network Recourse & Cost loaded Activity Schedule
b) Programme: Baseline Milestone based Cost Activity Schedule
c) Baseline Schedule Report
d) Narrative Statement
e) Baseline Physical Progress 'S' curve
f) Baseline Resource Charts
5.5 The Engineer shall review and comment on the Contractor’s programmes and
information submitted under this Clause. The Employer’s
Representative will issue his notice or otherwise of the submissions within 4 weeks.
5.6 The Engineer shall require the Contractor to re-submit within 2 weeks if he is of
the opinion that the programmes and information submitted by the Contractor
is unlikely to meet the Contract key dates.
5.7 If in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the Contractor's revised programmes and
information submitted under the Works Programme is not acceptable, it shall be
construed as a failure of the Contractor to meet a Milestone.
5.8 Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer may at any time during the course of
17 | P a g e
the Contract require the Contractor to reproduce the computer-generated

Baseline Schedule Report described above to reflect actual activity dates and
generate schedules based upon "what if" statements. The initial computer-
generated report after receiving the Engineer’s notice will serve as the base
against which the contract progress will be measured. Any changes to the Report
reflected in subsequent Baseline Schedule Reports shall also require the
Engineer’s consent.
5.9 Failure to include any element of work required for performance of the Contract
shall not relieve the Contractor from completing all works required under the
Contract to achieve the original or any extended key completion date.
6. WORKS PROGRAMME
(1) The Works Programme shall detail the full scope of the works taking into account
the complex nature and different phases of the contract and shall be accompanied
by detailed supporting information to demonstrate through the sequence and
duration of the activities that the plans are achievable and realistic and that the
works to be undertaken can meet the requirements of the contract.
(2) The Works Programme shall be a computerised Critical Path Method (CPM)
network developed using the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) and shall
be present in bar chart and time-scaled network diagram format to a weekly or
monthly time scale.
(3) Tasks in the Works Programme shall be sufficiently detailed to describe activities
and events that include, but are not limited to, the following:
(a) Key Dates, Works Areas Access Dates, any interface and handover dates
(b) All physical work to be undertaken in the performance of the Contract

obligations, including Temporary Works
(c) The requested date for issue of any drawings or information by the Engineer
(d) Incorporation of principal aspects of the Design Programme and Design

Submission Programme, including achievement of Preliminary Design,
Definitive design and Construction Reference Drawings.
(e) Due time allowance for review by the Engineer of the Contractor’s
submissions, as well as the subsequent amendment and re-submission by
the Contractor in the design review and comment process,
(e) Due time allowance for complying with requirements of all Government
18 | P a g e
Departments and all others whose consent, permissions, authority or

licence is required prior to the execution of any work.
(f) Order, procurement, manufacture, delivery, testing and installation of

major materials and the delivery and/or partial delivery date on-Site of
principal items of Contractor's Equipment.
(g) Any off-site work such as production or pre-fabrication of components
(h) Installation of temporary construction facilities
(i) Interface periods with the Interfacing subcontractors or utility undertakings
(j) Design, supply and/or construction activities of sub-contractors
(k) Testing, commissioning and integrated testing of the Works.
(l) Any outside influence which will or may affect the Project.
(m) Mobilization and demobilization
(n) Weather allowance
(o) Completion of core areas / rooms for access by interfacing subcontractor parties.
(4) The Works Programme shall show achievement of all Key Dates. The programme
shall also show Milestones, but the Milestones shall not be taken as imposing any
constraints that in any way affect the logic or limit any other dates in the
programme.
(5) Activity descriptions shall be unique, describing discrete elements of work. Any
activity creating an imposed time or other constraint shall be fully defined by the
Contractor.
(6) The Works Programme shall be organised in a logical work-breakdown-structure

including work stages and phases and shall clearly indicate the critical path(s).
Each activity in the Works Programme shall be coded to indicate:
(a) Activity ID and Activity Code which structure should be agreed with the Engineer.
(b) The Engineer may request additional activity coding to the extent available
without restraint to the Contractor’s utilisation of the programme software.
When requested, the Contractor shall add the required additional coding to
the Programme. The Contractor shall use additional code fields as requested
to comply with the requirements and for the use of the Contractor.
(7) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks, unless otherwise consented to
by the Engineer, except non-construction activities such as submittals, submittal
19 | P a g e
reviews, procurement and delivery of materials or equipment and concrete

curing. The Contractor shall submit a Programme/Project Calendar cross
reference clearly indicating the allowance for holidays.
(8) The Works Programme, in each submission, shall be accompanied by an Activity

Report and a Narrative Statement as described below in both electronic and
hard copy format (time scale logic diagrams in A1 size, reports in A4 size).
(9) Activity Report
Shall list all activities, and events in the Works Programme, sorted by activity
identification number.
The Activity Report shall include the following for each activity and event:
(a) Activity identification number and description,
(b) Duration expressed in Days,
(c) Early and late start & early and late finish dates/-. Planned start and finish dates,
(d) Calculated total float and free float,
(e) Predecessor and successor(s), accompanying relationships and lead/lag

duration,
(f) Imposed time or date constraints,
(g) Calendar.
(10) Narrative
The Narrative shall be a comprehensive statement of the Contractor’s plan and

approach for the execution of the Works and the achievement of key dates,
access to subcontractor dates, submission dates and any intermediate dates. It
shall incorporate outline method statements in respect of major items of work
including construction sequences and primary items of plant, Construction
Equipment, Temporary Works and the like. It shall fully explain the reasons
for the main logic links in the Programme and include particulars of how
activity durations are established. This shall include estimated quantities,
production rates, hours per shift, work days per week and a listing of the major
items of Construction Equipment planned for use on the project. Activities,
which may be expedited by use of overtime or additional shifts, shall be
identified and explained. A listing of holidays, and other special non-work days
20 | P a g e
being used for the computer reports shall be included.
Supporting information and an accompanying narrative for the Programme

that details the basis and assumptions upon which the programme has been
drawn shall be prepared and submitted as detailed (but not limited to) below:
i. A narrative description of the sequence of all sections of the Works and

in particular a detailed identification and description of the critical path
activities. The narrative shall be supported by sketches illustrating the
planning sequences of construction phase of works;
ii. Marked up plans detailing the concreting and concrete our dates for
major section of each part of the structure;
iii. An overall manpower forecast detailing individual trades and other sub-
contract / indirect labour, commissioning teams in terms of the daily
number of workers planned to be engaged. The formats for these
forecasts shall be in accordance with the Engineer ’s requirements;
iv. Typical cycle time analysis;
v. Planned production outputs for all major activities and areas of Works;
vi. List of major items of plant and equipment that are required to be
procured identifying the required lead times;
vii. Accumulative curves and histograms showing the planned weekly

figures for each principal quantity, major item of equipment and major
power trades;
viii. Any programme constraints, giving details of the constraints and

substantiation thereto;
ix. Total float listing in order of total float;
x. Daily and weekly working hours, holidays and shift patterns;
xi. Other information that the Engineer may request;
(11) Physical Progress 'S' Curve
The Contractor shall also submit at the end of every month, for inclusion in the
Monthly Progress Report as stated in Appendix 5, a forecast Cumulative
Physical Progress 'S' curve based on the time-phased distribution of cost in the
CPM Network Logic Diagram, expressed in percentage terms and plotted with
the early and late dates. This ‘S’ curve shall be generated from the
computerised CPM Network Logic Diagram.
21 | P a g e
(12) Resources
The Contractor shall provide on the submission of the Baseline programme

full resource details for major activities including but not limited to the
substructure, superstructure, architectural and building services fit out stages
of the works. These shall include
• Major manpower trades

• Number of items of major plant and equipment
• Principal quantities (i.e, volume of excavation, volume of concrete,
tonnage of steel work / reinforcement, area of formwork, length of
pipe work etc.)
• Other details as appropriate or required by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall also Resource Charts, generated from the
Contractor’s
CPM Network Diagram, showing the anticipated manpower and main

Construction Equipment usage during the execution of the Project.
As an additional monitoring facility, indicator resources shall be assigned to

relevant activities for the major items of work. Indicator resources shall be
directly allocated for excavation (cu.m.), piling (no.), diaphragm walling (m.),
concrete (cu.m.), tunnel lining (m), etc. Resource indicators may be input as a
daily rate, expected required rate, or as an activity total in the relevant units.
These are purely indicative quantities and do not form part of contract.
(13) All submissions of proposed Works Programmes subsequently, after

approval of the Initial Works Programme, shall include the actual physical
progress of work and forecast of the remaining work. Actual progress shall
be stated in percent complete, remaining duration, and actual start and finish
dates for each activity in the Works Programme.
7. INITIAL WORKS PROGRAMME
(1) The Initial Works Programme submitted as under Clause 5.1 need not include
the full details given under Clause 6 above. It should be a condensed version
with combined activities of longer duration but must show clearly how the
requirements of the Contract are to be achieved. The outline Narrative
Statement shall be in sufficient detail to clearly show the Contractor's
intention.
(2) Within 7 weeks of the Engineer ’s consent to the Initial Works Programme,
22 | P a g e
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an expanded and more detailed
version of the Initial Works Programme containing all of the information and
detail required under Clause 6 above.
(3) Such submission shall make use of the Tender Programme submitted earlier
but refined to include the best estimates of dates for the work of Interfacing
Contracts which has impact on the Contractor's programme. Such
programmes shall be amended subsequently to incorporate the actual dates/
schedule of the affecting contracts. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure timely co-ordination with the Interfacing Contractors to finalise the
Initial Programme, without affecting progress of the work.
8. WORKS PROGRAMME REVISIONS
(1) The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of the need
for any changes in the Works Programme, whether due to a change of
intention or of circumstances or for any other reason. Where such proposed
change affects timely completion of the Works or any other Key Date the
Contractor shall within fourteen (14) days of the date of notifying the
Engineer submit for the Engineer 's notices its proposed revised Works
Programme and accompanying Narrative Statement. The proposed revised
Works Programme shall show the sequence of operations of any and all
works related to the change and the impact of changed work or changed
conditions.
(2) If at any time the Engineer considers the actual or anticipated progress of the
work reflects a significant deviation from the Works Programme, he may
request the Contractor to submit a proposed revised Programme which
together with an accompanying Activity Report and Narrative Statement,
shall be submitted by the Contractor within fourteen (14) days after the
Engineer's instruction. The proposed revised Works Programme shall show
the sequence of operations of any and all work related to the change and the
impact of changed work or changed conditions.
a) All activities that have negative float must be analysed by the Contractor to
identify the impact on the timely completion of the Works or on the
achievement of Key Dates.
23 | P a g e
9. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME
(1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be an expansion of the current
Works Programme showing the activities completed in the last month and
the activities that are in progress or will start within the next three (3)
months. The Three Month Rolling Programme shall provide more detail of
the Contractor's plan, organisation and execution of the work within these
periods. The Contractor shall expand each activity planned to occur during
the next three (3) month period, if necessary, to a daily level of detail.
(2) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be developed as a Critical Path
Method (CPM) network and shall be presented in bar chart and time-scaled
network diagram format. Bar charts shall be presented on A4 sheets and
time-scaled networks diagrams A3 size. Tasks in the programme shall be
derivatives of and directly related to tasks in the Noticed Works Programme.
One (1) original and six (6) colour copies, with a softcopy on a CD, of the
schedule shall be submitted
(3) The Contractor shall describe the discrete work elements and work element
inter-relationships necessary to complete all works and any separable parts
thereof including work assigned to sub-contractors.
(4) Activity duration shall not exceed two (2) weeks unless otherwise notice
given by the Engineer.
(5) Each activity in the Three Month Rolling Programme shall be coded or
described so as clearly to indicate the corresponding activity in the Works
Programme.
(6) The three months Rolling Programme shall require the Engineer notice for
payment purposes.
10. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME REVISIONS AND UPDATE
(1) The Three Month Rolling Programme shall be a progress update of the
accepted Baseline Programme. The Three Month Rolling Programme shall
be extended forward each month as described under Clause 9 above. Each
submission of the Three Month Rolling Programme shall be accompanied
by a Programme Analysis Report, describing actual progress to date, and
the forecast for activities occurring over the next three-month period.
24 | P a g e
(2) If the Three Month Rolling Programme is at variance with the Works
Programme, the Programme Analysis Report shall be accompanied by a
supporting Narrative Statement describing the Contractor's plan for the
execution of the activities to be undertaken over the three-month period,
including programme assumptions and methods to be employed in
achieving timely completion.
(3) The Contractor shall revise the Three Month Rolling Programme or propose
revisions of the Works Programme in accordance with Clause 8, or both,
from time to time as may be appropriate to ensure consistency between
them.
11. PROJECT CALENDAR
For the Project, the Contractor shall adopt 7 days a week calendar, identical calendar
for the purpose of programming and execution of Works. Official documents shall be
transacted during 5 days week - Monday through Friday, except for National (Govt. of
India) Holidays. For Project purposes, a week begins at 0001 hours on a Monday and
ends at 2359 hours on a Sunday. The completion of an activity or the achievement of
an event when given a week number shall be taken to mean midnight on the Sunday
at the end of the numbered week. An access date or activity start date when given as
a week number shall be taken to mean 0001 hours on a Monday of the Numbered
week.
12. PROGRAMMING PERSONNEL
The Contractor shall submit, as part of its Staff Organisation Plan, the names and
experience and any required information for the staff to be employed on Works
Programming. The principal Works Programmer shall hold reputable professional
qualifications acceptable to the Engineer including at least ten (10) years relevant
experience in programming civil Engineering works. Others in the group shall have at
least three (3) years’ experience in such work. The programmers shall be employed
by the Contractor full time on the
Contract until the completion or such earlier time the Engineer may give his consent.
13. PROGRAMME AND REPORT SUBMISSION FORMAT
The Contractor shall submit one (1) original and six (6) copies in colour, and a
softcopy on a CD, of all submissions to the Engineer. All submissions shall be in A0, A1,
A3 or A4 size, as appropriate, except as may otherwise be agreed by the Engineer.
25 | P a g e
14. FAILURE TO SUBMIT PROGRAMME
Failure of the Contractor to submit any programme, or any required revisions thereto within
the time limits stated for notice of no objection by the Engineer, shall be sufficient reason
for not making the relevant milestone on account payment by the Engineer.
26 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 5
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS
27 | P a g e
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS
1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) coloured copies and a soft copy on CD of
the Monthly Progress Report. This Report shall be submitted by the last day of each calendar
month and shall account for all work actually performed from 26th day of the last month and
up to and including the twenty-fifth (25th) day of the month of the submission.
The Report shall be typed, printed and bound. It shall be supported by graphics and
photographs as specified in Clause 9 of this Appendix. It shall be submitted in a format to
which the Engineer shall have given his consent. Unless the Engineer directs otherwise, the
Contractor's Monthly
Report shall contain sections/sub-sections for, but not limited to, the topics described in this
Appendix.
The Contractor shall include in the Monthly Progress Report a record of monthly progress of
various major Works on Site in the form of colour photographs with appropriate annotations
and dates stated.
The Contractor shall deliver daily to the Engineer, a report as to the number of workmen,
plant and equipment employed on the works in each trade, etc. and a log of delivery notes for
all goods and materials delivered to the Site. This information shall be summarised as a
monthly return for the monthly progress report
2. FINANCIAL STATUS
A narrative review of all significant financial matters, and actions proposed or taken in
respect to any outstanding matters.
A spread sheet summarising each activity, the budget, costs incurred during the period, costs
to date, costs to go (including potential variations), cost forecast (total of costs to date and
costs to go) and cost variance (difference between cost forecast and budget).
A spread sheet indicating the status of all payments due and made.
A report on the status of any outstanding claims. The report shall in particular provide interim
updated accounts of continuing claims.
3. PHYSICAL PROGRESS
The introduction shall briefly summarise the progress that has been made during the past
month and how the actual progress relates to the planned progress in accordance with the
Works Programme.
28 | P a g e
• It shall describe the status of work performed, significant accomplishments, including critical
items and problem areas, corrective actions taken or planned and other pertinent activities,
and shall, in particular, address interface issues, problems and resolutions.
• It shall include a simplified representation of progress measured in percentage terms

compared with percentage planned as derived from the Works Programme.
• Physical Progress S-Curve
The Physical Progress S-Curve shall be in the form of a graph which compares the actual
progress with the planned progress in terms of percentage to show the project performance.
The value of the physical progress achieved shall be assessed as the aggregate of the values
of those activities which are separately identified on the Works Programme and which are:
1. in the opinion of the Engineer, wholly completed;
2. in progress, provided that the value attached to each such activity shall be agreed with
the Engineer. Notwithstanding any value agreed with the Engineer shown on the S-Curve,
the S-Curve shall not be used for the purpose of Progress Payment Claim.
4. PROGRAMME UPDATE
Programme updating shall include:
(a) the monthly Programme Update which shall be prepared by recording actual activity completion
dates and percentage of activities completed up to the twenty-fifth (25th ) of the month together
with estimates of remaining duration and expected activity completion based on current
progress. The Programme Update shall be accompanied by an Activity Report and a Narrative
Statement.
The Narrative Statement shall explain the basis of the Contractor’s submittal:
(i) Early Work and Baseline Submittals – explains determination of activity duration and
describes the Contractor’s approach for meeting required Key Dates as specified in the
Contract.
(ii) Updated Detail Programme Submittals – state in narrative the Works actually
completed and reflected along Critical Path in terms of days ahead or behind allowable
dates. Specific requirements of narrative are:
If the Updated Detailed Works Programme indicates an actual or potential delay to

Contract Completion date or Key Dates, identify causes of delays and provide
explanation of Work affected and proposed corrective action to meet Key Dates or
29 | P a g e
mitigate potential delays. Identify deviation from previous month’s critical path.
Identify by activity number and description, activities in progress and activities

scheduled to be completed.
Discuss Variation Order Work Items, if any.
(b) the Programme Status which shall:
(i) show Works Programme status up to and including the current report period, display
Cumulative progress to date and a forecast of remaining work.
(ii) be presented as a bar-chart size A4 and as a time-related logic network diagram on

an A3 media, including activity listings;
(iii) schedules of all significant activities tabulated in order of earliest starting date
showing the following:
1. The actual start dates for activities which have commenced together with the
scheduled start date for each activity and the time lapse;
2. The actual completion dates for activities which have finished together with the
scheduled finish date for each activity and the time lapse;
3. The forecast and scheduled start dates for activities scheduled;
4. The forecast and scheduled completion dates for activities which have
commenced;
5. The percentage completion of each activity started but not completed;
6. The total float of each activity not completed;
7. Any known delays to activities.
(c) The Activity Variance Analysis which shall analyse activities planned to start prior to or
during the report period but not started at the end of the report period as well as activities
started and/or completed in advance of the Works Programme.
(d) The Resource Chart to show the actual resources mobilised for the works against the
baseline figures in the Baseline Resource Charts.
5. KEY DATES STATUS
30 | P a g e
A report on the status of all Key Dates due to have been achieved during the month and
forecasts of achievement of any missed Key dates, and those due in the next month.
6. THREE MONTH ROLLING PROGRAMME
Include a copy of the 3-month Rolling Programme for that reporting period.
7. PLANNING AND CO-ORDINATION
(1) Details of co-ordination of interface activities started or completed during the month
and shall include for internal co-ordination within the Contractor's own multi-
disciplinary team as well as external co-ordination with the Engineer, other Interfacing
subcontractors, authorities and the like;
(2) A schedule of all submissions and consents/approvals obtained/outstanding;
(3) Details of design and drawing progress, including design interface coordination, started
or completed during the month as related to the Temporary Works, Permanent Works
and Shop drawings;
(4) Updated Drawing Register;
(5) Details of the progress of off-site activities such as design, production and/or
fabrication of any components or materials;
(6) Corrective actions either taken by or to be taken by the Contractor to maintain

completion dates, including details of any changes made or to be made to the Works
Programme to achieve this objective;
(7) Contractor’s organisation and resources;
(8) Details of any other items which the Engineer or the Contractor shall consider to be
necessary or desirable from time to time.
8. PROCUREMENT REPORT
(1) A summary of all significant procurement activities during the month, including
action taken to overcome problems, and details of any outstanding actions.
(2) A report listing major items of plant and materials which will be incorporated into
the Works. The items shall be segregated by type as listed in the Specifications and
the report should show as a minimum the following activities:
(a) Purchase order date - scheduled/actual;
(b) Manufacturer/supplier and origin;
(c) Letter of credit Issued date;
31 | P a g e
(d) Manufacturer/supplier shipment date - scheduled/actual;
(e) Method of shipment;
(f) Arrival date in India- scheduled/actual;
(g) Analysis of any delay happening/anticipated with proposal for

corrective measures.
9. PHOTOGRAPHS
Two sets of photographs shall be provided with the Monthly Progress Report in colour and
shall be submitted in the following manner and format.
Digital colour photographs shall be 10cm x 15cm (4-inch x 6-inch), glossy prints, mounted in
protective clear plastic folders and contained in a lever-arch binder. The electronic files shall
also be provided in “.jpg” format on CD-ROM. The photographs and electronic files shall be
identified by a brief narrative indicating:
i. Contract number
ii. A unique sequential number based on an agreed drawing numbering system
iii. Specific location and subject of photograph
iv. Date and time of photograph
Each month the Contractor shall propose, and the Engineer will confirm the number of
photographs to be supplied so as to accurately record progress on all parts of the works. The
number of photographs shall not be less than30 per set unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer.
10. SAFETY
A review of all safety aspects during the month including reports on all accidents, actions
proposed to prevent further occurrence and safety performance to-date, including results of
all audits undertaken during the reporting period.
11. ENVIRONMENTAL
A review of all the environmental issues during the past month to include all monitoring
reports, mitigation measures undertaken and activities to control environmental impacts,
including results of all audits undertaken during the reporting period.
12. QUALITY
A review of all major quality issues and non-conformances during the month including the
quality control register and reports on actions proposed to prevent further occurrence as
32 | P a g e
specified at Appendix 6 and also to include results of all audits undertaken during the
reporting period.
33 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
34 | P a g e
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Quality System Definitions
The following Quality Management System terms are used in these requirements. The definitions
given are derived from ISO 9000: 2005, clause 6.
Audit Systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining

audit evidence and evaluating it
objectivelytodeterminetheextenttowhichauditcriteriaarefulfille
dClause under the Conditions of Contract Conformity Fulfilment
of a requirement
Design and Development Set of processes that transforms requirements into specified
characteristics or into the specification of a product, process or
system. These are prepared to support the Quality Plan for a
particular element of the Works
Hold Point (H) A point in time when a notice of permission, consent or
No Objection by the Contractor Quality Assurance Team (or that
the Engineer may elect to witness), is required before the
Contractor can proceed with an activity
Inspection and Test Plan Plans specifying the activities required to establish whether
conformity is achieved. They identify the responsibilities for
executing the activities, the documents controlling them and
details requirements for the production of records
Method Statements Documented procedures, concerning particular aspects of the
process, developed to define the manner of production,
installation and servicing Nonconformity Non-fulfilment of a
requirement
Observation Point (O) A stage identified on an Inspection and Test Plan where the
Engineer or authorised third parties may observe activities and
any associate diversification
Procedure Specified way to carry out an activity or a process
Quality Degree to which a set of inherent characteristics fulfils
requirements
Quality Management System Management system to direct and control an organization with
regard to quality as formally expressed by top management
Quality Plan Document specifying the procedures and associated resources
35 | P a g e
shall be applied by whom and when to a specific project, product,

process or contract Quality Plan shall specify the quality
management system of an organization
Requirement Need or expectation that is stated, generally implied or
obligatory
Record Document stating results achieved or providing evidence

of activities performed
Witness Point (W) A stage in the pre-construction or construction activities in

which a party is invited to witness
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The Contractor shall maintain and implement a Quality Management System that shall
remain in effect during the execution of the Works. Contractor’s organisation is required to
operate a Quality Management System based on International Standard ISO 9001: 2008 for
its scope of Works and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract. The Contractor
shall submit his Quality Management System documentation for review and Notice to
proceed by the Engineer as specified in this Section.
1.2 ISO 9001: 2008 Certification of the Contractor's organisation is required for this Project. The
Engineer may consider the alternative use of ISO 9001: 2000 Certification at his discretion.
ISO Certification is a requirement of this Project for the Contractor’s subcontractors,
consultants, sub-consultants, suppliers and Designers. The Contractor however cannot
delegate or subcontract the Employer’s Quality Assurance Requirements to subcontractors,
consultants, sub-consultants or suppliers without the Engineer written approval.
1.3 The Contractor shall implement a Quality Plan that shall incorporate a comprehensive and
documented approach to achieve the Project quality requirements that is capable of
ensuring that all aspects of the Works, including but not limited to, design, procurement,
fabrication, installation, inspection, construction and modifications will comply with the
requirements of the Contract.
1.4 The Contractor’s Quality Plan shall ensure that all goods and materials, whether on-shore in
India or off-shore before shipping, workmanship, plant and equipment procured and
supplied, inspecting, handling, assembling, testing, storing, fabrication, suppliers and
vendors are in compliance with the Contract requirements. Plan(s) and/or Procedures to be
prepared by others (suppliers, subcontractors, sub-consultants) and their incorporation in
the overall Quality Plan of the Contractor, shall be identified.
36 | P a g e
1.5 The Capitalized terms used and to the extent not defined herein shall have the meaning
ascribed to them respectively, in the Conditions of Contract and the Employer’s
Requirements.
1.6 Construction / Installation shall be deemed to include manufacturing, fabrication,
assembling, testing & commissioning, integrated testing and commissioning and trial runs
wherever necessary.
1.7 The Contractor shall assist in the independent audit review, checking, sampling testing and
examination of the Works by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide full and timely
access for such work by the Engineer, including inspection of records and documentation.
Such access shall include direct access to the Site, work areas, storage facilities, fabrication
sites, Contractor’s offices, laboratories, manufacturers/supplier’s facilities and similar areas
and facilities where any work is being conducted.
1.8 For design and/or activities occurring outside of India which require the Engineer to
inspect, the Contractor shall provide:
(a) Right to inspect;
(b) Facilities to carry out their work; and
(c) Assistance in travel and accommodation arrangements.
2. QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
2.1 Contractor’s Quality Management System shall be capable of demonstrating by self-
certification that all relevant standards, regulations, testing requirements etc are being met.
Self-certification is the process whereby the Contractor can demonstrate that all
requirements of the Contract have been fulfilled.
2.2 The Contractor shall designate a Quality Assurance Manager (QA Manager) who shall be
classified as one of the Key Personnel and shall be responsible for overseeing the
implementation of the overall Quality Plan for the Contractor. The Quality Assurance Manager
shall not report to the Contractor’s Project Manager, but shall be directly responsible to and
report to a joint venture board, senior management or similar level of the Contractor’s
organization that is not directly responsible for design or construction.
2.2.1 Refer to Volume 3 – Section A, Clause A15 Key Staff Requirements.
2.3 The Contractor shall be required to provide the Quality Assurance Manager with adequate
resources and authority to enable the quality of the work on the Contract to be managed
effectively. Those resources shall be required to fulfil the requirements for quality assurance,
inspection and testing and self-certification as detailed in these requirements.
2.4 The Contractor shall be required to provide appropriate training to all personnel in the
operation of the Quality Management System and maintain records to demonstrate
37 | P a g e
competence in its application.

2.5 The Contractor shall submit his Quality Management System documentation for review and
approval by the Engineer as specified in this Section.
2.6 It is anticipated that the Contractor’s Quality Management System documentation shall
include, but not limited to, the following:
a. Quality Plan, identifying its Quality Procedures;
b. Manufacturing Quality Plan;
c. Design Quality Plan;
d. Method Statements;
e. Inspection and Test Plans; and
2.7 The Contractor shall plan, perform and record all quality control activities to ensure that all
work is performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and of his Quality
Management System. Documentation which have been reviewed and Notices by the Engineer,
such activities shall include, without limitation, the inspections and/or tests implied or
expressly required by the Contract.
2.8 The Engineer shall designate, if necessary, Quality ‘Hold Points’ into the Contractor’s
Inspection and Test Plans for the Contractor’s Quality Department to adhere to, or for the
Engineer to attend, on a case-by-case basis at his discretion.
2.9 The Contractor shall coordinate the Inspection and Testing necessary to demonstrate that all
specified requirements have been met. All non-conformances are to be documented and
resolved, before final acceptance of the Works or any section of it.
2.10 The Employer, Stake holders, Engineer and third parties including the MCGM Road
Department and statutory authorities, reserve the right to and shall conduct periodic audits
and inspections on the Works and services provided either on its own or through third party,
and will sample, test and measure material used within the Works completed by the
Contractor or its subcontractors of all tiers and suppliers/vendors and to observe the
execution of these activities.
2.11 The Contractor, his consultant, subcontractors of all tiers and suppliers thereof shall make
available for audit all records necessary to demonstrate that the Works have been executed
in accordance with the Contract. They shall also provide the Engineer with documents that
demonstrate that the Works are progressing in accordance with the specified requirements.
These shall be provided in a timely manner to enable non-conformities to be rectified
satisfactorily.
3. QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
38 | P a g e
3.1 The organization of the Contractor’s Project Plan shall comply with ISO10005 (2005): Quality
Management-Guidelines for Quality Assurance Plan.
3.2 All on-Site and off-Site testing sampling in India is to be carried out by laboratories accredited by
NABL (National Accreditation Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories) or internationally
accredited laboratory to ISO 17025: 2005.
3.3 A fully equipped concrete laboratory shall be installed at Site along with laboratory technicians and
support staff. Testing machines shall be periodically calibrated in accordance with NABL
requirements. Details included in clause 14.9.
3.4 The Engineer may require the Contractor to stop using a particular laboratory and find an
alternative if the Engineer has reasonable grounds to be dissatisfied with its performance.
3.5 All testing of systems, software, plant and materials must be carried out by persons accredited to
meet the requirements and Standards.
3.6 Within thirty (30) days of the Commencement Date, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
review, comment and Notice to proceed the following, as appropriate:
(a) Quality Plan;
(b) Design Quality Plan and Delivery Schedule; and
(c) Manufacturing Quality Plan and Delivery Schedule.
3.7 The Contractor shall promptly supply the Engineer with six (6) controlled copies of his Quality Plans,
Inspection and Test Plan(s), related procedures / instructions / forms upon such documents being
reviewed and Noticed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall maintain such controlled
documentation throughout the duration of the Contract. For any amendment to the quality system
documentation, the Contractor shall as soon as practicable prepare and submit the proposed
amendment for review by the Engineer. In addition, the Engineer may request further copies of the
quality system documents and these documents shall reach the Engineer’s office within fourteen
(14) days of notification, at no additional cost to the Contract.
3.8 The Contractor shall maintain and make available for inspection by the Engineer at its site, a
complete, up-to-date, organized file of all submittals (plans, procedures, Method Statements etc),
including an index and locator system which identifies the status of each submittal.
3.9 Pursuant to sub-clause 3.8, a ‘controlled copy’ means a document prepared and issued in accordance
with the provisions regarding document control contained in the relevant ISO standard.
4. TYPES OF QUALITY PLANS

4.1 No design, procurement, construction, installation, commissioning or maintenance activity
shall commence without a suitable Quality Plan that has been submitted to Engineer for
review and comment, consent, approval of Notice to proceed.
39 | P a g e
4.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following Quality Plans for his review and approval:
(a) A Quality Plan for the control of all management related activities;
(b) Design Quality Plan(s) for the control of all design related activities for the Permanent
Works or Plant and/or Temporary Works;
(c) Manufacturing and construction Quality Plan(s), for the control of activities within each
category of work or discrete element of construction, manufacture, installation,
commissioning, maintenance or servicing of the Permanent Works or Plant and/or
Temporary Works or for the control of outstanding work during the Contracts Period, as
the same may be required by the Contract and/or directed by the Engineer ; and
(d) Method Statements and Inspection and Test Plans, for the control of all inspection and test
related activities as per clause 10 and clause 11.
5. FORMAT OF QUALITY PLANS

5.1 The Quality Plan (s) shall define all measures necessary to meet the objectives and
requirements of the Contract at all appropriate phases of the work.
5.2 The Quality Plan(s) shall have a standardised format and show clearly on each page:
(a) The quality plan number or, in the case of attached documents, a reference to the
quality plan number;
(b) Whether the document is a draft or is Noticed by the authorised representative of the
Contractor; and
(c) The date of such approval.
6. QUALITY PLAN
6.1 The Contractor shall prepare construction Quality Plan(s) for the construction, installation,
testing and commissioning activities. Separate construction quality plan(s) shall be
prepared for other Contractor’s or subcontractor’s off Site activities. Each construction
quality plan shall identify the scope of work to be controlled.
6.2 The Quality Plan shall include a directory and organizational chart showing all of the
Contractor’s Key Personnel. The directory shall be kept updated throughout the Contract as
changes occur and submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The directory shall include
the names, titles, areas of responsibility, office address and location, office phone and fax
numbers, cellular phone number(s). The Contractor shall provide information sufficient for
the Engineer to contact any of the Key Personnel on a twenty-four (24-hour) basis for the
duration of the Contract.
40 | P a g e
6.3 The Engineer will also provide a similar directory to the Contractor.
6.4 The Quality Plan shall define the Contractor's management structure for the execution of
the Works and for the control of the quality of the Works and shall, without limitation,
define:
(a) The organisation of the Contractor's managerial staff with particular reference to any
Joint Venture partners and main subcontractors. An organisation chart is to be
produced to illustrate the subdivision of the work into elements for effective technical
and managerial control, the reporting structure and the interface relationship between
all parties involved;
(b) The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified personnel for
the day to day management of the work with particular reference to the supervision,
inspection and testing of the work;
(c) The interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related Quality
Plans;
(d) The specific methods of construction to identify any relevant Method Statements and
develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail sufficient to permit the Engineer
to understand. Refer to clause 10;
(e) The appointment of a Quality Assurance Manager and Quality Control Manager in
accordance with clause 12;
(f) The audit procedure, audit schedule for each type of quality plans and list of proposed
auditors including details of their authority, qualifications and experience in
accordance with clause 9;
(g) The procedures for the control of receipt and issue of all correspondence, so as to
ensure traceability, shall be defined. Correspondence shall include letters, internal
memoranda, facsimiles and electronic transmittals (i.e. CompuServe, Internet,
SharePoint, Expedition etc);
(h) The procedures for recording Project related oral communications shall be defined, i.e.
records of telephone conversations, notes of informal discussions and minutes of
meetings;
(i) The procedures for the selection, indexing, filing, disposition and maintenance of
Project records for storage in the archives shall be defined. A list of items to be archived
shall be submitted for review by the Engineer on periods of retention. In addition, the
Contractor’s and subcontractor’s filing systems shall be compatible as far as is
necessary;
(j) The procedures for the identification, production, verification, approval, distribution,
41 | P a g e
implementation and recording of changes to all drawings, reports and specifications

shall be defined;
(k) The procedures for the evaluation, selection, engagement and monitoring of
subcontractors / suppliers shall be defined together with the means of application of
quality assurance to their work including audit and acceptance;
(l) The procedure for the regular review and revision of each type of quality plan and its
supplemental individual specific quality plans, to ensure their continuing suitability
and effectiveness shall be defined. In addition, the method to be used for revision and
issue of revised documentation shall be defined;
(m) The procedures for the control, calibration and maintenance of inspection, testing and
measuring equipment shall be defined;
(n) The procedures for identifying training needs and for the provision of training of all
personnel performing activities affecting quality shall be defined; and
(o) The quality control procedures to be implemented to verify conformance with the
Contract specifications. Verification is accomplished by examinations, tests,
measurement and inspection and by verifying records including those of his consultant,
subcontractors and suppliers by uses of forms to be applied to manage and control the
following:
(i) The purchasing of materials and ensuring they comply with the requirements of
the specification, including purchasing documentation and specific verification
arrangements for Contractor/Engineer inspection of material or manufactured
product prior to release for use/installation;
(ii) The construction process including Temporary Works so as to ensure compliance
with drawings and specifications;
(iii) The construction and installation process so as to ensure clear identification and
traceability of material and manufactured parts;
(iv) The inspection and testing activities of incoming materials, in process and final
product;
(v) The identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the construction and installation
process to ensure that only products that have passed the required inspections and
tests are dispatched for use and/or installation;
(vi) Record of non-conformities and the disposition of non-conforming material or
product, supported by applicable documentation, agreed remedial action
instituted prior to the initiation so as to avoid unintended use/installation.
42 | P a g e
Contractors Non-conformity system provides for the monitoring and tracking of all
Non-conformities that occur within his scope of Contract, regardless of who
identifies the Non-conformance;
(vii) The assessment and disposition of nonconforming material(s) and product(s) and
approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
(viii) The identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of similar non-
conformance; and
(ix) The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of products.
(p) The list of Inspection and Test Plans and Method Statements to manage and control
any test and inspection activities;
(q) All particulars of materials submitted for review by the Engineer ;
(r) Where required by the Contract, the quality control requirements for major
components in accordance with clause 16; and
(s) Lists of forms and formats to be used to record the activities under the construction
Quality Plan(s) shall be attached at the end of each section or reference included to
existing standard procedures.
6.5 The Quality Plan(s) shall ensure that conditions adverse to quality such as failures,
malfunctions, deficiencies and defects in materials and equipment shall be promptly
identified and recorded as Non-Conforming Product and specific procedures to rectify non-
conformities raised. This includes systems non-conformities raised as a result of both internal
audit by the Contractor and external audits by the Engineer.
6.6 The Quality Plan(s) shall address the controls to be applied by its organisation to its
subcontractors, suppliers and lower tier contractors thereof, both directly and by identifying
the quality system documentation that subcontractors, suppliers and lower tiers thereof are
required to produce. The Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors, suppliers and lower
tiers thereof agree to and implement the applicable controls specified in the Contractor
Quality Plan and the identified Quality Management System documentation.
7. DESIGN QUALITY PLAN
7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of the design of the Works. While
not being responsible to do any design for any Interfacing Party, the Contractor shall use his
best endeavours to manage and resolve the interface, including those with designers of E&M
and Tunnel Ventilation.
7.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and obtaining necessary approvals
from cognizant authorities for temporary and permanent road diversions, including
overpasses and underpasses. The Contractor shall copy the Engineer on all correspondence
43 | P a g e
with the cognizant authorities and shall note any problems in the Progress Narrative, clause
13, submitted with the Monthly Progress Report.
7.3 The Contractor shall ensure that the designs of the Works are properly checked and dealt with
by a Design Checker whom shall be identified within the organisation of the Contractor. The
Design Checker shall be independent in-house responsible for the detailed Checking of
Deliverables prior to submission and ensure that the design can meet all its obligations under
the Contract and for the Contractor to do likewise. The Design Checker shall issue a certificate
of the same to the Engineer.
7.3.1 Refer to Volume 3 - Section 3, Attachment C1.
7.4 The Contractor shall identify the Design Checker for each discipline. The Design Checker shall
have not less than the competence and experience required of the Contractor’s Designer in
the same discipline as the discipline of the design to be checked. The Design Checker shall not
be associated with or be involved in the actual design, producing design documents or
conducting construction site supervision for the Contractor.
7.5 In the event that the Engineer identifies significant errors or inconsistencies in the
Deliverables, then the Engineer shall request for the applicable Design Checker to be
immediately removed from the Design Team and be replaced with a competent Checker.
7.6 The procedures for the checking of design of Permanent Works shall also apply to design of
Temporary Works and construction sequences that affect the Permanent Works or Safety
during construction / installation.
7.7 The procedures for the control of design changes shall be defined in order that design changes
are reviewed, verified, validated and Noticed before implementation.
7.8 All design documents (drawings, plans, specifications, calculations and reports) produced by
the Contractor’s organization shall be checked by the Designer, whom shall issue a certificate
of the same to the Engineer.
i. The Contractor shall maintain records showing design calculation and data supporting
design review activities.
ii. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at any time to
verify the effectiveness of design reviews.
iii. The Design Quality Plan(s) shall define the Contractor's policy for the design of the
Permanent Works or Plant and/or Temporary Works and shall, without limitation,
define:
1. The organisation of the Contractor's design staff;
44 | P a g e
2. The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified design staff
with particular reference to the review and verification of design drawings and
calculations by the Contractor;
3. The specific methods of design to identify any relevant Method Statements and
develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail sufficient to permit the
Engineer to understand;
4. The procedures to be applied to manage and control the quality of the design work,
with particular reference to the following:
(a) The design and performance requirements which shall be defined in terms of basic
data and design assumptions made; relevant codes, standards and regulatory
requirements; safety, security and environmental requirements; and
commissioning requirements;
(b) The design methods. Software applications to be used in the design, both
proprietary and public domain, shall be identified and any requirements for
physical and mathematical model testing;
(c) The preparation, checking, issue, distribution, indexing and filing reports,
calculations, drawings and specifications along with the means of their revisions;
(d) The formal design review, authorisation and approval of design documentation;
(e) The design verification and validation;
iv. The design checks by the Design Checker; and
v. List of examples of the forms and formats to be used to record the activities under the
Design Quality Plan shall be attached at the end of each section or a reference included
to existing standard procedures.
For the following, the Engineer s review and Notice to Proceed is required before
proceeding with the next stage of the works or design;
(a) The design of temporary traffic arrangements shall be reviewed and Noticed by
the Engineer before submitting the same to the relevant authorities;
(b) The design of excavation and lateral support systems for underground excavations
shall be reviewed by the Engineer before the excavation commences;
(c) The design of formwork and false work for cast in-situ and precast concrete works
shall be reviewed and Noticed by the Engineer before the erection of the same
commences;
(d) The design of the launching girder shall be reviewed and Noticed by the Engineer
before the erection of the same commences; and
vi. The implementation of temporary traffic arrangements shall be reviewed and Noticed
45 | P a g e
by the Engineer before the associated works proceed.

(e) MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN
8.1 Each Manufacturing Quality Plan shall identify the scope of work to be controlled. In relation
to such scope of work, it shall, without limitation, define:
(a) The organisation of the Contractor's staff directly responsible for the day to day
management of the work on or off the Site;
(b) The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified personnel for
the day-to-day management of the work with particular reference to the supervision,
inspection and testing of the work;
(c) The interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related Quality
Plan(s);
(d) The specific methods of manufacture to identify any relevant Method Statements and
develop those Method Statements to a degree of detail sufficient to permit the Engineer
to understand;
(e) The procedures, instructions and forms to be applied to manage and control the
following:
(i) The purchasing of materials and ensuring they comply with the requirements of
the specification, including purchasing documentation and specific verification
arrangements for Contractor/ Engineer inspection of material or manufactured
product prior to release for use/installation;
(ii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure compliance with drawings and
specifications;
(iii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure clear identification and traceability of
material and manufactured parts;
(iv) The inspection and testing activities of incoming materials, in process and final
product;
(v) The identification of the inspection and test status of all material and
manufactured products during all stages of the manufacturing process to ensure
that only products that have passed the required inspections and tests are
dispatched for use and/or installation;
(vi) The review and disposition of non-conforming material or product so as to avoid
unintended use/installation;
(vii) The assessment and disposition of nonconforming material and manufactured
product and approval for reworking or rejection as scrap;
(viii) The identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of similar non-
46 | P a g e
conformance; and
(ix) The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of manufactured
product.
(f) The Inspection and Test Plans to manage and control any test and inspection activities;
(g) All particulars of materials submitted for review by the Engineer ;
(h) Where required by the Contract, the quality control requirements for major
components in accordance with clause 14; and
(i) List of forms and formats to be used to record the activities under the Manufacturing
Quality Plans shall be attached at the end of each section or reference included to
existing standard procedures.
(f) QUALITY AUDIT, REVIEWS AND UPDATES

• Contractor shall submit with his Quality Plan a schedule of internal, consultant,
subcontractor and supplier audits that are to be conducted by his personnel at least every
six (6) months. The schedule, scope and method of the audits shall be sufficient enough,
such that the Contractor can verify that all aspects of the Works are being conducted in
accordance with the contractual requirements. The schedule and any amendments are
subject to the acceptance by the Engineer. The schedule shall be reviewed every four (4)
weeks by the Engineer.
• The Contractor shall ensure that audits of all the activities in each quality plan are carried
out to ensure the continuing suitability and effectiveness of the Quality Management
System. Reports of each such audit shall be submitted promptly to the Engineer for his
information.
• The Contractor shall audit his consultants, subcontractors, sub-consultants and suppliers.
• The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to observe/participate in these audits and to
conduct additional independent audits, as they consider appropriate to provide assurance
that the Works are being conducted in accordance with contractual requirements. The
Contractor shall provide the facilities and access necessary for these audits to be carried
out effectively.
• All audits as described in this section are to be carried out in compliance with
established ISO 9001 auditing principles and in accordance with ISO 19011.
• Plan reviews and updates:
• The Contractor shall conduct Management Reviews of its quality system, at least
47 | P a g e
annually. As work progresses, the Contractor shall update the Quality Plan to reflect
current conditions. The need for revisions to the Quality Plan may be identified by
the Contractor and/or the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit any revisions or
updates to the Quality Plan to the Engineer for his Notice to proceed within thirty
(30) days of the identification of the need for a revision.
(b) In addition, the Contractor shall submit its Quality Plan for review by the Engineer
annually even if no revisions have occurred during the preceding twelve (12) months.
The Contractor shall submit a certified copy of the updated Quality Plan with revisions
highlighted.
(g) METHOD STATEMENTS
10.1 Contractor shall prepare Method Statements for each area and/or type of activity conducted,
and submitted to the Engineer for his review, comment and Notice to proceed prior to
commencing construction on any Temporary or Permanent Works. Methods Statements shall
be prepared for all Temporary and Permanent Works and shall be specific to the work being
constructed and to the location of work.
10.2 All Methods Statements shall be consistent with Design Drawings and Works Specifications
that have been subjected to checks and reviews as specified.
10.3 Any deviations from the requirements of the Design Drawings or Works Specifications shall
require written agreement of the Designer, certified by the Design Checker and shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his review and Notice to proceed.
10.4 Noticed Methods Statements shall be available for examination by the Engineer upon request at
site.
10.5 Method Statements shall address the following items:
(a) Scope of work covered by the Method Statement;
(b) Relevant drawings and Works Specifications;
(c) Hazard analysis and the precautions to be taken to eliminate or mitigate identified
hazards;
(e) Methods to be used and programme for the work;
(f) Resources (plant and labour);
(g) Supervision to be provided (by name);
(h) Safety provisions;
(i) Environmental provisions;
(j) Traffic control and temporary diversions to be implemented; and
(j) Inspection and Test Plan.
10.6 The Contractor shall reference applicable portions of previously prepared plans, such as the
48 | P a g e
Safety Plan or Quality Plan, in its Method Statements.

(h) INSPECTION AND TEST PLANS
11.1 The Contractor, and through him, his consultants, subcontractors and suppliers engaged in
supplying, manufacturing, construction, installation, commissioning and testing or any
other service connected with the Works, shall maintain Inspection and Test Plans (ITP)
appropriate for the services they provide that are accepted by the Engineer. These accepted
ITP’s will stipulate the necessary level and frequency of tests and inspections for each aspect
of the Works, and also stipulate, without limitation:
(a) The personnel responsible and/or involvement of various parties for undertaking and
certifying the inspection and/or testing;
(b) The procedure or instructions for the inspection and/or testing;
(c) The test method or a reference to the relevant standard of testing;
(d) The inspection and/or testing required prior to commencement of an activity;
(e) The inspection and/or testing during an activity and its frequency;
(f) The inspection and/or testing required for the completion of an activity;
(g) All Quality ‘Hold Points’ (H), ‘Witness Points’ (W) and ‘Observation Points’ (O) shall be
identified by the Contractor for his Quality Department to inspect and verify its
acceptance;
(h) The Engineer can place additional Quality ‘Hold Points’ (H), ‘Witness Points’ (W) and
‘Observation Points’ (O) for the Contractor’s Quality Department on a case-by-case
basis; and
(h) Engineer may designate additional Quality ‘Hold Points’ for his inspection on a case-by-
case basis.
11.2 The Contractor shall conduct inspections and tests in accordance with his detailed plans as
stipulated in the ITP. Records shall be kept of the completion of the inspections and tests
that identify the record of the results which shall be made available for review during
Engineer audit.
(i) QUALITY PERSONNEL
12.1 The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and experienced person(s) as the ‘Quality
Assurance Manager’ to be responsible for the task of ensuring that the requirements of the
Quality Management System are implemented and maintained. The Contractor shall, at the
time of submission of the proposed management Key Personnel, shall submit for review by
the Engineer details of the qualifications, experience, authority and responsibility of the
proposed Quality Assurance Manager.
12.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the Quality Assurance Manager is able to discharge his
49 | P a g e
duties without hindrance or constraint. In addition, the Contractor shall make available any
such resources that are necessary to ensure the effective implementation of the quality
system and all quality plans.
12.3 The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and experienced person as the ‘Quality Control
Manager’ to lead teams of Quality Control Engineer s for carrying out, independent from other
teams, inspections of the Works as identified as the Quality ‘Hold Point’, ‘Witness Point (W),
‘Observation Point (O). The Contractor shall, at the time of submission of the proposed
management Key Personnel, submit for review by the Engineer details of the qualifications,
experience, authority and responsibility of the proposed Quality Control Manager.
12.3.1 Refer to Clause A15 Section A, of this Volume 3 for the qualification requirements for
Key Staff.
12.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Quality Control Manager is able to discharge his duties
without hindrance or constraint, including but not limited to the authority to suspend works as
considered necessary. In addition, the Contractor shall make available any such resources that are
necessary to ensure the effective implementation of the quality system and all quality plans.
12.5 Quality Control Engineer s:
The Contractor shall assign Quality Control Engineer s for each shift for each
location/activities where work is being performed. Each lead inspector shall be qualified by
training and experience in all the construction activities being conducted at the Site.
Quality Control Engineer s shall have a minimum of ten (10) years construction /
installation experience with at least five (5) years’ experience in the inspection, sampling
and testing of works of the type being constructed. If required on the request of Engineer
additional inspectors shall be appointed, at no additional cost to the Contract.
12.6 Materials Technicians:
The Contractor shall assign qualified materials technicians to conduct the sampling and
testing of materials, goods and supplies for the Contract.
12.7 Staffing Levels:
The actual size of the Site staff shall reflect the complexity, needs, shifts and composition of
Quality Control activities consistent with work in progress. The staffing levels shall be
consistent with the Contractor’s Quality Plan and the Project Baseline Programme, the
relative locations of work in progress and the nature of the work.
The Quality Plan shall identify administrative/clerical support for the maintenance and
management of records/documents pertinent to Quality Control activities.
(j) MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT
50 | P a g e
13.1 The Contractor shall continuously monitor the performance of his Quality Management
System, which shall be included in each Monthly Progress Report (MPR) in accordance with
Volume 3 – Section 8, Appendix 5.
13.2 Quality Certifications:
The Contractor shall submit a written certification by the Quality Assurance Manager
certifying that:
(a) The Quality Plan and all the measures and procedures provided therein are functioning
properly and are being fully complied with, except as specifically noted in the
certification.
(b) All work, including that of the Designer, and all other designers, subcontractors at all
tiers, suppliers and fabricators, has been checked and/or inspected by the Contractor’s
Designer Checker, except as specifically noted in the certification, conforms to the
Refer to Volume 3 - Section 3, Attachment C1.
13.3 Weekly
Weekly records shall be prepared and maintained that provide factual evidence that
required activities and/or tests have been performed, including the following:
(a) Type, number and results of quality assurance and quality control activities, including
but not limited to reviews, inspections, tests, audits, monitoring of work performance
and materials analysis;
(b) Qualifications of personnel, procedures and equipment used;
(c) The identity of the Quality Control Engineer or data recorder, the type of test or
observation employed, the results and the acceptability of the work and action taken in
connection with any deficiencies noted;
(d) Nature of nonconforming work causes for rejection, with photographs etc;
(e) Preventive actions;
(f) Proposed corrective actions;
(g) Corrective actions taken and with whose authority; and
(h) Results of corrective actions.
13.4 The Engineer reserves the right to inspect and audit these documents at any time.
(k) QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

14.1 The Contractor shall, in accordance with the quality control requirements of the Specification and
other documents included in the Contract, prepare and maintain quality item lists which establish
the criteria for control of each major component or activity during design, construction and/or
51 | P a g e
manufacture and installation, commissioning and servicing in accordance with the need to ensure
the desired quality requirements of the Works.
14.2 All inspection and testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, at Contractor's cost.
In all cases, the cost of materials for such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
14.3 The work shall conform to high standards of material, design and workmanship. The
Contractor shall conform to the Quality standards prescribed in the Contract document(s).
14.4 At Site, the Contractor shall arrange the materials, their stacking/storage in appropriate
manner to ensure that the quality of the materials is not compromised. The Contractor shall
provide all the necessary equipment and qualified manpower to test the quality of materials,
assemblies etc. The tests shall be conducted at specified intervals and the results of tests
properly documented.
14.5 The Engineer shall be free to carry out such additional tests as may be decided by him at his
sole discretion, from time to time, in addition to those specified in this document. The
Engineer shall also be free to appoint any third party for inspection and testing of important
items like stay cables and steel work including welding etc, at his own cost. The Contractor
shall provide the samples and labour for collecting the samples. No extra payment shall be
payable to the Contractor for samples or for the collection of the samples. The results of
such additional tests and third-party inspection shall be binding on the Contractor.
14.6 The test(s) shall be conducted at the Contractor’s Site laboratory which shall be established
by the Contractor or at any other standard external laboratory selected by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall transport the samples to the laboratory for which nothing extra shall be
payable. In the event of the Contractor failing to arrange transportation of the samples in
proper time, the Engineer shall have them transported and recover two times the actual cost
from the Contractor. All sampling and testing shall be performed in the presence of assigned
Contractor Quality Personnel. Testing may be witnessed by the Contractor or his authorised
representative if permitted by the Standard External Laboratory. Whether witnessed by the
Contractor or not, the test results shall be binding on the Contractor.
14.7 The Engineer shall have the right always to inspect all operations including the source of
materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, all equipment including the
concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the quality control system. Such an inspection
shall be arranged, and the Engineer’s approval obtained prior to starting of the particular
item of work. This shall however, not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities.
14.8 All materials which do not conform to the Specifications shall be rejected and shall be
removed from the Site immediately. The Engineer shall have the power to cause the
Contractors to purchase and use materials from any particular source, as may, in the
52 | P a g e
Engineer’s opinion, be necessary for the proper execution of Works.

14.9 Field/Site Laboratory
14.9.1 All the materials to be used in the work and tested in the laboratory shall comply with the
Employer’s Requirements or such recognised specifications as acceptable to Engineer as
detailed in clause 3.2 and 3.3 respectively.
14.9.2 The testing machines shall be recalibrated periodically as per Contractor Quality Plan and
applicable regulatory Standards. The calibration shall be from an authorized laboratory in
accordance with clause 3.2 and Noticed by Engineer.
14.9.3 The Contractor or his authorised representative shall assist in the collection, preparation,
forwarding and testing of such samples. The cost of such samples and tests shall be borne
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall give not less than seven (7) days’ Notice for all tests
in order that the Engineer may attend and witness testing at the external laboratory. Two
(2) copies of all test certificates shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer for
approval immediately after the completion of the tests. Test certificates must be supplied to
the Engineer before the materials or components are used in the works, unless the Engineer
directs otherwise.
14.10 Frequency of Testing
All materials shall be tested as per the requirements specified in the Contractor’s Quality Plan and
Annexure I. All test reports shall be documented in hard copy as well as soft copy.
14.11 Unsuitable Materials
If at any stage of execution of work, Engineer finds that the particular material is not suitable
to be used in any component of the work, the Engineer may order retesting of the material
from any Noticed laboratory at the cost of the Contractor. The rejected material either after
the initial test or after re-testing, as the case may be, shall be immediately removed from the
Site by the Contractor at his own cost. In case of default on the part of the Contractor in
removing rejected materials and any work executed with such unaccepted materials, the
Engineer shall be at liberty to have them removed and/or dismantled by other means at the
risk and cost of the Contractor.
(l) NOTIFICATION OF NONCONFORMITES
15.1 If the Contractor has used or proposes to use or repair any item of the Works which does
not conform to the requirements of the Contract, he shall immediately submit for review by
the Engineer a proposal for rectification, and supply full particulars of the nonconformity
and, if appropriate, of the proposed means of repair.
15.2 If the Engineer issues nonconformity reports, either product based as a Non-Conformance
Report (NCR) or procedural through quality audit as a Corrective Action Request (CAR) or
53 | P a g e
similar documents to notify the Contractor of any item of the Works which does not conform
to the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly investigate the matter
and submit for review within fourteen (14) days of notification by the Engineer of the
remedial measures to be taken and stating the reasons for the measures and the corrective
and preventive action.
15.3 The Contractor shall maintain a Non-Conformity Register to indicate the status of all
nonconformities which have been identified by the Engineer and the Contractor.
(m) NOTICE OF PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND/OR SOURCE OF SUPPLY
16.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the places of manufacture and/or the source of
supply of all goods and materials to be incorporated into the Works and shall give
reasonable notice (which shall not in any event be less than fifty-six (56) days) to the
Engineer before the start of any manufacturing and/or the supply of goods and materials.
(n) NOTICE OF INSPECTION, TEST, TRIALS BY THE CONTRACTOR
17.1 In relation to all Quality Control points and Quality ‘Hold Points’ involving inspection and/or
witness testing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall give the Engineer notice of when the
relevant work will be inspected and/or tested. The period of notice shall be as follows;
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer:
(a) In the case of on-Site work, such notice shall be given not less than forty-eight (48)
hours of normal working time before the work is to be inspected and/or tested;
(b) In the case of work carried out off-Site in Mumbai, such notice shall be given not less
than fourteen (14) days before the work is to be inspected and/or tested; and
(c) In the case of work carried out offshore outside of India, such notice shall be given not
less than twenty-eight (28) days before the work is to be inspected and/or tested.
(o) WITNESS BY THE ENGINEER
18.1 In relation to all Quality Control Points involving inspection and/or testing by the
Contractor, the Engineer may elect to witness such inspections and/or tests but, on
expiration of the period of notice pursuant to clause 17, the Contractor may proceed with
the inspections and/or tests notwithstanding the absence of the Engineer or of any
response to the said notice. Witness by the Engineer shall not discharge the Contractor of
the responsibility to provide acceptable product, nor shall it preclude subsequent rejection
by the Engineer.
(p) CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURED GOODS OR MATERIALS
19.1 The Contractor shall obtain certificates for each batch of manufactured goods and
documentary evidence that goods, supplies and materials and Contractor’s Equipment
54 | P a g e
conform to the Contract requirements for incorporation in the Works. Each certificate
and/or proofing document shall include all reports of inspections and/or tests carried out
at the place of manufacture.
19.2 The Contractor shall make available at the Site no less than twenty-four (24) hours prior to
installation or use of such goods, supplies or materials and Contractor’s Equipment all
certificates and/or proofing document(s).
19.4 Materials Certificate of Compliance:
Within seven (7) days of the issue of a Completion Certificate for a Section or for all the
Works, the Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance signed by the Project
Manager and the Quality Assurance Manager indicating that all materials, goods and
supplies incorporated in the Works conform to the requirements of the Contract.
(q) REPORTS OF INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND TRIALS
20.1 The Contractor shall compile reports of each inspection and/or test. Such reports shall show
the results of all the inspections and/or tests carried out and shall certify that the work has
been inspected and/or tested in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and that
the work complies with the requirements of the Contract. Any analysis of the results
required to confirm that the work complies with the requirements of the Contract shall be
compiled in accordance with clause 21 and reported to the Engineer in accordance with
clause 23.
20.2 Each report of inspection and/or test shall be signed by a representative of the Contractor
who has been allocated the requisite authority under the relevant Inspection and Test Plan
and signed by the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager.
(r) TIME LIMIT FOR FILING OF REPORTS FOR INSPECTIONS AND/OR TESTS
21.1 The Contractor shall ensure that a signed copy report of each in-situ and each off-site
inspection / test is filed in his Records Office within 3 (three) working days and within seven
(7) working days of the date of completion of the test process respectively.
(s) QUALITY CONTROL REGISTER
22.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the work a quality control register
or registers to identify the status of inspections, sampling and testing of the work and all
certificates. Each register shall:
(a) List the certificates received for each batch of manufactured goods or materials
incorporated in the Works and compares this against the certification required by the
Contract and the Contractor's Quality Plan(s);
55 | P a g e
(b) List the inspection, sampling and testing activities undertaken by the Contractor on
each element of the Works and compare these activities against the amount of
inspection, sampling and testing required by the Contract and the Contractor's Quality
Plan(s);
(c) Show the results of each report of inspection and/or test and any required analysis of
these results and compare these results against the acceptance criteria, including:
(i) Standard deviation and coefficient of variation for each grade of concrete;
(ii) Summary of trail mix for each grade of concrete;
(iii) Summary of sample type and quantity that has been sent for third party testing;
(iv) Summary of third party testing reports;
(v) Summary of calibration status of monitoring and measurement equipment,
batching plant/s; and
(vi) Summary of in-process testing for routine dynamic pile load test, static pile load
test, lateral load test (if required) and pile integrity test etc that have been
conducted that month.
(d) Cumulative quantity of each grade of concrete produced from RMC and/or dedicated
batching plant/s;
(e) Summary of Non Conformance Reports (NCR), raised internally by Contractor in its
Quality Management System and as directed by Engineer.
(t) SUMMARIES OF INSPECTION AND/OR TEST
23.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his information summaries based on each
quality control register showing the type and amount of certification received and the
sampling, inspection, and/or testing undertaken on each element of the Works during the
previous week as part of the Weekly Report, in accordance with clause 13.3. The summaries
shall identify and demonstrate the compliance of such certification, sampling, inspection
and/or testing with the requirements of the Contract and shall identify any item which does
not conform to the requirements of the Contract.
(u) SAMPLES
24.1 The Contractor shall ensure those concrete compression test specimens are controlled as
followed:
(a) each sample is identified in accordance with clause 24.3;
(b) all samples are protected, temporarily stored, handled and transported to the
laboratory under the direct supervision of a suitably qualified representative of the
Contractor’s laboratory;
56 | P a g e
(c) no samples are mislaid, damaged, or contaminated, and

(d) the properties of the sampled material are at no time adversely affected.
24.2 All samples for testing shall be fully prepared for transportation and testing by the
Contractor and shall be delivered by the Contractor to the place of testing.
24.3 The Contractor shall ensure that concrete test specimens are identified by a unique
reference which, at a minimum, shall contain at least four fields of reference. The sample
reference shall be in the form of ‘LLNN / LNN / NNNN / LLNN’ where:
(a) ‘LLNN’ is the alpha-numeric Contract number;
(b) ‘LNN’ is the alpha-numeric concrete design mix, for example M25 (‘M’ refers mix and
the number ‘25’ represents the characteristic compressive strength of 15cm cube at 28-
days in MPa);
(c) ‘NNNN’ represents the date of sample with ‘day-month’; and
(d) ‘LLNN’ is the alpha-numeric Transit Mixer, for example ‘TM01’
24.4 For all test samples, the Contractor shall ensure that all samples are identified by a unique
number in accordance with its quality control procedure for inspection and test status of
materials and manufactures products and shall contain the required identification for
traceability. At a minimum, the identification reference shall consist of:
(a) Contract number;
(b) Test identification code assigned by the Contractor;
(c) Date of sample with ‘day-month’; and
(d) Unique sequential number of the sample under the particular test identification Code.
24.5 Additional fields may be added by the Contractor with the consent of the Engineer for the
control of the laboratory activities and analysis of test results.
(v) ADDITIONAL SAMPLES
25.1 The Contractor shall provide additional samples for testing if in the opinion of the Engineer
:
(a) The material previously tested no longer complies with the specified requirements; or
(b) The material has been handled or stored in such a manner that it is no longer
represented by the previously tested samples.
(w) TRIALS
26.1 Trials shall be carried out as stated in the Contract to demonstrate that the proposed
materials, equipment or methods of construction comply with the Contract.
26.2 Trials shall be carried out before commencement of construction or manufacture of the
relevant work in order to ensure that proposed methods and materials comply with the
specified requirements.
57 | P a g e
26.3 Trials shall be carried out using types of materials and methods of manufacture,
construction and/or installation which have been reviewed and Noticed by the Engineer.
26.4 Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials and methods of manufacture, construction
and/or installation used in the trial to produce work complying with the requirements of
the Contract shall not be changed unless further trials have been carried out to demonstrate
that the proposed changes are satisfactory.
26.5 All references to ‘tests’ and ‘testing’ in the Contract shall, where the context so permits,
include trials and commissioning.
(x) TIMING FOR INSPECTION BY THE ENGINEER
27.1 The Contractor shall allow the Engineer a reasonable time to carry out any inspection
and/or witness testing and to assess the result of any inspection and/or test before
proceeding with the Works.
27.2 Unless the Engineer’s prior consent has been obtained, all inspections and/or tests to be
witnessed by the Engineer shall be carried out between 0800 and 1800 hours, Monday to
Saturday.
(y) FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT THE WORKS
28.1 The Engineer may reject the work in question, or require it to be uncovered, in the event of
any failure by the Contractor to inspect and/or test at a Quality ‘Hold Point’ by Contractor’s
Quality Department.
(z) FAILURE OF THE CONTRACT TO TEST THE WORKS
29.1 If the Contractor fails to test, either type test or routine test or qualification test, for each
batch of goods or elements of the Works, then the Engineer shall arrange for third party
inspection. The Engineer shall recover two times the actual cost associated with testing,
including the services of any specialised personnel or independent assessors, and will
deduct such cost from the Contractor.
58 | P a g e
REQUEST FOR INSPECTION(RFI) FOR

(Detail Area to be inspected)
Client: Contractor:
RFI No: Date:
We request you kindly arrange for the inspection / Checking of the following Works.
(Provide brief description about salient details of the Contract No)
Contract item No:

Specification Clause no:
Specific area and detail that are requested to be inspected
ITP/Hold Point details:
1.Chainage/Location: Safety Precaution taken: Yes/No
Brief Description of Works: Check list to be enclosed: Yes/No
Requested by:
Name: Position:
Date & Time: Signature:
Enclosure: (Attach QA/QC form/checklist etc appropriate to inspection)
Comments / Recommendations of Engineer
Engineer’s OBJECTION / NOTICE TO PROCEED
(Provide details if OBJECTION)
Received Copy by Contractor’s Representative:
Name: Position:
Date & Time: Signature:
Note: R.F.I to be submitted at least 24 hours prior to the inspection.
59 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 7
DRAUGHTING AND CAD STANDARDS
60 | P a g e
1. INTRODUCTION
• The purpose of this document is to define the minimum Drafting and CAD standard to
be achieved by the Contractor for all drawings produced by the Contractor for the
purpose of the Works. The Contractor shall produce and obtain the Engineer’s Notice to
proceed to a CAD Manual which defines the standards and procedures for producing
drawings. This will be co-ordinated with the CAD Manuals produced by the Interfacing
Contractors.
• By defining a common format for the presentations of drawings and CAD files, the
exchange of drawn information is improved and will maximise the use of CAD in the co-
ordination process.
• All submissions shall be made to the Engineer in a format reviewed without objection
by the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract requirements.
• Paper and drawing sizes shall be “A” series sheets as specified in BS 3429.
• The latest available versions of the following software, compatible for use with Intel-
Windows based computers shall be used, unless otherwise stated, for the various
electronic submissions required:
Document Type Electronic Document Format

Text Documents MS Word, Ver. 2010
Spread Sheets MS Excel, Ver. 2010
Data Base Files MS Access, Ver. 2010
Presentation Files MS PowerPoint, Ver. 2010
Programmes Primavera P6 (now Oracle PPM)
AutoCAD Graphics Corel Draw, Ver. 8.0/ AutoCAD Ver.14
Photographic Adobe Photoshop, Ver.4.0
Desktop Publishing Page Maker 6.5,5
CADD Drawings AutoCAD Ver. 14
(1) Media for Electronic File Submission

Two copies shall be submitted on separate DVDs, unless otherwise stated.
(2) Internet File Formats/Standards
• The following guidelines shall be followed when the Contractor uses the Internet
browser as the communication media to share information with the Employer /
Engineer.
• All the data formats or standards must be supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer
version 2007 or above running on Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7.
61 | P a g e
• The following lists the file types and the corresponding data formats to be used on Internet.
The Contractor shall comply with them unless prior Notice is obtained from the Engineer
for a different Data format:
File Type Data Format

Photo Image Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG)
Image other than Photo GIF or JPEG
Computer Aid Design files (CAD) Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)
Video Window video (.avi)
Sound Wave file (.wav)
(3) The following states the standards to be used on the Internet when connecting to
database(s). The Contractor shall comply with them unless prior Notice is obtained from
the Engineer for a different standard:
Function to be Implemented Standard to be Complied With

Database connectivity Open Database Connectivity(ODBC)
Publishing hypertext language on Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)
the World Wide Web
The hard copy of all documents shall be the contractual copy.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 General
(1) The Engineer shall provide a title block similar to that used in the Employer’s Drawings.
(2) Each drawing shall be uniquely referenced by a drawing number that shall define both the
current status and revision of the drawing, as described in Section 5 of Volume 7. The
current status of each drawing shall be clearly defined by the use of a single letter code as
follows:
P - Preliminary Design Drawing
D - Definitive Design Drawing
C - Construction Reference Drawing
W - Working Drawing
B - As-Built Drawing
M - As Manufactured Drawing
E - Employer's Drawing
2.2 Types of drawings
(1) "As-Built Drawings": means those drawings produced by the Contractor and endorsed
by him as true records of construction of the Permanent Works and which have been given
62 | P a g e
a notice from the Engineer.

(2) "Construction Reference Drawings": means those drawings referred to in Clause C2(8)
of the Employer's Requirements - Design in respect of which a Notice has been issued.
(3) “Design drawings” means all drawings except shop drawings and as-built drawings.
(4) “Site drawings and sketches” means the drawings, often in sketch form prepared on site
to describe modifications of the Working drawings where site conditions warrant changes
that do not invalidate the design.
“Shop drawings” means special drawings prepared by the manufacturer or fabricator of
various items within the Works to facilitate manufacture or fabrication.
"Working Drawings" means the Construction Reference Drawings and such other
drawings and documents, such as bar bending schedules and manufacturing drawings, as
are necessary to amplify the Construction Reference Drawings for construction purposes,
some of which may be endorsed by the Engineer.
3. COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & DRAFTING (CAD) STANDARDS

3.1 Introduction
Scope of Use; Data input procedures between the Engineer and Contractors must be co-
ordinated, and the key parameters used to form CAD data files must be standardised. The
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Engineer and Interfacing
Contractors to prepare and obtain the Engineer s Notice to proceed to a CAD Manual setting
out the production standards and procedures for CAD data files. The production of all CAD
data files shall comply with the following requirements.
3.2 Objectives
The main objectives of the CAD standards are as follows:
(a) To ensure that the CAD data files produced for the Project are co-ordinated and referenced
in a consistent manner.
(b) To provide the information and procedures necessary for a CAD user from one
discipline or external organisation to access (and use as background reference),
information from a CAD data file prepared by another discipline or external
organisation.
(c) To standardise the information contained within CAD data files which may be
common to more than one discipline such as drawing borders, title boxes, grid lines
etc.
(d) To establish procedures necessary for the management of CAD data files.
(e) To ensure all Contractors use “Model space “and “Paper space” in the production of
63 | P a g e
their “CAD files”.

3.3 General
1. To facilitate co-ordination between Contractors, it is a requirement that all drawings
issued by Contractors for co-ordination or record purposes shall be produced using CAD
methods. Drawings shall be issued in digital format in addition to the paper copies.
2. The intent of the issue of digital information is to aid the related design by others. The
definitive version of all drawings shall always be the paper or polyester film copies which
have been issued by the Contractor or organisation originating the drawing.
3. Drawings and drawing packages issued for co-ordination, record purposes or for
acceptance shall be accompanied by a complete set of the corresponding CAD data files.
4. Any Contractor or organisation making use of the CAD data from others shall be
responsible for satisfying himself that such data is producing an accurate representation
of the information on the corresponding paper drawing which is satisfactory for the
purpose for which he is using it. Provided the general principles of this section have been
achieved by the originator of the CAD data, Contractors making use of the CAD data from
others shall not be entitled to require alterations in the manner in which such CAD data
is being presented to them.
5. In particular, automatic determination of physical dimensions from the data file shall
always be verified against the actual figured dimensions on the paper or polyester
drawings. Figured dimensions shall always be taken as correct where discrepancies
occur.
3.4 Terminology & Associated Standards / Guidelines
Any terminology used within this section that is ambiguous to the user shall be clarified with
the Engineer. British Standard BS1192 is used in principle as a guide for drawing practice,
convention, CAD data structure and translation.
3.5 Paper Drawings
• Hard copies of the drawings, i.e. paper, are considered to be the main vehicle for the
receipt and transmittal of design and production information, typically plans, elevations
and sections.
• The Project wide accepted media for the receipt and transmittal of “Paper” drawings will
be paper and polyester film of various standard ISO “A” sizes. The composition of this
information shall be derived from a CAD “Model”, as noticed by the Engineer.
• The CAD derived “Paper” drawing composition will reflect a window of information
contained within a CAD “Model Space” file together with a selection of information
contained within the associated CAD “Paper Space” file.
64 | P a g e
3.6 CAD Data Creation, Content & Presentation

A consistent method of CAD data creation, together with content and presentation is
essential. The method of CAD “Model Space and Paper Space” creation is as follows:
(1) Model Space Files
a) Typically, CAD “Model Space” files are required for general arrangement and
location plans and will consist of a series of other “Model Space” referenced CAD
files covering the total design extents at a defined building level (the number of
referenced files should be kept to an absolute minimum). Data contained within a
CAD “Model Space” files is drawn at full size (1:1) and located at the correct global
position and orientation on the Project Grid / or defined reference points.
b) Each CAD “Model Space” file will relate to an individual discipline. Drawing border
/ text, match / section lines or detailed notation shall NOT be included within a CAD
“Model Space” file. Dimensions shall be included within a CAD “Model Space” but
located on a dedicated layer. Elevations, Long Sections and Cross Sections shall also
be presented in CAD “Model Space” as defined above, but do not need to be
positioned and orientated on the Project Grid.
(2) Paper Space CAD Files

a) Paper Space” CAD files are utilised to aid the process of plotting “Paper” drawings
and are primarily a window of the CAD “Model Space” file. A “Paper Space” CAD file
will typically contain drawing borders, text, match or section lines & detailed
notation. Once these files are initially set up and positioned the majority of “Paper
Drawing” plots at various Noticed scales are efficiently and consistently generated
by displaying different combinations of element layers and symbology contained
within the “Paper Space” file and the referenced “Model Space” files.
b) The purpose is to ensure that total co-ordination is achieved between the CAD
“Model Space” file and the “Paper Drawing” output during the revision cycle of the
design and production process. Duplicated data in “Model and Paper Space” files
will not be acceptable unless an automatic update link exists between the two data
sets. “Paper Space” files are not typically required as part of the CAD Media Receipt
from Contractors, unless specifically requested by the Engineer.
3.7 CAD Quality Control Checks
• Random CAD Quality Control Audits will be carried out by Engineer on all CAD media
received and transmitted.
• These checks DO NOT verify the technical content of the CAD data received or
transmitted, as this is the responsibility of the originating organisation, however
65 | P a g e
compliance with all CAD and Draughting Standards shall be checked.

• In addition, all Contractors who transmit and receive CAD data relating to the Project shall
have CAD quality control procedures in place. A typical quality control procedure shall
contain CAD data quality checking routines coupled with standards for CAD data
transmittal and archiving.
3.8 CAD Data Transfer Media and Format
When CAD data is received & transmittal between the Employer, the Engineer, the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors, the media shall be as follows:
a) Data Exchange Format - AutoCAD Release 14 or latest version. DWG
b) Operating System - Windows NT, Windows Vista or Windows 7
c) Data Transfer Media shall be submitted on DVD-RW Discs, of at least 4.0 GB.
d) All DVDs must be labelled with a stick-on circular data sheet with the following
details:
1. Name of Contractor and/or Company
2. Project Title
3. Drawing Filenames
4. DVD Reference No. & Total No. of DVDs
(e) All media shall be submitted with a completed Transmittal Form, refer to
Attachment A2 of Section A of this Volume 3.
(f) The Contractor must ensure the supplied media is free from all virus’s, spam,
shareware, etc..
(g) Sub-directories on DVDs are not permitted. If CAD Data is created using UNIX,
archive commands must be unrooted.
3.9 CAD Media Receipt & Transmittal
(1) CAD Media Transmittal forms from the Contractor to the Engineer will consist of the
following:
(a) CAD Digital Media DVDs shall typically contain CAD “Model Space” and
“Paper Space” files.
(b) CAD data sheet
(c) CAD issue / revision sheet
(d) CAD Quality Checklist confirming compliance.
Plot of each “Model Space” file issued on an A1 drawing sheet (to best fit).
(2) The above CAD media will be collectively known as “CAD Media Transmittal Set”. The CAD
data file transmittal format required by the Engineer from all contractors shall be AutoCAD
Version 14 or latest version.
(3) All CAD media received from Contractors will be retained by the Engineer, as an audit trail
66 | P a g e
/ archive of a specific Contractor’s design evolution.

(4) CAD Media Receipt, issued by the Engineer to the Contractor.
(a) CAD media should normally be obtained from the respective Interfacing
Contractor(s), but should the Engineer issue CAD media it will consist of the
following:
(i) CAD Digital Media DVDs typically contain only CAD “Model Space” files.
(ii) CAD data sheet.
(iii) CAD issue / revision sheet
(b) The above CAD media will be collectively known as the “CAD Media Receipt Set”.
The CAD data file transmittal format used by the Engineer to all Contractors will
be in AutoCAD (version 14)
(c) Each CAD transmittal disk / tape will be labelled with proper disk label as Noticed
by the Engineer. Any CAD data transmitted without this label is assumed to be
provisional information not to have been quality checked and therefore not
formally issued.
Revisions
• All “Revisions”, “In Abeyance” and “Deletions” shall be located on a common layer.
This layer can be turned on or off for plotting purposes.
• The following example text indicates the current CAD file revision, i.e. „Revision
[A]‟. This shall be allocated to a defined layer on all CAD “Model Space” files, in
text of a size that will be readable when the CAD “Model Space” file is fitted to the
screen, with all levels on.
Block Libraries, Blocks, & Block Names
1. All Construction Industry symbols produced as CAD Cells shall typically
conform to British Standard BS1192 - part 3.
2. All Blocks created shall be Primitive (i.e. NOT Complex) and shall be placed
Absolute (i.e. NOT Relative).
3. TheContractor'sspecificblocklibrariesshallbetransmittedtoEmployer’s
Representative together with an associated block library list containing the filename
(max. 6 characters) and block description. The Contractor shall ensure that the
library is regularly updated and circulated to all other users, together with the
associated library listing.
4. All Blocks of a common type, symbols or details should initially be created
within a CAD “Model Space File” specifically utilised for that purpose. These files
will be made available on request by the Engineer.
5. All Blocks created will typically be 2D unless 3D is specifically requested. In both
67 | P a g e
instances they shall have an origin at a logical point located within the extents of
each Blocks masked area or volume.
AD Dimensioning
Automatic CAD Dimensioning will be used at all times. Any dimensional change must
involve the necessary revision to the model space file. If the CAD Quality Control Checks
find that the revisions have not been correctly carried out, the rejection of the entire CAD
submission will result.
3.10 CAD Layering

All CAD elements shall be placed on the layers allocated for each different discipline. The
layer naming convention to be adopted by the Contractor shall be submitted for acceptance
and inclusion within these standards.
3.11 Global origin, Location & Orientation on the Alignment Drawing.
(1) Location or Plan information in “Model Space” files shall coincide with the correct
location and orientation on the Project grid for each specific contract.
(2) Location plans shall have at least three setting out points shown on each CAD “Model Space”
file. Each setting out point shall be indicated by a simple cross-hair together with related
Easting’s and Northings co-ordinates.
3.12 Line Thickness and Colour
To assist plotting by other users, the following colour codes will be assigned to the
following line thickness / pen sizes.
Colour Code No Line Thickness
Red 10 0.18
White 7 0.25
Yellow 2 0.35
Brown 34 0.5
Blue 130 0.7
Orange 30 1.0
Green 3 1.4
Grey 253 2.0
3.13 CAD Utilisation of 2D & 3D Files

Although the project standard is 2D CAD files, certain disciplines and contractors may use
68 | P a g e
3D CAD files for specific applications or where the isolated use of 3D aids the design and
visualisation process, i.e. Architecture, Survey and Utilities. In these specific instances 3D
CAD data will only be transmitted if all other users can use this data. If this is not the case,
a 3D to 2D translation shall be processed by the creator prior to issue.
3.14 CAD File Numbering

(1) Contractors CAD File Numbering shall be described in 2.2 above.
(2) The Employer will not be required to produce numerous CAD files, but if they issue
any the drawings shall follow the required Contract numbering system, except that
the status of the drawing in clause 2.1(3) shall be "E".
3.15 CAD File Naming Convention – General

CAD “Model Space” files shall be named in accordance with general drawing conventions.
69 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 8
WORKS AREAS & TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY
70 | P a g e
WORKS AREAS & TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY

1. INTRODUCTION
• The Contractor shall provide within the designated principal Works Areas, at
locations agreed with the Engineer, the compounds and facilities for the Employer,
the Engineer, the Contractor and Project Contractors of the Employer as described
elsewhere in this Contract and to the engineering conditions defined under Clause
2 of this Appendix 8.
• The standard conditions applying to the use of any Works Area by the Contractor
for its site facilities are given under Clause 2 of this Appendix.
• The Conditions for supply of electricity by the Contractor to Interfacing
Contractors are given under Clause 3 of this Appendix.
• Other aspects of design, supply and construction within works areas, including
structures within works areas shall be covered by the relevant parts of the
Specification.
2. STANDARD ENGINEERING CONDITIONS

The following standard engineering conditions apply to all Works Areas:
(1) Formation
a) The Works Areas shall be formed to the levels that the Engineer has issued
a notice. No such levels shall be amended without a notice from the
Engineer.
b) The Works Areas shall be surfaced in a manner agreed with the Engineer,
compatible with their intended use, and, in particular, footpaths and roadways
connecting facilities shall be clearly defined. Measures shall be taken to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure all areas are properly drained and kept free
of standing water.
c) The removal, diversion or reinstatement elsewhere as may be required of
any existing works or installation whatsoever within the Works Areas shall
be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(2) Roads & Parking
a) Space shall be provided within the Works Areas for parking,
loading/unloading and manoeuvring of motor vehicles.
b) Any damage done to the adjoining public roads and fixtures and properties
(public or private) shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(3) Drainage & Sewerage
71 | P a g e
a) All storm or rainwater from the Works Areas including any access roads
thereto shall be conveyed to the nearest stream course, catch-pit, channel or
storm water drain as required by the Engineer. All temporary and
permanent works shall be carried out in such a manner that no damage or
nuisance are caused by storm water or rain water to the adjacent property.
b) No drain or watercourse shall be used without a notice issued from the

Engineer.
c) Damages or obstructions caused to any watercourse, drain, water-main or
other installations within or adjoining the Works Areas shall be made good
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
d) Treatment and disposal of sewage and wastewater from the Works Areas
shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) Buildings
(a) No permanent structures other than those required for the Permanent
Works shall be temporarily permitted on the Works Areas.
(b) Electricity, water, telephone and sewerage shall be provided by the
Contractor, as required, for all temporary buildings.
(c) No public supply potable water shall be used for heating, cooling and
humidification purposes, or vehicle washing without a notice from the
Engineer.
(5) Pedestrian Access
Every existing pedestrian access throughout the Works Areas shall be
maintained in a usable condition at all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer
including lighting, signing and guarding.
(6) Fencing
The Works Areas shall be secured against unauthorised access at all times. In
particular fencing or the like shall be maintained, removed and re-erected in the
new location wherever and whenever a Works Area is relinquished in stages.
3. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS

3.1 Work on Site
a) The Contractor shall nominate a representative whose name and qualifications
shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for review not later than 4 weeks
before the appointment and who shall be solely responsible for ensuring the
safety of all temporary electrical equipment on Site. The Contractor shall not
72 | P a g e
install or operate any temporary Site electrical systems until this representative
is appointed and has commenced duties.
b) The name and contact telephone number of the representative having been
reviewed with a Notice to proceed by the Engineer shall be displayed at the
main distribution board for the temporary electrical supply so that he can be
contacted in case of an emergency.
c) Schematic diagrams and the details of the equipment for all temporary
electrical installations shall be submitted by the Contractor, and these diagrams
together with the temporary electrical equipment shall be submitted to the
Engineer for a notice.
d) All electrical installation work on Site shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements laid down in BS 7375 and the Specification. All work shall be
supervised or executed by qualified and suitably categorised electricians, who
are registered as such under the Electricity Ordinance 1990 / Electricity
(Registration) Regulations 1990.
3.2 Electrical General

Temporary electrical Site installations and distribution systems shall be in accordance with:
a) Indian Electricity Rules
b) The Power Companies’ Supply Rules;
c) Electricity and its subsidiary Regulations;
d) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
e) BS 7375 Distribution of Electricity on Construction and Building Sites;
f) BS 4363 Distribution Assemblies for Electricity Supplies for Construction and
Building Sites; and
g) Any other applicable national standards
3.3 Materials, Appliances and Components

All materials, appliances and components used within the distribution system shall
comply with BS 4363 and BS 7375 Appendix A.
3.4 Design Considerations
1. Distribution equipment utilised within the temporary electrical distribution
system shall incorporate the following features: -
a. flexibility in application for repeated use;
b. suitability for transport and storage;
c. robust construction to resist moisture and damage; and
73 | P a g e
d. safety in use.
2. All cabling shall be run at high level whenever possible and be firmly secured to
ensure they do not present a hazard or obstruction to people and equipment.
3. The installation on Site shall allow convenient access to authorised and
competent operators to work on the apparatus contained within.
3.5. Mains Voltage

1. The Site mains voltage shall be as per the Electricity Authority, 415V / 3 phase 4
wire system.
(a) Single phase voltage shall be as per the Electricity Authority, 230V supply.
(b) Reduced voltages shall conform to BS 7375.
2. Types of Distribution Supply
The following voltages shall be adhered to for typical applications throughout the
distribution systems:
(a) fixed plant - 415V/ 3 phase;
(b) movable plant fed by trailing cable - 415V / 3 phase;
(c) installations in Site buildings - 230V/1 phase;
(d) fixed flood lighting - 230V/ 1 phase;
(e) portable and hand held tools - 115V/1 phase;
(f) Site lighting (other than flood lighting) - 115V/1 phase; and
(g) portable hand-lamps (general use) - 115V/1 phase.
3. When the low voltage supply is energised via the Employer's transformer, any
power utilised from that source shall be either 415V 3 phase or / 230V. 1 phase
as appropriate. The Contractor shall carry out any conversion that may be
necessary to enable him to use power from that source.
4. Protection of Circuits
(a) Protection shall be provided for all main and sub-circuits against excess
current, under and over voltage, residual current and earth faults. The
protective devices shall be capable of interrupting (without damage to any
equipment or the mains or sub-circuits) any short circuit current that may
occur.
(b) Discrimination between circuit breakers, and fuses shall be in accordance with:-
BS 88;
BS EN 60898; and
BS 7375;
Any other appropriate Indian Standards
74 | P a g e
3.6. Earthing
1. Earthing and bonding shall be provided for all electrical installations and
equipment to prevent the possibility of dangerous voltage rises and to ensure
that faults are rapidly cleared by installed circuit protection.
2. Earthing systems shall conform to the following standards:-
(a) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition);
(b) BS 7430;
(c) BS 7375; and
(d) IEEE Standard 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.
3.7. Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers

Low voltage plugs, sockets and couplers shall be colour coded in accordance with BS
7375, and constructed to conform to BS EN 60309. High voltage couplers and 'T'
connections shall be in accordance with BS 3905.
3.8. Cables
1. Cables shall be selected after full consideration of the conditions to which they
will be exposed and the duties for which they are required. Supply cables up to
3.3KV shall be in accordance with BS 6346.
2. For supplies to mobile or transportable equipment where operation of the

equipment subjects the cable to flexing, the cable shall conform to one of the
following specifications appropriate to the duties imposed on it:
(a) BS 6708 flexible cables for use at mines and quarries;
(b) BS 6007 rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting; and
(c) BS 6500 insulated flexible cords and cables.
3. Where low voltage cables are to be used, reference shall be made to BS 7375. The
following specifications shall also be referred to particularly for underground cables:-
(a) BS 6346 for armoured LSZH insulated cables; and
(b) BS 6708 Flexible cables for use at mines and quarries.
4. All cables which have a voltage to earth exceeding 65V (except for supplies from welding
transformers to welding electrodes) shall be of a type having a metal sheath and/or
armour which shall be continuous and effectively earthed. In the case of flexible or
trailing cables, such earthed metal sheath and/or armour shall be in addition to the
earth core in the cable and shall not be used as the sole earth conductor.
5. Armoured cables having an over sheath of LSZH or an oil resisting and flame retardant
75 | P a g e
compound shall be used whenever there is a risk of mechanical damage occurring.

6. For resistance to the effects of sunlight, overall non-metallic covering of cables shall be
black in colour.
7. Cables which have applied to them a voltage to earth exceeding 12V but not normally
exceeding 65V shall be of a type insulated and sheathed with a general purpose or heat
resisting elastomer.
8. All cables which are likely to be frequently moved in normal use shall be flexible cables.
Flexible cables shall be in accordance with BS 6500 and BS 7375.
3.9. Lighting Installation

1 Where Site inspection of the Works is required during the nights, the Lighting
circuits shall be run separate from other sub-circuits and shall be in accordance
with BS 7375 and BS 4363.
2 Voltage shall not exceed 55V to earth except when the supply is to a fixed point
and where the lighting fixture is fixed in position.
3 Luminaries shall have a degree of protection not less than IP 54. In particularly bad
environments where the luminaries are exposed to excesses of dust and water, a
degree of protection to IP 65 shall be employed.
4 The Contractor shall upgrade the lighting level to a minimum of 200 lux by
localised lighting in all areas where required by the Engineer.
5 Mechanical protection of luminaries against damage by impact shall be provided
by use of wire guards or other such devices whenever risk of damage occurs.
3.10. Electrical Motors

1. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors to BS 4999: Part 105 shall be used.
2. Motor control and protection circuits shall be as stipulated in BS 6164.
Emergency stops for machinery shall be provided.
3.11. Inspection and Testing
Electrical installations on Site shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition).
3.12. Identification
IdentificationlabelsofatypereviewedwithanoticeofnoobjectionbytheEngineer shall be affixed
to all electrical switches, circuit breakers and motors to specify their purpose.
3.13. Maintenance:
1. Strict maintenance and regular checks of control apparatus and wiring
distribution systems shall be carried out by an electrician (duly qualified to carry
76 | P a g e
out the said checks) to ensure safe and efficient operation of the systems. The
Contractor shall submit for a notice by the Engineer details of his maintenance
schedule and maintenance works record.
2. All portable electrical appliances shall be permanently numbered (scarf tag labels
or similar) and a record kept of the date of issue, date of the last inspection carried
out and the recommended inspection period.
77 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 9
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS
78 | P a g e
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS
All materials and products shall conform to the relevant standard Specifications, IS codes
and other relevant codes etc. and shall be of approved make and design.
There are currently no approved manufacturers and suppliers for the Goregaon Mulund Link
Road (GMLR).
79 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 10
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
80 | P a g e
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
All details with regard to the Horizontal and Vertical Alignment are shown on the plan and profile
sheets of the Employer’s Drawings provided in Volume 6 of the Contract.
The Contractor has to carry out his own detailed survey based on which the geometric design of
horizontal and vertical alignment shall be prepared using industry approved softwares like MX ROAD
or CIVIL 3D. The geometric design shall be based on the information provided in the tender drawings;
deviation from the horizontal alignment given in the tender drawings is generally not permitted. Work
shall proceed only after obtaining the Notice to proceed from the Engineer for the Contractor’s
alignment design.
81 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX-11
UTILITIES
82 | P a g e
DEFINITIONS
Utilities-
Utilities are defined as public utilities above or below ground and include all live water mains,
water wells, power cables, street lights, transformers, telephone posts, telecommunication cables,
sewers, storm water drains shown on the Employer’s Drawings OR are uncharted and are
therefore not shown on the Employer’s Drawings.
Charted Utilities-
Charted Utilities are the utilities (as defined above) which are shown on the Employer’s Drawings.
Uncharted Utilities-
UnchartedUtilitiesaretheutilities(asdefinedabove)whicharenotshownontheEmployer’s Drawings.
Responsibility of the Contractor
(1) The Contractor shall make his own enquiries and investigations, including excavating trial
holes, to ascertain the existence, nature, location and size of utilities. A schedule of utility
diversions and utilities to remain but to be supported (the utility diversion plan) shall be
prepared by the Contractor and submitted with the Preliminary Design. The schedule will
list out utilities that:
• will be diverted by the Contractor during the course of the Works, and
• will remain in place and require the use of specific construction protection methods
to complete the underground structures around and below the utilities including
support of the utilities during construction.
(2) The Contractor shall take into consideration the time required for utility diversions into
the overall Works Programme for the Contract. However, efforts shall be made to avoid
diverting/disturbance of any utility and continue the Works by supporting the same but
the required services being provided by these utilities shall be maintained at all the times
at the cost of the Contractor.
(3) The diversion work shall be undertaken by the Contractor as per the approval of the Utility
owning Agencies and a Notice from the Engineer. Temporary supports and protection by
methods proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Utility Agency shall be provided to the
utilities. Permanent supports and protection shall be provided wherever required for the safety
and security of the utility service.
(4) The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and the Utility Agencies of any
(a) damage to utilities;
(b) leakage of utilities;
(c) discovery of utilities not previously identified.
(5) When diverting and/or protecting sewerage and storm water lines the Contractor shall
83 | P a g e
ensure that drainage to the site and adjacent areas is maintained at all times and that no
times flooding or other nuisance occurs.
(6) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the programme of all works of utility
diversion/ protection works and shall take all steps to enable the utility diversions to
proceed in accordance with the programme. The Contractor shall maintain close liaison
with the Utility Agencies. The Contractor shall set up and manage a Utility Liaison Group of
experienced personnel for the duration of the Contract.
(7) Records of the existing utilities encountered shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and
a copy provided for the Engineer. The records shall contain the following details:
• location of utility;
• date on which the utilities were encountered;
• nature and sizes of the utilities;
• condition of utility;
• temporary or permanent supports provided; and
• diversions made –Temporary or permanent
(8) The Contractor shall include the details (plan, location, ownership, size and material) of all
such utilities on the As Built Drawings.
Diversion and Protection of Underground/Overhead Utility Lines
(9) The work comprises of replacement, relocation, diversion and protection of existing sub-
surface, surface and overhead public utilities viz. sewer mains, water lines, water wells,
storm water drains, gully pits including connection pipes, house drains, gas pipe lines,
electric and telephone cables, optical fibre cables including their appurtenance structure,
O.H. electrical transmission line, electric poles, traffic signals, etc… which will be disturbed
due to construction of the GMLR structures including transition ramps, cut and cover
tunnels and bored tunnels, where applicable.
(10) The Contractor at his own cost shall divert and/or effectively protect all public utilities
falling within the vicinity of the GMLR structures and features and their immediate
adjoining areas or which are likely to be exposed, disturbed or damaged during the
execution of the work or in consequence thereof, in such a manner and using such materials
as required or specified by the concerned Public Utility Agencies and as per instruction of
the Engineer, and hold them in proper position without any damage being caused to them
during execution of work.
(11) The Contractor shall have to bear the expenses of providing and laying pipes, water wells,
gas mains/gully pit connections/house drains and other electric, telephones, optical fibre
84 | P a g e
cables and other cables or any other underground structures or services falling within the
weaving length, ramp, cut & cover and tunnel locations, and their immediate adjoining
areas which may be found to have been disturbed or damaged due to the Contractor’s fault
and/or defective and careless workmanship. The decision of the Engineer in this respect
shall be binding and final and all costs of rebuilding or repairing of such damaged services
or structures as aforesaid shall be deducted from the Contractor, if the same is not taken
care of within a reasonable time frame, mutually agreed between the Engineer and the
Contractor.
(12) The Contractor shall enquire of and collect information from all concerned Public and
Private Utility Agencies, Owners, Government Departments and local bodies in connection
with the sewer lines, water mains, water wells, cables, wires and any other obstruction
either overhead or on ground or underground which may be encountered in the course of
execution of the work and which are likely to affect the progress of the work, at his own
cost and risk. No idle labour charge will be admissible on account of delay in collecting the
above-mentioned information.
(13) The Contractor shall have to excavate trial trenches of suitable sizes for satisfactorily
exploring all the underground utilities as required and as Noticed by the Engineer before
commencement of any permanent work below ground level.
The time of completion for the project is inclusive of diverting and/ or protection
(temporary as well permanent) of utilities.
Additional Conditions for Diversion/Protection of Utilities on/under/above the

MCGM’s Water Department and Drainage Sewer Department

(14) It is the responsibility of the Contractor to get the approval from the relevant MCGM’s
departments for the proposed water/sewer pipeline diversion/shifting. However, the
Employer will facilitate the co-ordination work with MCGM’s departments for getting
necessary approvals.
(15) The shifting/diversion of pipeline work have to be carried out by engaging the MCGM
registered contractors.
(16) MCGM engineers will supervise the work. The MCGM utility contractors have to carry out
the work as per the instruction of the MCGM engineers during diversion work by the
85 | P a g e
Contractor.
(17) In case of permanent diversion of water/sewer pipelines, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to carry out such work without affecting water supply/without affecting
sewage disposal. If required alternative temporary arrangement have to be made.
(18) In case of temporary water pipe/sewer pumping mains (without manholes) diversion
(which means divert the pipeline temporary away from station box and brought back to
the original position after completion of station work), it is the responsibility of the
contractor either to use the retrieved diverted pipes or new pipes to restore back the
original place without affecting the water supply.
(19) In case of temporary diversion of gravity sewer pipelines with manholes are required, the
contractor, initially before taking up the station work has to ensure that the flow is
diverted by laying sewer pipeline and constructing manholes away from the station box
and then only divert the flow. After completion of station work, the contractor have to lay
again another sewer pipelines and again construct new manholes for restoring back to
the original place.
(20) In case of temporary supporting of water/sewer pipelines, if any damages occurred
during construction period it is the responsibility of the contractor to rectify the damages
to the satisfaction of MCGM Engineers. The cost of the rectification works shall have to be
borne by the contractor if not quoted in the Tender document.
(21) It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain completion certificate from the relevant
department of MCGM for each diversion work. The final bill be paid only after obtaining
a completion certificate from MCGM.
Electricity-BEST / TATA
(22) The Contractor shall be responsible for diversion of utilities with respect to the
BEST/TATA works. However, the Employer will facilitate the co-ordination with the
BEST/TATA. The Contractor shall carryout the diversion works complying with the
following conditions.
(23) The Contractor shall submit the utility diversion programme to the Engineer with
diversion justification based on trial pit information.
(24) The Contractor shall submit the diversion plan to the Engineer at least 60 (sixty) days in
advance of work commencing to obtain approval from BEST/TATA. For utility diversion
proposals of BEST/TATA utilities, the Contractor shall submit diversion justification with
trail pit information and drawing(s) with the proposed diversion route(s).
(25) The Contractor would submit application of diversion works to BEST/TATA with
diversion plans. The contractor shall render necessary assistance.
86 | P a g e
(26) The Contractor shall coordinate with the BEST/TATA local officials to assess quantities
and specifications of materials required for diversion works. Necessary assistance would
be provided by the Employer and Engineer.
(27) The Contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the concerned departments to
carry out the diversion/shifting works and get necessary permission from the Traffic
Police Department.
(28) Wherever possible, trenchless technology should be considered at location where utility
diversion works crosses roadways and require lane closures for excavation to avoid
inconvenience to the traffic.
(29) The electrical utilities diversion/ shifting should be carried out by Contractors registered
with BEST/TATA / CPWD and have C or A grade licence from Chief Electrical Inspector to
the Government. The Contractor should be well acquainted with electrical works so as to
maintain the BEST/TATA standard. Contractor shall inform the same to the Engineer for
getting consent from the BEST/TATA.
(30) The Contractor shall identify the quantity of materials required for the contract such that
the material can be procured in bulk and in advance to the implementation of the utility
diversion works. The quality of materials to be procured shall be approved by
BEST/TATA. Materials used for diversion / shifting shall be of quality conforming to the
applicable BEST/TATA standard and as per relevant ISS.
(31) The source of materials and the guarantee for the materials to be used shall be submitted
to the Engineer for obtaining approval from BEST/TATA. Any failure of the material
within the guarantee period shall be replaced and installed free of cost by the Contractor.
(32) Contractor shall inform the local BEST/TATA officers about the diversion works at least
15 (fifteen) days before the execution of diversion.
(33) The diversion / shifting utility work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of
BEST/TATA officials and BEST/TATA decision is final in this regard.
The Contractor shall provide free access to BEST/TATA officers / workmen for the purpose of
inspection / supervision.
(34) After restoration of regular service completion certificate to be obtained from BEST/TATA.
The regulations for working with BEST/TATA are as follows;
a. The diversion/shifting utility work should be carried out without causing any
inconvenience to the operation and maintenance of Sub-Station and other
departmental works of BEST/TATA.
b. The Contractor shall execute and complete the work strictly in adherence to the time
87 | P a g e
schedule and to the satisfaction of BEST/TATA engineers and adhere strictly the
direction of BEST/TATA in any matter.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible to protect the public and the employees of
BEST/TATA against any accident that may arise during the execution of
diversion/shifting utility works. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for any
claims for damages/injuries to the person/property resulting from any such accident.
The Contractor shall take steps to properly insure against claims under the
Workmen’s Compensation Act by the way of obtaining an accident risk type insurance
to meet all purpose of relief, failing which or otherwise the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for meeting the compensation awarded under the said Act.
d. The Contractor shall undertake to ensure free flow of traffic during execution of the
diversion/shifting works and shall be responsible any accident/loss of
lives/property. Damage to the other existing utilities during diversion to be rectified
by the Contractor free of cost.
e. The Contractor shall employ qualified technical personnel to carry out the
diversion/shifting of utility works.
f. The Contractor shall apply well in advance for Line Clearance (LC) for carrying out
the joint works/shifting works. Employer would authorise the Contractor to take LC
from BEST/TATA. If needed, EMPLOYER would provide assistance to the Contractor
to get the LC.The LC will be given by BEST/TATA depending upon exigencies, which
have to be strictly adhered to.
g. The Contractor shall handover all the retrieved / unused material to the stores of
BEST/TATA/concerned department. The conveyance shall be at the Contractor’s
cost.
h. Contractor should undertake not to revoke the above conditions until the completion
of diversion/shifting works.
All the above shall apply in case of private electric companies as well. MCGM’s Road
Department
(35) Diversion of Storm water drain shall be carried out as per the design, standard and general
specifications of MCGM’s Road Department / Highways Department.
(36) The diversion route for storm water drain shall be approved by MCGM’s Road Department/
Highways Department.
(37) The invert level of diverting drain shall be maintained on par with upstream/downstream
of connecting drains.
88 | P a g e
(38) The Contractor shall make alternate arrangements to divert and ensure smooth flow of
water from upstream side during construction.
(39) The Contractor shall provide 0.9 x 0.9 m and 1.2 x 1.2 m sizes of drain or follow the existing
sizes.
(40) Diversion of storm water drain shall be carried out through the registered contractors of
MCGM’s Road Department/ Highways Department.
(41) The Contractor shall obtain No objection certificate from MCGM’s Road Department upon
completion of diversion works for making payment
(42) The Contractor shall make necessary preventive measures to avoid damages to the
adjoining building and compound wall.
Telecom- BSNL and Private Companies
(43) The Contractor shall obtain concurrence from the respective Telecom Companies to carry
out the utilities diversion. The Contractor shall be responsible for diversion of utilities with
respect to the Telecom Companies works. However, the Employer will facilitate the co-
ordination with the relevant Telecom Companies. The Contractor shall carryout the
diversion works complying with the following conditions.
(44) The Contractor shall submit the utility diversion programme to the Engineer with diversion
justification based on trial pit information.
(45) The Contractor shall submit the diversion plan to the Engineer at least 60 (sixty) days in
advance of work commencing to obtain approval from the respective Telecom Companies.
For utility diversion proposals of Telecom utilities, the Contractor shall submit diversion
justification with all information and drawing(s) with the proposed diversion route(s).
(46) The Contractor would submit application of diversion works to the respective Telecom
Companies with diversion plans. The Contractor shall render necessary assistance.
(47) The Contractor shall coordinate with the respective Telecom Companies local officials to
assess quantities and specifications of materials required for diversion works. Employer /
Engineer would facilitate the coordination work in this regard.
(48) The Contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the concerned departments to
carry out the diversion/shifting works and also get necessary permission from the Traffic
Police Department.
(49) Wherever possible, trenchless technology should be considered at location where utility
diversion works crosses roadways and require lane closures for excavation to avoid
inconvenience to the traffic.
(50) The utilities diversion/ shifting should be carried out by Contractors registered with the
89 | P a g e
respective Telecom Companies. The Contractor should be well acquainted with the works
so as to maintain the Telecom Companies standard. Contractor shall inform the same to
Engineer for getting consent from the respective Telecom Companies.
(51) The Contractor shall identify the quantity of materials required for the contract such that
the material can be procured in bulk and in advance to the implementation of the utility
diversion works. The quality of materials to be procured shall be approved by the
respective Telecom Companies. Materials used for diversion / shifting shall be of quality
conforming to the applicable the respective Telecom Companies standard and as per
relevant ISS.
(52) The source of materials and the guarantee for the materials to be used shall be submitted
to the Engineer for obtaining approval from the respective Telecom Companies. Any failure
of the material within the guarantee period shall be replaced and installed free of cost by
the Contractor.
(53) Contractor shall inform the respective local Telecom Companies officers about the
diversion works at least 15 (fifteen) days before the execution of diversion.
(54) The diversion / shifting utility work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the
respective Telecom Companies officials and the respective Telecom Companies decision is
final in this regard.
The Contractor shall provide free access to Telecom Companies officers / workman for the
purpose of inspection / supervision.
(55) After restoration of regular service completion certificate to be obtained from the
concerned departments. The regulations for working with the respective Telecom
Companies are as follows;
a. The diversion/shifting utility work should be carried out without causing any
inconvenience to the operation and maintenance.
b. The Contractor shall execute and complete the work strictly in adherence to the time
schedule and to the satisfaction of the respective Telecom Companies engineers and
adhere strictly the direction of the respective Telecom Companies in any matter.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible to protect the public and the employees of the
respective Telecom Companies against any accident that may arise during the
execution of diversion/shifting utility works. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Employer for any claims for damages/injuries to the person/property resulting from
90 | P a g e
any such accident. The Contractor shall take steps to properly insure against claims
under the Workmen’s Compensation Act by the way of obtaining an accident risk type
insurance to meet all purpose of relief, failing which or otherwise the Contractor shall
be solely responsible for meeting the compensation awarded under the said Act.
d. Contractor shall undertake to ensure free flow of traffic during execution of the
diversion/shifting works and shall be responsible any accident/loss of lives/property.
Damage to the other existing utilities during diversion to be rectified by the
Contractor free of cost.
e. The Contractor shall employ qualified technical personnel to carry out the
diversion/shifting of utility works.
f. The Contractor shall handover all the retrieved / unused material to the stores of the
respective Telecom Companies/concerned department at the Contractors cost.
g. Contractor should undertake not to revoke the above conditions until the completion
of diversion/shifting works.
General
(56) The contractor shall provide a 6 month rolling programme every 3 months.
(57) Supervision Charges, if any levied by the Utilities Departments / Agencies shall be borne
by the Contractor.
91 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 12
SITE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER
92 | P a g e
SITE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER
1. The Contractor shall provide Site Accommodation (total area approx. 250m2) for the Engineer’s
Staff according to the following schedule of offices:
Type No. of Staff Area m2 Total Area m2

Employer / General Consultant Staff 3 10 30
Project Manager Office 1 10 10
Project Manager Staff 10 7.5 75
Project Manager Staff 10 5.0 50
Senior Resident Engineer Office 1 10 10
Resident Engineer Office
2 7.5 15
Site Engineer Office 4 5 20
Site Inspectors 8 2.5 20
General Office / Reception Area - 15 15
Rest Rooms (washroom/toilet) - 5 10
Kitchen - 10 10
Meeting Room - 15 15
Total 280
2. Offices shall be accessible only from a corridor within the building. The corridor and
reception area entrances shall be provided with an external double door.
3. Materials for the construction shall be new, robust and durable. The building shall be
weatherproof, vermin proof, well insulated thermally and acoustically. Internal walls shall
be soundproofed. Electrical power and lighting, including all fixtures and fittings, power,
telecoms and internet sockets, shall be provided to each room, including air conditioning
and heating to maintain the internal temperature within the range of 20 to 24 degrees
Celsius at all times. A standby generator shall also be provided and installed with an
automatic switchover.
4. Internal doors shall be flush, fitted with door closers, mortise locks with keys and lever
handles.
• External doors shall be a pair of solid core doors, external quality, hung on heavy duty
hinges, one leaf fitted with barrel bolts top and bottom and the other leaf fitted with a
Yale or similar lock.
• Windows, of area not less than 10% of the floor area, shall be provided to all rooms,
93 | P a g e
securely barred, fitted with blinds and having opening sections fitted with locks and
mosquito screens.
• The building shall be provided with a continuous water supply and drainage to Kitchen,
Washroom and Toilets. The Toilets shall be equipped with low level suites and be
adequately ventilated through the ceiling.
• The Kitchen shall be fitted out with a 2-drainer stainless steel double sink unit, hot water
heater, worktop with cupboards under, tiling above the sink and worktop and wall
mounted cupboards.
• Fire and Safety regulations shall be complied with and firefighting equipment shall be
provided in accordance with the recommendations of the Maharashtra State Fire
Service.
• The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain appropriate name boards as specified,
for each of the offices. The wording shall be agreed with the Engineer.
• The Contractor shall provide protective clothing and safety equipment for 25 persons,
comprising, as a minimum – Safety Helmets, Safety Harness, Steel-toed construction
shoes/boots (sizes to be notified), Day-Glo waistcoat, Industrial safety goggles,
Industrial gloves, Breathing Masks and Filters, Ear protectors, Heavy weight suits (sizes
to be notified), Lamps (with batteries), etc. as required by the Engineer.
• The Contractor shall provide an adjacent shaded hard standing parking area for 20 cars.
• The Contractor shall arrange for upkeep, service and security of the offices and
compound. These to be thoroughly cleaned and rubbish and waste to be removed at least
once per day.
• The Contractor shall submit a detailed office layout plan showing all relevant details of
these site offices, not limited to that described above, which will require a Notice from
the Engineer.
• Furniture and equipment for the Engineer’s office shall be provided by the Contractor.
94 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 13
CONTRACTOR’S SITE LABORATORY
95 | P a g e
CONTRACTOR’S SITE LABORATORY
1. SITE LABORATORY
• The Site Laboratory shall be approximately 250m2 in area. It shall consist of the
following accommodation:
1 concrete laboratory 60m2 floor area

1 Soil laboratory 30m2 floor area
2 office each15m2 floor area
1 store room10m2 floor area
1 kitchen 10m2 floor area
male toilets, changing room & shower sufficient for 6 persons
• The remainder of the 250m2 shall consist of storage area for concrete cube curing
tanks. The laboratory, office, etc., shall be in one building; the curing tank and storage
building may be in a separate building, but if so it shall be adjacent to the laboratory
building and connected to it by a level, weatherproof passageway. In addition, an area
of covered hard standing of 50m2 for motor vehicles shall be provided adjacent to the
laboratory.
2. STANDARD OF CONSTRUCTION
• The laboratory shall be constructed to the best Employer’s engineering practice and
the Engineer shall issue a Notice to Proceed. Two independent telephone lines with
two extensions each shall be provided for the laboratory. Telephones shall be located
in areas as agreed with the Engineer.
• A covered water tank with minimum capacity of 2000 litres shall be installed, as a
source of constant water pressure (15 kPa minimum) for each laboratory
• In the case of sinks used separating devices shall be facility for washing samples,
adequate trapping and/or provided to ensure the proper functioning of the facility.
3. FURNISHINGS AND FIXTURES
The Contractor’s site laboratory shall be provided with required furnishings and
fixtures.
4. LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
The laboratory equipment, as listed below, shall be issued a Notice from the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s Notice within 2 weeks of the order to commence
work the name of the supplier he intends to use for each piece of apparatus together with the
relevant catalogue and catalogue number.
96 | P a g e
• The layout of the equipment in the testing laboratory shall require a Notice to Proceed
from the Engineer. The equipment shall be maintained to accuracy appropriate to the
required testing methods with routine calibration by an accredited organisation as
recommended by the appropriate Authority. The Equipment shall also be calibrated
after maintenance or relocation.
• The Contractor's site laboratory shall be equipped with the following material testing
equipment as a minimum. The nature and quantity of equipment required for testing
may be varied by the Engineer depending on the detail of the Contractor's Design and
Construction methods or for any other reason which he deems to be valid and necessary
for the proper control of quality, all at the Contractor’s cost:
Determining Liquid Limit (1 complete set)

Liquid limit device (Casagrande type) 1 Set
Grooving tools 1 No.
Evaporating dish 1 No.
Spatula 100mm blade 1 No.
Laboratory balance, capacity 500 gm, 1 No.
(sensitivity 0.01 gms)
Wash bottle, capacity 500 ml. 1 No.
Moisture cans, capacity 50 ml. 24 No.
Determining Plastic Limit (1 complete set)
Evaporating dish 1 No.
Spatula 100mm blade 1 No.
Glass plate 250mm x 250mm x 12mm 2 No
Moisture cans, capacity 50 ml. 12 No.
Stainless steel rods, 3 mm dia. 2 No.
Determining Moisture Content (1 complete set)
Micro Oven, capacity 35 litres, control 1 No.
temperature up to 200 °c
Balance, capacity 200 gm., sensitivity 0.01
gm. 1 Set
Lab. Tongs 1 No.
Moisture cans 75ml. with lid 36 No’s
Compaction Characteristics (1 complete set)
97 | P a g e
Standard compaction mould 100mm dia. 1 No.

Modified compaction mould 150mm dia. 1 No.
Standard compaction Rammer, 2.5 kg. 1 No.
Modified compaction Rammer, 4.5kg. 1 No.
Straight edge 300mm long 1 No.
Sample ejector for 100mm and 150mm
mould 1 No.
Sample tray 60 x 60 x 8 cm 3 No.
Wash bottle, 500 ml. 2 No.
Moisture cans 250 ml. 24 No.
Density of soil in-place by sand cone method (2 complete set)
Sand density cone apparatus, 150mm 2 No.
Plate, 300mm x 300mm with centre hold
150mm 2 No.
Glass jug for sand cone 2 No.
Chisel 25mm x 150mm 2 No.
Hammer 2 No.
One-gallon field cans 24 No.
Sampling spoon 2 No.
Soft hair brush 2 No.
Moisture cans 250 ml. 48 No.
Sieve Analysis
Sieve shaker (portable) 1 Unit
Coarse sieves (in sizes from 100mm to
10mm) 1 Set
Fine Sieves (#4, #8, #16, #30, #40, #50,
#100, #200 each) Pans & Cover 1 Set
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate
Wire basket, 200mm dia. 5 No.
Heavy duty suspension balance, 20 kg x 1
gm. with accessories 1 Set
Suitable water container 4 No.
Unit Weight of Aggregate
Balance, 100 kg. Capacity with 10 gm
precision
98 | P a g e
Tamping rod 16mm diameter x 600mm long 4 No.

Measuring Containers (3,10,15,30) 1 each
Flakiness and Elongation
Flakiness gauge, elongation index 1 set
Soundness Test
Sodium sulphate 2 No.
Soaking tank 1 Set
Balance, Capacity 3 Kg., Sensitivity 0.1 gm 1 Set
Sieves: Coarse 1 Set
Fine 1 Set
Concrete
Buckets for concrete sampling 12 No.
Slump cone 12 No.
Tamping rod 12 No.
Base plate 12 No.
Mixing pan for concrete 12 No.
Scoop for general purpose 2 No.
Concrete thermometer 2 No.
Concrete cylinder mould, 150mm * 300mm;
100mm * 300mm 10 No.
Concrete cube mould, 100mm cube &
150mm cube 10 No.
Adjustable spanners for dismantling cube
moulds 6 No.
Capping set 2 No.
Capping compound As required
Concrete curing tank with capacity for 270
cubes, temperature controlled, with
circulation system drain and lockable cover 5 No.
Schmidt test hammer 1 No.
Compression testing machine (simple hand
operated) 1 No.
Mould oil As required
Temperature chart recorder 1 No.
Miscellaneous
Vernier callipers to measure up to 200mm, 5 No.
99 | P a g e
with elongated jaws

Steel rule, 300mm long graduated 2 No.
Rubber gloves 10 pr.
Cotton working gloves 20pr
First aid Kit 1 set
Wire brush 6 No.
Steel tape, 3m, 5m, 30m 3 each
Ballpein hammer, 1 kg 2 No.
Paint scraper. Approx. 100mm wide 8 No.
Float, steel Approx. 280mm x 120mm 8 No.
Sack barrow 1 No.
Shovel: 8 No.
Square Mouthed 2 No.
Round Mouthed 2 No.
24-wheel trolley, heavy duty, approx.
0.7m x 1.0m with:
Wheelbarrow, rubber tyred 1 No
Comprehensive tool kit. To include
screwdrivers, pliers, claw hammer, multi-
grips, spanners (adjustable) 1 No
Type NR Schmidt Hammer and tester with
recording device 1 No
Testing Anvil for Schmidt Hammer test
(SHT) 1 No
Chart recording paper for SHT 10 Pkts
Cover meter for detecting metal objects to
depth of 100mm below the surface of non-
magnetic objects 3 No.
Noise meter 1 No.
100 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 14
EARTHING AND GRID
101 | P a g e
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Introduction Scope
1.1.1 The purpose of this Earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection and Corrosion Protection
Policy is to define the requirements for the earthing and bonding of the electrical power
supply systems and other parts of the Tunnel to ensure, as far as possible:
• the safety of operating personnel and other persons from electrical shock.
• the minimum of electrical interference between the electrical power supply and
other electrical and electronic systems and the protection of electrical equipment.
1.1.2 This document is divided into several sections. Sections 2 and 3 are of a general nature
whilst Sections 4 to 7 deal with specific items under system and equipment-specific
general headings.
1.1.3 It should be noted that no Single section can be taken alone as being complete in itself in
covering all aspects of earthing under the general heading of that section. In the
implementation of the earthing policy account has to be taken of the interrelationship,
interface and integration of all systems.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall develop his own designs as required for Earthing, Bonding and
Lightning Protection, using this document as a basis for doing so, which shall require a
notice of no objection from the Engineer, prior to commencing any such works.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall coordinate his designs for earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection
as required with all Interfacing Contractors.
1.1.6 Reference in other documents to "Grounding" shall be taken to be synonymous with
'Earthing".
2. CATEGORIES OF EARTHING
2.1 General Requirement
The earthing system provided at any location may be common to two or more
categories of earthing, in which case all the earthing points on the individual items of
equipment will be bonded together to discharge any earth fault currents: In general,
earthing and bonding is required under one or more of the following categories.
2.2 Neutral Earthing
2.2.1 Connection to earth at one or more nominally equipotential points of the current-
carrying conductors of each section of the power supply system shall be arranged to
ensure that the voltage at any point in the system relative to the general mass of earth
will be within defined limits and will provide a low impedance path for earth fault
return currents.
2.2.2. For low impedance earth paths to be established the ground conditions must first be
102 | P a g e
measured (earth resistivity Ohms / m ) and the system designed according to the
results. Allowance shall be made for the fact that conditions may vary throughout the
year due to seasonal weather.
2.3 Protective Earthing
Connection to earth at one or more points of the non-current-carrying parts of electrical
equipment shall be arranged to ensure that, in the event of a failure of insulation or other
inadvertent connection between current and non-current-carrying parts, no dangerous
potential difference occurs between the non-current-carrying parts of the equipment and
the general mass of earth or adjacent equipment, and to provide a low impedance path for
earth fault currents.
2.4 Adjacent Metallic Structures
This relates to connection to earth of metallic structures, which are not part of the
electrical equipment but are in close proximity to the electrical system.
2.5 Mitigation of Interference Effects
2.5.1 This relates to the connection to earth of the screening of light current signal and
control cables. The connection to earth of the screening conductors of any light current
cables will, in general, be confined to one end in order to avoid circulating currents in
the screen causing interference on the signal chores.
2.5.2 There may be exceptions to this and EMC considerations will determine the solution
to be adopted in individual cases.
2.6 Treatment of unearthed systems
This relates to unearthed systems where the current carrying conductors are fully
insulated from earth at all points. No part of such a system need to be automatically
disconnected immediately on the occurrence of a single earth fault in that part. However
special care needs to be taken during design and installation when considering this type
of earth system.
2.7 Earthing for Lightning Protection
This relates to the protection of buildings and structures from lightning by the provision
of lightning arrester and hence connection to the earth electrode system. Account shall be
taken of the locality and lightning incidence rate and applied to the protection of the
Railway Systems as a whole from "Far" and "Near" strikes, individual structures and
personnel protection.
103 | P a g e
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Legislation and Standards
3.1.1 Earthing, bonding, lightning and corrosion protection has to be in accordance with
applicable requirements related to the Subsea road tunnel system for the purposes of
this Earthing Policy, which shall be assumed to be no less onerous than the relevant
requirements of the following standards:
(a) British Standard 7361, Part 1 - Cathodic Protection - Code of Practice
for Land and Marine Applications.
(b) BS 7671 - Requirements for Electrical Installations
(c) IEC 60364 - Electrical Installations of Buildings
(d) IEC 61312 - Protection Against Lightning
(e) IEC 61024-1; Protection of Structures against Lightning, Part 1: General
Principles.
(f) IEC 61024-4; Series protection against lightning electromagnetic
impulses for structure with electrical and electronic systems.
(g) IEC 61000-5 Edition1, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 5
(h) BS 7430 - Code of Practice for Earthing.
(i) ANSI/IEEE 80 - Earthing of Substations
(j) IS—3043--EARTHING
(k) BS-1013---SUBSTATION EARTHING
(l) NFPA--780--LIGHTNING PROTECTION
(m) IEEE- 1100—EARTHING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT EN- 50122-2
Insulation from Earth
(n) RDSO/SPN/144/2004 Safety and reliability requirement of electronic
signalling equipment,
Local Codes. These may however conflict with International Codes/Standards in which
case discussion and agreement with the employer representative will be required.
3.2 Treatment of AC Power Supplies
3.2.1 The general policy followed in this document is to provide an earth farm for each of the
auxiliary substations and at other locations as required for purposes of earthing AC
power supply systems under the category of Clause 2.2 and metallic enclosures and
structures under Clauses 2.3 and 2.4.
3.2.2 The earth farms at each substation and other locations shall be multiple-interconnected
by provision of bonding connections cable sheaths, cable armouring, to adjacent earth
farms to form an incidental earth mat embracing the whole of the Tunnel system.
104 | P a g e
3.2.3 The armouring of HV power supply cables will not be connected to the incoming supply
to the bulk substation earthing system (this must be agreed with the local authority) or
other mitigation measures taken. However, there shall be provision to do so
conveniently on a temporary basis whilst work and testing requiring this is carried out.
3.2.4 Two other difficulties could arise with segregation as follows:
a. transferred potentials will appear across insulated joints used to segregate the
systems where there are interconnecting cables etc. and between adjacent
structures bonded to different earthing systems
b. provision of earthing for the screening of telecommunications cables to reduce
interference (Clause 2.5 above).
3.2.5 For the reasons described above, the effects of the segregation will need to be
monitored closely.
3.3 Treatment of Unearthed Auxiliary Supplies
3.3.1 Certain low voltage auxiliary, signalling, control or indication systems come under the
category of Clause 2.6, where the ability to temporarily continue in operation with a single
earth fault gives increased security of supply. The signalling or control circuit can be
isolated from Earth to avoid mal operation or Nuisance Tripping of the control circuit
which will therefore need its own Alarm to draw attention to this fact and hence start the
fault rectification process (normally by manual investigation and maintenance operations).
The incoming power supplies to the control system however may have their own Earth Fault
detection.
3.4 Lightning Protection
3.4.1 The protection of above ground structures from lightning under the category of Clause 2.7
is included within this policy document.
4. OVERALL EARTHING STRATEGY FOR THE GOREGAON MULUND LINK ROAD
4.1 Earthing, Bonding, Lightning Protection and Corrosion Protection Principles

4.1.1 Taking into account the previous general requirements in section 3:
A "Structure Earthing" strategy shall be applied throughout the Goregaon Mulund Link
Road to ensure electrical safety and provide the basis of lightning protection;
4.1.2 All buildings I structures shall be connected to mass earth via earth farms which form part of
the building I structure foundations and this earth shall be continuous through all building
105 | P a g e
structures by the appropriate interconnection and bonding of all metalwork.

4.2 Service Building
4.2.1 The reinforcement in the building I structure shall be bonded together throughout by the
use of welded flat steel bars. The bonding of reinforcement with the civil works shall be
provided by the relevant civil contractor to a design provided by the Electrical contractor.
4.2.2 The flat steel bars shall be brought out into every auxiliary service substation to main
earth bars located on a wall.
4.2.3 Further flat steel bars shall be brought out to earthing terminals in:
a. Every Control Room
b. Every plant and equipment room
c. Other locations where required as an earthing point for metal work and lightning
protection. (It should be noted that general earthing of typical electrical equipment
should be through the reticulated earth of the low voltage power supply system or
back to the nearest earthing terminal.)
4.2.4 The flat steel bars shall be provided by the civil contractor to a design provided by the
electrical contractor.
4.2.5 Any distribution of earthing required beyond the above nominated locations shall be
provided by the respective contractor responsible for the provision of the particular
equipment.
4.2.6 Lightning interception facilities shall be provided on the roofs of buildings I structures
which shall be securely bonded to the structure earth of the building I structure. These
shall be provided by the civil contractor to a design provided by the electrical contractor.
5. EARTHING OF ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

5.1 Supplies
5.1.1 The electrical power supply system’s comprise 110/33 kV and 415V, 3 phase, 3/4 wire
ac supplies, 240V and 110V, 1 phase, 2 wire ac supplies, at 50Hz and 110V dc equipment
control supplies.
5.2 Earth Electrodes and Earth Systems
5.2.1 Earth Systems for Bulk In-feed Substations
5.2.1.1 Each bulk In-feed substation will be provided with earthing farms for utility supplier.
5.2.1.2 Connections to the earth farms will be through two 'Principal Connections' links by
means of stranded insulated copper cables with a cross- section area calculated for
the worst-case conditions of earth current through marshalling earth bars in the
area of the farms.
106 | P a g e
Earth Systems for Substations

5.2.2.1 Each services Substation will be provided with an earth farm, of resistance less than
1 ohm, and connected to the substation earthing system through two 'Principal
Connection' links by means of stranded insulated copper cables with a cross-
section area calculated for the worst-case conditions of earth current.
5.2.2.2 The substation earthing system is to be compliant with IEC 60364 and IEC 61312
or BS 1013
5.2.3 Earthing for Distribution Systems
5.2.3.1 Supplies at 415/240 V, or 110 V are made available for Depot and station
equipment, and, where applicable, tunnel side equipment. These supplies are
derived from the Secondary winding of the power source (Transformer/Generator
etc) 415 V star-connected 3-phase supplies, the star point of which is to be bonded
to the auxiliary Substation earthing system.
5.2.3.2 Continuity of this earth connection to the point of supply shall be provided by the
cable sheath / armouring and/or additional bonding cables.
5.2.3.3 All locations receiving such supplies, which are remote from the earth system of
any tunnels or distribution substation, are to be earthed by one of the following
methods:
a. by low impedance connection to the trunk earth system such that the
minimum earth fault current is adequate to operate the over current
protection in accordance with IEC 60364;
b. where the requirement in (a) cannot be met, approved earth leakage
protection is to be provided;
c. by connection of the earth terminal to the earth electrodes at any adjacent
location via cable sheaths and armouring and/or additional bonding cables
such that the earthing impedance meets the requirement in (a) above;
d. by connection of the earth terminal via sheaths and armouring of the supply
cables or other bonding conductor to the earth system of the auxiliary
substation, such that the earth fault loop is entirely metallic and of sufficiently
low impedance to meet the requirement of (a) above.
5.2.3.4 The earthing of all distribution and sub-distribution systems is to be in accordance
with IEC 60364
5.3 System Earthing
5.2.2 General
5.3.1.1 This section describes the connection to earth of the neutral or negative, nominally
107 | P a g e
equi-potential points of the current carrying conductors in each section of the power
supply system.
5.2.3 110 kV Supplies
5.3.2.1 The method of earthing of 110kV, 3 phase supplies from utility supplier must be
coordinated with utility supplier.
5.3.3 415V Supplies
5.3.3.1 The star point of the 415V secondary winding of the auxiliary transformer will be
connected to the earth bar of the 415V switchboard.
5.3.3.2 The earth bar will be connected to the neutral bar via a neutral link in the
switchboard
5.3.3.3 The neutral bar of the transformer is to be solidly earthed, via a bolted link to the
earth system.
5.3.4 240V Supplies
5.3.4.1 The 240-volt supplies are taken from one phase and the neutral of the above 415V
supplies. The neutral shall be earthed in accordance with Clause 4.3.5.
5.3.5 110V AC Supplies
5.3.5.1 The 110V supplies are obtained from 240/110V transformers. Each 110V winding of
these transformers is to be fitted with a centre tap which is to be solidly earthed.
5.3.5.2 Approved earth fault detection equipment is to be provided.
5.3.6 110V DC Supplies
5.3.6.1 Both poles of the 110V battery supplies used in distribution substations and
elsewhere in connection with the power supply system are to be insulated from
earth.
5.3.6.2 Approved positive pole and negative pole earth fault detection equipment is to be
provided.
5.4 Equipment Earthing
• This section refers to the treatment of metal enclosures or supporting metalwork
for the equipment associated with the power supply systems covered in Section 4.3
above, with the exception of the trackside equipment which is covered in Section
5.5 below.
• Earthing and bonding of electrical equipment is required to reduce the effects of
interference, and to ensure the personal safety of the public, operational and
maintenance staff by limiting the step and touch voltages to within acceptable
limits. Where there is a conflict between these requirements, personal safety is
always to take precedence.
108 | P a g e
• 33kV Cables
5.4.3.1 The earthing of screens and armouring of all 33kV cables is to be earthed at both
ends. Exception may be made at the extreme ends of the system to avoid any
circulating currents detected in service.
5.4.3.2 Means are to be provided for disconnecting the screen ends, individually, from
earth for testing purposes.
5.4.4 Other Power Supply Cables
5.4.4.1 This section covers the cables for the distribution of 415/240Vac supplies and
110Vdc Supplies
5.4.4.2 The armouring of multicore cables (e.g. 3 phase or twin and earth etc.) is to be
earthed at both ends via an earth terminal provided with the gland, or via the
metalwork of the cable box and structure to the earth bar or terminal of the
equipment at which the cable is terminated.
5.4.4.3 Exceptions will be where the equipment at each end does not share the same earth
system as, for example, the dc switchgear for which the enclosures are insulated
from the substation earth and connected to it via a leakage current measuring
shunt. In this case the armouring will be earthed only at the distribution board end.
5.4.4.4 Single core cables are to be earthed in a similar manner but at one end only and
must avoid circulating eddy currents where the metallic cable sheath is connected
to a metallic cabinet.
5.4.5 110 kV/ 33 kV Switchgear
5.4.5.1 All ac switchgear will be earthed directly to the substation earthing system.
5.4.6 415V, 240v and 110 V Switchgear

5.4.6.1 All metallic components of the cubicles are to be bonded to an earth bar or terminal
which is to be connected to the substation earth system.
5.4.7 Battery Equipment
5.4.7.1 All metallic components of metal stands and cubicles for batteries, battery chargers
and DC distribution switchboards are to be bonded to an earth bar or terminal which
is to be connected to the earth system.
5.4.8 Transformer
5.4.8.1 All electrically separate parts of each transformer core are to be bonded together and
the core as a whole is to be insulated from the enclosure/tank. An accessible
removable link is to be provided between the core and the enclosure/tank for earthing
109 | P a g e
the core for core testing.

5.4.8.2 All metallic components of control compartments are to be bonded to an earth
terminal or bar, which is to be connected to the enclosure. The enclosure is to be
connected to the substation earth system with a suitable fault rated earth connection.
5.4.9 415/110VTransformers
5.4.9.1 Each transformer is to be provided with a screen between the primary and secondary
windings so that in the event of a fault the primary winding or its connections cannot
be connected to the secondary winding or its connections
5.4.9.2 The centre point of the secondary 110 V winding is to be connected to the substation
earth system.
5.4.9.3 This screen, the core and framework of each transformer is to be connected to the
earth bar or terminal of the enclosure in which the transformer is located.
5.4.9.4 The earth bar or terminal of the enclosure is to be connected to the substation earth
system.
5.4.10 Marshalling Panels
5.4.10.1 All metallic components of each cubicle are to be bonded to an earth terminal or bar,
which is to be connected to the earth system.
5.4.11 Instruments, Relays, Control Switches and other Electrical Components
5.4.11.1 All metallic cases and/or frames of instruments, relays, control switches and other
electrical components mounted on control panels or in cubicles are to be connected to
the earth bar or terminals of the cubicle in which the component is mounted.
5.4.12 Ancillary Equipment
5.4.12.1 Cubicles, cabinets, racks and panels are to be provided with a copper earth bar having
a suitable cross-sectional area for the possible fault current, placed at a convenient
position within the equipment. All metal parts, other than those forming part of an
electrical circuit, are to be earthed by connection to the earth bar.
5.4.12.2 When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel cubicle doors or swinging
frames, flexible cable or braid is to be used for earthing these items; the door hinges are not
acceptable as means of earthing this part of the equipment.
5.4.12.3 Except where otherwise approved, a stud type terminal of diameter not less than 12
mm, or a tapped boss of equivalent size, is to be provided on the outside of each cubicle
or structure for the purpose of making the connection to earth. This terminal is to be
connected to the substation earthing system.
6. EARTHING OF COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
6.1 General
110 | P a g e
6.1.1 There are several separate sub-systems which collectively form the control and
communications system. Equipment, enclosures and mountings associated with
these sub-systems are distributed throughout the Tunnel system at tunnels and
service buildings locations.
6.1.2 Separate clean earths of value not exceeding 0.5 Ohms required at each service
Building for BMS/SCADA, to be terminated in BMS/SCADA, tunnel communication
system rooms and other related rooms.
7. EARTHING OF OTHER METALLIC STRUCTURES

7.1 General
7.1.1 Other metallic structures comprise those structures which do not form part of the
Power Supply or Communication and Control Systems covered in Section 4 and 5
above. They include the reinforcing in concrete construction, pipes for other
services and fixtures and fittings in buildings and stations and depot.
7.1.2 Lightning protection of structures and buildings is also included in this Section.
7.1.3 The ac systems are generally arranged to operate with their neutrals earthed, and
with associated metallic enclosures also connected to earth, by conventional
methods.
7.1.4 The Buried Earth Cable shall be regularly earthed and connected to earth pits.
7.1.5 Earth pits shall be provided at each station and their spacing should not exceed
300m on viaducts and in depot. Earth pits earthing value shall not exceed 1 Ohm.
7.1.6 Earth pit shall be provided with disconnecting bars so that their earthing value can
easily be checked.
7.1.7 Any exposed metallic structure, concerned by 7.1.1, which is closer than 10m from
the Over Head Line shall be earthed to the Buried Earth Cable as per clause 5.5.2.1.
7.1.8 The self-restoring properties of high voltage limiting devices avoid a permanent
leakage path for limited faults whereas a latched contactor needs to be manually
reset or a device needs to be physically replaced.
7.2 Over ground Structures
7.2.1 The frames of all buildings and other structural steelwork are to be bonded to the
local earth system unless all parts of the frame or structure are completely encased
in concrete, masonry or other non-metallic cladding.
7.2.2 Where a local earth system is not provided under the provisions of Clauses 4.2.1
such a system is to be provided for the purposes of this Clause in those locations
where accidental contact with the power system is possible. Such an earth system
111 | P a g e
is to have an overall resistance not exceeding 10 ohms between any point of the
earthed frame or structure and the general body of the earth. In addition a self-
restoring spark gap device is to be connected between each separate structure and
the power return system
7.2.3 In general, the reinforcing bars in concrete structures or foundations are not to be
earthed in those cases where the reinforcing bars are completely encased in
concrete. This applies to substation foundation slabs.
7.2.4 Where external connections are made to the reinforcing, for the purpose of
providing studs for securing metallic structures or components which are earthed,
insulating sleeves and washers are to be fitted to the studs if there is a possibility of
power return currents passing into the reinforcing via the studs.
7.4 Services to Service Building premises.
7.4.1 Metallic service (I.e. water, gas, waste water etc) pipes entering the Service
Building premises, both over and underground, are to be provided with an
insulated insert at the point of entry, and the pipe work within the Service building
is to be bonded to the local earth system.
7.4.2 Where both plastic and metal pipes are used, all lengths of exposed metal pipes,
or those connected to taps or apparatus, are to be bonded to the local earth
system. A separate bond is not required for the pipe if it is electrically continuous
with earthed apparatus.
7.5 Small Metallic Components
7.5.1 Small metallic and isolated structural parts which are effectively segregated from
any electrical apparatus or cables etc. or earthed metallic enclosures and structures
do not require to be bonded to the local earth system.
7.5.2 For the purposes of this Clause the metal angle supports for trench covers and
similar metalwork in electrical and distribution substations are not effectively
segregated and are to be bonded to the substation earth system.
7.6 Service building Fencing
7.6.1 The Service Building will also derive their earthing from the Service building slab
structural earth system
7.6.2 Metallic fencing associated with the service building within 10.0 metres of the
overhead contact line, is to be earthed to the Buried Earth Cable.
7.6.3 Each separate section of fencing is to be separately earthed in the appropriate
manner as above.
7.6.4 All gate posts are to be bonded to each other across the gate opening by an
112 | P a g e
underground conductor, and the gates themselves bonded across the hinges.
7.7 Lightning Protection
7.7.1 The need for lightning protection for individual mass transit system buildings is to
be assessed in accordance with IEC 61024-1 or the local building code. Where
lightning protection is found to be necessary, it shall be provided in accordance
with this Standard.
7.7.2 All building structures will be of steel or steel reinforced concrete with every pillar
of the structures bonded into the structure earth of the depot
7.7.3 Metal roofing will be multiple bonded into the metal of the building structure.
Lightning conductors will be provided to bridge any non-metallic roofing and
conduct into the steel structure in the most efficient manner.
7.7.4 Cables with metal sheaths and other metallic services entering the building are to
be bonded to the structure at the point of entry and to any electrodes provided for
lightning protection, if not already adequately bonded via the local earth system.
113 | P a g e
Volume 3
APPENDIX – 15
ADJACENT WORKS CONTRACTS
114 | P a g e
APPENDIX 15
ADJACENT WORKS CONTRACTS
The Construction Projects that are to be undertaken adjacent to the site areas includes those
listed in the following table. This list should be in no way construed as a complete list of adjacent
works Contracts with which the Contractor shall be required to interface.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for identifying and interfacing with all adjacent works
projects.
No. Description By Anticipated Construction

Period.
1 Mumbai Metro line 3 Works- all contracts MMRC 18 July 2016 – 10October
2021
2 Traffic Management Control System MCGM January 2018 – December

Contract 2021
115 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX – 16
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
116 | P a g e
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION INTERFACE MANAGEMENT.
1. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1.1. Chief Interface Coordinator means a suitably qualified person, assigned by the
Contractor, who is the Team Leader responsible for administrating, monitoring,
managing, supervising and resolving all interface issues between the Contractor and
(1) Interfacing Contractors, (2) Interfacing Agencies, and (3) E&M Subcontractor.
1.2. Combined Services Drawings (CSD) means those drawings produced by the
Contractor, showing the locations, sizes and details of all of the Contractor’s
equipment, cable containment, pipes etc. These drawings are to be used to enable all
equipment, pipes, cables etc. to be installed without conflict and to enable future
changes or modifications to be performed without impacting the existing
installation.
1.3. Interface means the region of interaction across the common boundary between
two adjacent but separately managed and controlled. The coordination and
management of the interaction regions is necessary to ensure that the overall scope
and definition of the Project works is complete and seamless across all such
boundaries.
1.4. Interfacing Contractors means Project Contractors and design or specialist
consultants engaged on the Project from time to time by the Employer, whose
activities or the works they are engaged to carry out in any way or at any time affect
or are affected by the Works:
1.4.1 Interfacing Agencies means any of the activities, works or approvals
required to be carried out in any way or at any time effect are effected by the
Works:
a) The Government of India Departments with whom the Contractor need
to liaise, coordinate or carry out works, including but not limited to the
following:
• Ministry of Environment and Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC).
• Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. (BSNL)
b) The Government of Maharashtra Departments with whom the
Contractor need to liaise, coordinate or carry out works, including but
not limited to the following:
117 | P a g e
• Maharashtra Heritage Conservation Committee

• Bombay National History Society (BNHS)
• Public Works Department (PWD)
• Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Development Authority (MMRDA)
• Mumbai Maritime Board
• Maharashtra Pollution Control Board
• Maharashtra Coastal Zone Management Authority (MCZMA)
• Water Department of MCGM
• Storm Water Department of MCGM
• Solid Waste Department of MCGM
• Sewage Department of MCGM
• Disaster Management Department of MCGM
• Maharashtra State Electricity Supply Co. Ltd. ( BEST/TATA)
• Brihanmumbai Electric Supply and Transport Co.( BEST)
• Traffic Police Department
• Forest Department
• Maharashtra State Road Development Corporation ( MSRDC)
• Fisheries Department, Govt. of Maharashtra
• Mumbai Port Trust
• Indian Navy
• Coast Guard
• Mumbai Heritage Conservation Committee
• Tree Authority
c) The private sector utility providers with whom the Contractor need to
liaise, coordinate or carry out works, including but not limited to the
following:
• Tata Power
• Reliance Energy
• Reliance Communications
• Tata DOCOMO
• AIRTEL
• VODAFONE
• IDEA
1.4.2 E&M Subcontractor means a specialist subcontractor for carrying out all tunnel
118 | P a g e
ventilation, mechanical and electrical related works, nominated by the Contractor and
Noticed by the Engineer. Interfacing with all E&M and tunnel ventilation works shall
be carried out by the Contractor.
1.4.3 Developers or franchisees appointed on the Project from time to time by the
Employer;
1.4.4 Subcontractors of any tier of the contractors within category 1.4 above, and
contractors and subcontractors of any tier of utility providers, developers
and franchisees within categories 1.4.1 (a), (b) and (c) above;
Provided that the definition shall exclude the Contractor and his subcontractors of
any tier in relation to the Works and in any other capacity which would otherwise fall
within categories as mentioned above in relation to other works.
1.5. Interface Coordination Sheet (ICS) means a document produced by the Contractor
which defines the integration and interfaces between his contract and the Interfacing
Contractors and their own E&M Subcontractor employed on the Project.
1.6. Interface Management Programme (IMPG) means the programme produced by
the Contractor, developed and updated on a quarterly basis, which describes the
sequence and timing of each of the Interfacing Contractors scope of work and his
E&M Subcontractor’s work to be carried out by the Contractor in coordination with
the Interfacing Agencies.
1.7. Interface Management Plan (IMP) means the Report prepared by the Contractor,
developed and updated on a quarterly basis that provides a clear description of his
interfaces both sequentially and technically as specified in the Contract. The report
will be reviewed in accordance with this procedure and is a pre-requisite to the
Engineer’s Notice to proceed.
1.8. Interface Specification (IS) means the specification document developed by the
Contractor for the interfacing part of his project on the basis of, and by integrating
into his design, the information provided by the Interfacing Contractor/s and E&M
Subcontractor, in accordance with the interface agreements as contained in the ICS.
The Interface specification needs to be agreed upon by both the Contractor and the
Interfacing Contractor/s and E&M Subcontractor, before it is submitted to the
Engineer for Notice to proceed.
1.9. Structural, Electrical and Mechanical Drawings (SEM) means those drawings
produced by the Contractor in coordination with his own E&M subcontractor,
showing the locations, sizes and details for all structural openings, plinths,
embedment, sumps, floor chases, etc. required for the installation of all equipment,
119 | P a g e
cable trays, pipes, etc.

1.10. Zone of Interface means where two or more components of the roadway provided by
two or more Interfacing Contractors combine to provide a single element.
1.11. Interfacing Party means Interfacing Contractor and / or Interfacing Agency and / or
E&M Subcontractor as appropriate.
2. INTRODUCTION
2.1 Interface and co-ordination of the Works will include the co-ordination of all design,
technical and programming matters with the various Interfacing Contractors,
Interfacing Agencies and E&M sub contractor to achieve fully co-ordinated
construction and installation of the facilities.
2.2 This Appendix 19 describes the Contractor’s responsibilities with regard to interface
management and coordination with those Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and
E&M subcontractor who are responsible for undertaking work, which interfaces with
the Contract. The Contractor’s responsibility for interface coordination shall include
currently defined Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor and those
who may be identified in the future. This responsibility is not limited to a particular
number of Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor.
2.3 The Contractor’s responsibility for interface co-ordination shall include identification
of Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and those who may be subsequently identified
during the course of the Contract for whom the Contractor will need to interface and
coordinate the Works. This in no way detracts from the fact that the Contractor
remains solely responsible for identifying, liaising, and co-ordinating with all
Interfacing Contractors / Agencies in relation to the Works.
2.4 The Engineer will monitor and oversee the interface Management activities by the
contractor and will specifically provide direction or information in the following
circumstances.
a) When the interfacing contract has not yet been awarded
b) When common agreement cannot be reached between the interfacing parties
c) When it is in the interest of the project programme, quality or safety to issue
direction.
Direction or information provided by the Engineer where ever necessary, shall not in
any way relieve the contractor of his full responsibility to ensure the correctness,
accuracy and suitability of the interface implementation and required specification.
2.5 The Contractor shall at all times use his best endeavours to resolve all interfaces
applicable to the Contract and shall be proactive in seeking out interface issues and
120 | P a g e
their solutions.
2.6 The Contractor shall ensure that all of the above Interface requirements are included
in his Interface Management Plan, refer to Clause 6 of this Appendix 16. Flow charts
illustrating the process of entering into an Interface agreement and Monitoring its
progress with the help of the Interface Coordination Sheet are provided as
Attachments A&B of this Appendix. Figure 1 gives a schematic presentation of the
Interface Communication and Coordination processes between the various role-
players in the Project.
2.7 The Contractor’s internal sub-contractors and suppliers interfaces are the sole
responsibility of the Contractor and are not covered in this Appendix, except the E&M
Subcontractor. Notwithstanding the requirements in this section the coordination and
interface with his E&M subcontractor is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
However, the Contractor shall co-ordinate and manage these interfaces in such a way
as to identify and cater for the requirements of domestic interfaces, including but not
limited to, the avoidance of clashes and sequencing of Works. The Contractor shall
compile an internal IMP for his own use, a copy of which shall be furnished to the
Engineer on request at any time.
121 | P a g e
3. CO-ORDINATION
3.1. Contractor’s Coordination Responsibilities
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and may be required to attend
meetings on issues appertaining to Government authorities and utility agencies
regarding the services/facilities to be provided by them for the project. The
Contractor shall ensure that the work of all Interfacing Contractors/ Agencies and
the E&M subcontractor can be carried out in accordance with the Interface
Management Plan prepared by the Contractor.
3.2 Site Co-Ordination & Attendance
3.2.1 The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all attendance on and co-
ordination with Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and E&M subcontractor.
The following items are not a comprehensive or exhaustive list of the co-
ordination or interface attendance items to be provided for the Interfacing
Contractors use, but are intended to provide an outline of the content of
amenities, services and facilities for which the Contractor is responsible:
a) Single point of contact for meetings, actions, planning, scheduling and co-
ordinating.
b) Site access
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies/
E&M subcontractor and provide access and use of temporary access roads to
and from and within the Site. The Contractor shall co-ordinate all vehicle
movements, deliveries and other activities with the Interfacing Contractors /
Agencies/ E&M subcontractor so as to ensure conflicts of use will be controlled
on and around the Site.
c) Storage and Accommodation area
The Interfacing parties will require limited temporary site accommodation and
storage areas. The Contractor shall agree with the Interfacing parties access
and areas for storage and temporary site accommodation prior to their
commencing work on Site.
d) Work space requirement and sequence of Works
e) Shared use of Contractor’s scaffold
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Interfacing parties and provide free
use and shared access of his erected scaffolding, ladders and hoists should they
be available at the time the Interfacing Contractor requires to use them.
Notwithstanding this requirement, the Contractor shall at all times remain
122 | P a g e
responsible for the management of safety and the maintenance of such

scaffolding, ladders and landings. The Contractor will not be required to adapt
or erect access scaffolds specifically for the use of Interfacing parties.
If the Interfacing parties erect and use his own scaffold they will be required
to adhere to the Contractor’s safety rules and access routing for equipment
and materials. The Contractor shall ensure that all scaffolds of Interfacing
Contractors/ Agencies and E&M subcontractor are erected in a safe manner
and are subject to permits for use issued by the Contractor.
f) Setting out control points
g) Access Openings
The Contractor will form all penetrations and delivery openings and
subsequently close them（either temporary or permanent) for access to
rooms or areas for the delivery of equipment and materials.
h) The Contractor will be required to install all temporary and permanent lifting hooks
and beams shown Temporary lighting requirements 100 lux minimum.
i) Temporary power and water supplies have to be provided at agreed locations around
the Site for the Interfacing Contractors use.
j) Water tightness. All rooms and areas handed over to Interfacing Contractors / Agencies
shall be in a watertight condition and maintained as such.
k) Ensure all electrical supplies both temporary and permanent have the correct testing
and commissioning certification.
l) Waste management and disposal
m) Appropriate protection to finishes, walls, floors, ceilings and equipment using
polythene, hardboard, steel plates etc.
n) Programme agreement for mobilizing and demobilizing
o) Fire fighting and supply and maintenance of fire extinguishing equipment and devices
pursuant to the Contractor’s obligations.
p) Construction interface co-ordination management of penetrations in structures,
embedded and cast-in items, etc.
q) Temporary Drainage
The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain all necessary temporary
drainage, sumps, silt traps and sump pumps to collect and dispose of
wastewater from Interfacing Contractors / Agencies construction processes
including installation, testing and commissioning activities.
r) Sanitation facilities
123 | P a g e
The Contractor shall provide all sanitation facilities and the disposal of waste. No
unauthorised sanitation facility will be allowed on the Site.
s) Making good and fire stopping of penetrations
t) Lifting apparatus and hoists
The Contractor will be required to install all temporary and permanent lifting
hooks and beams shown on the drawings and the Specification required for
installation and/or maintenance purposes. The Contractor will be responsible
for the testing and labeling of all apparatus. The Contractor will be required to
make available any lifting or hoist apparatus on Site as required by the
Interfacing Contractor / Agencies and the E&M subcontractor at agreed times
and duration for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance testing and operational management of hoists. The Contractor
shall make available his cranes for lifting equipment or materials for
Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and E&M subcontractor.
u) Health and Welfare Facilities
The Contractor shall allow Interfacing parties use of his health, welfare and
mess facilities, and temporary background lighting. The Contractor shall liaise
with the Interfacing parties to determine their planned and actual manning
levels and ensure that sufficient facilities are provided prior to them
commencing work on Site. The facilities shall be maintained on Site until the
Interfacing Parties have completed their Works and demobilised or such
earlier time as the Engineer may direct.
3.2.2 The Contractor is deemed to have ascertained for himself the full scope of his
responsibilities and obligations under the Contract in terms of attendance on and co-
ordination with Interfacing Parties and shall not be entitled to any additional payment,
Cost or extension of time for completion should he have failed to do so.
3.2.3 The Contractor shall make due allowance for providing Attendance, including power and
other utilities supplies, throughout all phases of the Interfacing Parties work including
testing and commissioning and where supplies to various Interfacing Contractors need
special consideration during testing and performance trials under peak load conditions.
4. INTERFACE
4.1 Coordination of Contractor’s Scope of Work
In accordance with the requirements of the Conditions of Contract and other specified
requirements, the Contractor shall co-ordinate his own work with that of all Interfacing
Contractors/ Agencies / E&M subcontractor and ensure that the design, construction,
124 | P a g e
installation and testing requirements of the Interfacing Contractors are incorporated into
the Contractor’s co-ordinated plans, programmes and Works. The Contractor shall
proactively seek out interface issues and solutions.
In addition to the Contractor’s obligations to the Interfacing Contractors and E&M
Subcontractor contained elsewhere in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide / handover
occupation or access as required, to the Interfacing Contractors to those parts of the Works
which are subject to Key Dates by the required Key Dates.
The Contractor shall complete those parts of the Works, which are subject to Key Dates, by
the required Key Dates that may be specified in the Appendix to Tender and/or Appendix 2B
of Volume 3 – Employer’s Requirements of this Contract. Those parts of the Works subject
to Key Dates shall be completed to a state whereby any Interfacing Contractor/ Agencies and
E&M subcontractor can immediately commence his works without the need to make any
change, addition or modification to the Contractor’s Works.
4.2 Interfacing Contractors
4.2.1 The Interfacing Contractors will require interface and co-ordination for information,
programming, drawings acceptance, handover etc. as shown on the Interface
Coordination Sheet enclosed in Attachment F of this Appendix.
The Contractor should fill in Interface Coordination Sheet involving Interfacing
Contractors / Agencies and E&M Subcontractor.
The Contractor shall take overall responsibility for the Interface Coordination
Sheets, which must be submitted to the Engineer for a Notice to proceed.
4.2.2 Where an interfacing contract has yet to be awarded, the Contractor shall proceed
with the coordination activities (including preparation of ICS and Interface
specification) as instructed by the Engineer until such time when the Interfacing
Contractor is available.
4.3. Interfacing Contractors - Communications and Information Exchange
4.3.1 General
a) The Contractor shall communicate, co-ordinate and exchange information
directly with the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and E&M Subcontractor and
the Contractor shall keep the Engineer advised at all times. Information
necessary to fulfil the Contractor’s interface obligations shall be directly
requested and obtained from the Interfacing Parties, and receipt acknowledged.
Conversely, the Contractor shall provide directly to the Interfacing parties
information within the Contractor’s scope that is required by them.
b) All requests for information, acknowledgement of receipt of information, and
125 | P a g e
any official communication between the Contractor and the Interfacing parties
shall be made in writing, with a copy to the Engineer for his information. The
Engineer shall be invited to attend all interface meetings between the Contractor
and the Interfacing parties. Irrespective of whether these meetings were
attended by the Engineer or not, the Contractor’s monthly progress report to
Engineer shall invariably include the details of all interface meetings held and
decisions arrived.
c) The Contractor’s programme shall allow time for the availability of necessary
interface information from the Interfacing Contractors and in this regard the
Contractor shall, where required, proceed on a late start basis to allow adequate
time for others to provide required information and thereby achieve design
process compatibility.
d) The Contractor shall allow for the fact that many of the design and construction
activities for the different contracts will be proceeding concurrently. In the event
that certain interface information is not forthcoming at the time targeted, the
Contractor shall be responsible to resolve the matter with the relevant
Interfacing party without recourse to the Engineer, and where necessary
develop alternative interim arrangements such that the interface information
may be accommodated at a later date.
e) Definitive dates for transfer of information and particular interface actions shall
be confirmed between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors.
4.3.2 Interfacing Functions

The Contractor is responsible for, but not limited to, the following;
• the management of Contract to Contract Interfaces as required;
• preparing the Interface Management Plan and subsequent procedures;
• preparing their Interface Management Programmes in accordance with this
procedure and submitting these to the Interfacing parties for concurrence;
• preparing the Interface Management Programmes and submitting these to the Engineer
for a Notice to proceed;
• preparing their Interface Coordination Sheets and Interface Specifications and
issuing same to the relevant Interface parties and the Engineer;
• coordinating with the relevant Interfacing parties to establish coordinated CSD
& SEM Drawings;
• maintaining their ICS updated continuously and attaching it to their Monthly
126 | P a g e
Progress Report submitted to the Engineer in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract and this Appendix.
4.3.3 Documentation Review
The Contractor shall, as a minimum:
• review those portions of the Specification and Drawings relevant to the interface
and transmit such information to the Interfacing parties;
• co-ordinate and co-operate with Interfacing Contractors/ Agencies and E&M
subcontractor on all Site related matters including, but not limited to, Site access
and occupation, attendance, safety, verification of work compatibility, survey
control, etc.;
• review the interface information received and agree in writing with the
Interfacing parties that the interface information is adequate for that stage of
that activity.
4.3.4 Design Stage
The design interface is an iterative process, thus throughout the design process, the
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his own design with Interfacing
Contractors/ Agencies and E&M Subcontractor to develop interface designs in
conjunction and co-operation with the designers of Interfacing Contractors. These
interface designs will be monitored and have to be given Notice to proceed by the
Engineer, but the Contractor shall work directly with the Interfacing Contractors/
Agencies and E&M subcontractor to develop designs which are mutually acceptable
to all parties.
The Contractor shall, immediately upon Contract Award, gather all necessary
information and develop his design to a level where meaningful interaction can take
place as soon as the Interfacing Contractors/ Agencies and E&M subcontractor are
available.
4.3.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASE

During construction the Contractor shall, when a construction item is ready for field
inspection, advise the Interfacing Contractor/ Agencies and E&M subcontractor in
advance to verify compatibility with the needs.
The Contractor shall:
• advise the Interfacing Contractors/Agencies and the E&M subcontractor in
writing when the as-constructed interface-related work can be inspected, and
provide the necessary Site access and occupation;
127 | P a g e
• request in writing and obtain from the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and
E&M subcontractor, interface information required for that stage of the Contract;
• agree in writing with the Interfacing Contractors/ Agencies and E&M
subcontractor on the adoption of any applicable comments on the constructed
work;
• agree that any testing and commissioning for works can be carried out in
accordance with the Interface Management Plan;
• conduct on-Site inspections of the work elements, and give comments in writing
to the Interfacing Contractors and E&M subcontractor;
• agree in writing with the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and E&M
subcontractor that the as-constructed work meets the interface requirements.
• Where the execution of work by Interfacing Contractors/ agencies and E&M
subcontractor depends upon the Contractor’s site management or upon
information to be given by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide the
Interfacing Contractors/ Agencies and E&M subcontractor with the required
services or the correct and accurate information required to enable the
Interfacing Contractors to meet their programme for the construction or
installation of their works.
4.3.6 INTERFACE COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall co-ordinate all of his testing and commissioning activities with the
Interfacing Contractors / Agencies and E&M subcontractor. Interface commissioning
shall demonstrate that the delivered interface, part A of the interface, is ready and meets
the interface requirements of the interface part B, and vice versa.
Successful completion of all interface commissioning shall prove its readiness for
commissioning of the overall contract scope and completion of the overall Goregaon
Mulund Link Road Project, prior to handover to the Employer for their operation.
4.4 Resolution of Co-Ordination Difficulties
When the Contractor identifies interface co-ordination difficulties, the Contractor shall
review the pertinent points of each Interfacing Contractor/ agencies and E&M sub
contractor to determine possible compatible solutions in terms of sequence, timing and
technical details. The Contractor shall then meet with the relevant Interfacing
Contractor(s)/ agencies/ E&M subcontractor to determine solutions, which are mutually
acceptable to each Interfacing Contractor and advise the Engineer.
Where an acceptable solution has not been identified, the Contractor shall advise the
128 | P a g e
Engineer in writing of the problems encountered. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, an
interface is not proceeding satisfactorily, then the Engineer will review the matter, and
establish a co-ordinated plan directing the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractor(s)
on the required action. In the event that no agreement can be made between the
Contractor and the Interfacing Contractor(s), the Engineer shall determine the
requirements to the best of his knowledge, and his determination shall be final and
binding on the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractor(s).
4.5 Interface Performance

The Contractor’s performance in relation to his compliance with the interface
requirements under the Contract shall be assessed by the Engineer 3 months after the
Commencement Date and thereafter at three monthly intervals.
The assessment will be in the form of an audit of the Contractor’s interface management
system. This audit will assess the Contractor’s compliance with the responsibilities
delineated in this Appendix and elsewhere as related to interface management and the
preparation of the Interface Management Plan and Programme and other documentation
and procedures associated with Interface Management and Coordination.
The Contractor will be notified of non-conformances from the audit, which will require
rectification. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has failed to rectify a
non-conformance within a reasonable period from the date of notification, this may lead
to non-payment of any lump sums, until such time as the non-conformance has been
rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer, refer sub-clause below.
The Contract allows for continuous audits of the Contractor’s compliance with his Interface
Management Plan and the requirements of this Appendix 16 of Volume 3Employer’s
Requirements and any extreme or continuing failures shall result in a negative audit report,
which may lead to non-payment of the relevant payment item in the Preliminaries section of the
Pricing Document. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final.
5. CONTRACTOR’S INTERFACE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5.1 Interface Management System
The Contractor shall establish and maintain an Interface Management System to
identify, control and monitor the interfaces of the Contract, which shall include, but not
129 | P a g e
be restricted to, the following:

a. Establishment and maintenance of an Interface Management Team suitably
qualified and experienced in co-ordination and interface management.
b. Provision, as one of his Key Personnel, of a Chief Interface Co-ordinator, to head the
Interface Management Team, suitably qualified and experienced as noted in Section
A of this Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements, with the responsibility, experience
and authority to resolve interface matters in accordance with the Contract. The
Chief Interface Co-ordinator will develop a monitoring and reporting procedure to
be implemented by his team for the duration of the Contract.
c. Implement and maintain a strict monitored control of information transfer to the
Interfacing Contractors, the Employer and the Engineer utilising the official channels
of communication.
d. Provide a comprehensive interface schedule of Interfacing Contractors/ agencies and
E&M subcontractor identifying all interfacing activities and timetables of events.
e. Arrange all internal and external interface meetings. The Engineer may arrange
regular meetings to monitor the status of interfaces and may require special
meetings as may be necessary to resolve specific issues. The Contractor’s Interface
Management Team will be required to attend such meetings. The Contractor may
request assistance from the Engineer to arrange meetings on particular subjects.
f. Providing the Engineer with all information and/or details of interfaces, including
copies of all correspondence and material.
g. Providing the Engineer with access to information for the purpose of conducting
audits on the interface system and for confirming that interface co-ordination is
proceeding consistently with the Project requirements.
h. Establish interface dates for information, documentation, access or works
completion requirements.
5.2. Interface Management Team

The Contractor’s Interface Management Team will undertake and fulfil the following
tasks:
• Provide timely interface information when requested, anticipating the information
needs of the Interfacing Contractors/ agencies / E&M subcontractor and
130 | P a g e
transmitting such information as soon as it is available.

• Pro-actively keep the Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor
informed of any development of the Works related to the interfaces. Communicating
and co-operating with the Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor to
identify and resolve potential interface problems.
• Advise the Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor on potential
problems related to the interfaces, together with proposed solutions likely to be
acceptable to Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor and which meet
the needs of the Project.
• Arrange and/or attend meetings with the Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M
subcontractor as necessary to resolve interface issues.
• During each stage of the Contract, the Contractor shall directly communicate and co-
ordinate with Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor as necessary to
achieve a fully co-ordinated construction / installation.
• Contractor shall issue true records of all interface meetings, with appropriate actions
and attendance lists, to all Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor,
whether in attendance or not, and to the Engineer, within 3 days of the meeting.
Minutes of meetings shall be signed by all parties in attendance, signifying their
agreement to the contents thereof, before being formally issued by the Contractor.
The authority and responsibilities of all personnel involved in the Interface
Management Team must be clearly defined in the IMP.
6. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PLAN & INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PROGRAMME
6.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare the proposed Interface Management Plan and proposed
Interface Management Programme, in accordance with CPA Clause 6, this clause 6 and
based on the formats noted in Attachments H and I, to which the Engineer issues a Notice
to proceed. The Interface Management Plan and Interface Management Programme shall
completely define the Contractor’s programme and methodology for interface co-
ordination and management, whilst complying with all Key Dates stated in the Appendix
to Tender and/or Appendix 2 of this Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements.
Subsequently they shall be kept up to date and submitted on a quarterly basis to the
Engineer for scrutiny and Notice to proceed, and a summary of the principal issues shall
be included in each Monthly Progress Report. The Contractor shall note that each
submission of these documents is subject to regular audits and the issue of a Notice to
proceed by the Engineer.
131 | P a g e
6.2 Interface Management Programme (IMPG)

The Interface Management Programme describes the sequencing and timing of each of
the Interfacing Contractors‟ scope of work, clearly describing the interdependencies for
all stages of the work between the Contractor's works and that of the Interfacing
Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor and complementing the Interface
Management Plan, whilst complying with all Key Dates stated in the Appendix to Tender
and/or Appendix 2 of this Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements.
The programme shall be structured to detail each of the primary zones of interface and
the principal elements of the design and of the works requiring interfacing contribution
from others. This Interface Management Programme shall also be related to the
Contractor’s Works Programme and shall show the sequences and timing agreed with the
Interfacing Contractors to the necessary degree of detail to clearly illustrate each of the
interfaces to be undertaken.
Targets to receive or supply information shall also be shown, with due allowance being
given for the design process of others. Information relating to Contractual Key Dates and
information exchange dates shall be shown for both the Contractor and the Interfacing
Contractors to demonstrate a matching of design processes.
A record of these interfaces, with current status and agreed dates for information
transfer, site inspections, access, occupation, handover, etc. shall be maintained and also
identified on the ICS, refer Clause 7 below.
Refer to Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMPG.
6.3 Interface Management Plan (IMP)

The Interface Management Plan is that document which describes the Contractor’s
interface management in terms of providing a clear description of each of the interfaces,
both technically and sequentially, and represents an account of how the Contractor
proposes to achieve co-ordination of the Works. The description shall completely detail
the Contractor's work scope and interface with each of the Interfacing Contractors /
agencies / E&M subcontractor in terms of technical description, sequence and timing for
each of the elements required to achieve a coordinated design. The Contractor shall
demonstrate how potential interface conflicts can be eliminated by design
simplification. This document is also required to demonstrate that the co-ordinated
design and construction details described therein fully comply with the needs of others,
and agreement in writing of these details by the Interfacing Contractors/ E&M
subcontractor will be a pre-requisite to the Engineer issuing a Notice to proceed.
132 | P a g e
Refer to Attachment I – Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMP.

6.4 Requirements for the Interface Management Programme & Interface Management Plan
The Interface Management Programme (IMPG) shall be a process-driven programme in a
format to be agreed with the Engineer. The IMPG shall incorporate the key activities from
both the Interfacing Contractors‟, Contractor’s and E&M subcontractor’s Works
programmes that will enable the Contractor to demonstrate that any Interface is being
correctly managed and will result in fully co-ordinated construction / installation of works.
The Interface Management Plan and Interface Management Programme shall:
• Follow the outline structure, numbering system, and related procedures in a format
to be agreed with the Engineer.
• Be co-ordinated with the Interfacing Contractors to ensure compatibility of interface
identification and definition.
• Comply with the Key Dates stated in the Appendix to Tender and/or Appendix 2B of
this Volume 3 Employer’s Requirements.
• Be transmitted to the Interfacing Contractors concurrently with submittals to the Engineer.
• Support the Works Programme to which the Engineer has given a Notice to proceed.
• Address each zone of interface related to each design submission and stage of design
or construction / installation.
• List all relevant interfaces in detail, their status, and the corresponding source(s) of
information.
• Include interface information transfer dates which have been agreed by the
Interfacing Contractors.
• Accommodate comments and input required by the Engineer.
• Include an account of how the interfaces are being managed.
• Identify the latest information regarding agreements with the Interfacing Contractors
/ Agencies / E&M subcontractor and transfers of information.
• Review and address the design, supply, installation, testing & commissioning
programme of the Interfacing Contractors and E&M subcontractor to ensure that the
Key Dates of each contract can be achieved, and highlight any programme risks
requiring management attention.
• Identify any problems related to co-ordination with Interfacing Contractors /
Agencies / E&M subcontractor.
6.5 Interface Specification.

6.5.1 The Interface Specification, proforma enclosed in Attachment C, and associated
133 | P a g e
drawings shall specify the proposed method and schedule for verifying the interface
integrity, the individual equipment/system performance and the combined system
performance.
The Interface Specification shall include a programme of tests to demonstrate the
performance and integrity of the integrated system. The interface sheets developed by
the Engineer are enclosed in attachment D . The attached interface sheets are not final
and do not relieve the Contractor’s obligation to identify any new interface to meet
contract requirements. The interface sheets, which the Contractor shall develop, shall be
used as a basis to establish the Interface Specification. Any revision to the Interface
Specification shall be mutually agreed between the Contractor and Interfacing
Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor, with submission to the Engineer, and shall
specifically -
a. Understand the design requirements of each party and associated constraints;
b. Determine the detailed interface works to be performed during the various stages
and
c. Agree on the interface works in reference to respective scope, with any agreements
reached to be formally documented in Interface Meeting Minutes, including an
actions item list.
6.5.2 The Interface Contractors / E&M subcontractor shall mutually identify and agree the
Interfaces that will exist between them using the Interface Coordination Sheets, the format
of which is contained in Attachment F. These interfaces may be expanded to include all, and
any other, interfaces that develop during the execution of the Project.
6.5.3 The Interfacing Contractors / E&M subcontractor shall mutually agree upon the information to
be exchanged and shall develop a unique Interface Specification for each interface identified. A
sample Interface Specification proforma is provided in Attachment C.
The ICSs will be tracked and monitored using an ICS Register to be compiled by the
Contractor. This register will track the progress of the ICS from inception through to closure
and final processing by the Contractor, prior to transmittal to the Engineer as a complete
Integrated Design.
Each interface shall have a unique reference number to enable the Interface to be readily
identified and tracked and monitored.
7. INTERFACE COORDINATION SHEET (ICS)
7.1 The Contractor’s Interface Coordination sheet, the format of which is shown in
Attachment F – Part 1, is required to be used by each of the Interfacing Contractors
to record all of the Contract Interfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that each
134 | P a g e
Interfacing Contractor / E&M Subcontractor provides input and maintains the ICS
continually updated as required in this Appendix.
7.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the Interfacing Contractors demonstrate their co-
ordination efforts as required by the Contract. To achieve this, the Contractor and the
Interfacing Contractor / E&M Subcontractor shall identify their interface
requirements which shall be input into the interface documents, i.e. IMP, IMPG, ICS,
etc.., by the Contractor.
7.3 The Contractor shall monitor the ICS to ensure that, as the Interface progresses, the
records show the appropriate Status (refer status codes indicated in Part 3 of
Attachment F) as agreed with the Interfacing Contractors. The Contractor will be
responsible for confirming the “Closing Out” of each ICS record, whilst ensuring that
throughout the interface process all Interfacing Contractors and E&M subcontractor
have agreed to the following:
a) The receiving Interfacing Contractor / E&M subcontractor has received and
accepted the Interface being recorded.
b) All Interfacing Contractors / E&M subcontractor have recorded the interface
record as “Proposed Close Out”.
c) The Confirmation of Co-ordination form in Attachment G has been updated and
signed by the relevant Interfacing Contractors and E&M subcontractor, refer
clause 7.4 below.
7.4 When documents are exchanged for review/comment with Interfacing Contractors /
E&M subcontractor, the originator preparing these documents should ensure that they
are accompanied by the Confirmation of Coordination form in Attachment G. When the
Interfacing Contractor / Agencies / E&M subcontractor returns these documents with
comments to the originator, they should be returned with the Confirmation of
Coordination form duly completed, confirming coordination and agreement or comment
as appropriate, as a record of them having coordinated the interface item. This
Confirmation of Co-ordination is to be transmitted to the Engineer upon signing by the
Interfacing Contractor(s).
8. COORDINATION DRAWINGS
8.1 General
For the purpose of achieving a Project which is fully co-ordinated with respect to
civil, structural, electrical, mechanical works and interface elements, and to ensure
compatibility between different facilities and services, and adequate space
135 | P a g e
requirements, all drawings are to be reviewed and co-ordinated by the Contractor.

The Contractor will provide and issue detailed Interface Working Drawings in terms
of items such as; special arrangements, space allocation, cast in items, primary and
secondary fixings, grouting of equipment/plinths, drill and fix brackets, embedded
and cast-in items and the like.
The drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall also include composite
cross-sections and layouts, which show the spatial requirements of all Interfacing
Contractors and identify items to be finalised, defined, or resolved.
8.2. Combined Services Drawing (CSDs) And Structural E&M Drawings (SEMs)
The Contractor’s CSDs and SEMs must be clear and sufficiently detailed to
unambiguously show the intent of the subject services and the corresponding
structure / facility allowances. While these drawings do not have to duplicate all of
the details of the Drawings, they must include plans sections and elevations as
required to clearly illustrate the compatible relationship between the different
disciplines. Specifically, the drawings will include wall elevation drawings at 1:50
scale (or larger where required) indicating all openings, access panels,
reinforcement zones, embedded and cast-in items and the like, and shall be
submitted to the Engineer for a Notice to proceed.
The CSDs shall show the intended locations, routes and spatial relationships of the
individual services, systems and installations with each other and the civil structural
work. The CSDs shall also clearly indicate that effective cable co-ordination has been
achieved in terms of cable location or cable trays and the trunking and cable routing.
The SEMs shall show all civil and structural requirements for the E&M services and
installations, Builder’s works and the Core Systems and other installations.
Where Builder’s works are required by the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M
subcontractor, the drawings, details, specification notes and catalogue information
and the like shall be obtained by the Contractor from these Interfacing Contractors /
Agencies / E&M subcontractor indicating the Builder’s work to be incorporated into
the Works. The Contractor shall include details of such Builder’s works in the SEMs
and Method Statements as appropriate.
Builder’s work comprises, but is not limited to, the following:
• construction of plinths, bases, builder’s bund walls and the like.
• placing and fixing of holding down bolts, lifting beams and hooks and
other supporting items;
• Supply, fabrication installation, protection, fixing and finishing of
136 | P a g e
supporting steel work, for equipment and associated accessories;

• casting in of edgings, angles in recesses, ducts, conduit, pipes etc;
• fixing equipment and associated, brackets, cable containment and fixtures;
• forming of penetrations, sleeves, access panels, holes, chases, recesses,
openings;
all in accordance with the Contract.
The CSD/SEMs shall also be used for the purpose of co-ordinating with the Interfacing
Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor and shall be continuously updated to
reflect the latest interface co-ordination. Copies of the CSD/SEM drawings shall be
included in submittals to the Engineer.
Where the CSDs or SEMs do not fully co-ordinate with the Site conditions the
Contractor shall co-ordinate and propose a solution to the problem. All proposed
solutions shall be issued to the Engineer.
8.3 Interface Drawings
For the Interface Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare in diagrammatic format for
each interface the demarcation of scope of responsibilities between the Contractor and
each of the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor. The Contractor
shall submit all Drawings with interface requirements for a Notice to proceed from the
Engineer. Any proposed deviation to the Construction Specification or Drawings shall
be identified and justified with design documentation, details and drawings. The
submission shall also identify all interface requirements. The contractor should
develop interface drawings with detailed design and dimensions and submit the same
to all interfacing parties.
8.4 As Constructed Drawings

Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall submit all Combined Services
Drawings, Structural E&M Drawings, and Interface Demarcation Drawings showing
the final “As Constructed” status of the Works related to these drawings.
9. ATTACHMENTS.
Attachment A - Flow Chart for creation / elaboration of Interface Coordination Sheet
Attachment B – Flow Chart for Progress Monitoring of Interface Agreements
Attachment C – Interface Specification Form.
Attachment D – Preliminary Interface sheets
Attachment E - Master Interface Matrix
137 | P a g e
Attachment F – Interface Coordination Sheet

Attachment G – Confirmation of Co-ordination
Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMPG
Attachment I – Guidance Notes for the Preparation of IMP
138 | P a g e
Attachment A: Flow Chart for creation / elaboration of Interface Coordination Sheet
139 | P a g e
Attachment B: Flow Chart for Progress Monitoring of Interface Agreements
140 | P a g e
INTERFACE SPECIFICATION
Ref : XXX-00001-A-01
Contractors
Contract
Sequence Date of Issue 15/09/2008
Designation
Number
Interface
Manager
Initiating
Signature
Contractor
Interface
Manager
Responding
Signature
Contractor
Response
Interface
Required by;
Specification
Required for;
Reviewed by;
Design Sections
Description of the Interface
Specific Details of the Interface Location

Drawings / Specifications Attached
Title Drawing / Specification Ref. Drg. Issue
Document Name Date Document References (if any)
Prepared by:
141 | P a g e
Attachment D - Preliminary Interface Sheet
Interface Sheet Contract Contract Sheet # 1
Approved by: Package IV Contractor Interfacing Contractor/Agency/E&M Sub-contractor Last changes :First issue
Issue by:
Checked by:
Interface description brief/ Key elements (time schedule, physical, functional,…)
Contract DESIGN STAGE Contract
Reference document: Reference document:
Contract CONSTRUCTION/INSTALLATION STAGE Contract
142 | P a g e
143 | P a g e
Attachment F Part- 1- Interface Coordination Sheet
Interface Co-ordination sheet:
ICS No. Project Stage Interface Plan Status Interface point- lead Interface point- follow-up Implementation Status Action/ Progress records & Follow-ups
144 | P a g e
Attachment F Part 3 - Interface Coordination Sheet Format

The following table describes the Interface Status with codes to be used in preparing /
updating the Interface Coordination sheet.
Interface Status Codes & Meanings

Code
Interface Status Description of Status
for Log
Both Contractors have not agreed the conditions for
To be coordinated TBC
this interface
Both Contractors have agreed that the interface is

Coordinated COR
Valid
One Contractor does not agree the conditions for this
Not coordinated NCOR
Interface
The Contractor responsible for the design/construction

Received REC element has received the information/documents
Required
The Contractor responsible for providing the
information/documents to Progress the
Provided PRO
design/construction element has provided the
documents to the Interfacing Party
The Contractor has accepted the proposed Interface
Accepted ACP
Design or Construction element
Either of the Contractors have not accepted the
Not Accepted NACP
proposed Design/Construction element
Both Contractors have accepted the proposed
Interface Design or Construction element and no other
Propose closeout PCO requirements are outstanding.
Both Parties can agreed to sign the Confirmation of
Coordination Form
The final Interface Documentation together with
Confirmation of Coordination Form has been sent to
Closed out CO
the Interface Coordination Manager for closing the
Interface
The Interface design or construction element has

Superseded SUP
been superseded
145 | P a g e
Attachment G – Confirmation of Coordination Form
Ref No.
CONFIRMATION OF COORDINATION
CONTRACT: TRANSMITTAL No.:

TITLE:
ACTIVITY NO.:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
SIGNATURE OF INTERFACING CONTRACTORS / E&M SUBCONTRACTOR:
Interfacing Authorized Date

Contractor/ E&M Signature Comment
subcontractor Name
Reviewed
1
Signatures above confirm that this design document has been reviewed as part of the
coordination process.
NOTE: Where Contractors are not in agreement with the details on this submission, they are to
comment above and advise the interfacing party in question requesting accommodation of the
requirement and advise the Engineer under separate cover and report progress in Monthly
Report / Coordination Meetings.
146 | P a g e
Attachment H - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of Interface Management Programme.

1. The programme shall be prepared and submitted in bar chart format.
2. The bar chart shall be formed by activities grouped by major Zones of Interface.
3. The detail of each bar chart activity shall demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding of the
scope of work of any Interfacing Contractor / Agencies / E&M subcontractor who is to supply
input to the Contractor, in order for him to achieve an integrated coordinated design.
4. The bars shown on the bar chart shall be annotated with details of the information expected
from the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor and highlight any target
dates to receive or produce information.
5. Informationrelatingtocontractualmilestonedatesshallbeshownonboththe Contractor’s and Interfacing
Contractors / E&M subcontractor’s schedules.
6. The prime purpose of the document is to assist with ensuring that a coordinated design,
construction, testing and commissioning is achieved. This document shall be forwarded to
Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor for comment and agreement on a
regular basis.
7. A complementary table of activities and dates should be prepared for ease of reference.
Attachment I - Guidance Notes for the Preparation of Interface Management Plan.
The purpose of this Plan is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to achieve a fully
coordinated design, which is compatible with that design carried out by Interfacing Contractors
/ Agencies / E&M subcontractor.
This document shall describe each of the component parts, within Zones of Interface, of the
design, which require input from Interfacing Contractors / agencies / E&M subcontractor. The
descriptions should include details relating to the inputs required from both the Contractor and
Interfacing Contractor / Agencies / E&M subcontractor, to achieve a fully coordinated design. The
document should also be complementary to the IMPG, which details the proposed schedule and
timings of each of the interfacing activities.
This document shall also detail the proposed interfacing requirements to be met by all Interfacing
Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor. The Contractor shall ensure that this document is
acceptable to the Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor and that they are able
to comply with all of its requirements. This is to be achieved by document exchanges and
discussions to achieve agreement of documents.
The Plan shall therefore:
i) Detail each of the component parts of the Project, which require the input of Interfacing
Contractors / Agencies / E&M subcontractor to achieve a coordinated design. It shall
describe the various disciplines and detail the technical input from others that will be
required to achieve a coordinated design.
ii) Cover the whole duration of the Works and be complementary to the IMPG, which details
147 | P a g e
the proposed/agreed schedule and timings.

iii) Be given by the Contractor to other Interfacing Contractors / Agencies / E&M
subcontractor for their information and agreement.
iv) Be developed in association with the process of increasing knowledge of the design and
shall reflect the agreements reached by the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors /
Agencies / E&M subcontractor as the Project progresses. The Plan shall be updated on a
quarterly basis to reflect this developing status.
The Status of any interface at any point in time shall be identified by one of the following
conditions;
• to be coordinated
• coordinated
• not coordinated
• received
• provided
• accepted
• not accepted
• propose close-out
• superseded
• closed out
148 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX – 17
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
149 | P a g e
1. SCOPE
1.1.1 The Employer‘s Requirements Volume 3, Appendix 17 titled “ Occupational,
Health, Safety and Environmental Manual ( OHS&E) details the requirements of
the Employer for Safety, Health and Environmental control measures associated
with the Contractor and any other agency, to be practiced in the Goregaon Mulund
Link Road construction sites and associated premises. This document should be
treated as OHS&E.
1.2 Application of this document
1.2.1 This OHS&E applies to all aspects of the Contractor’s scope of work including that
conducted by their appointed Subcontractor’s and other Agencies on their behalf.
There shall be no activity associated with the Goregaon Mulund Link Road project
which is exempted from the purview of this document. The Employer’s
Requirements OHS&E is further supplemented with a further 3 OHS&E Volumes
for ease of reference. Their individual scope and applicability is as follows;
1.2.2. This OHS&E document (Appendix 17 of Volume 3) is the controlling document for
all Contracts and is fixed throughout the term of the project. Compliance with this
OHS&E (Appendix 17 of Volume 3) is mandatory.
1.2.2 OHS&E Section 1, Volume 7 provides Safety & Health guidance that the Contractor
may choose to use unless stated as mandatory within this appendix 17. The
contents of OHS&E Section 1, Volume 7 remains subject to revision by the Engineer
in the event of new Legislation or changing circumstances. The information
contained within the Section 1, Volume 7 shall be used by the Engineer in assessing
the sufficiency and suitability of the Contractor‘s management systems and
performance.
1.2.3 OHS&E Section 2, Volume 7 provides Environmental guidance and procedural
requirements for the project the Section 2, Volume 7 remains subject to periodic
revision and updating.
1.2.4 OHS&E Section 3, Volume 7 is specifically for projects involving tunnelling and its use
is mandatory. The Section 3, Volume 7 4 remains subject to revision and updating
during the project period in light of legislative or methodology changes.
1.2.5 OHS&E Section 1, 2 & 3 are appended under Volume 7 Reference Documents.
1.3. Purpose of this document

The purpose of this document, the Employer ‘s Requirements, OHS&E Volume 1 is to
provide Contractors and other interested parties with the mandatory requirements
150 | P a g e
relating to Health, Safety and the Environment practices and performance expectations on
the Goregaon Mulund Link Road.
This document:
a) Describes the OHS&E interfaces between the Employer, Engineer and the Contractor;
b) Details the processes by which the Contractor shall manage OHS&E issues while
carrying out the works under the contract; and
a. Describes by reference, the practices, procedures and requirements pertaining to
the Goregaon Mulund Link Road.
1.4. Goregaon Mulund Link Road OHS&E Objectives

The Goregaon Mulund Link Road project has identified five principle objectives for
attainment during the project. These long-term objectives shall be supported with
quarterly, short and medium-term objectives to enable structured advancement in overall
performance. The short and medium-term objectives also aim to facilitate effective
monitoring and measurement to identify where a directional change may be necessary.
The long-term objectives are:
a. To eliminate or minimize the unwanted effects of hazards and risks to personnel, members
of the public and other stakeholders who may be exposed to the undertakings associated
with the construction of the Goregaon Mulund Link Road.
b. Establish an effective and robust OHS&E management system that will enable Contractors
to achieve international recognition and registration to the BS EN 18001:2007 Series.
c. Actively contribute to Contractors development through support, encouragement,
determination in control and transfer of knowledge and skills in order to make the move
from traditional compliance driven management through to risk managed processes.
d. To simplify the risk concept, to ensure a sensible approach to risk management and
simplify hazard awareness training through adoption of the ALARP (As low as reasonably
practicable) principles.
e. To practice Best Practice ‘within the construction industry - Establishing a work
environment that conforms to international health & safety standards and make
recommendation to improve effectiveness of regulations both nationally and locally.
151 | P a g e
2. REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
BS EN ISO 9000:2005, Quality management systems—Fundamentals and vocabulary
BS EN ISO 9001:2008, Quality management systems—Requirements
BSENISO 14001:2004, Environmental management systems—Requirements with guidance
BS EN ISO 19011:2002, Guidelines for quality and/or environmental management systems
auditing
BS OHSAS 18001:2007, Occupational health and safety management systems Requirements
BS OHSAS 18002, Occupational health and safety management systems–Guidelines for the
implementation of BS OHSAS 18001
PAS 99, Specification of common management system requirements as a framework for
integration
International Labour Organization:2001, Guidelines on occupational health and safety
management systems — ILO-OSH 2001
Health & Safety Guidance (HSG) Health and Safety Executive Publications United Kingdom
3. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

3.1. Acceptable risk. Risk that has been reduced to a level that can be tolerated by the
organization having regard to its legal obligations and its own OHS&E policy
3.2. Accident. Incident giving rise to injury, ill health or fatality
3.3. ALARP (As low as reasonably practicable) principles.
3.4. Audit. Systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining ―audit evidence
and evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which ―audit criteria are fulfilled
3.5. BOCWA. Building and Other Construction Workers (Regular Employment and
Conditions of Service) Act, 1996
3.6. BOCWR. Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment
and Conditions of Service) Central Rules, 1998
3.7. Chief Safety Expert. An officer nominated by MCGM who is the overall responsible
for monitoring all OHS&E functions prescribed in this document.
3.8. MCGM. Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai
3.9. Competent person. Person with the appropriate combination of skill, knowledge,
qualifications and experience
3.10. Continual improvement. Recurring process of enhancing the OHS&E management
system in order to achieve improvements in overall OHS&E performance consistent
with the organization ‘s OHS&E policy
3.11. Corrective action. Action to eliminate the cause of a detected nonconformity or other
undesirable situation
152 | P a g e
3.12. Design Risk Assessments. Used to record the actions of designers when reducing risks
in construction and for future repairs and maintenance issues.
3.13. Employer. MCGM
3.14. Hazard. Source, situation, or act with a potential for harm in terms of human injury or ill
health, or a combination of these
3.15. Hazard identification. Process of recognizing that a hazard exists and defining its
characteristics
3.16. Health surveillance. Monitoring health of employees to detect signs or symptoms of
work‑related ill health so that steps can be taken to eliminate, or reduce the probability
of, further harm
3.17. ILL health. Identifiable, adverse physical or mental condition arising from and/or made
worse by a work activity and/or work-related situation
3.18. Incident. Work-related event(s) in which an injury or ill health (regardless of severity)
or fatality occurred or could have occurred. An accident is an incident which has given
rise to injury, ill health or fatality. An incident where no injury, ill health, or fatality
occurs may also be referred to as a ―near-miss‖, or ―dangerous occurrence‖.
3.19. Interested party. Person or group, inside or outside the workplace, concerned with or
affected by the OHS&EOHS&E performance of an organization
3.20. Nonconformity. Non-fulfilment of a requirement; A nonconformity can be any deviation
from: relevant work standards, practices, procedures, legal requirements, etc. or OHS&E
management system requirements. A nonconformity can be any deviation from: —
relevant work standards, practices, procedures, legal requirements, etc. — OHS&E
management system criteria.
3.21. OHS&E management system. Part of an organization ‘s management system used to
develop and implement its OHS&E policy and manage its OHS&E risks. A management
system is a set of interrelated elements used to establish policy and objectives and to
achieve those objectives. A management system includes organizational structure,
planning activities (including for example, risk assessment and the setting of objectives),
responsibilities, practices, procedures, processes and resources.
3.22. OHS&E objective. OHS&E goal, in terms of OHS&E performance that an organization sets
itself to achieve.
3.23. OHS&E performance. Measurable results of an organization ‘s management of its OHS&E
risks
3.24. OHS&E policy. Overall intentions and direction of an organization related to its OHS&E
performance as formally expressed by top management
3.25. Preventive action. Action to eliminate the cause of a potential nonconformity (3.19) or
153 | P a g e
other undesirable potential situation

3.26. Procedure. Specified way to carry out an activity or a process
3.27. Record. Document stating results achieved or providing evidence of activities
performed
3.28. Risk. Combination of the likelihood of an occurrence of a hazardous event or exposure(s)
and the severity of injury or ill health that can be caused by the event or exposure(s)
3.29. Risk assessment. Process of evaluating the risk(s) arising from a hazard(s), taking into
account the adequacy of any existing controls, and deciding whether or not the risk(s)
is
3.30. Risk control. Selection and application of suitable measures to reduce risk
3.31. Shall. Indicates a mandatory requirement within this document
3.32. Stakeholders. Those with a interest in an organization ‘s achievements that includes, but
is not limited to, internal and ―outsourced‖ employees, customers, suppliers, partners,
employees, distributors, investors, insurers, shareholders, owners, government and
regulators.
3.33. Status review. Formal evaluation of the OHS&E management system
3.34. Top management. Person or group of people who direct and control an organization at
the highest level
3.35. Worker representative. Representative of employee occupational health and safety
4. SHE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

4.1 General requirement
4.1.1 The Contractor shall define and document the scope of its Occupational Safety Health
and Environmental (OHS&E) management system to meet legal requirements and the
requirements of Goregaon Mulund Link Road as stated within this document.
4.1.2 The Contractor ‘s OHS&E management system shall determine how the organisation
shall document, implement, maintain and continually improve upon performance in
accordance with the requirements of the International OHSAS Standard to which the
Employer is committed.
4.2 MCGM OHS&E Policy Statement of Intent

MCGM consider that health, safety and environmental is of equal importance in comparison to
any other aspect of business management and as such is committed to promoting high standards
of safety, health, environment and welfare on all of their sites and premises. To achieve this
Goregaon Mulund Link Road shall:
• Constantly work towards improving the safety culture at all levels.
154 | P a g e
• Ensure compliance with all relevant legal duties in respect of health and safety at
work legislation.
• Provide adequate resources for planning and controlling working conditions and
safe systems of work.
• Work with our Contractors and suppliers to improve their safety performance, by
measuring and monitoring their performance. Responsibilities and performance
requirements for Safety, Health and the Environment are summarised as follows:
• All Contractors, employees, sub-contractors, consultants, suppliers and visitors
have a duty to play an active role in achieving our objectives through compliance
with their legal obligations and this Safety Policy.
• Participation and consultation are vital aspects of this Policy and to the
achievement of our objectives. Contractors and Staff are encouraged and expected
to:
• Discuss safety, health and welfare matters with their managers, and company
Safety, Health & Environmental Representatives who will offer or obtain further
expert advice, where necessary.
• Co-operate at all times; contribute good ideas and improvements; report defects and
short falls.
The correction of any breach of statutory provision or Goregaon Mulund Link Road
requirements on health and safety shall take priority. Should appropriate action not be taken to
meet the required standards, this will be taken seriously and may lead to disciplinary action
being taken.
This Policy Statement shall be displayed prominently on all Goregaon Mulund Link Road sites
and offices and will be kept under review to ensure its relevance.
____________________
Chief Engineer
Goregaon Mulund Link Road June 2017
155 | P a g e
4.3. Planning
4.3.1. Hazard identification, risk assessment and determining controls
4.3.1.1 The Contractor shall submit a procedure detailing the process in place for the
identification of Hazards and Risks and the determination of control measures
including the relevant standards as per clause 4.4.4.1.2. The Procedure shall
incorporate the Employer ‘s Requirements within this and other applicable OHS&E
Volumes.
4.3.1.2 Management of Change
4.3.1.2.1 All temporary and permanent changes to organisational, personnel, systems,
procedures, equipment, products, materials or substances shall be evaluated by the
Contractor and managed to ensure that health, safety and environmental risks arising
from these changes remain at an acceptable level. Changes made by the Contractor are
subject to submittal and notice of no objection by the Engineer prior to adopting
change.
4.3.1.3 Risk Register & Hazard Log
4.3.1.3.1 The Contractor ‘s Construction Health and safety Plan shall contain a detailed ‗Risk
Register ‘and ‗Hazard Log ‘specific to the project. The register and log shall be assessed
against the MCGM OHS&E requirements Volume 2.
4.3.1.3.2 The Hazard Log shall identify future method statement, risk assessment and
operational procedures pertaining to specific equipment and operations in relation
risk and local environmental constraints. Construction phase OHS&E Plans shall not be
accepted without a fully completed Hazard Log and Risk Register.
4.3.1.4Method Statements
4.3.1.4.1 Method statements are to be submitted to the Engineer a minimum of 21 days prior to
task commencement to ensure sufficient time is available for review and notice of no
objection.
4.3.1.4.2 Method statements shall contain the information requirements as prescript within the
MCGM OHS&E Volume 2.
4.3.1.4.3 Method statements shall incorporate the control measures within the process
methodology as identified within the risk assessment.
4.3.1.4.4 A copy of the relevant method statement for the activity being undertaken shall be
available on site for reference by all site management and supervisors.
4.3.1.4 Risk Assessment production & submittal
4.3.1.5.1. Risk assessments shall contain as a minimum, the information as specified within
the MCGM OHS&E Volume 2. The Contractor may choose to use their own format
156 | P a g e
however the risk tolerances, probability and consequences must be included.

4.3.1.5.2 Risk assessments shall be produced and submitted to the (TA4) Engineer a minimum
of 21 days prior to task commencement for notice of no objection. Risk assessments
may be submitted independently or as part of a Method Statement.
4.3.1.5.3 Generic risk assessments other than routine activities of low risk shall not be accepted
by the Employer.
4.3.1.5.4 Risk assessments shall be regularly reviewed to ensure they remain suitable and
sufficient. Risk assessment reviews shall be undertaken where an incident has occurred
and when a change in location may introduce additional risks from construction
activities.
4.3.1.5.5 Substances hazardous to health shall be subject to assessment by the Contractor. Where
Hazardous substances are identified for use within a process the assessment and
determining controls shall be included within the relative method statement.
4.3.1.6 Design Risk Assessment
4.3.1.6.1 Design Risk Assessments shall be submitted to the Engineer for granting of no
objection. Design risk assessments shall accompany all drawing submittals for
operations involving;
• Temporary works,
• Formwork & false-work
• Heavy lifting equipment.
4.3.1.6.2 Drawings shall not be accepted by the Employers Representative without an
accompanying design risk assessment.
4.3.2 Legal and other requirements
4.3.2.1 Contractor shall comply with all legal obligations and the requirements of
Goregaon Mulund Link Road as contained herein.
4.3.2.2 Indian statutory requirements
The Contractor shall abide by all national, state and local bye-laws. It is the duty of the Contractor
to ensure that all sub-Contractors appointed also comply with their legal obligations
as listed below but not limited to:
i. Indian Electricity Act 2003 and Rules 1956
ii. National Building Code, 2005
iii. Factories Act, 1948,
vii. Motor Vehicles Act as amended in 1994, The Central Motor Vehicles Rules, 1989.
viii. Indian Road Congress Code IRC: SP: 55-2001 ‗Guidelines on Safety in Road
Construction Zones.
ix. The Petroleum Act, 1934 and Rules 1976
157 | P a g e
x. Gas Cylinder Rules, 2003

xi. Indian Explosives Act. 1884, along with the Explosives Substance Act 1908 and
the explosives Rules 1983
xii. The (Indian) Boilers Act, 1923
xiii. The Public Liability Insurance Act 1991 and Rules 1991
xiv. Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and Rules 1950
xv. Contract Labour Act, 1970 and Rules 1971
xvi. Child Labour (Prohibitions & Regulations) Act, 1986 and Rules 1950
xvii. Environment Protection Act, 1986 and Rules 1986
xviii. Air (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act, 1981
xix. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
xx. The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
xxi. Notification on Control of Noise from Diesel Generator (DG) sets, 2002
xxii. Recycled Plastic Usage Rules, 1998
xxiii. Notification, Central Ground Water Board, Act January 1997
xxiv. Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989
xxv. The Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989
xxvi. Hazardous Waste Management Rules 1989 (as amended in 1999)
xxvii. Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules
xxviii. Fly ash utilization notification, Sept 1999 as amended in August 2003
xxix. Workman Compensation Act, 1923 along with allied Rules
4.3.2.3 International Standards, Guidelines & ISO Certifications

4..2.3.1 If the requirements stated in this document are in conflict or inconsistent with the
requirements of applicable laws, the more stringent requirements shall apply.
4..2.3.2 The works shall be undertaken in accordance with the applicable international
guidelines, standards and specifications on OHS&E and every Contractor shall
actively pursue the achievement of:
• BS EN OHSAS 18001:2007 - OHS Management Systems
• ISO 14001-2004: Environmental Management Systems
4.3.2.3. The process of international certification to BS EN 18001:2007 and ISO 14001-2004

standard shall commence immediately after the award of Contract through
appointment of ISO accrediting body for obtaining the certification. Should this not
be undertaken by the Contractor within 3 months of the Contract award, the
Engineer shall appoint at the Contractor ‘s cost.
158 | P a g e
4.3.2.3.4 Should the Contractor already possess such certification, the scope of the CMR
project must be included on the Contractor‘s certification within 1 year of Contract
commencement and proof of such attainment demonstrated to Goregaon Mulund
Link Road.
4.3.3 Objectives and programme(s)
4.3.3.1 The Contractor shall maintain procedures to establish detailed OHS&E objectives
and performance criteria. Such objectives and performance criteria shall be
developed to incorporate the Goregaon Mulund Link Road policy and strategic
OHS&E objectives. The Contractor ‘s objectives shall be quantified, wherever
practicable, and identified with defined timescales. The Contractor is required to
submit for notice of no objection their procedure and objectives as per clause 4.4.4.1
of this control document.
4.4 Implementation and operation
4.4.1 Resources, roles, responsibility, accountability and authority
4.4.1.1 The Contractor shall detail within the Construction Health, Safety and
Environmental Plan the planned roles and resources allocated for the CMR project.
In addition to the staffing arrangements the Contractor shall prescribe the
responsibilities specific to role, accountability and the authority under which they
operate.
4.4.1.2 Safety, health & environmental resources shall be provided by the Contractor as per
the Contract value in table 1.
159 | P a g e
Table 1 Mandatory Contractor OHS&E management resource requirement

1 2 3 4 5 6
Contract Chief Senior Senior Junior
Junior ONS&E
Value in OHS&E OHS&E Safety Steward Electrical Electrical
Manager
(Cr.) Manager Manager Engineer Engineer
Up to 2 1 1
Up to 10 1 1
Up to 25 1 1
Up to 100 1 Refer to note 1 Refer to note 1 Refer to note 1 1 Refer to note 2
Up to 250 1 1
250 or More 1 1
7 8 9 10 11
Occupational Senior OHS&E
Health Officer Traffic Housekeeping and
Labour
Contract Value In Environmental
with necessary Engineer Barricade Welfare
(Cr.) Manager
nursing Assistants (Refer to Note maintenance Officer
(Refer Note 3) 4)
Up to 2
Up to 10 1 (PT) 1 1 1
Up to 25 1 (PT) 1 1 1
Up to 100 1 (PT) 1 1 1
Refer to Note 5 1 with
Up to 250 2 (FT) 1 1
Support staff
1 with support 1 with
250 and More 2 (FT) 1
staff Support staff
Qualified and trained OHS&E Professionals as per Table 2 with required support staff to be
Note 1 deployed at each worksite at each shift. Qualifications of appointed OHS&E personnel shall be
in accordance with section 4.4.2 Competence, Awareness and Training, within this document.
Qualified and trained Electrical Engineers / supervisors to be deployed at each worksite for
Note 2
each shift.
Note 3 (PT) means Part-Time and (FT) means Full-time.
SeniorOHS&E(Traffic)EngineerPostandBarricadeManagerpostsareapplicable to contracts
Note 4
where the work has to be executed either below or way such as Viaduct, Station Contracts.
One Housekeeping Manager/ Barricade Manager supported by required supervisors and

Note 5
workmen necessary to maintain a clean and tidy site or yard
160 | P a g e
4.4.1.3 Responsibility
4.4.1.4 The General Manager of the Contractor is responsible and accountable for
compliance with the conditions and clauses within this document.
4.4.1.5 The General Manager is responsible to ensure that the necessary resources are
allocated and made available to meet the requirements as laid out within this
document and other referenced materials to include Legal Requirements (4.3.2).
4.4.1.6 For all works carried out by the Contractor and appointed sub-Contractor‘s, the
responsibility for ensuring OHS&E resources remains with the main Contractor.
Activities undertaken by the Contractor‘s Sub-Contractors shall be monitored by the
Contractor at all times to ensure compliance with agreed safe systems of working.
4.4.1.7 All Contractor‘s OHS&E personnel shall report to the Chief OHS&E Manager who
shall report directly to the General Manager or Corporate Safety Director of the
Contractor‘s organisation. This shall be reflected in the Contractor‘s organisation
charts within the OHS&E plan and Quality Management Plan.
4.4.1.8 The Employer shall monitor adherence to the provisions of Table 1. Where deviation
is evident this shall be recorded as a non-conformance.
4.4.1.9 The Contractor shall provide all OHS&E personnel with such facilities, equipment
and information that are necessary to enable them to dispatch their duties
effectively.
4.4.1.10 The Contractor‘s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers are responsible for
ensuring that reports on the performance of the OHS&E management system are
presented to top management for review and used as a basis for improvement of the
OHS&E management system.
4.4.1.11 The Contractor‘s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers are responsible for
independently monitoring the operations of the Contractor, where deficiencies are
identified they are responsible to report their findings immediately to the Site
Engineer in charge who then must take action as directed.
4.4.1.12 Accountability
4.4.1.13 In cases where the Contractor fails to provide the minimum required manpower as
illustrated in Table 1, or fails to fill vacancies created within 30 days, the same may
be provided by the Engineer at the Contractor‘s cost. Any administrative expenses
involved in providing the same for example, vacancy advertisements or recruitment
consultant charges, shall also be at the cost of Contractor.
4.4.1.14 No OHS&E personnel shall be permitted to do any work which is unconnected to,
inconsistent with or detrimental to the performance of the OHS&E duties.
4.4.1.15 Supervisors must ensure that the employees under their direct supervision are
161 | P a g e
working incompliance with the approved safe systems of working.

4.4.1.16 Authority
4.4.1.17 The Contractor‘s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers authority shall be
stated within the Construction Health and Safety Plan and the authority level must
be communicated to all Contractor‘s Staff including sub-Contractors.
4.4.1.18 The Contractor‘s Safety Managers, Safety Advisors and Officers shall have the
authority as assigned by the General Manager to suspend works where deviation
from an approved method of working occurs that presents a risk of injury,
equipment or property damage.
4.4.1.19 The Engineer shall have the right to stop the work, if in his opinion the work is being
carried out in such a way that a risk of injury, property and or equipment damage
may exist. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until remedial works have
been complied with under the direction and satisfaction of the Employer. Should the
Contractor continue to work without implementing the Engineers instruction,
clause4.4.2.2 shall be applied to the individual responsible for the decision to
proceed.
4.4.1.20 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages or compensation for stoppage of
work, due to safety reasons. The period of such stoppages of work shall not be taken
as an extension of time for completion of the facilities and will not be the ground for
waiver of levy of liquidated damages.
4.4.2 Competence, training and awareness
4.4.2.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the recruitment, selection and placement processes shall
be in place to ensure that personnel are qualified, competent, and physically fit for
assigned tasks. The Contractor shall produce a procedure that shall be made available to
the Engineer for notice of no objection as per Clause 4.4.4.1.2 of this document. The
procedure shall define the processes in place to ensure competence.
4.4.2.2 The Contractor‘s attention is drawn to Part I General Conditions Clause 6.9 (d), whereby any
person employed thereon, who in the opinion of the Engineer, misconducts himself or is
incompetent or negligent or fails to conform with any particular provisions with regard to
safety, health or environment which is set out in the Contractor‘s OHS&E Plan or a
requirement of the Contract, or persists in any conduct which is prejudicial to safety or
health, shall be removed from site immediately, and such persons shall not be employed
again upon the Works. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final.
4.4.2.3 Notice of No Objection from the Engineer

162 | P a g e
4.4.2.3.1 The name, educational qualifications and work experience for all persons intended for a Contractor‘s
OHS&E role shall be submitted to the Engineer for notice prior to employment. Only upon notice of
no objection by the Engineer shall OHS&E personnel be authorised to work on a MCGM site.
4.4.2.3.2 The Contractor shall appoint the required OHS&E personnel in accordance with the
qualifications and experience as listed in Table 2.
Table 2 OHS&E Personnel Qualifications & Experience

Experience
Item Designation Qualification (Years)
The Chief OHS&E Manager shall be qualified in any of

the following degrees/diplomas:
Post Graduate Diploma in Industrial Safety &
Environmental Management (PGDISEM)
M.E. in Industrial Safety from NIT,
B.E. in Fire and Safety Engineering.
Chief Safety
1 B.E. with advanced Safety Management Diploma 15
Manager
B.E / B.Arch., with one year Full Time advanced Safety
Diploma
B.E/B.Tech full time Degree / Diploma in Safety.
International qualifications, CSP (Certified Safety
Professional), NEBOSH, MIOSH, MSISO etc
Also refer to item 10, Clause A15(9), Volume 3
As stated in Sl. No:1 and in addition the following
categories:
i)B.Sc.(Physics/Chemistry/Maths) with one year 2 years for
Full Time advanced Safety diploma category (i)
ii) B.Sc. / Diploma in Engg. with advanced safety (ii)
Senior OHS&E Management Diploma and (iii)
Manager iii) B.Sc. (Physics/Chemistry/Maths) with One year
Full Time diploma in Safety Engineering
iv) Any Graduate or diploma holder with 7 years of
work experience in a OHS&E department upon
approval of Engineer.
2
i)Degree in Science/Diploma in Engineering with
i) 2 Years
Govt. recognized safety diplomas
Junior OHS&E
Manager ii)Any Graduate or diploma holder with 5 years of work
experience in a OHS&E department with prior approval
of Engineer? on a case to case basis
3
163 | P a g e
Experience
Item Designation Qualification (Years)
Any basic qualification with any OHS&E related
4 Safety Steward 2 Years
certificate courses.
Senior Electrical Degree in Electrical Engineering + Govt. Recognized
5 2 Years
Manager Electrical Licence holder
Electrical Diploma in Electrical Engineering+ Govt. Recognized
6 1 Year
Manager Electrical Licence holder
Occupational MBBS with Govt. recognized degree/diploma in Industrial/

7 1 Year
Health Officer occupational health
Environmental Govt. recognized PG Degree / PG Diploma / Degree in

8 2 Years
Manager Environmental Engineering / Science
Senior Traffic Govt. recognized PG Degree / Degree / Diploma in

9 1 Year
Engineer Traffic/Transportation Engineering or Planning
Housekeeping &
10 Any Diploma in Engineering 1 Year
Barrier Manager
4.4.2.3.3 Where a potential candidate has previously worked in a Metro Rail construction
environment and does not possess the qualifications and or the necessary
experience as listed in Table 2 for the particular role, the Engineer may upon a
successful interview of the candidate grant a waiver subject to successful
completion of a probation period of 3 months.
4.4.2.3.4 In order to effectively interact on labour welfare matters with the Engineer and the
statutory authorities enforcing the labour welfare legislations every Contractor
shall employ a full time Labour Welfare Officer duly qualified and experienced as
per clause
4.4.2.3.5 OHS&E Induction Training
4.4.2.3.6 The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working at the site receive an
induction OHS&E training explaining the nature of the work, reporting &
communication routes the hazards that may be encountered during the site work
and the particular hazards attached to their own function within the operation. The
training shall cover as a minimum the contents as directed within OHS&E Volume 2.
4.4.2.3.7 Records of all inductions shall be maintained by the Contractor and be made
available for inspection by the Employer upon request.
4.4.2.3.8 The Contractor shall provide their workforce and management staff with an OHS&E
induction Handbook containing the information as per the induction training.
4.4.2.3.9 A condensed induction shall be given by the Contractor to all visitors. The induction
164 | P a g e
briefing shall include the risk and hazards associated with the particular site and the
operations being conducted.
4.4.2.3.10 All personnel shall be issued a temporary ID upon the completion of the Contractor‘s
induction. The temporary ID shall be signed by the Human Resource Manager or
appointed representative and limited to a 2 week validity period at which time the
temporary ID shall be replaced with a permanent ID including photograph.
4.4.2.3.11 Individuals found on site by the Engineer without-dated temporary ID cards shall be
removed from site
4.4.2.4 OHS&E Training
4.4.2.4.1 The Contractor shall assess the training requirements for all the employees, plan
and initiate a training program to fulfil the training needs assessment. The
assessment of training needs shall incorporate all levels of staff including Sub-
Contractor‘s against an individual‘s role, responsibility, ability, language skill and
risk.
4.4.2.4.2 The Contractor shall produce a Training Implementation Plan ‘to incorporate the
findings of the needs assessment.
4.4.2.4.3 The training needs assessment together with Implementation Plan shall be
submitted to the Engineer for notice of no objection within 4 weeks of
commencement. The Engineer shall evaluate the assessment and plan against the
base line training matrix contained within OHS&E Volume 2.
4.4.2.4.4 Records of all training conducted shall be maintained and made available for inspection by
the Engineer upon request.
4.4.2.4.5 Should the Contractor fail to provide the training identified within the Contractor ‘s
assessment, implementation plan and the Engineer ‘s Training matrix within the
agreed timescales, this shall be reflected in the potential scores awarded within the
monthly audit report.
4,4,2,4,6 Specific training with regard to the provisions of the Construction Safety Plan and
associated operational and system procedures shall be conducted by the Contractor
for all persons with supervision responsibilities. Records of training including
duration shall be maintained.
4.4.3 Communication, participation and consultation

4.4.3.1 Communication
4.4.3.1.1 The Contractor shall produce a ‗High Quality ‘quarterly newsletter on a rotational
165 | P a g e
basis with other Contractors. Rotation shall be announced within the Engineer ‘s
OHS&E Committee meetings.
4.4.3.1.2 All Contractors including the Engineer shall provide input into the rotational
Contractor for the newsletter content such as details of accidents, incidents and near misses
together with any lessons learned; specific safety initiatives; internal competitions
and workforce awards etc.
4.4.3.1.3 The Engineer shall be issued the draft newsletter for review prior to the Contractor ‘s
publishing.
4.4.3.1.4 The OHS&E Newsletters shall publicise all Contractors OHS&E performances over the
previous 3 months in relation to OHS&E Audits and shall form the basis for the
Engineer‘s Awards programme. Results of audits shall be provided by the Engineer
for inclusion.
4.4.3.1.5 The quarterly newsletters shall be issued to all interested parties and be promulgated
at site level. Where language barriers exists the contents of the newsletters shall be
communicated by the Workforce Representative to ensure understanding.
4.4.3.1.6 At site level the Contractor shall erect pertinent awareness signage and posters.
Posters shall be changed on a monthly basis to maintain impact.
4.4.3.1.7 Poster campaigns shall be discussed and agreed at the Engineer Committee Meeting to
maintain a consistent improvement programme across all MCGM Sites.
4.4.3.1.8 Informational posters, banners etc shall be provided in Marathi, Hindi and English.
4.4.3.1.9 Toolbox talks, or team briefings shall be carried out daily by the Contractor and
correspond to the works activities being undertaken or to communicate a specific
awareness initiative. Toolbox talks shall not replace professional training.
4.4.3.1.10 Records of all toolbox talks undertaken together with the date, topic, participant ‘s
names and signatures shall be maintained and made available for inspection by the
Engineer.
4.4.3.1.11 Method statement and risk assessment briefings shall be carried out prior to the
commencement of a new task and or when a change to the method of working arises.
Records of all such briefings shall be maintained by the Contractor.
4.4.3.1.12 Visitor information signage shall be posted at site entrances detailing where to report
and contact information. Note: visitors shall be accompanied at all times by site
security where office locations require walking through operational areas.
4.4.3.1.13 Public Liaison
4.4.3.1.14 Public informational signage and Contractor contact information shall be posted
externally to the site.
4.4.3.1.15 The Contractor shall appoint an individual as a Public Liaison Officer to communicate
166 | P a g e
directly with members of the public regarding forthcoming operations, what to

expect, noise expectancy, duration of operations etc.
4.4.3.2 Participation and consultation
The Contractor shall establish a Safety Committee within 4 weeks of commencement
that shall be chaired by the Contractor‘s Project Director.
4.4.3.2.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the establishment of the Committee
together with the committee members ‘names and designation. The Contractor‘s Chief
Safety Manager, Senior Safety Manager, Plant & procurement Manager and Human
Resources Manager shall form the minimum committee members. Site based personal
shall be represented within the Committee by the attendance of Site Manager(s) and
the Workforce OHS&E Representative.
4.4.3.2.3 The Engineer shall be invited to attend the Contractor‘s Safety Committee meetings.
4.4.3.2.4 The Contractor‘s OHS&E Committee shall meet on a monthly basis throughout the
duration of the Contract.
4.4.3.2.5 The Committee shall review the previous month‘s performance, to include,
inspections and audits undertaken, accidents and incidents and any concerns or
complaints that have been raised. Short term objectives and targets for improvement
shall be set for completion by the next scheduled Committee meeting.
4.4.3.2.6 The Safety committee shall undertake a formal site inspection to be scheduled on a 2
monthly basis. The inspection shall review progress regarding the achievement of
short term targets. The Committee shall produce a report stating progress made
together with any corrective actions required and issue to the Engineer within 7 days
following the Inspection.
4.4.3.2.7 Minutes of the Committee meeting shall be issued within 2 days and promulgated to
all members including the Engineer. The minutes of meeting shall also be posted on
all sites within the workforce area. The minutes intended for site communication shall
be in both Tamil and English.
4.4.3.3 Engineer OHS&E Committee
4.4.3.3.1 A Safety Health and Environmental Committee shall be established by the Engineer
and shall sit every 3 months throughout the project period. All Contractors shall be
required to attend the quarterly meetings who shall be represented by their General
Manager and Chief Safety Manager.
4.4.3.3.2 The Committee shall review previous performances project wide and set short and
medium term objectives and targets for achievement within the next reporting
period.
4.4.3.3.3 The Engineer reserves the right to call an Emergency Meeting of the Committee member
167 | P a g e
in the event of a serious incident that requires immediate change to the operational methods
of working.
4.4.3.3.4 Minutes of the Engineers OHS&E Committee shall be promulgated to all Contractor
‘s within 3 days.
4.4.3.4 Workforce Representation
4.4.3.4.1 All workers shall have access to a Workforce OHS&E Representative who is
responsible to communicate directly with the labour force with regard to safety and
health. The representative ‘s name and contact number shall be posted on all sites
externally to the site office.
4.4.3.4.2 The Workforce OHS&E Representative shall be made a member of the OHS&E
Committee and attend all meetings.
4.4.3.4.3 The OHS&E Representative shall meet the labour force on a monthly basis to discuss
health, welfare, safety initiatives and or concerns the workforce may have. Minutes
are to be produced by the OHS&E Representative and issued formally within 2 days
after the meeting date to the Contractor ‘s Project Manager and General Manager
and the Engineer.
4.4.3.4.4 A lockable site suggestion box to which only the workforce OHS&E Representative
shall have access shall be installed on all sites and within any labour accommodation
camps. The suggestion box shall be located independent from any offices, in a public
area and protected from bad weather. The OHS&E Representative shall inform the
workforce that the purpose of the suggestion box is to provide a means of
participation, communicating ideas and initiatives and also for raising concerns
without fear of reprisal.
4.4.3.4.5 The contents of all suggestion boxes shall be collected and collated on a weekly basis.
Where concerns or complaints regarding the standards of health, safety or welfare
have been reported these shall be immediately reported to the Chief OHS&E
Manager and Project Manager who shall investigate the concern(s). Records of such
investigations and resultant outcomes shall be maintained.
4.4.3.4.6 Ideas, suggestions and concerns raised by the workforce during the OHS&E
representative ‘s on site monthly meetings shall form an agenda item within the
Contractor ‘s OHS&E Committee meeting.
4.4.3.4.7 Where an idea or specific suggestion is subsequently adopted for use by the
Contractor ‘s OHS&E Committee, the individual shall receive an OHS&E award as
determined by the Contractor.
168 | P a g e
4.4.3.4.8 Where Employee awards are issued this shall be notified to the Engineer to ensure
inclusion within the Quarterly Newsletter.
4.4.3.5 Contractor Awards
The Employer shall recognize the effort, participation and commitment demonstrated
by the Contractor by nominating awards. The award type shall be at the discretion of
the Employer.
4.4.4 Documentation
4.4.4.1 Management System procedures
4.4.4.1.2 The Contractor is required to submit for notice of no objection, the organisation ‘s top
tier Management System Procedures as listed in Table 3 that shall be adopted for use on
the CMR project.
4.4.4.1.3 System procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer within 4 weeks of
commencement.
4.4.4.1.4 Construction works shall not commence until such time as a Notice of no
objection has been received; applicable to all management system procedures
as listed in Table 3. Should the Contractor commence operations on site without
notice, the Engineer shall award a Zero audit score for every month of non-
compliance with this clause.
4.4.4.1.5 The Engineer shall evaluate the suitability of the Contractor ‘s system
procedures against the BS EN 18001:2007 and ISO 14001:2004 standards.
4.4.4.1.6 The submitted procedures shall be individually identified with a unique
reference and detail in sequence the scope, purpose, referenced material and
procedure processes.
4.4.4.1.7 Where such procedures as listed in Table 3 exist within other areas of the
Contractor ‘s organisational management systems such as quality management,
these shall not be subject to replication if the procedure makes specific
reference to Health, Safety and Environmental control.
4.4.4.1.8 Compliance standards against the Contractor ‘s management system
procedures shall be subject to audit by the Engineer.
Table 3 OHS&E Management System Procedures
169 | P a g e
Hazard identification, Communication,

Environmental Impact Objectives and
risk assessment and participation &
Aspect Assessment programme(s)
determining controls Consultation
Training, awareness Implementation and Accident & Incident

Legal requirements
and competence Operation Investigation
Monitoring & Emergency

Documentation Change control
Measurement Preparedness
Procurement Record keeping Audit Management review
170 | P a g e
4.5 Control of documents

4.4.5.1 All plans, procedures and method statements shall be controlled and subject to
review and formal approval by the Contractor‘s Project Director prior to issue to
the Engineer.
. All documents subject to review by the Engineer shall be signed by the Contractor‘s Project
Director and issued formally.
4.4.5.2 Documents shall be issued as per the Engineer‘s requirements regarding Quality
Management.
4.4.5.3 OHS&E Documents shall be issued, maintained, traceable and available for retrieval
pursuant to the Contractor‘s ISO accredited Quality Management System.
4.4.6 Operational control

4.4.6.1 Operational control shall be maintained through the implementation of the provisions
stated within the Contractor‘s site specific Construction Health Safety and
Environmental Plans, the contents of which are outlined in Safety, Health and
Environmental Volumes 2 and 3 and Tunnelling Volume 4 to which the Contractor
shall comply.
4.4.6.2 Construction Phase Health & Safety Plan
4.4.6.2.1 The Contractor shall produce a Contract specific Construction Health & Safety
Plan(CHSP) and submit to the Engineer within 28 days of commencement.
4.4.6.2.2 The Construction Health and Safety Plan shall contain the informational requirements
asper the CHSP contents as prescript within the MCGM OHS&E Volume 2, Safety Plan
contents.
4.4.6.2.3 The CHSP shall be assessed by the Engineer against the provisions as stated within
OHS&E Volume 2. Where deficiencies exist to an extent where an objection is raised,
construction activities shall be suspended until such time as the deficiencies are
subject to corrective action, re-submittal and notice of no objection by the Employer.
4.4.6.2.4 Delays incurred as a result of the Contractor failing to achieve a No objection status
from failing to submit within the specified timescale or noncompliance with OHS&E
Volume 2 shall be entirely at the Contractor ‘s risk and cost.
4.4.6.2.5 The Contractor shall undertake a monthly review of the CHSP. The review shall be
recorded, and the Engineer notified of any updates.
4.4.6.3 Construction Phase Site Environmental Plan
4.4.6.3.1 The Contractor shall produce a Contract Specific Site Environmental Plan (SEP) and
submit to the Engineer within 28 days of commencement.
4.4.6.3.2 The Site Environmental Plan (SEP) shall contain the informational requirements as
171 | P a g e
per the contents as prescript within the MCGM Environmental Management

Arrangements Volume 3, Environmental Plan contents.
4.4.6.3.3 The SEP shall be assessed by the Engineer against the provisions as stated within the
Environmental Management Arrangements Volume 3. Where deficiencies exist to an
extent where an objection is raised, construction activities shall be suspended until
such time as the deficiencies are subject to corrective action, re-submittal and notice
of no objection by the Engineer.
4.4.6.3.4 Delays incurred as a result of the Contractor failing to achieve a ‗No objection ‘status
from failing to submit within the specified timescale or non-compliance with
Environmental Management Arrangements Volume 3 shall be entirely at the
Contractor ‘s risk and cost.
4.4.6.3.5 The Contractor shall undertake a monthly review of the SEP. The review shall be
recorded, and the Engineer notified of any updates.
4.4.6.4 Operational procedures
4.4.6.4.1 The Contractor shall identify within the Hazard Log and Risk Register the operational
control procedures that shall be applicable for the CMR project under their individual
scope of works.
4.4.6.4.2 Operational procedures shall be submitted for review to the Engineer for notice of no
objection together with the Construction Site Safety Plan within 4 weeks of
commencement.
4.4.6.4.3 The operational procedures shall be evaluated by the Engineer against the
requirements stated within OHS&E Volume 2, international safety standards such as
the International Labour Organisation, European Norms and British Standards where
an equivalent Indian Standard does not exist.
4.4.6.4.4 Construction works shall not commence until such time as a notice of no objection
has been received; applicable to all operational procedures as identified within Table
4 and the Contractor ‘s Hazard Log & Risk Register. Should the Contractor commence
operations on site without notice, the Engineer shall award a ‗Zero ‘audit score for
every month of non-compliance with this clause.
4.4.6.4.5 The submitted procedures shall be individually identified with a unique reference
and detail in sequence the scope, purpose, referenced material and procedure
processes.
4.4.6.4.6 In the event that the Contractor is unable to comply with the 28-day timeframe for
submittal of the minimum operational procedures as detailed within Table 4, the
Contractor shall assign an individual identification reference for the outstanding
procedure within the Construction Health, Safety & Environmental Plan together with
172 | P a g e
the statement under process. The Under Process ‘procedure shall be required to be
submitted for notice of no objection a minimum of 28 days prior to commencement
of any activity that involves the application of the procedure.
173 | P a g e
Table 4 Operational Procedures

Lifting Operations & Occupational Health Emergency Medical
Plant & Equipment
Lifting Equipment provisions Facilities & First Aid
Personal Protective Permit to Work Site Electricity & Welding & Cutting
Equipment Systems Distribution operations
Hazardous
Incident Investigation Traffic Management Working at Height
Substances
Site Security Fire Safety Manual Handling Site Set-up
Welfare
Abrasive Wheels Public Interface Noise and Vibration
Arrangements
174 | P a g e
4.4.6.4.8 The Contractor shall adopt the following colour code scheme across all MCGM Sites to
ensure efficient recognition of relevant personnel.
Safety Helmet Colour with

Logo Designation
White MCGM Staff and Engineer
Violet Contractor‘s Engineers & Supervisors
Blue Sub-Contractor‘s Engineers & Supervisors
Red All Electricians
Green Safety personnel
Orange Security Guards & Traffic Marshals
Yellow General Workforce
White (With VISITOR Sticker) Visitors
4.4.7 Emergency preparedness and response

4.4.7.1 Emergency Response Plan
4.4.7.1.1 The Contractor shall prepare a project specific Emergency Plan and submit to the Engineer
for notice of no objection. The Emergency Plan shall be submitted within 4 weeks of contract
Commencement.
4.4.7.1.2 The plan must identify the potential for emergencies and the provisions for responding
to such emergencies, particular to their environment and location. The Emergency
planning arrangements shall be assessed as per the provisions in OHS&E Volume 2 for
suitability.
4.4.7.1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all persons including sub-Contractors on site are aware
of the emergency procedure to follow in the event of an emergency. Awareness training
shall commence at induction and thereafter through refresher training such as toolbox
175 | P a g e
talks and monthly emergency drills. Records of refresher training and emergency drills
shall be maintained.
4.4.7.1.4 Site signage shall be erected and detail the emergency process to follow and include
emergency telephone numbers, fire, ambulance, police, nearest hospital etc.
4.4.7.1.5 Arrangements shall be made by the Contractor for casualty evacuation and emergency
medical treatment. The Contractor shall enter into an agreement with a hospital to
provide ambulance services. Alternatively, the Contractor shall provide a fully equipped
ambulance on-site that shall be manned by a paramedic. This provision shall be subject
to the Engineer audit.
4.5 Checking
4.5.1 Performance measurement and monitoring
4.5.1.1 The Contractor shall submit a Monthly OHS&E Progress Report no later than 7th
of each month to the Engineer. The Report shall contain the minimum information
specified within OHS&E Volume 2. The report shall contain text, tables and colour
photographs.
4.5.1.2 Site Inspection
4.5.1.3 Independent of the plant and equipment inspection, testing and maintenance
regimes that shall be stated within the Contractor‘s Plant and Equipment
Procedures, the Contractor shall carry out site monitoring exercises on a daily and
weekly basis.
4.5.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that all monitoring equipment is calibrated as per the
manufactures requirements. The Engineer shall be provided with test certificates
for such equipment
4.5.1.5 Site Engineers shall be required to participate in daily internal OHS&E inspections
to facilitate prompt communication and rectification of minor deviations. Records
of such inspections and rectification needs shall be maintained at site level and
made available for review by the Engineer other interested parties.
4.5.1.6 Formal site inspection reports shall be produced on a weekly basis by the
Contractor‘s OHS&E personnel for each site and submitted to the Project Director
and copied to the Contractor‘s General Manager.
4.5.1.7 The Contractor may choose inspection format of his/her choice, however format
shall contain the minimum information as provided within OHS&E Volume 2
regarding weekly inspection form.
4.5.1.8 The Contractor‘s OHS&E Personnel shall be accompanied during a formal site
inspection by the Site Manager responsible for the particular site. The resulting
inspection report shall be signed by both the Site Manager and the OHS&E officer.
176 | P a g e
4.5.1.9 The Engineer shall formally inspect and report the Contractor‘s site conditions
against the compliance criteria set within the Contractor‘s operational
procedures and the Engineer‘s requirements on a weekly basis. These inspections
shall include batching plant and associated yards.
4.5.1.10 The Contractor shall undertake specific inspections at the Engineer‘s request
where concerns have been raised regarding the suitability of control measures
and or plant or equipment condition. Such inspections shall be carried out with
immediate effect.
4.5.2 Evaluation of compliance

4.5.2.1 The information submitted by the Contractor within the OHS&E Monthly Progress
Report together with the Engineers Reports shall be evaluated against the Employer
‘s compliance requirements and OHS&E objectives.
4.5.2.2.1 Inspection reports shall be evaluated against the Legal Requirements (4.3.2) to
which the Contractor is bound to comply.
4.5.2.2 The Contractor‘s OHS&E Committee shall formally evaluate reports and results of
accidents and or injury on a monthly basis. The results of this evaluation such as
identified changes to safe systems of working‘ shall be included with the Committee
minutes
4.5.2.3 The Engineer shall evaluate Accident Injury Rates ‘and Frequency Rates‘ per individual
Contractor and as a project to determine performance against the international rates.
The international rates used to benchmark performance shall be promulgated to all
Contractor‘s and other interested parties.
4.5.2.4 A Project Monthly Progress Report shall be produced by the Engineer. Evaluation results shall
be included within the relevant sections for Health Safety & the Environment.
4.5.2.5 The Contractor ‘s External OHS&E Audits(4.5.5)shall be evaluated by the Engineer against the
internal Standards BS EN 18001:2007 AND ISO 14001:2004.
4.5.3 Incident investigation, nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action
4.5.3.1 Incident investigation
4.5.3.1.1 The Contractor shall undertake accident investigation for all fatal accidents, major
injuries and dangerous occurrences as defined within the Employer‘s Project OHS&E
VOL 2.
4.5.3.1.2 In the event of a fatality, major injury or dangerous occurrence, the Contractor shall not
disturb the accident scene or remove equipment beyond that required to make the area
safe and/or for the treatment and/or removal of casualty(s) to hospital.
4.5.3.1.3 Should the Engineer find an accident scene disturbed beyond that reasonably expected
177 | P a g e
with making an area safe, this shall be subject to thorough investigation by the Engineer.
4.5.3.1.4 The Engineer shall be informed immediately of all fatalities, major injuries or dangerous
occurrences. Any delay in reporting to the Engineer may be subject to disciplinary
action.
4.5.3.1.5 The Contractor is responsible to report accidents, incidents and dangerous occurrences
to the relevant governing bodies as per their statutory obligations. The Contractor shall
maintain responsibility for ensuring sub-Contractor‘s under their direct control also
comply with this requirement.
4.5.3.1.6 A preliminary accident notification report shall be issued to the Engineer for all fatal
and major injuries and or dangerous occurrences within 12 hours as per OHS&E Volume
2. This shall be followed by the detailed accident report as per OHS&E Volume 2 within
48 hours of the investigation completion.
4.5.3.1.7 Near misses and minor accidents should also be investigated by the Contractor as soon
as possible as they are signals that there are inadequacies in the safety management
system.
4.5.3.1.8 In case of fatal accidents, major injuries or dangerous occurrences the Engineer shall
conduct an independent investigation. The Contractor and his staff shall extend the
necessary co-operation.
4.5.3.2 Nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action
4.5.3.2.1 The Contractor shall conform to their internal procedures regarding nonconformity,
corrective action and preventive action. The Contractor shall be audited by the Engineer
for compliance with internal procedures.
4.5.3.2.2 Major and Minor non-conformances shall be raised by the Engineer as per the
Employer‘s Quality Management requirements and the OHS&E Audit criteria as defined
within OHS&E Section 1 of Volume 7.
4.5.3.2.3 Open non-conformances shall be reflected in the Contractor‘s Monthly Audit Report and
are subject to verification by the Engineer as detailed in OHS&E Section 1 of Volume 7.
Failure to successfully take corrective action and close out non-conformances will
impact negatively on the Contractor‘s total quarterly audit score 4.5.5.
4.5.3.2.4 Where non-conformances have been raised by an External Auditor against the BS EN
18001:2007 or ISO 14001 Standard, the Contractor shall produce and submit for review
within 2 weeks, an action plan of how and within what timescale shall the non-
conformance(s) be closed-out.
4.5.3.2.5 Where the corrective action and preventive action identifies new or changed hazards
or the need for new or changed controls, the proposed actions shall be taken through
178 | P a g e
the risk assessment process. The associated method statement and risk assessment
shall be amended and re-submitted to the Engineer for notice of no objection.
4.5.3.2.6 A change in work methodology shall be communicated to the workforce. Evidence of
such communications shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall also make random enquiries at site level to establish workforce
awareness.
4.5.4 Control of records
The Contractor shall maintain all OHS&E records in accordance with the Contactors ISO
4.5.4.1
9001 Quality Management System.
4.5.4.2
Records shall be made available to the Engineer upon request for the purpose of
incident investigation and management review.
4.5.5 Audit
4.5.5.1 Monthly Audit Report (MAR)
4.5.5.1.1 The Contractor shall undertake an internal monthly audit using the process and audit
report form (MAR) as prescribed within OHS&E Volume 2.
4.5.5.1.2 The Contractor shall submit the completed audit report no later than the 7th of each
month within the Contractor‘s monthly OHS&E Report. Failure to submit the monthly
audit report within the stipulated timescale shall result in the Engineer awarding a Zero
score for the month.
4.5.5.1.3 The audit scores awarded internally by the Contractor shall be subject to review and
verification by the Engineer. The Engineer shall substantiate the awarded scores
through making comparison with the results of a physical site inspection against the
model audit scores criteria as provided within OHS&E Section 1 of Volume 7.
4.5.5.1.4 The Engineer shall formally verify that the Contractor‘s self-awarded scores comply with
the audit scoring system and scoring criteria as defined within OHS&E Section 1 of
Volume 7.
Where discrepancy exists the Engineer shall provide supporting evidence (Photographic)
and instruct the Contractor to amend the initial awarded score. Following adjustment,
the monthly audit report shall be re-submitted to the Engineer within 3 days.
4.5.5.1.5 The Contractor shall be required to achieve a minimum 65% overall audit score on a
monthly basis.
179 | P a g e
4.5.5.1.6 Monthly audit scores shall be totalled over a 3 month (3 audit results) period. Where
the average score for three (3) months of audits is below 65%, then the OHS&E lump
sum item in the preliminaries section of Volume 8 pricing shall be withheld.
4.5.5.1.7 If non-payment of the lump sum item in preliminaries occurs as a result of failing to
achieve the required 65% over a single quarterly reporting period, the Engineer may
reinstate the lump sum item at his discretion should the Contractor achieve above 65%
for the following six (6) consecutive monthly OHS&E audits equating to two (2)
quarterly reporting periods. This repayment of the lump sum item shall not occur if the
quarterly aggregate is less than 50%.
4.5.5.1.8 In the event the Contractor fails to achieve a minimum of 65% on a monthly audit, an
action plan shall be submitted together with the audit results detailing the actions that
shall be taken within timescales.
4.5.5.1.9 Monthly audits shall be conducted prior to the sitting of the Contractor ‘s Safety
Committee and shall form part of the agenda.
4.5.5.2 External OHS&E Audit
4.5.5.2.1 Contractor is required to conduct external audits as per the BS EN 18001:2007 & ISO
14001:2004 international standards on a quarterly basis throughout the Contract
period or until the Contractor achieves accreditation to the standard whereby
monitoring timescales shall be instructed by the ISO accrediting body.
4.5.2.2. External audit and follow up audit reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
within 7 days of audit completion.
4.5.2.3 ShouldtheContractorfailtoundertakeexternalauditswithinthe3monthperiodthe Engineer shall
appoint an ISO accredited 3rd party agency to conduct the audit at the Contractor ‘s cost.
4.5.5.2.4 Where Major non-conformances with international standards are identified, a follow-
up external audit shall be carried out within 28 days for closing out of the non-
conformance(s). Follow-up audits shall continue on a 28 day rotation until such time as
Major non-conformances are closed to the satisfaction of the 3rd Party ISO accredited
auditor.
4.6 Management review

4.6.1 Management Reviews shall be undertaken annually by the Engineer in compliance with ISO
9001:2008.
4.6.2 The Management Review Report shall make recommendations for improvement.
4.6.3 The Contractor shall carry out a formal Management Review on an annual basis as a
minimum. The Management Review may form part of the review under the organisations
180 | P a g e
Quality Management System.

4.6.4 The Contractor shall submit Management Review Report to the Engineer within 7 days after
meeting completion together with the organisations new objectives.
181 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 18
DOCUMENT IDENTIFICATION AND NUMBERING
182 | P a g e
1. INTRODUCTION
Documentation identification is mandatory to achieve the Project in terms of Quality
Assurance. It will be made through a coding system, which principles are set in this
document.
The procedure shall ensure that all entities establish codes in a uniform and constant
manner. The aim is that a unified number, built on a one structure of reference, shall
be used for one document. This is applicable for all document of the project, issued or
received, so that they can be easily traceable. This way, communication between all
project parties shall be facilitated. Revisable and non-revisable documents are all
concerned.
2. PRINCIPLE OF THE IDENTIFICATION

Revisable documents
The codification of documents will be made through numbers and letters, concerning 5
separated fields:
SL NO Designation Explanation format
Goregaon Mulund
1 Package Link Road (GMRL) GMLR
(e.g GMLR)
2 Issuing entity To be completed LLL
A part of an activity
3 Discipline or period / phase of NNN
the project
Tender
Drawing(TR)Design
4 Document Type Drawing(DD), LL
Design Report(DR)
etc
Continuous number
5 Document Nb given by the “N”NNNNNN
CHRONO
Where:
• L is a letter,
• N a digit number,
• “N” a Package number
183 | P a g e
Format of Code include in document:
Document Document
Package Issuing entity Discipline Type Number
GMLR LLL NNN LL “N”NNNNNN
“Name Shape”
Each field of the coding name has to be separated by a dash “-“.
The electronic file name has to be the coding name, which will appear on the
document itself as well.
3. DEFINITION OF FIELDS
Package
Code Designation
GMLR0 General
Issuing entity
Code Designation
MCG MCGM
Can be 3 letter short form of Company
PMC
name
LLL 3 letter short form of Contractor
The list will have to be completed when contracts will be awarded.
184 | P a g e
3.3 Discipline
The “discipline” concerns a part of an activity in a period / phase of the project, in
coherence with the classification scheme.
Work stage on
Code Discipline / work on level 2 Level 3
level 1
All (to avoid or to
000
limit)
Contract
1XX
management
100 GC Proposal
110 GC and MCGM contract
120 GC internal contract
Project
2XX
management
200 Project organization
210 Minutes of Meeting
211 ER- MCGM meeting
212 ER internal general meeting
213 ER Tunnel related meeting
214 ER Viaduct related meeting
215 ER Road related Meeting
216 ER E&M Related Meeting

ER Tunnel Ventilation Related
217
Meeting
218
219
220 Quality Management & QC

230 Documents control
240 Risk management
Work stage
on level 1
250 Program cost control
260 Program schedule
Health and Safety
270
management
280 Correspondence
281 Incoming correspondence
185 | P a g e
Work stage on
level 1
282 Outgoing correspondence
290 Procurement and tender
Code Work stage on level 1 Discipline / work on level 2 Level 3

Project system
3XX
management
300 General System
320 RAM and Safety
330 Fire Engineering
340 Space proofing
350 Interface control

4XX Design and call for tenders
401 Alignment
410 Survey
411 Topographic
412 Utilities
413 Traffic Diversion
414 Geo-Technical
415 Building Survey

420 Civil-Tunnel
421 Underground structural
422 Underground architectural
423 Underground Civil

430 Civil-Viaduct
431 Elevated structural
432 Elevated architectural
433 Elevated Civil
440 Roads
441 Road Cross Sections
Signals and Road
442
Furniture
443
186 | P a g e
Discipline / work
Code Work stage on level 1 Level 3
on level 2
Culverts and
450
Underpasses
451
452
453
460 E&M
461
462
463
470 Tunnel Ventilation
471
472
473
480 Geotechnical
481
482
483
490 Reclamation
481
Discipline / work
Code Work stage on level 1 Level 3
on level 2
482
5XX Work supervision
Contracts and
500
administrative
Operation and
6XX
maintenance preparation
710 Operation
Definition of performances and
711
objectives/targets
712 Operation organization
720 Maintenance
721 System maintenance
722 Maintenance of fixed installations
723 Maintenance of structures
187 | P a g e
Document Type
The “Document Type” concerns a phase of the project, in coherence with the
classification scheme.
Generic codes
Code Document Designation
TD Tender Drawings
PD Preliminary Design Drawings
DD Detailed Design Drawings
CD Construction Reference Drawings
PR Preliminary Design Report
DR Detailed Design Report
LL Letter
3.4 Document Number

3.4.1 All documents except drawings
The number of the document is only a sequence number. To ensure that one unique
number is given for only one document, this number is given by the CHRONO file, which
can be found on SharePoint.
5. Drawings
For drawings, one range of numbers will be dedicated to the following:
188 | P a g e
From 100000 to 110000: GMLR

Within the range for each global package, a subdivision is made according to discipline.
Within each subdivision, the numbering system is managed by each global package, by the
mean of an Excel file. Someone in charge will be nominated for each global package and
sub discipline.
There will be a regular checking, to ensure that the numbering system is strictly followed.
4.3 Revision Index

The format allows for a combination of two items
1 a sequence number for internal revision within the issuing entity
2 a revision letter for each new release or submission outside the entity.
A change of the revision letter index is only possible after a control by the delegated
representative of the Engineer
L Revision letter Index, when issued to client / GC / …
(N) Internal revision number prior official submission
When the creation of the document is going on, after each modification the number is
incremented: A1, A2, A3... Once it is final, it becomes only A.
If some modifications are made after issuing, it becomes B1, B2, B3,... until second issue :
it becomes B.
Comments
This coding system is to be completed by few words, taken from the title or the subject of
the document, in order to better identify the document.
For instance, for this document, the name of the soft copy is:
GMLR0-GCC-230-000-0580-doc_identification_numbering
The document should bear the following identification:
Issuing
Package entity Discipline Area Document Nb.
GMLR0 GCC 230 000 0580
189 | P a g e
VOLUME 3
APPENDIX - 19
NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES
190 | P a g e
NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES
1. INTRODUCTION
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain No Objection Certificates (NOC) and prior
approvals from the concerned Statutory Authorities before start of relevant construction work.
NOCs from autonomous bodies may also be required.
The Employer has already obtained certain NOCs which are listed below. Some of the pending
NOCs are also listed below. The list NOCs obtained to date, and those listed as pending are not
exhaustive. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify and obtain all necessary NOCs
and Approvals that are required by the law. The Contractor shall scrupulously adhere to all
conditions and requirements specified by various Authorities in the NOCs / Approvals /
Minutes of Meetings. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all conditions or “action items”
with respect to the work which are required to be carried out by MCGM in these documents.
The supervision charges, if any levied by the statutory Authorities during the construction work
shall be borne by the Contractor.
After award of the Contract, deviations from the previously obtained NOCs, if found required,
for any reason, then all the required revised NOCs / Approvals/ Clearances shall be obtained by
the Contractor. The responsibility of obtaining such new NOCs / Approvals shall lie solely with
the Contractor.
2. LIST OF NOCS / COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVED FROM THE FOLLOWING AUTHORITIES

1. The Dy. Municipal Architect, MCGM on behalf of the Chairman, the Mumbai Heritage
Conservation Committee (MHCC).
2. The Flag Officer Commanding, Headquarters, Western Naval Command for undertaking
Geotechnical Investigations.
3. The Member Secretary, Maharashtra Coastal Zone Management Authority recommending
to the Planning Authority for conducting Geotechnical Investigations for Goregaon
Mulund Link Road.
4. The Deputy Conservator, Mumbai Port Trust for carrying out Geotechnical Investigations
for the proposed Goregaon
5. Mulund Link Road.
The above NOCs / Communications and Minutes of Meetings are attached to this
Appendix 19.
3. LIST OF NOCS PENDING WITH THE FOLLOWING AUTHORITIES.
1. The Joint Commissioner, Traffic Police Department.
2. The Tree Authority.
191 | P a g e
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code : GMLR/000
Volume 3
Employer’s Requirement


1|P a g e

Disclaimer


Appendices 1 to 19



2|P a g e
GOREGOAN MULUND LINK ROAD (GMLR)
VOLUME 3 - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
SECTION A EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS – GENERAL 4

SECTION B EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS - FUNCTIONAL 34
SECTION C EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS - DESIGN 48
SECTION D EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS – CONSTRUCTION 72
APPENDICES:
APPENDIX 1 - DRAWING LIST
APPENDIX 2A - WORK AREAS
APPENDIX 2B - CONTRACT KEY DATES AND COMPLETION DATE
APPENDIX 3 - PROJECT CALENDAR
APPENDIX 4 - PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX 5 - MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS
APPENDIX 6 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
APPENDIX 7 - DRAUGHTING AND CAD STANDARDS
APPENDIX 8 - WORKS AREAS & TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY
APPENDIX 9 - APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIER
APPENDIX 10 - CURVE AND GRADIENT DETAILS
APPENDIX 11 - UTILITIES
APPENDIX 12 - SITE ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER
APPENDIX 13 - CONTRACTOR'S SITE LABORATORY
APPENDIX 14 - EARTHING AND GRID
APPENDIX 15 - ADJACENT WORKS CONTRACTS
APPENDIX16 -DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
APPENDIX 17 - SAFETY HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANUAL
APPENDIX 18 - DOCUMENT AND IDENTIFICATION NUMBERING
APPENDIX 19 - NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES
3|P a g e
Volume 3
Section A
General


4|P a g e
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION A – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL

No. No.
A. GENERAL
A1. INTRODUCTION
A2. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
A3. RELEVANT DOCUMENTS
A4. PHASES (DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION)
A5. SPECIFICATIONS
A6. SPECIFICATIONS IN METRIC AND IMPERIAL UNITS
A7. WORKS PROGRAMME
A8. MONITORING OF PROGRESS
A9. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A10. SOFTWARE SUPPORT
A11. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
A12. SURVEY AND SITE INVESTIGATIONS
A13. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A14. PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (PMIS)
A15. CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT ORGANISATION
A16. TRAINING and TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER
A17. MAINTENANCE REPORT
A18. MEETINGS
ATTACHMENT A1: REQUIRED NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS & FORMAT

REQUIREMENTS
ATTACHMENT A2: TRANSMITTAL FORM
ATTACHMENT A3: COMMENT RESOLUTION SHEETS (CRS)
5|P a g e
A. GENERAL
A1. INTRODUCTION
1.0 Goregaon Mulund Link Road is about 4.75 km long 3+3-Lane road across the
Mumbai connecting Eastern Expressway to the Western Expressway via Sanjay
Gandhi National Park (SGNP) through tunnel section. The expected construction
period three years including the pre-tender activities, construction period and
Defect Liability Period.
2.0 The Scope of project mainly includes - The Contract shall include the Design,
Specification, Procurement, Supply, Construction, Commissioning, Testing, setting
to work, of a complete in Goregaon. It shall include all Civil, Electrical and
Mechanical works at the Site.
3.0 The significant parameters of the scope of the work involved in the contract are
provided in given table below
Work Parameter Unit Quantity
Length of the Tunnel Km 4.75
Diameter of the Tunnel m 14.5
Lanes 6 Lanes (3 + 3)
Total Estimated Cost INR 38,500 Million (Estimates may

vary on finalization of DBR)
This Volume 3, Employer’s Requirements is divided into four sections as follows:
(a) General: apply throughout the Contract (Section A).
(b) Functional: include the specific core requirements for the design and
performance of the Works (Section B).
(c) Design: apply in respect of responsibilities and obligations relating to the

design of the Permanent Works (Section C).
(d) Construction: apply in respect of responsibilities, obligations and other

requirements relating to the construction of the Works (Section D).
6|P a g e
A2. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

In addition to the words and expressions defined in the Conditions of Contract (CC), the
following words and expressions shall have the meaning assigned to them except where
the context otherwise requires:
"As-Built Drawings": means those drawings produced by the Contractor and endorsed
by it as true records of construction of the Permanent Works and which have been given
a Notice to Proceed by the Engineer.
“Baseline Programme” means the first Works Programme issued with a Notice to
Proceed by the Engineer that is used solely to assess the Contractor’s progress.
"Construction Phase": has the meaning identified in Clause A4 of the Employer’s

Requirements - General.
"Construction Reference Drawings": means those drawings referred to in ClauseC2

(8) of the Employer's Requirements Section C - Design in respect of which a Notice to
proceed has been issued.
"Construction Specification": means those parts of the Standard Outline Specification

which relate to construction.
“Designer" or “Lead Designer” means the designer (in-house or consulting firm)

appointed by the Contractor and Noticed by the Engineer to design the
Permanent/Temporary Works.
“Design Checker" or “Lead Design Checker" means a suitably qualified person(s) (in
house or consulting firm) appointed by the Contractor to check the design of Permanent/
Temporary Works.
"Definitive Design ": means the detailed design fully co-ordinated and interfaced,
complete in all respects based on the Noticed Preliminary Design.
"Design Manual": means the manual to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor
as part of the Definitive Design and as described in the Employer's Requirements –
Design (Section C).
"Design Phase": has the meaning identified in Clause A4 of the Employer’s

Requirements – General (Section A).
"Employer's Requirements” means the requirements set out in Volume-3 of these

Tender documents.
“Final Design” shall be the design calculations corresponding to the as-built drawings
and to be submitted together with the as-built drawings.
7|P a g e
“Key Personnel” means those persons named or positions so specified in A15-(9) of

the Contract or so designated by the Engineer at any time during the Contract.
“Monthly Progress Report” means the report referred to in the General Conditions of
Contract (GCC) Clause 4.21 to be prepared by the Contractor, in the form and detail
prescribed in Appendix-5 of this Volume 3 and submitted monthly to the Engineer.
"Notice": means a Notice to proceed, as given in writing by the Engineer; refer to

Attachment A3 for the general format for providing a Notice to proceed.
“Preliminary Design”: means the initial stage of the design phase adequately
explaining the design concept.
“Pricing Document and Payment Schedule” means Volume 8 of the Contract

document.
“Project” means the design, construction, commissioning, operation and maintenance of

the tunnel which is from Goregaon to Mulund, including all Civil and MEP Works.
“Quality Plan” means the quality plan, setting out the Contractor’s means of complying
with his obligations in relation to Quality Assurance provided and maintained in
accordance with GCC Clause 4.9, in the form and detail prescribed in Appendix 6 of
Volume 3 of the Contract.
“Safety Plan” means the safety plan setting out the Contractor’s means of complying
with his obligations in relation to safety provided and maintained in accordance with
GCC Clause 4.8, in the form and detail prescribed in Appendix 17 of Volume 3 of the
Contract.
"Specification" has the meaning identified in Clause A5 of the Employer’s Requirements

- General.
"Working Drawings": comprise the Construction Reference Drawings and such other
drawings and documents, such as bar bending schedules and manufacturing drawings,
as are necessary to amplify the Construction Reference Drawings for construction
purposes.
“Works Programme” means the time-scaled and resource-loaded critical path network,
updated from time to time in accordance with GCC Clause 4.14 and Appendix 4 of this
Volume 3 of the Contract, depicting activities, durations, sequences and inter
relationships that represent the Contractor’s work plan, work breakdown, schedule
structure for constructing and completing the Works, distributed over the Time for
Completion of the Contract, as given a Notice by the Engineer.
"Permanent Works" means the permanent works to be designed and executed in

accordance with the Contract.
8|P a g e
"Temporary Works" means all temporary works of every kind (other than Contractor's
Equipment) required for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
of any defects
A3. RELEVANT DOCUMENTS

The Design Criteria shall be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract
(GCC) and Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC), the Employer’s Requirements, the
Employer’s Drawings and any other document forming part of the Contract.
In the event of a conflict between the Employer’s Requirements and any Outline Design
or Construction Specification, the Employer’s Requirements shall prevail.
In the event of a conflict between any Outline Design or Construction Specification and
any other standards or specifications quoted, the requirements of the Outline Design or
Construction Specification shall prevail.
Notwithstanding the precedence specified above the Contractor shall always

immediately seek advice from the Engineer in the event of conflicts between
Specifications.
The order of precedence is:
• Employer’s Requirements
• Outline Design Specifications
• Outline Construction Specifications
• Indian and other International Standards referenced in this set of tender

documents
A4. PHASES (DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION)

(1) The Contractor shall execute the Works mainly in two phases, the Design Phase
and the Construction Phase. The Contractor shall also carry out the specified
works in commissioning and O & M Phases.
(2) The Design Phase shall commence upon the Commencement Date. This phase
shall include the preparation and submission of:
(a) The Preliminary Design;
(b) The Definitive Design;
(c) The Construction Reference Drawings.
(d) Construction Methodology
9|P a g e
The Design Phase will be completed upon the issue of Notice by the Engineer in
respect of the comprehensive and complete Construction Reference Drawings
Submission on the last set of the Permanent Works. The requirements for the
Preliminary Design, Definitive Design and Construction Reference Drawings are
stated in Clause C2 of the Employer's Requirements – Design (Section C).
(3) The Construction Phase for the whole or a part of the Permanent Works shall not
commence until the Notice issued by the Engineer in respect of the relevant
Construction Reference Drawings submission. Such Notice may be issued by the
Engineer in respect of a Construction Reference Drawing submission covering a
major and distinctive part of the Permanent Works.
The Construction Phase shall include the completion and submission of the Final
Design and the preparation and submission of the As-Built Drawings and other
records as specified.
(4) Notwithstanding Clause A4(4) above, for those elements identified under Clause
C2(6) of the Employer's Requirements – Design (Section C), the Construction
Phase may commence immediately upon the issue of the Notice in respect of the
Definitive Design Drawing in respect of each such element subject to availability
of the Site in accordance with the agreed programme. Construction Reference
Drawing in such case should follow within two weeks from the date of noticing
the Definitive Design Drawings.
(5) The Contractor shall commission, operate and maintain the facilities specified
in Clause 3.10 of Volume 1
A5. SPECIFICATIONS
In accordance with the provisions of these Employer's Requirements, the Outline Design
Specification contained in the Contract shall be developed during the design stage and
submitted as part of the Definitive Design Submission. When the Specification has
received a Notice to proceed from the Engineer it shall become the Particular
Specifications and shall take precedence over other Specifications for construction
purposes.
A6. SPECIFICATIONS IN METRIC AND IMPERIAL UNITS
(1) The Contract shall utilise the SI system of units. Codes and Standards in Imperial
units shall not be used unless the Engineer has given a Notice.
(2) Conversion between metric units and imperial units shall be in accordance with
the relevant Indian Standards.
10 | P a g e
A7. WORKS PROGRAMME

(1) The Key Dates are listed in Appendix 2B to these Employer's Requirements.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit his Works Programme and three month
rolling programmes in accordance with the detailed requirements contained in
Appendices 3 & 4 to these Employer's Requirements.
In compiling the Works Programme and in all subsequent updating and reporting,
the Contractor shall make provision for the time required for co-ordinating and
completing the design, testing, commissioning and integrated testing of the Works,
including, inter alia, design co-ordination periods during which the Contractor shall
co-ordinate his design with those of Project and other Interfacing Contractors, the
assessment procedures, determining and complying with the requirements of all
Government Departments and all others whose consent, permissions, authority or
license is required prior to the execution of any work.
(3) The Works Programme shall take full account of the Design Submission
programme.
(4) The Employer and the Engineer shall designate a maximum five numbers of their
computers for installation, by the Contractor, of software programmes that the
Contractor intends to use for the design, programming, production of drawings, etc.
All software shall be originals and licensed by the manufacturer and issued and
installed at the Contractor’s cost.
A8. MONITORING OF PROGRESS

(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six copies of a Monthly Progress Report
(MPR), as described in Appendix 5 of these Employer's Requirements, describing
the progress and current status of the Works. The MPR shall address the matters set
out in the Works Programme.
(2) The MPR shall be submitted by the last day of each calendar month. It shall account
for all works actually performed from the twenty sixth day of the previous month
and up to the twenty fifth day of the current month. The processing of the Interim
Payment Certificate (IPC) will only commence after the receipt of the MPR on the
due date. Late receipt of MPR will delay the processing of the IPC.
(3) The MPR shall be divided into two sections. The first section shall cover progress
made and current status relating to design, and the second section shall cover
progress made and current status relating to construction.
11 | P a g e
(4) The MPR shall be signed by the following Key Staff; Project Manager, QA Manager,
Safety Manager, and the Engineering Manager (Design), who by signing the MPR
shall certify that all information contained in the MPR, as relating to their section of
the Works, has been accepted and verified by each signatory as being accurate,
honest, true and meets the requirements of the Contract.
(5) A monthly meeting to monitor the progress of the project shall be convened by the
Engineer or his representatives. The Employer may also be present in the meeting.
Refer to Clause A18 of this Employer’s Requirements Volume 3.
(6) The Employer / the Engineer shall arrange Quarterly Review Meetings for the
Project which the Contractor shall attend and participate in as required. Refer to
Clause A18 of this Employer’s Requirements Volume 3.
A9. QUALITY ASSURANCE

The Contractor shall establish and maintain a Quality Assurance System in accordance
with Appendix 6 of these Employer's Requirements for design and construction
procedures and the interfaces between them. This Quality Assurance System shall be
applied without prejudice to, or without in any way limiting, any Quality Assurance
Systems that the Contractor already maintains.
A10. SOFTWARE SUPPORT

General
(1) The Contractor shall provide copies of all computer programs and full support to the
Employer/Engineer for all computer programs used/proposed to be used, by the
Contractor under the Contract, also refer to Clause A7(4) of these Employer’s
Requirements Section
A - General.
(2) The Contractor shall submit a software support plan at least 90 days before
commencement of software installation. This plan shall require the Contractor to
provide all changes, bug fixes, updates, modifications, amendments, and new
versions of the program as directed by the General Consultant/ Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, manuals and training as necessary
for the Employer / Engineer to use, maintain and re-configure all of the software
provided under the Contract.
(4) The Contractor shall submit all new versions to the Engineer for a Notice at least 2
weeks prior to their installation. New Versions of any program shall not result in any
non-conformance with the Specification or degrade the operation of the System. The
Contractor shall:
12 | P a g e
▪ Ensure that all new versions are fully tested and validated on the
simulation and development system prior to installation.
▪ Ensure that all new versions are fully tested and commissioned once
installed on the Site.
▪ Deliver to the Employer and the Engineer any new version, together with
the updated Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
(5) The Engineer shall not be obliged to use any new version and that shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his obligations. Any effect upon the performance or
operation of the computer-controlled system that may be caused by a new version
shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention including updating the files to suit the
new version
Software Obligations
(6) Within 14 days of the installation of any software by the the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for retention by the Employer and the Engineer, two backup copies
of the software, which shall include, without limitation:
▪ All licenses in favour of the Employer for their use.
▪ all source and executable codes;
▪ All design documentation relating to the software; and
▪ Any specified development tools required for maintenance of the software,

including, but not limited to, editors, compilers and linkers.
Error Correction
(7) When a fault is discovered within delivered software or documentation, the

Contractor shall take necessary steps to rectify errors or faults at the earliest.
(8) The Contractor shall provide written details as to the nature of the proposed
correction to the Engineer.
(9) The Contractor shall notify the Employer promptly of any fixes or patches that are
available to correct or patch faults.
(10)The Contractor shall detail any effect such fixes or patches are expected to have
upon the applications.
Training
(11)The Contractor shall provide training for the Employer’s/ Engineer’s staff to enable
them to make proper use of any software and training for any new versions.
13 | P a g e
A11. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT

The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his own design, technical,
programming and construction activities and for coordinating these with the design,
technical, programming and construction activities of other Project Contractors, Utility
Agencies, Statutory Authorities, Public Service Providers, Developers, Consultants and
other Contractors whether or not specifically mentioned in the Contract, that may be
working on or adjacent to the site in accordance with the procedures detailed in
Appendix 16 of this Employer’s Requirements. This coordination is essential in order to
minimise abortive works, and to ensure that the project progress in accordance with
schedule and to achieve fully coordinated construction of the facilities. Furthermore, the
contractor should be aware that, due to the needs of interfacing works, revisions to his
designs may be necessary during detailed design and construction stages.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to liaise, coordinate and manage with their

Subcontractors. However, the Engineer will oversee, monitor and provide direction with
respect to Contractor’s interface with the MEP Sub contractor. Interface with Traffic
Management Control System (TMCS) Contractor shall be duly carried out. The Engineer
shall oversee, monitor, provide direction and clarification where required, attends
Interface meetings, in conjunction with the Contractor and other Interfacing Parties. The
Contractor shall note that the Employer may engage other Contractors, Consultants, etc.
from time to time with whom the Contractor shall have to similarly co-ordinate. Such co-
ordination responsibilities of the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the
following;
a) To provide all information reasonably required by the Interfacing Contractors in a

timely and professional manner to allow them to proceed with their Design and
construction activities, and specifically to meet their contractual obligations.
b) To ensure that the Contractor’s requirements are provided to all other Interfacing
Contractors before the cut off dates identified in the Interface Management Plan
(IMP) to be developed by the Contractor.
c) To obtain from the Interfacing Contractors information reasonably required to

enable the Contractor to meet the Construction Key Dates as identified in Appendix
2B of this Employer’s Requirements.
d) Where the execution of the Work of the Interfacing Contractors depends upon the
site access, management or information to be given to them by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall provide to such Interfacing Contractors the services or correct, and
accurate information required to enable them to meet their programme or construct
their work.
14 | P a g e
e) To co-ordinate access and delivery routes and ensure that all provisions for access
and delivery of plant are co-ordinated with and reflected in the Interfacing
Contractor’s Delivery Route Drawings. The Interfacing Contractor shall ensure that
all plants are delivered at the time agreed to allow openings left in the structure for
such delivery to be sealed in accordance with the Contractor’s programme. To co-
ordinate with the Interfacing Contractors on attendance.
f) To attend co-ordination meetings convened by the Engineer with the Interfacing
Contractors. The Contractor shall conduct separate meetings with the Interfacing
Contractors as necessary to clarify particular aspects of the interfacing
requirements of the Works. The party who convenes the meeting shall prepare
minutes by recording all matters discussed and agreed at the meeting.
i) To ensure a clear flow and exchange of information, direction and timings, copies of
all correspondence, drawings, meeting minutes, programmes, etc. relating to the
Contractor’s co-ordination with all of the Interfacing Contractors shall be issued to
all concerned parties; four (4) copies shall be issued to the Engineer no later than
three (3) calendar days from the date of such correspondence and meetings.
j) The Contractor shall, in carrying out his co-ordination responsibilities, raise in good
time, and provide sufficient information for the Engineer to decide on, any
disagreement between the Contractor and Interfacing Contractors as to the extent of
services or information required to pass between them. If such disagreement cannot
be resolved by the Contractors, despite the Contractor taking all reasonable efforts,
then the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
k) Where an Interfacing Contract has yet to be awarded the Contractor shall proceed
with the co-ordination activities with the Engineer until such time when the
Interfacing Contractor is available. The Contractor shall provide the Interfacing
Contractor with all information and documents necessary to enable the Interfacing
Contractor to follow on and proceed with their co-ordination.
l) The Contractor has to include in his Interface Management Plan, as required in

Appendix 16, the latest dates for the Contractor to pass information to the Interfacing
Contractors in order for them to complete their design submissions to the Engineer.
Any claims of additional costs by the Interfacing Contractors as a result of the
Contractor’s failure in adhering to these dates shall be borne by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall note that the information exchange is an iterative process requiring
the exchange and updating of information at the earliest opportunity and shall be
carried out on a regular and progressive basis so that the process is completed for
each design stage by the cut off dates.
15 | P a g e
Dedicated Co-ordination Team
l) The Contractor shall establish a dedicated co-ordination team, led by a Chief

Interface Co-ordinator permanently stationed in Mumbai reporting to the
Contractor’s Project Manager or Representative. The primary function of the team is
to provide a vital link between the Contractor’s design and construction teams and
the Interfacing Contractors.
m) The complexity of the Project and the importance of ensuring that work is executed
within time limitations require detailed programming and monitoring of progress so
that early programme adjustments can be made in order to minimize the effects of
potential delays.
n) The Chief Interface Co-ordinator in conjunction with the Interfacing Contractors

shall identify necessary provisions in the Works for plant, equipment and facilities of
the Interfacing Contractors. These provisions shall be given due allowance by the
Contractor in his design, and construction, of the Works.
o) During the course of the Contract, information will be obtained in a number of ways.
These may include direct inspection, regular site meetings, the obtaining of progress
reports and the use of turnaround documents to obtain design and programme data.
Turnaround documents shall be issued to the Interfacing Contractors, copied to the
Engineer, to be returned by the receiving party within a set time period, giving the
current positions on their programme.
Design Interface
p) The information cut off dates in the Interface Management Plan developed by the
Contractor will be critical for the timely completion of the Project. The dates shall be
determined to create a time frame during which design interface with the Interfacing
Contractors on the Project has to be completed in order for the construction interface
to follow. The Contractor shall commence design interface with the Interfacing
Contractors as soon as he has been notified by the Engineer that such Interfacing
Contract(s) has been awarded. In the case of Utility Agencies and other Statutory
Authorities, interface shall commence as soon as possible. Where no design interface
date has been established, whether because the Interfacing Contractor has not been
identified, or for whatever reason, the Contractor shall liaise with such Interfacing
Contractor(s) as soon as they have been awarded.
q) The Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Contract gather all
necessary information and develop his design to a level where meaningful
interaction can take place as soon as the Interfacing Contractors are available. The
Contractor shall submit with each of his Design Submissions a joint statement from
16 | P a g e
the Contractor and the relevant Interfacing Contractors confirming that design co-
ordination has been completed and that they have jointly reviewed the appropriate
document to ensure that a consistent design is being presented.
r) The design interface is an iterative process requiring regular exchange and updating
of interfacing information. The Contractor shall ensure that the information he
requires from the Interfacing Contractors is made known at the outset of each design
interface, and vice versa, so that information can be provided in time for the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors to complete their designs to meet their
various design submission dates.
Construction Interface
s) Construction Interface will be necessary throughout the duration of the Works
commencing from the time the Contractor mobilises on site, to the completion of the
Works. Construction interface will overlap design interface, involving cast in and
buried items such as pipes for electrical and mechanical services, supports, brackets,
plinths, ducts, service buildings, openings, cableways, trenches, etc. Those are to be
incorporated at the early stage of the construction up to provision of attendance
during testing and commissioning stage.
t) The Contractor shall ensure that there is no interference with the Works of the
Interfacing Contractors and shall maintain close co-ordination with them to ensure
that his work progresses in a smooth and orderly manner. The Contractor shall carry
out and complete the Works, or part thereof, in such order as may be Noticed by the
Engineer or in such order as may be requested by the Engineer from time to time.
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided, be liable for and shall indemnify the
Employer against all costs, charges, expenses and the like resulting from the failure
of the Contractor to co-ordinate the Works as specified.
A12. SURVEY AND SITE INVESTIGATIONS

(1) The datum used for the Contract shall be Mean Sea Level Datum.
(2) The co-ordinates used for the Contract shall be based on a local coordinate system
as defined by the traverse reference points shown in the Employer’s Drawings.
(3) The Contractor shall carry out all further site investigations, including surveys,
necessary for the design of the Permanent Works and to enable the determination
of the methods of construction and the nature, extent and design of the Temporary
Works.
17 | P a g e
A13. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

Mumbai experiences tropical wet and dry climate with high humidity and heavy rainfall
during the monsoon season. The designs and plans for the Works must take this into
account. The Contractor shall obtain information on the climatic conditions in Mumbai,
such as temperature, rain fall, wind, sunshine, relative humidity etc. from the
Meteorological Department and/or other Authorities and shall make full provision for
the effects of the local weather conditions in his planning, design programming and
execution of the Works.
The impact of flooding, storm surge, tsunami, wave energy, tidal behaviour etc. shall all
be considered in the design. The necessary data shall be collected from the authorized
sources. Tunnel entry should be protected with tsunami waves, storm surge, run off etc.
and anti-flooding.
A14. PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (PMIS)

The Contractor shall devise and utilize a PMIS such that all documents generated by the
Contractor can be transmitted to the Employer/ Engineer by electronic means (and vice
versa) and that all documents generated by either party are electronically captured at
the point of origin and can be reproduced later, electronically and in hard copy. A similar
link shall also be provided among the Engineer’s office, GC’s and PMC’s Offices by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall install such PMIS system within 30 days of the award of
work to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The number and format of the required document submissions is detailed in Attachment
A1 to this Section A. The Transmittal Form is given in Attachment A2 to this Section A
and the Document Submission Report, for the obtaining of a Notice to proceed from the
Engineer, is given in Attachment A3 to this Section A.
A15. CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT ORGANISATION

(1) The Contractor shall employ on this Project, a competent team of Managers,
Engineers, Technical staff etc. so as to complete the work satisfactorily as per the
various requirements of the Contract.
A site control room with “round the clock” radio communication or telephone switch
board links with all safety offices, works sites, design offices, site offices, batching
plants, casting yards, workshops, fabrication yard, off site offices, laboratories etc.
(2) Engineer’s site offices, testing labs etc. shall be maintained and manned 24 hours a
day, seven days a week. Residence and mobile telephone numbers of the
Contractor’s Senior Project team members shall also be linked with the control
18 | P a g e
room. Vehicles for emergency use should be on stand-by at the control room around
the clock.
(3) The designations of the various project organizations team members shall be subject
to a Notice from the Engineer before adoption so as to avoid any duplication of the
designations with those of the Employer or the Engineer.
(4) The Contractor shall submit his Staffing Proposal to the Engineer for a Notice, which
shall include:
1. The Contractor’s proposed Staff Organization showing in chart form with the
names of his proposed staff for each position;
2. CVs of the Contractor’s proposed Key Staff, with adequate details and copies of
documentary proof on the qualification and experience (with contract titles,
position held and dates) of each staff to substantiate that the proposed staff is
competent for undertaking the proposed position;
3. The scope of responsibilities of each staff and the reporting lines between
individual staff;
4. The documents that each staff is authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor.
(5) The Staff Organization shall cover the Contractor’s Key Staff and Specially Required
Staff as specified in Sub-clauses A15(8), (9) & (10) below, as well as other working-
level staff, with a narrative of the authorities and responsibilities of each staff
member in directing execution of the Works on Site, or in deciding technical details
of the Contractor’s proposals.
(6) The Contractor shall note that financial penalties can be levied for the failure to
employ the Key Staff required by this Clause, refer to Volume 8 for details.
(7) The Contractor’s Staffing Proposal shall include the Key Staff proposed in their
Tender submission, unless it is necessary to propose better qualified and more
experienced staff in order to meet the requirements of the Contract, in which case
the Contractor shall include in the Staffing Proposal an explanation for each change
in Key Staff. Any such change in Key Staff shall require a Notice from the Engineer.
(8) Each member in the Contractor’s Staffing Proposal, including the Key Staff and
the Specially Required Staff, shall be allocated to this Contract on a full-time basis on
Site, until the activities that he is responsible for have already been completed or
have to be carried out off-site with the consent of the Engineer .Removals and/or
Replacement of Key Staff and the Specially Required Staff shall be in accordance with
the following condition/criteria:
19 | P a g e
(a) Except as the Employer may otherwise agree, no changes shall be made in the Key
Staff and/or the Specially Required Staff. If, for any reason beyond the reasonable
control of the Contractor, such as retirement, death, medical incapacity, among
others, it becomes necessary to replace any of the Key Staff and/or the Specially
Required Staff, the Contractor shall provide replacement Staff with equivalent or
better qualification and experience.
(b) If the Employer finds that any of the staff have:

(i) committed serious misconduct or have been charged with having
committed a criminal action, or
(ii) have reasonable cause to be dissatisfied with the performance of any of the
staff, then the Contractor shall, at the Employer’s written request
specifying the grounds thereof, provide replacement Staff with
qualifications and experience acceptable to the Employer/Engineer within
stipulated time.
(c) The Contractor shall have no claim for additional costs arising out of or
incidental to any removal and/or replacement of staff.
(d) The Contractor shall note that financial penalties can be levied every time a Key
Staff is replaced, refer to Volume 8 for details.
(9) Key Staff:

The Contractor’s Staffing Proposal shall include as a minimum the following Key Staff:
i. Project Manager, who shall be the Contractor’s Representative as required

in GCC clause 4.3.
ii. Construction Manager (Road Tunnel)
iii. Construction Manager (Road Tunnel)
iv. Construction Manager (Tunnel & Highways)
v. Chief Interface Co-Ordinator.
vi. Engineering Manager (Lead Designer and Technical Support).
vii. Engineering Manager (Lead Design Checker).
viii. Quality Assurance Manager.
ix. Construction Quality Control Manager.
x. Safety Manager.
xi. Senior Electrical Engineer

20 | P a g e
xii. Senior Mechanical Engineer
(b) The Project Manager shall be authorized to represent the Contractor on all
aspects under the Contract and shall bear overall responsibility for the
management, coordination and progress of the Contract.
(c) The minimum qualification and experience required for Key Staff are listed
below:
S. Key Personnel Educational Experience in Assignments

No. Qualification
Minimum 20 years of
professional experience.
Minimum 15 years of
experience in planning, design,
construction supervision,
contract Management and
Degree in Civil Execution of Road Tunnel.
Engineering Should have been Project
preferably with post- Manager/
graduation degree in Team Leader for a minimum of
1. Project Manager Tunnel /Highway 10 years working on at least
Engineering three projects. Should have
experience in road construction
on in minimum two Countries.
(excluding India).
Single project costing INR
1500.
crores(preferred) OR Two
projects costing INR 1500
crores.
Minimum 20 years of
Minimum 15 years’ experience
in the Construction of Road
Tunnel.
Degree in Civil Should have been a team leader
Engineering with post- for road Tunnel projects for at
2. Tunnel Engineer graduation degree least 10 years and should have
Tunnel/Highway worked in at least three projects
Engineering in minimum two countries
(excluding India).
Single project costing INR 1500
crores (preferred) OR Two
projects costing INR 1500
Crores
Minimum 20 years of
Degree in Civil professional experience.
Construction Engineering and post-
3. Manager graduation degree in in the Road Tunnel
(Tunnel) Tunnel/Highway
Engineering Should have been a team leader
in the Road Tunnel Project
21 | P a g e
have handled at least three

projects, in minimum two
countries.
crores (preferred) OR Two
projects costing INR600
Minimum 20 years of
Minimum 15 years’
experience in Construction of
Degree in Civil Road Tunnel Project.
Construction Engineering with post-
4. Manager graduation degree in Should have been a team leader
(Roads) Highway/Transportation for Tunnel Construction works
Engineering for 10 years.
crores (preferred) OR project
costing INR 300 crores in two
projects.

in interface coordination and
management of tunnel,
interchanges, MEP works,
traffic and utility diversions.
Degree in Civil Should have experience in at
Chief Interface
5. /Mechanical/ Electrical least three similar projects in
Coordinator Engineering minimum two countries.
crores (preferred) OR project
costing INR 1000 crores in two
projects.
Minimum 20 years of
professional experience
Engineering in Tunnel /Highway
Manager (Lead Degree in Civil
Designer and Engineering and post- Should have experience in
6. Tunnel Engineering design.
Designer and graduation degree in
Technical Geotechnical/Structural Should have adequate
Support). experience in design with the
aid of latest design software’s
like SAP, MIDAS, STAAD, PLXIS,
ANSYS etc.
Minimum 25 years of

in the design of Tunnels, of
Degree in Civil which at least ten (10) years’
Engineering Engineering with post- experience in design project(s)
that included works of a similar
7. Manager (Lead graduation degree in nature.
Design Checker) Structural/Geo technical
Engineering Should have adequate
experience in design with the
aid of latest design software like
SAP, MIDAS, STAD, PLAXIS,
ANSYS
22 | P a g e
Minimum 10 years’
experience in administering
Quality Assurance programs for
tunnel projects.
Quality Degree in Civil Should be knowledgeable of, and
8. Assurance Engineering /Degree in have experience in, the
Manager Equivalent development and application of
ISO 9001 standards for the
design and construction of civil
works primarily comprises of
Tunnel engineering works.
Minimum 15 years of
professional
Construction Minimum 10 years’ experience
Degree in Civil
9. Quality Control in administering Quality
Engineering
Manager Controlling Program for civil
works primarily comprises of
Tunnel Engineering project.
Minimum 15 years of
Should have minimum fifteen
(15) years’ experience in
managing the construction of
underground civil works with at
least 10 years’ experience in
Degree in Civil administering safety programs
10. Safety Manager Engineering/Degree in assurance of Tunnel and Civil
Equivalent work of similar scope.
The safety Manager shall be
knowledgeable of, and have
experience in, the development
and application of ISO 9001 and
OHSAS standards for the
construction of civil works.
Degree in Civil
Engineering preferably Minimum 15 years of
Sr. Highway with post-graduation Professional experience.
11. Should have minimum 10 years’
Engineer degree in experience in the construction
Highway/Transportation of tunnel works.
Engineering.
Minimum 15 years of
professional experiences.
Degree in Electrical
Sr. Electrical Engineering preferably
12. Should have minimum 10 years
Engineer with post- graduation
of experience in the electrical
degree in Control system
works associated with Tunnel
projects.
Minimum 15 years of
Should have minimum 10 years’
Sr. Mechanical Degree in Mechanical
13. experience in the Mechanical
Engineer Engineering
works associated with Tunnel
Projects.
Degree in Civil Minimum 15 years of

Environment Engineering professional experience in Road
14
Engineer Master in Environment Tunnel/Highway projects.
Engineering
23 | P a g e
Degree in Minimum 15 years of

Sociology/Economics professional experience in Road
15 Social Expert
Master in Tunnel/Highway projects.
Sociology/Economies
(d) The Project Manager, Construction Managers and Engineering Managers shall be assisted
by engineers and foremen of adequate number and experience for ensuring that the Works
will meet the requirements of the Contract from quality, progress, safety and environmental
points of view. Without prejudice to the generality of the above, the Contractor’s Staffing
Proposal shall also include Specially Required Staff as stipulated in Sub-Clause A15(10)
below.
(10) Specially Required Staff
The Construction Managers shall be assisted by the following staff:
(i) Tunnel Engineer is responsible for the construction of the Tunnel, and
shall have the following minimum qualification and experience:
▪ University degree in civil/structural engineering;
▪ 5 years’ experience in construction of Road Tunnel.
(ii) Road Construction Engineer
▪ University Degree in Tunnel /geotechnical/civil Engineering or equivalent

acceptable to the Engineer;
▪ 5 year’s experiences in road projects involving flexible pavement, rigid

pavement and wearing coarse, and traffic management and traffic diversion
works.
(iii) Utilities and Traffic Diversion Engineer
▪ University degree in Civil engineering or equivalent acceptable to the

Engineer;
▪ 5 years of relevant experience in utility diversion, traffic management and

traffic diversion.
(iv) Environment Engineer
▪ University degree in Civil engineering with specialization in environment

engineering acceptable to the Engineer
▪ 5 years of relevant experience in environment related works including

preparation of environment impact assessment reports.
A16. TRAINING and TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER

The Contractor shall ensure that all local Contractors and Sub-contractors engaged in the works
are given training, guidance and the necessary opportunity for transfer of technology in various
24 | P a g e
areas of construction such as, control of ground settlements, Seepage, drainage, instrumentation,
safety, quality assurance, interface management, etc.
A17. MAINTENANCE REPORT

(1) The Maintenance Report shall be submitted as part of the Definitive Design and shall include
full details of the long-term inspection and maintenance operations for each major component
of bridges, interchanges, road on reclamation, water supply, drainage and sewerage.
(2) The Contractor shall provide inspection and maintenance manuals for the civil, structural and
building works and services covering the following areas: -
▪ Tunnel Method,
▪ Ground Improvement Techniques
▪ Road Works and Drainage works
(3) For each area an inspection checklist shall be supplied giving inspection frequency, items to be
inspected, criteria for acceptance, criteria for remedial works and details of the remedial
works, including proposed materials and method statements. The recommended regular
maintenance regime of each area shall also be given including cleaning methods and frequency
for different surfaces; removal of leakage mud /material;
(4) All instruments necessary to carry out the inspections and monitoring that are identified in
the report shall be provided by the Contractor.
(5) Maintenance of MEP works
(6) A long-term monitoring regime shall also be included covering items such as :
▪ Tunnel water leakage

▪ Differential movement at tunnel/Cut and Cover Tunnel junctions or other areas
identified in the design
A18. MEETINGS
A18.1 General
The Contractor shall participate in meetings as indicated in this section. The Engineer / G.C.
shall record minutes of all meetings and distribute them within 5 days of the meeting.
Meetings will be chaired by the Engineer.
A18.2 Initial Contract Meeting
The Engineer / GC shall arrange an initial meeting within seven (7) days following the issue by the
Employer of the Letter of Acceptance. The meeting shall take place at a location in Mumbai, India,
determined by the Engineer.
The agenda of the meeting shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
25 | P a g e
(a) Arrangements to be made for execution of the Contract Agreement;
(b) Submission of bonds, guarantees, undertakings, warranties, insurance policies,

certificates, etc. if not already provided;
(c) Arrival of Key Staff and plant;
(d) Planned activities for the first 30 days and 60 days after the Commencement Date; and
(e) Other items as may be advised by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be represented by all appointed Key Staff.
A18.3 Site Mobilization Meeting
The Engineer shall arrange a meeting at the Engineer’s office prior to the Contractor being given
possession of any part of the Site. The agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Proposed use of the Site by the Contractor;
(b) Employer’s Requirements;
(c) Temporary utilities and facilities;
(d) Mapping and diversion of existing utilities;
(e) Traffic diversion;
(f) Pre-conditional surveys including structural audit of existing buildings and structures in
the vicinity of the alignment, with reports;
(g) Security and “housekeeping”;
(h) Land and setting-out survey;
(i) Programme for establishing work areas, temporary facilities, and Site accommodation for
the Engineer;
(j) Temporary Works; and
(k) Contractor’s initial Three Month Rolling Programme.
(l) Procurement and delivery dates for major items of plant.
(m) Material transportation
The Contractor’s Key Staff, and those with responsibility for activities on the agenda, shall
attend.
A18.4 Quarterly Review Meetings
Quarterly Review Meetings shall be arranged at a time and venue determined by the Employer/
the Engineer to generally review progress and outstanding issues in regard to the Contract and
the Project. They shall be attended by the Project Manager and supervisory board members of the
26 | P a g e
Contractor and MEP Subcontractor. The agenda for these meetings will be advised by the
Employer/ the Engineer, at least 5 days in advance. The Engineer or his designated representative
will chair the meeting and prepare and distribute the minutes.
Attendance shall be limited to the Contractor’s Key Staff Nos. (i) to (vii) as relevant, as listed in
Clause A15 (9) (a) of this Section A of Volume 3.
A18.5 Monthly Progress Meetings
Monthly Progress Meetings shall be held throughout the progress of the Works. These meetings
shall normally be held at the Engineer’s office on the first Monday of the month, following receipt
of the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report. Contractor’s Key Staff shall attend the Progress
meetings. The Engineer shall chair progress meetings and prepare and distribute the minutes. The
Engineer shall prepare and distribute the agenda at least 1 day prior to the meeting which may
include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Confirmation of minutes of the previous meeting and matters arising there from;
(b) Review of design work progress;
(c) Review of construction work progress;
(d) Field observations, problems and decisions;
(e) Identification of issues affecting planned progress;
(f) Planned activities for the coming period;
(g) Quality assurance;
(h) Safety;
(i) Interface coordination;
(j) Status of variations, if any;
(k) Design/construction coordination.
The Contractor’s Project Manager must attend the Monthly progress meetings; other attendance
shall be limited to the Contractor’s Key Staff Nos. (ii) to (vii) as relevant, as listed in Clause A15
(9) (a) of this Section A.
A18.6 Weekly Site Meetings
Weekly meetings shall be held on Site to discuss detailed technical and construction issues plus
the status of the Contractor’s submittals. These meetings shall be chaired by the Engineer or his
designated representative, who shall also prepare and distribute the minutes. The Contractor’s
Key Staff shall attend this meeting with the exception of the Project Manager whose attendance is
optional. Sub-Contractor’s representatives shall also attend these meetings when requested to do
so by the Engineer.
27 | P a g e
A18.7 Other Meetings
The Contractor’s Key Staff, superintendents and Sub-Contractor’s representatives shall attend
other meetings as required with the Engineer.
28 | P a g e
ATTACHMENT
A1
REQUIRED NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS & FORMAT REQUIREMENTS
No. of
Submittal A1 A3 A4 Electronic Reference

Copies
Initial Programme
and Works
Programme plus
supporting 6 2
information and
narrative
Monthly Programme
Update 6 2
Three Month Rolling

Programme 6 2
Three Week Rolling

Programme 6 2
Monthly Progress
Report 6 2
Preliminary and
Definitive Designs 2 4 2
Design Reports 6 2
Construction
Reference Drawings 6 2 2
Works Drawings 3 3 2
Method Statements 6 2
Interface
Management Plan 6 2
As built drawings 8 2
Materials
Submissions
6 2
(documentation)
Operation and
Maintenance
6 2
Manuals
E&M Submissions 6 2
Quality Plan 6 2
29 | P a g e
Quality Control
Register 4 2
Reports of Quarterly
Quality Audits 4 2
Materials and
Workmanship Test
6 2
Results/Reports
Safety Plan 6 2
Environmental Plan 6 2
Traffic Management
Submissions 6 2
Investigation and
survey reports. 6 2
Monitoring,
protection and
replacement 6 2
proposal reports.
As
All other submittals 6 6 6 2
applicable
Notes:
i) In case of any contradiction between the text and this table then the text shall prevail,
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
ii) Drawings to support A4 text documents shall be of A3 size.
iii) PMIS system shall be installed within 30 days of the commencement of work and fully
operable within three months from the commencement of work. After which at the
discretion of the Engineer the number of paper copies to be submitted may be reviewed,
except for A1 size drawings.
30 | P a g e
Contractor’s DOCUMENT
Logo TRANSMITTAL Address
(Example)
To: Engineer
Attention: Mr.- XXXXXXX
Transmittal
Project: number: Sheet No.
GOREGOAN MULUND LINK ROAD (GMLR) -

MCS1-PMC-TN-XX
1 of 1
Component: Day dd
Mont m
h m
Bridge Year yy
S- Document-Drawing Descript
N No- ion Revision
Medium of Drawings: Size Number of Copies
A
1
Printed Paper Tracing
A
3
Photo A
Elect-Copy Copy 4
31 | P a g e
Purpose of Issuance:
FI - For Information FA - For Approval FR – For Record

FT - For Tender FC - For Construction P - Preliminary
FA
FR – For Review AB - As Built R – Replacement
Remarks:
Issued by: Received by: Date : dd-mm-

yyyy
XXXX
Project Manager
XXXX Contractor
Cc: Client – 1 Hard Copy
GC – 1 Hard Copy + 1 Soft copy
Encl: 1 Hard Copy+ 1 Soft Copy
Prepared by – initial
32 | P a g e
ATTACHMENT A3
COMMENT RESOLUTION SHEETS (CRS)
Engineer may change the format if required.
33 | P a g e
Volume 3
Section B
Functional


34 | P a g e
SECTION B- EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS -FUNCTIONAL

No. No.
B. OBJECTIVE
B1. GENERAL
B2. SCOPE OF WORKS
B3. ALIGNMENT
B4. CLEARANCES
B5. DESIGN LIFE
B6. DURABILITY AND MAINTENANCE
B7. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
B8. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM
B9. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
B10. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF PUMPING INSTALLATIONS
B11. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT AND
B12. CONTROL
SYSTEM
B13. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF RECLAMATION & SEAWALL
B14. AESTHETICS
B15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
B16. URBAN PLANNING FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
B17. SAFETY AND SECURITY
B18. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
B19. SAFETY CERTIFICATION
B20. STANDARDS
35 | P a g e
EMPLOYER'S REQUIREMENTS – FUNCTIONAL
B. OBJECTIVE
The objective of the Contract is the design, construction completion, testing and
commissioning of the permanent works by the Contractor, including without limitation,
the design, installation and removal of the Temporary Works, and the rectification of
defects appearing in Permanent Works, in the manner and to the standards and within
the time stipulated by the Contract. In full recognition of this objective, and with full
acceptance of the obligations, liabilities and risks which may be involved, the Contractor
shall undertake the execution of the Works.
B1. GENERAL
(1) The design and performance of the Permanent Works shall comply with the
specific core requirements contained in these Employer’s Requirements -
Volume 3.
(2) The design of the Permanent Works shall be developed in accordance with
these
Employer’s Requirements Section B
- Functional, the Employer’s Outline Design Specifications, the Employer’s
Outline Construction Specifications, as included in this
Contract, other requirements of the Contract and the Contractor's Technical
Proposals.
(3) The Permanent Works shall be designed and constructed to the highest
standards available using proven up-to-date state of art good practice. The
Contractor’s
Specification shall in any case not specify standards which, in the Engineer's
opinion, are less than or inferior to those described in the Outline Design
Specifications and Outline Construction Specifications, Volumes 4 and 5
respectively, and shall be carried out employing the procedures established by
the Contractor in his Quality, Safety and Environmental and Interface
management plans.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals from
the relevant agencies in the design and construction of the Works.
B2. SCOPE OF WORKS
(1) The Permanent and Temporary works shall comprise the Design and Construction
of all Works and services necessary to complete the Goregoan Mulund Link Road as
per Contract Outline Design and Construction Specifications and the
36 | P a g e
Employer’s Requirements from Chainage No 000.0 Km to 5.380 Km including, but

not limited to, the following:
1. Survey and Investigation including Geotechnical Investigation, Bathymetry

Survey Topographic Survey, Hydrographical Survey, Existing Building Survey,
Utilities Investigation, Identification of underground structures, Geological
mapping, Drainage studies, Seismic studies, Existing Building Survey, Existing
Water Wells Investigation etc., and
2. Site clearance, including tree felling, tree transplanting, and fencing,
barricading and securing of the site areas and works areas including all
necessary permissions; and
3. Pre-condition surveys, structural audit and reports for, and monitoring and
protection of Existing Building Structures, including rebuilding, repair or
resolution of any adjacent structures; and
4. Disposal of surplus soil/material/building debris in approved dumping area(s)
as per the Employer’s Requirements including compaction to the desired levels
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Identification of disposal sites and obtaining
necessary statutory approvals will fall within the Contractor’s scope of works;
and
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying dumping sites to dispose
excavated muck/soil without any extra cost. The Contractor has to obtain all
required permissions from various authorities and a prior Notice/permission
from the Engineer for their proposed dumping site as specified. The Employer
may direct the contractor to dispose the muck/ soil to designated sites within
40 KM from the work site. If so directed, the Contractor shall dispose the muck/
spoil to the designated site at no extra cost to the Employer.
6. Twin Bored Tunnels of minimum 13.6 m internal diameter (finish)
accommodating carriageways for two lanes together with an emergency lane
among others, all as per the specified standards.
7. Access, launching and retrieval shafts and plant building for ventilation system.
The Contractor to arrange a casting yard for segmental casting and obtain all
necessary statutory approvals in this regard.
8. Cross passages complete with auxiliary services and builders works.
9. Transition Ramp with glazed stainless-steel roof, and Cut and Cover Tunnel
10. Construction of road using flexible type of pavement.
11. The works related to bunds and ground improvement works. The Contractor
shall be fully responsible for the design (temporary/ permanent works),
construction, testing, monitoring and ground improvement works.
37 | P a g e
12. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, construction, performance
verification (including pre and post treatment testing and instrumentation
monitoring) and rectification of any defects in and upon completion, of any and
all of the ground improvement works adopted for the development. The
Contractor shall provide such technical expertise, plant, materials, standards,
workmanship and whatever else that may be necessary or desirable to meet the
performance requirements of the Employers Requirements and the
Specifications.
13. Supply of all specified materials, providing all labour, equipment and plant.
14. For launching TBM shaft, proper launching pad is required, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer before choosing the TBM launching site.
15. Traffic management and road works, both temporary and permanent including
diversions of roads and, temporary decking, subways and restoration of
pavements and road facilities etc.
16. All Temporary works necessary (including viaduct segment casting yard and
batching plants) and equipment, including the segment launching system and
equipment;
17. Water, sewer other utilities and drainage works.
18. MEP, Fire detection and suppression system and all other control and safety
services within the Tunnel, interchanges and bridge structures.
19. Make all provisions for accommodating the requirements for cable
galleries/cable ways/inserts to fix for all the cableways, or equipment at the
road, interchanges and bridge structures.
20. Supply, delivery, installation and functional testing of earth mat and embedded
earthing cables.
21. Water proofing systems inclusive of protective layers for all underground
structural components and ancillary structures.
22. Design and construction of the fire detection and firefighting systems.
23. Plumbing and lighting in underground areas.
24. Monitoring system for all equipment provided by this Contract
25. Design, manufacture, delivery and installation of signage systems.
26. Operation management and control system including operating procedures.
27. Survey instrumentation, ground treatment, ground and building monitoring,
risk analysis, settlement prediction, underpinning and protection to existing
buildings and structures wherever required, preventative and corrective
actions, pre-conditional surveys and reports;
28. Construction and maintenance of the site office at location in the proximity of
the Project area for the Engineer’s staff complete in all respects as per the
details given in the Employer’s Requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer
38 | P a g e
for the duration of Contract, including connection to mains electricity, water,

sewerage, drainage, broadband, WiFi and telephone, landscape, street furniture
etc. The location and plan of the office shall be discussed and approved by the
Engineer.
29. Removal, storage and reinstatement of road furniture such as street lighting,
traffic signals, bus shelters/stands, footpaths / shifting of trees including stone
kerbs, Promenades, boundary walls, horticulture works, and any other work to
restore the site to its original condition as stated in the Contract as per current
standards and site requirements, as and when possible.
30. Other works as stated in the Employer’s Requirements, the Outline
Specifications and the Employer’s Drawings.
31. Interface with Interfacing Contractor, Traffic Control Management Contractor
for Tunnel Interfacing Agencies with whom the Contractor shall co-ordinate all
interface requirements at design stage, and during his construction and
integrated testing activities.
32. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining relevant certificates or
clearance from local Authorities & other authorities, if required.
33. Tenders shall quote in accordance with the Employer’s Requirements, the
Employer’s Drawings and the Outline Specifications. Instead, for part of the
work(s), the tenderers may also quote their own proposal fully satisfying the
Employer’s
34. Requirements and Outline Specifications of construction and design. The
tenderer is expected to explain this in detail in their technical proposal.
B3. ALIGNMENT
(1) The alignment shall be as shown in the Employer’s Drawings. The Contractor
shall:
(a) Verify and develop a detailed alignment to meet the standard

operational and technical criteria referred elsewhere in this Contract.
(b) Review the alignment with respect to his own design and construction
proposals and shall also ensure that there is no conflict with any existing
structures (both underground and above ground) which are to be
preserved. Any modification/ revision in the alignment shall be
approved by the Engineer.
(c) The alignment of the main stretch is generally treated as frozen. The
alignment of the interchanges shall be varied to an extent of 25m to suit
design or stake holders’ requirement or site conditions, and as approved
39 | P a g e
by the Engineer, and to obtain NOC from concerned authority, if required

at no extra cost to the Employer
(2) The Contractor is not permitted to propose deviations from the given horizontal
alignment and deviations at interface sections; unless for reasons to avoid
physical obstructions from third party’s foundations encroaching the Works,
save that the Contractor shall demonstrate compliance of the proposed deviation
with the specified alignment requirements and obtain the Engineer prior
consent to propose the deviation.
(3) The Contractor is permitted to propose minor deviations in vertical alignment

to suit his construction proposals, but he must demonstrate that any such
deviations do not reduce the technical and operational performance. The
Contractor needs to verify the Contract boundaries while proposing any change
in vertical and/or horizontal alignment, but such deviations shall require a
Notice to proceed from the Engineer subject to the following conditions: -
• There is no extra cost to the Employer.

• Changes proposed are absolutely essentially to suit the Contractor’s
specific design.
• There is no change at the Contract boundaries.
B4. CLEARANCES
(1) The Permanent Works shall not infringe into the Tunnel envelope as shown on
the Drawings. Extra clearance shall be provided on curved alignment
(2) Construction limits:
(a) The limits of land for the Works are shown on the Employer’s
Drawings. The
Contractor shall design the Works to be contained totally within these
limits, respecting the regulations concerning construction and
property boundaries of the statutory Authorities.
(b) The limits of land as shown in the Employer’s Drawings may undergo
changes after Contractor’s survey and the Contractor shall make any
adjustments necessary to the design to acknowledge the changes to
the limits then specified by the Engineer. These adjustments will not
constitute
any variation.
B5. DESIGN LIFE
The design life of Permanent Works for civil engineering structures shall be 100 years.
However, design life of rigid and flexible pavements may be limited to 30 years and 15
years respectively.
40 | P a g e
B6. DURABILITY AND MAINTENANCE

(1) The Permanent Works shall be designed and constructed in such a way that, if
maintained in accordance with the Contractor's approved maintenance
programme in the Contract, they shall endure in a serviceable condition
throughout their minimum lives as described in the Outline Design
Specifications.
(2) The Permanent Works shall be designed and constructed so as to minimize the
cost of maintenance whilst not compromising the performance characteristics
and ride quality of the roadway.
B7. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

(1) The Tunnel road shall be designed for design speed of ruling 100km/hr and
minimum 80km/hr. Minimum design speed shall be adopted only where site
conditions are restrictive and adequate land width is not available.
(2) The vertical and horizontal alignments shall comply with the conditions laid in
paragraph B3 of this Employer’s Requirements Section B - Functional.
(3) During construction the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and
maintaining adequate wave surge / flood protection to ensure protection of the
works and for all adjacent areas, buildings and structures within the vicinity of
the works.
(4) In the design and construction of the Works, the Contractor shall, as a
fundamental objective and as a priority, ensure that Road user will, throughout
the operational period of the GMLR, and within the confines thereof, be provided
with as safe an environment as is reasonably possible. The Contractor's attention
is directed to Clause B18 of these Employer's Requirements – Functional
(Section B), concerning the role of a Statutory Body.
B8. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TUNNEL AND ROAD,

(1) The tunnel road shall have 2.25m paved shoulder and 0.75m edge strip.
(2) Design and construction of Tunnel and Roads, shall meet the standards and
requirements to ensure a smooth riding quality, especially at the location where
seepage etc. found.
(3) Median shall be of 11m width as mentioned in Volume 6, employer’s drawings.
41 | P a g e
B8. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM

1. To provide a ventilation system to meet the air quality parameters during normal and
congested operations and to provide smoke extraction and smoke free evacuation path
during fire conditions.
2. To conduct simulations and calculations to design the ventilation system.
3. Interfacing with power supply systems, central monitoring & control system, fire
services and traffic control surveillance system.
4. Preparation of emergency operation procedures for tunnel ventilation system.
Providing temporary ventilation system during construction period
B9. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

(1) The Power Supply system includes providing Receiving Substation and related
Transformers and Switchgears, Auxiliary Substations and related Transformers and
Switchgears, all interconnecting distribution and cables.
(2) It also includes providing backup power supply through Diesel Generator Sets at
all the auxiliary substations for at least 3 hrs.
(3) Providing emergency power supply through UPS system in the Tunnel.
(4) Providing lightning protection system, power factor correction units, surge
diverters on main switchboard, surge reduction filters, harmonic filters, all plant
and distribution boards and related cables and control system.
(5) Providing lighting system throughout the bridges, approach ramps and roads,
control and service buildings including emergency lighting and signages.
(6) Providing power through panels and cables to lighting system, fire protection
system, hydraulic system, Plant SCADA and Traffic SCADA, Control building lighting,
power, and water services.
(7) The Power Supply System shall be designed to supply power with a variation of ±
6% in the worst case including regulation of the transformer. The system
arrangement must be designed for operation at a temperature of 40°C for normal
cables and at a temperature of 950°C at two hours for fire survival cables feeding
the emergency circuits.
(8) The distribution system shall withstand a short circuit in accordance with the
design level.
(9) All individual components should be readily accessible for maintenance and
repair.
B10. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF PUMPING INSTALLATIONS

(1) Water pump installations shall be designed for unmanned operation, controlled
through liquid level controllers, capable of pumping the requisite amount of water
to the utility or to the ground / overhead tanks.
42 | P a g e
(2) The pumping installation shall withstand the corrosive effects of normal water
supply, seepage water and sewage and serve for the anticipated life of the
equipment. The minimum and maximum discharge velocity for sewage / seepage
pumping shall be 1.0 m/s and 2.4 m/s respectively.
(3) The pipe line size should be such that the velocity head does not exceed the normal
static head except for the fire pump which is governed by separate criteria. The
valve controls and regulating mechanisms shall be designed for automatic
operation.
(4) The pumps shall have 100% standby arrangement. The centrifugal pumps shall be
of self-priming type. The efficiency of the pump set shall not be less than 95% of the
maximum theoretical efficiency possible for that type of pump.
B11. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

(1) Fire Protection shall generally be provided in accordance with the National
Building Code of India and NFPA 502 within road, approach ramps interchanges
and bridge structures, and service buildings and shall comply with the
requirements of the Fire and Emergency Services Regulations.
(2) The provision of the complete installation including but not necessarily limited
to feeder supply storage tanks, fire pumps, sprinklers, other suppression
systems including automatic inert gas flooding system, hydrant and hose reel
systems, sump hydrocarbon detection and suppression, pipe work, valves,
brackets, fittings and sleeves.
(3) To provide a fire detection and alarm system across the Tunnel but not limited
to local fire panels with provision of output information to SCADA systems
installed by others, local fire alarms, smoke detectors and linear heat detection
system.
B12. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL
SYSTEM
1. To provide a Plant Control and Monitoring System (PCMS) and Operational
Management and Control System (OMCS). The OMCS shall integrate the plant
management and traffic management system into one supervised and
comprehensive operational system.
2. It includes all interfaces to the Fire Alarm Detection and Protection System,
Emergency Evacuation and Intercommunication System, Telecommunication
Systems, Hydraulic System, Security system, Traffic Control Centre (TCC)
equipment, Operational Maintenance System.
3. To provide the Ventilation Control System which forms part of the OMCS.
4. To provide Variable Message Signs (VMS), Variable Speed Limit Signs (VSLS), Video Incident
Detection System, CCTV surveillance, Emergency Telephone System,
43 | P a g e
5. Public Address System with loudspeakers, Break-In to the Radio Rebroadcast

Communications System, tunnel closure system comprising traffic signals and boom gates at
both tunnel portals.
6. To provide a Traffic Management and Control System to monitor and control all the above
systems and interface to the PMCS.
B13. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF ROAD

The functional parameters as presented here below will be measured at specified positions,
frequency and accuracy, and the result of these measurements must meet specified minimum
requirements during the execution of the Additional Construction Works after completion of the
Initial Construction Works.
(1) The Permanent Works shall be designed to achieve high aesthetic.

(2) Surface, above ground structures shall share a common aesthetic that identifies
them as component parts of the Goregaon Mulund Link Road and conveys a civic
dignity befitting the city of Mumbai.
(3) Structures in areas of special historic interest shall be designed to integrate
appropriately with existing site features and to convey the architectural theme
of the area into the body of the Goregaon Mulund Link Road.
(4) Allowance shall be made to identify and implement a design commonality that
includes, but is not limited to materials, finishes and components.
B14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

The design of the Permanent Works shall be undertaken with high environmental
standards as given in Appendix 17 of this Volume 3. During construction the
requirements for Environmental Protection and Impact Mitigation are also given in
Appendix 17 of this Volume 3.
B15. URBAN PLANNING FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
(1) Submissions for planning approval for underground, ground and above ground
GMLR works are to be made by the Contractor to all statutory bodies as applicable.
(2) The Contractor shall submit applications for permanent connections for utility
services including water supplies, sewerage and drainage and water supplies to the
Water Department, Storm Water Department and Sewage Solid Waste Department
of MCGM
(3) Fire clearance applications shall be made by the Contractor to the Fire Brigade
Department of MCGM.
(4) Requests for temporary power supplies for the construction of the works must be
submitted, by the Contractor to Brihanmumbai Electric Supply and Transport Co.
44 | P a g e
(BEST) Alternatively separate power supplies may be arranged by the Contractor

independent of BEST subject to compliance with any necessary statutes,
(5) In addition, a number of agencies are involved in the reinstatement works,
permanent road accesses, temporary road accesses, refuse collection accesses,
street lighting, traffic management and fire hydrant positions. The Contractor is
responsible for obtaining the approvals for these other works.
(6) The Contractor is responsible for obtaining the approval of applications from the
relevant Authorities for the design and construction of works. The Employer will
provide all possible assistance in trying to obtain any permission.
B16. SAFETY AND SECURITY

(1) Introduction
The objective is to minimize the potential impact on GMLR users and minimize
dependence on technology and equipment when formulating security and safety
plans for each facility. Issues may include, but not be limited to, the following;
(a) Appropriate features to support life, safety and security strategy.
(b) Conformance with appropriate fire and life safety codes
(c) Provisions regarding maintaining tenable conditions during evacuation
in the event of an emergency.
(d) Provision of ventilation system as mentioned in B8.
(e) Provision of power supply and lighting system as mentioned in B9
(f) Provision of fire detection and protection system as mentioned in B10.
(g) Provision of operational management and control system as mentioned
in B11.
(2) Safety Management Methods Safety involves:

(a) Hazard Identification and Management
(b) Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA)
(c) Design Review
(d) Traceability from Initial Design to Acceptance Testing (Safety
Certification based Road Safety Audit, Fire Safety etc.)
(e) A Separate Safety Management and Reporting Function
B17. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall carry out the Works so as to minimise disruption to road and also
necessary care should be taken to divert the vehicle during muck dumping. The
Contractor shall prepare his traffic management plan based on his proposed
construction methodology in co-ordination with Engineer and in conjunction with the
Mumbai Traffic Police. The Contractor shall comply strictly with the directions of the
Traffic Police and the approved plans during construction of his works.
45 | P a g e
The traffic management plan shall maintain the existing Level of Service on roads in the
vicinity of the project site. Design shall provide for a minimum carriageway width
required to achieve the above objective. As far as possible, total carriageway width
during construction shall be equal to or greater than the existing carriageway width in
order to accommodate the additional traffic due to construction activities. To facilitate
the above, temporary roads or temporary road decking may be provided where
necessary, which must be fully maintained and safe at all times and shall be approved by
the Mumbai Traffic Police. The traffic management plan shall also provide for a
minimum of 2m of footpath adjacent to buildings or thoroughfares for all road diversion
schemes.
The wheels of all vehicles shall be washed before leaving site to avoid depositing mud
and debris on the adjacent roads.
Also refer to Volume 3 Section D9.
B18. SAFETY CERTIFICATION

The Contractor shall note that, Employer/Engineer/ Jt. C.P of Traffic Department and
other associated statutory authorities will inspect the Works from time to time for the
purpose of determining whether the Goregaon Mulund Link Road complies, in terms of
operational and infra structural safety, in accordance with the Laws of India. The
Contractor shall note that the Notice to proceed of the said department is mandatory for
commissioning the system. Notwithstanding other provisions of the Contract, the
Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the requirements of the said
Department in terms of being constructed to the drawings and shall assist the
representatives of said Department in carrying out their inspection duties and also
comply with their instructions regarding rectifying any defects and making good any
deficiencies.
B19. STANDARDS
(1) Equipment, materials and systems shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest issue of International and/or National codes and
standards. List of codes and standards applicable for use for the Works is given in
Volumes 4 & 5.
(2) Reference to standards or to materials and equipment of a particular manufacturer

shall be regarded as followed by the words “or equivalent”. The Contractor may
propose alternative standard materials, or equipment that shall be equal to or
better than those specified. If the Contractor for any reason proposes alternatives
to or deviations from the specified standards, or desires to use materials or
equipment not covered by the specified standards, the Contractor shall apply for a
46 | P a g e
Notice from the Engineer. The Contractor shall state the exact nature of the change,
the reason for making the change and relevant specifications of the materials and
equipment in the English language. The decision of the Engineer in the matter of
quality will be final.
47 | P a g e
Volume 3
Section C
Design


48 | P a g e
SECTION C –EMPLOYER REQUIREMENTS -DESIGN

No. No.
C. DESIGN
C1. INTRODUCTION
C2. REQUIREMENTS DURING DESIGN PHASE
C3. NOTICE TO DESIGN SUBMISSION
C8. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS - CONSTRUCTION PHASE
C9. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS - ASSESSMENT PROCEDURES
C10. DESIGN SUBMISSION PROGRAMME
PROGRAMME FOR SUBMISSIONS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION
C11. PHASE
C12. CALCULATIONS
C13. DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS
ATTACHMENT C1: DESIGN CERTIFICATE
49 | P a g e
C. DESIGN
C1. INTRODUCTION
(1) The Employer's Requirements – Section C Design, specifies the procedural
requirements for the preparation of the design of the Permanent and Temporary
Works. These requirements are subdivided into: Design Phase, Construction
Phase and General Application.
(2) In addition to the express requirements herein, the Contractor shall, whenever the
Engineer so requests, provide information and participate in discussions that relate
to design matters.
(3) The Contractor shall engage the Lead Designer who shall undertake and prepare the
design of the Permanent Works and Temporary Works. The Lead Designer shall
fulfil the requirements given in Annexure 9 of Volume 1. The minimum qualification
and experience required for the Engineering Manager of Lead Designer is given in
section A 15 (9). The Contractor shall establish an office for his design team near the
Site area in Mumbai. The design team shall function from this office and all meetings
and discussions relating to design shall be held in this office.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure that the Lead Designer continues to be represented in
Mumbai at all times by staff whose seniority and experience are to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and whose representative is available on the Site as necessary or as
required by the Engineer.
(5) The Contractor shall appoint an external Consulting firm with suitably qualified
person(s) to act as the Lead Design Checker. The minimum qualification and
experience of the Engineering Manager of Lead Design Checker is given in Section A
15(9). The Lead Design Checker shall not produce any of the permanent works
design or temporary works designs nor work directly for or report to the
Contractor’s Project Manager.
(6) The Contractor shall ensure that at the end of each month, the Lead Design Checker
shall issue a written report to the Contractor’s Site office, with a copy to the
Engineer, covering the status of all designs checked during the preceding month. The
format of the Design
Checker’s monthly reports shall be one to which the Engineer raises a Notice
(7) The Lead Design Checker shall undertake design checks on the Contractor’s designs.
All design documents, drawings, plans, calculations and reports produced by the
Contractor and Designer shall be checked by the Design Checker, accompanied by
two original copies of a `Design Certificate' as set out in Attachment C1, signed by all
parties when the design is submitted to the Engineer.
(8) The Contractor shall ensure that, as all designs being complex structures and having
the potential to affect the safety, quality and durability of the Permanent Works, the
50 | P a g e
Lead Designer shall approve in advance the Contractor’s proposed materials and
erection and removal procedures and the lead designer shall inspect all temporary
works at Site before they are put into use.
(9) The Engineer, and such other parties as he shall give a Notice in writing, shall have
full and unrestricted access to the Lead Design Checker, the Lead Designer, and to
all persons carrying out the design and checking, and all their data, information,
calculations, drawings and records
(10) The Contractor shall submit his Design Quality Assurance Plan as required in
Appendix 6 of this Volume 3, for the design required by the Contract.
C2. REQUIREMENTS DURING DESIGN PHASE

(1) The principal requirements of the Design Phase are the validation of the Preliminary
Design, production of the Definitive Design and the Construction Reference
Drawings. It should be clearly understood that the Contractor’s technical proposal
which forms a part of this Contract, shall only form the basis for further design
development into the preliminary and Definitive Design, subject to the compliance
of the design with relevant regulations and standards and conforming to the Outline
Design Specifications.
(2) Engineering studies and comparative evaluations shall be performed to ensure that
the designs incorporate features to achieve optimum performance and seek to lower
future life cycle costs.
(3) Preliminary Design: The Preliminary Design shall develop and validate the
Employer’s
Tender design and incorporate the Contractor's technical proposal which forms a
part of this Contract, developed to sufficiently define the main structural elements.
In addition, general construction methods and documentation needed to develop
the Definitive Design shall be submitted. The Engineer shall review and comment
Preliminary Design submissions in accordance with Clause C9 of this Employer’s
Requirements.
(4) Definitive Design shall accord with and incorporate the Preliminary Design and shall
be the design developed to the stage at which all elements of the structures are fully
defined and specified and in particular:
(a) calculation and analysis are complete;
(b) all main and all other significant elements are delineated;
(c) all tests and trials and all selection of materials and equipment are
complete;
(d) shall take full account of the effect on the Permanent Works of the
proposed methods of construction and of the Temporary Works.
51 | P a g e
(e) Shall fully coordinate with adjacent contractor/other interface

agencies.
(5) During the preparation of the Definitive Design, the Contractor shall complete all
surveys investigations and testing necessary to complete the design of the
Permanent Works.
(6) The Contractor shall sub-divide the proposed Definitive Design into Design
Packages to be submitted in advance of the Definitive Design Submission and to be
identified in the Design Submission Programme. The Design Packages are to relate
to the significant and clearly identifiable parts of the proposed Definitive Design and
shall address the design requirements as described herein. The Design Packages
shall facilitate the review and understanding of the Definitive Design as a whole and
shall be produced and submitted in an orderly, sequential and progressive manner.
(7) Separate Definitive Design Submissions may be prepared for those major elements
to be procured by sub-contract and which sub-contracts include design. Where such
work is to be procured by the Contractor on the basis of outline design, design briefs
and performance specifications, such documents may be submitted as Definitive
Design Submissions.
(8) Preliminary Design submissions will be reviewed and coded in accordance with
Clause C9 stated here below.
(9) Upon the Engineer issuance of Notice with review code “A” or “B” in respect of the
Definitive Design Submission in accordance with Clause C9, the Contractor shall
incorporate the comments, complete the design in all respects, and proceed with the
Construction Reference Drawings. All the Permanent Works shall be covered under
the Construction Reference Drawings.
(10) Construction Reference Drawings shall give full details of the construction of the
elements covered by the Definitive Design and shall show in full the works to be
constructed.
C3. NOTICE TO DESIGN SUBMISSION

(1) Preliminary Design and Definitive Design will be reviewed and coded by Engineer
in accordance with Clause C9 stated hereafter. A Comment Resolution Sheet (CRS)
will be attached, listing the Engineer’s comments. Return of hard copy drawings
with the CRS at this stage is not mandatory.
(2) Construction Reference Drawings shall be reviewed by Engineer in accordance with

Clause C9 stated hereafter. Comment Resolution Sheet will be attached. Drawings
reviewed with review Code ‘A’ or ‘B’ will be stamped with Notice to proceed and
signed by the Engineer. Two sets of hard copy drawings will be returned to the
Contractor.
52 | P a g e
(3) Construction Reference Drawings accorded with Code ‘B’ should be resubmitted
after incorporating the Engineer’s comments within 30 days of the receipt of the
concerned set of drawings and CRS.
(4) Contractor may proceed with the work at his risk based on Construction
Reference
Drawings accorded with review Code ‘B’, after addressing all comments listed in
the CRS.
(5) For Construction Reference Drawings accorded with review Code ‘C’ or ‘D’, CRS
will be issued. Drawings will not be returned in these cases along with CRS.
53 | P a g e
C4. REQUIREMENTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE
(1) The principal requirements relating to design during the Construction Phase are
the production of Working Drawings, the preparation of technical submissions as
required under the Contract, the compilation of the Final Design and the production
of the As-Built Drawings.
(2) Working Drawings shall be prepared as required under the Contract. They shall be
endorsed by the Contractor as being in accordance with the Construction Reference
Drawings.
(3) The Contractor shall endorse the submissions required under the Contract that “all
effects of the design comprising the submission on the design of adjacent or other
parts of the works have been fully taken into account in the design of these parts.”
(4) At least 3 months but not more than 6 months prior to the anticipated date of
substantial completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit the Final Design
to the Engineer.
(5) The Final Design is the design of the Permanent Works embodied in:
(a) The latest revisions of the documents comprised in the Definitive Design,
taking account of comments in the schedules appended to Notices of No
Objection;
(b) The latest revisions of the Construction Reference Drawings;
(c) The calculations (see Clause C12 herein); and
(6) Co-ordinated interfaces and such other documents as may be submitted by the
Contractor at the request of the Engineer to illustrate and describe the Permanent
Works and for which a Notice has been issued.
(7) The Contractor shall maintain all records necessary for the preparation of the As-
Built Drawings. Upon completion of the Works or at such time as agreed to or
required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare drawings which, subject to
the Engineer's Notice, shall become the As-Built Drawings. All such drawings shall
be endorsed by the Contractor as true records of the construction of the Permanent
Works and of all temporary works that are to remain on the site. The Contractor
shall also show the locations of utilities exposed, relocated, diverted, new or
retained.
C5. DESIGN INTERFACES WITH OTHERS
(1) The Contractor shall co-ordinate all design and installation work with the related
work contractors and various Interfacing agencies and MEP Subcontractor as
described in Appendix 16 of this Volume 3.
(2) Appendix 16 contains the requirements of the Interface Management Plan (IMP) to
be prepared and implemented by the Contractor. The IMP will identify the
54 | P a g e
mechanism by which the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors, Interfacing

Agencies and MEP Subcontractor will work together to coordinate the design, and
construction, of the various elements of the Project works. The Contractor shall
review and update the IMP on a monthly basis.
(3) The Employer and Engineer will hold Project Quarterly Review Meetings (QRM), at
three monthly intervals. The Contractor’s Project Manager shall attend these QRM
and shall report the progress of his works and the state of his interface with other
Interfacing Contractors, Interfacing Agencies and MEP Subcontractor and shall
provide the Engineer with the necessary assistance and information for conducting
the QRM. Refer to Clause A18 of Section A of this Volume 3 Employer’s
Requirements.
C6. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS
C6.1 PRELIMINARY DESIGN

SUBMISSION General
The Preliminary Design shall develop and validate the Employer’s outline design
incorporating the Contractor’s technical proposal and provide initial design documents
for review and shall be sufficiently detailed to show the main elements of the design and
documents required for preparation of the definitive design. It shall also include:
a) the quality assurance plan for design
b) a review of the outline design criteria
c) the submission of design manuals
d) the submission of proposed software
e) the preliminary off-site testing recommendation
f) the submission of specifications proposed for the work
g) the identification of design codes and standards
h) the CAD procedures
i) preliminary design of, plant building, promenade
j) preliminary design of road on reclamation
k) preliminary design of reclamation and seawall
l) preliminary design of MEP works
m) an alignment reviews
n) the preliminary construction methodology
55 | P a g e
o) the design submission programme (update)
p) the utility and traffic diversion plans
q) proposed site surveys, existing building surveys and other field surveys
r) a review of permanent land requirement
s) the preliminary ground treatment
t) the preliminary building and structure protection proposal
u) the Preliminary Precondition survey proposal
v) the preliminary monitoring plan
w) the preliminary geological model
x) an additional ground investigation proposal
y) the preliminary reinstatement drawings.
z) E&M schematics, calculations and plantroom space requirements
In developing and validating the Preliminary Design the Contractor should note the
following constraints;
(i) The land for the ancillary buildings shall be as per the Employer’s Drawings; and
(ii) The overall width of bridge structure along main alignment and interchanges,
approach ramp and road on reclamation shall be as per the Employer’s
Drawings.
C6.2. DEFINITIVE DESIGN SUBMISSION

(1) General
The Definitive Design Submission shall be a coherent and complete set of
documents properly consolidated and indexed and shall fully describe the
proposed Definitive Design. In particular, and where appropriate, it shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a) the dimensions of all major features, and Tunnel elements
(b) all materials;
(c) potential forces and movements due to all possible loadings and actions
on the structures, and their accommodation;
(d) all second order effects;
(e) the layout and typical details of reinforcement in structural concrete
members;
(f) the locations and nature of all relevant joints and connections and
details thereof;
(g) standard details;
56 | P a g e
(h) provisions and proposals for interfacing with the Interfacing

Contractors, Interfacing Agencies and Traffic Management Control
contractor;
(i) utilities to be diverted /protected;
(j) civil, structural and geotechnical design and erection methods for
bridge and interchange viaduct spans.
(k) Construction sequence and design details of approach ramps, bridge
and interchange structures, including substructure and superstructure.
(l) proposed methods of predicting the ground movements due to work
and adjacent to the excavations; and
(m) predictions of effect on structures due to ground movements and the
proposed protective measures to limit the effects to a degree not
exceeding the limit as defined under the Outline Design Specifications.
(n) Traffic or other civic services affected.
(o) Sump arrangements.
(p) Drainages
(q) Detailed design calculations supporting all the elements of MEP
services, equipment selection and operation procedures.
(2) Drawings
The Definitive Design Submission shall include drawings that shall illustrate the
proposed Definitive Design and in particular shall include, but not be limited to,
the following;
(a) elevations and perspectives and landscaping;
(b) layouts and details of structural elements;
(c) associated fittings;
(d) slopes and earthworks;
(e) structural and surface drainage;
(f) drainage
(g) Mechanical and Electrical plant room layouts, installation details such as
lighting, ECS, electric substation and distribution, fire protection.
(h) provisions for road works, electrical and mechanical services and
equipment;
(i) existing and proposed utilities;
(l) embedded items
(m) Cross drainages
(n) Consolidated Design Drawings
(o) Sump arrangements
57 | P a g e
(3) Documents
Contract Specification
The Specification included in the Contractor's Technical Proposals together
with the Outline Design Specification and Outline Construction Specifications
shall be amplified so as to specify comprehensively the design and construction
of the Permanent Works.
Design Manual
The Design Manual shall incorporate all design requirements, standards, codes,
loading cases, permissible movements and deflections, limit states, design
stresses and strains, material properties and all other documents or matters
which are relevant to and govern the design. The Design Manual shall refer to
all materials, codes and standards used, making clear their specific applications.
The Design Manual shall be produced so that it can be used by those involved in
the preparation or review of the design of the Permanent Works as a
comprehensive reference text and efficient working document.
Interface Design Report on Interfacing Contractors This will include the
following:
Details of the design and construction of the Works adjacent to other Contracts
Details of provisions for the Interfacing Contractors, Interfacing Agencies, and
Traffic Control Management Contractor for Tunnel indicating arrangements for
accesses, fixings, casting-in, openings, supports, plinths, decks, manholes,
trenches and the like; updated interface management plan relating to design
integration and co-ordination.
Testing and Commissioning Report

Details of proposals for testing and commissioning procedures for all relevant
elements and equipment contained in the Permanent Works.
Maintenance Report
A report updating the Statement of Maintainability in the Contractor's Technical
Proposals and detailing maintenance routines necessary for the achievement of
the required lives of the various elements of the Works.
(4) Supporting Documents

The Definitive Design Submission shall be accompanied by the following
documents, which will be considered by the Engineer in his assessment of the
Definitive Design Submission. Where relevant or required, these documents shall
58 | P a g e
be accompanied by a design note stating clearly how information has been used in
the design of the Permanent Works.
Geotechnical Interpretative Report

A report including site investigation results and covering the geotechnical
interpretation of site investigation work including that undertaken by the
Contractor in sufficient detail to confirm and justify parameters used in, before
launching TBM. The report shall include the full borehole logs and descriptions of
confirmatory boreholes drilled by the Contractor.
Survey Report
A report on all survey work undertaken by the Contractor, including checks on
mapping, survey stations, co-ordinates and setting-out. Updated topographical and
survey drawings shall also be included.
Pre-conditional Survey of Existing Buildings

A report giving a review of the general condition of all existing buildings and
structures, 50m on either side of the alignment centre line. The structural record
surveys on the buildings and structures within this zone shall be included in this
report. Refer to Clause D8 (8) of this Volume 3 for further details.
Existing Buildings and Structures Impact Assessment Report

An assessment on the risk of damage to the buildings, structures and utilities within
the influence zone of Tunnel, due to the proposed works shall be included in the
report. The possible protective measures that can be deployed shall also be given.
Utilities Report
A report giving details of arrangements and working methods in respect of the
existing utilities, including protection measures, diversions, reinstatements and
programme allowances.
Temporary Works Design Report

A report which provides sufficient information on the design of the temporary
Works to allow the Engineer to assess their effects on the Permanent Works and to
enable these to be taken into account in the assessment of the Definitive Design.
Construction / Installation Analysis Report
A report containing a stage-by-stage construction / installation sequence for all
structures / equipment.
Construction Method Statement

Various reports which provide sufficient information on the methods of
construction and Contractor's Equipment including Tunnel Boring Machine
(TBM) to allow the Engineer to assess their effects on the Permanent Works and to
enable these to be taken into account in the assessment of the Definitive Design.
59 | P a g e
Works Programme Review

(i) The Contractor shall, prior to submitting the Definitive Design Submission,
review the Works Programme against the current version of the Design
Submission Programme.
(ii) In the event that the Contractor considers that there are any discrepancies or
inconsistencies between the Design Submission Programme and the Works
Programme, the Contractor shall submit with the Definitive Design Submission
his proposed revisions to the Works Programme such that the discrepancies
or inconsistencies are removed.
(iii) The Contractor shall provide details of submissions of the Construction

Reference Drawings and the proposed Working Drawings and their
anticipated timing during the Construction Phase and shall identify
information required from or actions to be undertaken by the Engineer or
others which are necessary to permit the completion of the design of the
Permanent Works and the Working Drawings. Desired Dates for the receipt of
such information or for the completion of such actions required by the
Contractor shall be included with appropriate justification.
Report on the Use of Works Areas

A report updating the proposals from those contained in the Contractor's Technical
Proposals for the use of Works Areas, site security and their reinstatement,
detailing the accesses and access facilities.
Report on MEP Works
The report shall provide design for the MEP systems and justification for their
choice and performance requirements shall be substantiated by performing a full
Engineering Analysis supported by a Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA) based
upon traffic data contained within the Volume 7 (Warranted Data). The
aforementioned Engineering Analysis process shall be used during Tender stage to
substantiate the choice of MEP, Life and fire safety Systems. The Contractor shall
also develop the operational strategy, maintenance regimes and procedures for the
Tunnel and roads, for both during the works and for post construction. However, it
is essential the design provides a high degree of operational flexibility. This will be
in the form of an interim Approval in Principle (AIP) report and supported by a
Quantified Risk Analysis (QRA). The QRA shall confirm the design fire size and be
verified from an independent organization not directly associated with the
contractor.
60 | P a g e
(5) Notices on Definitive Design Submission

The Contractor may make Definitive Design Submissions and seek separate
Notices in respect of:
(a) The temporary works for construction of the underground and above ground
works.
(b) All works related to the sequence segment erection together with any
intervening works.
(c) Major elements as identified under B2, Section B.
The issue of such separate Notices under (a), (b) and (c) above shall be conditional
upon the Contractor having demonstrated, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that
the effect of each part of the tunnel and utilities, etc., has been fully accommodated
in the design
(6) Design changes
Any changes in the design between Tender stage and Design Stage, or Preliminary
Design and Detailed Design, if warranted to meet the Employer’s Requirements or
Outline Specifications or Code provisions or similar, such changes shall be deemed
to have been included by the Tenderer in his proposal. The tenderer shall not be
eligible for any additional payment for such changes. All such changes require the
Notice of the Employer/Engineer.
C7. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS - CONSTRUCTION REFERENCE DRAWING SUBMISSIONS
(1) The Construction Reference Drawings shall be derived directly from the Definitive
Design and shall detail and illustrate in full the Permanent Works. The
Construction Reference Drawings shall form part of the Working Drawings to be
used for construction purposes.
(2) Prior to any Construction Reference Drawings Submission, the Contractor shall
prepare a full list of Construction Reference Drawings in order to demonstrate, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, that such Construction Reference Drawings will
be sufficient in extent to cover the construction of the whole of the Permanent
Works.
(3) Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, the Construction Reference Drawings
need not include bar bending schedules, bar reference drawings, fabrication or
shop drawings as well as other schedules or erection drawings which are to be
provided by the Contractor during the Construction Phase.
(4) The Construction Reference Drawings shall include Combined Services Drawings,
Structural Electrical and Mechanical (SEM) Drawings and Consolidated Design
61 | P a g e
Drawings which shall clearly define the scope, interrelationships and provisions
for of all aspects of the works.
C8. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS - CONSTRUCTION PHASE

(1) On the issuance of a Notice in respect of the Construction Reference Drawings the
Contractor shall produce the proposed Working Drawings. The Working Drawings
shall include the Construction Reference Drawings, which may be supplemented
by further drawings developed in accordance with the Construction Reference
Drawings such as site sketches, bar bending schedules, bar reference drawings,
fabrication and shop drawings, construction erection sequences, finishes material
list with accompanying specification, and the like. All such drawings shall comply
with the requirements of the Contract.
(2) Prior to issue to site of the proposed Working Drawings, the Contractor shall
endorse the appropriate original paper drawings as "Good for Construction". The
supplemental working drawings shall not be endorsed by the Engineer, unless he
specifically states which drawings he will endorse with a Notice to proceed.
(3) The Construction of the Works shall be strictly in accordance with these Working
Drawings.
(4) The Contractor shall finalise details of the proposed method of construction and
submit such finalised details to the Engineer for a Notice. The proposed method
shall have no adverse effects on the partially completed Permanent Works and shall
ensure the Works are statically and, if appropriate, aerodynamically stable.
(6) The Contractor shall undertake and submit a stage by stage construction sequence
and the effect of any Temporary Works and the Contractor's Equipment on the
Permanent Works. This analysis shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate that the
Contractor's proposals are safe and have no adverse effects upon any parts of the
Permanent Works.Hard copies of the As-Built Drawings, endorsed by the
Contractor, shall be submitted to the Engineer for a Notice to proceed in accordance
with Clause 5.6 of Part I GCC and in electronic format using a commercially
available CAD program.
C9. DESIGN SUBMISSIONS - ASSESSMENT PROCEDURES

The Contractor’s Design submissions will be assessed by the Engineer within 28 days
from the date of submission, or as otherwise stated in Volume 4. The form and detail of
the assessment shall be as determined by the Engineer and according Notice to a
submission will not release or remove the Contractor’s responsibility for the design
under the Contract. The Submission will return along with the Comment Resolution
Sheet(CRS), for the obtaining of a Notice to proceed from the Engineer as given in
62 | P a g e
Attachment A3 to Section A of this Employer’s Requirements. The submissions will be

coded A or B or C or D or E, whose meaning is listed as below.
Code ‘A’ – Notice to proceed

(i) Code ‘B’ – Notice to proceed accorded with comments. Work may proceed subject
to incorporation of comments
(ii) Code ‘C’ – Objected. Revise and resubmit. Work may not proceed
(iii) Code ‘D’ – Rejected.
(iv) Code ‘E’ – Review not required. Work may proceed

(1) The issue of a Notice shall be without prejudice to the issue of any future
Notices.
(2) The Contractor shall, prior to the submission of the Design Data, obtain all
required statutory approvals that relate to that submission including, where
appropriate, the approval of the Concerned Government Authorities and utility
undertakings, and demonstrate that all required approvals have been
obtained.
(3) All submissions shall be accompanied by two original copies of a `Design

Certificate' as set out in Attachment C1 hereto and signed by the Contractor,
the Lead Designer and the Lead Design Checker.
C10. DESIGN SUBMISSION PROGRAMME

(1) The Contractor shall prepare the Design Submission Programme which is to set out
fully the Contractor's anticipated programme for the preparation, submission and
review of the Design Packages, the Definitive Design Submission and the
Construction Reference Drawings Submissions and for the issue of Notices in
relation thereto.
(2) The Design Submission Programme shall:
(a) be consistent with and its principal features integrated into the Works
Programme, and show all relevant Key Dates;
(b) identify dates and subjects by which the Engineer’s decisions should be
made;
(c) make adequate allowance for periods of time for assessment by the Engineer
and other review bodies;
(d) make adequate allowance for the design and development of specialist
works.
(e) include a schedule identifying, describing, cross-referencing and explaining

the Design Packages into which the Contractor intends to divide the Definitive
Design and Construction Reference Drawings; and
63 | P a g e
(f) indicate the Design Interface and Co-ordination periods for the Project and
Interface Contractors.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the Design Submission Programme to the Engineer
within thirty (30) days of the Commencement Date and thereafter up-dated
versions thereof at intervals of not more than one (1) month throughout the Design
Phase.
C11. PROGRAMME FOR SUBMISSIONS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE
In accordance with Clause A4 of Section A of Volume 3 the Employer's Requirements -
General, the Contractor shall identify submissions required during the Construction
Phase.
C12. CALCULATIONS
(1) Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, calculations relevant to the Definitive
Design (and Construction Reference Drawings, if required) shall be submitted for
assessment with the respective Design Packages or Submissions.
The above calculations shall have been certified by the Contractor’s Lead Designer
and Lead Design Checker before submitting to the Engineer. The Engineer may
require the submission of applicable software including in-house software
programmes/ worksheets developed by the Contractor and/or designer, computer
input and programme logic for his assessment prior to the acceptance of the
computer output.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit a comprehensive set of calculations for
the Definitive Design in a form acceptable to the Engineer.
Should the design of the Permanent Works be revised thereafter, and such revision
renders the calculations as submitted obsolete or inaccurate, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit the revised calculations.
(3) Similarly, the Contractor shall submit such further calculations as have been
prepared in connection with the Construction Reference Drawings.
(4) Calculations to be included as part of the submission herein shall comprise the up-
to-date calculations in respect of the Definitive Design, the Construction Reference
Drawings and such further calculations which the Contractor has prepared during
the production of Working Drawings.
(5) Copies of EXCEL spreadsheets and computer model data files sufficient to
regenerate the model and re-run the analysis should be submitted together with
the calculations to the Engineer.
(6) The Contractor shall submit all calculations necessary to support proposals
relating to the construction methods.
64 | P a g e
C13. DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS

(1) Drawings shall be prepared generally to A1 size, but to ISO A0 size where
appropriate. Appendix 7 of this Volume 3 defines the Drawings and CAD Standards
required for drawing preparation and submittal.
(2) The Contractor shall submit 6 copies of his design and/or drawings for assessment
by the Engineer. After the receipt of a Notice to proceed from the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit 6 copies of design and/or drawing for the use of the
Engineer.
(3) The submission of drawings may be by CAD Media files and Appendix 7 of this
Volume 3 specifies the drawing submission requirements for CAD Media files
65 | P a g e
ATTACHMENT C1
DESIGN CERTIFICATE
This Design Certificate refers to Submission No. ...……… which comprises:
[*Design Package No. ..../the Definitive Design Submission/Construction Reference

Drawings
Submission No. ..../Technical Submission No. ....] in respect of:
[description of the Permanent Works to which the submission refers]
The contents of this submission are scheduled in Section A below.
The documents scheduled in Section B below, for which a Notice to proceed has been issued,
are of relevance to this submission.
LEAD DESIGNER’S STATEMENT
We certify that:
(a) the design of the Permanent Works, as illustrated and described in the documents
scheduled in Section A below, complies with the Employer's Requirements, local
regulations and standards and ...... [see note 1 below];
OR (in the case of a Definitive Design Submission in respect of those elements identified
under Clause C2(6) of the Employer's Requirements - Design):
a. the outline designs, design briefs and performance specifications of those elements
of the Permanent Works as illustrated and described in the documents scheduled
in Section A below comply with the Employer's Requirements and ......
[see note 1 below];
OR (in the case of a submission of documents that do not strictly comply with previous
documents for which a Notice to proceed has been received):
a. the design of the Permanent Works, as illustrated and described in the documents
scheduled in Section A below, complies with the Employer's Requirements and
...... [see note 1 below] except in the following respects:
(i) ....... (to be completed by Contractor/Designer)
(ii) ...…. (etc.)
(b) A detailed review and design check has been undertaken and completed to confirm the
completeness, adequacy and validity of the design of the Permanent Works as illustrated
and described in the documents scheduled in Section A below;
66 | P a g e
(c) all necessary and required approvals relating to the design of the Permanent Works, as
illustrated and described in the documents scheduled in Section A below, have been
obtained and copies of such approvals are annexed in Section C below;
AND (in the case of a submission covering a part of the Permanent Works only):
all effects of the design comprising the submission on the design of adjacent or other
parts of the Works have been fully taken into account in the design of those parts.
Signed by “Authorised Representative”
(for Designer)
Name
Position / Designation
Date
LEAD DESIGN CHECKER’S CERTIFICATION
We certify that the Work described in Section A of this certificate has been checked by us
and meets the requirements of the Contract.
(for Design Checker)
Name
Position / Designation
Date
67 | P a g e
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION
This Certifies that all design has been performed utilizing the skill and care to be expected of
a professionally qualified and competent designer, experienced in work of similar nature and
scope. This further certifies that all works relating to the preparation, review, checking and
certification of design has been verified by us and that the design meets the requirements of
the Contract and has been accepted by us.

(for Contractor) Name
Position/Designation
Date
Note 1
The Contractor shall insert one of the following, as applicable:
(i) the Contractor's Technical Proposals
(ii) the Contractor's Technical Proposals and Design Packages Nos. ........ for which a Notice
to proceed has been issued.
(iii) Design Packages Nos. ....….. for which a Notice to proceed has been issued if such Design
Packages develop and amplify the Contractor's Technical Proposals.
(iv) The Definitive Design
Section A
Submission no. .... comprises the following:
Drawings: (Title, drawing number and revision)
Documents: (Title, reference number and revision)
Others:
68 | P a g e
Section B
Documents for which a Notice to proceed has been issued and which are of relevance to this
Submission No. .....
Document:
submitted with
[*Design Package No. ……………/ ) The Contractor is required to
the Definitive Design Submission No…………/ ) provide this information in
Construction Reference Drawings Submission No. ..../ ) respect of each document in
Technical Submission No. .…………/ ) Section B
Date of Issue of Notice to proceed )
(* Delete as appropriate)
Section C
[Contractor to attach copies of necessary and required approvals from statutory bodies, etc..]
SECTION B – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS - FUNCTIONAL Document:

submitted with
[*Design Package No. ……………/ ) The Contractor is required to
the Definitive Design Submission No…………/ ) provide this information in
Construction Reference Drawings Submission No. ..../ ) respect of each document in
Technical Submission No. .…………/ ) Section B
Date of Issue of Notice to proceed )
(* Delete as appropriate)
Section C
[Contractor to attach copies of necessary and required approvals from statutory bodies, etc..]
69 | P a g e
Volume 3
Section D
Construction


70 | P a g e
SECTION D – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS-CONSTRUCTION
S.No. Description Page No.

D CONSTRUCTION
D1 CHECKING OF THE CONTRACTOR'S
TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN
D2 CHECKING OF THE CONTRACTOR'S
TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN
D3 THE SITE
D4 SURVEY
D5 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SAFETY
AND ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS
D6 OTHER SAFETY MEASURES
D7 CARE OF THE WORKS
D8 DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE
D9 SITE ESTABLISHMENT
D10 SECURITY
D11 TESTING
D12 RECORDS
D13 MATERIALS
D14 PROVISIONS FOR INTERFACING
CONTRACTORS
D15 RESTORATION OF AREAS
DISTURBED BY CONSTRUCTION
D16 TUNNEL BORING MACHINES
D17 REINSTATEMENT OF EXTERNAL
AREAS
ATTACHMENT D1: CONTRACTOR’S LABOUR CAMP
71 | P a g e
D.CONSTRUCTION
D1. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall submit a Staff Organization Plan to the Engineer in accordance with
Clause A15 of this Volume 3. This Plan shall be updated and resubmitted whenever there are
changes to the staff. The plan shall show the management structure and state clearly the duties,
responsibilities and authority of each staff member.
The Project Manager and his site team shall have experience and qualifications appropriate to
the type and magnitude of the Works. Full details shall be submitted of the qualifications and
experience of all proposed staff to the Engineer for his Notice, which shall be as a minimum
those given in Clause A15 of this Volume 3.
D2. CHECKING OF THE CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN
The Contractor shall, prior to commencing the construction of the Temporary Works, submit
a certificate to the Engineer, based on the `Design Certificate' enclosed as Attachment C1 in
Section C of this Volume 3, signed by the Lead Designer and the Lead Design Checker, certifying
that the Temporary Works have been properly and safely designed and checked, and that the
Contractor has checked the effect of the Temporary Works on the Permanent Works and has
found this to be satisfactory.
D3.THE SITE
1) Works Areas will be handed to the Contractor soon after the Commencement Date. For
the works in the roads, pedestrian walkways, pavements, promenades etc. the
respective site can be assessed after a traffic diversion plan is duly approved by the
Traffic Police Department and relevant statutory authorities.
Use of the Site
2) The Site or Contractor's Equipment shall not be used by the Contractor for any purpose
other than for carrying out the Works, except that, with a Notice from the Engineer, the
Site or Contractor's Equipment such as batching and mixing plants for concrete and
bituminous materials may be used for the work in connection with other Contracts
under the Employer.
3) Rock crushing plant shall not be used on the Site.
4) The location and size of each stockpile of materials, including excavated materials,
within the Site shall be as permitted by the Engineer. Stockpiles shall be maintained at
all times in a stable condition and shall be removed whenever instructed by the
Engineer
5) Entry to and exit from the Site shall be controlled by 24-hour security and shall be only
available at the locations for which the Engineer has given a Notice. Notice will only be
given after the Contractor has provided evidence that he has obtained the necessary
approvals from the relevant authorities.
Access to the Site
6) The Contractor shall make his own arrangements, subject to a Notice from the
Engineer, for any further access required to the Site.
72 | P a g e
7) In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that access to every portion of the Site is
continually available to the Employer and the Engineer.
8) Following the handover of the Works to the Employer, the Contractor will be still
responsible for all matters relating to operation and maintenance referred in Clause
3.10, Section II of Volume 1 and associated security and safety. Access to the Site shall
be in accordance with a set of procedures laid down by the Employer.
9) The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any access or egress through the
Site boundaries are controlled such that no disturbance to residents or damage to
public or private property occurs as a result of the use of such access or egress by its
employees and sub-contractors.
Survey of the Site
10) A survey shall be carried out of the Site to establish its precise boundaries and the
existing ground levels within it, as detailed in Clause D4 of Section D of this Volume 3.
This survey shall include a photographic survey sufficient to provide a full record of
the state of the Site and adjacent areas/buildings before commencing the Works, with
particular attention paid to those areas where reinstatement will be carried out later
on. The survey shall be carried out before the site clearance and in any case prior to
the commencement of work in any Works Area. The survey shall be carried out by the
Contractor and will require a Notice from the Engineer.
Barricades and Signboards
11) The Contractor shall erect barricades with gates around his areas of operations to
prevent entry by unauthorized persons to his Works and/or Site Areas and necessary
identity cards /permits should be issued to all of his workers and staff by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a proposal for barricades/gates around the
complete perimeter of all Works areas for which the Engineer shall give a Notice.
Painting of the barricades shall be carried out to the design and colours as directed by
the Engineer and the Contractor shall carry out re-painting of the entire barricades on
an annual basis or sooner as required by the Engineer.
No work shall commence in any Works Area until the Engineer has issued a Notice
signifying that he is satisfied that the barricades installed by the Contractor are
sufficient to prevent, within reason, unauthorised entry. Project signboards shall be
erected not more than four (4) weeks, or such other period as the Engineer has given
his Notice, after the date for commencement of the Works.
The types, sizes and locations of project signboards shall be agreed with the Engineer
before manufacture and erection, other advertising signs shall not be erected on the
Site.
12) A Notice to Proceed from the Engineer shall be obtained before hoardings, fences, gates
or signs are removed. Hoardings, fences, gates and signs which are to be left in position
after the completion of the Works shall be repaired and repainted as instructed by the
Engineer.
13) Hoardings, barricades, gates and signs shall be maintained in clean and good order by
the Contractor until the completion of the Works, whether such hoardings, fences,
gates and signs have been installed by the Contractor or by others and ownership
73 | P a g e
transferred to the Contractor during the period of the Works. All the fencing,
hoardings, gates and signs etc. shall be mopped a minimum of once a week and
thoroughly washed once a month.
14) All hoardings, barricades, gates and signs installed by the Contractor shall be removed
by the Contractor upon the completion of the Works, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
15) Hoarding/ barricades can be reused after removing from one place to other locations
/ sites provided they are in good condition and a Notice is issued by the Engineer.
16) Damaged/worn-out barricades /hoardings shall be replaced by the Contractor within
24 hours. The Engineer’s decision regarding need for replacement shall be final and
binding.
Clearance of the Site
17) All Temporary Works which are not to remain on the Site after the completion of the
Works shall be removed prior to completion of the Works or at other times instructed
by the Engineer. The Site shall be cleared and reinstated to the lines and levels and to
the same or better condition as existed before the Works started except as otherwise
stated in the Contract.
Casting Yard
18) The Contractor has to make his own arrangements for a casting yard/works area(s)
and other facilities without any liability to the Employer.
19) Upon completion of the Contract the area of land shall be cleared of all debris,
structures made by the Contractor, RCC footings and rafts, rubbish and debris, etc. and
returned to its original condition before being handing back to the Employer, at no
extra cost to the Employer.
20) The final Interim Payment Certificate shall only be released to the Contractor after all
structures, debris, rubbish, etc. have been removed from the casting yard/works area
and the area returned to its original condition.
21) A Mechanical Type Washing Plant shall be installed by the Contractor for the use of all
vehicles leaving the casting yard area to avoid any contamination or spillage on the
connecting roads. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing access into the
sites, clearing the sites of vegetation, removing unsuitable materials and placing
disposal material with suitable compaction.
22) The Contractor has to make his own arrangement for muck disposal site.
23) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing access into the muck disposal sites,
clearing the sites of vegetation, removal of unsuitable materials and placing disposal
material with suitable compaction.
24) A mechanical type washing plant shall be installed by the Contractor for the use of all
vehicles leaving the muck disposal site to avoid any contamination or spillage on the
connecting roads.
D4. SURVEY
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the survey reference points.
74 | P a g e
2) The Contractor shall relate the construction of the Works to the Project Grid. To
facilitate this, survey reference points have been established and the Engineer will
provide benchmarks and Traverse points in the vicinity of the Site areas.
3) Before the Contractor commences the setting out of the Works, the Engineer will
provide a drawing showing the position of each survey reference point and bench
mark, together with the co-ordinates and/or level assigned to each point. The
Contractor shall carry out detailed survey to check the proposed alignment
maintaining vertical and horizontal clearances. In case of any differences from the
Employer’s drawings or data, the Contractor shall bring these to the Notice of the
Engineer immediately and submit his proposals for correction. The Engineer shall
either, issue a Notice, modify or ask the Contractor to resubmit the proposals within a
period of 14 days. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that there are no further
conflicts between the data given and shall establish and provide all subsidiary setting
out points, monuments, towers and the like which may be necessary for the proper and
accurate setting out and checking of the Works.
4) The Contractor shall carefully protect all the survey reference points, bench marks,
setting out points, monuments, towers and the like from any damages and shall
maintain them and promptly repair or replace any points damaged from any causes
whatsoever. The Contractor shall recheck every three months, the position of all
setting out points, bench marks and the like, for a Notice by the Engineer.
5) Upon handover to the Contractor, the survey reference points will become the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall check the survey reference points
every three months to ensure that these survey points continue to remain consistent
with the bench marks.
D5. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall comply with the conditions and requirements stipulated in the
Occupational Health, Safety & Environment (OHS&E) Plan contained in Appendix 17 of this
Volume 3 - Employer’s Requirements and in Sections 1 to 3 of Volume 7 Reference Documents.
D6. OTHER SAFETY MEASURES
1) The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions and select appropriate tools,
equipment and installation methods to avoid causing a nuisance arising from his
operations and shall minimise inconvenience to the public.
2) The Contractor shall prevent dust from rising as a result of his activities and shall take
all necessary dust control and suppression measures.
3) All Contractor's Equipment used on the Contract shall be fitted with a means of
suppressing radio and television interference and shall be operated and maintained in
such manner so as to minimize the emission of smoke and obnoxious fumes.
4) The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site at all times during the
term of this Contract. The Contractor shall control all entry and exit to and from the
Site for his personnel, personnel from the Employer, Engineer, Interfacing Contractors,
Sub-contractors and suppliers, by pedestrians and for all vehicles. All of the
Contractor’s personnel shall be required to carry an identity/security card or pass
which provides positive photo identification and they shall be required to show the
75 | P a g e
pass when entering or leaving the Site. This shall apply to all personnel on the Site
including, but not limited to, the Contractor’s staff, all Interfacing Contractors/
Interfacing Agencies, Sub-contractors staff, Suppliers, Consultants, etc. and the staff of
the Employer and Engineer. Provision shall be made for issue of visitors‟ passes for
other personnel authorized to enter the Site as visitors. Visitors on Site shall be
escorted by appropriate Site based personnel at all times.
5) The Contractor shall be deemed to have made allowance in his price and programme
for the impact on the Works as a result of any delay due to the provision of access to,
and through the site generally, for Interfacing Contractors/Interfacing Agencies and
MEP Subcontractor, relocation of temporary works, provision of security, lighting,
signage, barriers, complying with all government and local authority regulations, etc.
6) No tunnel boring machine shall be used without a Notice to proceed being issued by
the Engineer.
7) The Contractor shall prepare a detailed specification for the operation of each tunnel
boring machine for submission to the Engineer for a Notice.
D7. CARE OF THE WORKS
1) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer all work shall be carried out in dry
conditions.
2) The Works, including materials for use in the Works, shall be protected from damage
due to water. Water on the Site and water entering the Site shall be promptly removed
by temporary drainage or pumping systems or by other methods capable of keeping
the Works free of water. Silt and debris shall be removed by traps before the water is
discharged and shall be disposed of at a location or locations to which the Engineer has
given Notice.
3) The discharge points of the temporary systems shall be as per the Notice of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the necessary
approval from the relevant authorities for discharging water to drains, watercourses,
etc. The relevant work shall not commence until the approved arrangements for
disposal of the water have been implemented.
4) The methods used for keeping the Works free from water shall be such that settlement
of, or damage to, new and existing structures does not occur.
5) Measures shall be taken to prevent settlement, damage, flotation, etc. to new and
existing structures.
Protection of the Works from Weather
6) Work shall not be carried out in weather conditions that may adversely affect the
Works unless proper protection is provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7) Permanent Works, including materials for such Works, shall be protected from
exposure to all weather conditions that may adversely affect such Permanent Works
or materials.
8) During construction of the Works storm restraint systems shall be provided to ongoing
construction works, where appropriate. These systems shall ensure the security of the
partially completed and ongoing stages of construction in all weather conditions. Such
storm restraint systems shall be installed as soon as practicable and shall be
compatible with the right of way, or other access around or throughout the Site.
76 | P a g e
9) The Contractor shall, at all times programme and order progress of the Works and
make all protective arrangements such that the Works can be made safe in the event
of storms.
10) The Contractor is responsible for any damage of work during construction due to tide,
wave effect, surge etc. Damage to walls, rock cores, under layers and secondary armour
which have not been fully protected with the final armouring is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
Protection of the Work
11) The finished works shall be protected from any damage that could arise from any
activities on the adjacent site/ works.
D8. DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE
1) Work shall be carried out in such a manner that there is no damage to or interference
with:
a) Watercourses or drainage systems;
b) Utilities;
c) Structures (including foundations), roads, including street furniture, or other
properties;
d) Public or private vehicular or pedestrian access;
e) Monuments, trees, graves or burial grounds other than to the extent that is
necessary for them to be removed or diverted to permit the execution of the
Works, as approved by statutory authorities, etc.
f) Heritage structures shall not be damaged or disfigured on any account. The
Contractor shall inform the Engineer as soon as practicable of any items which
are not stated in the Contract to be removed or diverted but which the
Contractor considers need to be removed or diverted to enable the Works to
be carried out. Such items shall not be removed or diverted until a Notice from
the Engineer to such removal or diversion has been obtained.
2) Items which are damaged or interfered with as a result of the Works and items which
are removed to enable work to be carried out shall be reinstated to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and to the same or better condition as existed before the work started.
Utilities
Refer to Appendix 11 of this Volume 3. Any claims by Utility Agencies due to damage of utilities
by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor Deposits, if any required for shifting of
utilities shall be borne by the Contractor.
Structures, Roads and Other Properties
3) The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of any damage to structures,
roads or other properties at handover of the site(s) or during the Contract duration.
Access
4) Alternative access shall be provided to all premises if interference with the existing
access, public or private, is necessary to enable the Contractor’s Works to be carried
77 | P a g e
out. The arrangements for the alternative access shall be as agreed by the Engineer and
any concerned agency or building management. Unless agreed otherwise, the
permanent access shall be reinstated as soon as practicable after the work is complete
and the alternative access shall be removed immediately when it is no longer required,
and the ground surfaces reinstated to its original position to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Proper signage and guidance shall be provided for the traffic / users regarding
diversions.
Trees
5) As follows:
a) The Contractor is not permitted to cut or fell any trees without first obtaining
approval from the appropriate authorities and then obtaining a Notice from the
Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all trees that require cutting or felling
and make applications to the appropriate authorities and the Engineer for the
necessary works at least 6 months in advance of the required date for the
cutting or felling works.
b) Tree cutting outside non-permanent works areas should be avoided as far as
possible and specific justification needs to be submitted for approval from the
appropriate authorities and for Engineer for a Notice before cutting trees in
these areas.
c) Trees which are found suitable for transplanting, as decided by the Engineer,
need to be replanted in an area near to the site (within 1 km) at locations
determined by Engineer.
d) Maintenance of trees transplanted outside the works area will become the
responsibility of the Employer.
Removal of Graves and Other Obstructions
6) If any graves and other obstructions are required to be removed in order to execute
the Works and such removal has not already been arranged for, the Contractor shall
draw the Engineer's attention to them in good time to allow all necessary
arrangements and authorizations for such removal, and the Contractor shall not
remove them without first obtaining approval from the appropriate authorities and
then obtaining a Notice from the Engineer.
Protection of the Structures Above and Adjacent to the Works
7) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the buildings and
structures above and adjacent to the Works, and works being carried out by others
adjacent to and within the Site, from the effects of vibrations, undermining and any
other earth movements or the diversion of water flow arising from its work.
78 | P a g e
Pre-Construction Surveys of Adjacent Buildings and Structures
8) The Contractor shall submit details of the measures he intends to take to protect those
buildings or structures, as potentially susceptible to damage during the construction
of the Works, to the Engineer for a Notice for the proposed measures.
Prior to commencing any work within the 50m zone of influence of the buildings and
structures, the Contractor shall complete a pre-construction survey to identify and record and
structural audit of any existing defects in the building structure and fabric. A separate survey
report shall be prepared for each building/structure in the pre-construction stage, in an agreed
format, and given a Notice by the Engineer.
The report shall include sufficient key plans, sketches, photographs and videos to enable easy
location of existing defects and comparison with possible future ones. Two coloured copies of
all of the pre-construction survey reports shall be provided to the Engineer, and a further copy
of the appropriate pre-construction survey report shall be issued to the building/structure
owner for their information and a signed receipt form/letter acknowledging the owners
receipt of such shall be retained by the Contractor.
Also refer to Volume 4, Section 2, Sub-section 4.
D9. SITE ESTABLISHMENT
Engineer’s Site Accommodation

1) Within 30 days of the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall provide and maintain
site accommodation for the Engineer’s staff as set out in Appendix 13 and at a location
given a Notice by the Engineer. The accommodation shall be retained until 90 days
after the issue of a Taking-over certificate for the Works by the Engineer.
2) The Contractor shall submit details of the site accommodation layout to the Engineer
for a Notice, prior to establishing the accommodation.
3) The accommodation shall be cleaned and serviced daily and security shall be provided
24 hours a day, 7 days per week. Full capacity stand-by power shall be available during
periods when main power is unavailable. The Contractor shall also provide
Uninterrupted Power Supply equipment to the computer facilities provided by the
Engineer in the site accommodation.
Site Laboratory
4) The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain in a clean, stable and secure condition
a laboratory, equipped for the routine testing of concrete, soil and rock samples and
for the storage and curing of concrete cubes or cylinders only. This laboratory shall be
located at the Contractor's principal work site or at a location issued a Notice by the
Engineer. Detailed requirements for this laboratory are set out in Appendix 13 of this
Volume 3.
External Laboratory
5) The tests shall be conducted in external laboratories as required. Such laboratories
shall be fully equipped and authenticated to carry out the required tests, and duly
noticed by the Engineer.
Contractor's Site Accommodation

6) The Contractor shall provide and maintain its own site accommodation at locations
issued a Notice by the Engineer. Offices, sheds, stores, mess rooms, garages,
79 | P a g e
workshops, latrines and other accommodation on the Site shall be maintained in a

clean, stable and secure condition and shall comply with the requirements of
Attachment D1 of this section. Under no circumstances is living accommodation to be
provided on the Site. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Appendix
8 of this Volume 3.
Latrines and Wash places

7) As follows:
i. The Contractor shall provide latrines and wash places for the use of its
personnel and all persons who will be on the Site. The size and disposition of
latrines and wash places shall accord with the numbers and dispositions of
persons entitled to be on the Site, which may necessitate their location on
structures and, where necessary there shall be separate facilities for males and
females. The capacities and layout shall be subject to a Notice from the
Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange regular disposal of effluent and sludge
in a manner that shall be in accordance with local laws/ regulations.
ii. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all latrines and wash
places on the Site in a clean and sanitary condition and for ensuring that they
do not pose a nuisance or a health threat. The Contractor shall also take such
steps and make such provisions as may be necessary or directed by the
Engineer to ensure that vermin, mosquito breeding etc. are at all times
controlled.
Site Utilities and Access

8) As follows:
a) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing water, electricity, telephone,
sewerage and drainage facilities for the Engineer’s site accommodation,
Contractor’s site offices, structures and buildings and for all site laboratories
and all such services that are necessary for satisfactory performance of the
Works. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the
necessary approval from the relevant civil and utility authorities for the
facilities.
b) The Contractor shall note the requirements for the supply and provision of
power and water services for all Interface Contractors, as noted in Appendix
16 of this Volume 3.
c) The contractor shall be responsible for provision of power supply for his works
including for tunneling machines and the like. The Employer cannot guarantee
provision of adequate, continuous power supply; however, assistance will be
given in trying to obtaining the necessary permissions for site generators and
the like.
9) Access roads and parking areas shall be provided within the Site as required and shall
be maintained in a clean, acceptable and stable condition. For lengths of roadway
longer than 100 m and where vehicle movements exceed one hundred (100)
movements/day and heavy commercial vehicle are to ply the Contractor shall provide
paved surfacing of adequate thickness and quality to the satisfaction the Engineer.
10) Any operation of the Works that interferes with the inspection of the Works and/or
the checking of lines and levels shall be temporarily suspended at the request of the
Engineer until the checking is complete.
80 | P a g e
Submission of Particulars
11) The following particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for his Notice to proceed
not more than fifty-six (56) days after the Commencement Date of the Works:
a) Drawings showing the formation works and the layout within earmarked area
for the Contractor's offices, project signboards, principal access and other
major facilities required early in the Contract, together with all service utilities;
b) Drawings showing the details to be included on the project signboards and
diversion boards.
12) Drawings showing location of stores, storage areas, concrete batching plants and other
major facilities and their access roads/paths shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
Notice as early as possible but in any case, not less than twenty-eight (28) days prior
to when such facilities are intended to be constructed on the Site.
D10. SECURITY
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site for the full time the Site
is in its possession, except for the specific cases as described under Clause D3 (8) of
these Employer's Requirements – Construction (Section D). He shall set up and operate
a system whereby only those persons entitled to be on the Site can enter the Site. To
this end, the Contractor shall, with a Notice from the Engineer, erect a security
fence/barricade, with a minimum height of 2m, around the site areas, with only specific
points at which entry through the fence/barricade can be effected, and shall provide
gates or movable barricades at such points of entry and thereby maintain a twenty four
hours a day, seven days a week security guard and such other security personal and
patrols elsewhere as necessary to maintain security.
2) The Contractor shall maintain all site boundary fences in a first-class condition and
shall so arrange site boundary fences at all access drainage points of work areas that
its use of such access points etc., are not restricted by the system or method of
achieving the required security measures. Notices shall be displayed at intervals
around the Site to warn the public of the dangers of entering the Site.
3) During the progress of the Works the Contractor shall maintain such additional
security patrols over the areas of the Works as may be necessary to protect his own
and his Sub-contractor's work and equipment and shall co-ordinate and plan the
security of both the work under this Contract and the work of others having access to
and across the Site and the Works.
4) In order to operate such a security system, it will be necessary to institute the issue of
unique ID passes to personnel and vehicles entitled to be on the Site, and which may
need to be separately identifiable according to the shifts being worked on Site. The
Contractor shall at the outset determine, together with the Engineer, a system and the
design of ID passes to suit the requirements of the foregoing and to suit the methods
of work to be adopted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall at all times ensure that
the Engineer has an up to date list of all persons entitled to be on the Site at any time.
The Contractor shall also introduce a system for issuing passes to any visitors or
persons/vehicles belonging to agencies other than Employer/
5) Engineer/Interfacing Contractors who may have to visit the site in connection with
work
81 | P a g e
6) The Contractor shall liaise with the Contractors responsible for the other Projects and
other Interfacing Contractors and ensure that co-ordinated security procedures are
operated, in particular in respect of vehicles permitted to pass through the Site and/or
the adjacent sites in the latter periods of the Contract.
7) Security and checking arrangements as felt necessary shall be provided with advice
and help of the Police.
D11. TESTING
General
1) The Contractor shall provide and perform all forms of testing procedures applicable to
the Works and various components and the interfacing of the Works with the other
project works and shall conduct all necessary factory, site and acceptance tests.
2) All testing procedures shall be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to conducting
any Test. The Testing procedures shall show unambiguously the extent of testing
covered by each submission, the method of testing, the Acceptance Criteria, the
relevant drawing (or modification) status and the location.
3) The testing Procedures shall be submitted, as required, by the Contractor during the
duration of the Contract to reflect changes in system design or the identification of
additional testing requirements.
4) The Engineer shall have the facilities for monitoring all tests and have access to all
testing records. Ample time shall be allowed within the testing programmes for
necessary alterations to equipment, systems and designs to be undertaken, together
with re-testing prior to final commissioning.
5) The Contractor is reminded that at some point, the High Voltage Power Supply system
will be energised and the additional precautions for the safety of staff and co-
ordination of activities after power-on shall be anticipated.
6) All costs associated with the Testing shall be borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise
specified, including the services of any specialized personnel or independent
assessors. The Contractor shall also bear any expenses incurred due to resetting
caused by defects or failure of equipment to meet the requirements of the Contract in
the first instance.
7) Unless a Notice is issued by the Engineer, the personnel engaged on testing shall be
independent of those directly engaged in the design or installation of the same
equipment.
8) All testing equipment shall carry an appropriate and valid calibration labels.
9) All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer’s Representatives.
Batches, Samples and Specimens
10) A batch of material is a specified quantity of the material that satisfies the specified
conditions. If one of the specified conditions is that the material is delivered to the Site
at the same time, then material delivered to the Site over a period of a few days may
be considered as part of the same batch if in the opinion of the Engineer there is
sufficient proof that the other specified conditions applying to the batch apply to all of
the material delivered over the period.
82 | P a g e
11) A sample is a specified quantity of material that is taken from a batch for testing and
which consists of a specified amount, or a specified number of pieces or units, of the
material.
12) A specimen is the portion of a sample that is to be tested.
Samples for Testing
13) Samples shall be of sufficient size and in accordance with relevant Standards to carry
out all specified tests.
14) Unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer samples taken on the Site shall be selected
by or taken in the presence of the Engineer and shall be suitably marked for their
identification. An identification marking system should be evolved at the start of works
in consultation with the Engineer.
15) Samples shall be protected, handled and stored in such a manner that they are not
damaged or contaminated and such that the properties of the sample do not change.
16) Samples shall be delivered by the Contractor, under the supervision of the Engineer, to
the specified place of testing. Samples on which non-destructive tests have been
carried out shall be collected from the place of testing after testing and delivered to the
Site or other locations instructed by the Engineer.
17) Samples which have been tested may be incorporated in the Permanent Works
provided that:
a) The sample complies with the specified requirements;
b) The sample is not damaged; and
c) The sample is not required to be retained under any other provision of the
Contract.
18) Additional samples shall be provided for testing if in the opinion of the Engineer:
d) Material previously tested no longer complies with the specified requirements;
or
e) Material has been handled or stored in such a manner that it may not comply
with the specified requirements.
Testing
19) The Contractor shall be responsible for all on-site and off-site testing and for all in-situ
testing. All appropriate laboratory tests shall be carried out in the Contractor's
laboratory, unless otherwise permitted or required by the Engineer. Where the
laboratory is not appropriately equipped and/or staffed for some tests, or if a Notice
has been issued by the Engineer, tests may be carried out in other laboratories
provided that:
a) They are accredited for the relevant work to a standard acceptable to the Engineer;
and
b) Particulars of the proposed laboratory are submitted to the Engineer for a Notice.
20) Unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer in-situ tests shall be done in the presence of
the Engineer.
21) Equipment, apparatus and materials for in-situ tests and laboratory compliance tests
carried out by the Contractor shall be provided by the Contractor. The equipment and
apparatus shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall be calibrated before the
testing starts and at regular intervals as permitted by the Engineer. The equipment,
83 | P a g e
apparatus and materials for in-the situ tests shall be removed by the Contractor as
soon as practicable after the testing is complete.
22) The Contractor shall be entitled in all cases to attend the testing carried out in the
Employer's or other laboratories, to inspect the calibration certificates of the testing
machines and to undertake the testing on counterpart samples. Testing of such
samples shall be undertaken in laboratories complying with Clause D12 (18) above
and particulars of the laboratory proposed shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
Notice to proceed prior to the testing.
23) Attendance on tests, including that by the Engineer, Contractor and Designer, shall be
as laid down in the Quality Assurance procedures.
Compliance of Batch
24) The results of tests on samples or specimens shall be considered to represent the
whole batch from which the sample was taken.
25) A batch shall be considered as complying with the specified requirements for a
material if the results of specific tests for the specified properties comply with the
specified requirements for the properties.
26) If additional tests are permitted or required by the Engineer but separate compliance
criteria for the additional tests are not stated in the Contract, the Engineer shall
determine if the batch complies with the specified requirements for the material on
the basis of the results of all tests, including the additional tests, for every property.
Records of Tests
27) Records of in-situ tests and laboratory compliance tests carried out by the Contractor
shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to the
Engineer within seven (7) days, or such other time stated in the Contract or in the
Quality Assurance Programme, after completion of each test. In addition to any other
requirements, the report shall contain the following details:
a) Material or part of the Works tested;
b) Location of the batch from which the samples were taken or location of the part
of the Works;
c) Place of testing;
d) Date and time of tests;
e) Weather conditions in the case of in-situ tests;
f) Technical personnel supervising or carrying out the tests;
g) Size and description of samples and specimens;
h) Method of sampling;
i) Properties tested;
j) Method of testing;
k) Readings and measurements taken during the tests;
l) Test results, including any calculations and graphs;
m) Specified acceptance criteria; and
n) Other details stated in the Contract.
28) Reports of tests shall be signed by the Project Manager or his assistant, or by another
representative authorized by the Contractor.
29) If requested, records of tests carried out by the Employer's staff or by the Engineer
shall be given to the Contractor.
84 | P a g e
PRODUCTION TESTS (AT FACTORY)
30) Should the Works include any equipment not previously proven in service the
Contractor shall undertake a thorough testing of the same at pre-production stage to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall identify any equipment in this
category, or equipment that differs significantly from that already in service elsewhere.
31) All materials, components, sub-assemblies, unit assemblies (including software, cables
and wiring) shall be subject to testing and certification. Notification of these tests shall
be submitted to the Engineer thirty (30) days in advance of carrying out any tests, The
Engineer will then determine which items, if any, may be accepted based on previous
supply or experience.
32) Factory Tests shall include but not be limited to:
• Physical inspection
• Dimension check
• Electrical check
• Calibration
• Output check
• Operational performance
• Full Load test
• Flash-over test
• Insulation test
• Soak test
• Non-destructive test to assess integrity or strength of parts
• As specified by the manufacturer.
33) Where processor-based equipment is to be used then the Manufacturing Test shall
include also verification of software used in this application.
POST INSTALLATION TESTS (ON SITE)

34) During and on completion of the installation, the Contractor shall undertake testing of
all cables, wiring and equipment, instrumentation and protection devices, in a
progressive sequence and in accordance with the overall testing programme. These
tests shall culminate in functional tests to verify the correct operation of all apparatus
and, where appropriate, correct response to the respective control commands or
monitored function.
35) Following satisfactory completion of these Tests, the Contractor shall prepare the
installation for official demonstration in the presence of the Engineer.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
36) The Contractor shall prepare and organize a comprehensive programme of acceptance
Tests to demonstrate to the Engineer that all systems, sub-systems and apparatus
defined under the Contract meet the specified performance requirements in all
respects.
37) These Tests shall be conducted by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
85 | P a g e
D12. RECORDS
Drawings Produced by the Contractor

1) Drawings produced by the Contractor including drawings of site layouts,
Temporary Works, etc., for submission to the Engineer shall generally be to ISO
A1 size. They shall display a title block showing the information detailed in
Appendix 7 of this Volume 3. The number of copies to be submitted to the
Engineer shall be as stated in the Contract, or as required by Engineer.
Progress Photographs
2) The Contractor shall provide monthly progress photographs which have been
properly recorded to show the progress of the works to the Engineer. The
photographs shall be digital and taken on locations agreed with the Engineer
to record the exact progress of the Works. The number and size shall be as
required in Appendix 5 (9) of this Volume 3.
3) The Contractor shall mount each set of each month's progress photographs in
a separate album of a type to which the Engineer has given a Notice and shall
provide for each photograph two typed self-adhesive labels, one of which shall
be mounted immediately below the photograph and one on the back of the
photograph. Each label shall record the information detailed in Appendix 5 (9)
of this Employer’s Requirements.
4) All photographs shall be taken by a skilled photographer using a digital single-
lens reflex camera of at least 6 megapixels, whose name and experience shall
be submitted to the Engineer for his Notice to proceed. Processing shall be
carried out by a competent processing firm to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5) The Contractor shall ensure that no other photography is permitted on the Site
without a Notice from the Engineer. The Contractor should be aware of the
local regulations and conditions with regard to Photography in some
“RESTRICTED AREAS‟ in Mumbai.
Records of Wage Rates
6) The Contractor shall keep monthly records of the average, high and low wage
rates for each trade/tradesman employed on the Site and records shall be
made available to the Engineer during inspection.
D13. MATERIALS
1. Materials and goods for inclusion in the Permanent Works shall be new unless the
Engineer has issued a Notice otherwise. Preference shall be given to local materials
where available. Approved Manufacturers/Suppliers of few important items have been
given in Appendix 9 of this Volume 3. These materials shall be procured only from
these Manufacturers/Suppliers.
2. Certificates of tests by manufacturers which are to be submitted to the Engineer shall
be current and shall relate to the batch of material delivered to the Site. Certified true
copies of certificates may be submitted if the original certificates could not be obtained
from the manufacturer.
86 | P a g e
3. Parts of materials which are to be assembled on the Site shall be marked to identify the
different parts.
4. Materials which are specified by means of trade or proprietary names may be
substituted by materials from a different manufacturer which have received a Notice
from the Engineer, provided that the materials are of the same or better quality and
comply with the specified requirements.
5. Samples of materials submitted to the Engineer for information or Notice shall be kept
on the Site by the Contractor in a secure dry storage room and shall not be returned to
the Contractor or used in the Permanent Works unless the Engineer has issued a Notice
to proceed. The samples shall be used as a means of comparison which the Engineer
shall use to determine the quality of the materials subsequently delivered. Materials
delivered to the Site for use in the Permanent Works shall be of the same or better
quality as the samples which have received a Notice.
Provision of Earthworks Material and Disposal including Waste
6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all classes of earthworks
material required for the Works, whether sourced from the excavations within the
Contract or obtained from any other sources, which are located outside the Site, for
which the Engineer has given a Notice. A Notice to proceed will only be given after the
Contractor has provided evidence that the Contractor is legally authorized to extract
material from the source.
7. For fill or dumping sites, the Contractor shall prepare a land plan with details of surface
drainage requirements, final formation levels, spreading and compaction of the fill
during dumping acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall also provide security
for such sites. The dumping sites to be used by the Contractor shall be identified and
provided by the Contractor and with the approval of the relevant authorities and
having obtained a Notice from the Engineer.
8. All excavated material, excluding waste material, bentonite fluid and bentonite
contaminated material shall be disposed of at approved sites only. This material shall
be placed and compacted in accordance with the Construction Specification for Earth
Works or as otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representative.
9. The disposal of waste material, bentonite fluid and material contaminated with
bentonite shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor and these materials shall be
disposed of by the Contractor in a location approved by relevant authorities.
10. The surplus excavated material (that cannot be used in the Works), shall be treated as
Contractor’s property. The Contractor shall be free to take away and make use of this
surplus spoil (including rock spoil) in the manner he wishes to. However, the method
of handling, transportation, place of storage, any processing/reprocessing at a plant
(including its location) and its end use shall comply with all the rules and regulations
in force including that pertaining to occupational Health, Safety & Environment
(OHS&E) etc. and as approved by the Employer/Engineer. The Contractor shall submit
a detailed proposal to the Engineer for seeking the Employer’s/Engineer’s approval for
the same.
11. The muck/spoil that is acceptable and can be used at a later stage in the Works shall
be temporarily stockpiled in a dumpsite as proposed by the Contractor and agreed by
87 | P a g e
the Engineer and the concerned regulating authorities with no extra cost to the
Employer. No extra land shall be provided by the Employer for such stockpiling.
12. The surplus muck/spoil (soil/spoil/material/building debris), which is not acceptable
or cannot be accommodated for use in the Works or cannot be made use of by the
Contractor for his own purpose, shall be disposed of at the approved dumping area(s).
13. For disposing of the spoil/muck at a muck-disposal site, the Contractor shall take, but
not be limited to, the following measures to ensure proper muck/spoil disposal:
▪ The muck disposal site shall be ecologically restored to the maximum extent
possible duly ensuring that the water quality, air quality and the soils and
vegetation of surrounding areas are not contaminated.
▪ The adequate precautionary measures shall be implemented by the Contractor
at disposal site to ensure that there is no possibility of soil erosion and other
impacts of loose soils on the local water bodies,
▪ The Contractor shall ensure that the muck disposal site will be free from active
landslides or creeps and will not have a possibility of toe erosion related slope
failure.
▪ The Contractor shall ensure that disposal of muck/spoil at muck dumping site
shall not lead to flooding being caused in the surroundings.
▪ The dumped muck shall be mechanically compacted in layers and properly
levelled with suitable safe slopes duly ensuring that proper drainage is
provided for to eliminate problems being caused due to lack of or improper
drainage. In this respect the Contractor shall submit a detailed method
statement to the Engineer for obtaining a Notice to Proceed.
▪ To protect the dump from getting disturbing by human and domestic animals
activities, fencing shall be provided at the perimeter of the muck/spoil disposal
site. The Contractor shall also establish temporary wind barrier around the
dump areas to eliminate air pollution being caused due to wind blowing over
the dumping site
The following measures shall be taken by the Contractor for lorry movement/operations
carrying muck/spoil to and from the muck disposal site:
▪ All dumpers and trucks shall be well maintained and equipped with tarpaulin
sheets and hooks for covering of the loose spoil properly during its
transportation.
▪ The vehicle speeds on unpaved roads shall be restricted to 25 Kmph.
▪ The Contractor shall maintain valid PUC – Pollution under Control certificates
and maintain proper maintenance records for their fleet;
▪ Wheel wash system shall be installed and operated at the exit of the muck/spoil
disposal, so that the muck on the tyres of the trucks is cleaned properly before
they move on the roads to prevent dirtying of the public roads.
▪ To control fugitive dust emissions arising during material handling, the heights
from which muck/spoil is dropped shall be reduced to a practical minimum
height.
▪ Dumping shall be avoided during the high-speed wind, so that suspended
particulate matters (SPM) level could be maintained to the acceptable level.
88 | P a g e
14. The Contractor shall note that the muck disposal site location designated for this
Contract package falls in the semi urban area with reasonable road access. However, if
good motorable conditions lack either within the disposal site or its approaches during
the course of muck-disposal, any attention needed to these roads to make them worthy
of Lorries’ movement shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
15. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining the requisite approvals from the concerned
local authorities for his Lorries’ movement plan and their operation.
16. In case the Contractor chooses to recycle the spoil (including the rock spoil) for his
own purpose, the temporary storage and processing facilities shall have to be taken
care of by the Contractor at his own cost.
17. Any Octroi, Royalty, statutory payments/levies or any other charges etc. payable on
the spoil/muck for its disposal or recycling (for Contractor’s own purpose) shall have
to be borne by the Contractor.
D14. PROVISIONS FOR INTERFACING CONTRACTORS
1. The Contractor shall carry out all reasonable civil, structural and building works
necessary for the project as required by the Interfacing Contractors. These works shall
include, but not be limited to, forming holes, casting plinths and trenches, casting in
components and forming holes in pre-cast elements, etc...
2. The Contractor shall make all reasonable provisions to accommodate the fastenings,
fittings and fixings of the Interfacing Contractors. Such provisions will be notified by
the Interfacing Contractors and the Engineer during design interface. The interface
responsibilities of the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors are identified at
Appendix 16 of this Volume 3.
3. (a) Prior to handing over areas of the site to the Interfacing Contractors who have
requested such, the Contractor shall perform the following tasks:
I. Identify all the Interfacing Contractors requesting areas of the site and meet
with each of them to collect and agree on their request (area size, duration
required, services, special requirements, access to track, access to road, etc…).
II. Prepare the areas of the site as necessary, including fencing.
III. Provide at agreed locations along the tunnel, 415V three phase/230V single
phase power supply, suitably earthed and each with sockets capable of
receiving three (3) electric plugs of the size and type used for hand-held
construction equipment
IV. Water supply at agreed locations within the tunnels
The Contractor shall not be responsible for the following services/tasks;

a) Erection of office or workshop buildings for the Interfacing Contractor;
b) Each Interfacing Contractor shall take over responsibility of the safety and
security of its own work area as well as buildings erected within.
c) The Interfacing Contractors will be responsible for reimbursement to the
Contractor of the utility charges for the consumption of power and water by
the Interfacing Contractors, which will be individually metered for each
Interfacing Contractor. The Contractor will charge the Interfacing Contractor
for consumption of power and water at the same unit rates as paid by the
Contractor to the authorities for such utilities.
89 | P a g e
d) The Contractor shall provide power, water, electric lighting, etc. to a standard
which shall facilitate safe working conditions for his works and all works by
the Interfacing Contractors.
4. The Employer and Engineer will hold Project Quarterly Review Meetings at three
monthly intervals. The Contractor shall attend these QRM and shall report the progress
of his works and the state of his interface with other Interfacing Contractors and shall
provide the Engineer with the necessary assistance and information for conducting the
QRM. Refer to Clause A18 of Section A of these Employer’s Requirements.
D15. RESTORATION OF AREAS DISTURBED BY CONSTRUCTION
1) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, any areas disturbed by the

construction activity, either inside or outside the Project Right of Way or Site
Areas, shall be reinstated as follows:
All areas affected by the construction work shall be reinstated to their original
condition, or better, with new materials, including but not necessarily limited
to, sidewalks, parking lots, access roads, adjacent roads, adjacent properties
and landscaping. Grass cover shall be provided for any bare earth surface areas,
along with proper provisions for surface drainage.
D16. TUNNEL BORING MACHINES
The Contractor shall deploy sufficient no. of Tunnel Boring Machines complete with all back-
up equipment and spares to compete the Works within the Key Dates and completion time.
The Tunnel Boring Machines should have, as a minimum, the following facilities:
General
1) Tunnel shields supplied by the Contractor shall be truly circular, strong enough to
avoid distortion during driving, and suitable for building the tunnel linings as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
2) The Contractor shall supply, erect, drive, maintain, dismantle and remove the shields,
which shall remain the property of the Contractor upon completion.
3) The machine design shall make adequate provision for the safety of the workmen and
the application of safe methods of tunnelling.
4) The machines shall be shop manufactured in units of convenient size, suitable for field
erection, dismantling and reassemble under the site conditions of the Contract.
5) The machines shall be equipped with shove rams of sufficient capacity to move it
through all materials encountered, to the lines and grades shown. The rams shall be
capable of simultaneous and individual actuation, controllable individual pressure and
variable extension.
6) Rams shall be fitted with proper shoes so placed that the reaction of the rams will be
safely distributed against the tunnel linings.
7) The machines shall be equipped with a tunnel lining erector system capable of placing
each lining segment safely into its final position along the periphery of the ring being
erected and filling gap behind lining by grouting
8) The machine design shall permit removal of the structure from within the skin that
may be left in place at the completion of the tunnel drive.
90 | P a g e
9) During the tunneling operation, the Contractor shall provide and maintain CCTV
systems with 2 cameras placed strategically within the tunnels. The CCTV system shall
be linked to the office of the Engineer and the 2 cameras shall move in tandem with the
shield.
10) Hand held extinguishers should be sited at suitable locations on the shield and the
shield back up.
11) The Contractor shall use hydraulic oil in the machines which will minimize to the
utmost the risk of an oil fire.
12) The Contractor shall provide a backup power supply system for tunnelling machines
and emergency case hydraulic pressure control systems.
13) Where slurry system TBMs are proposed, the slurry treatment plant shall be designed
such that the residual soil after treatment is suitable for filling and compaction in
accordance with the Earthworks section of the Construction Specifications.
Design Requirements - TBM and Closed Face Machines
1) The cutter head of TBM and closed face machines shall be capable of clockwise and
anticlockwise rotation and shall only be able to excavate the ground whilst the
hydraulic rams are being actuated. The design of the machine shall ensure that the
cutter head can be retracted back from the unexcavated ground to minimise the risk of
the machine jamming and to facilitate maintenance.
2) The cutting head discs/picks shall be able to be renewed from the rear of the cutter
head and be interchangeable.
3) Where boulders could occur on the tunnel face, the machine head shall permit a
minimum 300 mm boulder to be pushed through the cutter head. The machine shall
have the capability to handle, break up as required and remove such boulders through
the screw conveyor or slurry discharge aperture without special procedures.
4) The machine tail skin shall be fitted with an adequate tail seal to prevent the ingress of
water and/or grout. The tail seals shall be replaceable from within the tunnel. A grout
seal, located at the rear of the tail shield, shall be considered to limit grout migration
along the shield towards the cutter head.
5) The machine shall be designed to allow forward drilling through the cutter head for
the purpose of probing ground conditions and to carry out ground treatment to the
face.
6) The machines to be used in soft ground shall be designed to enable the void behind the
segments to be grouted from the shield continuously as the shield is propelled forward
by synchronise operation. The design shall enable the control of the grouting volume
and pressure, and for the pipes to be cleaned in the event of a blockage. Grout pipes
shall be integral within the thickness of the tail skin and a minimum of 4 separate pipes
shall be provided. External grout pipes will not be permitted.
7) Provisions shall be made throughout the length of the machine and back up facilities
for the detection and automatic suppression of fires. The system shall be maintained
in an efficient operating condition at all times.
8) All closed face machines shall be designed to maintain pressure on the excavated
ground at all times. The pressure shall at least balance the in-situ soil and hydraulic
pressures making up the total overburden pressure and shall be capable of varying the
face pressure as the overburden pressure changes. The design shall also take into
91 | P a g e
account the soil type, density, gradation, strength and abrasion. A minimum of six (6)
pressure sensors shall be provided at the bulkhead and three (3) at the screw
conveyor.
9) Slurry and EPB Machines shall be designed for and equipped with a supplemental
ground stabilization system. This system shall comprise regularly spaced grout ports
built into the shield for grouting the ground ahead of the tunnel face. The location and
number of ports shall be adequate for implementation of face stabilization measures
needed for access to the face in all ground conditions. All ports shall be readily
accessible and fitted with valves.
10) All closed face machines shall incorporate a two-compartment air lock for man access
to the cutter head and face. A complete compressed air installation, including
compressor, chiller and medical lock shall also be provided and commissioned prior to
the commencement of tunnelling in soft ground. Work carried out under compressed
air condition shall comply with international standards and local safety regulations.
11) An independent backup system of closing the gate to the screw conveyor shall be
provided in case of hydraulic failure.
12) The machine operation panel shall monitor and where appropriate control the
following:
a) Forward thrust.
b) Ram pressure and location used.
c) Main bearing grease and oil lubrication pressure flow and temperature.
d) Alignment and attitude of shield and segment
e) Electrical load characteristic and supply source Depending on the type of
machine chosen the following items shall be monitored:
f) Face pressure
g) Slurry pressure, gravity and flow rates
h) Earth pressure in the screw conveyor and opening ratio of gate.
i) Compressed air pressure in module.
j) Volume of soil removed correlated with forward advance of the shield.
The Engineer may inspect the fabrication of Tunnel Boring Machine and witness factory
testing at the offshore location(s). The cost for all necessary assistance to facilitate the
inspection and witnessing of tests, including accommodation, flights, visas, permits, lodging,
etc. associated with these visits will be paid by the Contractor.
D17. REINSTATEMENT OF EXTERNAL AREAS
1) The Contractor shall reinstate the external areas as affected by the works to same
condition as at the date of hand over except where shown differently in the intermodal
drawings for each location in Volume 6 or elsewhere in the Contract Document. The
extent of reinstatement shall be at least 150m in all directions from the edge of the
tunnel or shaft structure. At the commencement of Works the Contractor shall take an
inventory of affected features including a photographic/video record covering the area
that will be affected which shall be submitted to the Engineer for Notice. The details of
the reinstatement works shall be agreed with the appropriate Authorities and receive
a Notice from the Engineer before the reinstatement works commence.
92 | P a g e
2) Reinstatement works shall include;

i. Road, footpath and landscape area pavements,
ii. Kerbs, medians, railings, safety rails and other road furniture,
iii. Road signage,
iv. Road marking,
v. Traffic lights,
vi. Street lighting,
vii. Bus stops,
viii. Hard Landscaping including furniture,
ix. Soft Landscaping, and
x. Boundary walls.
xi. Beaches, the foreshore and public area adjacent to the existing seawall and
shore line
3) Except where shown otherwise the reinstatement of the following are not included in
the Works;
a) Buildings,
b) Water wells,
c) Water sumps, and
d) Trees.
4) Contractor should provide assistance to others to transplant or reinstate trees within
the works area.
93 | P a g e
ATTACHMENT D1
CONTRACTOR’S LABOUR CAMP
1. EMPLOYER WILL NOT PROVIDE QUARTERS FOR CONTRACTOR’S LABOUR
The Employer will not provide living accommodation for the use of the Contractor or
any of his staff or labour employed on the Works. Living accommodation shall not be
established on any land provided to the Contractor by the Employer.
2. PROVISION OF LABOUR CAMP
If necessary the Contractor, shall, at his own expense, make adequate arrangements
for the housing, supply of drinking water and provision of bathrooms, latrines and
urinals, with adequate water supply, for his staff and workmen directly or through Sub-
contractors employed on the Works at the location authorized by the Engineer. No
labour camp shall be allowed at any work site or any unauthorized place.
The Contractor at his own cost shall maintain all campsites in a clean and sanitary
condition. The Contractor shall obey all health and sanitary rules and regulations and
carry out at his cost all health and sanitary measures that may from time to time be
prescribed by the Local/Medical Authorities and permit inspection of all health and
sanitary arrangements at all times by the Employer, Engineer and the staff of the local
municipality or other Authorities concerned. Should the Contractor fail to provide
adequate health and sanitary arrangements penalty will be levied on the Contractor
and the same will be recovered from his running account bills.
The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide First Aid and Medical facilities at the
Labour Camp and at work sites on the advice of the Medical Authority in relation to the
experience, and number of the Contractor’s staff and workmen, employed directly or
through Sub-contractors.
The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide the following minimum requirements for
fire precautions:
• Portable Fire Extinguishers.
• Manual Fire Alarms.
• Water Supply for use by the Fire Service.
The Contractor at his own cost shall provide necessary arrangements for keeping the
camp area sufficiently illuminated to avoid accidents to the workers. He should also
ensure that electrical installations are done by Trained Electricians. These installations
shall be maintained, and daily maintenance records must be made available for
inspection of the Engineer.
3. CAMP DISCIPLINE
The Contractor shall take requisite precautions and use his best endeavors to prevent
any riotous or unlawful behavior by or amongst his workmen, and others, employed
directly or through Sub-contractors. These precautions shall be for the preservation of
the peace and protection of the inhabitants and security of property in the
neighborhood of the Works. In the event of the Employer requiring the maintenance
of a Special Police Force at or near the site, during the tenure of the work, the expenses
thereof shall be borne by the Contractor and if paid by the Employer, shall be
recoverable from the Contractor.
94 | P a g e
The sale of alcoholic drinks or other intoxicating drugs or beverages upon the work, in
any labour camp, or in any of the buildings, encampments or tenements owned or
occupied by, or within the control of, the Contractor or any of his employees directly
or through Sub-contractors employed on the work, shall be forbidden, and the
Contractor shall exercise his influence and authority to secure strict compliance with
this condition. The Contractor shall also ensure that no labour or employees are
permitted to work at the site in an intoxicated state or under the influence of drugs.
The Contractor shall remove from his camp such labour and their families, who refuse
to accept protective inoculation and vaccination when called upon by the Medical
Authority. Should Cholera, Plague or any other infectious disease break out, the
Contractor shall at his own cost burn the huts, bedding, clothes and other belongings
of, or used by, the infected parties. The Contractor shall promptly erect new huts on
healthy sites as required by the Employer, within the time specified by the Employer.
4. LABOUR ACCOMMODATION
The Contractor shall provide living accommodation that is equal to or exceeds the
minimum criteria established in the following sub-sections, needed to house his staff,
workers employed directly or through Sub-contractors. The buildings shall be
constructed to have a minimum life of not less than the length of the Contract.
a) The roofs shall be watertight and laid with suitable non-flammable materials
permissible for residential use under local regulations and for which a Notice from the
Engineer has been obtained.
b) Each hut shall have suitable ventilation. All doors, windows, and ventilators shall be
provided with security leaves and fasteners. Back to back units must be avoided.
c) The minimum height of each unit shall be 2.10m and shall have separate cooking place.
d) Suitable number of common toilets/bath facilities shall be provided.
5. WATER SUPPLY
The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of water for the use of labourers in
the Camp. The provision shall not be less than two gallons of pure and wholesome
potable water per head per day for drinking purposes and three gallons of clean water
per head per day for bathing and washing purposes. Where piped water supply is
available, supply shall be at stand posts and where the supply is from wells or river,
tanks of plastic, metal or masonry shall be provided. The Contractor shall also at his
expense make arrangements for the provision and laying of water pipelines from the
existing mains wherever available and shall pay for all the fees and charges therefore.
6. DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide efficient arrangements for draining away spillage water
so as to keep the camp neat and tidy. Surface water shall be drained away from paths
and roads and shall not be allowed to accumulate into ditches or ponds where
mosquitoes can breed.
7. SANITATION
The Contractor shall make arrangements for conservancy and sanitation in the labour
camps according to the rules and regulations of the Local Public Health and Medical
Authorities. The Contractor shall provide a sewage system that is adequate for the
95 | P a g e
number of residents in the camp, and which meets the requirements of the
Municipality Authorities.
Anti-malaria and other health measures:
Anti-Malaria and other health measures shall be taken as directed by the Executive
Health Officer of MCGM. Contractor shall see that mosquito-genic conditions are not
created, and proper and adequate preventive measures are undertaken. Contractor
shall carry out anti-malaria measures in the area as per the guidelines issued by the
Executive Health Officer of MCGM from time to time. In case of default, in carrying
out prescribed anti-malaria measures resulting in increase in malaria incidence,
contractor shall be liable to pay MCGM on anti-malaria measures to control the
situation in addition to fine.
96 | P a g e
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code: GMLR/000
Volume 4
Outline Design Specification
(Part 1 -Civil Works)
1|Page
Disclaimer
Volume 1
Bidding Guidelines
Section I
Notice of Intimation to RFP e – Tender Notice
Section II
Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)
Section III
Form of Tenders
Volume 2
Condition of Contracts
Section IV General Conditions of Contract shall be “FIDIC Conditions of Contract for
Plant and Design-Build – First Edition 1999” (GCC)
Section V
Particular Condition of Contract
Appendices 1 to 19
Section VII Engineering and Geotechnical Report.
Section VIII
Occupational Health and Safety and Environmental Report
2|Page
Volume 4
Main Table of Contents
Section No. Description Page No.
1 ROADS 4
2. TUNNEL WORKS 16
3. CIVIL STRUCTURES 46
3|Page
Volume 4
Section 1
Roads
4|Page
Table of Contents

No. No.
1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 General consideration of planning, design and construction ............................................................. 6

2. DESIGN................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1. General ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2.2. Geometric Design.................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3. Drainage System ................................................................................................................................................... 8
3. PAVEMENT DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Type of Pavement & Parameters of Pavement Design .......................................................................... 8

3.2. Design Life ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3. Design Traffic ......................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.4. Concrete Strength ...............................................................................................................................................10
3.5. Rigid Pavement Design.....................................................................................................................................10
3.6. Details of Joints ....................................................................................................................................................11
3.7. Dowel Bars & Tie Bar ........................................................................................................................................11
4. MATERIALS.....................................................................................................................................................................12
4.1. General ....................................................................................................................................................................12

4.2. For Rigid Pavement Work ...............................................................................................................................12
4.2.1 Cement ....................................................................................................................................................................12
4.2.2 Aggregates .............................................................................................................................................................12
4.2.3 Dry Lean Cement Concrete .............................................................................................................................13
4.2.4 Cement Concrete Pavement ...........................................................................................................................13
4.3. Flexible Pavement Work..................................................................................................................................14
4.3.1 Subgrade and Sub Base Material (Flexible) .............................................................................................14
5. PAVER BLOCKS .............................................................................................................................................................15
5|Page
1. GENERAL
This Document sets for the Specifications and Standards adopted for Road design of the
Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR)Project from Goregaon to Mulund. The Contractor
shall make himself fully aware of the Project Site with regard to the features of the
proposed works, such as location, layout, geometry, right of way, existing accesses, cross
drainage work, etc. including the constraints at the site such as limitation of right of way,
existence of adjoining property, existing structures, utilities, etc. The proposed tunnel length
starts at CH.0+900(LHS) 0+925 (RHS) and end at CH.5+615(LHS) 5+625 (RHS). The design
and construction of Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR)Project comprises of 3+3
carriageway and bored tunnel and exit at Mulund. The project facilities shall meet the
Standards, Specifications and Quality measures specified in this Document.
The Project report and any other information provided by the Employer shall be used by
the Contractor only for reference purpose and for carrying out further investigations. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for undertaking all the activities, that are necessary
for the delivery of the project, such as planning, surveys, investigations, design,
construction planning and management, traffic operation, safety to the users/abutting
property holders and shall have no claim against the Employer for any loss, damage, risk,
costs, liabilities or obligations arising out of or in relation to the project report and other
information provided by the Employer.
For Codes and Standards refer to Section 1, Volume 5.
1.1 General consideration of planning, design and construction
The Project has been planned as an “access-controlled highway” where access to the
highway shall be provided only at pre-determined locations from existing roads through
properly designed entry/exit ramps and or from interchanges. In doing so, the Contractor
shall take measures to overcome the physical and operational constraints and plan, design
and construct the Project Highway using appropriate methods, management techniques
and technologies.
2. DESIGN
2.1. General
This Outline Specification for Road Works shall be read in conjunction with complete Bid
Document including NIT, ITT, Employer’s Requirements General Conditions of Contract of
6|Page
(FIDIC), Particular Conditions of Contract, Outline Design and Construction Specifications,

Employer’s Drawings, Addendums etc.
The Design Specifications and parameters are in reference to IRC and MORTH
Specifications. If a specification of any item is not available in this tender document, it
should be referred from relevant IRC /MORTH Publications.
2.2. Geometric Design
Geometric design of Alignment for Main Carriageway of Highway is frozen and it is as

indicated in the Tender Drawings.
Geometric Design of the Alignment

Table 2.1 : Geometric Design of the Alignment
Sl. No. Description Details
1 Design Speed 100 Km/hr
2 Lane Configuration 2+2
3 Single lane Width 3.5 M
4 Paved Edge strip width 0.5 m
5 Paved Shoulder 2.75m
Min = 400 m
6 Radius of Horizontal Curve
7 Maximum Super elevation 5%
Min =180 M
8 Safe stopping site distance
Max =360 M
9 Min Length of Vertical Curve 60M
10 Cross fall / Camber 2.5%
11 Vertical Clearance 5.5 M
12 Vertical Gradient
Min = 0.5%
12 A Transition Ramp and Cut and Cover
Max = 3.8%
12 B Tunnel Min = 0.5%
The Geometric design of the Highway alignment, conform to IRC:86and IRC: SP: 84-2014 except as
otherwise indicated in this document. The alignment is shown in the tender Drawings. The
Contractor shall:
1) Verify and develop a detailed alignment to meet the standard operational and technical
criteria referred elsewhere in this Contract.
7|Page
2) Review the alignment with respect to the design and construction proposals and shall also
satisfy him that there is no conflict with any existing structures (both underground and
above ground) which are to be preserved.
3) The Contractor is permitted to propose minor deviations in horizontal & vertical alignment
to suit his construction proposals, but he must demonstrate that any such deviations do not
reduce the technical and operational performance. The Contractor needs to verify the
Contract boundaries while proposing any change in vertical and/or horizontal alignment.
Such deviations shall require a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer subject to the following
conditions: -
• There is no extra cost to the Employer,
• Changes proposed are absolutely essential to suit the specific design.
• The deviation shall be better than the reference design given in the Employer’s
Drawings.
• There is no change to the Contract boundaries.
• The Contractor should note that due to existing land constraints and that no further
land/ additional space for reclamation will be made available by the Employer.
2.3. Drainage System
Surface runoff from transition ramp, cut and cover, and tunnel should be duly connected to
the bored tunnel for due discharge.
This stretch of Road is having considerable gradient to the road. The design of road
drainage system such as surface drainage for pavement, median, shoulder shall be carried
out in accordance with IRC: SP: 42 and IRC: SP: 50.
Surface runoff from the main Highway shall be discharged through longitudinal side drains,
which shall be designed for adequate cross section, bed slopes, invert levels, Runoff Storage
underground tank of sufficient capacity and stored drain water shall be pumped off with
proper manner. Dimensions of the drain shall be wide enough to take the runoff.
3. PAVEMENT DESIGN
3.1. Type of Pavement & Parameters of Pavement Design
The Rigid Pavement is proposed for the merging lane (CH. __to CH.____ , LHS and CH. to CH.,
RHS), tapering as 1 in 20, to the Goregaon Mulund Link Road. The following parameters
be adopted wherever rigid pavement is required, and as directed by the Engineer.
8|Page
Table 2: Design Parameters for Rigid Pavement
SlNo. Description Details
1 Design Life 30 Years
2 Traffic Intensity per day (CVPD) 2000 vehicle/ day *
3 Annual Traffic Growth Rate 5%
4 Temperature Differential 19.2 ºC
5 Flexural Strength of Concrete 4.5 MPa
6 Subgrade CBR 8%
3.2. Design Life
Design life for concrete pavements shall be 30 years. For design life of other structures
refer to relevant section.
3.3. Flexible Pavement
The rigid pavement shall be designed as per IRC 37 to withstand the design CVPD. The
minimum thickness of various layers of the rigid pavement shall be as stated in the
Employer’s Drawings. If the design thickness based on the traffic study projected for the
design life, carried out during detailed design stage is found to be more than the minimum
thickness mentioned in Employer’s drawings, higher of the two shall be provided
3.4. Rigid Pavement
The rigid pavement shall be designed as per IRC 37 to withstand the design CVPD. The
minimum thickness of various layers of the rigid pavement shall be as stated in the
Employer’s Drawings. If the design thickness based on the traffic study projected for the
design life, carried out during detailed design stage is found to be more than the minimum
thickness mentioned in Employer’s drawings, higher of the two shall be provided
3.5. Durability
Goregaon Mulund Link Road shall not only be safe but also durable. This would mean
that deteriorating effects of climate and environment in addition to the traffic shall be duly
considered in design. The pavement structure shall be designed such that deterioration
over its design service life does not impair the performance below that intended, having
due regard to the service environment and anticipated level of performance. Durability
recommendation for a concrete mix with 20 mm size aggregate for ‘severe’ exposure
conditions, maximum water cement ratio shall be 0.45 , minimum cement content shall be
360 kg/cu.m, minimum grade of concrete shall be M-40 and minimum concrete cover shall
9|Page
be 45 mm.
3.6. Safety and Serviceability of Design
In order to achieve safety and serviceability, all designs furnished by the Contractor shall
be safe to ensure that the Project or any part thereof (for example embankment, pavement,
retaining structures, bridges, culverts etc.) does not collapse (global stability) nor its
serviceability/performance (for example settlement, roughness, undulations, deflections,

etc) deteriorates below acceptable level as prescribed in MORTH /IRC Publications.
3.7. Design Traffic
A detailed traffic study was carried out by the DPR consultant engaged by the Employer
and the report prepared by him is enclosed in Volume-7 as a reference document. The
Employer does not claim the correctness of the data, conclusion or drawings given in the
report. The contractor has to verify the design and all other details with his own
sources/investigations before using the data contained therein.
An initial traffic intensity of 2000 buses per day on the proposed Highway is adopted. As
per IRC: SP: 84-2014, Annual growth rate of Commercial vehicles shall be taken to be a
minimum of 5%. Hence, growth rate of 5% is considered. As per IRC: 58-2015 guidelines,
25% of the total traffic in the direction of predominant traffic may be consider for the
bottom up cracking fatigue damage analysis where in the case of top down cracking 50%
of design traffic of bottom up cracking analysis is considered.
Traffic growth rate shall be established for each category of commercial vehicles to be
considered for design of pavement. For traffic projections, the procedure outlined in IRC:
108 may be followed. The Contractor shall adopt a realistic value of the rate of traffic
growth, provided that annual rate of growth of commercial vehicles shall not be adopted
less than 5 per cent.
3.8. Concrete Strength
The design of concrete slab shall be based on the flexural strength value of 4.5 MPa. It shall
be derived from the characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
3.9. Rigid Pavement Design
• The flexural strength of Pavement Quality Concrete (PQC) shall be 4.5 MPa
(MORTH 602.3.3) and minimum cement content should be 360 kg/cum. The PQC
shall rest over Dry Lean Concrete (DLC) sub base of designed thickness.
• The DLC will meet the minimum cement content and compressive strength of 15
MPa in 28 days, and 10 MPa within seven days, and minimum cement content
should be 150kg / cu.m.as prescribed in IRC: SP: 49. The DLC will extend beyond
10 | P a g e
the edge of PQC at a slope of 1:2 on either side.
• Below DLC layer, a properly designed drainage layer Granular Sub Base (GSB)of
designed thickness shall be provided throughout the road width. It shall be
designed to obtain a drainage coefficient of not less than 30m per day.
Rigid pavement has to be designed for the critical stress condition. Stresses due to
combined action traffic load and temperature differential between the top and bottom
fibres of the slab is considered for the design of concretes lab. Fatigue damage analysis is
to be done for following two stress combinations
• Bottom up cracking – Load + Positive temperature differential
• Top down cracking – Load+ Negative temperature differential
3.10. Details of Joints
One of the major components of concrete pavement is the spacing and layout of joints as it
has significant effect on the pavement performance. All the joints also need to be effectively
sealed and maintained well for its better performance.
i) Contraction Joints
Contraction joints are transverse joints which relieve the tensile stresses in concrete
pavements. The joint spacing of a concrete pavement depends upon the type of
coarse aggregates and the average temperature fluctuation in different seasons. The
spacing of contraction joints should be limited to 4.5m to prevent top-down
cracking during the night hours.
ii) Construction Joints
Construction joints should, as far as possible, be placed at the location of contraction

joints except in case of emergency when a key joint may be used.
iii) Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are transverse joints to allow expansion of concrete slab due to
rise in average temperature in summer months.
iv) Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints are required in pavements of width greater than 4.5m to allow
for transverse contraction and warping.
3.11. Dowel Bars & Tie Bar
Dowel bars shall have built an integral part of transverse joints. They are usually mild steel
round bars of short length, whose half-length is bonded into concrete on one side of the
11 | P a g e
joint and its other half-length is prevented from bonding with concrete. Detail design of
dowel bars is to be done by Contractor as per IRC 58: 2015.
Tie bars shall use across the joints of concrete pavements wherever it is necessary or
desirable to ensure firm contact between slab faces or to prevent abutting slabs from
separating. Deformed tie bars are proposed at joints. Detail design of Tie bar is to be done
by Contractor.
4. MATERIALS
4.1. General
Sourcing of all materials as well as compliance with environmental requirements under the
applicable laws in respect of all works to be executed under the Bid Document shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor. All materials, whether natural (such as earth, gravel,
sand, aggregates etc.), processed (such as bituminous and concrete mixes), or manufactured
(such as cement, steel, bitumen etc.) shall be incorporated into the work only if they are
tested and found to meet the requirements of this Tender Document or, in the absence of
any provision in this Tender Document, conform to the best industry practice.
4.2. For Rigid Pavement Work
4.2.1 Cement
• The cement 43 grade and 53 grade conforming to IS 1182 -1989, IS 12269- 1987, IS
455 and IS 1489 – Part 1 shall be used.
• The Engineer may give Notice for usage of Sulphate Resistance Portland cement
conforming to IS 12330, if the soil around concrete pavement has soluble salts like
sulphates in excess of 0.5 per cent.
• In all cases cement shall meet 28 days strength requirements of IS 1182 -1989 and
12269-1987
4.2.2 Aggregates
• Fine Aggregates
The fine aggregate shall comply with Clause 602.2.6.3 of MORTH Specifications for
Road and Bridge Works.
• Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates shall comply with Clause 602.2.6.2 of MORTH Specification

except that the maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 26.5 mm, and
aggregate gradation shall comply with Table 600-1 and Table 600-2 of MORTH
Specification for Road and Bridge Works.
12 | P a g e
4.2.3 Dry Lean Cement Concrete
• Moisture Content: The optimum water content shall be determined and

demonstrated by rolling during trial length construction and the optimum moisture
content and degree of compaction shall be got approved from Engineer. While laying
in the main work, the lean concrete shall have a moisture content between the
optimum and optimum +2 percent, keeping in view the effectiveness of compaction
achieved and to compensate for evaporation losses.
• Cement Content: The minimum cement content in the lean concrete shall not be
less than 150Kg/cum of concrete. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient
to produce concrete of the specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary
without additional cost compensation to the Contractor.
• Concrete Strength: The average compressive strength of each consecutive group

of 5 cubes made in accordance with Clause No. 903.5.1.1 of MORTH Specifications
shall not be less than 10 MPa at 7 days. In addition, the minimum compressive
strength of any individual cube shall not be less than 10 MPa at 7 days. The design
mix complying with the above Clauses shall be got approved from the Engineer
before 30 days of commencement of work and it shall be demonstrated in the trial
length for construction of 150 mm thick Dry Lean Concrete.
4.2.4 Cement Concrete Pavement
• Cement Content
Cement as per clause 4.2.1 above is used, the quantity of cement shall not be less
than 360 kg/cum. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce
concrete of the specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary by the
Contractor at his own cost.
• Concrete Strength
The characteristic flexural strength of Pavement Quality concrete shall not be less
than 4.5 MPa unless specified otherwise. Target mean flexural strength for mix
design shall be more than 4.5 MPa + 1.65s, where s is standard deviation of flexural
strength derived by conducting test on minimum 30 beams. The design mix
complying with the above Clauses shall be got Noticed from the Engineer before 30
days of commencement of work and it shall be demonstrated in the trial length for
construction for 300 mm thick Pavement Quality Concrete.
13 | P a g e
• Steel for Dowels and Tie Bars
Steel shall conform to the requirements of IS:432 and IS: 1786 as relevant. The
dowel bars shall round MS Bars conform to IS:432 of Grade I. Tie bars shall be High
yield Strength Deformed bars conforming to IS:1786 and grade of Fe 500 or plain
bars conforming to IS:432 of Grade I. The steel shall be coated with epoxy paint for
protection against corrosion.
4.3. Flexible Pavement Work
The flexible pavement is proposed for the Goregaon Mulund Link Road after the exit of
tunnel near film city road and khindipada junction.
4.3.1 Subgrade and Sub Base Material (Flexible)
Sub grade:
A sub grade CBR value of 8 % has been considered for the design of pavement. Sub grade is
to be compacted in layers of loose thickness of 200 mm to a minimum of 98 % of maximum
dry density of modified proctor compaction tests.
Sub Base:
Sub base 200mm thick granular sub base (GSB) has been recommended for the pavement.
The GSB layer which also acts as drainage layer shall be continued over the full formation
width. The sub base material should have a minimum CBR of 30% at the highest anticipated
moisture content when compacted to a minimum of 98 % of maximum dry density in the
modified proctor Compaction Tests. Particle size and plasticity requirements of sub base
materials should be as specified in the technical specification.
Base:
250mm thick Wet Mix Macadam (WMM) has been proposed as base for carriageway. The
minimum CBR value of granular base material should be 100% and the Plasticity Index less
than 5 %. The gradation and compaction criteria of base materials should be as per the
technical specification.
Surfacing Course;
For new carriageway, Dense Bituminous Macadam (DBM) has been proposed as Binder
Course for the pavement. 140 mm DBM has been proposed for this Project. The grading and
the bitumen content of DBM shall be as per the relevant clauses of the Technical
Specifications. Whereas for the existing carriageway, binder course will be provided over
the profile corrective course.
14 | P a g e
50 mm thick Bituminous Concrete (BC) has been proposed for as wearing course. The
grading and bitumen content of BC shall be as per the relevant clause of MORTH
Specifications.
Mastic Asphalt
This portion of work shall consist of constructing a single layer of mastic asphalt wearing
course for road pavements Mastic asphalt is an intimate homogenous mixture of selected
well-graded aggregates, filler and bitumen in such proportions as to yield a plastic and void
less mass, which when applied hot can be trowelled and floated to form a very dense
impermeable surfacing.
5. PAVER BLOCKS
The inter locking concrete paver tiles shall conform to IRC SP-63. They shall be tested as per
the code.
The compressive strength requirement of concrete paver block shall be minimum 47.2 MPa
(N/sq.mm) for 28 days (Testing as per IS-15658) after applying the correction factor as per
IS-15658:2006. The Concrete grade of paver tiles shall not be less than M40. Design mix
concrete shall be adopted. Size, shape colour, laying pattern etc. shall be Noticed by the
Engineer. For acceptance, the average of compressive strengths of 8 pavers shall be
minimum 47.2 MPa. Any paver in the tested lot shall not have compressive strength less
than 40.1 MPa.
6. SIGNAGE
The signage details are provided in the Employer’s Drawings are indicative. The road sign,
marking drawings provided therein are for reference purpose and the Contractor shall
design the sign and markings as per IRC 67, 35 and other relevant IRC and get the same
Noticed by the Engineer.
15 | P a g e
Volume 4
Section 2
Tunnel Works
16 | P a g e
Table of Contents
1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 General consideration of planning, design and construction .................................................. 6

2. DESIGN................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1. General ......................................................................................................................................... 6

2.2. Geometric Design ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.3. Drainage System .......................................................................................................................... 8
3. PAVEMENT DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Type of Pavement & Parameters of Pavement Design ............................................................. 8

3.2. Design Life ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3. Flexible Pavement ....................................................................................................................... 9
3.4. Rigid Pavement............................................................................................................................ 9
3.5. Durability ..................................................................................................................................... 9
3.6. Safety and Serviceability of Design .......................................................................................... 10
3.7. Design Traffic............................................................................................................................. 10
3.8. Concrete Strength...................................................................................................................... 10
3.9. Rigid Pavement Design ............................................................................................................. 10
3.10. Details of Joints .......................................................................................................................... 11
3.11. Dowel Bars & Tie Bar ................................................................................................................ 11
4. MATERIALS.....................................................................................................................................................................12
4.1. General ....................................................................................................................................... 12

4.2. For Rigid Pavement Work ........................................................................................................ 12
4.2.1 Cement ....................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Aggregates ................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.3 Dry Lean Cement Concrete ....................................................................................................... 13
4.2.4 Cement Concrete Pavement ..................................................................................................... 13
4.3. Flexible Pavement Work........................................................................................................... 14
4.3.1 Subgrade and Sub Base Material (Flexible) ............................................................................ 14
5. PAVER BLOCKS .............................................................................................................................................................15
6. SIGNAGE ...........................................................................................................................................................................15
GEOTECHNICAL, FOUNDATIONS AND TUNNEL WORKS ............................................................................21
1 GENERAL, STANDARDS AND CODES ...................................................................................................................21
1.1 Purpose and Scope.......................................................................................................................................................21
17 | P a g e
1.2 Codes, Standards, and Regulations .......................................................................................................................21
Section 1.01 Indian Standards ....................................................................................................... 21

Section 1.03 British Standards Institution .................................................................................... 23
Section 1.04 Others ......................................................................................................................... 23
1.3 Design Considerations................................................................................................................................................23
2 SITE INVESTIGATIONS AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS .....................................................24
2.1 SITE INVESTIGATIONS ..............................................................................................................................................24
1. General Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................24
2. Investigation Requirements ....................................................................................................................................24
2.2 Investigation Methods ................................................................................................................................................26
1. Geologic Studies ............................................................................................................................................................26
2. Geophysical Surveys ...................................................................................................................................................26
3. Exploratory Drill holes ...............................................................................................................................................26
4. Other Ground-Investigation Methods ..................................................................................................................26
5. Groundwater ..................................................................................................................................................................27
2.3 LABORATORY TESTING METHODS ......................................................................................................................27
1. General Methods ...........................................................................................................................................................27
2. Index/Classification Testing of Soil Samples ....................................................................................................27
3. Strength Testing of Soil Samples............................................................................................................................28
4. Consolidation Testing of Soil Samples .................................................................................................................28
5. Permeability Testing of Soil Samples ...................................................................................................................28
6. Chemical Testing of Soil and Groundwater Samples .....................................................................................28
7. Testing of Rock Specimens .......................................................................................................................................28
3 BORED TUNNELS .........................................................................................................................................................29
3.1 Method Statement ........................................................................................................................................................29
3.2 Types and General Methods of Analyses ............................................................................................................29
3.4 Loads .................................................................................................................................................................................33
3.5 Loading Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................34
3.6 Flotation ...........................................................................................................................................................................35
18 | P a g e
3.7 Heave and Settlement.................................................................................................................................................35
3.8 Tunnel Lining .................................................................................................................................................................35
3.9 Segmental Linings ........................................................................................................................................................36
3.10 Segment Details.............................................................................................................................................................37
1. Gasket grooves ..............................................................................................................................................................37
2. Concrete cover ...............................................................................................................................................................37
3. Grout holes ......................................................................................................................................................................37
3.11 Conventional Tunnel Lining.....................................................................................................................................37
1. Spiles, Dowels and Rock bolts .................................................................................................................................38
2. Sprayed concrete ..........................................................................................................................................................38
3. Waterproof membranes ............................................................................................................................................38
4. Cavity grouting ..............................................................................................................................................................38
3.12 Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) and Shields ......................................................................................................38
3.13 Waterproofing ...............................................................................................................................................................39
3.14 Underpinning of Existing Structures ....................................................................................................................40
3.15 Cross Passages ...............................................................................................................................................................40
3.16 Sumps in Running Tunnels.......................................................................................................................................40
3.17 Ground Treatment and Temporary Support ....................................................................................................41
4 SETTLEMENT AND BUILDING PROTECTION...................................................................................................42
4.1 General..............................................................................................................................................................................42
4.2 Minimising Ground Movements .............................................................................................................................42
4.3 Prediction of Ground Movements .........................................................................................................................43
4.4 Structure Condition Survey......................................................................................................................................43
4.5 Assessment of Impact on Structures ....................................................................................................................43
4.6 Staged Assessment ......................................................................................................................................................43
4.7 Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................................................44
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................52
2. CIVIL STRUCTURES .....................................................................................................................................................52
2.1 Loads and Requirements .......................................................................................................... 52

2.1.1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 52
19 | P a g e
2.1.2 Nominal Loads ........................................................................................................................... 52

2.1.3 Design Loads .............................................................................................................................. 53
2.1.4 Dead Loads................................................................................................................................. 53
2.1.5 Superimposed Dead Loads ....................................................................................................... 53
2.1.6 Imposed Loads .......................................................................................................................... 53
2.1.7 Vehicular Live Load................................................................................................................... 53
2.1.8 Fatigue........................................................................................................................................ 54
2.1.9 Dynamic ..................................................................................................................................... 54
2.1.10 Vehicle Collision Load ............................................................................................................... 54
2.1.11 Wind ........................................................................................................................................... 54
2.1.12 Wave Surge ................................................................................................................................ 54
2.1.13 Temperature .............................................................................................................................. 54
2.1.14 Seismic Loads ............................................................................................................................ 55
2.2 Deflection Criteria ..................................................................................................................... 60
2.3 Durability ................................................................................................................................... 60
2.4 Concrete Sub-Structure .................................................................................................................. 61
20 | P a g e
GEOTECHNICAL, FOUNDATIONS AND TUNNEL WORKS
1 GENERAL , STANDARDS AND CODES
1.1 Purpose and Scope
The purpose of this section of these Design Criteria is to establish the minimum requirements
for geotechnical site investigations, studies, analyses, and preparation of geotechnical reports
and the design recommendations for earthworks, foundations, structures, and substructure
design, and the design for bored tunnels
"Geotechnical works" shall mean foundations, earthworks, deep excavations, slopes,

embankments and earth retaining structures.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining for his design purposes the Geology and
the Geotechnical parameters of the sub-surface strata along the route.
1.2 Codes, St andards, and Regulations
The principal standards listed below shall be complied with, as amended by these Criteria.
The version of the standards, codes, and regulations shall be the latest version and with latest
amendments.
Section 1.01 Indian Standards

(i) SP 36 (Part 1) : Compendium of Indian Standards on Soil Engineering
(Laboratory Testing)
(ii) SP 36 (Part 2) : Compendium of Indian Standards on Soil Engineering
(Field
Testing)
(iii) IS 1080 (1986) : Code of Practice for Design and Construction of
Shallow
Foundations on Soils.
(iv) IS 1200 (Part 1) : Methodology of measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering Works.
(v) IS 1892 : Code of practice for Sub surface investigations for
foundations.
(vi) IS 1904 : Design and construction of foundations in soils –
General
Requirements
(vii) IS 2386 : Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete.
(viii) (Part 1 to Part 8) 1963
21 | P a g e
(ix) IS 2720 : Method of Test of Soils

(x) IS 2911 (Part 1) 1979 : Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Pile
Foundations.
(xi) IS 3067 (1988) : Code of Practice for General Design Details and
Preparatory
Work for Damp-Proofing and Water-Proofing of
Buildings.
(xii)
Section 1.02 Indian Standards

(i) SP 36 (Part 1) : Compendium of Indian Standards on Soil Engineering
(Laboratory Testing)
(ii) SP 36 (Part 2) : Compendium of Indian Standards on Soil Engineering
(Field
Testing)
(iii) IS 1080 (1986) : Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Shallow
Foundations on Soils.
(iv) IS 1200 (Part 1) : Methodology of measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering Works.
(v) IS 1892 : Code of practice for Sub surface investigations for
foundations.
(vi) IS 1904 : Design and construction of foundations in soils –
General
Requirements
(vii) IS 2386 : Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete.
(viii) (Part 1 to Part 8) 1963
(ix) IS 2720 : Method of Test of Soils
(x) IS 2911 (Part 1) 1979 : Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Pile
Foundations.
(xi) IS 3067 (1988) : Code of Practice for General Design Details and
Preparatory
Work for Damp-Proofing and Water-Proofing of
Buildings.
22 | P a g e
Section 1.03 British Standards Institution

(i) BS 812: 1985/1988 : Testing Aggregates (Parts 117 to 119).
(ii) BS 1377: 1990 : Methods of Test for Civil Engineering Purposes (Parts
1 to 9).
(iii) BS 5930: 1981 : Code of Practice for Site Investigations.
(iv) BS 6031: 1981 : Code of Practice for Earthworks.
(v) BS 6349: 1991 : Code of Practice for Dredging and Land Reclamation.
(vi) BS 8000 (Part 4) 1989 : Code of Practice for Waterproofing.
(vii) BS 8000 (Part 5) 1989 : Code of Practice for Below Ground Drainage.
(viii) BS 8002 (1994) : Code of Practice for Earth Retaining Structures.
(ix) BS 8004 (1986) : Code of Practice for Foundations.
(x) BS 8081 (1989) : Code of Practice for Ground Anchorages.
(xi) Standard Method of Measurement for Civil Engineering Works, Edition 1, 4/92.
Section 1.04 Others
(i) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Section 4 : Construction, Volume
04.08 : Soil and Rock I, and Volume 04.09 : Soil and Rock II, 1995.
(ii) International Society for Rock Mechanics (ISRM), Suggested Test Methods, (various
dates).
(iii) Tunnelling
(iv) All aspects of tunnelling shall comply with the requirements of:
(v) BS 6164: Safety in tunnelling in the construction industry.
(vi) CIRIA Report 80A A review of instruments for gas and dust monitoring underground.
(vii) CIRIA Report 44 Medical Code of Practice for working in compressed air.
In his design the Contractor shall take adequate measures to minimise the amount of local
differential settlement of road surfaces around below ground level works.
The slopes of all permanent cuttings and excavations shall be so designed that they are capable
of supporting vegetation and shall be stabilised where necessary. In particular, soil slopes shall
be hydroseeded or turfed. Where necessary, soil slopes shall be pitched with stones or brick
on edge.
23 | P a g e
2 SITE INVESTIGATIONS AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS
2.1 SITE INVESTIGATIONS
1. General Conditions
Subsurface Conditions
Regional engineering geology aspects for the area of the Road alignments are generally
documented by the Geological Survey of India.
Seismic Conditions
Detailed, seismic loading and ground-acceleration criteria are discussed under Structural, of
these Design Criteria. Consideration of design-level seismic forces in the design of temporary
structures is generally not required, except that such designs shall ensure public safety and
cause no loss or damage to adjacent projects or properties.
The effects of the design seismic event on the stability of slopes and on the potential for
liquefaction of soils shall be taken into account in the design.
2. Investi gation Requirements
Existing information shall be supplemented with project-specific site investigations (SI). The
intent and objectives of the SI shall be to collect all pertinent and reliable data and information
required to produce a safe and economic design and to meet tender and construction
requirements.
For the purpose of these Criteria, the term SI shall be considered to include, but not be limited
to, the following.
• Compiling and reviewing pertinent existing geologic data.
• Compiling and reviewing pertinent existing geotechnical data supplied and from
adjacent projects.
• Compiling and reviewing pertinent existing foundation, structure, substructure,

and related data from adjacent projects.
• Performing a detailed field reconnaissance.
• Performing geophysical surveys.
• Performing ground investigations that include, but are not limited to drilling, soil
sampling, rock coring, groundwater sampling, in-situ field installations and testing,
24 | P a g e
trial pits, geophysical surveys, slope protection strippings, and coreholes of

retaining walls and other existing manmade structures.
• Performing laboratory testing of soil, rock, and groundwater samples collected

from the ground investigations (including chemical testing to identify potentially
corrosive conditions).
• As a minimum, the soils investigation programme shall consider the locations and
lateral and vertical extent of:
• Major structures (viaducts, bridge and crossing structures, bored tunnels, cut-and-
cover tunnels, portal structures, retaining structures, stations, commercial
developments, ancillary structures, etc.).
• Earthworks (soil and rock excavations, embankment fills, land reclamations, areas
requiring ground improvement, borrow pits and areas, disposal areas, etc.).
• Existing adjacent structures that may be influenced by proposed construction

works (i.e., structures – adjacent to, above, or below excavations or tunnels – that
may be affected by construction works such as dewatering or structures deemed to
have poor structural integrity; structures containing sensitive equipment or
materials; structures with historic/cultural significance, etc.).
• Significant engineering geology features that may influence the proposed

construction works (i.e., principal faults, shear zones, persistent jointing; mass
wasting, landslips).
Ground investigations, as part of a comprehensive soils investigation programme, shall be

conducted according to IS1892 or BS 5930.
The depths of investigation borings shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the
proposed construction works.
All aspects of the work shall be conducted under the direction of qualified geotechnical
personnel. Detailed plans, technical specifications, and standard forms, outlining the proposed
staffing and reporting formats, and indicating the types, locations, and proposed depths of
investigations relative to the proposed construction works shall be prepared and submitted
for review and acceptance prior to undertaking the work. Revisions to the SI programme, if
required, shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
All Consultant-produced ground-investigation data shall be prepared up to internationally

accepted standards using Association of Geotechnical and Geo-Environmental Specialists
(AGS) format or equivalent and Geotechnical Integrator (GINT) software, latest versions. All
data shall be provided in both printed and electronic file formats.
25 | P a g e
2.2 Investigation Methods
1. Geologic Studies
Geologic studies shall include, but not be limited to, a review of pertinent and existing
literature, aerial photographs, and remote-sensing data; a detailed field reconnaissance of the
site; and preparation of project-specific maps and cross-sections.
Project-specific geologic maps shall be prepared at about 1:5,000 scale, and geologic cross-
sections shall be prepared at about 1: 5,000 scale, both horizontal and vertical. Suitable base
maps for geologic maps shall be utilised.
2. Geophysical Surveys
Geophysical surveys shall be accomplished where appropriate to provide additional site-

specific information on depths and characteristics of overburden soils and bedrock.
Geophysical survey methods may be used to obtain subsurface information for planning other
detailed SI studies, and for extending information between investigations.
3. Exploratory Drill holes
Exploratory drilling in soil and rock, disturbed and undisturbed soil sampling, and rock coring
shall be performed according to procedures outlined in IS 1892 or BS 5930. Full-time
monitoring by qualified geotechnical personnel is required not only to direct the drilling,
sampling, and coring, but also to prepare field drill hole records.
4. Other Ground-Inves tigation Methods
Other ground-investigation methods commonly employed include, but are not limited to, the
following:
• Field testing: Standard Penetration, cone penetration, vane shear, pressure

meter, permeability/water absorption, impression packer/discontinuity survey,
acoustic borehole imaging, in situ density, N-Schmidt hammer, plate load testing.
• Field instrumentation: piezometers, inclinometers.
• Trial pits with/without block sampling.
• Inspection pits.
• Geocore probes.
• Hand auger borings.
26 | P a g e
• Coring through rock, retaining walls or other manmade features.
• Slope protection stripping.
• Pumping tests.
• Groundwater sampling.
5. Groundwater
Piezometers shall be installed during ground investigations to measure current and seasonal
fluctuations in groundwater levels. The SI programme shall incorporate the details of a
groundwater observation plan, including locations and details of piezometer installations and
frequency and duration of observations. It should also include chemical analysis of ground
water. Full-scale groundwater pumping tests shall be conducted to develop design parameters
for construction dewatering schemes, where required
Groundwater information shall be interpreted, and recommendations for design groundwater

levels, including differential levels that may develop across structures shall be provided.
2.3 LABORATORY TESTING METHODS
1. General Methods
The laboratory testing programme shall be developed considering not only the particular site
conditions and project requirements, but also the applicable design standards, codes,
regulations, and related publications. Prior to undertaking the work, detailed plans/proposals
for the laboratory testing programme shall be prepared and submitted for acceptance along
with technical specifications and standard forms, outlining the proposed staffing and reporting
formats and the types and numbers of tests proposed. Revisions to the laboratory testing
programme, if required, shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
All Consultants-produced laboratory test data shall be prepared using internationally accepted
standards e.g. AGS format, latest version. All data shall be provided in both printed and
electronic file formats. All testing shall be conducted by laboratories holding current
accreditation under International Standards Organisation/Bureau of Indian Standards.
2. Index/Classification Testing of Soil Sampl es
All index/classification test procedures for soils shall comply with the requirements of IS
2720/BS 1377. Tests shall include the determination of natural moisture content, specific
gravity, particle size distribution (with and without hydrometer), Atterberg limits, insitu bulk
and dry density, and dry density and moisture content relationships.
27 | P a g e
3. Strength Testing of S oil Samples
Strength-test procedures for soils shall include single- and multi-stage, consolidated-drained
and consolidated-undrained triaxial tests; unconsolidated undrained triaxial tests; laboratory
vane shear tests; and pocket shearmeter tests, all according to IS 2720 (Part 11). Unconfined
compressive strength testing for soils shall be according to IS 2720 (Part 10)/ASTM D2166,
and consolidated drained direct shear testing shall be according to IS 2720 (Part 13)/ASTM
D3080.
4. Consolidation Testing of Soil Samples
Consolidation test procedures for soils shall be based on one-dimensional, consolidation

methods according to ARE 2720 (Part 14) or Clause 3 of BS 1377: Part 5, with some minor
modifications as accepted.
5. Permeability Testing of Soil Samples
Laboratory test procedures of soil permeability shall include constant-head permeability

methods for granular soils, generally according to IS 2720 (Part 17 or 36) or ASTM D2434, and
variable-head permeability methods for cohesive soils, generally according to Soil Testing for
Engineers by T. William Lambe. Permeability of in situ materials shall be measured by either
constant-head or variable-head methods, using standpipe piezometers installed during the
ground-investigation programme.
6. Chemical Testing of S oil and Groundwater Samples
Chemical test procedures for soils and groundwater shall include, as appropriate:
determinations of resistivity, redox potential, pH, chloride ion content, sulphate ion content,
total sulphate content, total sulphide content, organic content, and carbonate content,
according to IS 2720 or BS 1377 or BS 812, or both, and identification of other potentially
corrosive conditions.
7. Testing of Rock Speci mens
All rock testing shall be according to IS or ISRM suggested methods. Tests shall include the
determination of natural moisture content, porosity, density, adsorption, unconfined
compressive and tensile strength, strength of rock joints, mineralogy, and special tunnel boring
machine (TBM) bore ability testing.
28 | P a g e
3 BORED TUNNELS
GENERAL
3.1 Method Statement
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for his consent, a detailed design
report including calculations, schedules and drawings for tunnel construction, prior to the
commencement of such works. Additional information shall be supplied upon request of the
the Engineer. The Report shall explain the basis of the design, design assumptions, and design
parameters of all civil, and structural works to be undertaken.
The Contractor shall prepare a method statement presenting full details of the design, the
materials, equipment, plant and operations involved in the construction of bored and cut-and-
cover tunnels and submit to the Engineer as part of the Design Report. The Contractor shall
ensure that ground movements and changes to the piezometric pressure which may affect
adjacent roadway tracks, subway, utility services and any adjacent buildings, surface or
underground structures are kept to a minimum.
3.2 Types and General Methods of Analyses
The running tunnels shall comprise twin single-track tunnels approximately one tunnel
diameter (external) apart. This Criterion may not apply in areas of poor ground, where greater
clear distances may be necessary.
The top of road alignment is shown on the Tender plan and profile drawings. Tunnels shall be
either circular or horseshoe shape depending on the method of construction chosen.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and security of excavations at all times during
the execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall present to the Engineer details of his
proposed methods for excavation, and spoil removal. No excavation shall take place until the
Employer Representative’s consent has been obtained.
Excavation shall be carried out in a uniform and controlled manner; over-cutting shall be kept
to a minimum. In water-bearing strata the Contractor shall use such methods and take such
steps as are necessary to control flows and maintains the stability of the excavation.
Where the Contract specifies limits to surface settlement and/or protection in respect of
existing service or structures, the Contractor shall provide calculations demonstrating that the
method of excavation will result in compliance with those requirements. Details of the
monitoring arrangements that are proposed for the recording of movements and the
29 | P a g e
verification of the degree of any settlement or damage to services or structures shall be in

accordance with Standard.
Bored tunnels for the Road Corridor will be in rock and soil and will be excavated mainly using
tunnel boring machines. Initial tunnel support will generally include precast concrete
segments, shotcrete/wire mesh, rock bolts, lattice girders, steel sets, or forepoles wherever
necessary.
Geometries and stability of rock wedges affecting tunnel support requirements, including
completely /highly weathered rock with controlling remnant rock jointing or other structure,
shall be determined analytically, generally using stereographic projection, finite element
method or vector methods. Analyses shall consider planar sliding along individual joints and
block sliding, or fallout, along joint-set combinations. Analyses shall provide for both static and
dynamic loading conditions.
An ultimate load limit state method such as IS 456 or British Standard 8110 shall be used for
the design of all permanent underground concrete structures.
The method of analysis of the permanent lining shall take into account the proximity to the face
at the time of installation and the potential for additional ground loads as the face advances.
The design method for the analysis of the bored tunnel linings shall take into account the
interaction between the lining and the ground, the deflection of the lining and the
redistribution of the loading dependent upon the relative flexibility of the lining, the variability
and compressibility of the ground. The method of analysis shall conform Compressibility of
the ground, durability aspects that shall include impermeability, electrical resistivity of
concrete, ASR resistance and sulphate resistance to the guidelines of the International
standards.
Where permanent secondary lining is installed inside a temporary primary lining, the ground
loads used in permanent lining design shall consider all loads as described in Subsection 3.4
and any additional ground loads from time-dependent ground strains. If the life of the
temporary lining is less than the design life for the Project, then the Contractor shall design the
secondary lining ignoring the contribution of the temporary support for structural purposes.
Due account shall be taken of the degree of flexibility of the linings to be used in the various
soil conditions and taking account of the size, proximity, timing and method of construction of
adjacent excavations. The inherent lining flexibility may have to be reduced in order to
maintain acceptable values for the deflection of the lining.
30 | P a g e
The Contractor shall at his own expense conduct soil investigations where his designs or
method statements identify that it is necessary or prudent to do so to enable him to identify all
foreseeable circumstances which may affect the execution of the works and to ensure that
there is no likelihood of meeting unexpected conditions of a critical nature.
If the Contractor intends to carry out additional ground investigation from the surface, beyond
the limits of the worksite, he shall make his own arrangements with landowners and occupiers
for the necessary access. He shall not assume that such access will necessarily be granted,
although the Employer will provide assistance where it appears that this would be beneficial.
If surface access for ground investigation is not available, or if for any other reason there is a
significant likelihood of encountering geological hazards whose location is unknown, the
Contractor shall identify in his method statements the means by which such hazards will be
found as construction proceeds. The Contractor shall also identify how his tunnel design and
construction activities will be modified to recognise the deficiency of ground information prior
to tunnel driving.
During tunnel driving ground investigation data shall be kept under constant review and
reinterpreted as more detailed information becomes available, to maintain up to date
predictions of the ground likely to be encountered. This review shall be fully integrated into
the construction risk control and management systems and should typically include:
a. detailed geological logging of the ground exposed during construction
b. probing ahead of and around the tunnel face, if the ground changes or expected
to change.
c. interpretation of fresh data and correlation with previous information
d. prediction of ground conditions likely to be encountered.
Ground information from all construction activities shall be collated and interpreted.
The geotechnical design parameters adopted and the method of analysis of the lining shall be
subject to the consent of the Employer prior to commencement of design.
The design life required shall be obtained by the use of durable materials, corrosion protection,
resistance to or avoidance of wear etc. All underground works shall be designed to achieve the
following minimum design lives with minimum or zero maintenance:
31 | P a g e
(a) Main structure resisting ground and groundwater 120 years

loads:
(b) Non-structural components 50 years
The Contractor shall design all necessary linings for tunnels and shafts including temporary
linings. If any proprietary methods, materials or components are proposed to be used the
Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating their fitness for purpose to the full
satisfaction of the Employer.
The Contractor shall determine the configuration of rings, segmentation and details of joints
and fixings etc. to suit ground conditions, loadings, methods of construction and all functions
in the completed Works as described herein. The design shall address aspects including the
following, as appropriate:
a. Ring configurations,
b. segment size and form,
c. Fixing details including:
• ring to ring fixings,
• segment to segment fixings,
• For fixing all equipment’s to be installed under this Contract.
• for fixing equipment required by Designated Contractors etc. to suit

segment position,
• handling and installation.
• Holes, recesses and fixtures for other system components
• Designs shall allow for tolerances in production and installation of

segments.
d. Other components:
• grout hole valves,
• gaskets,
• bedding and packing materials.
e. Instrumentation and monitoring to demonstrate performance of the installed linings.
32 | P a g e
The Contractor shall submit for the consent of the Employer a comprehensive schedule of tests
to establish the quality and performance of all elements of the tunnel lining, including:
• segment materials,
• permeability,
• production tolerances,
• joint performance and load capacity including effect of joint misalignment

and birds mouthing with aligned and misaligned joints,
• performance of joint bedding/packing materials,
• lateral bending tests to demonstrate resistance to jacking forces,
• gasket performance with aligned/misaligned joints,
• self-sealing grout hole,
• capacity of all fixings.
3.4 Loads
The method of analysis shall consider in situ ground stresses and shall provide evidence
and/or measurements to the Employer in support of the parameters adopted in the design.
Analysis shall be undertaken of the additional ground loadings imposed by adjacent structures
on the underground structures and due account taken of the additional stresses in the design
of the underground structures.
Where the tunnels are adjacent to buildings and other structures, analysis shall be provided to
ensure that no loss of support can occur which endangers the stability of the buildings and
structures and that settlement will be within specified limits.
All tunnel sections shall have permanent, durable, structural linings, generally consisting of
bolted steel segments, pre-cast concrete segments, or cast-in-situ, plain or reinforced concrete.
Linings shall be designed to withstand all environmental loadings and effects without
detriment. In general, tunnel linings shall be designed to fulfil the following requirements and
to resist the following loadings.
• Superimposed surface loads from traffic, existing structures over and adjacent to
the tunnel, and any specified future loads.
• Soil/rock, water, and seismic loads.
• Roadway loads.
33 | P a g e
• Structural requirements for resisting buckling.
• Long- and short-term ground yield or squeeze.
• Unequal grouting pressures.
• Adjacent tunnelling or excavation.
• Openings in, or extensions to, the lining.
• Long- or short-term loads induced by construction.
• Temperature and shrinkage.
• Handling loads, including impact, especially in the case of unreinforced segments.
• Jacking forces, where appropriate.
3.5 Loading C onditions
The design of the linings for the tunnels shall be fully compatible with the Contractor's
proposed method of construction. The principal method is expected to be shield driven tunnel
(TBM) with permanent precast concrete lining.
The design shall also take into account all loadings, the requirements of the overall schedule,
the need for further investigations as necessary, and contract limitations with regard to ground
movements and de-watering.
The tunnel alignment shall generally follow the alignment shown on the Tender Drawings
All components of underground structures shall be proportioned to withstand the applied

loads and forces as follows:
a. Dead load comprises the self-weight of the basic structure and secondary elements
supported and the weight of earth cover. The depth of cover shall be the actual depth or a
minimum of 3.0 metres. The maximum depth to tunnel axis shall be used.
b. Traffic surcharge shall be equivalent to Class AA loading of IRC.
c. Loads from existing or known future adjacent structures above or within the area of
influence, which will remain in place above the tunnels, or any specified future loading.
The applicable foundation load shall be computed based on the height and type of
occupancy or use. For known future buildings, a minimum load based on a dead and live
load of 50 kPa at the foundations shall be used.
d. Additional support, ground treatment or additional lining thickening shall be provided

unless it can be shown that adequate provision already exists.
34 | P a g e
e. Where provision for a specific future structure is not made a minimum surcharge of 50
kPa at the existing or design ground level.
f. Hydrostatic pressures ignoring pore pressure relief obtained by any seepage into the
tunnel. Two ground water levels shall be considered.
1. Normal
2. One metre above 200-year Flood level or 1.5m above known HFL
g. Loads and load changes due to known construction activity in the vicinity of the tunnel,
such as the excavation of underpasses, basements, pile groups, bridges, diaphragm walls
and cable ground anchors.
h. The design of the tunnel linings shall take into account the proximity of the tunnels one to
another, the sequence and timing of construction and the proximity of adjacent structures
and utility services.
3.6 Flotation
For floatation check, the water table is assumes to coincide with the Ground level.
Where the bored tunnels are relatively shallow they shall be checked for the possibility of
flotation due to differential water pressure at representative typical locations.
The Contractor shall include in the design of the bored tunnel structures suitable methods for
countering the uplift due to displaced water.
3.7 Heave and Sett lement
All tunnel designs shall be checked against flotation and heave in accordance with the methods
specified above. Wherever these checks indicate a critical case the Contractor, at shall carry
out a more rigorous analysis. Such analysis shall clearly show the factor of safety achieved by
the design and shall be to the consent of the Employer.
3.8 Tunnel Lining
The permanent tunnel linings shall be bolted segmental precast concrete, except in case of
cross-passages, enlargement of tunnel and junction of cut &cover and bored tunnel where cast-
in-situ lining shall be used.
Alternative types of lining may be proposed subject to the consent of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take into account, inter alia, the following when considering the design of
lining:
35 | P a g e
a. The internal diameter shall take account of the need to accommodate the Structure Gauge,
and the track bed arrangement to be provided by the Trackwork Contractor.
b. Due allowance for relative movement between tunnels and cut and cover structure as
described in Subsection 4.11.
c. The stiffness of the lining shall be sufficient to limit the maximum allowable deflection to
on radius to 25mm. The distortional loads adopted shall also take account of the speed of
reloading of the horizontal and vertical ground pressure and in the case of the shallow
tunnels, the ability of the ground above the tunnel to generate sufficient passive resistance
to maintain stability of the lining.
d. Stresses induced by grouting.
e. The reinforcement for segmental concrete lining shall be detailed such that no electrical
continuity will exist across the circle joints. To prevent the stray current effects and to
inhibit the corrosion, Microsilica shall be added in to concrete. Such concrete shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM C 1202 and DIN 1048. RCPT value shall not exceed 1000
coulombs and water permeability shall not be more than 10 mm. However, reinforcement
for in situ concrete lining or other structures shall be bonded to mitigate stray currents.
Similarly, SGI lining segments shall be bonded to mitigate stray current effects. The
bonding will be part of the corrosion control system to be installed by the Contractor. The
corrosion control system shall be designed and installed by the Contractor with the
Engineer’s consent. The system shall be tested to demonstrate its proper function.
f. Blind holes and other fixings shall be necessary for the installation of internal
construction, brackets and equipment, such holes or fixings shall be detailed such that they
have no adverse effect on the integrity, water tightness or design life of the linings.
3.9 Segmental Linings
The Contractor shall take into account, inter alia, the following when considering the design of
linings:
a. a segment shall be considered as a short column subjected to axial load and bending
moment. The design of the segments shall be adequate for all temporary loads during
stacking, lifting, erection and impact.
b. the width of segments shall suit the method of construction and shall not be so large that
part shoving of the shield becomes a general necessity.
36 | P a g e
c. the width of segments shall be consistent with the capacity of the circle bolting
arrangements to withstand the shear forces induced in linings built with staggered joints.
d. the lengths of segments shall be chosen with regard to bending stresses during handling
and erection and the long-term stresses due to deflection and thrust. In the design for
handling and erection a safety factor of 5.0 shall be applied to the self-weight of the
segment combined with zero axial load.
e. opening of longitudinal joints.
the design of linings shall include suitable taper rings in order to negotiate the alignment
curvature and to correct for line and level during construction with the minimum use of
circumferential joint packers consistent with attaining the required degree of water
tightness of the tunnels.
f. Drilling for fixing at pre-determined points on the lining may be permitted.
3.10 Segment Details
1. Gasket grooves
Gasket grooves shall be provided around all joint faces of each segment and key in accordance
with the dimensions as approved by the Employer. The design shall incorporate sealing gaskets
in the segmental design.
2. Concrete cover
Where reinforcement is incorporated into the segments the minimum cover to all
reinforcement, including link steel, shall be provided as 50mm on all sides.
3. Grout holes
Grout holes shall be provided in segment as per design excluding the key and shall be of a
nominal 50 mm diameter.
3.11 Conventional Tunnel Lining
Arch/ lattice girders, base plates, ties and connections shall be formed from steel conforming
to Standards. Arch girders shall be rolled to suit the dimensional requirements of the approved
design.
The Contractor shall provide dimensional details of the arches/ lattice, calculations regarding
imposed loads and design and such other information.
37 | P a g e
1. Spiles, Dowels and Rock bolts
Spiles shall be steel rods or tubes of diameter not less than 25 mm of steel.
Rock dowels shall be untensioned steel bars threaded at one end and provided with a face plate,
shim plates and a conical seated washer and nut, or split or deformed steel tubes, or glass fibre
reinforced resin rods.
Rock bolts shall be tensioned bar manufactured out of one of the followings: solid steel bar, slit
or deformed steel tube, glass fibre reinforced resin rods.
Alternative materials shall be subject to the consent of the Employer incharge.
2. Sprayed concrete
Materials for sprayed concrete shall comply with Concrete Materials section of the
Construction Specification.
3. Waterproof membranes
Waterproof membranes shall consist of an impermeable heat welded sheet of one of the
following materials: high density polyethylene (HDPE), soft polyethylene chloride (PVC),
ethylene copolymerical bitumen (ECB). Materials for sprayed concrete shall comply with
Concrete Materials section of the Construction Specification.
The membrane as supplied shall be of such dimensions and shape as will result in the minimum
of on-site seam welds. The loosely laid pvc sheet shall have a minimum thickness of 2 mm +/-
10%. Materials for sprayed concrete shall comply with Concrete Materials section of the
Construction Specification.
4. Cavity grouti ng
General purpose cement grout with suitable admixture shall be mixed in accordance with the
proposed design mix and purpose of use. Grout shall be used within one hour of mixing.
3.12 Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) and Shields
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the selection, design and supply of tunnelling
machines, shields and backup equipment. The TBM shall also meet all the requirements as
specified in Employer Requirements and Outline Construction Specification.
Tunnelling machines shall be robust with adequate safety margins for the anticipated duty,
designed and manufactured to comply with all safety standards.
38 | P a g e
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his consent, a programme for the provision,
factory inspection, testing, transport, erection and commissioning of each TBM or shield. The
Employer’s consent does not, however, absolve the contractor of his responsibility to use
appropriate equipment and complete the work as scheduled.
New or reconditioned machines shall be assembled at the manufacturer’s works on completion

of fabrication or modification and tested to demonstrate that all components operate correctly
before the Employer or his authorised representative. Test running will also be required at
site following assembly, prior to commencement of tunnel driving.
The Contractor shall ensure that all key personnel who are responsible for the driving,
maintenance and control of the machine have received the necessary training in the duties that
they are required to perform. Such training shall include emergency procedures.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a complete list of the names of persons and their
duties, responsible for the operation of the machine, who have completed the appropriate
training to an accepted standard. A Certificate of Competence shall be provided by the
Contractor.
For TBM breakthrough in launching/ retrieval shafts, soft eye should be used with Fibre
reinforcement only.
3.13 Waterproofing
During construction in water bearing ground, the seepage water shall be controlled by suitable
means and design should provide for the same. The Contractor shall obtain the Employer’s
prior agreement to the process he intends to adopt. Pumping of large quantities of water such
that the piezometric pressure in the vicinity is within permissible safe limits and contractor is
required to get permission from related authority.
Groundwater leakage rates shall not exceed 0.1 litre/m2/day and 0.2 litres/m2/day for
segmental lining and in-situ lining respectively. For any 10m length of tunnel the water ingress
rate shall not exceed 0.2 litre/m2/day and 0.4 litres/m2/day for segmental lining and in-situ
lining respectively.
The design shall incorporate two sealing gaskets in the segment design. Materials for sealing
gaskets shall be one gasket of hydrophilic material and one gasket of elastomeric type.
Materials shall have acceptable fire performance for use on an underground roadway.
Notwithstanding the above limits on groundwater leakage rates, the design shall aim to ensure
that no loss of ground occurs through any part of the structure. All grouting holes shall be
fitted with non-return valves with double sealing rings.
39 | P a g e
3.14 Underpinning of Existing Structures
Where the construction of tunnels or other underground works would necessitate removal of
existing support or foundations to existing structures the Contractor shall carry out
investigations of the extent of the existing works, their design and loading conditions. The
Contractor shall design and carry out such works as are necessary to maintain the integrity of
the structure at all times including its design life. No work shall commence prior to the consent
of the Engineer being given. Cost of design and provision of any support/strengthening of such
structures will be deemed as included in the Contractor’s Price.
3.15 Cross Passages
"Passenger emergency evacuation design for cross passages between running tunnels which
are constructed by either cut and cover or bored method shall be in accordance with the
requirement relevant IRC specifications
The locations of cross passages have, wherever possible, shall be chosen to avoid critical
sections of the alignment where their construction could have an adverse effect on adjacent
structures.
3.16 Sumps in Running Tunnels
Sumps shall be located at every low point within each running tunnel.
Wherever practicable the vertical alignment shall be chosen such that the locations of sumps
avoid critical sections where their construction could have an adverse effect on adjacent
structures.
The size of each sump shall take account of the anticipated rate of flow into the sump, the
priority rating, the number and types of pumps to be installed and the reserve capacity
required above alarm level.
The reserve capacity of a groundwater seepage sump shall be calculated on the basis of the
area of tunnel lining applicable to the sump in accordance with the following formula.
VR = A * v * t * F.O.S. *10-3
Where,
VR = Volume of reserve, m3
A = Tunnel lining area, m2
v = Maximum leakage rate, l/m2/day
t = Maximum response time, (day)
40 | P a g e
F.O. S = Factor of Safety
For running tunnel low point sumps, the response time “t” shall be 24 hours and the factor of
safety shall be 1.5.
The sump design shall include outlets for the longitudinal drain pipe and discharge mains,
pumps of suitable capacity and power connection. Sumps shall be fitted with steel covers and
provided with step irons or access ladder as approved. Permanent discharge mains shall be
installed as well as embedment of conduits for permanent electric power cables to the pumps.
The Contractor shall investigate the overall capital cost and running costs and feasibility of
either installing the discharge mains to the station or a direct pumping main through a
borehole to the surface and submit his recommendation for consent. The layout shall be such
as to facilitate easy removal & replacement of pumps.
The linings of the sumps shall be designed for the appropriate ground and groundwater loads.
The design and construction of the junctions with the running tunnel linings shall be in
accordance with the general requirements of these Outline Design Specifications.
3.17 Ground Treatment and Temporary Suppo rt
For all bored-tunnel sections, a plan shall be prepared, based on all of the available data, of the
anticipated need for and methods of providing the following.
• Ground treatment at break-in / break-out locations

• Ground treatment in advance of the tunnel excavation.
• Temporary support during tunnel excavation.
This information and the assumptions on which it is based shall be shown on the design
drawings. The effect of tunnelling activities on structures located above the line of the tunnel
shall be determined and any remedial action necessary to minimise the settlement of these
structures shall be implemented prior to tunnel excavation.
A detailed materials and workmanship specification shall be provided for the use, if any, of
shotcrete, or rock bolts, or both as part of any final/permanent liner or support system for
tunnels.
41 | P a g e
4 SETTLEMENT AND BUILD ING PROTECTION
4.1 General
The Contractor shall design both his temporary and permanent works to ensure that ground
movements at the ground are kept to an absolute minimum. The Contractor shall use proven
techniques. Good workmanship is essential to restrict ground loss.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the control of all ground movements and for any
resulting damage to buildings, bridges, tracks and roads. The Contractor's attention is drawn
to the General Conditions of Contract and Employer's Requirements relating to repair of
damage should any arise as a result of the Contractor’s construction activities.
The Contractor shall take due regard of the presence of utilities over and adjacent to the Works.
The Contractor shall carefully and regularly monitor the ground adjacent to open cut
excavations and along tunnel drives to determine the rate and magnitude of any settlements.
Settlement shall be limited such that any individual structure or buildings shall not suffer
damage greater than "Slight" as defined in the Damage Classification Table 8.1.
Settlement to Important Structures, Bridges, Heritage Buildings shall be limited to “Negligible”

as defined in the Damage Classification Table 8.1.
The general approach to settlement control and building protection shall involve the
procedures described below.
4.2 Minimising Ground Movements
Station boxes shall be constructed in such a way as to minimise ground movements through
immediate installation of support to the ground and to minimise the inflow of water. Care
should be exercised to ensure that over excavation does not take place.
Construction from the surface shall be undertaken with due regard to the settlement
associated with the particular method chosen. In particular, the following methods will not be
permitted:
1. Use of ground anchors beneath adjacent buildings.
2. Non-recoverable timber ground support.
Ground water lowering by pumping is not prohibited by either the current Delhi Government
Laws or Regulations. However, the Contractor shall take adequate precaution in using this
method which shall only be used inside the station box or cut & cover tunnel after the walls
42 | P a g e
have been installed. Necessary approval will be required from local Water Board who will offer
guidance on disposal of water.
4.3 Prediction of Ground Movements
The Contractor shall obtain consent from the Employer for his proposed methods of
supporting and predicting settlements adjacent to structures. Proven methods based on
practical experience shall be used.
The Contractor shall provide predictive assessments of the anticipated ground movements
when making submittal for consent of his proposed method of construction of particular
sections of tunnel.
4.4 Structure C ondition Survey
The Contractor shall undertake a condition survey of all structures within the zone of potential
influence as determined by the Contractor's analysis which are anticipated to incur movements
in excess of the action level for Stage 1 specified below. `Structures` includes all surface and
sub-surface structures including historical monuments, buildings, bridges, roads, tunnels,
utilities, culverts and sewers.
4.5 Assessment of Impact on Structures
The Contractor shall provide an assessment of the effect of the predicted movement on all
structures within the zone of influence.
Settlements shall be limited as defined in Sub-Section 8.1 above.
Each building shall be categorised into one of the risk categories, in accordance with criteria
listed in column of the Damage Classification Table 8.1.
Depending upon the level of risk, precautionary and protective measures shall be proposed by
the Contractor and put into effect after consent from Engineer.
4.6 Staged Assessment
Assessment of the effects of settlement shall be undertaken in one, two or three stages,
depending upon the findings at each stage, as described below: -
• Stage 1
The effect of building foundations on the pattern of settlement is ignored. Any

structure where the predicted settlement is less than 10mm and the predicted ground
43 | P a g e
slope is less than 1/500 need not be subject to further assessment. All other structures
within the zone of influence shall be subjected to a Stage 2 assessment.
• Stage 2
Structures subject to settlement from bored tunnels shall be individually assessed

using a limiting tensile strain approach. This method of assessment takes into account
the tensile strains in the ground and uses a simple idealised model of the building.
Tried and tested references from the literature may be utilised as an alternative.
In the case of cut and cover excavations, the assessment shall be based on the work of
Peck and Clough and O'Rourke using parameters derived from recent case histories
or any other tried and tested method.
• Stage 3.
All structures which are placed in Category 3 or above in the Damage Classification
Table 8.1, during the second stage assessment, shall be subjected to a further
settlement assessment. A structural survey shall be undertaken by the Contractor to
determine the structural form and condition of a building, followed by an analysis of
how individual elements of the building would be affected by the predicted settlement.
The method, extent and detail of the analysis will be determined on a case-by-case
basis and may include, inter alia, an analysis of the soil/structure interaction,
structural behaviour, and the possible effects of differential stiffness of the
foundations.
As a result of the Stage 3 analysis, the requirement for any protective works shall be
established and the details of any protective works including designs and method of
working determined. Details of such works shall be submitted to the Employer for his
consent.
4.7 Monitoring
Monitoring of ground settlement shall be carried out during construction by the

Contractor, to check that the ground is behaving as predicted. The Contractor shall
submit for the Employer consent a monitoring system and procedures to immediately
detect movements.
The extent of monitoring of structures shall be carried out on a case-by-case day to

day or more frequent basis depending upon the assessment of risk of damage. Special
attention shall be paid to the historical buildings located along the alignment.
Monitoring shall begin prior to commencement of the Works to enable base-line
44 | P a g e
values to be determined accurately and shall continue until all settlements due to the
underground works, as shown by the monitoring, has effectively stopped for a period
of three months.
The Contractor shall make monitoring results available for inspection by the
Employer at the construction site offices.
(viii) TABLE 8.1: BUILDING DAMAGE CLASSIFICATION
Building Damage Classification1
(after Burland et al, 1977 and Boscardin and Cording, 1989)
1 2 3 4 5
Risk Description Description of Typical Damage and Likely Approx2 Crack Max
Category of Degree of Form of Repair for Typical Masonry Width( mm) Tensile
Damage Buildings Strain %
0 Negligible Hairline cracks. Less than

than 0.05
1 Very Slight Fine cracks easily treated during normal 0.1 to 1 0.05 to
redecorations. Perhaps isolated slight
fracture in building. Cracks in exterior 0.075
brickwork visible upon close inspection.
2 Slight Cracks easily filled. Redecoration probably 1 to 5 0.075 to

required. Several slight fractures inside
building. Exterior cracks visible : some 0.15
repointing may be required for weather
tightness. Doors and windows may stick
slightly.
3 Moderate Cracks may require cutting out and patching. 5 to 15 or a 0.15 to

Recurrent cracks can be masked by suitable number of
linings. Tack-pointing and possibly cracks 0.3
replacement of a small amount of exterior greater than
brickwork may be required. Doors and 3
windows sticking. Utility services may be
interrupted. Water tightness often impaired.
4 Severe Extensive repair involving removal and 15 to 25 but Greater

replacement of sections of walls, especially also depends
over doors and windows required. Windows on number of than 0.3
and door frames distorted. Floor slopes cracks
noticeably. Walls lean or bulge noticeably,
some loss of bearing in beams. Utility
services disrupted.
5 Very Severe Major repair required involving partial or Usually

complete reconstruction. Beams lose greater than
bearing, walls lean badly and require 25 but
depends on
45 | P a g e
shoring. Windows broken by distortion. number of

Danger of instability. cracks
Notes: 1. The table is based on the work of Burland et al (1977) and includes typical maximum tensile
strains for the various damage categories (column 5) used in the stage 2 settlement analysis.
2. Crack width is only one aspect of damage and should not be used on its own as a direct measure
of it.
46 | P a g e
Volume 4
Section 3
Civil Structures
47 | P a g e
Table of Contents

No. No.
1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 General consideration of planning, design and construction .................................................. 6

2. DESIGN................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1. General ......................................................................................................................................... 6

2.2. Geometric Design ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.3. Drainage System .......................................................................................................................... 8
3. PAVEMENT DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Type of Pavement & Parameters of Pavement Design ............................................................. 8

3.2. Design Life ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3. Flexible Pavement ....................................................................................................................... 9
3.4. Rigid Pavement............................................................................................................................ 9
3.5. Durability ..................................................................................................................................... 9
3.6. Safety and Serviceability of Design .......................................................................................... 10
3.7. Design Traffic............................................................................................................................. 10
3.8. Concrete Strength...................................................................................................................... 10
3.9. Rigid Pavement Design ............................................................................................................. 10
3.10. Details of Joints .......................................................................................................................... 11
3.11. Dowel Bars & Tie Bar ................................................................................................................ 11
4. MATERIALS.....................................................................................................................................................................12
4.1. General ....................................................................................................................................... 12

4.2. For Rigid Pavement Work ........................................................................................................ 12
4.2.1 Cement ....................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Aggregates ................................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.3 Dry Lean Cement Concrete ....................................................................................................... 13
4.2.4 Cement Concrete Pavement ..................................................................................................... 13
4.3. Flexible Pavement Work........................................................................................................... 14
4.3.1 Subgrade and Sub Base Material (Flexible) ............................................................................ 14
5. PAVER BLOCKS .............................................................................................................................................................15
6. SIGNAGE ...........................................................................................................................................................................15
GEOTECHNICAL, FOUNDATIONS AND TUNNEL WORKS ............................................................................21
1 GENERAL, STANDARDS AND CODES ...................................................................................................................21
48 | P a g e
1.1 Purpose and Scope.......................................................................................................................................................21
1.2 Codes, Standards, and Regulations .......................................................................................................................21

Section 1.03 British Standards Institution .................................................................................... 23
Section 1.04 Others ......................................................................................................................... 23
2 SITE INVESTIGATIONS AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS .....................................................24
2.1 SITE INVESTIGATIONS ..............................................................................................................................................24
1. General Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................24
2. Investigation Requirements ....................................................................................................................................24
2.2 Investigation Methods ................................................................................................................................................26
1. Geologic Studies ............................................................................................................................................................26
2. Geophysical Surveys ...................................................................................................................................................26
3. Exploratory Drill holes ...............................................................................................................................................26
4. Other Ground-Investigation Methods ..................................................................................................................26
5. Groundwater ..................................................................................................................................................................27
2.3 LABORATORY TESTING METHODS ......................................................................................................................27
1. General Methods ...........................................................................................................................................................27
2. Index/Classification Testing of Soil Samples ....................................................................................................27
3. Strength Testing of Soil Samples............................................................................................................................28
4. Consolidation Testing of Soil Samples .................................................................................................................28
5. Permeability Testing of Soil Samples ...................................................................................................................28
6. Chemical Testing of Soil and Groundwater Samples .....................................................................................28
7. Testing of Rock Specimens .......................................................................................................................................28
3 BORED TUNNELS .........................................................................................................................................................29
3.1 Method Statement ........................................................................................................................................................29
3.2 Types and General Methods of Analyses ............................................................................................................29
3.4 Loads .................................................................................................................................................................................33
3.5 Loading Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................34
49 | P a g e
3.6 Flotation ...........................................................................................................................................................................35
3.7 Heave and Settlement.................................................................................................................................................35
3.8 Tunnel Lining .................................................................................................................................................................35
3.9 Segmental Linings ........................................................................................................................................................36
3.10 Segment Details.............................................................................................................................................................37
1. Gasket grooves ..............................................................................................................................................................37
2. Concrete cover ...............................................................................................................................................................37
3. Grout holes ......................................................................................................................................................................37
3.11 Conventional Tunnel Lining.....................................................................................................................................37
1. Spiles, Dowels and Rock bolts .................................................................................................................................38
2. Sprayed concrete ..........................................................................................................................................................38
3. Waterproof membranes ............................................................................................................................................38
4. Cavity grouting ..............................................................................................................................................................38
3.12 Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) and Shields ......................................................................................................38
3.13 Waterproofing ...............................................................................................................................................................39
3.14 Underpinning of Existing Structures ....................................................................................................................40
3.15 Cross Passages ...............................................................................................................................................................40
3.16 Sumps in Running Tunnels.......................................................................................................................................40
3.17 Ground Treatment and Temporary Support ....................................................................................................41
4 SETTLEMENT AND BUILDING PROTECTION...................................................................................................42
4.1 General..............................................................................................................................................................................42
4.2 Minimising Ground Movements .............................................................................................................................42
4.3 Prediction of Ground Movements .........................................................................................................................43
4.4 Structure Condition Survey......................................................................................................................................43
4.5 Assessment of Impact on Structures ....................................................................................................................43
4.6 Staged Assessment ......................................................................................................................................................43
4.7 Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................................................44
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................52
2. CIVIL STRUCTURES .....................................................................................................................................................52
2.1 Loads and Requirements .......................................................................................................... 52
50 | P a g e
2.1.1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 52

2.1.2 Nominal Loads ........................................................................................................................... 52
2.1.3 Design Loads .............................................................................................................................. 53
2.1.4 Dead Loads................................................................................................................................. 53
2.1.5 Superimposed Dead Loads ....................................................................................................... 53
2.1.6 Imposed Loads .......................................................................................................................... 53
2.1.7 Vehicular Live Load................................................................................................................... 53
2.1.8 Fatigue........................................................................................................................................ 54
2.1.9 Dynamic ..................................................................................................................................... 54
2.1.10 Vehicle Collision Load ............................................................................................................... 54
2.1.11 Wind ........................................................................................................................................... 54
2.1.12 Wave Surge ................................................................................................................................ 54
2.1.13 Temperature .............................................................................................................................. 54
2.1.14 Seismic Loads ............................................................................................................................ 55
2.2 Deflection Criteria ..................................................................................................................... 60
2.3 Durability ................................................................................................................................... 60
2.4 Concrete Sub-Structure .................................................................................................................. 61
51 | P a g e
1. INTRODUCTION
This section covers the Outline Design Specifications for civil structures including cut
and cover tunnel, transition ramps, box culverts, glazed steel roof for transition ramps,
ventilation plant rooms, tunnel launching and retrieval shafts, cantilever promenade etc.
The Specifications given herein shall apply for all structures (above ground and below
ground), unless noted otherwise.
For Codes and Standards, refer to Volume 5, Section 3.
2. CIVIL STRUCTURES
2.1 Loads and Requirements
2.1.1 General
Unless specified otherwise the design of concrete and steel elements shall conform to
IS 456 and IS 800, respectively.
2.1.2 Nominal Loads
For the purpose of computing stresses and deformations, the following minimum load
types and consequential effects shall be taken into account as applicable.
Dead loads (including notional loads) DL
Superimposed Dead loads SIDL
Imposed Loads IL
Vehicular loads RL
Fatigue FG
Dynamic DY
Wind Loads WL
Temperature loads TE
Seismic Loads EQ
Construction/Erection ER
Shrinkage SH
Creep CP
Movement/ Distortion MD
Earth Pressure EP
Surcharge SR
52 | P a g e
Hydrostatic WP
Accidental AC
Redundancy R
2.1.3 Design Loads
Design shall include all of the following loads
2.1.4 Dead Loads
Self-weight of the materials shall be calculated in accordance with IS 875:1987 Part 1
2.1.5 Superimposed Dead Loads
Super imposed dead load includes:
(1) Concrete fill minimum thickness of 300mm to support the RC wearing coat (cut and
cover and transition ramp structures)
(2) Curbs and Railing loads.
(3) Any finishes/toppings on structure.
2.1.6 Imposed Loads
Pedestrian imposed load shall be not less than 6kPa. For other imposed loads refer to
NBC.
2.1.7 Vehicular Live Load
2.1.1.1 Vertical Load
(1) Each component of the structure shall be designed/checked for all possible
combinations of loads in accordance with IRC-6 2014.The structure shall resist the
effect of the worst combination.
(2) Maximum number of axles will be loaded on the structure to arrive at maximum
longitudinal force, maximum shear and maximum bending moments. The
structure shall be checked for one-lane load condition as well as (both) 2-lane load
condition.
2.1.1.2 Horizontal Load
(A) Braking and Traction
Braking load is taken as 15% of the unfactored vertical loads.
Traction load is taken as 18% of the unfactored vertical loads.
Transverse/ longitudinal seismic condition, only 50% of gross tractive effort/braking

force shall be considered.
53 | P a g e
(B) Centrifugal Force
Design Speed for various radii of curvature shall be as stipulated in the Schedule of
Dimensions – refer Volume 3, Appendix 18.
2.1.8 Fatigue
The nominal loading for the design of members in accordance with fatigue
requirements shall comprise trains with six individual cars each having four axles, the
axle loads and vehicle lengths as specified in IRC 6-2014.
Fatigue load histories shall be evaluated to provide valid and representative design
spectra, with stress histories analysed by the rain flow or equivalent method, both in
conjunction with the projected annual tonnages of rail traffic per track. The provisions
of BS 5400 Part 10 Clause 9.3.3 or other relevant methods may be used as a rigorous
method of evaluation of compliance with fatigue criteria.
2.1.9 Dynamic
Impact factor for longitudinal analysis shall be 1.2 while for transverse analysis the same
shall be 1.67
2.1.10 Vehicle Collision Load
The impact on crash barrier due to collision shall be considered at critical locations for
the appropriate quanta of impact loads specified in IRC 6: 2014 It is required to mitigate
impact effects on elements that may be adversely affected without enhancements.
2.1.11 Wind
Wind loading may affect the surface elements of underground structures such as vent-
shafts and Transition ramp structure. It is also a factor on temporary structures during
construction. IS 875: Part 3 shall be applied to determine the appropriate design wind
loads in combination. Wind effects from venting in below-ground areas shall be
designed appropriately.
2.1.12 Wave Surge
The impact of tidal behaviour, wave surge etc. shall be considered as specified in BS
6349 – Part 1-2.
2.1.13 Temperature
Forces may arise from a thermal gradient within a structural element; this may be from
external sources or, in the case of fresh concrete, from the internal heat of hydration
during curing.
54 | P a g e
These forces shall be considered in combination with those from other types of loads
to determine the worst loading condition. “Locked-in” forces from temperature effects
(e.g. from curing of concrete) shall be considered as a permanent load and due
allowance made in the design for such.
Temporary works with structural steel bracing elements or similar may also suffer
adverse effects from thermal strains. These strains shall be mitigated to avoid losses in
preloading and subsequent excessive deformations in structural members.
2.1.14 Seismic Loads
Seismic effects shall be considered on all structures, including underground structures.
Evaluation of seismic loads shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards or to other
relevant seismic standards or references where the Indian Standards do not provide
sufficient guidance.
The zonal demarcations for levels of seismicity shall be evaluated as per IS 1893-2002.
The structure is required to be evaluated as an “important service and community

building” for the purpose of ‟functional use” as stated in IS 1893:2002.
The effects of load changes and deformation as a result of soil behaviour (e.g.
liquefaction) shall be allowed for in the assessment and design.
2.1.14.1 Seismic design for above-ground structures
Earthquake design shall follow the seismic requirements of IS 1893: 2002
(1) Design Base Shear
(a) The design base shear shall be calculated based on recommendation

given in IS: 1893.The total design lateral force or design seismic base
shear (VB) along any principal direction shall be determined by the
following expression:
VB = AhW
Where
Ah=Design horizontal acceleration spectrum value, using the fundamental

natural period Ta calculated according to clause 7.6 of IS 1893-2002 (Part 1) in
the considered direction of vibration, and;
W = Seismic weight of the building calculated according to Cl. 7.4.2 of IS1893-

2002 Part 1
55 | P a g e
The design horizontal seismic coefficient Ah for a structure shall be determined

by the following expression:
Z
Ah = ----- x I x Sa/g
2
Provided that for any structure with T ≤ 0.1 s, the value of Ah will not be taken
less than Z/2 whatever be the value of I/R
Where
Z = Zone factor. The project site falls within Zone III. Zone factor
(Z) of 0.16 shall be taken as per IS 1893-2002 (Part 1).
I= Importance factor shall be taken as 1.5.
R = Response reduction factor shall be as per Table 7 of IS 1893,
Sa/g= Average response acceleration coefficient for rock or soil sites

as given by Fig. 2 and Table 3 of IS 1893 based on appropriate
natural periods (Ta) and damping of the structure. These
curves represent free field ground motion.
Damping for the concrete structure shall be assumed as 5%. Based on type of
foundations provided for the structure and soil strata type, the appropriate spectral
coefficient shall be selected from Fig. 2 of IS 1893-2002 Part 1. The vertical seismic
coefficient will be taken as two thirds of the design horizontal acceleration as per clause.
6.4.5 of IS 1893-2002 Part 1.
2.1.14.2 Seismic design for underground structures
The lateral earth pressure for external walls of underground structures for seismic load
case shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 8 of IS1893-1984.
Evaluation of seismic loads shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards or to other
relevant seismic standards when the Indian Standards may not be applicable.
2.1.15 Construction/Erection
The weight of all permanent and temporary materials together with all other forces and
effects which can operate on any part of structure during construction shall be taken
into account. Allowances shall be made in the permanent design for “locked-in” stresses
caused in any member during construction.
56 | P a g e
2.1.16 Shrinkage and Creep
Provisions shall be made for the effects of shrinkage and creep within concrete
structures. This includes interface shear transfer mechanisms as a result of differential
creep and residual shrinkage effects from staged casting of concrete elements. The
shrinkage and creep strains shall be included in calculation of long term deflection of
all structural elements in accordance with Annexure C of IS 456-2000 and the limits
specified in Section 2.8 shall be applied.
2.1.17 Movement and Distortion
Consideration of the forces resulting from differential movement (distortion) of

foundation elements shall be checked as appropriate. All movements and distortions
must not be greater than limits adhered to in the relevant codes or acceptable to the
relevant Authority. These may be architectural, structural, performance or other types
of limitations currently in force.
2.1.18 Earth Pressure
Underground vertical elements that are in direct contact with the ground shall be
designed as permanent retaining walls to resist the lateral earth pressure. The
Contractor shall deduce the earth pressure coefficients based on his geotechnical
investigations. The available ground investigation records are provided in Volume 7 of
the Contract for reference purposes only.’
2.1.19 Surcharge
Soil and vehicular load surcharge on each element of Cut and Cover structure shall be
considered in the design.
2.1.20 Groundwater
Loads due to water pressure shall be calculated using a unit weight of 10 kilo Newtons
per cubic metre for fresh water and a unit weight of 10.3 kilo Newtons per cubic metre
for sea-water.
Should liquefaction of soils be a potential risk then the design water table level for
permanent structures shall include layers affected by liquefaction if this is above the
design groundwater levels.
The effects of temporary drawdown, seepage and base heave effects shall be considered
in design of the temporary works and catered for in the permanent works if there is a
“locked-in” effect from carry-over forces. The extent of the temporary walls shall be
sufficient to mitigate the effects of such loads during construction.
57 | P a g e
The effects of flotation loads shall be allowed for in the design both in the temporary
and permanent design stages.
2.1.21 Accidental
The design shall allow for a minimum impact loading of 50 KN acting at any position
and at any direction on temporary works or on partially completed permanent works.
2.1.22 Redundancy loads
The temporary structure shall allow for the effects of a “one-strut failure” condition. A
single strut failing at any position and at any stage shall be evaluated Ultimate Limit
State (ULS) condition with a FOS of not less than 1.05.
2.1.23 Differential Movement Between In-Line Structures
Differential movement between adjacent in-line structures arising from static and/or
dynamic loading shall be evaluated. Due allowance for such shall be incorporated into
the size of the structures and detailing of joints to ensure that the total and differential
movements, including distortion and relative rotation, between in-line structures shall
not the serviceability of the structures for the design life of the structures.
2.1.24 Loading Combinations
Each component of the structure shall be designed and checked for all possible
combinations of applied loads and forces. The load factors and load combinations for
ultimate and serviceability limit states are specified in the Tables 2.4 & 2.5 below
Table 2.1 Ultimate Limit State Load Combinations
Load Dead Imposed Load Earth and Wind Seismic

Combination Load (IL) Water Loads Load7 Load4
(DL) (WL) (EQ)
1.DL + IL 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - - -
2.DL + EQ 1.5 0.9 - - - - 1.5 1.5
3..DL + IL+EQ 1.2 - 1.2 - 1.2 1.2
- 1.2
4.Construction 1.5 - 1.3 - - - - -
5.Collision 1.5 1.0 1.5 - 1.5 1.0 - -
Notes
1) Load combination 4 will be used in checking temporary works proposals and

checking the structure during temporary construction stages. The imposed load
is the construction-imposed load.
58 | P a g e
2) For checking structures at the accidental water levels, the reduced partial factors
of safety for water loads are to be 1.1.
3) Structural steel design load combinations and partial factors of safety for the
design of structural steelwork are to be in accordance with IS 800 - Code of
Practice for the Structural Use of Steel Work
4) Earthquake loads are reversible.
5) 50% imposed load is to be used in line with the building mass calculated for
seismic loads in load case 2 & 3.
6) Creep, shrinkage, temperature and differential settlement are not considered in
combination with the lateral loads at ultimate limit state. Creep and shrinkage
effects will usually be minor for building type structures, no specific calculation
will be necessary for Ultimate limit state.
7) Wind load combinations are applicable for above-ground structures and shall be
considered in addition to the other combinations.
Table 2.2 Serviceability Limit State Load Combinations
Load Dead Imposed Earth & Wind Load Earthquake

Combination Load Load Water Load
Loads
1.DL + IL 1.0 1.0 1.0 - -
2.DL +EQ 1.0 - - 1.0 1.0
3.DL+IL +EQ 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2.1.25 Design Conditions
(1) The Contractor shall define the partial load factors and overall design factors of
safety in accordance with the relevant Standards and Codes for the following
four main conditions.
“Construction” - during and immediately after construction of the Works.
“Service/Operation”- during general operation of the completed facility.
“Accidental” - during “Construction and/or “Service/Operation” when

adjacent work and future development (where known) may alter loading
conditions.
“Extreme” - during “Construction and/or “Service/Operation” when

groundwater may rise to unusually high level.
59 | P a g e
(2) The assumed partial load factors and overall design factors of safety for the four
main conditions shall be included with the calculations to determine and design
for the most critical cases as provided in his design submissions.
(3) For ground loads on cut-and-cover structures, the worst combination of lateral
loading shall be considered for the Construction and Service/Operation
condition.
2.2 Deflection Criteria
The deflection limitations imposed in IS 456 and IS 800 shall be followed for Concrete
and Structural Steel elements respectively.
2.2.1 Vertical Deflection Limits
The deflection of a structure or part thereof shall not adversely affect the appearance
or efficiency of the structure or finishes or partitions. The deflection shall be limited to
the following.
a) Concrete structures
i) The final deflection due to all loads including the effects of temperature,
creep and shrinkage and measured from the as-cast level of the, supports
of floors, roofs and all other horizontal members, should not exceed
span/250.
ii) The deflection including the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage
occurring after erection of partitions and the application of finishes should
not normally exceed span/350 or 20 millimetres whichever is less.
b) Steel structures
Designs shall comply with the limits defined in IS 800.
2.3 Durability
Clauses 2.6.1 to 2.6.3 of this section stipulate durability requirements for underground
structures. For above-ground and structures the following contents shall be adopted.
(1) The exposure condition for the above-ground structures shall be “severe” as
defined in Table 3 of IS :456-2000
(2) The minimum grade of concrete shall be M30
(3) Fire Resistance Period
60 | P a g e
All the structural elements shall be designed for a minimum fire resistance
period of 2 hours. The minimum element thicknesses for this fire resistance
shall be as follows.
Sl. Minimum Dimension

No. Element (mm)
1 RC Slab 125
2 RC Beam 200
3 RC Walls 160
4 RC Columns 300
5 Blockwork Wall 100
(4) Crack Width Check
Crack width in concrete shall be checked in accordance with Appendix F of IS

456-2000.The maximum allowable crack width shall be as given in Table 2.2
above.
2.4 Concrete Sub-Structure
(1) The pile design capacity shall be based on pile end bearing and friction along rock
socketed length of pile. The pile design shall conform to IRC 78/ IS 2911 and
Notice obtained from the Engineer before commencement of work.
(2) Piles shall be end bearing on hard rock, and as a minimum socketed into hard
rock for a depth of 1.5 times the diameter of the piles.
(3) The pile end bearing capacity and rock socket friction capacity in the founding
strata shall be verified based on Dynamic loading test (2% of the total number of
piles) as specified in the IRC 78 /IS 2911.
(4) The integrity of concrete piles shall be verified by sonic echo test. Sonic tubes
shall be installed in all of piles, and the test shall be carried out randomly at one
pile per one pier. Test piles will be chosen by the Engineer.
(5) Foundation types shall generally be End bearing pile foundation. Spread
foundation shall be permitted if founding stratum is at a shallow depth. Other
types of foundation can be proposed to the Engineer by the Contractor for his
approval, but no raking pile will be permitted.
(6) The construction method for installation of piles within the inter-tidal zone shall
not cause significant disturbance to the mud-flats.
(7) Piles shall be provided with permanent steel liners with corrosion protected
coating with a minimum thickness of 6mm.
61 | P a g e
(8) The liner plate shall be embedded in concrete to at least 50mm from the bottom
of the pile cap.
(9) The structural design of the piles shall not rely on any structural capacity
contribution from the permanent steel liners in its structural analysis of the
piles.
62 | P a g e
Goregoan Mulund Link Road Contract Code: GMLR/000
Volume 4
Outline Design Specifications
(Part 2- E&M Works)
Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C.),

1|Page
Contents
1. SCOPE OF THE E&M WORKS ................................................................................................... 3
2. REQUIREMENTS OF E&M WORKS........................................................................................ 5
3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SUPPLY AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENTS ........ 9
4. FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM ..........................................................................................................26
5. CODES AND THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE EQUIPMENTS ..................................28
2|Page
1. SCOPE OF THE E&M WORKS
1.1. General
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai proposes to be construct 4,790 m long 3 lanes twin
Road Tunnel tubes in Mulund- Goregaon Link Road . Both the Tunnel tubes are 10.5 m wide
for 3 Lanes to meet the requirements of proposed heavy density Road traffic of more than
4,000 vehicles /Hour developing up to the next 20 years. The tunnel tubes are passing under
the Sanjay Gandhi National Park and are with minor curves on both the ends. The level
difference between the two tunnel ends is about 22m. The approach roads and the tunnel
tubes are being designed for the vehicles movements at 80 KMPH speed.
1. The Tunnel Lighting work Agency must have experience of designing and installation
of Road Tunnel Lighting work and should have success fully designed & erected the
lighting system (with LED Luminaries) of at least one long road tunnel. The
Luminaries proposed shall be suitable for Tunnel lighting requirements and must
have been in use for Roads Tunnel lightings for more than 3 years.
2. Similarly, the Ventilation & the control Equipment work execution agency must have
done similar work in the past & the system should be working satisfactorily for more
than 3 years.
3. The work Agency carrying out the power supply work shall coordinate with all the
other work agencies and shall be responsible for pre-commissioning tests of electrical
equipment.
4. The Basic Preliminary design details and drawings are developed for assessing the
requirements of the equipments indicated in the BOQ, however, the detailed design
and drawings shall have to be developed by the contractor and submitted to the
clients or consultant for approval. All the Detailed designs and drawings shall be
based on a thorough study. General designs shall be such that it meets the
requirements of the tunnel lighting / Tunnel Ventilation codes/ International
specifications and confirming to the Electricity Acts and Rules. The Clients Engineers
approval shall be based on these considerations. Notwithstanding the consultant’s
approval the ultimate responsibility for the correct design and execution of all E&M
works including the control system shall rest with the Work Agency/contractor.
5. As per “The guide lines for Road Tunnels issued by IRC SP 91: 2010”, IRC SP 87:2013
and as per MORTH specifications it is mandatory to provide the Forced Ventilation,
nd the Lighting systems of Tunnel tubes. The Monitoring & the Control systems,
Radio rebroadcasting system, Emergency talk back system, Emergency Telephone,
Cellular Connectivity, CCTV Systems are also required to be provided apart from Fire
3|Page
Fighting system and Hydrants for the proposed 4,790 m long Roads tunnel tubes. A
stable & reliable power supply system is also necessary for operation of the systems
involved. The correct assessment of the normal and maximum requirement of the
power supply at each receiving Electrical substation is also requied to be made.
6. The BOQs of different E&M works have been developed on the basis of preliminary
design. The quantitative are likely to vary as per the final design and the actual site
conditions. The Final Design, of the lighting, Ventilation, SCADA Control, and the Fire
Fighting systems of the Tunnel Tubes has to be done confirming tor the
international/ National standards. The locations and the no. of Electric Power
Substations have also to be decided on the basis of restricting the Voltage drop within
permissible limits.
7. It is necessary that the Tunnel Tubes and the site of approach roads are inspected by
the agencies propose to take the contract and obtain the required clarifications
/information before filling up the tender papers.
8. Vendor shall submit their internal quality assurance plan followed for manufacturing
of the equipment for approval of owner / consultant this shall be adhered to and shall
be monitored by owner consultant during manufacture.
9. It is proposed to provide Solar Power panels on the proposed Power supply sub-
stations buildings on either side and also the roofing of the control room building to
meet the normal day to day power requirements during the non-monsoon period.
This however is not in the scope of the present contract.
10. The available 33 KV HT Power supply on both the tunnel ends is proposed to be taken
for reliability of power supply system. Stand by Diesel Generating Sets of the required
sizes are also proposed for meeting the emergency working conditions. On Line UPS
systems of suitable sizes, at both end of tunnel substations are also proposed to
ensure that in no circumstances the tunnel tubes are without lighting system.
11. The Sizes and the lengths of the power cables have been arrived on the basis of
Preliminary design considering the Voltage drop limitations. In the final design to be
carried out by the contractor, there may be some variations in the sizes and the
lengths.
12. The latest SCADA Technology is proposed for tunnel environment monitoring and
control, CCTV, Internal communication, the Remote control /operation of Tunnel
lighting, Radio, Ventilation and the power supply system.
13. Fire fighting system is required to be operated in case of fires inside the tunnel tubes.
The system is normally operated after evacuation of trapped vehicles through the
tunnel escape routes provided at 300m spacing between the two tunnel tubes. The
4|Page
underground water tank of required capacity shall be made available. Laying of 150
mm dia. GI water pipes running throughout inside the tunnel tubes is in the scope of
the work. High power water pumps of the designed capacity along with Jockey Pump
are in the scope of work
14. Any clarifications comments on the condition of the contract as well as specifications
be got cleared through a letter, before submitting the offer.
2. REQUIREMENTS OF E&M WORKS
2.1. General
1. The entire work has to be completed /commissioned within the stipulated period of
…………after the award of the contract. Time is the essence of the contract as the
project has to be put to commercial use positively by …….
2. The client reserves the right to supply some major equipment to the contractor, the
erection of which however, shall be done by the contractor. All the
equipments/materials shall be of best quality requiring practically no/minimum
maintenance.
3. Any instruction or approval given by the engineer’s representative to the Contractor
in connection with the works shall bind the Contractor as though it had been given by
the Engineer.
4. Failure of the client’s representative to disapprove any work or materials shall not
prejudice the power of the Engineer there after to disapprove such work or material
and to order the removal or breaking up thereof. If the Contractor is dissatisfied by
reason of any decision of the Engineer’s representative he shall be entitled to refer
the matter to the Engineer who shall there upon confirm or vary such decision.
5. A pre bid meeting is proposed for on the spot clarification by our expert so that no
deviations to the specifications contract conditions are necessary.
2.2. Setting Out of Works

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out of all works in relation
to original points, lines and levels of reference at his cost. The Contractor shall execute
the work true to alignment, grade, levels and dimensions as shown in the drawing and
as directed by the Engineer’s representative and shall check these at frequent
intervals. The Contractor shall provide all facilities like labour and instruments and
shall cooperate with the Engineer’s representative to check all alignments, grades,
levels and dimensions. If, at anytime, during the progress of the works any error shall
5|Page
appear or arise in any part of the work, the Contractor, on being required to do so by
the Engineer’s representative shall, at his own cost rectify such errors, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer’s representative. Such checking shall not absolve the
Contractor of his own responsibility of maintaining accuracy in the work
2.3. Site Office and Setting up of Depot

The Contractor shall have to set up site office and main depot near the work site to
receive equipments / other materials. The client shall be providing a covered shed/
room near the site of the work to store small fittings and other valuable items and the
site office free of charge. The Engineer shall also offer suitable open space reasonably
leveled and workable and suitable for storage of steel poles & cables etc free of charge
to the contractors.
2.4. Inventory of Stores

A Contractor shall maintain proper ledger/record of all the items of stores/equipment
received in the Depots and issued from time to time on the works. A daily ground
balance shall also be maintained in the ledger. A proper record of all the items for
which “On–account” payment for supply portion of the BOQ has been made, a monthly
reconciliation statement of all the stores items shall be furnished to the Engineer.
2.5. Power & Water Supply

Power supply for Depots, Offices, and sites of work shall be arranged by the
Contractors at his own cost. Contractor shall also arrange his own water supply at his
cost for the works and other purposes.
2.6. Site Clearance

At the end of each spell or work and on completion of the work, the Contractor shall,
as a part of his contractual obligation, leave the tracks, work sites, and their
approaches, store yards etc. cleared of rubbish and obstruction of all kinds according
to the instructions of the Engineer If within a fortnight of completion of the work, the
refuse is not cleared, the Engineer will arrange to get them removed at the cost of the
Contractor. However, before the Engineer actually gets the site cleared he shall send
intimation in writing to the Contractor expressing his intention.
6|Page
2.7. Hydraulic lifting platform mounted on the Truck

A hydraulic lifting crane/Jig mounted on a truck shall be used by the contractor for
erection of Ventilation fans and the associated works and Luminaries, cable
supporting Trays and such associated works. This hydraulic lifting platform mounted
on a truck also be used for maintenance of assets/equipments. The contractor shall
take full precautions to maintain the Hydraulic van in good working condition and
hand it over to the client after the specified maintenance period at the agreed
depreciated cost. The contractor shall also arrange all the required E & M for erection/
/checking of the work and maintenance. Parking space near the tunnel portal shall be
made available by the client. A lockable room near the power supply room shall be
given for keeping the maintenance spares.
2.8. Contractor’s Drawings

Any calculations, designs, drawings, schedules, information, data, progress charts etc.
required by the Engineer in connection with the Contract shall be furnished by the
Contractor at his own expenses.
2.9. All designs and drawings

1. Submitted by the Contractor shall be based on a thorough study and shall be
such that the Contractor is satisfied about their suitability. The Engineer
approval will be based on these considerations, notwithstanding the approval
communicated by the Engineer, during the progress of the Contract for designs
and drawings, prototype samples of components, materials and equipment
after inspection of materials, after erection and adjustments to installations,
the ultimate responsibility for correct design and execution of work shall rest
with the Contractor unless the Engineer insists on adoption of his own designs
in spite of the Contractor not being agreeable to it.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear and pay the costs for
any alteration of works arising from any discrepancies, errors or omissions in
the designs and drawings supplied by him, whether such designs and
drawings have been approved by the Engineer Client or not.
2.10. Additions and Alterations to the erected equipment
The Engineer may require additional installations or modifications to be carried out
on the works that deems necessary, either during the execution or after a part or
whole of the installations coming within the purview of the Contract has been put into
commercial service. In case additional installations or modifications are required to
7|Page
be carried out, the client shall grant an addional jointly agreed payment apart from
reasonable extension of time, should it be necessary.
2.11. As erected Drawings
On completion of the work, the contractor shall supply 4 sets of as erected drawings,
along with 2 sets of soft copies giving technical details of all the equipments used and
actual work carried out at site.
2.12. Safety
The contractor shall take all precautionary measures to ensure the safety of the
workmen during execution/ commissioning of the In addition, the Engineer may issue
additional instructions from time to time as per exigencies of the work.
2.13. Workmanship
1. Unless specifically approved by the client, all the equipments/ materials shall
be supplied from the approved manufacturers/suppliers as given in the
Approved List of suppliers.
2. The whole of the works and / or supply of materials specified and provided in
the contract or that may be necessary to be done in order to form and
complete any part thereof shall be executed in the best and most substantial
workman like manner with materials of the best and most approved quality of
the respective kinds, agreeable to the particulars contained in or implied by
the specifications and as referred to in and represented by the drawings or
in such other additional particulars, instructions and drawings as may be
found requisite to be given during the carrying out of the works and to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer according to the instructions and directions
which the Contractor may from time to time receive from the Engineer. The
materials may be subjected to test by means of such machines, instruments
and appliances as the Engineer may direct and wholly at the expense of the
Contractors.
2.14. Installation, Testing and Commissioning

1. Only Qualified electricians with certificate shall be allowed to work on the
electrical equipments. The work shall be carried out confirming to Electricity
Rules and Act. The installation, testing and commissioning of all the equipment
shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with relevant standards
8|Page
The test reports shall be submitted to Employer’s Representative for his

approval.
2. The Contractor shall carry out all the tests and checks required for
guaranteeing the Employer’s Representative of the good construction and the
satisfactory operation of the Works. Also the Contractor shall co-ordinate &
arrange testing equipment required for testing of equipment as and when
needed. The various high medium and low voltage equipments will be
subjected to all the tests required as per the relevant IEC or other standards
mentioned in the Technical Specification. The test reports shall be submitted
to Employer’s Representative for his approval. After the approval, integrated
testing and commissioning will be carried out duly coordinating with
Designated Contractors during which various operation situations (putting
into service, normal actuation, failure/tripping) will be demonstrated to
Employer’s Representative for his satisfaction.
3. The contractor shall be responsible for arranging EIGs approval before
charging the Sub Station Equipments. He shall carryout the required pre
commissioning tests, & submit the report to EIG as per procedure.
4. The contractor shall ensure to attend the defect n/ deficiencies during
maintenance period with in 4-6 hours
3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SUPPLY AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENTS
3.1. Tunnel lighting

1. The contractors must have experience of designing and installation of Road
Tunnel Lighting work and should have success fully designed & erected the
lighting system of at least one long road tunnel with LED Luminaries. The
Luminaries proposed shall be suitable for Tunnel lighting requirements and
must have been in use for Roads Tunnel lightings for more than 2 years.
2. Symmetrical lighting system shall be provided for better visual comfort ( less
Glair),clear visibility of obstacles realized by positive contrast. Graded lighting
is to be provided in the road tunnels to overcome “BLACK HOLE” effect
experienced by vehicle drivers when entering the tunnel from a brightly lit
exterior and also to reduce glare when traveling from a darker area to brightly
illuminated one. The Tunnel tubes Road Illumination is to be provided as per
the requirements of the following specifications
I. International Commission on Illumination’s Spec. ISBN 3 901 906 31 2
“Guide for the Lighting of Road Tunnels and Under Passes “,UDC 628.931
9|Page
II. BS5489 ROAD LIGHTING-Part 7-Code of practice for the Lighting of

Tunnels & under passes
III. American Standard-Practice For tunnel Lighting ANSI/IES RP-22-1987
3. The proposed desired required illumination level for different Zones for 80
KMPH speed and the site conditions are required to be considered The broad
details for final Designing the tunnel lighting system for the proposed 4700 m
long twin tunnel tubes are given below.
i) Lengths of the tunnels 4790m &4650m

ii) Width of each tunnel tube 1.2m +10,5m +1.2m (3 lanes)
iii) Max Height of the Tunnel 10.324 m
iv) Max Speed allowed 80 KMPH
v) Traffic density Heavy
vi) Direction North- SE
vii) Luminaries proposed Ht. 5.750m
viii) Traffic Direction one way
ix) Condition Fully Lined with White painted
x) Approach Roads Lighting Level 40 Lux
xi) Approach roads entry heavy cutting on Norh side
xii) Wall reflectance 5%
xiii) Ceiling reflectance: nil
xiv) Pavement reflectance : 15%
xv) Minimum UO : 40 %
xvi) Minimum UI 70 %
4. The illumination of each tunnel tube is required to be divided into the

segments (zones) to have illumination levels not less than specified in the
above specifications/codes to suit 80 KMPH speed considering the site
conditions.
5. The preliminary tunnel lighting design for deciding the Zones lengths and the
illuminant levels for the BOQ purpose have been derived through a Typical
Tunnel Lighting Software for particular make of Luminaries. These are only
guide lines. The system design with any other type of Luminaries, confirming
the specifications to fulfill the lighting requirement will have to be developed
with an approved reliable Software. The no., sizes and the zones where these
10 | P a g e
luminaries are proposed to be provided to get the required illumination level

shall be worked out through relevant soft ware.
6. The Illumination levels of the different zones, with the proposed luminaries,
shall be so designed that it confirms the recommended levels of illuminations,
as per the above specifications and meet the following stages requirements.
The illumination level shall automatically get changed depending on the
Illumination Level outside the tunnel portals. Required sensors and contactors
in the Lighting Distribution Boards (LDBs) and the control system shall be
provided by the contractors. The Final Zonal lengths of different zones as per
site conditions and the speed of the vehicles are also required to be calculated.
Stage I – Bright sun shine outside the tunnel (Day time approximately 9
AM to 4 PM , depending on the season & the whether)
Stage II – When sun shine is not too bright, ie. morning evening time (7AM
to 9 AM / 4PM to 7PM) & during cloudy whether
Stage III – Night time (7pm to 7 am)
Stage IV_ Emergency lighting with UPS, in case of complete power failure
7. Different circuits shall be provided for switching “ON” or OFF” the tunnel
lights commensuration with the illumination level outside the tunnel to
maintain the requisite level of illumination inside the tunnel.
8. The required information about the development of the Tunnel lighting
designing in arriving the luminaries requirements shall be furnished by the
contractors in the enclosed Annexure -A
9. The tentative Lengths of Each Zone arrived in the preliminary design is given
below
I. TH1- 50 m (0 to 50 m );
II. TH2- 50 m (51m to 100mr);
III. Transition Zone 45 m (101m to 145 m);
IV. Interior Zone-1 146m to 850 m
V. Interior Zone- 2- 3,820 m (850 m to 4670 m);
VI. Exit Zone 120 m (4,670 m to 4,790 m)
11 | P a g e
10. The details of the Lighting Design developed by Tunnel Lighting Software
confirming to the specification shall be submitted by the bidders in the
following Performa to confirm that the system confirms the requirement.
Requirements of Lighting Levels in each Zone as per CIE 88:2004 is given
below
Averag UO UL Av. Av.

e Illumi Illumi
Overa Longi
natio natio
Illumin ll tudin
n on n on
ation Unifo al
Wall- Wall-
rmity
Unifo 1 2
rmity
Zones As per Ac As Achi As Ac As per Achie As Achi

CIE hie per eved per hie CIE ved per eve
88:200 ve CIE CIE ved 88:20 CIE d
4 d 88:20 88:20 04 88:20
04 04 04
Thershold 1 150 40% 60% 90 90
Thershold 2 60 40% 60% 36 36
Transition 12 40% 60% 7.2 7.2
Interior (till 8 40% 4.8 4.8

850 mtr) 60%
Interior 2 3 40% 1.8 1.8

Very Long
Tunnel 60%
12 | P a g e
(850 mtr to
4.58 km)
40 40% 95 24 24
Exit
60% %
Night Time 3 40% 60% 1.8 1.8
11. The Most Effective Luminaries can provide the required Illumination levels in different
Zones. While evaluating the financial offers, the saving in the power consumption for 5
years due to efficient /effectiveness of the luminaries offered for providing the
required illumination level shall also be considered.
3.2. Cable supporting GI Perforated Trays

1. The Scope of the work includes Supplying & erection of cable supporting
perforated GI Trays as per Drawing No. GMLR/E&M/TUN/10 and the relevant
specifications, complete with Tee, cross, Horizontal bends Vertical Bends and
reducers etc and thei erection. The cost of supplying and erection of the cable
supporting Trays/ includes all the accessories , bends joints etc, except supply
and fixing of 10mm diameter stainless steel rods for supporting the Trays
through the tunnel ceiling. The supply and fixing of 2-3 m bolts as per tunnel
height shall be paid separately as per BOQ
2. The supporting Stainless steels 10mm Diameter bolts, shall be erected/provided
at 2 m interval. For supporting the trays, required 10 mm diameter 150 mm
deep holes in the crown of the tunnel shall be drilled for grouting the 10 mm dia
2000 -3000 mm long SS bolts. Grouting of these 2.-3 m long threaded rock bolts
including supplying bolts, HILTI Epoxy compound/ grouting material capsules/
non-shrinkage adhesive etc are in the scope of work. Stainless steel bolts threaded
on both the ends, shall be used. The HILTI/ Bosch (Fischer) made drilling
machines shall be used for drilling. The Grouting Epoxy compound shall be of
HILTI make , Partially 10 mm SS threaded Bolts with Nut and Check nuts/ Split
13 | P a g e
Washer shall be used for connecting the cable trays . Scope of supplying and fixing
these SS rods includes all the above work
3. The drilling of holes in the crown of the tunnel for grouting 10 mm diameter 2m-
3m Stainless steel bolts shall be done with HILTI drilling machines and bolts
grouted not less than 200 mm in depth with special Hilti /similar approved Epoxy
compound to get strength of not less than 200 kg. The cost of erection of these 2-3
m (average length) of SS rods includes drilling and grouting of these bolts as per
specification and the requirements form part of erection of SS bolts. The cost of
each bolt shall be paid separately as per BOQ.
4. The Tunnel Tubes are in partial curvature. The contractor shall ensure correct
alignment of the cable supporting trays, luminaries etc., in conformity with the
approved design/ drawing. The Luminaries shall be leveled carefully before fixing
to the position. The contractor carrying out the power supply work shall
coordinate with all the other work agencies, and shall be responsible for pre-
commissioning tests of electrical equipments, arrange for EIGs formal sanction for
commission the power supply system
5. After commissioning of the Tunnel lighting system confirming to the requirements
and as per the international code, the contractor shall conduct tests of
measurements of the illumination levels in different zones in Lux /Cd/ m2 with
the Lux meter, and satisfy that the actual levels achieved are as per accepted
designed levels, after considering 0.85 depreciation factor. If the illumination level
is found less than the designed value, the extra luminaries shall be provided to
achieve the desired illumination levels, without any addional cost. If the difference
is too high, the system may be rejected, and penalty imposed equal to the cost
difference between the new proposed scheme and the present cost.
6. Contractor shall make his own arrangement to provide vehicle mounted hydraulic
lifting jig for drilling holes at 9m - 10 m height and grouting the rag bolts. The jig
would also be required for fixing/erection of the cable supporting trays , fixing
luminaries on the bottom of the trays and carrying out wiring work of providing
the electrical connections to the luminaries trays. The Hydraulic Jig procured by
the client for maintenance however, may be given on rental basis for use during
erection work, at the negotiated rate.
7. Electrical wiring Design for connecting luminaries shall be made and bet approved
before starting the lighting work. Designing supplying and the erection of
LDBs/ELDBs to suit the Stage lighting system forms part of the contract. Required
14 | P a g e
contactors shall be provided in the LDBs /ELDBs for remote controlled lighting
switching operations as per above stages.
8. Approach Roads Lighting-Providing approach roads lighting for a distance of
300m on Mulund Side and 900m on Goregaon side as per the specification
requirements is included in the scope of Tunnel Lighting Work.
9. The cost of Erection of the Luminaries excludes the cost of supply and erection of
3 core 2.5.0 mm2 /4.0 mm2 copper flexible cables as per the load requirements
,from the LDBs/ELDBs to the luminaries to be erected on the cable supporting
Trays The scope includes terminal boxes & terminal lugs ,crimping .bi- metallic
strips ,tie clips nylon threads etc.All the above 3 core copper cables shall be
carried in suitable size HDPE pipes from LDBs/ELDBs to the cable supporting
trays to avoid any damage to the unarmored cables. Required cable terminal lugs
duly crimped are included in the scope of erection work apart from the cost of the
10. The scope includes laying of 3.5 core Aluminum armoured Cables from LT power
panels to the LDBs/ELDGs. The cost of these cables from the LT power panels to
the LDBs/ELDBs shall be paid as provided in the BOQ.
11. The contractor has to maintain all the tunnel lighting assets for one year and with
AMC on the accepted rates for further period of 4 years. The cost of Electric
Power/water consumption shall hoever be born by the Client.
12. Emergency lighting it is imperative that under no circumstances, tunnel will be in
total darkness. Hence, emergency light with power supply shall be fed through On
Line UPS system of 40 KVA/Designed capacity, provided in either End Power
supply LT Panel and the Tunnel Middle substation LT panel. The luminaries shall
be suitably connected in the lighting circuits so that a minimum illumination level
prevails inside the tunnel for the vehicles drivers to drive low speeds of 30KMPH.
Illumination levels in different zones & different Power supply in such
circumstance to Threshold Zone, Transition Zone and the Exit Zone high power
luminaries shall be switched of automatically on the basis of tunnel out side
illumination level.
13. The recommended illumination levels and the Zone lengths as tentatively arrived
for the specified luminaries are given below. These can vary with the offered other
type of luminaries.
14. The average minimum illumination levels requirement in each Zone as per CIE,
Overall uniformity of lighting and the Longitudinal Lighting required as per CIE
have been considered in the tunnel lighting preliminary design. The balance is
15 | P a g e
required to be made to achieve minimum power consumption without sacrificing

the lighting levels & the other illumination requirements.
15. Number of Luminaries of different ratings required to get the required
illumination levels in different Zones are considered in the BOQ. The requirement
of fixtures will change with the design and luminaries power The luminaries shall
be suitable for providing different level of illumination as specified above and
must have been used elsewhere for road tunnel lighting, and giving satisfactory
service for more than 2 years The luminaries shall confirm to standard EN 60598-
1 and 2/3 . The Lighting Luminaries for Road Tunnels are of special design. The
Luminaries shall confirm to meet the following technical requirements Note -UO
and Ul shall not be less than 40 % & 70% respectively. Average luminance on the
walls up to 2 m height shall not be less than, 60 % of the average road surface
luminance.
16. Wiring diagram for feeding the Luminaries in side the tunnels shall be developed
and got approved before starting the work. indicate the schematic arrangement
and physical disposition of equipments, run of cables and wires for
interconnection between various equipments, colour coding etc. The drawings
shall indicate the sizes and lengths of cables, operating voltage levels, voltage drop
calculations and switching arrangement to get required illumination levels as per
requirements. These cables shall be laid on GI perforated Trays
17. The Bidders shall submit the technical information of their offered Tunnel
Lighting design as required in Annexure- I
3.3. Ventilation of Ttunnel tubes

1. The scope of the work include evaluation of the requirement of the of
Ventilation jet fans of the proposed Thrust (approximately), their supply
at site (including all the taxes, duties transportation,& insurance) erection
& warranty of two years for satisfactory service .The scope includes
designing, fabrication supply & erection of supporting frames for fans
2. The scope also includes supply and erection of the following associated
equipments
• VFD Starters
• FRP Cable termination Boxes /Cable terminations
• Copper cables for feeding power to Jet fans.
16 | P a g e
3. The Jet Fans shall be procured from Zitron of Spain, Mathew and Yates of
UK, woods of Cholchestor of UK, Novenco of Holland and any other
reputed Manufacturer with the specific approval of the client. The fans
manufactured shall preferably have been in use for more than 3 years
satisfactory performance. The offered Jet fans shall produce thrust not less
than as specified for the specified rated power. Fans Manufactured by any
reputed fan manufacturing company in India can be considered after
evaluation of their capability/satisfactory perfuming Proto type tests and
5 years satisfactory performance guarantee.
4. The maximum permissible speed being 80 KMPH & the Cross- section of
the Tunnel Tubes being quite large, the air flow due to piston effect is
negligible. & may generate air flow of about 0.5 m/s natural air flow in
any direction. These air flows are un predictable and can not be relied
upon. Air flow of 4.5 m/s may be considered for designing the Ventilation
system, so that the recommended minimum effective air flow of 3m/s is
available.
3.4. Jet Fans
1. The Jet Fans confirming to the specifications shall be procured
from Zitron of Spain, Mathew and Yates of UK, woods of
Cholchestor of UK, Novenco of Holland and any other reputed
Manufacturer with the specific approval of the client. The fans
manufactured should have been in use for more than 3 years
satisfactory performance. The offered Jet fans shall produce thrust
not less than as specified for the specified rated power.
2. The Jet fans shall be supplied complete with heavy duty supports
for suspension in the tunnels. The supports shall be made of
galvanized steel and welded to the fan casing so as to be integral
part of the housing, vibration dampers / anti vibrations mounts
shall be supplied to arrest the vibrations of the fans. The fans have
to be erected on the crown of the Tunnel through a suitable GI
bracket not less than 400mm depth, to be fixed to the crown of the
tunnel tubes as shown in Drawing No. GMLR/E&M/TUN/14 The
terminal box shall be installed on the outside of the fan casing in
such a way as to be easily connectable to the Power Feeder Cable
3. A separate junction box in a sturdy FRP housing (UR – IR resistant)
of adequate size shall be provide for taking and terminating 3 ½
17 | P a g e
core copper conductor, XLP (FRLS) armoured cables of sizes up to

240 sq.mm. The incoming terminals shall be adequately paced and
mechanically strengthened for terminations of the cables. The
supply and erection of power cable of the required sizes is in the
scope of power supply work.
4. The connection from the Junction Box to VDF panel to the Jet fan
terminal box shall be with 4 core copper cable of not less than 10
sq mm. suitably clipped with the tunnel wall in side the HDPE
pipe. The earth connection shall be connected to the Fan body and
the earthing link of the VFD. The cost of this 10 sq mm copper
cable/ terminations is part of the erection cost of the Jet fans The
cost of 10 mm 2 copper cable is included in the cost of erection and
shall not be paid separately.
5. Six no.300 mm long, 30 mm diameter stainless steel bolts shall be
supplied and grouted 200 mm in the crown of the tunnel for
holding the Fans and arrest the vibrations of the fans. For
Supporting Jet Fan frams.4no. Stainless steel bolts shall be grouted
in the 4 drilled holes. Nuts & check Nuts / Washers shall be used
for proper tightened the balance 2 holes are for fixing chain for
holding the jet fans as a duplicate safety measure, preventing fans
from falling down in extreme case. The fans have to be erected on
the crown of the Tunnel through a suitable GI bracket not less than
500 mm depth. Grouting of rock bolts (including supplying bolts
and other fixtures) with grouting material capsules/ non-
shrinkage adhesive etc. The preferable makes of fasteners are
Bosch (Fischer), 150 mm long partially threaded bolts shall be
used for holding the e supporting brackets
6. The technical details as per Annexure-B shall be furnished by the
renderer along with the offer for evaluation.
7. The scope of the work include evaluation of the requirement of the
of Ventilation jet fans of the proposed Thrust (approximately),
their supply at site (including all the taxes, duties transportation,&
insurance) erection & warranty of two years for satisfactory
service .The scope includes designing, fabrication supply &
erection of supporting frames for fans and following equipments
18 | P a g e
8. The Bidders shall submit the technical information of their offered

Ventilation design as required in Annexure II
3.5. Power Supply System

1. Electric Power supply connection of 33 KV grade is
proposed to be obtained from MSEB, at both the tunnel
ends ie. Malad and Goregaon, for feeding power to Tunnel
Lighting, Ventilation, Control and the Fire Fighting systems
of the Tunnel Tubes. To overcome the voltage, drop
problem, a substation in the midway of the tunnel tubes, in
the 15 m wide space between the two tunnel tubes is alss
proposed.
2. All the 3 substations are interconnected by 33 KV XLPE
cable net work for feeding 33KV power to the middle
substation and reliability of LT power from all the three
substations. Tentative Equipment layout of Substation
equipments is shown in the Drawings No
GMLR/E&M/TUN/2 & 3. The Substation tentative
Equipments lay out is given in Drawing No.
GMLR/E&M/TUN/4 The contractors shall develop Final
detail layout drawings of all the 3 substations, as per actual
sizes of the equipments get it approved before starting the
work. Construction of Substation Buildings is not in the
scope of his work.
3. Power Transformers Neutrals are required to be provided
with independent Earthing.
4. Detailed Designs and Drawings of the following Electrical
works are also in the scope of work
I) Design of the Power Supply Inter connection arrangement to ensure the reliability of
power supply & Substations inter connection arrangement.
ii) The Electrical Drawings of RMUs, different LT panels, APFC Panels and UPS etc shall b
got approved before procurement.
19 | P a g e
iii) Power supply cable Route plan. Assessment of sizes and the lengths of various
powercables as provided in BOQ.
3.6. Control & monitoring System

1. Control & Monitoring System covers the whole equipments installed inside the tunnels,
Sub Station for the successful Automatic and Manual operation and Monitoring of the
Tunnel Ventilation, Lighting and Security systems. Work covers all materials, labour and
accessories specified in the BOQ and as per the requirements. The Whole Tunnel Control
devices shall be fed by UPS Power.
2. On completion of works and before issuance of completion certificate, the contractor
should submit completion drawings in the form of four complete set of originals
(reproducible) and two sets of CD/DVD’s. The Customised designs shall be the Porperty
of the Client.All manuals and Softwares used shall be the property of the Client, contractor
will not hae any copy right or patended rights.
3. As built G.A and schematic drawings of SCADA system of sub stations. b) Layout drawings
showing details of size, type and mode of installation of above systems. The contractor
shall frame under glass all control diagrams. c) Technical literature, test certificates and
operation and maintenance manuals required.
4. Works Inspection and Testing of Equipment: - Prior to dispatch of equipment the client
reserves the right to inspect the same at the manufacturer’s works and the contractor
shall provide and secure every reasonable access and facility at the manufacturers works
for inspection, for witness of all acceptance and routine tests as per relevant Indian
Standards. Handover acceptance procedures shall include but not be restricted to the
following:
• Display and printout of all points
• Verification for control for all output points.
• Concurrent point history of all points.
• Display of all graphic screens including historical and Real time graphs for all analog
points.
5. The Control and monitoring systems shall be commissioned only after the contractor has
certified in writing that the electrical installation work for automation services has been
thoroughly checked, tested and found to be totally satisfactory and in full conformity with
the approved shop drawings, specifications and manufacturer’s instructions.
6. The contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry out
any test of any kind on a piece of equipment, part of system or on a complete system, if the
20 | P a g e
owner/consultant requests such a test for determining specified or guaranteed data, as

given in the specification or on the drawings.
7. Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and / or damaged material
replaced, to the satisfaction of the owner/consultant. In the event of any repair or any
adjustment having to be made, other than normal running adjustment, the tests shall be
void and shall be recommended after the adjustment or repairs have been completed.
8. The contractor must inform the client/consultant when such tests are to be made, giving
sufficient notice. All the tests should be carried out in the presence of owners or /their
representative). Complete records of all tests must be kept and 3 copies of these and
location drawings must be furnished to owners.
9. Performance test shall consist of three days of 72-hour continuous operation of system for
endurance testing. Testing of major equipment at factory in the presence of two
personnel from engineer-in charge/user shall be included, if found necessary, and as
required by engineer-in charge/user.
10. Four copies of the certified manufacturer’s performance curves for each piece of
equipment, high lighting operational parameters for the project, shall be submitted along
with the test certificates. Contractor shall also provide four copies of record of all safety
and automatic control settings for the entire installation.
11. The installation shall be tested again after removal of defects and shall be commissioned
only after approval by the owner’s site representative. All tests shall be carried out in the
presence of the representatives of the engineer-in charge. The contractor shall provide all
the required materials, equipment, ancillary items etc. to install a complete and
satisfactory SCADA system.
12. On completion of the work, a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor, counter
signed by the licensed supervisor, under whose direct supervision the installation was
carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed form as required by client or
consultant.
13. On satisfactory completion of all testing, commissioning and performance test, the system
shall be considered to be virtually complete for the purpose of taking over by the owner.
Upon completion and commissioning of SCADA system the contractor shall submit a draft
copy of comprehensive operating instructions, maintenance schedule and log sheets for
all systems and equipment included in this contract.
14. This shall be supplementary to manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals. Upon
approval of the draft, the contractor shall submit four (4) complete bound sets of
typewritten operating instructions and maintenance manuals; one each for retention by
client or consultant and two for owner's operating personnel. These manuals shall also
21 | P a g e
include basis of design, detailed technical data for each piece of equipment as installed,
spare parts manual and recommended spares for 5 years period of maintenance of each
equipment.
3.7. On Site Training
1. Upon completion of all work and all tests, the contractor shall furnish necessary
operators, labour and helpers for operating the entire installation for a period of fifteen
(15) working days of ten (10) hours each, to enable the owner’s staff to get acquainted
with the operation of the system.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for developing the described systems, their
components and interfaces. These specifications are typical minimum requirements. The
system for Automatic monitoring and control of the tunnel environment shall include, but
not limited to the following.
3. Central SCADA monitoring equipment with watchdog link, status indicator panel,
interface Equipment and supporting hardware. SCADA software licences shall be
delivered for each controlling station. Network considered for Control System shall have
the following devices connected for their operation.
1. Sub Station Monitoring and Control
2. Tunnel Ventilation & Ambience monitoring of CO/NO2/ Visibility/ Temp/
Lux/Wind Sensors, Jet Fan Starters Operation
3. Tunnel Lighting Operation
4. Second OFC network may be used for the following devices for their operation
1. CCTV
2. SOS Call Stations (Emergency Telephones)
2. Public Address System
3.8. Sub Station Monitoring and Control
Sub Station monitoring includes the status checking of Electrical Power, with all
Parameters to monitor and control the Sub Station devices with Proper interlocking, as
required for the operation of the system.
Sub Station Operation and Monitoring shall primarily be controlled by the PLC’s installed
with distributed I/O units located near the LT Panels. The PLC system and Peripherals
shall be complete in all respects and any equipment/ device/ attachments not included in
BOQ and Specifications, but essential for the proper operation of the system shall be
deemed to be included with in the cope and design of the contractor.The PLC provided
22 | P a g e
shall be used for Performing the Logic sequencing , Data text handling, Arithmetic
Functions, Reporting, Regulating, and Position Control including advance PID functions.
Interconnection of the PLC shall be with a separate OFC network and shall communicate
each other for the live status, so that Interlocking of the Sub Station is fool proof enough to
manage any eventuality.
Main Sub Station PLC can be connected directly with Armoured CAT-06 cables and other
Sub Station PLC’s namely Middle sub station and Remote Sub Stations may be connected
through the OFC Network. The Network will be monitored and controlled from the SCADA
control installed inside the PC’s at the Main Control Station. Main Control Station will have
redundant PC’s working and in case of failure of one PC, other PC will take over the full
operation and control without interrupting the ongoing operation.
The control system shall use built-in self-checks including status checks of all data
transmitted and shall automatically send fault alarms in the event of disturbances. RTU’s
installed will communicate with Field devices through proper isolation level between the
control system and field devices. Installing the Optical Fibre Cabling and Media
Converters, Switches, LIU’s etc are part of the E&M Works.
3.9. Tunnel Ventilation & Ambience Monitoring and Control System

1. Tunnel Ambience monitoring (CO, NO2, Visibility,Temoperature) is
required to be done with the help of sensors installed inside the tunnel as
per Drawing No. GMRL/E&M/TUN/ 16 . . The Sensors are to be connected
to the SCADA by the remote I/O units and the same are to be connected to
the Main control via OFC network. The protocol used shall be with the
latest ones and be able to handle the traffic of data without interruption.
Sensors used shall be of with better reliability.
2. The Visibility sensors used shall be of with the modulated IR based or
Laser based sensors and shall have minimum MTBF. Temperature Sensors
used are of with the class A accuracy type & are to be installed near the top
portion of the tunnels to get a clear temperature level inside the tunnel. All
the sensors are to mount on the top portion of the tunnels with the proper
mounting arrangements and shall be easy for accessing the same for
routine maintenance and breakdown maintenance.
3. There are totally six sets of Wind Speed and Direction sensors considered
and the same needs to be monitored for the successful evacuation of the
23 | P a g e
smoke or fire inside the tunnel. Typically wind sensors are mounted near
the crown of the tunnel and at the centre lane so as to get the velocity at
the centre
4. Tunnel Lighting Operation -Tunnel lighting is operated as per the required
levels for different modes of operation. In preliminary design it
considered that luminaries with dimming facility is required to be used for
the change over from different modes of the day. However during the night
time , day time and even during the change over from Mains supply to UPS
the switching ON/OFF the feeders are considered.These are wall mounted
panels with all protections with switchgear and also with contactors for
remote operation of the Luminaries. LDB/ELDB Panels to be mounted
vertically on the walls with proper grouting arrangements and with proper
alignment. Lighting operation shall be is automatic and feed back taken
shall give the clear status of the feeders switched ON in inside the tunnel.
3.10. CCTV System

1. The CCTV system considered are with mixed versions of cameras
of IP type. IP IR PTZ Speed Dome cameras for the surveillance of
out side area of the tunnel portal and surrounding areas, one in
each portal covering the entrance of the tunnels.
2. IP IR PTZ Speed Dome cameras to be mounted on poles mounted
with proper mounting arrangements. All cables from the cameras
to the tunnel are to be laid underground through proper HDPE
Pipes in trenches and shall be terminated to the near by network
rack mounted inside the tunnels.
3. Box type 52 IP cameras shall be installed with proper mounting
arrangements. These cameras are to be mounted inside the tunnel
at a height which is not easily accessible, but at the same time it
should be feasible to maintain the cameras. Mounting shall be with
proper mounting arrangements and with IP65 grade enclosures.
The locations of CCTVs inside the tunnels is given in Drawing
No,GMLR/E&M/TUN/18
4. For the cross passages inside the tunnel 1 camera in each tunnel
covering the total area of the cross passage in all directions has
24 | P a g e
been considered and the same is to be terminated to the nearest

network available.
5. Main Administration building or Main Control Room building shall
to be covered with six cameras of bullet type. The Remote building
shall be covered with 4 cameras
6. All Network racks shall be mounted inside niche provided inside
the tunnel Niches may be protected from the easy access to the
pedestrians or any unauthorised persons. All cabling shall be done
through HDPE Pipes where ever applicable. Under ground laying is
to be done through the pipes and with proper bends and
accessories etc. The Cameras are spitted in 2 networks and the
same shall be monitored in the Main control room with the help of
two video walls mounted inside the Main Control Room.
Recoreder used shall have the capacity of 30days recording of all cameras for 24 hours
working.
3.11. SOS call stations

1. SOS call stations inside the tunnels shall be provide at
interval of 200 m, on the walls of slow speed lane on both
the tunnels. Proper Indication for the SOS call station with
blue light indication marking shall be required for the
identification of the same.
2. SOS call station shall be hands free type installed inside the
special pockets provided for the same.SOS call station shall
also be integrated with SCADA for logging the same details
into the SCADA.
3.12. Public Address System

The locations of speakers inside the tunnels is given in Drawing No.
GMLR/E&M/TUN/18. The Speakers used shall be of IP type with the common Control
Staion for P.A and S.O.S System. All Speakes shall be of Industrial grade with IP
protocol and will have Audio Visual ndication on the OCntrol Station for the efficient
monitoring.
25 | P a g e
3.13. Radio Rebroadcasting System

The Radio rebroadcasting system will work as the repeaters as extending the AM/FM
channels through out the tunnels, so that during the emergency situations the drivers
can be alerted using the AM/FM channels. If required obtain the necessary licensing
from the competent authority for the proper functioning of the system for the public.
3.14. Cellular Connectivity
1. Cellular connectivity is to be maintained inside the tunnel, with the help of additional
equipments and for this purpose latest technology may be used, so that better coverage is
envisaged inside the tunnel.
2. Distributed Antennae Systems shall be with the help of Optic Fibre connectivity between
the DAS stations. DAS stations will ascertain the availability of cellular connectivity inside
the tunnel. If any latest technology is proposed to be used, the reliability of the system
shall be verified, and International standards followed
4. FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
1. Fires in the tunnels are very rare, however consequences of such mishaps are extremely
grave considering the inside long tunnel environmental condition and the number of people
involved. Fire may be caused due to Vehicle accident / Vehicle hitting the tunnel walls and
catching fire or partially burning material carrying vehicle entering the long tunnel and the
fire getting increased. The general fire fighting system inside the road tunnels, confirming to
NFPA 502.
2. Fire detection and fire fighting systems in tunnels can help to prevent catastrophic loss,
caused either by the fire itself or by the resulting smoke, through early fire detection and fire
fighting. The aim is to facilitate the escape and rescue of persons, fire fighting and the
protection of the structure.
3. GI, collapsible rolling shutters at the cross connections of the two tunnel tubes provided at
300 m interval shall be supplied and erected as per Drawing No. GMLR/E&M/TU/19. These
are remote controlled motor operated rolling shutters to be opened in emergencies
4. A Pump room, of about 10mx 10m x3.5m size, near the water tank is also required to be
provided.
5. The fire fighting system is fed by the following water Pumps:
• Main Electric Driven Centrifugal water Pump–Capacity 2280 LPM, 40 MWC.

• Second Electric Driven Centrifugal water Pump–Capacity 2280 LPM, 40 MWC head.
• Main Jockey Pump of Capacity 180 LPM, 40 MWC Head.
26 | P a g e
6. The Main Electric Centrifugal water Pumps of about 80 HP power, developing a water
pressure of not less tha 5.5 KG/ cm2 in about 10 KM long 150 mm dia. GI water pipe lines
confirming to IS 3589 (6.35mm thick), laid inside the tunnel tubes, connecting the water
storage Underground Tank. Line Isolation Butterfly Valves at every 1000 m distance shall be
provided. Valves operation shall have remote controlled operation arrangements
7.Hydrant Valves at 200m distance as per IS 5290, with 2 out lets,63mm in diameterfor 63mm
Hoses for Firefighting are required to be provide.
8.The Main pump shall fill and pressurize the 150 mm diameter 10,000 m long GI water pipe line
with water at not less than 5.5 atmospheric pressure. Th Jockey pump of about 20 HP shall
automatically start and stop and maintain the water pressure in the pipe line to the specified
pressure. In case of fires, when the water Hoses are operated, the Main water pump shall be
started and in case of water pressure becoming less than 4,5 Kg/sq cm, the second pump shall be
started to maintain the pressure.
9.The Underground water tank shall be of adequate water storage capacity (not less than 4000
liters capacity) near the end of the tunnel, where the water supply is available. This tank will have
to be kept filled up regularly. A 150 mm diameter GI pipe lines are required to be laid inside the
tunnels, connected by U turn connection on other end of the tunnel so that the water flow circuit
is completed and water with 5.5 KG / cm2 is maintained at all the times.
10.The 150 mm GI water pipes Shall be welded for continuity and the joins painted / treated with
anti rust paint.
11.The following parameters may apply to the design of a fire fighting system inside the tunnel.
• Minimum density of discharge – 15mm/min
• Proportioning – 3% AFFF foam concentrate minimum.
• Zone area of operation – tunnel width x 30m (corresponding to one extinguishing
section)
• Total area of operation – 3 x tunnel width x 30m
• Operating time of water supply – fire brigade attendance time to the most unfavorable
point plus 15 min, but not more than 30 min.
• Operating time of foam concentrate - brigade attendance time to the most unfavorable
point plus 15 min, but not less than 30 min.
• Nozzle protection area – 9 m2
27 | P a g e
12.Necessary Electrical switchgear LT panel as per Drawing No. GMLR/TU/…… for power supply
to the pumps is required to be erected in the pump room. All the electrical connection from the
switch gears to the pumps are included in the scope of supply and erection of pumps The pumps
operation can be remote controlled from the control room or started manually.
13.Foam /HALON 1211 Fire Extinguishers (2 No.) of 5 Kg capacity for shall be the part of the fire
fighting system and installed at regular interval of 50 m inside the tunnel on GI Stand erected
inside the tunnels.
14.The Required Cables for all the electrical connections from the switch gears to the pumps is
included in the scope of supply and erection of pumps. No separate Payment shall be made
15.The pumps operation may be remote controlled from the control room or started manually.
The required contactors shall be provided in the LT panel / pumps starters where ever necessary.
5. CODES AND THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE EQUIPMENTS
Sr Specification No, Details of Equipment/ Work

No.
Ventilation System
1 (PIARC), IRC SP 91:2010 and IRC SP Guide lines of Permanent International

87:2013 association of Rods Congress
2 ISO 13350 2015 : For Jet Fan
3 PIARC 1999 Fire & Smoke Control
5 NFPA 502 : Standard for Road Tunnel Safety
6 NFPA 720 CO and NO2 Sensors
7 PIARC 2011 : Operational Strategy of Emergency Ventilation
8 ISBN 3 901 906 31 2 International Commission on Illumination’s
9 PIARC 2007 System & Equipment for Fire
28 | P a g e
Tunnel Lighting Standards
10 ISBN 3 901 906 31 2 “ International Commission on Illumination’s
11 UDC 628.931 Guide for the Lighting of Road Tunnels and Under
Passes
12 BS5489 ROAD LIGHTING-Part 7-Code of practice for the

Lighting of Tunnels & under passes
13 ANSI/IES RP-22-1987 American Standard-Practice For Tunnel Lighting
14 IRC SP 91:2010, CIE 88:2004 IRC SP 91:2010, CIE 88:2004
15 ISS1944 and as per BIS1981 Approach Road Lighting
16 ISS2713 Approach road lighting GI Poles
Power Supply , Transformers and Related items
17 IS 13118 H.V Circuit Breakers General
18 IS 12729 Common clauses for High Voltage Switchgear and

Control gear standards above 1000V
19 IS 2099 Insulating bushing for AC Voltages above 1000V
20 IS 2629 For Cable Trays Hot Dip Galvanizing
21 IS 2705 Current Transformers
22 IS 3156 Potential Transformers
23 IEC 60076 and IS: 11171. & Transformer Temperature rise standards
ISS – 2026 (Part II) of 1977
24 IS 2026 Power Transformers- General
25 IEC-62271-100 / IEC-62271-200 RMU ‘s and Breakers
Power Cables
29 | P a g e
26 IS 1554 Part 1 For PVC insulated cables upto and including

1100V Grade
27 IS 7098 Part 1 XLPE Insulated cables upto and including 1.1KV

Grade
28 IS 7098 Part 2 XLPE Insulated cables upto and including 33KV

Grade
29 IS 1554 Part 2 PVC insulated cables upto and including 33KV

Grade
30 IS: 583 1-1984 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of

electric cables.
31 IS: 8130-1984 conductors for insulated electric cables and

flexible cords
32 IEC 60794 Optic Fiber Cables
33 IS 16242 (Part 1): 2014 UPS systems IEC 60240-1: 2008
34 IEC 60874 Fiber Optic Connectors
35 IS 1248 Relays and Meters
36 IEC 60947-2-3-4 Motor Circuit Breakers
37 IEC 60947-4-1 Power Contactors
Relays and Meters
38 IEC 60947-2-3-4 For Motor Circuit Breakers
39 IEC 60947-2 For Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
40 IEC 60898 and IS/IEC 60898 MCB’s
30 | P a g e
41 IS 12640 (Part 1) and IEC 61008-1 ELCB’s
42 IS 1882: 199P. Code of Practice for Installing Outdoor
43 IS 3043: 1987 Code of Practice of Earthing
44 IS 2309:1989 Code of practice for the protection of
45 11548: 1986 Capacitors for surge protection for use in Voltage

system above 650V and upto 33KV
46 IS 7752 (Part 1): 1975 Guide for the improvement of power

factor in consumer installations: Part 1 Low
47 IS/IEC 60947(Part 1) low voltage switchgear and controlgear
48 IS 10028 (Part 2): 1981 Code of practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of transformers: Part 2 Installation
49 IS 1255:1983 Code of practice for installation
2.0 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
Annexure Title of GAD Drawing No,

No,
1 Power Temple Metering Panel GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 01
2 SLD Power Supply Diagram GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 02
3 General Power Supply Arrangement GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 03
4 Power Panel Room LT Panel GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 03 A
5 Tunnel Middle Sustation LT Panel GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 03 B
6 LT Panel for Fire Fighting Pumos GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 0 C
31 | P a g e
7 33KV/433 V Substation at Mulund & Goregaon Ends GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 04
8 Control Room Mulund End GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 05
9 Equipment Layout in Power Panel Room GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 06
10 Fire Fighting Pumps GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 07
11 Different Lighting Zones GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 08
12 Requirement of Lighting Levels GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 09
13 Cable Tray Layout GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 10
14 Layout of LDBs & ELDBs GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 11
15 Transverse Ventilation System GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 12
16 Mounting Arrangement of Jet Fans GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 13
17 Tentative Jet Fans Locations GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 14
18 HDPE Pipes inTunnel Walls for laying cables GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 15
19 Location of Sensors in Tunnel GMLR/E&M /TUN/16
20 LED Variable messages Sgn Boards GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 17 A
21 LED Signeges Locations GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 17
22 CC TV Layout GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 18
23 Layout of Speakers GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 19
24 Rolling shutters for by passes GMLR/E&M /TUN/ 20
32 | P a g e
Annexure -A
Tunnel Lighting Details
1. Graphs, showing Lighting levels required in different zones as per CIE 88 and actual as per
design ( Super imposed on each other)
2. Designed lighting level in candela/ sq m and LUX in different Zones with layout. Details of
Luminaries proposed, with spacing, Hight, and distance of the supporting trays from the
Tunnel center.
3. Lighting on each lane of the the approach Roads.
4. Achieved Uniformity Ratios Uo & Ul in different Zones and approach road.
5. Tunnels, where thers luminaries have been provided, & period of use
Annexure-B
TECHNICAL DETAILS OF THE JET FANS OFFERED
• Make and type of Jet fans.

• Overall dimension
• Overall diameter
• Impeller diameter
• Pitch angle
• Measured Thrust in the forward directions
• Air flow in the forward directions
• Outlet velocity
• Fan power input for designed measured thrust
• Fan efficiency
• Motor Make
• Frame size
• Electrical power supply
• Motor Output
33 | P a g e
• Absorbed power
• Motor Efficiency
• Full load current and Voltage and power factor
• Motor connections
• Motor speed
• Insulation Class
• Bearings – make, Type, numbers and life.
• Degree of protection
• Vibration level.
• Sound power level (db W)
• Sound pressure level (dbA) at 45 Deg at 1 m
• Unit weight
• Material Specification for :
• Impeller
• Hub
• Casing
• Silencer
• Motor Insulating material.
• Galvanizing and painting details
• Motor and fan characteristics.
34 | P a g e
Goregaon Mulund Link Road Contract Code: GMLR/000
Volume 5
Outline Construction Specifications


1|P a g e
Disclaimer


Section IV
Plant and Design-Build – First Edition 1999” (GCC)

Appendices 1 to 19

Section VII Engineering and Geotechnical Report.
2|P a g e
Volume 5
Section 1
Road Work


3|P a g e
Table of Contents

No.
1. PREAMBLE ................................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Site Information .................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 General Climatic Conditions ............................................................................................................................. 5
2. GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORKS ................................................................ 6
2.1 MoRTH Specifications for Road Works ....................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Amendments/Modifications/Additions to Existing Clauses of General Technical
Specifications. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3 Paver Blocks............................................................................................................................................................ 7
3. CODES AND STANDARDS....................................................................................................................................... 7
4|P a g e
VOLUME 5- OUTLINE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 1
Technical Specifications
1. PREAMBLE
This section covers Outline Construction Specifications for Roads and should be read in
conjunction with all other Documents constituting the Contract – viz. Notice of Intimation,
Instructions to Tenderers, Conditions of Contract, Outline Design Specifications, Outline
Construction Specification, Drawings and other related documents. These Specifications
given herein shall apply for elements of Road and Road structures.
1.1 Site Information
The information given hereunder and provided elsewhere in these documents is given
in good faith by the Employer, but the Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding all
aspects of site conditions and no claim will be entertained on the plea that the
information supplied by the Employer is erroneous or insufficient.
The area in which the work is located is in plain/rolling and hilly terrain and lies in city
limits of Greater Mumbai.
1.2 General Climatic Conditions
Mumbai experiences tropical coastal climate. January is invariably the coldest month
and May the warmest. With the onset of monsoon in early June the temperature
remains very nearly uniform at about 27deg. The slight raise in temperature falls
gradually till it reaches the coldest month in January. The maximum temperatures
during. summer and winter are
During summer months, the maximum temperature is 37 ˚c
During winter months, the minimum temperature is 11˚c
The maximum wind speeds for most of the time during the year is from North-West
quarter with string winds predominant during South-West monsoon period. The wind
speed varies between 4.8 km/hr to 12.7 km/hr. The relative humidity generally is
lighter than 60% throughout the year. Average annual rainfall (based on 50 years
data) in Mumbai region is 1800 mm. The west coast is subject to occasional severe
cyclonic storm. These storms normally occur in the period of May/June and
October/November.
5|P a g e
2. GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORKS
2.1 MORTH Specifications for Road Works
The General Technical Specifications for Road works shall be the “SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS” (Fifth Revision, 2013) issued by the Ministry of Road
Transport and Highways, (MORTH), Government of India, and published by the Indian
Roads Congress (IRC). Latest editions with corrections and amendments up to date to
the extent they are applicable to the Road works covered under scope of works.
Further the specifications for Road works contained herein for some of the items of
work will supersede the provisions of the MORTH Specifications for Road works to the
extent of their applicability.
Where reference is made in the Contract to specific standards codes to be met by the
materials, plant, and other supplies to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the
provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards as on date
of tender and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the
Contract. Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to a particular
country or region, other internationally recognised standards which ensure a
substantially equal or higher performance than the standards and codes specified will
be accepted subject to the Engineer’s prior review and written Notice. Difference
between the standards specified and the proposed alternative standards must be fully
described in writing by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days
prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Engineer’s Notice. In the event the
Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not ensure substantially equal
performance, the Contractor shall comply with the standards specified in the
documents.

Specifications.
The amendments to General Technical Specifications for Road works shall comprise of
various Amendments/Modifications/Additions to the “SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND
BRIDGE WORKS” referred to in Para 2.1 above and Additional Specifications for particular
item of Road works not already covered in General Technical Specifications.
2.2.1 A particular Clause or a part thereof in “SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS
(Fifth Revision, 2013)”, as corrected in the original referred in Para 2.1 above, where
Amended/Modified/Added upon, and incorporated, such
Amendment/Modification/Addition supersedes the relevant Clause or part of the Clause.
6|P a g e
2.2.2 The Additional Specifications shall comprise of specifications for particular items of works
not already covered in General Technical Specification.
2.2.3 When an Amended/Modified/Added Clause supersedes a Clause or part thereof in the said
Specifications, then any reference to the superseded Clause shall be deemed to refer to the
Amended/Modified/Added Clause or part thereof.
2.3 PAVER BLOCK
2.3.1 Scope
The paver blocks are proposed to be used for Pedestrian Ways, Paved shoulders and
Footpaths. The interlocking paver block of 80 mm thickness to be used for pedestrian ways
and footpaths.
2.3.2 Material
Bedding Sand Course: The bedding sand shall consist of a clean well graded sand passing
through 4.75mm sieve and suitable for concrete. The bedding should be from either a
single source or blended to achieve the following grading.
Table 2.1 Bedding Sand Requirement
In Sieve size % passing

9.52 100
4.75 95-100
2.38 80-100
1.18 60-100
600 micron 25-60
300 micron 10-30
150micron 5-15
75 micron 0-10
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands or sands

containing an excessive fines or plastic fines are not used. The sand particles should
preferably be sharp not rounded as sharp sand possess higher strength and resist the
migration of sand from under the block to less frequently areas even though sharp sands
are relatively more difficult to compact than rounded sands, the use of sharp sands is
preferred for the more heavily trafficked driveways. The sand use for bedding shall be free
of any deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.
The sand shall be of uniform moisture content and within 4% - 8% when spread and shall
7|P a g e
be protected against rain when stock piled prior to spreading. Saturated sand shall not be
used. The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing. The
compacted uniform thickness shall be of 45mm and within +/- 5mm thickness variation
shall not be used to correct irregularities in the base course surface.
The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and protected
against pre-compaction both prior to and following screening. Any pre- compacted sand or
screened sand left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of paving blocks take
place.
Sand shall be slightly screened in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only
slightly ahead of the laying of paving unit.
Ready Mix Concrete
The concrete mix design should be followed for each batch of materials separately and
automatic batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in strength and quality.
The concrete pavers should have perpendiculars after release from the mould and the
same should be retained until the laying. The surface should be of anti- skid and anti-glare
type. The pave should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of surface run
off. The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2mm to 3mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.
2.3.3 Manufacturing & strength
The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer only. Paver block machine should be used
for manufacturing the blocks.
The average compressive strength of the 80mm thick paver blocks tested shall be 45 N/Sq.
mm. and average compressive strength of the 60mm to 50 mm: thick paver blocks shall be
35 N/Sq. mm.
2.3.4 Laying & Interlocking
Paver blocks shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the pavement. Once
the laying pattern has been established, it shall continue without interruption over the
entire pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the use of infill concrete or discontinuities in
laying pattern is not be permitted in other than approved locations.
Paver blocks shall be laced on the un compacted screened sand bed to the nominated
laying pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. The
first row shall be located next to an edge restraint. Specially manufactured edge paving
blocks are permitted or edge blocks may be cut using a power saw, a mechanical or
hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other approved cutting machine.
8|P a g e
Paver blocks shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 3 mm wide between adjacent
paving joints. No joint shall be less 1.5mm not more than 4mm. Frequent use of string lines
shall be used to check alignment. In this regard, the "laying face" shall be checked at least
every two metres as the face proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it must be
corrected prior to initial compaction and before further laying job is proceeded with.
In each row, all full blocked shall be laid first. Closure blocks shall be cut and fitted
subsequently. Such closer blocks shall consist of not less than 25% of a full block.
To infill spaced between 25mm and 50mm wide concrete having screened sand, coarse
aggregate mix and strength of 45 N/Sq. Mm shall be used. Within such mix the nominal
aggregate size shall not exceed one-third the smallest dimension of the infill space. For
smaller spaces dry packed mortar shall be used.
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying
bond, the paver blocks shall not be hammered into position.
Where adjustment of paver blocks necessary care shall be taken to avoid premature
compaction of the sand bedding.
Initial Compaction: After laying the paver blocks, they shall be compacted to achieve
consolidation of the sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less
than Two (3) passes of a suitable plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator
having plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving blocks. Prior to
compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface Compaction shall proceed as
closely as possible following laying and prior to any traffic. Compaction shall not,
however, be attempted within one metre of the laying face. Compaction shall continue
until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining blocks. Joints shall then be filled
and recompacted.
All work further than one metre from the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the
completion of each day's laying.
Any blocks that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall be
immediately removed and replaced.
Sufficient plate compactors shall be maintained at the paving site for both bedding
compaction and joint filling.
Joint Filling and Final Compaction: As soon as possible after compaction and in any case
prior to the termination of work on that day and prior to the acceptance of vehicular
traffic, sand for joint filling shall be spread over the pavement.
9|P a g e
Joint sand shall pass a 2.36mm (No.8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts or
contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The same shall comply with the following
grading limits.
Table 2.2 Jointing Sand Requirement
IS Sieve Size % Passing

2.36 mm 100
1.18mm 90-100
600 Microns 60-90
300 Microns 30-60
150 Microns 15-30
75 Microns 10-20
The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the contract prior
to delivering any such materials to site for incorporation into the works. Certificates of test
results issued by a recognized testing laboratory confirming that the samples conform to
the requirements of these specifications shall accompany the sample.
The jointing sand shall be boomed top fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be removed
from the pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be compacted with not less than
one (1) Pass by the plate vibrator and joints refilled with sand to full depth. This
procedure shall be repeated until all joints are completely filled with sand. No traffic shall
be permitted to use the pavement until all joints have been completely filled with sand and
compacted.
Both the sand and paver blocks shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed into the
joints to prevent premature setting of the sand.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent blocks shall not exceed 3mm with not
more than 1 % in any 3m x 3mm area exceeding 2mm. pavement which is deformed
beyond above limits after final compaction shall be taken out and reconstructed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Edge Restraint: Edge restrains need to be sufficiently robust to withstand override

by the anticipated traffic, to withstand thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the laying
course material from beneath the surface course. The edge restraint should present a
vertical face down to the level of the underside of the laying course. The surface course
should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together with any bedding or concrete
launching, has gained sufficient strength. It is essential that edge restrains are adequately
secured.
10 | P a g e
2.3.5 Sample Size:
Following are the sample sizes:

a) Internal: Average of minimum 3 samples per 5000 blocks - for paver block
manufacturers
b) External: Minimum 9 Blocks per 5000 Blocks. Average of minimum 9 Blocks per
site: for captioned contractors.
Sampling for Testing: Sampling for testing of paver blocks shall be done in accordance
with clause No. 14.5, 14.6 and 14.7
Compressive Strength: Testing for compressive strength shall be undertaken in

accordance with clause 14.7.
Water Absorption: Testing for water absorption shall be in accordance with IS: 2185
: 1979 : Part I (Specifications for Concrete Masonry Blocks) Appendix C.
In case of failure of test sample: In case of failure of test sample for above test, the
contractor should replace the entire lot of paver blocks representing samples are taken.
The samples of replaced lots shall be tested. However, 25% of the payment of the
measurement of the lot will be recovered as penalty.
Tensile Splitting Test: (for blocks subject to vehicular traffic) -The mean tensile strength
of 8 blocks shall be not less than 3.9 MPa and no individual block shall have tensile
strength less than 3.6 MPa when tested as per Annex E of BS6717:2001
Abrasion Resistance (blocks subject to vehicular traffic): Set of 3 blocs tested as per
Annex F of BS 6717 :2001 shall be more than 23mm.
Method for the determination of Water Absorption:
The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal wire and completely
submerged in water.
They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one-minute Visible
surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth and weighed.
Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated oven at 100 to 115°C
for not less than 24 hours and until two successive weightings at intervals of 2 hours
show an increment of loss not greater, than 0.2 per cent of the last previously
determined mass of the specimen for 24 hours.
2.3.6 Sampling & testing of Paver Blocks:
Method of Sampling: Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not
more than 50000 blocks, shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Nine blocks
11 | P a g e
shall be drawn from each group.
Marking and Identification: All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling
in such a way that the designated section part thereof and the consignment represented by
the sample are clearly defined. The sampled shall be dispatched to the approve test
laboratory taking precaution to avoid damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving
from damage and contamination until they have been tested. The samples shall be stored
in water at 20°C + 5°C for 24 hours prior to testing.
Procedure for Testing of Compressive Strength for Paver Blocks:
Testing Machine: The testing machines shall be of suitable capacity for the test and
capable of applying the load at the rate specified. It shall comply as regards repeatability
and accuracy with the requirements of relevant IS specification.
Procedure: The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after being stored for at
least 24· hours, in water maintained at a temperature of 20°C + 5°C, before the specimens
are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined.
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose grit or other material
removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood nominally
4mm thick, shall be used as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen
and the machine plates, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of
at least 5mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested. The
specimen shall be placed in the machine with the wearing surface in a horizontal plane
and in such a way that the axes of the specimen are aligned with those of the machine
plates. The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at the rate of
Approximately 15 N/Sq. mm per minute until no greater load can be sustained. The
maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.
Calculation of Corrected Strength: The compressive strength of each block specimen

shall be calculated by dividing the maximum load by full cross section area and multiplying
by an appropriate factor.
Table 2.3 Thickness and Chamfer Correction Factors for Compressive Strength
Work Size Thickness in Correction Factors

mm Plain Block Chamfered Block
60 1.00 1.06
80 1.12 1.18
100 1.18 1.24
12 | P a g e
Compressive Strength Calculation: The average corrected compressive strength for the
designed block section shall be calculated.
3. CODES AND STANDARDS
Table 3.1 Reference to the Standard Codes of Practice from:
MORTH Ministry of Road Transport and Highways

IRC Indian Road Congress
MCGM Municipal Corporation of Grater Mumbai
Table 3.2 Applicable Codes, Standards & Publications
Code No. Title

IRC: 6-2014 Standard Specifications and Code Of Practice for Road Bridges
IRC:37-2012 Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements
Guidelines for Design of Horizontal Curves for Highways and
IRC: 38-1988
Design Tables
IRC: SP- 47 Guidelines on Quality systems for Road Bridges
IRC: SP- 57 Guidelines on Quality systems for Roads
IRC: 58-2015 Guidelines for the Design of Rigid Pavements for Highways
IRC: 92 Guideline for Design of Interchanges in Urban areas
IRC:106-1990 Guidelines for Capacity of Urban Roads in Plain Areas
IRC: SP-23-1983 Vertical curves for Highways
IRC: SP-41- Guidelines on Design of At-Grade Intersections in Rural and
1994 Urban Areas
IRC: SP-42-1994 Guidelines on Road Drainage
IRC SP 47: 1998 Guidelines on Quality Systems for Road Bridges
Guidelines for the Use of Dry Lean Concrete as Sub-base for Rigid
IRC: SP-49-2014 Pavement
IRC: SP-50-
1999 Guidelines on Urban Drainage
IRC: SP-57-
2000. Guidelines on Quality Systems for Roads
IRC: SP-63-2004 Guidelines for the Use of Interlocking Concrete Block Pavement
An Approach Document on Whole Life Costing for Bridges in
IRC: SP:61-2004 India
IRC: SP-92-
1985 Guidelines for the Design of Interchange in Urban Areas
13 | P a g e
Volume 5
Section 2
Tunnel Work


14 | P a g e
Table of Contents

No. No.
1. PREAMBLE ................................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Site Information ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 General Climatic Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 5
2. GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORKS...................................................6
2.1 MORTH Specifications for Road Works .............................................................................................. 6
Specifications. .................................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 PAVER BLOCK.................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.1 Scope ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Material ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.3.3 Manufacturing & strength .......................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.4 Laying & Interlocking ................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.5 Sample Size: .................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.6 Sampling & testing of Paver Blocks: .................................................................................................. 11
3. CODES AND STANDARDS .................................................................................................................. 13
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 18
2. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 18
3. SURVEY ................................................................................................................................................... 18
4. FIELD CONTROL AND MONITORING EQUIPMENT ................................................................... 18
4.1 Setting out of Line, level and Profile.................................................................................................. 18
4.2 Chainage Markers and Bench Marks................................................................................................. 19
4.3 Monitoring Equipment.............................................................................................................................. 19
5. TUNNEL BORING MACHINES (TBM) ............................................................................................. 19
5.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2 General Requirements for TBMs ......................................................................................................... 20
5.3 Particular Requirements for TBMs .................................................................................................... 21
5.4 TBM Submittals ............................................................................................................................................. 24
5.5 Inspection and Testing ............................................................................................................................. 28
5.6 Personnel and Training............................................................................................................................ 29
6. TBM CONSTRUCTION METHOD STATEMENT............................................................................ 29
6.1 TBM Spare Parts ........................................................................................................................................... 30
6.2 TBM Daily Record ........................................................................................................................................ 31
6.3 TBM Daily Monitoring and Reporting .............................................................................................. 31
7. SEGMENTAL LINING ........................................................................................................................... 32
7.1 Tunnel Linings ............................................................................................................................................... 32
15 | P a g e
7.2 Structural Concrete..................................................................................................................................... 42

7.3 Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................................... 57
7.4 Tolerances and Inspections ................................................................................................................... 63
7.5 Elastomeric Gaskets ................................................................................................................................... 63
7.6 Bolts and Grommets ................................................................................................................................... 65
8. GROUTING.............................................................................................................................................. 66
8.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.2 Secondary Grouting .................................................................................................................................... 67
8.3 Contractor’s Submission .......................................................................................................................... 67
8.4 Quality Control .............................................................................................................................................. 68
8.5 Grouting Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 68
8.6 Tail Void Grouting Equipment .............................................................................................................. 69
8.7 Execution .......................................................................................................................................................... 70
8.8 Tail Void Grouting Field Quality Control. ....................................................................................... 71
8.9 Grout Plugs ...................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.10 Grout Valves .................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.11 Monitoring Secondary Grouting Pressures ................................................................................... 72
8.12 Caulking ............................................................................................................................................................ 72
9. STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 73
9.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 73
9.2 Performance Requirements for Structural Fire Protection................................................. 73
10. NATM TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................... 77
10.1 Excavation ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
10.2 Disposal of Excavated Material ............................................................................................................ 78
10.3 Excavation for Contractor's Convenience ...................................................................................... 79
10.4 Definition of Excavation Profile ........................................................................................................... 79
10.5 Method of Profile Control ........................................................................................................................ 80
10.6 Construction Tolerance ............................................................................................................................ 83
10.7 Contractor’s Submission .......................................................................................................................... 84
11. NATM TUNNEL SUPPORT ................................................................................................................. 86
11.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 86
11.2 Initial Tunnel Support ............................................................................................................................... 86
11.3 Final Tunnel Support:................................................................................................................................ 87
11.4 Sprayed Concrete (shotcrete) ............................................................................................................... 87
11.5 Rock Bolts and Dowels .............................................................................................................................. 93
11.6 Fore poling....................................................................................................................................................... 98
11.7 Contact or Cavity Grouting...................................................................................................................... 99
11.8 Water Tightness of Tunnel ...................................................................................................................101
16 | P a g e
11.9 Geological Mapping & Rock Classification ...................................................................................101

11.10 Daily Records...........................................................................................................................................102
12. SAFETY AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ............................................................................... 102
12.1 Safety General ..............................................................................................................................................102
13. AS-BUILT SURVEY OF ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................ 102
13.1 Objective .........................................................................................................................................................102
13.2 Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................102
14. GROUND TREATMENT .................................................................................................................... 103
14.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................103
14.2 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................104
15. EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................... 105
15.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................105
16. GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING ................................................. 106
16.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................106
16.2 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................106
16.3 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................................108
17. EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................... 109
17.1 General.............................................................................................................................................................109
18. Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................... 110
1. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................. 116
1.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................116
1.2 Excavation ......................................................................................................................................................127
1.3 Piling and Diaphragm Walling............................................................................................................139
1.4 Structural Concrete...................................................................................................................................161
1.5 Formwork ......................................................................................................................................................199
1.6 Cut and Cover Construction .................................................................................................................222
1.7 Prestressed Members ..............................................................................................................................230
1.8 Glazed Roof for Transition Ramps ...................................................................................................248
17 | P a g e
1. INTRODUCTION
This section specifies materials, methods and workmanship required for the construction of
bored and NATM tunnels, shafts and other underground structures.
2. GENERAL
(1) All works shall be carried out in compliance with the Health and Safety
requirements as detailed within the Employer’s Requirements.
(2) All aspects of excavation in tunnels shall comply with the requirements of:
a) BS 6164 : Safety in Tunnelling in the Construction Industry
b) CIRIA Report 80: A review of instruments for gas and dust monitoring
underground.
(3) All work shall be carried out in compliance with the Acts, Rules and Regulations of
Government of India & Government of Maharashtra State.
3. SURVEY
(1) Before commencement any construction work, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit appropriate survey method statements relating to his proposed methods of
working.
(2) The Contractor shall establish a system for underground surveying, setting out
and correcting deviations from theoretical alignment, using a laser based system.
Reference point and targets shall be used in conjunction with lasers to ensure the
accuracy of the system and it should be easy to monitor by the Engineer. Laser
based guidance systems shall have an alternative system as back-up.
(3) In the case of tunnel boring machines, where construction shall be computer
controlled, the Contractor shall use appropriate software for ring selection logic
steerage logic, etc.
(4) If at any time during the excavation of the tunnel, it is evident that the alignment
for the tunnel is outside the specified/permissible tolerances then, before
proceeding further with the excavation, the Contractor shall submit his proposal
for the necessary corrections to the alignment, and the Contractor shall forthwith
make the corrections as accepted by the Engineer.
4. FIELD CONTROL AND MONITORING EQUIPMENT
4.1 Setting out of Line, level and Profile
Prior to starting underground work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proposals
on the setting out the Works and for correcting any deviations.
18 | P a g e
4.2 Chainage Markers and Bench Marks.
Chainage markers shall be provided in tunnels at 10m intervals. The markers shall be
painted in white durable paint. The contractor shall provide the Engineer the location and
description of all survey stations, and all survey data.
4.3 Monitoring Equipment
(1) The Contractor shall provide basic equipment for measurement of deformations
along excavation perimeters and ground surface conditions. The types of basic
underground equipment to be provided comprise: levelling instruments, wire
extensometer for convergence measurement, 3 D optical targets for 3D
displacement monitoring and multi point borehole extensometers. The equipment
shall be installed as agreed by the Engineer.
(2) During the execution of excavation works, the Contractor need to procure
supplementary types of equipment as may be required for standard tunnelling
methods.
(3) Measurements by all types of equipment shall be performed by the Contractor as

directed by the Engineer. Results from each measurement shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 24 hours.
5. TUNNEL BORING MACHINES (TBM)
5.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the selection, design and supply of
shield TBM machines and ancillary equipment.
(2) The Contractor shall take into consideration all geological and other relevant
parameters applicable for the contract reach. He shall satisfy himself as to the
suitability of the TBM Shield machines for the ground conditions to be excavated.
(3) The Contractor shall make all arrangements and provide all the labour, plant,
equipment and materials necessary at the TBM launch and reception shafts for TBM
excavation. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the required delivery arrangements
with the manufacturer suiting the site constraints.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible, under the supervision of the TBM
manufacturer, for the erection and commissioning of the TBM and all back-up
equipment required to allow the TBM to commence excavation in a fully operational
condition in all respects and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
19 | P a g e
(5) The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the temporary
TBM launch structures and for ensuring they are satisfactory in all respects for
receiving and assembling the TBM components. The shaft walls (or other
structures) and surrounding ground shall have sufficient capacity to sustain without
excessive deformation the thrust from the TBM shove-rams during the launch of the
TBM.
(6) The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the temporary
/permanent TBM retrieval structures and for ensuring they are satisfactory in all
respects for TBM breaking-in, receiving the TBM and dismantling and removing the
TBM components. The shaft walls (or other structures) and surrounding ground
shall have sufficient capacity to sustain without excessive deformation the thrust
and torque from the TBM during the breaking-in operations.
(7) The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of any and all ancillary
structures at the shaft bottom and for coordinating design and configuration of such
ancillary structures with the TBM manufacturer.
(8) The Contractor shall provide and regularly maintain by mechanical means an
Alimac or other device of adequate capacity at his main working shafts that
complies with all applicable safety standards for the vertical movement of people.
5.2 General Requirements for TBMs
(1) All TBMs shall be robust with adequate safety margins for the anticipated duty,
designed and manufactured to comply with all the Standard BS EN 12336.
(2) The external diameter of the Shield TBM’s shall be designed to produce minimum
over-break and the least necessary clearance for the proper construction of the
tunnels. Design shall take into account the horizontal and vertical alignment.
Provision shall be made to limit and correct the roll of the machine.
(3) All TBM’s shall be self-propelled. Where propulsion is by means of hydraulic rams
thrusting off previously constructed segmental lining, shove-ram shoes and shoe-
facings shall be designed to distribute the thrust without causing damage to the as-
built lining.
(4) Shove-rams shall be capable of operating individually or collectively in any

combination. The shove-rams shall permit the insertion of a key closing segment, in
any location.
(5) The TBM shall have Segment erection systems capable of lifting and placing
segments safely. Lifting and gripping systems shall be designed to handle the loads
with an adequate factor of safety and without damaging the segment and segment
20 | P a g e
sealing systems. Segment erection systems shall be capable of compressing all joint
gaskets.
(6) The erector shall be in clear view of the operator. A safety device shall be fitted to
avoid accidental release of segments during lifting, handling and placing.
(7) There shall be adequate access to all areas of the TBM where work, including
maintenance, may be carried out. A clear means of egress in an emergency shall be
provided and maintained at all times. Minimum dimensions shall conform to BS EN
12336.
(8) Arrangements for extraction, transport and disposal of spoil shall be appropriate for
the material to be handled.
(9) Alignment control
• The Contractor shall ensure the TBM is provided with a suitable guidance and
control system capable of providing the necessary survey information such that
the TBM operator is able to accurately control the TBM and tunnel alignment to
within the required tolerances.
• The guidance system shall have the capability to predict ahead of the face and to
determine the inclination, line, level, roll and pitch of the TBM.
• Detailed guidance information shall be checked against the tunnel alignment

control at regular intervals.
(10) All information and data shall be clearly displayed in the TBM operator’s control
panel and shall also be linked to a data-logging system.
5.3 Particular Requirements for TBMs
(1) The TBM cutter-head shall be capable of clockwise and anticlockwise rotation and
shall only be able to excavate the ground whilst the hydraulic rams are being
actuated. The design shall ensure that the cutter-head can be retracted back from
the unexcavated ground to minimise the risk of the cutter-head jamming and to
facilitate maintenance.
(2) The cutting tools shall incorporate wear detection systems. The cutter-head discs
and/or picks shall be able to be renewed from the rear of the cutter-head and shall
be interchangeable.
(3) Where boulders could occur at the tunnel face, the TBM design shall permit a
boulder of at least 300 millimetres across its smallest cross-sectional dimension to
be pushed through the cutter-head. The TBM shall have the capability to handle,
21 | P a g e
break up and remove such boulders through the screw conveyor, slurry discharge
aperture or other spoil discharge system with the use of special crushers.
(4) The TBM shall be designed to allow forward drilling through the cutter-head for the
purpose of investigating ground conditions ahead of the TBM or to undertake
ground treatment to the face.
(5) Grouting facilities
a) The TBM shall be designed to enable the void behind the segments to be
grouted continuously and completely from the shield while excavating. The
grout ports shall be incorporated within the shield tail-skin.
b) There shall be a minimum of four grout ports, one in each quadrant of the
shield tail-skin circumference. The TBM shall have the facility and the
capacity to inject grout simultaneously through all the grout ports.
c) The TBM design shall enable the grout pipes to any individual port to be
cleaned or replaced from within the shield in the event of a blockage
without impairing the performance or preventing the use of any other grout
port. At least one grout port in each quadrant of the shield shall be
operational and available for grouting at all times during shield
advancement.
d) Grout pressure and flow rates shall be maintained and monitored at all
times whilst the TBM is advancing. The shield shall incorporate automatic
systems for monitoring and controlling the volume and pressure of the
grout being delivered to the tail void.
(6) The TBM shall be equipped with the facility to generate foam conditioners and
deliver them to the cutter head during excavation.
(7) The TBM shall be designed for and equipped with a supplemental ground
stabilisation system. This system shall comprise regularly spaced grout ports built
into the shield for grouting the ground ahead of the tunnel face. The location and
number of ports shall be adequate for implementation of face stabilisation measures
needed for access to the face in all ground conditions. All ports shall be readily
accessible and fitted with valves.
(8) The cutter-head shall be articulated such that the cutter-head can be retracted from
the excavated face and can be turned in any plane so that it is at an angle to the main
body. The TBM shield must be capable of negotiating 200 metre radius horizontal
curves.
22 | P a g e
(9) The TBMs shall be capable of being operated in a closed face mode, such that they
can be operated in a closed face mode wherever the encountered ground conditions
and water in-flow conditions so demand. All closed face TBM shall be designed to
maintain pressure on the excavated ground at all times. The TBM shall be able to
balance the total overburden pressure (including hydrostatic pressure) and shall be
capable of varying the face pressure as the overburden pressure changes. Earth
pressure sensors shall be located at the crown, at TBM axis level and at the invert of
the chamber.
(10) All closed face TBM shall incorporate a two-compartment air-lock for man access to
the cutter-head and face.
(11) Where a screw-conveyor is used, the discharge gate on the screw-conveyor shall be
fitted with an accumulator which automatically closes the gate in the event of a
power failure.
(12) All TBMs shall incorporate a system which enables the face to be closed
expeditiously to avoid any ground loss in the event that unstable ground is
encountered or water in-flow in encountered during the drive. This shall take the
form of two independently hydraulically operated gates within the plenum and
bulkhead chamber of the TBM. The design needs to have a Notice of No-objection by
the Engineer.
(13) The TBM shall be fitted with a data-logger which shall be linked by the Contractor to
a colour monitor display (to be provided by the Contractor) in the Engineer’s office.
Each TBM shall have its own dedicated colour monitor. The data-logger shall display
and record information in real time and shall have the facility to store all
accumulated data from the tunnel drive and to read and display past data. As a
minimum the data-logger shall record and report the following information.
a) Start and finish time of the excavation stroke.
b) Stroke number, chainage and guidance system’s prediction of the next ten
strokes after each build.
c) Numbers of thrust cylinders, location and pressures used during the stroke.
d) Extensometer readings of thrust cylinders at the start and end of the stroke.
e) Articulation cylinder position at the start and the end of the excavation
stroke - articulation angle.
f) Amount of TBM roll at start and end of the excavation stroke.
g) Cutting direction, speed, pressure/torque of cutter-head.
23 | P a g e
h) Shield position and attitude for each ring.
i) Earth pressure readings throughout the excavation stroke at the plenum

chamber and screw-conveyor.
j) Volume and pressure of grout injected per stroke. Pressure shall be

measured at the point of injection.
k) Volume, type and location of ground conditioners added per ring and the
cumulative amount per shift with the concentration value.
l) Quantity of tail grease consumed per shift.
m) Speed and torque of screw conveyor
n) Rate of advance of TBM
o) Use of copy cutter, amount and location
p) Gas detector sensors readings
(14) All data-loggers and ancillary equipment shall be fully operational at all times and
shall be maintained by the Contractor.
5.4 TBM Submittals
(1) Within 30 days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit the
following to the Engineer for non-objection:
• General arrangement of main TBM drive and reception shaft sites showing
construction layout during TBM launch and retrieval and back-up equipment.
Show that the TBM can be assembled and disassembled within the work site
areas.
• Performance specifications of the TBM, back-up plant and equipment
• Assumed dead loads used in the design or actual loads of the main TBM
components
• Details of the relevant specifications used
• Details of TBM control systems
(2) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for non-objection, a detailed schedule
for the manufacture of the TBM, back-up plant and equipment including delivery
dates and testing dates. The Contractor shall update progress on a weekly basis
and comment on future necessary action to maintain delivery date.
24 | P a g e
(3) Within 90 days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for non-objection, all details of the TBM and back-up equipment,
including all items specified herein.
(4) The Contractor shall demonstrate that the TBM manufacturer has manufactured at
least three TBMs of similar type, size, and complexity, used in successfully
completed similar size projects.
(5) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for non-objection,
data and records at least 90 days before commencement of tunnelling operation.
Method Statements shall include:
• Operations making up normal tunnel construction cycle and associated

logistics to include, but not limited to, face support, tunnel excavation, lining
erection, shift organization and control, and logistical supply.
• TBM operations covering all intended machine parameters and interlocks

along tunnel route, taking account ground conditions as defined in the
Contractors Geotechnical Interpretative Report completed. The method
statement should include, but not be limited to, the precise start-up
procedure, cutter head rotation speed and torque, screw volumetric control,
TBM thrust, rates of advance and planned maintenance schedule.
• A work plan covering access to excavated face and cutter head for inspection
or removal of obstructions, cutter tool changes, maintenance or repair using
compressed air, and other supplemental ground stabilization methods as
required. This will include details of the TBM airlock or compressed air
chamber, its locking and bulkhead designs, the sealing arrangement, the life
support requirements and the mechanism supporting the lock inside the
tunnel. Include a detailed description of procedures for operating the air lock,
affecting compression / decompression, operating details, and emergency
work plan.
• Proposed method of calculating and monitoring the face pressure required to

maintain face stability and the means and methods for changing the pressure
as a function of tunnel depth, ground water level, surface settlement, ground
conditions and type of ground.
• Method of launching the TBM in immediate Earth Pressure Balance (EPB)

mode including EPB re-start after plenum interventions.
25 | P a g e
• TBM operating procedures that shall be imposed when crossing under or over
existing infrastructure located within 1.5 tunnel diameters of the excavated
tunnel diameter interfaces.
• Break-in/out details
• Method of maintaining EPB or slurry pressure where necessary
• Operation of TBM guidance system, including translation of information on

alignment drawings into input for the guidance system
• Procedure for back-up survey checks in tunnel behind TBM weekly or

whenever the laser is reset, whichever is more frequent
• Description of how corrections will be implemented if a completed tunnel

lining ring is built using up more than 50 percent of tolerances specified
herein
• Details of probing ahead, including drilling equipment and type of radar

system
• Spoil and slurry handling in the tunnel and shaft including suitable methods to
transport the spoil and slurry safely and efficiently to the surface
• Spoil and slurry treatment including separation plants, and disposal locations
and haul routes of spoil haulage
• Construction water supply system for the TBM
• Temporary drainage, power lighting and ventilation systems
• Temporary communication systems
• Layout and description of proposed gas monitoring systems for TBM and the
tunnel
• Response to activation of gas detectors alarms
• Fire detection and suppression equipment on the TBM and in the tunnel,
including details of the TBM refuge chamber
• Emergency evacuation drill for individuals and entire underground crew
• Soil conditioning and slurry materials, composition, mixes, target injection

rates including environmental acceptance testing regime
• Procedure for manually steering the TBM and selecting ring types and roll
correction in the event of malfunction in the TBM guidance system
26 | P a g e
• Frac-Out and Surface Spill Contingency Plan: The Contractor shall submit a
Frac-Out and Surface Spill Contingency Plan describing procedures for
preventing drilling fluid losses or spills or fluid returns to the surface. The
plan shall address observations to be made and plans for containment and
clean-up, if spills or hydro-fracture occur. The plan shall also address changes
that may be required to Contractor’s operations to avoid recurrences.
• Water Control Plans: Submit temporary drainage provisions and details for
the control, treatment, and disposal of groundwater and construction water:
o Provide details of pumping systems, sumps, primary and backup power

systems, flow meters, and piping for removing groundwater and
construction water from the tunnel.
o Provide details to prevent flooding and accumulations of water at all

locations within the tunnel.
o Submit details of water treatment provisions to remove sediments, oil,

grease, and other contaminants prior to disposal.
o Submit a plan indicating disposal provisions, discharge location(s), and

discharge piping.
(6) Data and Records: Continuous data monitoring of TBM performance shall be
submitted to the Engineer for information in real (instantaneous) time for the
duration of TBM excavation. Data collection shall be accomplished by automatic
electronic continuous recording systems. There shall be one dedicated data
acquisition system per TBM to be installed in the Engineer’s main office for each
TBM. Additionally, a duplicate data acquisition system shall be installed at the
Clients Main Office. The data acquisition system supplied to the Engineer’s office
shall allow the Engineer to study and print out real time and historical data for the
each TBM and guidance system via a dedicated computer.
(7) Should the TBM guidance system not be part of the TBM data acquisition program
an additional dedicated guidance system computer is required to duplicate the
data acquisition system’s scope. Alternatives which require the closure of the data
acquisition program to view the guidance system are not acceptable although
separate windows running the data/guidance programs simultaneously maybe
acceptable, subject to the Engineer’s non-objection.
(8) The data and guidance systems in each office shall be linked to the network
printers at the corresponding Engineer’s office. Data to be collected shall include
the following:
27 | P a g e
• For every shove or stroke of TBM, the date, time and tunnel station at start of
shove; duration of shove; type of soil and volume excavated both actual and
theoretical; average drive motor current or hydraulic pressure; power
consumption; thrust/propel cylinder pressure; number of operating motors;
mode of operations and cutter head chamber pressure; tail void grout
volumes and pressures
• Description of any delays longer than 15 minutes, water inflow, incidence of

ground loss or other unusual events.
• Cutter and muck system component changes, including time and date of
replacement, cutter position or number, and reason for changes.
• TBM orientation and deflection from line and grade, and other information
provided by automatic data acquisition systems.
• Records of deformation and/or damage to the lining elements
• Air quality reports – records of air and gas monitoring
• For a Slurry TBM, submit results of all quality control tests on the slurry for
the previous day.
• For an EPBM submit results of all quality control tests on foam, polymers,
bentonite and other soil conditioners for the previous day
5.5 Inspection and Testing
(1) Where a new purpose-built TBM is proposed by the Contractor the

Employer/Engineer shall be permitted to visit the TBM manufacturer’s premises for
the purposes of inspection.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all materials used or present
within the TBM and must ensure that all such materials used or present are
adequate for the task they are to perform.
(3) The Employer/Engineer shall be permitted at any stage during manufacture of the
TBM to inspect, examine and test on the manufacturer’s premises the materials,
workmanship and performance of all plant and components to be supplied under
the Contract. Such inspections, examination or testing shall not release the
Contractor from any of his obligations under the Contract.
(4) New machines shall be assembled at the manufacturer’s works on completion of

fabrication and tested to demonstrate that all components operate correctly and in
compliance to the Contract provisions herein. Site acceptance testing will also be
28 | P a g e
required at the Site following delivery and assembly, prior to commencement of

tunnel construction.
5.6 Personnel and Training
(1) The Contractor shall submit qualifications and related experience of supervisory
and TBM operation personnel including all Tunnel Supervisor, Lead Miner, TBM
drivers, and surveyors for non-objection by the Engineer within 60 days of
construction.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure that all key personnel who are responsible for driving,
maintenance and controlling the TBM have received the necessary training in the
duties that they are required to perform and have appropriate experience and
certified by the TBM manufacturer.
(3) The Contractor shall provide and maintain a complete list of the names of persons,
and their duties, responsible for TBM operation, who have completed the
appropriate training by the TBM supplier to an acceptable standard. The details and
experience of all key personnel for driving and controlling the TBM shall be
submitted to the Engineer for obtaining a Notice to Proceed.
6. TBM CONSTRUCTION METHOD STATEMENT
Not less than 60 days before the Contractor intends commencing TBM excavation, he shall
submit to the Engineer for obtaining his Notice to Proceed, a detailed method statement,
which shall include but not be limited to:
• Methods of transportation and erection of the TBM;
• Method of commencing the tunnel drives, including details of the temporary thrust
arrangements.
• Methods of determining ground conditions ahead of the face and methods of

treating such conditions;
• Methods for dealing with water wells/borewells that may be intersected or

influenced by the excavations;
• Methods of functioning with the launch and retrieval shafts,
• Dismantling of the TBM;
• Operational details, including excavation, segment handling, ring

selection/orientation control, ring building procedures, annulus and proof- drilling,
grouting and control, alignment control, tunnel logistics, maintenance, slurry plant
29 | P a g e
operation (STBM), effluent disposal, muck disposal, ground and spoil conditioning
control (EPBM) , interventions, changing cutters & picks and the like.
• Safety procedures, including compressed air working, cutter head entry, cutting tool
changes, ventilation details, emergency evacuation procedures and the like.
• Details of the proposed monitoring and reporting systems.
• Details of key personnel responsible for supervising, operating, maintaining and

controlling the TBM.
6.1 TBM Spare Parts
(1) The Contractor shall provide for each TBM, spare parts that are considered critical
and long-lead items.
(2) Storage of required spare parts shall be within Mumbai and accessible to be brought
to the Site within 24 hours.
(3) The Contractor shall maintain an inventory of spare parts as recommended by the
TBM manufacturer, to ensure continued operational availability of the TBM and all
essential systems.
(4) Spare part components for at least one TBM shall be the following minimum unless
Non0objected by the Engineer:
• Main bearing and seals
• Two cutter head drive motors
• Hydraulic pump for cutter head hydraulic drive motors
• Set of complete full face cutting tools (picks, cutters, disks) plus 50 percent
additional spares
• Screw conveyor for Earth Pressure Balance TBM
• Segment erector bearing
• Shield hydraulic thrust cylinder
• Slurry pump for Slurry Face TBM
• Shield articulation cylinder, pump and seals
• Tail seals
• Earth pressure sensor
• Screw conveyor pump for Earth Pressure Balance TBM
30 | P a g e
6.2 TBM Daily Record
The Contractor shall produce operational data for each Earth Pressure Balance Machine
(EPBM) or Slurry Tunnel Boring Machine (STBM) throughout the whole tunnelling process
in both hard and soft (electronic) copy for each working shift.
These shift reports shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours for Notice to Proceed
and shall provide the following minimum information.
• Start and finish time of the excavation stroke including all stoppages, recording the
reasons for the stoppages.
• Ring number, chainage and key position.
• Start and finish time of the ring build including all stoppages, recording the reasons
for the stoppages.
• All delays and the reasons for those delays during the shift.
• Earth pressure readings at start, middle and end of excavation stroke for cutter
chamber and screw-conveyor.
• Quantity of material excavated for each ring e.g. number of skips removed.
• Total advance for the shift and the accumulative advance.
• Number and location of any cutter bits/discs changed.
• Volume of grout injected per ring and the pressure, the accumulative volume of grout
for the shift.
• Volume, type and location of ground/spoil conditioning added per ring and the
accumulative amount per shift with the concentration value.
• General comments on description of the excavated material.
• Quantity of tail grease consumed per ring.
• Any segment damage on completed rings.
• The timing and nature of any machine maintenance carried out.
6.3 TBM Daily Monitoring and Reporting
Not less than 60 days before the commencement of TBM excavation, the Contractor shall
submit details of his proposed monitoring and reporting scheme to the Engineer for Notice
of No-objection. The content of this submission shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
31 | P a g e
• Chainage of face at the start and end of each shift.
• Line and level of the tunnel rings erected during each shift, including details of any
corrections made to the plane of the rings.
• Survey control data.
• Serial numbers of the segments erected, referenced against ring numbers and
tunnel chainage;
• Details of the geological conditions encountered during each shift, including details
of any geological anomalies encountered;
• Operational data of the cutter-head drive, including torque and RPM;
• Thrust of propulsion rams;
• Operational data of slurry system (if applicable);
• Hours of operation of the TBM;
• Details of any operational delays, including the TBM, backup and slurry systems (if
applicable), recorded in 5-minute intervals;
• Details of any probing undertaken;
• Detailed cycle times for each ring, identifying the boring and erection times;
• Details of any planned or unplanned maintenance carried out;
• List of cutting tools replaced, their position and serial numbers;
• List of spare parts used;
• Quantities and pressures used in the annulus grouting, with a reconciliation of the
amount used;
• Number and classification of supervisors and workmen engaged during each shift;
• Any other information that the Engineer may reasonably request.
7. SEGMENTAL LINING
7.1 Tunnel Linings
(1) The segments shall be designed to ensure that the full design life is achieved. In the
case of pre-cast concrete linings special care shall be taken to ensure that corrosion of
reinforcement or other cast in metal components does not affect the durability of the
segments. Notwithstanding the requirements of the Specification, the design shall
assume that the tunnel waterproofing measures will not be completely effective and
32 | P a g e
therefore allowance shall be made for the effect of groundwater on any face of a
segment.
(2) To achieve full design life of concrete lining, impermeable concrete shall be produced
and shall be tested in accordance with DIN 1048. The ability of concrete to resist
chloride ion penetration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-1202. Suitable
property enhancers shall be used in appropriate % by weight of cement to ensure the
protection of precast linings against corrosion of reinforcement.
7.1.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design, manufacture and
installation of the precast concrete tunnel lining segments for the bored tunnel.
Manufacture shall be carried out in pre-casting facilities used solely for the
production of precast units. The design and manufacture of the facilities and the
control of production procedures shall be undertaken by experienced specialist
personnel familiar with the manufacture of high strength, durable, dimensionally
accurate precast concrete units.
(2) The segmental lining shall be a bolted lining built under the protection of the TBM’s
tail-skin.
(3) The lining joints shall be watertight; caulking grooves and gasket recesses shall be
provided. Elastomeric gaskets with appropriate configuration shall be provided to
achieve the required water tightness and design life as stipulated in the Contract.
7.1.2 Submittals
The following submittals shall be made to the Engineer for No-objection prior to
commencement of segment manufacture;
(1) Written confirmation from the Contractor and TBM Manufacturer of full and
complete design coordination between the contractor, TBM manufacturer, and the
mould manufacturer. Include a written certification by manufacturers affirming the
compatibility of total TBM system and back-up equipment with lining, segment
erector, and backfill grout injection system.
(2) Detailed layout of the Pre-cast yard showing location of manufacturing shed,
batching plant, storage facilities, reinforcement yard, access and egress routes to
and from the yard together with welfare facilities for the workers
(3) Complete detailed design documentation for the non-objection of the Engineer
which shall demonstrate the integrity of the design and compliance with design
33 | P a g e
criteria at all stages including the design, manufacture, transport, storage,

installation, operation, and inspection of the tunnel segments.
(4) Documentation shall include design for segment lifting devices, grout/threaded
lifting sockets, grout plugs, and reinforcing spacers and chairs. Contractor shall
consider the overall stability of the assembled segmental rings and the individual
segments in various loading combinations and provide details of the analysis to the
Engineer. The design shall confirm that the precast concrete segments are capable
of sustaining without damage all temporary loads from segment handling, stacking,
transportation, erection, secondary grouting, and TBM ram loads.
(5) Detailed Design Drawings for the non-objection of the Engineer shall include but not
be limited to the following information.
o All segment types, layout, number of segments per ring, taper configuration,
key configuration, concrete grade and type, packing, segment identification
information, reinforcement, mechanical joint connection assemblies, dowels,
bolts, connectors, guidance rods, gasket grooves, gaskets, grout/threaded
lifting sockets and plugs, inserts, and accessories necessary for manufacture,
transportation, erection and performance of the lining system
o Key dimensions, spacing, and layout of the elements including plans,

sections, elevations, and segment configurations for changes in alignment
and grade
o Complete details of all the forms, including number of moulds, details for
securing embedded items in place during casting, form geometry, and
fabrication tolerances as previously described
o Details of the concrete mixes for the non-objection of the Engineer shall
include but not be limited to the following information:
1) Constituents
2) Water Tests
3) Trial Mixes
4) Results of tests on trial mixes.
o Material specifications, properties and testing (and subsequent test results)

for gaskets, packings and components of joint connection systems or
assemblies, including pull-out capacity.
o Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for non-
objection prior to the commencement of segment manufacture:
34 | P a g e
1) Method Statement for Precast Concrete Segment Production
2) Confirmation of compliance for materials with particular regard to

materials, mixing, placing, curing, and storing of concrete
constituents, concrete segments, and fixings
3) Results of dimensional checks on segments and demonstration

lining assemblies
4) Gasket performance testing results.
(6) Contractor shall submit Production Plan for non-objection to the Engineer prior to
commencement of segment manufacture or applicable operations. Critical
construction activities shall be identified and described, including points in the
process where Engineer review and comment are required before proceeding. The
plan shall include the following:
(i) Detailed Work Plans, drawings, procedures and descriptions for fabricating,
casting, curing, stripping, handling, transporting, storing, and fixing of
gaskets. Information shall include:
a) Details showing layout of facilities for casting, curing and storing

segments
b) Test methods to assess long term performance of gasket materials

upon exposure to ground and groundwater constituents
c) Segment marking to be used, i.e., segment type, date cast, and serial
number, including form identity
d) Segment repair and rejection criteria and procedures at the factory,

on-site, and after installation
(ii) Production schedule for segment manufacture
(iii) Curing process for segment casting to 28 days after casting, including the
following:
a) Test data establishing the strength gain and curing time relationship
during the curing process
b) Methods to protect segments from direct sunlight and weather if

stored outside
c) Measures to control shrinkage and temperature cracking of

segments
35 | P a g e
d) Methods for testing (and subsequent test data) to confirm the

consolidation and curing process will result in uncracked segments
with the required strength and diffusion properties.
(iv) Name and location of a qualified, independent, testing laborator for non-
objection by Engineer
(v) Methods to verify that the design strength of the segments has been attained
prior to stripping.
(vi) Manufacturer product data, samples and certification of any materials or

appurtenances used in manufacturing, handling, and assembly of the tunnel
lining to include steel reinforcement, bolts, nuts washers, grouting materials,
sealants, gaskets as well as any admixtures, retardant agents, curing
compounds, bonding/repair materials, pozzolanic/cementitious materials,
and steel fibres that will be used in the proposed concrete mix meet the
Specification requirements.
(7) Contractor shall submit the assembly procedures, including sequencing of ring
erection, bolting, adjusting, packing, jacking, and grouting, including details of
installing segments for making alignment/grade corrections, tunnelling on curves,
and integrating the segment lining with other support systems at shafts within 120
days before arrival of the TBM(s) for non-objection by the Engineer. The submittal
shall include the following:
i. Methods to verify proper assembly during installation in tunnel
ii. Procedure and products for filling holes or pockets
No work shall start until the Engineer has issued a no objection statement in
writing.
7.1.3 Moulds
(1) Moulds for the precast concrete segments shall be strongly constructed with smooth
casting faces so that a true, sound surface of concrete is obtained. Joints shall be
completely tight and close to prevent the escape of laitance from the concrete. All
chamfer and radius strips, bolthole formers and pockets, liners, cores, and all cast-in
items shall be provided where required. Loose mould components which affect the
integrity of the mould shall be clearly identified as being part of the main mould.
The parts of one mould within a ring set shall not be interchanged with another. A
marking system shall be adopted to ensure compliance with this requirement.
36 | P a g e
(2) The design of the moulds to be used for all the pre-casting work shall receive a
‘Notice to Proceed’ from the Engineer before any such moulds are manufactured.
(3) The fabricator shall make a trial casting using the first set of moulds. The internal
dimensions of the moulds shall be measured to 0.1mm before each trial pour. One
trial unit shall be cast from each mould. The units shall be provided with a full
reinforcement cage including radial joint reinforcement. As soon as possible after
stripping from the moulds the segments shall be checked against the dimensions
shown on the drawings.
(4) During these trials, the segments are to be cured and stored in conditions equivalent
to those to be used during works production. The segment dimension deviations
shall be measured at 7, 28, and 90 days. Concurrent records of concrete
temperatures, ambient humidity and any other relevant details shall be kept at
these dates. No segment production shall be instituted until the tolerances shown
on the drawings are achieved in the trials.
7.1.4 Segment Storage on Site
(1) The Contractor shall establish a system of Site segment stock ordering, supply, and
control which shall eliminate the possibility of tunnel construction stoppage due to
lack of material.
(2) The Contractor shall satisfy himself that segment design takes account of the
method of delivery of the segments to the face, erection expedients, shove ram
disposition, and other features of the TBM having an impact on the segments. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring a full ring of the lining is delivered to
the TBM manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Employer, and at an appropriate
time during the TBM manufacturing programme, to ensure compatibility with the
TBM segment handling and erection systems.
(3) The Contractor shall, for the duration of the tunnel drive(s), maintain a stock of fully
cured (age >28 days) segments. These shall be sufficient for a minimum of 4 weeks
construction at each location from which the Contractor may decide to supply
material at the programmed rates of advance. During the closing stages of the tunnel
drives these stocks shall be drawn down.
7.1.5 Trial Assembly
There shall be a trial assembly, before commencement of the bulk manufacture. This trial
assembly shall consist of three rings bolted together on a horizontal plane platform to
demonstrate compliance with this Specification of rings of each material and diameter. The
rings shall be built one above the other with the cross joints offset by half a segment as
37 | P a g e
appropriate. The fully bolted bottom ring shall be bolted to the platform or otherwise
secured in position and shall be retained as a master ring until the completion of tunnel
construction.
From time to time, as may be required or directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost
to the contract, segments shall be built to form two rings on the master ring to ensure that
tolerances and interchangeability of the segments are maintained. Adequate Notice of the
trial assembly shall be given to the Engineer to enable him to arrange inspection and
checking of the assembly.
7.1.6 Marking of Segments
(1) All tunnel segments delivered to site shall bear the indelible marks described below.
Any segment which is delivered to site and upon which the markings cannot be read
for whatever reason, shall not be used in the Works.
(2) The markings must in no way compromise any requirement of this Specification, i.e.
cover to reinforcement or waterproofing.
(3) The following minimum information shall be included on the marking:
Internal diameter
Type of segment:
`O` ordinary
`T` top (the T shall be put near the key end of the segment)
`K` key segment
`X` special or taper
7.1.7 Transporting and Storing Segments
(1) Segments shall be transported face up with timber spacers. When stored on site
segments shall be stacked on edge, on a prepared level base with timber packing as
necessary.
(2) The method of lifting and handling, the type of equipment and method of transport
shall not damage the segments.
(3) Segments shall not be transported to site until they have achieved the 28 days
compressive cube strength.
(4) If the grout hole is to be used for segment handling, the Contractor shall ensure that
this has been catered for in the design.
38 | P a g e
7.1.8 Joints
The faces of joints shall be cleaned before bolting segments. Bolts shall be tightened at the
time of erection of each ring. For a shield drive the circle bolts shall be re-tightened prior to
release of the shoving jack force.
7.1.9 Rolled Rings
Rings may be rolled to facilitate the construction of openings and may also be rolled to
facilitate maintenance of the plane of the rings. Tapered rings shall be rolled as appropriate
to achieve the specified alignments and gradients of the tunnels.
7.1.10 Bolts
The length of each bolt shall allow for two washers and two grommets and for all
adjustments required in the alignment of the tunnels. When fitted in position the bolt
threads shall be exposed for at least 3 mm clear of the nut.
7.1.11 Plane
(1) Errors in the plane of a ring should be kept to a minimum. When they occur, the
plane of the ring shall be adjusted by packing of maximum practicable continuous
lengths of resilient, durable material which shall have received Notice to Proceed
from Engineer. Packing in a single joint shall not exceed 6 mm for concrete lining.
(2) The packing shall be supplied in various thickness, as required, but not less than 2
mm, and when in place, shall be clear of the sealing strip.
(3) In tunnel drives which utilise all tapered rings, packing shall not exceed 3 mm per
circle joint.
7.1.12 Sealing Strips and Gaskets
(1) Two Sealing strips comprising a gasket of the hydrophilic type and a gasket of the
elastomeric type shall be provided at all faces between segments to provide a seal
against ingress of ground water. Alternatively, a single gasket comprising of
hydrophilic and elastomeric type may also be used. Notwithstanding this
requirement the Contractor shall submit his gasket proposal to the Engineer for his
Non-objection
(2) Immediately prior to the erection of a segment in the tail skin of the TBM each
gasket shall be checked for anchorage to the segment, cleanliness and position.
39 | P a g e
7.1.13 Caulking Grooves
(1) Caulking grooves shall be formed in segments in accordance with the design and
this Specification to ensure that caulking to circle joints and radial joints may be
made effectively continuous, the depth of caulked material in the joints being not
less than 25 mm.
(2) Prior to caulking all joints shall be inspected and thoroughly cleaned out as
necessary. Any packing, grout or other foreign material projecting into the caulking
space shall be cut out by an appropriate method.
(3) Immediately prior to caulking, the joints shall be blown out with a compressed air as
to remove any loose debris or water.
7.1.14 Grout Valves
Grout holes shall be provided in the tunnel lining for and necessary secondary grouting of
the tunnel lining. These grout holes shall incorporate one-way valves to prevent ground and
water loss during the grouting operation.
7.1.15 As-built Tolerances
(1) The finished bored tunnel after installation of structural fire protection shall be of a
minimum ____ mm (exclusive of all as-build tolerances) internal diameter with
respect to the designed/theoretical longitudinal axis of the tunnel. This means that
at no point of internal circumference of the as-built tunnel shall any part of the
lining encroach upon the kinematic envelope. Notwithstanding the finished profile
of the tunnel the segmental lining shall conform to the following structural
tolerances;
a) The maximum and minimum measured diameters in any one ring shall be
within 40mm of the theoretical design diameter of the ring.
b) Lipping: The lip between adjacent segments in a ring shall not exceed 5mm
and shall not be so great as to prevent the connections between segments
from being correctly installed, nor prevent the effective functioning of
gaskets, nor reduce the face-to-face radial joint bearing area to an extent
where structural efficiency will be compromised
c) Stepping: The step between adjacent rings shall not exceed 10mm and shall
not be so great as to prevent the connection between adjacent rings from
being correctly installed, nor prevent the effective functioning of gaskets.
d) The plane of the leading face of each ring, including a taper ring, shall not
depart at any point from the plane surface by more than 6 mm.
40 | P a g e
e) The roll of adjacent circle joint bolt holes shall not be greater than 5 mm or
the tolerance in the bolt holes, whichever is smaller; the maximum total
allowable bolt hole roll of any ring shall be controlled to be within limits as
determined to achieve the overall construction tolerances and it shall not
deviate from the relevant TBM roll excessively.
7.1.16 Non - Compliance with Tolerances
Where any part of the lining does not comply with the specified tolerances the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for Notice to Proceed, proposals for remedial or other
measures to correct the defect or negate its effects as appropriate.
7.1.17 Damaged Segments
(1) Any segments which are damaged or defective shall be indelibly marked and
removed from the Site and replaced by the Contractor. Such damaged or defective
segments shall be destroyed. No damaged or defective segments shall be used in the
Works.
(2) Rings which have been erected in the tunnel and are subsequently damaged may as
a last alternative have to be removed and rebuilt. However, depending upon the
nature and extend of the damage and impact on the durability of the segment the
contractor may propose remedial measures for rectification of the segment. No
payment shall be made for defective segments until rectification has been given a No
objection by the Engineer.
(3) Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for non-objection details of proposed tunnel
lining repair processes to meet the design requirements of the project.
(4) Contractor shall monitor all segment repairs for satisfactory performance of the
repair and, if required by Engineer, repeat or revise the repair process.
7.1.18 Grade of Concrete
The minimum grade of concrete shall be at least M50. The Contractor shall designate its
grade of concrete as follows:
• Concrete M50 / 20
• The letter M refers to the mix, the number 50 represents the characteristic
compressive strength of 15cm cubes at 28 days in MPa. M50 concrete thus has a
characteristic strength of 500 kg/cm2. Other mix design will also be denoted in
same way. The number 20 represents the nominal size of the aggregate in mm.
41 | P a g e
7.1.19 Tolerances
The dimensions of precast concrete segments shall be within the following tolerances:
a. Circumferential Length - 1mm
b. Thickness - 3mm
c. Width - 1mm
d. Internal diameter of completed ring - 0.2% internal diameter or 6mm whichever is

the greater
e. Bolt holes size +1mm, -0.2mm
f. Bolt holes position 1mm
g. Width of gasket sealing groove - 1mm
h. Depth of gasket sealing groove +1mm, -0.5 mm
i. Mismatch of gasket sealing groove at corners <2mm
j. Steel templates specifically designed for the segments shall be provided to ensure
the quality of the production of segments to the required tolerances.
7.2 Structural Concrete
7.2.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall establish a modern concrete laboratory with trained Engineers,
Quality Control (QC) Manager and technicians at the casting yard. The laboratory
shall contain facilities for testing physical properties of cement, workability of
concrete, cube strength, permeability, sieve analysis, RCPT, aggregate tests, tests
required for mix design, chloride and sulphate tests of water and admixture,
concrete temperature, oven, accelerated tests for cement/concrete strength, flexural
strength of concrete etc. One room shall be air-conditioned to control temp and
humidity for cement tests.
(2) All off-site material sampling and testing shall be done at laboratories accredited by
NABL (National Accreditation Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories) or
internationally accredited laboratory to ISO 17025.
(3) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details and samples of all materials
which he proposes to use for the manufacture of the precast tunnel lining at least 60
days before the commencement of manufacturing and obtain Notice to Proceed
from the Engineer. Any subsequent change in these materials, proposed by the
42 | P a g e
Contractor shall not be permitted unless a Notice to Proceed has been obtained from
the Engineer.
7.2.2 Source of Materials:
(1) All the sources of the materials shall require Engineer Notice to Proceed in advance
before bringing to the site. All materials for making concrete shall require
Employers Representative Notice to Proceed. A sample of material shall be
deposited in the office of the Engineer before placing orders for the materials with
suppliers. The materials brought on to the works shall conform in every respect to
their samples and specifications which have Notice to Proceed.
(2) Fresh samples shall be deposited with Engineer whenever type or source of any
material changes. The Contractor shall check fresh consignment of materials as it is
brought on to the works to ensure that they conform to the specifications.
(3) The Engineer shall have the option to have any of the materials tested to find
whether they are in accordance with specifications at the Contractor's expense. All
bills vouchers and test certificates which in the opinion of the Engineer are
necessary to convince him as to the source and quality of materials or their
suitability shall be produced for his inspection when required.
(4) Any materials which have not been found to conform to the specifications and/or
without Notice to Proceed by the Engineer shall be rejected forthwith and shall be
removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost within the time stipulated
by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the powers to cause the Contractors to
purchase and use materials from any particular source, as may in his opinion, are
necessary for the quality execution of work.
(5) Contractor shall also ensure that all constituents of exposed concrete shall be taken
from same sources to achieve a uniform colour and texture. Cement/blended
cement/Cementitious material: They all will mean the same thing.
The cement or cementitious material used shall be of the following types:
i. 43 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112.
ii. 53 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12269.
iii. PPC as per IS: 1489 (Part-I)
iv. PSC as per IS: 455
v. Fly ash as per IS: 3812 (Part I & II)
43 | P a g e
vi. Whenever possible all cements of each type shall be obtained from one constant
source throughout the contract, cement of different types shall not be mixed
together. Different brands of cement, or the same brand of cement from different
sources, shall not be used without Engineer’s Notice to Proceed.
Packaged cement shall be delivered to the site in original sealed bags which shall be labelled
with the weight, name of manufacturer, brand and type. Cement received in torn bags shall
not be used. Cement bags will not be handled with hooks which allow ingress of moisture.
Material which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the Specification in
any way shall be removed from the site. Contractor may obtain cement in bulk and store it
in suitable silos of adequate capacity. Each type of cement shall be stored in a separate silo
and it shall be ensured, that cements of different quality are not mixed up.
All cement shall be fresh when delivered and at ambient atmospheric temperature. In fair
faced elements, the cement used in the concrete for any complete element shall be from a
single consignment. All cement for exposed concrete shall be from the same source and
uniform in colour. With each and every delivery of cement the Contractor shall provide
manufacturer’s certificate that the cement conforms to the relevant Indian standard. The
Contractor shall provide complete facilities at site for carrying out the following tests:
(a) Setting time by Vicat's apparatus as per IS: 4031 and IS: 5513.
(b) Compressive strength on cement as per IS: 4031, IS: 650, IS: 10080.
(c) Total chloride content in cement shall in no case exceed 0.05 percent by mass of
cement. Also, total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3), shall in
no case exceed 2.5 percent and 3.0 percent when tri-calcium aluminate per cent by
mass is greater than 5 or less than 10 respectively.
(d) The cement will be blended with processed fly-ash conforming to IS specifications
Cement and cement extenders shall be free flowing and free of lumps and shall be
supplied in the manufacturer's sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. The temperature of
the cement when added to the mixer shall not exceed 40° C unless otherwise agreed
by the Engineer.
All cement and cement extenders used in the Works shall be tested by the manufacturer or
the Contractor in a laboratory which has Engineer Notice to Proceed. Copies of all test
results so obtained shall be delivered to the Engineer before the cement and cement
extenders are incorporated in concrete. All cement extenders used shall comply with the
appropriate Indian standards for Fly Ash (FA) or Condensed Silica Fume (CSF) respectively
as detailed above.
44 | P a g e
The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the manufacture, delivery,
testing and use of all cement and cement extenders used in the Works and shall provide the
Engineer with two copies thereof.
If the Contractor proposes to use a Type 1 Portland Cement, he shall only do so by blending
it with a Noticed cement extender that has been issued Notice to Proceed by Engineer.
Blending of Type 1 cement with an extender may be done, in the batch plant, or at a
commercial blending plant.
Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer or Contractor shall relate to not more than
one day's output of each cement plant and shall be made on samples taken from cement
which is subsequently delivered to the Site. Alternatively, the frequency of testing shall be
one set of tests for every 200 tonnes of cement delivered to Site from each cement plant.
Cement and cement extenders which are older than 120 days from date of grinding shall be
retested in a laboratory which has Engineer Notice to proceed at the rate of one set of tests
for every 200 tonnes or as otherwise directed by the Engineer and at monthly intervals
thereafter.
7.2.3 Aggregates
Aggregates from natural sources shall be in accordance with IS: 383. The Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer certificates of grading and compliance for all consignments of
aggregate for Notice to Proceed. In addition, at site from time to time, the Contractor shall
allow for carrying out such tests and for supplying test records to the Engineer. Aggregates
shall be produced by crushing, screening, washing and procured from sources only that
have Engineer Notice to Proceed.
For fair faced concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that aggregates are free from iron
pyrites and impurities, which may cause discoloration. Aggregates shall be stored on paved
areas in different compartments according to their nominal size.
Fine Aggregate:
The Contractor shall provide complete facilities at site for determining grading of
aggregates by sieves as per IS: 383, IS: 460, IS: 1607, and IS: 2386.
Only the product of the secondary crusher will be acceptable, subject to conformity with IS:
383. To achieve an acceptable particle, shape the fine aggregate shall be manufactured using
crushers specially adapted (Rollobar or similar) to suit the type of material available. Stone
dust or grit from the stone quarries should not be considered as of acceptable quality.
It shall be free from clay, loam, earth or vegetable matter, salt or other harmful chemical
impurities. It shall be clean, sharp, strong, angular and composed of hard siliceous material.
45 | P a g e
The fine aggregate shall be river sand, manufactured sand of appropriate grading. Sand
dredged from sea, creeks will not be used. Sand shall be washed and screened to remove
any organic matter and clay. RMC manufactured with sand dredged from sea/creek will not
be used.
The grading of fine aggregate when determined as described in IS: 2386 (part I), shall be
within the grading zones I, II, III.
The Contractor shall provide complete facilities at site for carrying out the following tests:
i) Proportion of clay, silt and fine dust by sedimentation method as per IS: 2386 part II.
ii) Moisture content in fine aggregate as per IS: 2386 Part III.
iii) Bulk density / Bulkage.
iv) Specific Gravity
Coarse Aggregate:
The coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, natural gravel or a suitable combination
thereof. Coarse aggregate obtained from crushed or broken stone shall be angular, hard,
strong, dense, durable, clean and free from soft, friable, thin plate, elongated or flaky pieces
and any deleterious material.
The grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different
sizes and blending them in correct proportions as and when required.
All coarse aggregate shall conform to IS: 383 and tests for conformity shall be carried out as
per IS: 2386, Parts I to VIII.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be such that the concrete can be placed without
difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the corners of formwork.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the nominal maximum size shall not exceed
40mm.
Alkali reactive materials:
The aggregates shall be evaluated to identify any minerals known to have a potential to
cause alkali silica, alkali silicate, alkali carbonate or any other damaging chemical reaction
between alkalis and aggregates. The minerals present should be determined in accordance
with ASTM C294 and C295 on a range of samples selected to include every mineral type
present in the aggregate as a whole irrespective of the proportion of the mineral.
The aggregate shall be kept clean at all times. The sand equivalent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2419 of the fine aggregate shall be greater than 80. The sand
equivalent of the zero to 4.75 fractions of all aggregates shall be greater than 75.
46 | P a g e
Ethylene glycol tests shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Petrographic examination shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM or standard

procedures to identify the minerals present and in particular the percentage of clay
minerals.
Chlorides:
The chloride content shall not exceed 0.03% by mass expressed as chloride ion when tested
in accordance with relevant standard.
Sulphates:
The Sulphate content shall not exceed 0.4% by mass expressed as SO3 when tested in
accordance with relevant standard.
Total Chloride and Sulphate Content:
The total chloride content arising from all ingredients in a mix including cement, water and
admixtures shall not exceed the flowing limits, expressed as chloride ion as a percentage of
the mass of cement in the mix:
For reinforced concrete 0.1% in 95% of all test results providing no result is 0.25%. The
total sulphate content expressed as SO3 of all the ingredients in a mix including cement,
water and admixtures shall not exceed 4.0% of the mass of cement in the mix.
Testing:
(a) Acceptance Testing:
As soon as the first aggregates have been produced to stockpile the Contractor shall
carry out tests. The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS: 2430-1969.
The amount of material required for each test shall be as specified in the relevant
method of test given in IS: 2386 (Part I) – 1963 to IS: 2386 (Part VIII) – 1963.
All tests shall be carried out as described in IS: 2386 (Part I) – 1963 to IS: 2386 (Part
VIII) – 1963.
If at any time a significant physical or chemical change in the nature of the coarse or
fine aggregate occurs, or a new source of aggregate is used, the Engineer may direct
that some or all of the acceptance testing is repeated.
(b) Routine Testing:
The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of aggregates for compliance with the
Specification during the period in which concrete is being produced for the Works.
The tests set out below shall be performed on aggregates from each separate source
on the basis of one set of tests for each day on which aggregates are delivered to the
47 | P a g e
concrete batching plant provided that no set of tests shall represent more than 250
tonnes of fine aggregate nor more than 500 tonnes of coarse aggregate and provided
also that the aggregates are of uniform quality. If the aggregate from any source is
variable, the frequency of testing shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
Blending of aggregates:
In order to obtain optimum workability, individual aggregates of nominal size 40mm,

20mm, 10mm, 4.75mm and 2.36mm will be blended in such a way that the grading curve
for all aggregates will be a smooth curve from size 0.15mm to 40mm falling within the
established envelop grading curve. Contractor shall establish envelop grading curve for
each grade of concrete for given maximum size of aggregates for Notice to Proceed before
finalising the mix design.
Admixtures:
Chemical admixtures are not to be used until Engineer Notice to Proceed. In case their use is
permitted, the type, amount and method of use of any admixtures proposed by the
Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for Notice to Proceed. The minimum cement
content specified shall not be reduced on account of the use of the Admixtures.
The Contractor shall further provide the following information concerning each admixture
to the Engineer:
i) Normal dosage and detrimental effects if any of under dosage and over dosage.
ii) The chemical names & solid contents of the main ingredients in the admixtures.
iii) The chloride content, if any, expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture.
iv) Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used in the
manufacturer's recommended dosage.
v) Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one mix, the
manufacturer's written confirmation of their compatibility.
In reinforced concrete, the chloride content of any admixture used shall not exceed 0.1
percent by weight of the admixture as determined in accordance with IS: 6925 and the total
chloride and sulphate contents in concrete mix shall not exceed 0.10 and 4.0 percent
respectively by weight of cement.
The admixtures when used shall conform to IS: 9103, ASTM C-494 or AASHTO M-154 or BS
EN 934-2 and BS EN 480-10. The suitability of all admixtures shall be verified by trial mixes.
The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing embedded metal will not be
permitted under any circumstances.
48 | P a g e
Retarding admixtures when used shall be poly hydroxyl compounds or as Notice to Proceed
by Engineer.
Air-entering agents shall comply with ASTM C-260 or AASHTO M-194 or BS 5075. Each
batch / consignment shall be tested for specific gravity & performance in concrete before
their use.
7.2.4 Batching Plants, Mixers and Vibrators:
(1) For all structural concreting work on the Project, the Contractor shall provide
automatic weigh-batching plant of suitable capacity. The plant used shall conform to
IS: 4925.
(2) The Contractor shall provide Concrete mixers (IS: 1791 – Batch type concrete
mixers, IS: 2438 – Roller Pan Mixer) and Vibrators (IS: 2505 – Concrete Vibrators
Immersion Type, IS: 2506 – Screed board concrete vibrators, IS: 4656 – Form
Vibrators for Concrete) supplied by recognised manufacturers.
7.2.5 Mix Design and Workmanship
(1) It is the complete responsibility of the Contractor to design the concrete mixes by
approved standard methods and to produce the required concrete conforming to
the specifications and the strength, durability (fulfilling the requirements of DARR),
workability requirements as required by the Specifications.
(2) The Mix Design for the segmental lining, once approved, shall not be altered without
prior Notice to Proceed from the Engineer. However, should the Contractor
anticipate any change in quality of future supply of materials than that used for
preliminary mix design, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance and
bring fresh samples sufficiently in advance, to carry out fresh trial mixes. Design mix
will indicate by means of graphs and curves etc., the extent of variation in the
grading of aggregates which can be allowed. The S.D. and coefficient of variation
shall be established for each grade of concrete. SQC graphs shall be submitted
monthly.
7.2.6 Limits of Water and Cementitious Material Contents:
Maximum water / cementitious material ratio: For RCC members 0.40 Cement/blended
cement / cementitious material Content: Cementitious material in concrete shall not be less
than 380 kg/ cum for RCC work and 400 kg/ cum for PSC work under severe exposure.
However, the quantity of cement (excluding Fly Ash) shall be limited to 450kg/ cum of
concrete. Ordinary Portland cement (OPC) of 43 and 53 grade conforming to IS: 8112 and
IS: 12269 respectively shall be used.
49 | P a g e
As regards trial mixes, acceptance criteria, acceptance specification, lot size, sampling and
testing and sampling size for segments shall comply with the requirement of the relevant
codes and standards.
7.2.7 Permeability Test for Concrete
Engineer shall not give a Notice to Proceed without satisfactory permeability by RCPT and
DIN 1048 (Part – I) tests. Regular permeability tests shall be carried out as per frequency
specified by relevant standards.
From the batches thus selected two concrete cylinders shall be made in accordance DIN
1048.
All cylinders shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in accordance with DIN-
1048 Specifications. The tests shall be carried out in the site laboratory or off site
laboratory.
At least two cylinders shall be made on each day’s concreting until 60 cylinders have been
made for each grade of concrete. The cylinders will be tested as per the procedure, given
below:
7.2.8 Test Procedure:
The permeability of concrete will be verified by the following procedure:
i. Prepare a cylindrical test specimen 150 mm dia and 160mm high.
ii. After 28 days of curing, test specimen will be fitted in a machine such that the
specimen can be placed in water under pressure up to 7 bars.
iii. At first a pressure of one bar is applied for 48 hours, followed by 3 bars for 24 hours
and 7 bars for next 24 hours.
iv. After the passage of the above period, the specimen is taken out and split in the
middle by compression applied on two round bars on opposite sides above and
below.
v. The water penetration in the broken core is measured with scale and the depth of
penetration assessed in mm (max permissible limit 10 mm).
7.2.9 Acceptability Criteria:
Rapid Chloride Penetration Test (RCPT)
RCPT shall be carried out as per ASTM-C-1202 under controlled conditions and by trained
technicians. The necessary equipment shall be installed at site laboratory or off-Site
laboratory with Engineer Notice to Proceed. The RCPT values should not be more than 1000
Columbs.
50 | P a g e
7.2.10 Batching of Concrete Ingredients:
All concreting shall be either produced in automatic weigh batching plant installed at site or
Ready-Mix Concrete manufactured in automatic weigh batching plant. The Contractor shall
identify reputed RMC Manufacturers and submit to Engineer for Notice to Proceed.
Batching Plant shall be properly maintained and calibrated at a regular interval. The
frequency of the calibration shall be as specified by the relevant standards.
7.2.11 Placing temperatures:
During extreme hot weather, the concreting shall be done as per procedures set out in IS:
7861, Parts I & II. The concrete temperature shall not be more than 32oC at time of placing.
In hot weather with temperature exceeding 40-degree C, the stock piles of fine and coarse
aggregates for concreting shall be kept shaded from direct rays of sun and the concrete
aggregates sprinkled with water for a sufficient time before concreting in order to ensure
that the temperature of these ingredients is as low as possible prior to batching. The mixer
and batching equipment shall be also shaded and if necessary painted white in order to
keep their temperatures as low as possible. The placing temperature of concrete shall be as
low as possible in warm weather and care shall be taken to protect freshly placed concrete
from overheating by sunlight in the first few hours of its laying. The time of day selected for
concreting shall also be chosen so as to minimise placing temperatures. In case of
concreting in exceptionally hot weather the contractor in his discretion specify the use of
ice either flaked and used directly in the mix or blocks used for chilling the mixing water. In
either case, the Contractor shall not be paid extra for cost of ice, additional labour involved
in weighing and mixing etc. All salt and saw dust shall be removed from ice before use.
Quality of water used for making ice shall confirm to IS: 456. A complete record of concrete
temperature shall be maintained and made available to Engineer. The temperature shall be
recorded both at the mixing & placing point.
7.2.12 Transporting, Placing, Compacting and Curing:
General:
Transporting, placing, compacting and curing of concrete shall be in accordance with IS:
456.
Transporting:
The mix after discharging from the mixer shall be transported by agitating transit mixers,
buckets, pumps etc. or as Engineer Notice to Proceed without causing segregation and loss
of cement slurry and without altering its desired properties with regard to water cement
51 | P a g e
ratio, slump, air content, cohesion and homogeneity. It should be ensured that the concrete
is moved to its final destination, placed and compacted before initial set.
The transportation is to be done by agitating transit mixers, pumps or other approved

methods.
Placing:
The method of placing shall be such as to prevent formation of cold joints, adulteration,
segregation or loss of ingredients. The thickness of horizontal layers shall not exceed
300mm. High velocity discharge of concrete causing segregation of mix shall be avoided.
The concrete shall be placed in the forms gently and not dropped from a height exceeding
1.5m. Each layer of concrete shall be compacted fully before the succeeding layer is placed
and separate batches shall follow each other so closely that the succeeding layer shall be
placed and fully compacted before the layer immediately below has taken initial set.
Concreting of any portion or section of the work shall be carried out in one continuous
operation and no interruption of concreting work will be allowed.
Compaction
Concrete shall be fully compacted by Noticed means during and immediately after placing. It
shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork, around reinforcement and embedded
fittings without displacing or distorting them, and into corners, in order to form a solid
mass free from voids.
The concrete shall be free from honeycombing and planes of weakness.
Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbances by vibration within 4 to 24 hours after

compaction. Concrete can be compacted by means of external vibrators and in exceptional
cases, by internal vibrators. For external vibration, the design of the segment moulds and
positioning of vibrators shall be such that efficient compaction and avoidance of surface
blemishes is ensured. Internal vibrators shall be rubber tipped and be capable of producing
not less than 10,000 cycles per minute.
The Contractor shall ensure that vibrators are operated at pressures or voltages not less
than those recommended by the manufacturer in order that the compactive effort is not
reduced. Vibration shall be applied by experienced operators only, who shall be under the
direct supervision of an experienced concrete supervisor at all times. Sufficient standby
vibrators shall be held available for immediate use in case of breakdowns. A sufficient
number of vibrators shall be operated to enable the entire quantity of concrete being placed
to be vibrated for the necessary period and, in addition, standby vibrators shall be available
for instant use at each place where concrete is being placed.
52 | P a g e
Internal vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to penetrate the layer
underneath at regular spacing which shall not exceed the distance from the vibrator over
which vibration is visibly effective and, in any case, shall not exceed 600 mm.
Internal vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall vibrators be
allowed to touch formwork or reinforcement, or other embedded items as far as is
practicable.
Special attention shall be given to the compaction of concrete behind embedded items and
in all places where high concentrations of reinforcing steel occur.
The concrete shall be compacted by use of appropriate diameter vibrator by holding the
vibrator in position until:
i) Air bubbles cease to come to surface.
ii) Resumption of steady frequency of vibrator after the initial short period of drop in
the frequency, when the vibrator is first inserted.
iii) The tone of the vibrated concrete becomes uniform.
iv) Flattened, glistening surface, with coarse aggregates particles blended into it
appears on the surface.
v) To secure even and dense surfaces free from aggregate pockets, vibration shall be
supplemented by tamping or tamping by rods in the corners of forms and along the
form surfaces while the concrete is plastic.
vi) A sufficient number of spare vibrators shall be kept readily accessible to the place of
deposition of concrete to assure adequate vibration in case of breakdown of those in
use.
vii) Form vibrators whenever used shall be clamped to the sides of formwork and shall
be positioned such that the efficient compaction and avoidance of surface blemishes
is ensured. The formwork must be made specially strong and watertight where this
type of vibrator is used. Care must be taken to guard against over vibration
especially where the workability of the concrete mix is high since this will
encourage segregation of the concrete.
7.2.13 Curing
(1) Segments shall not be de-moulded until the concrete has achieved sufficient
strength to prevent damage to the segments during the de-moulding process.
53 | P a g e
(2) Secondary curing of segments is to be initiated immediately following initial

stripping of the moulds. The segments are to be maintained for 7 days at a minimum
of 100 % humidity, under cover prior to stacking and placing in the stockpile.
(3) Curing of concrete shall be complete and continuous using potable water, free from
chlorides and sulphates and other requirements as stated in IS 456.
(4) Immediately after compaction and completion of any surface finishes the contractor
shall protect the segment from the evaporation of moisture by means of polythene
sheet, wet Hessian or other material kept soaked by spraying. As soon as the
concrete has attained a degree of hardening sufficient to withstand surface damage,
moist curing shall be implemented and maintained for a period of at least 21 days
after casting.
(5) Method of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength and members will suffer a minimum distortion,
be free from excessive efflorescence and will not cause undue cracking in the works
by shrinkage.
(6) Steam curing with approved methodology may be adopted if required.
(7) Curing compounds may be permitted with Engineer’s Notice to Proceed. However it
is required to be proved that using curing compound the concrete shall not have less
strength than concrete cured by water curing. It shall not leave any discolouration
on the structural concrete and should not be detrimental to durability of concrete.
7.2.14 Handling and Storage:
The precast units shall be stored under cover prior to stacking and placing in the stockpile.
The area intended for the storage of precast units should be surfaced in such a way that no
unequal settlement can occur.
To prevent deformation of slender units, they should be provided with supports at fairly
close intervals and should also be safeguarded against tilting. Lifting and handling positions
should conform to the requirements. In addition, location and orientation marks should be
put on the members, as and where necessary. During erection the precast units should be
protected against damage caused by local crushing and chafing effects of lifting and
transport equipment
7.2.15 Cracks
Cracks, which in the opinion of the Engineer may be detrimental to the stability, strength,
durability or structural integrity of the works, the Contractor, at no additional cost to the
contract shall perform sufficient tests as necessary and furnish an Engineer with a report.
54 | P a g e
On evaluation of the report, the Engineer may request remedial works to be taken. Any
remedial works shall be at no additional cost to the contract.
7.2.16 Defective Concrete Segments
Precast concrete segments damaged by improper curing, stripping, storage, handling or any
other cause or any which are honeycombed, homogeneous, dimensionally incorrect, or have
surface finish or feature defects outside those required by these Specifications, may be
classed as defective shall not be used in the Works. All defective segments shall be at no
additional cost to the Employer.
The decision of Engineer in this regard shall be binding on the Contractor.
Repair of defects:
If on stripping the precast segment moulds the concrete surface is found to be defective in
any way, the Contractor shall make no attempt to remedy such defects prior to inspection
and the receipt from Contractor Quality Department.
7.2.17 Concrete Finishes
The surface of concrete on which forms had been fixed while concreting shall be classified
as follows:
Formed Surface: Allowable deviation from plumb or level dimensions shown on the
drawings and from the alignment profile, grades and is defined as "tolerance" and is to be
distinguished from irregularities in finishes as described herein. Tolerances in concrete
construction are specified elsewhere.
The classes of finish and requirements for finishing of concrete surface shall be as shown on
the drawings or as hereinafter specified.
Completed concrete surface shall be tested, where necessary to determine whether surface
irregularities are within the limits specified hereinafter.
Surface irregularities are classified as "Abrupt" or "Gradual". Offsets caused by displaced or

misplaced form sheathing, or form sections or by loose knots or otherwise defective timber
form will be considered as abrupt irregularities and shall be tested by direct measurements.
All other irregularities shall be considered as gradual irregularities and will be tested by use
of template, consisting of a straight edge or the equivalent thereof for curved surfaces. The
length of the template shall be 150cm for testing of formed surfaces and 300cm for testing
of unformed surfaces.
The classes of finish for formed concrete surfaces are designated by one of the symbols F1,
F2, F3 and F4. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings, these classes of finish
shall apply as follows:
55 | P a g e
Finish F1: This finish applies to surfaces where roughness is not objectionable, or surface
that will otherwise be permanently concealed. Surface treatment shall be the repair of
defective concrete, correction of surface depressions deeper than 25 mm and filling of tie
rod holes. Form sheathing will not leak mortar when concrete is vibrated. Forms may be
manufactured with a minimum of refinement.
Finish F2: This finish is required on surfaces permanently but not prominently exposed to
public view for which other finishes are not specified except F1. Forms shall be
manufactured in a workmanlike manner to the required offsets or bulges. Surface
irregularities shall not exceed 5mm for abrupt and 8mm for gradual irregularities measured
with a 1.5m template.
Finish F3: This finish is required for coarse textured concrete surfaces intended to receive
plaster, stucco or wainscoting. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 5mm for both abrupt
and gradual irregularities.
Finish F4: This finish is designated for surfaces prominently exposed to public view where
appearance is also of special importance. This shall include decorative features on the
building structures and retaining structure supporting the ramp embankment. To meet
with requirements for F4 finish, forms shall be manufactured in a skilful, workmanlike
manner, accurately to dimensions. There should be no visible offsets, bulges or
misalignment of concrete. Abrupt and gradual irregularities shall not exceed 3mm.
Irregularities exceeding this limit shall be reduced by grinding to a level of 1:20 ratio of
height to length. Jute bag subbing or sand blasting shall not be used.
Unformed Surfaces:
The classes of finish for unformed surfaces are designated by symbols U1, U2, U3 and U4.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings, these classes of finish shall apply as
follows:
Finish U1: This finish applies to unformed surfaces that will be concealed permanently or
otherwise where a screeded surface finish meets the functional requirements. Finish U1 is
also used as the stage of finishes for U2 and U3. Finishing operations shall consist of
sufficient levelling and screeding to produce an even uniform surface. Surface irregularities
shall not exceed 10mm.
Finish U2: This is floated finish, and used on all outdoor, unformed surfaces. Finish U2 is
also used as the second stage of finish for U3. Floating to be performed manually or
mechanically on stiffened screed surface shall be minimum to produce textured surface. If
finish U3 is to be applied, floating shall be continued till a small amount of mortar without
56 | P a g e
excess water is brought to the surfaces so as to permit effective trowelling. Surface

irregularities shall be removed as directed by the Engineer.
Finish U3: This is a trowelled finish and shall be used for tops of parapets, etc prominently
exposed to view. When the floated surface has hardened sufficiently, steel trowelling shall
be started. Steel trowelling on hardened, floated surface shall be performed with firm
pressure to produce a dense uniform surface free from blemishes and trowel marks and
having slightly glossy appearance. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 5mm.
Finish U4: This is a steel-trowelled finish, similar to finish U3, except that light surface
pitting and light trowel marks such as obtained from the use of machine trowelling will be
acceptable, provided that surface irregularities do not exceed the limits specified for finish
U3.
7.2.17.1 Exposed Concrete Work
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be smooth and even originally as stripped without any
finishing or rendering. The Contractor shall exercise special care and supervision of
formwork and concreting to ensure that the cast members are made true to their sizes,
shapes and positions and to produce the surface patterns desired. No honeycombing shall
be allowed. Contractor shall ensure that no air bubbles are formed on the exposed surface.
Concrete pouring sequence, vibration methodology etc shall be planned to avoid air
bubbles.
7.2.17.2 Age of Concrete at Removal of Formwork
Age of Concrete at Removal of Formworks shall be in accordance with CPWD Specifications

96 or IS: 456. The Engineer may vary the periods specified if he considers it necessary.
Immediately after the forms are removed, they shall be cleaned with a jet of water and a soft
brush.
7.2.17.3 Stripping of Formwork
The work of form work removal should be planned, and a definite scheme of operation
worked out. Formwork shall be removed carefully without jarring the concrete and curing
of the concrete shall be commenced immediately. Concrete surfaces to be exposed shall,
where required be rubbed down with Carborundum stone or bush-hammer to obtain a
smooth and even finish. No extra charge will be allowed to the Contractor for such work on
concrete surfaces after removal of forms
7.3 Reinforcement
Any steel specified for reinforcement shall conform in every respect to the latest relevant
Indian Standard Specifications and shall be of tested quality under the ISI Certification
57 | P a g e
Scheme. All reinforcement work shall be executed in conformity with the drawings and
carried out in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard Specifications IS: 2502-
Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. The reinforcement steel shall be
from primary producers and not re-rolled steel shall be supplied.
7.3.1 Storage:
Reinforcement shall be clearly labelled and stored on Site either in racks or on a hard-
impermeable base so that it remains straight and free from contamination.
Any reinforcement which is likely to remain in storage for a long period shall be protected
from the weather so as to avoid corrosion and pitting. All reinforcement which has become
corroded or pitted to an extent, which, in the opinion of the Engineer will affect its
properties, shall be removed from Site without delay.
7.3.2 Cutting and bending:
No flame cutting of high-tensile steel bars shall be permitted. Except as provided for below,
all bars shall be bent cold and bending shall be done slowly, a steady, even pressure being
used without jerk or impact. Reinforcing bars that have been bent shall not be rebent at the
location of the original bend without Engineer Notice to Proceed.
7.3.3 Surface condition:
Immediately before the concrete is placed around the reinforcement, the reinforcement
shall be clean, free from mud, oil, grease, paint, loose rust, loose mill scale or any other
substance that can have an adverse effect on the steel or concrete or reduce the bond.
7.3.4 Inspection & Testing
Every bar shall be inspected by Contractor before assembling on the Works and any
defective, brittle, rusted or burnt bars shall be removed. Cracked ends of bars shall be cut
out.
Reinforcement steel shall be fresh, free from corrosion. Corroded steel will not be
incorporated in work. If there are traces of corrosion, then the Contractor have to give the
following treatment to steel for which nothing extra shall be paid. Cleaning of steel by wire
brush for removal of dust and rust. No work shall be commenced without the Engineer
Notice to Proceed of design drawings. Manufacturer's Certificate shall be supplied for each
lot of supply.
Specimens sufficient for three Tensile Tests for each different size of bar for each
consignment delivered shall be sampled and tested by the Contractor. Batches shall be
rejected if the average results of each batch are not in accordance with the specifications
and shall be removed from Site, without delay.
58 | P a g e
All manufacturer's test certificates, batch reference labels and quality control certificates
shall be retained by the Contractor and noted against each bar mark number at the time of
cutting and bending. This information shall be copied to the Engineer weekly.
7.3.5 Bar Bending and Bar Bending Schedule
All bars will be carefully and accurately bent by approved means in accordance with IS:
2502, and relevant drawings. It shall be ensured that depth of crank is correct as per the bar
cutting and bending schedule and bent bars are not straightened for use in any manner that
will injure the material. Prior to starting bar bending work, the Contractor shall prepare bar
bending schedule from the structural drawings supplied to him and get Engineer
Notice to Proceed. Any discrepancies and inaccuracies found by the Contractor in the
drawings shall be immediately reported to the Engineer whose interpretation and decision
there to, shall be accepted.
7.3.6 Lapping & Welding
As far as possible, bars of the maximum length available shall be used. Laps shown on
drawings will be based on the use by the Contractor of bars of maximum length. Payment
for reinforcement shall be made only for reinforcement shown in such drawings and such
laps. In case the Contractor wishes to use shorter bars, laps shall be provided at the
Contractor's cost in the manner and at the locations that the Engineer Notice to Proceed.
Bars having butt or lap welds shall be provided as specified in the drawings or as Engineer
Notice to Proceed.
Mechanical couplings shall be made only by the methods specified and at the positions
shown on the Drawings.
7.3.7 Spacing, Supporting and Cleaning
Bars may be welded by Noticed electrical process which does not affect the tensile
properties of the bar. Alternatively, the bars shall be bound together with No. 16 gauge, soft
annealed wire at sufficient intersections to ensure that the network of bars will retain its
designed form, and the network shall be temporarily supported so as to retain its correct
position during the process of placing and compacting the concrete. The ends of all such
tying wires shall be carefully turned into the body of the concrete and clear of the mould.
Top reinforcement shall be supported on adequate stools to ensure that the reinforcing bars
are firmly held in position during concreting.
Normal stools and supports will be detailed on the Drawings and bending schedules. The
Contractor shall provide for any additional supporting steelwork to suit his arrangements.
59 | P a g e
Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur during concrete placing.
Any fixings made to the formwork shall not be within the space to be occupied by the
concrete being placed.
Cover and spacer blocks required to support the reinforcement shall be as small as possible
consistent with their use and be of Noticed design and material.
Projecting ends of ties or clips shall not encroach into the concrete cover.
Cover:
The term "cover" in this context shall mean the minimum clear thickness of concrete
between the surface of the reinforcement and face of the concrete.
The minimum cover to reinforcement shall be 40 mm. Cover blocks or spacers required for
ensuring that the specified cover is obtained shall be of a material, design and same colour,
strength and material source as the surrounding concrete. The blocks shall be formed in
specially manufactured moulds and the concrete compacted on a table vibrator, all with
Notice to Proceed from Engineer.
The blocks shall be cured in water for at least 7 days. The Contractor shall measure the
cover to all reinforcement with a cover meter as soon as the formwork has been stripped
and submit the record of this survey to the Engineer as soon as practical. Precast concrete
segments with inadequate cover shall be rejected and removed from Site without delay.
7.3.8 Welding
Wherever specified all lap and butt welding of bars shall be carried in accordance with IS:
2571. Only qualified welders shall be permitted to carry out such welding. For cold twisted
reinforcement welding operations must be controlled to prevent a supply of large amounts
of heat larger than that can be dissipated. The extreme non-twisted end portion shall be cut
off before welding. Electrodes with rutile coating should be used. Bars shall be free from
rust at the joints to be welded. Slag produced in welding after alternative run should be
chipped and removed by brush. Electrode should not be lighted by touching the hot bar.
Contractor shall submit welding procedure for Engineer Notice to proceed. All tests
certificates shall be made to prove the soundness of the welded connection to the Engineer.
7.3.9 Production Tests
This Section covers tests which are to be carried out at the preproduction stage only.
Regular testing during full production shall be carried out in accordance with the
Specification.
The tests have been classified in terms of the level of compliance required:
• Compliance Tests - Tests to prove that the concrete satisfies an existing
60 | P a g e
requirement.
• Preproduction Trials - Tests to establish the criteria which will be used during
production.
• Reference Tests - Tests which provide information for design or for long-term
confirmation of the more rapid tests.
The following sections list the tests and their form and gives reasons for their inclusion.
The numbers of tests and frequency of sampling are summarised in the Table below
Compliance tests:
(a) On aggregates: Wet sieve analysis
10 % fines values Flakiness -
Flakiness index of coarse aggregates which shall be as follows:
For class 1, 2, and 3 aggregates: not more than 35
For class 4 aggregate: not more than 40
Aggregate chloride content: The chloride content of any aggregate used shall not
exceed 0.03 % by mass expressed as chloride ion;
Petrography: Petrographic examination shall be carried out in accordance with

ASTM or standard procedures to identify the minerals present and in particular the
percentage of clay minerals.
The petrography tests, because of the specialist knowledge required in the analysis,
shall only be carried out at an external laboratory which has Engineer Notice to
Proceed. The main purpose is to compare the structure of the aggregate as delivered
to that of samples from the quarry which was tested previously.
(b) On hardened concrete:
Concrete strength - Standard cube crushing methods to establish 28 day strength

and correlation with 3 day and 7 day strength. Standard and match curing as for
production segments will be used to determine the correlation between the two.
Preproduction Trials:
(a) On aggregates:
Moisture content
(b) On fresh concrete:
61 | P a g e
Veebee - To develop a target range of times and assess the controllability of

workability
(c) On hardened concrete:
Schmidt hammers - To calibrate for possible use as comparative NDT during

production.
Weighing of samples - Cubes and cores to establish density
(d) Curing trials:
Temperature monitoring - Segments and cubes shall be instrumented with

thermocouples to monitor temperatures during curing. Monitoring shall
continue after demoulding to establish the optimum type and period of
curing to avoid thermal shock and rapid drying out
Inspection for cracking - For the various cooling regimes visual inspection
(by wetting the concrete) for cracking and inspection of cores taken from
the segment will be made.
(e) Durability tests:
Water permeability tests
Reference tests:
(a) Design parameters:
E value test
Creep test (on a 90-day cylinder).
Thermal expansion coefficient - for use in design and monitoring of linings Drying
shrinkage/wetting expansion (on cores)
Concrete compressive strength - relationships between 28 day and 90 day cube

strengths and between cube and cylinder strengths
Concrete tensile strengths - cylinder splitting tests for input to design and
interpretation of joint tests. The cylinders shall be accelerated cured in the same
manner as the segments before being put into a curing tank.
(b) Durability:
Standard absorption test Water Permeability Summary of tests
62 | P a g e
SUMMARY OF TESTS
7.4 Tolerances and Inspections
(1) The tunnel lining segments shall be cast to the dimensions shown on the
Contractor’s non-objected drawings and within the tolerances specified. Segments
shall be cast with such accuracy and uniformity of dimensions that all similar
segments shall be interchangeable with corresponding segments of other rings.
(2) A comprehensive quality control and inspection procedure shall be instituted by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the production of segments of
the required quality and accuracy and, in addition, shall institute an appropriate
inspection regime for quality control.
(3) Templates, gauges and testing apparatus as required for quality control shall be
provided and kept suitably protected from damage and distortion and free from dirt
and corrosion, ready for use in checking the segments as required. The segments
shall be checked for dimensional accuracy using a measuring method no objected by
the Engineer. The method of checking shall be included in the segmental lining
manufacturing method statement.
(4) The first segment cast in any mould shall be gauged. Thereafter 5 per cent of the
segments shall be gauged. Further, the number of segments gauged shall, whenever
any variation in quality has occurred, be that required to establish the accuracy and
consistency of production as quickly as possible.
(5) A record shall be kept of the units cast in each mould and any mould that becomes
distorted or which casts faulty units shall be withdrawn from service. A fully
detailed record of the result for each measured segment shall be made available
within 24 hours of the verification.
7.5 Elastomeric Gaskets
(1) The gasket shall be capable of providing a watertight seal under all combinations of
specified tolerances associated with manufacturing and ring erection. Gaskets shall
be dense, elastomeric synthetic rubber and shall be supplied from approved
manufacturers and shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer.
(2) The test rig shall simulate a range of conditions of displacement and joint gap,
including the worst combination to be encountered in the completed structure. In
each test the water pressure shall be increased in increments of 0.5 bar and held at
each value for 5 minutes. The final pressure shall be at least 1 bar in excess of the
maximum hydrostatic pressure to which the tunnel structure may be subjected. This
63 | P a g e
pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours during which no leakage shall occur at the
gasket interface. Tests shall be carried out at normal ambient temperature.
(3) Gaskets shall be manufactured to fit the groove preformed in the segment.
Prototype gaskets shall be fit-tested to assess stretch characteristics.
(4) The material from which the gaskets are to be manufactured shall withstand any
aggressive response from the ground or groundwater. In particular the gasket
material shall withstand chemical attack and biological degradation such that the
gasket functions properly for the design life of the facility.
(5) The material properties of the elastomeric gaskets shall comply with the following
requirements
• Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, greater than 11.7 MPa
• Elongation: ASTM D412, greater than 300 percent
• Hardness: ASTM D2240, Durometer A, 60 – 70
• Compression Set: ASTM D395, Method B
o Short-term: Less than 12 percent compression after 25 percent

compression at 70 degrees C for 22 hours
o Long-term: Less than 25 percent compression after 50 percent

vertical compression after 70 hours at 100 degrees C
• Ozone Resistance: ASTM D1149, by method described in ASTM D518

Procedure A, with the following stipulation: No surface cracking of an un-
tensioned specimen (0 percent elongation) when immersed in 200 parts per
hundred million ozone solution for 100 hours at room temperature and 55
percent humidity.
• Fire Rating: ASTM C1166 self-extinguishing where less than three quarters
of the test specimen is affected.
• Aging: ASTM D573, 70 hours at 100 degrees C. Changes in material

properties shall be limited as follows:
(1) Shore Hardness: Less than six units increase
(2) Tensile Strength: Less than 15 percent decrease
(3) Ultimate Elongation: Less than 30 percent decrease
• Stress Relaxation: For a material sample tested at room temperature and a

40 percent vertical deflection, with the 2-minute measured stress set equal
64 | P a g e
to 100 percent, the residual stress shall be greater than 85 percent after 14
continuous days of testing.
• Shrinkage: Logarithmic extrapolation to a 100-year life based on immersion

of the gasket material in a hexane solution for 200 continuous days at room
temperature according to ASTM D471 shall indicate that the weight of the
gasket material specimen shall not exceed 1.20 Wo or be less than 1.05 Wo,
where Wo is the weight of the material specimen before immersion in the
hexane solution.
• Oil Absorption: ASTM 471, 70 hours at 70 degrees C in ASTM No. 3 oil,

maximum change in weight 110 percent.
(6) The gasket cross section shall be dimensioned to suit the groove as detailed in the
Non-objected design drawings for the mating faces of the segmental tunnel linings.
Manufacturing tolerances shall be ±1 mm for width and ±0.5 mm for thickness.
(7) Gaskets shall be manufactured from extruded solid sections with appropriate spaces
within the section to enable the gasket to be fully compressible within the groove
formed in the concrete segments. The gasket shall still be capable of further
compression when its top surface is level with the groove.
(8) The extruded section shall be joined to form a rectangular gasket that is a stretch fit
into the grooves of the segments. The corner joint shall be shot moulded and the
corner pieces shall be of different section from the extruded lengths in order that
the water-tightness characteristics described in the specification may be achieved
and to avoid excessive load on the corners of the concrete segments.
(9) Gaskets shall be fitted into the groove cast in the segmental tunnel linings prior to
erection. The adhesive used shall be as recommended by the gasket manufacturer
with a ‘Notice to Proceed’ from the Engineer.
(10) (10) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details and samples of the
gaskets which he proposes to use at least 60 days before the commencement of
segment manufacturing.
7.6 Bolts and Grommets
7.6.1 Bolts
Radial and circumferential joint bolts shall be made from steel grade 8.8 to BS 5950 and BS
4921.
65 | P a g e
7.6.2 Grommets
Grommets shall be plastic and to a specification that has a ‘Notice to Proceed’ from the
Engineer.
7.6.3 Packings
Stress distribution packings for radial and circumferential joints shall be specified and shall
be cut from an approved bituminous felt fibre-based sheet or marine hardboard to a
minimum thickness of 2 mm. Timber packings that may be required for the correction of
the plane of the ring shall be marine hardboard or plywood, sawn to shape with boltholes.
They shall be treated to retard rot and fire and shall be available in all necessary
thicknesses as may be required to suit the tapered ring.
8. GROUTING
8.1 General
(1) A grouting system shall be provided on the TBM which shall be designed to inject
grout continuously into the void behind the tail shield as it advances. This system
shall be kept piped up to the tail shield ports but have the facility for emptying the
pipes and washing them when not in use.
(2) The system shall be capable of automatic operation linked to the advance of the
TBM. The system should have the facility for selectable volume and pressure control
and should be sized to suit the anticipated tail shield void and the annulus between
the excavated surface and the extrados of the segmental lining.
(3) Control and monitoring of grout injection volumes and pressures shall be possible
on the operator’s control panel and at the grouting station within the backup of the
TBM and the results shall be recorded in the data logger.
(4) Primary grouting is the annulus grouting which is applied immediately after lining
has been built.
(5) Secondary grouting is done subsequent to the primary grouting and the purpose of
which is to ensure that all cavities behind the segmental lining not filled by primary
grouting operations are completely filled.
(6) The grout mix design shall require a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer before
use.
66 | P a g e
8.2 Secondary Grouting
Secondary grouting of the segmental lining shall be done within 14 days of undertaking
primary grouting at that location and preferably at a time when the tunnel face is at a
distance between 30m to 100m from the proposed secondary grouting location.
8.3 Contractor’s Submission
Prior to commencing any grouting operations, the Contractor shall submit the following to
the Engineer for non-objection at least 6 weeks prior to commencement of any planned
grouting operations:
(1) Verification of qualifications as specified herein.
(2) Details of grout mix proportions – admixtures, including manufacturer’s literature,

and laboratory test data verifying the strength of the proposed grout mix.
(3) Pressure gauge calibrations.
(4) A method statement for non-objection of the Engineer. Separate method statements
shall be provided for each type of grouting. The method statement shall include
descriptions of all equipment used to mix and pump grout, mix designs, pumping
rates and pressures, injection points, methods of monitoring, and recording and
controlling grouting activities.
(5) Submit the following to the Engineer for information during construction at the
times indicated:
(1) Grout Logs: Within 1 working day of grouting submit field logs containing as
a minimum the following:
i. Description of injection points using stationing along tunnel and degrees

clockwise looking up station from the crown.
ii. Volume of grout take at each injection point.
iii. Maximum sustained pressure at each injection point
iv. Grout time for each hole from the beginning to end of each injection
v. Grout mix pumped.
(2) Certification and Test Results: Documentation and results from the testing
laboratory:
i. Materials used in the grout are free from metallic components and
corrosion-producing elements.
67 | P a g e
ii. Materials meet specified shrinkage and compressive strength

requirements
iii. Results of all tests specified herein.
(3) Reports and Records: Maintain and submit daily logs of grouting operations
including pressures, volumes, and grout mix pumped, and time of pumping.
8.4 Quality Control
(1) All grouting operations are to be performed in the presence of the Engineers
representative, unless an emergency develops that requires cavity grouting to
stabilise the ground around a tunnel, shaft or other underground structure. Notify
the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of starting grouting operations.
(2) Perform all work in accordance with the approved method statement and all
current applicable regulations and codes. In the event of a conflict, comply with the
most restrictive applicable requirement.
(3) The properties of the grout shall be determined by the mix design and the specific
end use of the grout.
(4) Record Requirements:
(5) Monitoring: Maintain for each batch, or if mixed continuously, a continuous record
of grout mix preparation including water/cement ratio, flow, bleed, specific gravity
and the proportion of cement, fly ash, sand, water, admixtures, and other
constituents.
(6) Field Logs: Maintain field logs of the volume and pressure of grout injected at each
injection point. Maintain logs of the sequence used to grout each location and each
point.
(7) Retain a full-time, on site Grouting Manager with at least 10 years of related work
experience on similar projects to manage the grouting program by designing,
testing, and overseeing the injection of grout mixes of the type required.
8.5 Grouting Materials
(1) Cement used for annular grouting shall be Type II or Type V Portland cement.
(2) Water: All water used in preparing grout shall be potable, clean, and free from
sewage, oil, acid, alkali, chlorides, salts, organic materials, and other impurities.
(3) Bentonite shall conform to BS EN 1538.
68 | P a g e
(4) Aggregates – Grading Requirements shall conform to the following table
Table 8.1 – Sieve Analysis
(5) Fluidifiers: Fluidifiers shall hold the solid constituents of the grout in colloidal
suspension, be compatible with the cement and water used in the grouting work,
and comply with the requirements of ASTM C937.
(6) Admixtures: Other admixtures may be used subject to non-objection of the Engineer
to improve the pumpability, to control set time, to hold sand in suspension, and to
prevent segregation and bleeding. Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494 and
shall be compatible with all grout materials, including other admixtures.
(7) Pulverised fly ash shall not be used as a constituent of grouts which contain
sulphate resisting cement.
(8) The compressive strength of the grout will be determined by the mix design and the
specific end use of the grout.
8.6 Tail Void Grouting Equipment
(1) General:
(i) Volumetric Measuring Device: Accurate to 5 litres.
(ii) Provide scale device to measure continuously the weight of the grout
reservoir.
(iii) Pressure Gauges: Accurate to plus or minus 0.007 MPa over allowable
grouting pressure range.
(iv) Grouting system shall be interlinked to the TBM advance.
69 | P a g e
(v) Provide pressure and volume measurements for each injection line and
weight measurements, all continuously fed to the TBM display and TBM
Data Monitoring System.
(2) Pumps:
(i) Utilize double piston pumps or hose pumps.
(ii) Each piston of a double piston pump or each hose pump shall feed no more
than one injection line to guarantee continuous grout injection.
(iii) Equip with a water connection to facilitate flushing the system.
(iv) Provide an emergency cut-out in case of excessive pressure.
(v) Maintain an adequate supply of spare parts and equipment to assure

uninterrupted grouting operations.
(vi) Provide a backup set of grout lines in the shield for use in case primary lines
become plugged and cannot be cleaned.
8.7 Execution
(1) Tail void grout (annulus grouting) shall be volume stable free of excess bleed once
in place, with an ultimate strength of 1 MPa.
(2) Perform at a minimum an unconfined compressive strength testing every 50 cubic

metres or once per shift, whichever comes first. Perform specific gravity, gel time,
bleeding, and flow value testing twice per shift to verify the correct grout mix.
(3) Preparation:
(i) Provide calculations to determine required grouting pressure range along

the tunnel alignment to the Engineer for information.
(ii) Maximum grouting pressure shall be adapted to the capacity of the segment
lining and the capacity of the sealing systems.
(4) Injection:
(iii) Contractor shall provide continuous annulus grouting with appropriate

materials during tunnel advance to provide external support to the tunnel
lining in the annular void, and limit ovalisation or flotation.
(iv) Tail void grout shall be pumpable through the TBM tail void grout system
(i.e., not through grout holes in the segments) with a setting time that
permits stoppage of the TBM without risk of plugging the grout pipes or
other components.
70 | P a g e
(v) Remedial cavity grouting of voids that remain after grouting by the TBM tail
grouting system may be undertaken by secondary grouting through the
grout holes cast in the tunnel lining.
(vi) Ensure minimum effective grouting pressure at outlets which equals the
required support pressure taking into account friction losses and other
practical requirements to ensure complete filling of the void.
8.8 Tail Void Grouting Field Quality Control.
(1) As soon as the warning and critical level as specified in Table 2 below is reached, the
following prescribed work routine applies:
(i) As soon as the warning level is reached, take the following actions:
• Notify the Engineer immediately.
• Adjust work routine to ensure adequate grout quantities are injected

into the tail void by modifying grout mix, injection pressures,
quantities of admixtures, or other factors.
• Report effects of work routine modifications to the Engineer.
(2) As soon as the critical level is reached, take the following actions:
• Notify the Engineer immediately.
• Stop TBM advance provided that this can be done under safe and secure
conditions.
• Report effects of work routine modifications to the Engineer.
• Restart tunnelling procedure upon agreement of the Engineer.
Table 8.2 – Tail Void Grouting
71 | P a g e
(3) Gauges and Meters:
(i) Test field gauges and meters in the presence of the Engineer no less often
than weekly using master gauges and meters.
(ii) Verify accuracy of master gauges and meters through the use of a test
laboratory no less frequently than every 2 months.
(4) Adequacy of Grouting:
(i) Conduct tests at grout ports to verify the adequacy of the grouting
operations at locations:
• Showing inadequate or excessive grout takes; or
• Selected by the Engineer where leakage is occurring.
(ii) Perform remedial grouting of the test holes in accordance with these
specifications.
8.9 Grout Plugs
Upon completion of grouting, all grout plugs shall be greased and shall be fully tightened
into the segment. Hydrophilic ‘O’ rings shall be provided at all grout plugs.
8.10 Grout Valves
Al tunnel segments shall incorporate one-way valves to prevent ground, water and grout
loss during grouting operation.
8.11 Monitoring Secondary Grouting Pressures
The Contractor shall monitor secondary grouting pressures and quantities to ensure that
grouting does not damage the Works or third-party utilities or structures.
8.12 Caulking
(1) Caulking, wherever specified/required, shall be carried out after completion of

primary and secondary grouting. Caulking grooves shall be formed in segments in
accordance with the design and the specifications to ensure that caulking to circle
joints and radical joints may be made effectively and continuous, the depth of
caulked material in the joints being not less than 25 mm.
(2) Prior to caulking all joints shall be inspected and thoroughly cleaned out as
necessary. Any packing shall be cut out by an appropriate method.
(3) Immediately prior to caulking, the joints shall be blown out with a compressed air
jet to remove any loose debris.
72 | P a g e
(4) Caulking materials shall be forced into the joints so that the full depth is filled. No
visible leaks shall remain on completion of caulking.
9. STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION
9.1 General
(1) The contractor shall design and install a Structural Fire Protection System to the
tunnel segmental lining such that the following objectives are met;
• To ensure that the tunnel structure is protected and not affected by a fire
with a rating of 100MW for three hours.
• To prevent spalling of the segmental lining whereby reducing the structural

integrity of the tunnel segmental lining
• To give protection to electrical distribution networks serving essential life

and fire safety and control equipment in the tunnel.
• To provide an effective drainage system that reduces the spread of a fire

incident in the tunnel.
• To provide sufficient time and protection to the tunnel users and the
emergency services, for the purpose of evacuation against possible collapse
of the tunnel structure.
• The design specification needed for the chosen product will limit the
temperature of the segmental lining behind the passive fire protection to
200°C for 3 hours of fire exposure in accordance with the Rijkswaterstaat
(RWS) time/temperature curve and shall perform and meet the test
requirements.
• The protective system shall be designed with removable inspection panels at

all location to be agreed with the Engineer for ease of maintenance and
inspections and be capable of accommodate all cables and essential
equipment forming part of the power distribution, Life and Fire Safety
systems and M&E control and tunnel monitoring network.
• The decorative coating will be designed to provide an attractive low

maintenance finish, with excellent reflectivity, durability and acoustic
benefits.
9.2 Performance Requirements for Structural Fire Protection.
(1) The design of the Final Lining system shall meet the following performance requirements,
73 | P a g e
• Protect the tunnel segmental lining and its reinforcement when exposed to high
temperatures there by preventing spalling of the concrete and reduction in structural
integrity.
• The installed fire protection system shall comply with the structural fire protection
requirements referenced in the NFPA® 502 Standard for Road Tunnels, Bridges, and
Other Limited Access Highways 2017 Edition.
• Meet the Fire load requirements from a Witwatersrand Time temperature curve.
• Shall me made from Calcium Silicate Boards with a minimum nominal density of
900kg/m3 shall be applied to protect the substrate. Magnesium oxy-chloride boards
shall not be used due to the inherent problems associated with corrosion of fixings.
• And shall prevent any spalling or damage from occurring for a minimum 3 hours
duration for a fire rating in accordance with the following Rijtwaterstaad (RWS)
time/temperature ‘curve’.
Table 8.3 –Rijtwaterstaad (RWS) time/temperature
• The installed system shall be tested in accordance with 2008-Efectis-R0695 Fire Testing
Procedure for Concrete Tunnel Linings.
• The installed system shall be capable of limiting the interface temperature of the
concrete structure to below the temperature of 200 o C for 3 hours
• The installed system shall also limit the temperature of the steel reinforcement to below
200ºC under the same fire exposure conditions.
• The installed system shall meet the fire protection requirements with less than 5%
humidity by weight and also when fully saturated with water in accordance with the
approved time-temperature curve.
• The system shall have been designed to withstand operational pressure and suction
loads caused by moving vehicles nominal loadings are 1.5kPa +/-
74 | P a g e
• The performance of the fixings for static and cyclic loading (not less than 100 million
load cycles) shall be demonstrated through testing and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
• The structural fire protection system shall be non-combustible in accordance with EN

ISO 1182: 2002 and shall be Classification A1 in accordance with EN 13501-1: 2002.
• The system shall remain in place during a fire event and shall be able to withstand both
hot and cold thermal shock and demonstrate resistance to intermittent jet fire and hose
stream impingement.
• The system shall meet all applicable Local, regional and international HS & E standards
and regulations.
• The system components shall be manufactured and supplied by an ISO 9001:2000

Accredited Company.
• To demonstrate long term durability, the installed system shall have a proven track
record of use in Road, Rail, Metro and/or other Limited Access Highways spanning more
than 20 years.
• The use of mechanical anchorage is mandatory.
• Due to the aggressive nature of a tunnel environment minimum 316 grade Stainless Steel
mechanical fixing system shall be used.
• The Fire Protection board shall not contain Magnesium Oxy Chlorides or other
substances likely to accelerate corrosion. Independent laboratory proof of material
composition shall be demonstrated to the Engineer for the provision of a Notice to
Proceed.
• Any applied decorative / washable coating shall have a Class 1 / Class 0 Surface Spread
of Flame rating and not contribute excessive smoke or toxic products of combustion.
• The system must also demonstrate its ability to provide a minimum of 60% light
reflectance (as defined / measured by ISO 2814) and be resistant to regular wash down
using jet washing and detergent techniques at 100 bar pressure at a distance of 1m from
the jet nozzle without damage to the fire protective lining.
(2) The following fire test procedure shall be used to demonstrate the performance of the
proposed structural protection system. If the contractor can demonstrate that their
proposal has been tested in accordance with the following Fire Testing procedure, there is
no requirement to repeat the test.
75 | P a g e
• All certification from previous tests need to have been undertaken by an internationally
recognised fire testing house who have performed similar tests for similar applications,
namely road tunnel structural protection.
• The Contractor shall undertake these tests as part of the acceptance procedure for the
proposed system.
• The fire testing and assessment of results shall be undertaken by an independent

ISO/IEC 17025:2005 accredited testing organisation that has the necessary equipment
and competence to undertake such tests.
• The testing organisation shall be nominated by the Contractor for non-objection by the
Engineer.
• The Contractor shall prepare and issue a Fire Testing Methodology Method Statement to
the Engineer for No Objection. This method statement shall clearly demonstrate how the
requirements described herein will be satisfied, prior to finalising the fire testing
arrangements and programme.
• The fire testing shall be carried out on a fully assembly specimen in the presence of the
Engineer and is fully representative of the proposed installation across the full extent of
the tunnel profile encompassing all significant variations of panel construction and
dimensions, mounting arrangements, type and size of joints and tunnel structure to be
protected. If all of the key variants cannot be readily represented by a single specimen
arrangement, then additional specimen arrangements shall be tested.
• For each specimen arrangement, four samples shall be prepared and subjected to fire
testing.
• The tests undertaken shall be required to determine the following:
o The temperature at which the concrete starts to spall without any Fire Protection.
o The performance of the system to provide sufficient thermal insulation to meet the
criteria defined.
o Confirmation that the means of fixing the system to the tunnel structure is adequate
for the design fire requirements of the tunnel structure
o The required thickness of the system in relation to the performance requirements for
spalling, thermal insulation and integrity of fixing the system to the tunnel structure
during a fire.
76 | P a g e
10. NATM TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION
10.1 Excavation
10.1.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall carry out NATM works in accordance with the Contract
Provisions and conforming to the dimensions shown on the detailed design
drawings that have received a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer.
(2) Prior to commencing any NATM works, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
appropriate designs, drawings and construction method statements relating to
NATM works. The safety and security of all works under the Contract, shall, at all
times during the construction, be the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall implement such measures, including supporting, dewatering and
ground treatment/improvement etc., as may be necessary to fulfil his obligations
under the Contract.
(3) The Contractor shall construct the Works under the Contract in such a way that the
ground surface settlement and distortion effects are kept as small as possible and, in
any case, not exceeding the limits that would infringe any of the Contract provisions
in this respect. Suitable measures shall be taken to ensure that all the Contract
provisions are complied with. Such measures shall include, but not be limited to:
a) special tunnelling methods to reduce ground loss;
b) protection measures such as:
• Underpinning
• ground improvement
• ground treatment
• compensation grouting
• structural jacking and supporting
• structural strengthening
• curtain walling
• other suitable supporting methods
c) Excavation with Care:
d) All necessary precautions shall be taken in order to prevent softening or

deterioration of excavation surfaces such as installation of initial support as
quickly as possible etc.
77 | P a g e
e) Where necessary to ensure the safety and security of the Works, excavation
for underground Works shall be continuous by day and night. The
Contractor's procedures may allow intermissions at weekends and general
holidays, provided the Works are safe at all times and are inspected by the
Contractor at appropriate intervals. Appropriate temporary support shall be
provided to excavated faces during period of short term stoppage. In the
event of long term stoppage temporary support equivalent to the detailed
design shall be installed.
f) In case of NATM tunnelling the Contractor shall make adequate

arrangements to support the face in an emergency. The support system shall
be maintained in good order at all times and it shall be stored as close to the
face as practicable. A detailed drawing of the support system shall be
available close to the tunnel face for reference.
g) Temporary support may be required to the face during manual excavation.

The type of support to be provided must suit the ground conditions and be
non-objected by the Engineer. The method of support should be included in
the non-objected NATM method statement.
h) Where the excavation is to be discontinued for any period of time, the

excavated tunnel shall be adequately supported, and the face shall also be
supported in such a manner that ground movement is prevented.
10.1.2 Excavation Method and Equipment
(1) Rock excavation shall be performed by using road header, excavator or breaker,
expansive chemical agents etc. depending upon the ground conditions and site
constraints. The method of excavation shall be Non-objected by the Engineer.
(2) Road header shall have transverse type of cutter head and shall be capable of
working in the type of rocks likely to be encountered in the tunnel excavation.
10.2 Disposal of Excavated Material
Surplus excavated material shall be treated as Clients property. The Contractor shall only be
able to dispose of surplus spoil in the manner non-objected by the Engineer. Disposal of all
spoil shall be in the contract sum and any associated costs shall be at no additional cost to
the Contract. Alternatively, at the non-objection of the Engineer, surplus spoil may be used
in the reclamation works.
The muck/spoil that is acceptable to be used elsewhere in the works or can be used at a
later stage in the Works, shall be temporarily stockpiled in a dumpsite proposed by the
Contractor and non-objected by the Engineer and the concerned regulating authorities.
78 | P a g e
The muck/spoil, which is not acceptable or cannot be accommodated for use in the Works
or cannot be made use of by the Contractor for his own purpose, shall be disposed of in
spoil dumps or elsewhere as approved by the Engineer/concerned parties and regulating
authorities.
10.3 Excavation for Contractor's Convenience
Excavations for the Contractor's own use and convenience shall conform in every respect
with the Employers Requirements. For this purpose, the Contractor shall submit detailed
proposals to the Engineer for obtaining his Notice to Proceed. The proposals shall include
the Contractor's method of backfilling and reinstatement.
10.4 Definition of Excavation Profile
(1) The finished tunnel profiles as shown on the Employer’s indicative Tender Drawings
are only for information and the concept adopted is shown in the following Figure
3.9.4 below.
(2) Depending on the quality of the rock/ground, the proposed theoretical excavation
line shall consider the applicable deformation tolerances so that the as-built tunnel
doesn’t infringe the required finished tunnel profile.
(3) The proposed theoretical excavation line shall also consider the proposed
construction tolerances (as-built tolerances) so that the as-built tunnel doesn’t
infringe the required finished tunnel profile.
(4) Deformation tolerances (including the tunnel convergence and ground relaxation)
are to be proposed by the Contractor, based on detailed analysis so as to contain the
ground surface settlements and distortions to protect the EBS against damage and
to comply all the Contract provisions in this respect, for obtaining a Notice to
Proceed from the Engineer.
(5) The actual deformations (including tunnel convergence and ground relaxation)
during tunnel construction shall be contained within the proposed deformation
tolerances and the adjustments made to the tunnel support and excavation
sequence etc. The tunnel excavation shall ensure that the actual deformations do not
exceed the tolerances that have been agreed by the Engineer.
(6) The Contractor shall contain the actual construction tolerances during construction
within his proposed construction tolerances.
79 | P a g e
Figure 10.1 - Definition of Deformation and Construction Tolerances
10.5 Method of Profile Control
10.5.1 General
(1) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the finished tunnel profile
including the installation of structural fire protection complies with the Project
schedule of dimensions and all other requirements of the project including the
kinematic envelope for the safe passage of vehicles, installed M&E and Fire safety
systems. The final tunnel finished profile shall be Non-objected by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall propose a methodology for the systematic checking of the tunnel
geometry and finished profile. This methodology will have a Notice to Proceed from
the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall use advance surveying techniques and data processing to
establish the required “finished tunnel profile” and define a method of marking out
areas of deviation from the required “finished tunnel profile” with a Notice to
10.5.2 Execution
(1) The Contractor shall determine the excavation sequences and the ground support
categories, considering the ground stand-up time and groundwater infiltration as
defined in the non-objected Geotechnical Interpretative Report completed by the
80 | P a g e
Contractor. This work includes the temporary support to facilitate excavation and
support to the full final opening dimensions.
(2) The Contractor shall construct sequentially excavated tunnels and underground
openings in accordance with the concepts of the New Austrian Tunnelling Method
(NATM) of convergence/confinement. Initial or temporary ground support shall be
placed to attain stress equilibrium ceasing ground movement following excavation.
Use of NATM may require oversizing the opening to allow access for the
Contractor’s equipment and personnel.
(3) The Contractor shall provide safe workspaces, access, and temporary platforms at
all times.
(4) Necessary equipment in working order shall be present at site at all times for
installation of support, face support, contingency procedures, and other approved
measures.
(5) NATM excavation may only commence following completion of ground

improvement to form stable ground. Ground improvement methods shall be
determined by the Contractor and shall be based on the ground conditions as
detailed in the non-objected Geotechnical Interpretative Report completed by the
Contractor.
(6) The Contractor shall perform sequential construction in a manner that minimizes
ground movement in front of and surrounding the excavation and settlements of
structures and utilities above and in the vicinity of the excavation.
(7) The Contractor shall excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions and tolerances, as
shown in the Non-objected NATM design which includes tolerances and
deformations to accommodate initial support and final lining system.
(8) The Contractor shall assess all ground and groundwater conditions, ground
movement, and lining deflection at all times during the sequential excavation period
and react proactively to all indicators of unsafe conditions.
(9) The Contractor shall open up a new excavation round only following the complete
installation of necessary initial support elements of the previous round and for a
length not exceeding the maximum length of unsupported excavation indicated for
the respective ground support category.
(10) Contingency procedures shall be implemented as warranted by the actual ground

conditions encountered and in addition to regular measures established by
submittals for sequential excavation and support operations.
81 | P a g e
(11) In case of emergency or work stoppage likely to endanger excavation or

adjacent/overlying structures, the Contractor shall continuously maintain full work
force 24 hours per day including weekends and holidays until emergency or
hazardous conditions no longer jeopardize stability and safety of the structures.
(12) The Contractor shall document stability of the final excavated opening (full cross-
section) by examining data from the installed Geotechnical Instrumentation.
(13) The Contractor shall prove the absence of any continuing and significant deflection
or increase of stress before installing the final structural lining.
(14) Initial and temporary ground support shall be designed by the Contractor and may
consist of reinforced shotcrete with ground support elements, steel pipe, reinforced
concrete pipe, or concrete segments.
(15) The Contractor shall install temporary ground support elements to support ground
continuously in a manner that prevents loss of ground and maintains stability of the
excavated perimeter and headings and in accordance with approved methods
statements.
(16) The Contractor shall install ground support in accordance with methods statements
non-objected by the Engineer as soon as practical after excavation and spoil removal
at the face.
(17) Changes or modification to the excavation sequence and/or ground support shall
not be permitted without prior non-objection of the Engineer or in the case of an
Emergency such as an immediate safety issue.
(18) The Contractor shall carry out monitoring and instrumentation to observe the
ground behaviour, to verify the performance of the ground support, to assist in the
proper timing of the closure of the ground support ring, and to further aid in the
selection of ground support.
(19) The Contractor shall install ground support to achieve safety of the work and
personnel and to permit the openings to remain stable until the final structural
lining is installed. Working beneath unsupported ground shall not be permitted for
obvious safety reasons.
(20) The Contractor shall maintain a horizontal probe, parallel to the alignment of the
opening, a minimum of 5 m forward of the furthermost advanced excavated face.
The purpose of the probe is to detect geological features, water bearing strata loose
or soft ground, or other potentially problematic ground conditions.
82 | P a g e
(21) The Contractor shall drill probe holes ahead of the advancing tunnel face as
required. The Contractor shall perform probe hole drilling using a standard
hydraulic percussion drill. Measure the rate of penetration to determine changes in
the resistance of the ground to penetration. The Contractor shall stop drilling at
regular intervals to determine the rate of water inflow.
(22) Ground shall be fully supported during the last work shift prior to weekends,
holidays not worked, and shutdowns. During shutdowns, the tunnel face shall be
positively secured. The securing of the tunnel face shall include a means to prevent
the ingress of water and face instability.
(23) The Contractor shall maintain suitable experienced personnel on duty to monitor
conditions that might threaten the stability of the excavation whenever the tunnel
excavation is suspended or shutdown.
10.6 Construction Tolerance
10.6.1 Tolerances for Lining
The actual thickness of the final support shall not be allowed to be less than the designed
thickness of the final support unless non-objected by the Engineer. To achieve this
requirement, no support elements such as primary shotcrete ( initial support), rock bolts
and steel ribs etc. shall penetrate into the theoretical outer boundary of the final support
(inner lining), as shown on the construction drawings.
10.6.2 Over- Break

(1) Over break is the space created when the ground breaks beyond the theoretical
excavation line. Unavoidable over-break may be caused by unfavourable geological
conditions or poor workmanship. In the event of excessive over-break, support shall
be installed immediately as required to stabilize the ground. The Engineer shall be
informed immediately and the remedial works shall be proposed by the Contractor
for obtaining a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer.
(2) The remedial works shall be executed before further advance of the face unless
agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Where over break occurs more than 150 mm beyond the theoretical excavation line,
the Engineer will inspect the area and decide if shotcrete or concrete shall be
provided as backfill. In areas where there is to be a concrete lining or concrete
structure adjoining the rock, the over break backfill shall be of the same quality as
that required for the lining or structure. The remedial works for the over-break
(whether avoidable or unavoidable) shall be carried out by the Contractor at no
extra cost to the Employer.
83 | P a g e
10.7 Contractor’s Submission
The following shall be submitted to the Engineer for his Non-objection
(1) The Contractor shall submit a method statement to the Engineer for non-objection
for all NATM tunnelling works that includes detailed descriptions, shop drawings,
design calculations, manufacturer’s literature and other pertinent information
covering proposed equipment and materials to be used including but not limited to
the following:
i. Size, sequence, and timing of excavation of individual headings, including

planned round lengths, excavation methods to be employed, materials to be
utilize, equipment, and implementation procedures.
ii. Sequencing and methods required to create the NATM opening in the TBM
tunnel or shaft.
iii. Design and implementation of a temporary bracing system inside the TBM
tunnel or shaft when the opening is created.
iv. Design and construction of the concrete collar inside the tunnel or shaft
providing stability of the tunnel or shaft lining after the temporary bracing is
removed.
v. Types of initial ground support elements to be installed in each individual

heading
vi. Identify the length of unsupported sections and time for application of
support elements
vii. Details on excavation and removal of all temporary initial support as

adjacent individual headings are advanced to progressively open up the full
excavation cross-section
viii. Survey methods to include type and location of horizontal and vertical
control, procedures, frequency, and equipment
(2) The Contractor shall submit the following Contingency Procedures to the Engineer
for non-objection:
(i) At least 30 days before start of NATM excavation, the Contractor shall
submit contingency procedures that address particular ground and site
conditions as described in the Contractors non-objected Geotechnical
Interpretative Report.
84 | P a g e
(ii) As a minimum, the contingency procedures shall include the following

information:
i. Names and qualification of personnel responsible for implementing

contingency procedures
ii. Descriptions of conditions considered to require contingency

measures
iii. Materials to be used for contingency measures, including ground

support and formation grouting
iv. Methods and equipment to be used to implement contingency

measures, including both ground support and formation grouting.
v. Specific plans outlining measures to be undertaken in the event that

the following conditions occur;
(1) Excessive over break
(2) Face or rock instability
(3) Deformation beyond expected values
(4) Excessive groundwater infiltration rate and/or quantity
(5) Methods to verify successful implementation of contingency

measures
(6) Arrangements for monitoring conditions during longer

stoppages such as weekends and holidays as well as directed
stoppages
(7) Procedures detailing measures to be applied for the

resumption of excavation operations after stoppages
(3) The Contractor shall submit a weekly report to the Engineer for information on all
geologic features encountered during NATM excavation operations in the relevant
period. The geologic report shall include information on rock type, groundwater
conditions, average excavation progress, and other relevant observations. The
geologic report shall also include a summary of information on the instrument
readings in relation to the excavation performance.
(4) The Contractor shall submit, but not be limited to providing the following
information to the Engineer for obtaining Notice to Proceed, at least 60 days before
the commencement of any NATM tunnel work.
85 | P a g e
• The name and qualification of the independent geotechnical engineer (who

shall be required to be deployed for the Works by the Contractor for advising
the support requirements) proposed by the Contractor for Notice to Proceed
from Engineer.
• Relevant training certificates and work experience of the shotcrete nozzle

men and other personnel proposed to be deployed by the Contractor.
11. NATM TUNNEL SUPPORT
11.1 General
(1) The type and amount of tunnel support to be installed immediately after excavation
is directly related to the rock classification as established by the Contractor in his
design. The standard initial support associated with the established rock
classification system shall be proposed by the Contractor for obtaining a Notice to
However, as a consequence of variations from the anticipated rock conditions the

standard support systems as shown on the Construction drawings ( prepared by the
Contractor and non-objected Notice given by the Engineer) for each rock class may
require modifications and adjustments during construction for which a further
Notice to Proceed for the revised scheme shall be obtained from the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure that support elements are installed or applied in such a
manner, time and sequence as to prevent disintegration and loosening of the rock
mass surrounding the excavated tunnel.
11.2 Initial Tunnel Support
(1) The initial tunnel support will generally consist of the following:
• Steel ribs or lattice arches and wire/reinforcement mesh sprayed with

shotcrete to an appropriate thickness
• Shotcrete with wire/reinforcement mesh or fibre and rock-bolts/rock-

dowels
• A combination of the above.
(2) Wherever ground conditions require pre-support, the contractor shall provide the
same by way of inserting an ‘umbrella’ type forepoling either by installing a pipe
roof that will be closed poled or spiling with grouted pipes or bars depending on the
ground stability.
86 | P a g e
(3) Where the water in-flow into the excavation is expected, ground treatment such as
grouting, ground freezing etc. shall be done by the Contractor before commencing
the excavation. However, the localised dewatering in the tunnel face can be carried
out by either drainage pipes inserted into the face or a mild vacuum system duly
ensuring that it doesn’t lead to unacceptable ground surface settlements/distortions
adversely affecting the EBS.
(4) The initial Support will be monitored continually for settlements/deformations

throughout the stabilisation process. Other monitoring shall include force in rock
bolts and stresses/strains in shotcrete lining.
(5) The initial support system including the design of the supporting pattern with
respect to each Rock Class shall be determined and proposed by the Contractor for
obtaining a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer before commencing the works.
11.3 Final Tunnel Support:
The final tunnel support shall comprise of Concrete lining (or reinforced concrete lining).
(1) Concrete lining; The Contractor shall design concrete linings to meet the
requirements of the Contract Specifications pertaining to concrete.
(2) Preparation of surfaces; The surface against which concrete is to be placed shall be
cleaned of loose material, dirt, oil and grease. A waterproofing membrane shall be
placed between the initial support and the final concrete lining. No concreting of
final support shall take place before inspection of the initial support surface and the
waterproofing membrane by the Engineer.
(3) Placing of concrete; Concrete shall be placed so that the space between the lining
form and the surface against which concrete is to be placed, is filled as completely as
possible, to avoid any voids formation especially in the crown area. After the placed
concrete attains a 28 day strength, the interface between the concrete lining and the
initial support shall be contact grouted without damaging the waterproofing
membrane.
11.4 Sprayed Concrete (shotcrete)
11.4.1 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for non-objection prior to
proceeding with preconstruction testing:
(i) Product Data: For manufactured materials and products, generally including
reinforcement, anchorage studs, forming accessories and sprayed concrete
materials.
87 | P a g e
(ii) Material Test Reports: For sprayed concrete materials.
(iii) Sprayed concrete design strengths according to BS EN 14487-1.
(iv) Mix design for each sprayed concrete type. Indicate wet mix process or dry mix
process and type of reinforcement for each mix design.
(v) Method Statement which includes at a minimum the following:
1. Specifications and descriptions of equipment to be used
2. Application method
3. Batching method
4. Description of the preconstruction testing programme including, at a

minimum, a drawing of the proposed test panel, locations and method of
anchoring test panels, date and time for test panel concreting, method of
spraying each test panel (e.g., vertical, horizontal, using special equipment)
and number of test panels to be completed for each method
(vi) Samples of all sprayed concrete ingredients and product supplier data
(vii) Statement of Qualifications and Certification for those performing the Work as per
ACI CP-60(02), Craftsman Workbook for ACI Certification of Shotcrete Nozzleman:
1. Nozzlemen
2. Supervisor(s)
3. Name(s) and experience record of the firm(s) performing the work
4. References
11.4.2 Performance & design of Shotcrete.
(a) The sprayed concrete shall be designed to Energy Absorption Class E700 (700
Joules) in accordance with EN 14487-1. This is equivalent to 280J at 40 mm for
ASTM C1550.
(b) The selection of sprayed concrete thickness for a given tunnel section shall be in
conjunction with the selected ground support category.
(c) Water leakage through the sprayed concrete lining shall not cause uncontrolled
groundwater drawdown in the surrounding ground.
11.4.3 Quality Assurance
(1) Nozzle operator shall be certified as per ACI CP-60(02), Craftsman Workbook for
ACI Certification of Shotcrete Nozzleman.
88 | P a g e
(2) Nozzle operator shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience on projects of similar
nature and the work should be performed under the supervision of a
foreman/supervisor with a minimum of 3 years’ experience on projects of similar
nature.
(3) Before conducting field trials, the Contractor must submit to the Engineer for non-
objection written evidence of the qualifications of the nozzle operator and
supervisor.
(4) Each nozzle operator shall demonstrate, using the specified material and proposed
equipment, acceptable proficiency in applying sprayed concrete uniformly in both
the vertical and overhead orientations.
(5) Proficiency shall be demonstrated through the use of vertical and overhead test
panels that reflect the actual jobsite conditions.
11.4.4 Products, Materials & Additive’s
Placing Equipment
(a) Sprayed concrete placing equipment shall be capable of introducing materials to the
delivery hose at a uniform rate with material exiting from the nozzle at a velocity
and a consistency that will ensure adhesion to the surface with minimum rebound
and maximum density.
(b) For dry mix application, water supply system shall be capable of supplying the
necessary amount of water through a manually operated liquid injection system
(water ring) so that the nozzle operator can easily control amount of water. If
variations in water pressure cause wet/dry fluctuations at the nozzle, sprayed
concrete application should be terminated until the situation is resolved.
Admixtures
Admixtures shall have the required consistence for spraying in accordance with BS
EN 14487-1 and have previous acceptable performance on similar projects with
sprayed concrete. Admixtures shall not contain water-soluble chlorides or materials
corrosive to steel nor be subject to other detrimental effects such as cracking,
spalling, or debonding.
Silica Fume
Silica fume shall have previous acceptable performance on similar projects with
sprayed concrete.
Fibre Reinforcement
89 | P a g e
(a) Sprayed concrete may be fibre reinforced. Fibre reinforced sprayed concrete
shall contain steel fibres in compliance with BS EN 14889-1 or collated
fibrillated polypropylene fibres.
(b) Steel fibres shall have bent or deformed ends or be continuously deformed
throughout.
(c) Collated fibrillated polypropylene shall be a collated fibrillated

polypropylene pre-twisted fibrous bundle. Monofilament polypropylene or
polyester in any form will not be acceptable substitutes for collated
fibrillated polypropylene fibres.
11.4.5 Execution
(1) General
a) All surfaces to be in contact with sprayed concrete must be free from dust,
oil, grease or any other foreign substances that may interfere with the bond
of the material.
b) Sprayed concrete shall be placed and protected according to ACI 305 when
hot-weather conditions and high temperatures would seriously impair
quality and strength of sprayed concrete. The ingredients shall be cooled
before mixing to maintain sprayed concrete temperature at time of
placement below 38 degrees C.
(2) Preliminary Mixes and Pre-construction Testing.
a) The Contractor shall perform accelerator compatibility tests of the proposed

sprayed concrete mix designs to determine cement and additives to be used
in the subsequent field tests.
b) Following successful preliminary mix tests, the Contractor shall conduct

field preconstruction tests by constructing sprayed concrete test panels, as
indicated as described herein Section 3.3 and at least 30 days prior to the
actual application of sprayed concrete for the Works.
c) The preconstruction testing of mixes shall be carried out in accordance with

the requirements of BS EN 14487-1, Table 9, Inspection Category 3 for
Strengthening of Ground.
d) Testing shall be carried out on a sufficient quantity of sprayed concrete in

order to reach a uniform flow. It shall be demonstrated that the
requirements can be met before the start of execution.
90 | P a g e
e) The Contractor shall perform field preconstruction tests for each approved
mix design to demonstrate the capability of equipment, workmanship, and
materials under field conditions. The mixes selected for preconstruction
tests shall be confined to those approved by the Engineer following
preliminary mix testing. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the
opportunity to witness the production and testing of core samples.
(3) Sprayed Concrete Panel
a) All sprayed concrete test panels shall be constructed at locations non-

objected by the Engineer by each qualified nozzleman using equipment,
materials, mix design, and procedures submitted and non-objected by the
Engineer. Each nozzleman shall construct one test panel for each mix design
and one panel for each spraying position. At a minimum, one horizontal
overhead and one vertical spraying position shall be completed for each
proposed mix. Nozzlemen will not be permitted to apply sprayed concrete in
the field for any spraying position that is not tested.
b) The Contractor shall produce test panels before sprayed concrete placement
according to requirements in ACI 506.2 and ASTM C1140 for each design
mix, shooting orientation, and nozzle operator. Produce test panels with
minimum dimensions of 600 by 600 by 90 mm. From each test panel, the
Engineer shall obtain six test specimens.
c) The Contractor shall perform preconstruction testing and inspections to

include the following:
(i) Test each set of un-reinforced specimens for compressive strength

according to BS EN 14487-1 or ASTM C1604.
(ii) Samples taken from test panel shall achieve a mean core grade of 2.0,
in accordance with Section 1.7 of ACI 506.2, "Shotcrete Core Grades".
In the event of failure, nozzleman shall be permitted one retest. Any
nozzleman failing the second test shall not be permitted on the
project.
(iii) The average compressive strength of all core samples from each test
panel shall test to at least 100 percent of the strength specified for
each specified age.
(4) Field quality Control
91 | P a g e
a) Control testing of the sprayed concrete shall be carried out in accordance

with the requirement of BS EN 14487-1, Table 12 for Inspection Category 3
on test panels completed as part of the ongoing work.
b) The Contractor shall produce test panels, reinforced as in the structure, for
each sprayed concrete mix at a frequency defined in BS EN 14487-1, Table
12 for Inspection Category 3. The test panels shall be produced with
minimum dimensions of 600 by 600 by 90 mm. From each test panel, testing
agency shall obtain required test specimens.
c) The Contractor shall conduct one Temperature Test per hour in accordance
with ASTM C1064 when air temperature is 35 degrees C and above, and one
test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d) The Engineer may direct the Contractor to perform additional sampling and
testing at no additional cost if any of the following occurs:
i. Core sample fails to show adequate bond with the ground.
ii. Core sample fails to show adequate bond between layers.
iii. Core sample shows obvious defects.
iv. Core sample does not meet the minimum strength requirements.
v. The Contractor shall install non-corrosive measuring pins at no greater

than 1.5 metre centres in all directions to allow measurement of sprayed
concrete thickness.
(5) Acceptance Criteria
(a) If the average strength of three cores from one area is less than the greater
of 85 percent of the specified 28-day strength or 100 percent of the design
strength, corrective work shall be performed, including application of
additional thickness of sprayed concrete or removal and replacement of the
defective sprayed concrete. Such corrective work shall be performed at no
additional cost.
(b) Core Sampling: Cores shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C1604 at locations randomly selected and at a frequency determined
by the Engineer if any of the field quality control testing in non-compliant.
Cores shall have a length to diameter ratio of 1.0 or greater and shall be
taken when the sprayed concrete is a minimum of 4 days old. If any cores
taken show inadequate bond with the substrate, or between layers, show
obvious defects or fail to meet specified compressive strength, two
92 | P a g e
additional cores shall be taken within approximately 5 feet (1.5 metres) of

the unacceptable core. If either of these cores show similar defects, the
Engineer shall direct the contractor to remove the sprayed concrete in the
surrounding area and replace it at no additional cost.
(c) Sprayed concrete which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation,

honeycombing, delamination or cracking, poor bond between layers or with
the substrate or which fails to meet the specified compressive strength shall
be regarded as defective sprayed concrete. The Engineer reserves the right
to order the removal of the defective sprayed concrete and its replacement
with acceptable sprayed concrete or the placement of additional sprayed
concrete layers to compensate for the inadequacy of the in-situ sprayed
concrete material. The additional sprayed concrete shall be placed at no
additional cost.
11.5 Rock Bolts and Dowels
11.5.1 Materials
(1) Rock bolts and dowels shall be manufactured from hot rolled deformed bars with a
minimum steel grade of Fe 415, with the exception of areas to be excavated
subsequently where glass fibre reinforced resin rods shall be used.
(2) Face plates, hemispherical washers and nuts for rock bolts shall be manufactured to
suit the loading requirements.
(3) Resin grout shall be a commercially produced epoxy product in capsule form with
both fast and slow setting times as applicable especially formulated for use with
rock bolts or dowels, and transported, stored and utilised in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
(4) Cement grout shall be a commercially prepared product in capsule form especially
produced for use with rock bolts or dowels. The product shall not contain any
material which could corrode the rock bolts or dowels.
(5) Alternatively, where a pumped cement grout is used for the installation of rock bolts
or dowels, the materials shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
Standards.
11.5.2 Manufacture of Rock bolts
(1) Rock bolts shall be manufactured from high yield deformed bar of appropriate
diameter. The bar length shall be the required length of bar to be bonded to the rock
with a due extra allowance for the cutting length including the threaded portion
93 | P a g e
protruding from the rock as required for installation. One end shall be threaded
with a coarse cut thread which shall not reduce the overall specified bar diameter
by more than 3 mm. The other end shall be chamfered to facilitate installation.
(2) Face plates shall be of adequate size and thickness with a centralised slot to suit the
dimensions of the rock bolts.
11.5.3 Manufacture of Dowels
(1) Dowels shall be manufactured from high yield deformed bar, with the exception of
areas to be excavated subsequently where glass fibre reinforced resin rods shall be
used.
(2) Dowels shall be either straight bars or shall have the protruding end bent to
facilitate the specified connection between the rock and surrounding concrete or
sprayed concrete when so required.
(3) Dowels for installation with resin or cement cartridges shall be threaded at one end
sufficiently for attachment of the installation equipment. The other end shall be
chamfered to facilitate installation.
11.5.4 Testing of Rock Bolts
(1) Prior to installation of rock bolts in the Works, the Contractor shall carry out a
series of tests as agreed with the Engineer to prove the efficacy of the system and
the Contractor's capability to correctly install and tension the rock bolts.
(2) The tests shall demonstrate:
• Number of resin cartridges required to provide the end anchorage with an

applied load equal to the bar's characteristic strength and taking into
account the over-length variation of holes.
• Number of resin or cement cartridges to fill the annulus around the rock bolt
or dowel over the length of the hole between the anchorage and collar of the
hole.
• Strength of the resin grout to fully anchor the bars up to the characteristic
strength of the rock bolts.
• Capacity of the equipment to install the longest fully grouted rock bolts.
• Equipment for tensioning the bolts to the specified loads.
• Capability of each crew to correctly install and tension the rock bolts.
(3) The Contractor shall undertake the tests with the equipment to be used in the
Works.
94 | P a g e
(4) The Contractor shall provide a suitably calibrated direct tensioning jack and/or load
cell of capacities in excess of the characteristic strength of the rock bolts. Loads and
bolt elongations shall be recorded during the tests.
11.5.5 Installation of Rock bolts
(1) The method of installation and tensioning of bolts must have a Notice to Proceed
from the Engineer prior to commencement.
(2) Unless otherwise proven acceptable by site trials, the rock bolts shall be installed in
holes of diameter 10 mm to 15 mm greater than the maximum diameter of the rock
bolt. The holes shall not be more than 100 mm longer than the grouted length of the
rock bolt unless otherwise proven acceptable by site trials. A sufficient number of
cartridges shall be used to ensure the annulus around the rock bolt is completely
filled over the full length of the hole.
(3) The effectiveness of the rock bolt installation during tunnel driving shall be checked
by testing a minimum of 1 per 100 installed bolts to a load corresponding to 80% of
yield load. Should the assemblies fail at tensions less than 80% of the yield load of
the bolt, the Contractor shall investigate the cause and take such remedial measures
as may be necessary. Tests shall continue thereafter at a rate of 1 per 50 bolts until
the Engineer is satisfied that the cause of failure has been identified and adequately
addressed.
(4) Regular calibration of tensioning devices shall be carried out by the Contractor.
11.5.6 Installation of Dowels
(1) The method of installation of dowels shall have a Notice to Proceed from the
Engineer prior to commencement.
(2) Holes of diameter 10mm to 15mm greater than the maximum diameter of the dowel
shall be drilled and cleaned. The gauged amount of pumped cement grout or
cartridges of resin/ cement grout shall then be inserted and the bar driven firmly
into the hole. If pumped cement grout is used, the grout shall be inserted using a
tremmie pipe pushed down to the bottom of the hole and withdrawn slowly as the
grout is placed. After installation the bar shall be vibrated for a short period to
ensure the complete distribution of the grout around the full length of the bar.
Additional grout shall be added to make up any shortfall. Where required, grouting
of the hole shall be carried out in stages to allow the flow of grout into cavities, each
stage being topped up by the following stage.
11.5.7 Records
95 | P a g e
For each rock bolt or dowel installed, the following information shall be recorded:
• reference number;
• type of installation;
• name of person taking record;
• date of drilling and installation;
• length and orientation of the drilled hole;
• length of installed rock bolt or dowel;
• tension applied to the rock bolt
• details of any tests carried out.
11.5.8 Lattice Girders
11.5.8.1 General
This sub-section applies to the supply and installation of the lattice girders required and
used as support in underground excavations. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
the design and manufacture of lattice girders.
11.5.8.2 General Requirements
(1) Lattice Girders shall be effective as initial support immediately after excavation and
shall subsequently act as reinforcement and load distributing members for the
initial shotcrete lining.
(2) The lattice girders shall be manufactured to meet the geometrical requirements for
the excavation geometries including the construction tolerances for each rock class.
(3) During transport, storage and handling of lattice girders, adequate measures shall
be taken by the Contractor to prevent their bending, scraping, overstressing or any
other damage. The damaged pieces shall not be used in the works.
11.5.8.3 Submittals
Shop Drawings for the fabrication of the lattice girders shall be submitted for Notice to
Proceed from the Engineer prior to the commencement of the work.
The submission shall comprise the following:
• Complete fabrication details of the lattice girders.
• Installation procedures and layout.
• Details of joints, connections, spacers, geometry etc.
96 | P a g e
• Certificates of compliance for the materials.
11.5.8.4 Design of Lattice Girders
(1) Lattice girders are three-dimensional, lightweight steel frames manufactured of

round or corrugated steel bars in compliance with the required excavation
geometry of the tunnel.
(2) Lattice girders shall consist of three primary bars, connected by stiffening elements
as per the design. They shall be designed so as to:
a) Facilitate shotcrete penetration into and behind the girder, thereby

minimizing the creation of projection shadows.
b) Provide good quality bonding between the steel and shotcrete, to form a
composite structure in the sense of a continuous reinforced shotcrete lining.
(3) To ensure stability against buckling, the maximum spacing between stiffening
elements shall be less than three times the cross-sectional height of the girder.
(4) In case of fabrication on site, the Contractor shall submit a detailed method
statement for obtaining a Notice to Proceed from the Engineer.
(5) The Contractor shall submit related detailed drawings of the lattice girders, showing
also the number of sections in the frame and details of the connection between the
sections. The details with appropriate calculation shall be submitted to the Engineer
for obtaining a Notice to Proceed.
11.5.8.5 Materials
(1) Each of the primary bars of a lattice girder segment shall be composed of only one
piece of high strength steel having yield strength of 500 MPa or more.
(2) The connection elements at the end of lattice girder segments shall be constructed
of angled structural steel having yield strength of 250 MPa or more, or of welded flat
steel ensuring similar strength characteristics.
11.5.8.6 Installation of Lattice Girders
(1) Lattice girder shall be installed to conform to the excavated shape. The geometry of
Lattice Girders shall take into account the permissible inaccuracy of construction
and tolerances of materials.
(2) Lattice girders shall be erected to the lines and levels as required. The exact
excavation levels will be determined by the Contractor suiting his equipment and
construction method subject to a Notice to Proceed by the Engineer.
97 | P a g e
(3) Lattice girders shall be secured by use of spacers as well as temporary wood
blocking or other appropriate means to maintain position during shotcreting.
(4) Butt plates for steel girder segments and expansion unit in invert shall be provided
as required. Tight connection of all elements shall be ensured such that the static
efficiency of the cross section is maintained.
(5) Lattice girders shall be embedded in shotcrete, in order to get contact between rock
and lattice girder by a solid shotcrete packing which shall have a minimum cover to
steel of 20 mm.
(6) The lattice girders shall be erected perpendicular to the tunnel axis.
11.6 Fore poling
11.6.1 General
Forepoling is a pre-excavation support element that may be required for tunnel excavation
works. Forepoling shall be applied in rock and soil conditions, which tend to produce over
break, collapses or material inflows immediately following excavation. Forepoling may be
applied locally or systematically as per the requirement for the safety of the works and to
prevent over breaking. All forepolings must be fully grouted.
11.6.2 Material
(1) In case Boreholes are stable Steel pipes with a minimum outer diameter of 40 mm
shall be used. Wall thicknesses of steel pipes shall not be less than 4 mm. Dowels
(spiles) consisting of deformed high yield steel bars of grade Fe 500 with a
minimum diameter of 32 mm may also be used instead of steel pipes, where found
suitable.
(2) In case Boreholes are not stable Self-drilling bolts shall be used as forepoling
elements where stability of the predrilled boreholes cannot be achieved, due to the
encountered ground conditions. Self-drilling bolts shall be installed only if non-
objected by the Engineer and shall have a yield load of at least 200 KN. The grout
used for self-drilling bolts shall be in accordance with the requirements specified by
the bolt manufacturer. Grouting shall be carried out simultaneously with drilling to
achieve a better grouting effect along the bolt.
11.6.3 Installation
(1) Fore poling shall be applied as shown on the drawings that have a Notice to Proceed
from the Engineer.
98 | P a g e
(2) Fore poling elements at 300 to 500 mm centres shall be inserted into the predrilled
holes (steel pipes or dowels) at the face or drilled into the face (self-drilling bolts)
towards the unexcavated ground.
(3) The length of forepoling elements shall be according to the design and drawings and
shall be at least 1.50 meter longer than the excavation round length.
(4) Forepoling shall be used together with lattice girders or any other steel support
system.
(5) Grouting of fore poling pipes and dowels shall be done with cement mortar, either
before or after their insertion, as per the approved scheme.
(6) Fore poling shall be required to be properly supported by the lattice girder/steel
sets and the shotcrete above the lattice girder/steel sets. Therefore, shotcreting of
the gap between lattice girder/steel sets and rock in the portions of forepoling shall
be completed only after the installation of fore poling.
11.6.4 Pipe Roof
A pipe roof is a special type of long forepoling (typically 9 – 15 m). The forepoling elements
shall consist of steel pipes with a minimum outer diameter of 76 mm and a minimum yield
load of 1200 KN. The length and spacing of the pipes shall be as per the design and
drawings and as agreed by the Engineer. The pipes shall be grouted with cement mortar.
11.7 Contact or Cavity Grouting
11.7.1 General
(1) Materials used for contact or gravity grouting shall comply with the requirements
stated in Section 3.8.5 of this specification.
(2) Grout holes for contact grouting shall be drilled through any backfill outside the
pipe and initial supports, where present, and into the ground.
(3) Grout holes for contact grouting shall be placed at a spacing not to exceed 5 metres
unless otherwise non-objected by the Engineer.
(4) For contact grouting, the maximum sustained grouting pressure shall be no more
than 70 KPa above the maximum anticipated external hydrostatic pressure at the
injection point, unless otherwise proposed by the Contractor, with the Engineer's
concurrence.
(5) Grout Mixes: Develop one or more grout mixes designed to completely fill the voids
and to provide acceptable strength. Make four samples of each proposed grout mix
99 | P a g e
and determine 24-hour and 28-day strength in accordance with ASTM C39 or C109.
All grout mix proportions shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer.
11.7.2 Contact and Cavity Grouting Equipment
(1) Two pressure gauges shall be provided, one at the grout pump and one at the collar
of each hole being grouted. The accuracy of the gauges shall be periodically checked
with an accurately calibrated pressure gauge. A minimum of one spare pressure
gauge shall be available on site at all times.
(2) Suitable stop valves shall be provided at the collar of each hole for use in
maintaining pressure as required until the grout has set.
(3) The grouting equipment shall be provided with a meter to determine the volume of
grout injected.
(4) The grouting equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory operating condition

throughout the course of the work to ensure continuous and efficient performance
during grouting operations.
(5) Grout hoses shall have an inside diameter not less than 35 mm nor greater than 50
mm and capable of withstanding the maximum water and grout pressures to be
used.
11.7.3 Cavity grouting for Tunnel Linings.
(1) For voids or cavities located outside tunnel or shaft linings (either segmental linings
or in situ concrete linings) linings or other underground structures, the Contractor
shall fill all cavities, voids and spaces remaining unfilled.
(2) Grout for cavity grouting shall be as described in Section 3.8 above except where the
Contractor may propose for the Engineer’s non-objection that large voids are filled
with other materials. The grout consistency shall be sufficiently fluid, but not more
so, to ensure that the grout flows freely under low (less than 100 kN/m2) pressure
into all parts of the space to be filled via grout pipes or grout holes provided for the
purpose. Where appropriate, vent pipes shall be provided extending to the highest
point of cavities.
(3) For in-situ concrete linings, cavity grouting shall be carried out not less than 28 days
after a section of concrete lining has been poured.
(4) Holes shall be drilled through the concrete tunnel lining and into the cavity. The
location and spacing of holes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(5) Holes shall be re-drilled and re-grouted and further holes drilled until the lining is
deemed to be completely grouted by refusal to accept further cavity grout.
100 | P a g e
(6) The Contractor shall ensure that grouting pressures do not result in ground heave
or overstress or distortion of the lining or distortion or damage to other structures.
11.8 Water Tightness of Tunnel
11.8.1 General
The water tightness of the tunnels shall comply with the requirements stipulated in the
Outline Design Specifications.
11.8.2 Waterproofing Membrane
For Non TBM tunnels, waterproof membranes shall consist of an impermeable heat welded
sheet of one of the following materials: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE), soft
Polyethylene Chloride (PVC), Ethylene Copolymerical Bitumen (ECB). The membrane as
supplied shall be of such dimensions and shape as will result in the minimum of on-site
seam welds. The loosely laid PVC sheet shall have a minimum thickness of 2 mm +/- 10%.
11.9 Geological Mapping & Rock Classification
11.9.1 General
(1) The purpose of engineering geological mapping is to record rock and rock mass
conditions as encountered during excavation. The mapping and documentation shall
enable the verification of the suitability of the designed support and excavation
measures, the prediction of rock mass conditions ahead as well as the interpretation
of results of the geotechnical monitoring related with ground deformations.
(2) The mapping and documentation of encountered geological conditions during

excavation shall be based on a uniform legend and shall use uniform terms for the
description of features which need to be recorded.
(3) In general, the mapping shall be performed to a scale of 1:100 or as suitable.
(4) Based on the follow-up mapping a vertical as well as a horizontal cross section shall
be drawn, where the actual mapping results shall be incorporated continuously on a
daily basis.
(5) The vertical section shall be located along the axis of the tunnel. The horizontal
section may be fixed according to the chosen sequence for excavating the tunnel
cross section (full face, top heading - bench etc.). In case the tunnel is excavated by
top heading – bench excavation sequence, the horizontal cross section shall be
drawn at the level of the invert of the top heading. The scale could be between1:200
to 1:500; horizontal and vertical scale shall be the same.
101 | P a g e
11.10 Daily Records
Daily Reports shall be submitted and, in a format, non-objected by the Engineer by 09:00
hrs the following day for information.
12. SAFETY AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
12.1 Safety General
(1) Safety in the underground works shall be in accordance with BS6164:2011 Code of
Practice for Health and Safety in Tunnelling or other local standards at the time of
Contract award. Where discrepancies exist between BS6164 and other local or
regional standards the most onerous requirement shall be used.
(2) All tunnel machinery, with particular TBM’s shall comply with the safety
requirements listed in BS EN 16191:2014 Tunnelling Machinery Safety
Requirements.
(3) Any relaxation to the clause 1 and 2 on this section shall be non-objected by the
Engineer.
13. AS-BUILT SURVEY OF ALIGNMENT
13.1 Objective
As soon as practicable after the completion of the tunnelling, the Contractor shall carry out
an as-built survey of the tunnel alignment. The objectives of the survey are as follows:
(a) To confirm the position of every 5th ring of lining in case of bored tunnel and final
support at every 5m in case of NATM tunnel, with respect to the theoretical
alignment; this includes both vertical and horizontal geometry;
(b) To plot the positions of the rings/tunnel profile at points around the
circumference(intrados) with respect to their theoretical positions;
(c) To produce an accurate record of the position of the tunnel with respect to the local
infrastructure including building, utilities and other sure face physical features;
(d) To verify the finished alignment and profile of the as-constructed tunnel with
respect to the theoretical alignment and design profile to ascertain compliance with
the Contract provisions in this respect.
13.2 Procedure
(1) The Contractor shall carry out the alignment survey and determine the position,
with respect to the theoretical tunnel alignment, of the leading edge of every 5th
ring of tunnel lining (in case of bored tunnel) and finished tunnel profile (in case of
102 | P a g e
NATM tunnel) at not less than 8 points on the circumference/profile. These shall be
as follows:
• tunnel crown;
• tunnel invert;
• axis left;
• axis right;
• 45º above axis left;
• 45º above axis right;
• 45º below axis left;
• 45º below axis right.
(2) The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that the zones where
measurements are required are clear of all construction-related obstructions.
Shafts shall be backfilled in layers not thicker than 250 mm, each layer being
thoroughly compacted with an appropriate compactor. The backfill material shall be
homogenous with no material greater than 25mm in diameter. As far as practicable
all extraneous materials such as steelwork and temporary timbers shall be removed
as the backfilling progresses. Shaft linings shall be left in place to within 2.0mbelow
finished ground level and the site reinstated with suitable granular material
compacted as specified in Earthworks. Details of temporary works left in place shall
be included in the as-built information and drawings. The contractor’s methodology
for reinstatement of the works, infilling of shafts and adits shall be to the non-
objection of the Engineer.
14. GROUND TREATMENT
14.1 General
(1) This Section describes requirements for ground improvement to facilitate launching
and retrieving of the Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM), or any other facility utilizing
grouting techniques, deep soil mixing, jet grouting or other procedures determined
by the Contractor necessary to stabilise subsurface materials or to control the flow
of groundwater into temporary excavations.
(2) The Contractor is responsible for all aspects of the design and implementation of
ground improvement for:
(i) Stability of shaft excavations including walls and bases
103 | P a g e
(ii) Stability of ground during TBM break-in and break-out from shafts where
specified or found necessary
(iii) Groundwater cut-off and inflows into shaft excavations
(3) The work includes mobilising equipment for grouting, determining suitable
grouting procedures and grout mixes and control, containment of grout, and clean
up.
14.2 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for non-objection, a ground treatment
design containing an evaluation of the hydraulic conductivity pre-treatment and the
target permeability after the treatment and drawings showing the proposed
grouting arrangement.
(2) The Contractor shall submit product information for proposed materials to the
Engineer for non-objection. Only non-toxic grouts and other ground treatment
materials are acceptable for use.
(3) The Contractor shall provide a method statement and monitoring plan to the
Engineer for acceptance at least 4 weeks prior to the commencement of the
particular grouting works. The method statement shall include, as a minimum:
• Details of proposed grout mixes, injection pressures and flow rates
• Maximum pressure and maximum volume
• Details of equipment to be used and other resources
• Proposed construction sequence
• Quality control measures with an Inspection and Test Plan as required to

demonstrate compliance with the Specification and the Contractor's design
• Methods for protection of utilities
• Health and safety procedures
• Risk assessment and proposed mitigation measures to reduce the risks to as

low as reasonably practicable
• Material Safety Data sheets indicating mixing, handling, storage, and waste
disposal requirements
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer for information, a daily Ground Treatment
Report to include the hole locations and ground treatment method for each location. Details
shall include the following:
104 | P a g e
• Depth and diameter of drill holes
• Size, type and depth of casing used
• Diameter, sleeved length and un-sleeved length of any tubes installed in drill holes
• Quantity of sleeve grout used (if any)
• Quantity, type, pressure and gel time of grout injected at each injection point, or per
metre length in the case of continuous grouting
• Monitoring and test results as specified
• Evaluations of the permeability post treatment.
15. EXECUTION
15.1 General
(1) Prior to starting work, all sub-surface services/utilities shall be located and
protected and to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities.
(2) Ground treatment, including any drilling works, shall be carried out with the utmost
care to prevent disturbance to the nearby services and property. Care shall be taken
to prevent ground loss or heave.
(3) The minimum offset from any drilled hole to a live utility shall be agreed with the
respective utility owner and be provided within the method statement.
(4) If the Contractor encounters an unforeseen obstruction he shall cease drilling and
inform the Engineer immediately. The methodology for continuing under such
circumstances shall be addressed in the Contractor's method statement.
(5) The Contractor shall establish suitable temporary bench marks for the purpose of
monitoring ground movements during ground treatment. Such bench marks shall be
outside the zone of influence of the ground treatment.
(6) The Contractor shall monitor ground movements due to ground treatment at least
twice a day in accordance with requirements established in the Geotechnical
Instrumentation and Monitoring contained herein.
(7) The maximum limit on surface subsidence or heave due to ground treatment shall
be 50 mm. The Contractor shall establish alarm and action limits to evaluate and
modify ground improvement if required.
(8) In the event that surface movements exceed the specified maximum, the Contractor
shall immediately stop work and propose alternative treatment methods such as,
closer hole spacing, low viscosity grouts, reduced grout pressure, increased relief
holes, etc., for the non-objection by the Engineer.
105 | P a g e
(9) If necessary, the Contractor shall inspect all manholes and inspection pits for
services within 20 metres, with the permission of the appropriate authority, of any
area where injection is taking place to ensure ground modifications effort are not
impacting existing facilities.
(10) Inspection of manholes and inspection pits shall take place a minimum of twice per
week during the period where ground modification is taking place. Should grouting
material be found in any manhole, inspection pit, duct, pipe or other installation, the
Contractor shall, under the direction of the Engineer and with the permission of the
relevant authority, remove ground modification materials. The Contractor shall
propose alternate ground improvement methods to prevent further ground
modification materials from accessing adjacent services.
(11) Proving of the improved ground shall be witnessed by the Engineer and conducted
from within launch a receiving shaft by measuring the flow from a hole drilled
horizontally a distance of 3 metres beyond the outside wall of the temporary shaft.
Calculations shall be submitted for the review of the Engineer that correlate the
measured flow rate through the probe hole to the estimated permeability of the
zone of improved ground. The permeability shall not be greater than 1×10-6 cm/s
for tunnel break-in or break-out activities to proceed. Should the permeability be
greater than 1×10-6 cm/s, additional ground improvement measures shall be
conducted until the permeability is reduced to a level that is acceptable to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall allow for all costs associated with testing in his
Contract Price. No additional costs in respect of this requirement will be considered.
16. GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING
16.1 General
(1) The work specified in this section includes furnishing, installing, and monitoring
geotechnical instrumentation for all underground works to be constructed, along
with existing buildings, structures and services likely to be affected by the Works.
(2) The Contractor is responsible for identifying the zone of influence related to the
work and shall determine the amount of additional instrumentation required, and
locations to monitor.
16.2 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for the installation and monitoring
of the Geotechnical Instrumentation and shall be submitted to the Engineer for non-
objection at least 60 days before commencement of instrumentation installation.
(2) The Method Statement shall include at a minimum:
106 | P a g e
• Summary of the Contractor’s methods and calculations use to determine the

anticipated zone of influence associated with tunnel and shaft construction
• Summary of the Contractor’s assessment of the impact on third party

infrastructure and the zone of influence of the works
• Instrumentation and Monitoring requirements agreed with asset owners

and provision proposed by the Contractor
• Assessment of which parameters are to be monitored in order to safeguard

third party assets and validate the Contractor’s design e.g., ground
movement, building/ structure movement, vibration, groundwater levels,
etc.
• The instrument types and specification
• Planned depths, locations, and detailed drawings for all required and
proposed instrumentation
• The instrumentation layout and monitoring frequency
• Protection of installed instrumentation, to minimise construction damage
• The method(s) of instrument installation and calibration
• Data collection process in the field
• How data will be stored processed, and interpreted
• Alarm and Action trigger levels for each class of instrumentation, including
justification
• Relevant Contingency Plans in response to when an Alarm or Action level

has been exceeded
• Flow chart identifying responsibilities and actions of key site personnel with
contact details for key site staff in the event that an Alarm or Action level is
exceeded
• Proposal for group meetings to discuss instrumentation requirements and

results, frequency of the meetings, and list of required attendees
• All third-party interfaces confirming, name, organisation, role, contact

details and asset.
(3) The Contractor shall develop and implement a Movement and Settlement Control
Plan to protect existing facilities, tunnels, utilities, structures, roads, streets, and
107 | P a g e
other improvements from damage due to settlement or heave resulting from tunnel
construction.
• The plan shall be submitted for non-objection to the at least 60 days before
commencement of instrumentation installation.
• The plan shall include the specific tunnelling methods that will be used to
minimize loss of ground, procedures and instrumentation used for
monitoring for loss of ground as specified herein, and ground improvement
plans.
16.3 Quality Control
(1) The Contractor shall engage a professional, geotechnical instrumentation and

monitoring firm, acceptable to the Engineer to carry out the instrumentation and
monitoring program. The responsible person shall have a minimum of 10 years’
experience in geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring and his Cv shall be
submitted to the Engineer for non-objection.
(2) The Contractor shall provide the following Survey Methods and Survey Control:
I. The Contractor shall establish deep cased bench marks from the approved
datum for use in instrumentation monitoring.
II. The Contractor shall establish the elevations of deep cased bench marks by
running level circuits started and closed at the specified bench mark and as
follows:
a) Establish turning points so that foresights and back sights are

approximately equal. Foresights and back sights shall be less than 60
m.
b) Turning points shall consist of well-defined surface points of solid

objects or masonry nails driven into pavement.
c) Each error of closure shall be less than 0.3 mm. If any error of
closure is greater than 0.3 mm, re-survey the circuit.
d) Prove the established elevations of deep cased bench marks by

running at least three separate and complete level circuits which
yield consistent results. Re-survey all level circuits until correct and
repeatable elevations are obtained.
III. The Contractor shall determine initial locations and elevations of all
monitoring points, instruments, and bench marks by optical surveying
techniques.
108 | P a g e
IV. The Contractor shall prove initial readings of facility monitoring points by
conducting at least three separate and complete sets of optical survey
readings on each instrument which yield consistent results (plus or minus
0.3 mm).
(3) The Contractor shall provide the following for calibration:
(i) Calibrate all gauges and other instruments used for monitoring before use
and provide copies of the calibration certificates to the Engineer.
(ii) Calibrate all gauges and other instruments used for monitoring at
appropriate time intervals and provide copies of the calibration certificates
to the Engineer.
(iii) Operation Requirements: All monitoring instrumentation shall be strong,

durable, watertight, corrosion resistant, and able to remain stable under
extreme temperature changes from 0 degree C to 60 degrees C.
(4) Testing:
(i) The Contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of the Engineer within 7
days of installation that the instrumentation is functioning correctly.
Demonstrate that the central tube of any piezometer or inclinometer is clear
to the full design depth. Perform rising and falling head permeability tests
on all piezometers and an initial survey of inclinometer tubes to provide a
baseline and to demonstrate that the tubes are clear.
(ii) During construction operations, the Contractor shall periodically

demonstrate continued proper functioning of each standpipe piezometer by
performing rising or falling head tests on a schedule approved by the
Engineer.
17. EXECUTION
17.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall identify all assets that may be at risk of damage and design the
required instrumentation, monitoring and mitigation measures to ensure they are
sufficient and appropriate to limit impacts to newly completed or existing
infrastructure.
(2) The Contractor shall undertake pre-condition and post construction surveys within
the predicted zone.
109 | P a g e
(3) The Contractor shall design the instrumentation and monitoring system to achieve
the following objectives:
• Assess the performance of the temporary works.
• Monitor ground movements and effects on adjacent and overlying structures in

the zone of influence to confirm the integrity of the structures and demonstrate
compliance with the contract requirements in relation to third party assets.
• Monitor short and long term groundwater variations and associated ground
movement.
• Confirm that the behaviour of the ground and the temporary/ permanent
works are as predicted.
• Provide information to allow consideration of adjustments to the support,

construction sequences, methods, advance rates based upon a comparison of
predicted against actual behaviour.
• Provide early warning of any adverse or unexpected conditions and behaviours

to allow corrective actions to be taken.
• Provide assurance to third parties that the impacts of construction are as

predicted and acceptable.
• Provide warning of Action level breaches that initiate pre-planned contingency

measures.
• Have sufficient redundancy to ensure that the system is resilient and rogue
readings can be identified and discounted.
(4) The Contractor shall commence the monitoring programme as soon as possible after
Commencement date and at least 60 days before construction work is scheduled to
start to establish baseline readings for each instrument.
(5) The monitoring program shall include the installation of all instruments detailed in
the Contractor’s Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring Method Statement.
Provide additional monitoring stations, devices, and procedures if deemed
necessary or if directed by the Engineer during the progress of the Works.
18. Monitoring
(1) The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for performance
monitoring of TBM excavated tunnels:
110 | P a g e
(i) Monitor TBM performance at locations selected by the Contractor with a

minimum of one monitoring zones within 100 metres of each shaft location.
Install from the ground surface within each monitoring zone a series of
settlement observation points above the tunnel crown and transverse to the
centreline to determine the shape and depth of the longitudinal and
transverse settlement troughs. Install within each monitoring zone, a
minimum of 21 surface settlement points, including seven points at each of
three perpendicular tunnel cross-sections.
(ii) Install within each of the monitoring zones described above at least one
piezometer, and three multiple point borehole extensometers. Install the
deepest extensometer a maximum of 0.5 m vertically above the tunnel
crown.
(iii) Install surface settlement points at a minimum of every 200 m along the
tunnel centreline and deep extensometers at a minimum of 500 m along the
tunnel centreline in populated areas.
(iv) Install survey targets within the tunnel at a maximum spacing 200 metres to
facilitate the optical deformation monitoring if installed. Propose the
geometry and frequency to measure any deformations of the installed liner.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for performance
monitoring of Non-TBM excavated tunnels:
• Monitor Non-TBM performance at selected locations within a minimum of

one monitoring zones per drive. The entire length of a monitoring zone shall
be 16 m or less. Install from the ground surface within each monitoring zone
a series of settlement observation points above the tunnel crown and
transverse to the centreline to determine the shape and depth of the
longitudinal and transverse settlement troughs. Install within each
monitoring zone, sufficient surface settlement points as agreed with the
Engineer
• Install within each of the monitoring zones described above at least one
multiple point borehole extensometer. Install the deepest extensometer a
maximum of 0.5 m vertically above the tunnel crown.
• Install convergence points/targets within the tunnel at a maximum spacing

200 metres to facilitate the optical deformation monitoring if installed.
Propose the geometry and frequency to measure adequacy of the initial
support.
111 | P a g e
(3) Performance Monitoring of Shafts and Open-Cut Excavations:
• For shafts with excavated diameters of 3 m or more, internal convergence

points, surface settlement points, two inclinometers, one standpipe
piezometer, and one facility settlement monitoring point shall constitute a
minimum monitoring plan.
• The surface settlement points for any given shaft shall be of sufficient
spacing and density to determine the displacements around the shaft and at
affected structures.
• Install piezometers in order to properly define the extent, if any, of

groundwater drawdown.
• Install convergence points at tunnel/shaft junctions immediately after

installation of the initial ground support systems at the approved locations.
(4) Monitoring of Existing Structures and Utilities:
• Monitor existing structures within the zone of influence as determined by

the Contractor. The Contractor shall utilizes sufficient instrumentation as
non-objected by the Engineer to monitor infrastructure sensitive to the
construction related activities. The type of instrumentation, location, and
quantity shall be determined by the Contractor and non-objected by the
Engineer to adequately address any potential claims made by the property
Owner.
• Monitor all location where the tunnel or cross passages crosses over or
under any existing utilities or infrastructure that are within 2 tunnel
diameters of the excavated tunnel diameter. Minimum instrumentation
monitoring shall be agreed with the Engineer.
• At a minimum, monitor displacements and vibration levels of any structure

or any ground surface that is adjacent to a shaft, open excavation, or tunnel
where predicted displacements exceed 10 mm, predicted induced
settlement slopes exceed 1/500, or where subjected to greater than 50
mm/s PPV construction vibration levels in urban areas or where existing
utilities and/or structures are present that are susceptible to settlement
damage.
(5) Design all deformation monitoring instrumentation for ground settlements, heaves
or deformations which may occur. Replace or reset any instrumentation that
exceeds 85 percent of its design value.
112 | P a g e
(6) Use survey methods for instrument reading as specified for survey control.
(7) Keep a continuous boring log of drilling observations including soil types, water
levels, and drilling difficulties encountered during drilling. Submit a boring log
template for the Engineer’s non-objection. Submit a completed boring log to the
Engineer for information at the completion of installation work for each water level
observation well and piezometer.
113 | P a g e
Volume 5
Section 3
Civil Work


114 | P a g e
Table of Contents

No. No.
1. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 116
1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 116
1.2 Excavation.............................................................................................................................................................. 127
1.3 Piling and Diaphragm Walling....................................................................................................................... 139
1.4 Structural Concrete ............................................................................................................................................ 161
1.5 Formwork .............................................................................................................................................................. 199
1.6 Structural Steelwork ......................................................................................................................................... 211
1.7 Cut and Cover Construction ........................................................................................................................... 222
1.8 Prestressed Members ....................................................................................................................................... 230
1.9 Glazed Roof for Transition Ramps ............................................................................................................... 248
115 | P a g e
1. GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
These Specifications contained herein shall be read in conjunction with other Contract
Documents.
The Indian and International Standards as scheduled below have been used as base for the
specifications. The Outline Construction Technical Specifications are also based on latest
edition of “Specifications for Road works” of Ministry of Road Transport &Highways
(MORTH) as published by Indian Roads Congress. The Contractor shall be responsible for
detailing in his specifications submitted to the Engineer, as part of the Definitive Design
Submission, the standards on which his materials and workmanship will be based. These
shall be of similar or higher standard than those listed below. The Contractor is required to
Notice in the first instance the Indian Standards and base the specifications on Indian
Standards to the extent that they are applicable.
Alternative or additional codes and standards proposed by the Contractor shall be

internationally recognised codes and shall be equivalent to or better than, Indian Standards
issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards or any other Indian professional body or
organisation, subject to being, in the opinion of the Engineer, suitable for incorporation or
reference into the specifications. The specifications have been divided into different
sections / sub-heads for convenience only. They do not restrict any cross-references. The
Contractor shall take into account inter-relations between various parts of works/trades.
No claim shall be entertained on the basis of compartmental interpretations.
This Section covers Outline Construction Specifications for all civil structures including box
culverts, pedestrian underpasses, car parks etc. which are not covered under the Sections of
Roads, Bridges and Seawall and Reclamation works.
1.1.1 Reference to the Standard Codes of Practice

Abbreviations:
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
BS British Standard
CPWD Central Public Works Department
116 | P a g e
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.

IRC Indian Road Congress
IRCEM Institution de Retraite Complementarie des Employes de
Particular
IRS Indian Railway Standards
IS Indian Standards
MORTH Ministry of Road Transport and Highways
MCGM Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai
UIC International Union of Railways
The detailed list of Standards referred to is mentioned in Clause 1.1.7 of this Section.
1.1.2 Storing of Materials at site
All materials used in this Design and Build Project shall be stored on racks, supports, in bins,
silos, godowns, under cover etc as appropriate to prevent deterioration or damage from any
cause whatsoever to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
The storage of materials shall be in accordance with IS 4082 “Recommendation on stacking

and storage or construction materials on site” and as per IS 7969 “Safety code for handling
and storage of building materials”.
The materials shall be stored in a proper manner at places at site agreed by the Engineer
Should the place, where material is stored by the Contractor, be required by the Employer
for any other purpose, the Contractor shall forthwith remove the material from that place at
his own cost and clear the place for the use of the Employer within the time as
communicated by the Engineer and at no extra cost to the Employer.
1.1.3 Materials:
All materials shall be of best quality and shall conform to relevant code of practice and
manufacturer’s specification. Wherever, no specific code of practice of IRS/IRC/BIS is
applicable, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding.
1.1.4 Workmanship
All works shall be true to level, plumb and square and the corners, edges and rises in all
cases shall be unbroken and neat.
117 | P a g e
Any work not to the satisfaction of the Employer or the Engineer will be rejected and at the
same shall be rectified or removed and replaced with work of the required standard of
workmanship by the Contractor at no extra cost.
1.1.5 Load testing on Completed Structures
(1) During the period of construction or within the defect liability period, the Engineer
may at his discretion order the load testing of any completed structure or any part
thereof if he has reasonable doubts about the adequacy of the strength of such
structure for any of the following reasons.
a) Results of compressive strength on concrete test cubes falling below the

specified strength.
b) Premature removal of formwork.
c) Inadequate curing of concrete.
d) Overloading during the construction of the structure or part thereof.
e) Carrying out concreting of any portion without the prior Noticed by the
Engineer.
f) Honey combed or damaged concrete which will affect the stability of the
structure to carry the design load, more so in important or critical areas of
the structure.
g) Any other circumstances attributable to the Contractor which may result in

the structure or any part thereof being of less than the strength or
performance required under the Contract.
(2) All the loading tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the
agreed methods and Standards. Such tests shall be carried out only after expiry of
minimum 28 days or such longer period. The structure shall be subjected to a
superimposed load equal to the specified superimposed load assumed in the design.
This load shall be maintained for a period of 24 hours before removal. During the
test, struts strong enough to take the whole load shall be placed in position leaving a
gap under the members. The deflection due to the superimposed load shall be
recorded by sufficient number of agreed reflectometers capable of reading to an
accuracy of 0.02 millimetres and suitably located under the structure.
118 | P a g e
The structure shall be deemed to have passed the test if the maximum deflection at
the end of 24 hours of loading does not exceed the deflection given by the following
expressions:
D = 0.001 L2/25 T, where,
D = max deflection due to imposed load only
L = span of the member under load test (the shorter span in case of slabs). The span
is the distance between centres of the supports or the clear distance between the
supports plus the depth of the member, whichever is smaller. In case of cantilever,
this shall be taken as twice the distance from the support to the end and deflection
shall be adjusted for movement of the support.
T = depth of member.
If within 24 hours of the removal of the superimposed load, the structure does not
recover at least 75% of the deflection under the superimposed load, the test loading
shall be repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the recovery after the second test is
less than 80% of the maximum deflection shown during the second test, the
structure shall be considered to have failed to pass the test and shall be deemed to
be unacceptable.
(3) In such cases the portion of the work concerned shall be taken down or cut out and
reconstructed to comply with the specifications. Other remedial measures may be
taken to make the structure secure at the discretion of the Engineer. However, such
remedial measures shall be carried out to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) All costs involved in carrying out the tests defined in this clause (1.1.1.5), (including
load and integrity test for piles) and other incidental expense thereto shall be borne
by the Contractor regardless of the result of the tests. In case of failure the
Contractor shall take down or cut out and reconstruct the defective work or shall
take the remedial measures, as instructed, at his own cost.
(5) If the load testing is instructed on any grounds other than mentioned in this clause
(1.1.1.5), then the cost of the same shall be reimbursed if the test results are found
to be satisfactory.
119 | P a g e
(6) In addition to the above load tests, non-destructive tests on various elements
(except on piles) such as core test and ultrasonic pulse velocity test shall be carried
out by the Contractor at his own expense. Such tests shall be carried out by an
agency agreed with the Engineer and. The acceptance criteria for these tests shall be
as specified by the testing agency or good Engineering practice subject to the Notice
of the Engineer.
1.1.6 Structural Work
(1) Unless otherwise specified, only controlled concrete with design mix and weigh
batching is to be used for the work.
(2) Minimum cement content for various grades/elements of concrete as specified in

Volume 4, Section 3, subsection 2.5, is purely from durability point of view. Larger
content of cement shall be provided if required by mix design or as per the
requirement of relevant codes.
(3) Mix design using smaller aggregates of 10 millimetres and below shall also be done
in advance for the use at the junctions, where reinforcement is congested.
(4) Procedure of mixing the admixtures shall be strictly as per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
(5) All the water tanks and other liquid retaining concrete structures shall undergo
hydro-testing.
(6) Special benches shall be provided at site for stacking reinforcement bars of different
sizes.
(7) Formwork for beams of Reinforced Cement Concrete works shall be designed in
such a way that the formwork of the adjacent slabs can be removed without
disturbing the props/supports to the beams.
(8) Wherever there are tension/suspended concrete members which are suspended
from upper level structural members, the shuttering/scaffolding of such members at
lower level shall be kept in place until such time as the upper level supporting
members have achieved the required minimum strength.
(9) The Contractor shall incorporate seismic considerations of anchoring and isolation
in the design and detailing of the finishes. The element to be anchored shall have its
120 | P a g e
motion suitably restrained and isolated so as not to be affected by the

deformations/vibrations of the building during Construction.
(10) Formwork shall be provided for full height at all locations. Special precautions for
such tall formwork shall be taken to ensure its safety and stability.
1.1.7 Applicable Codes, Standards & Publications
Code No Title
Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for
IS:875 (Part 3) buildings and structures
IS:1322 Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp-proofing
IS:1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
Code of Practice for construction of hollow concrete block
IS:2572 masonry
Code of Practice for Design & Construction of machine
IS:2974(Part 1) Foundation
IS:3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings
IS:3764 Excavation Work- Code of Safety
Recommendations for modular co-ordination in building
IS:6408 (Parts 1,2) industry– tolerances
IS:10958 General check list of functions of joints in building
Classification of joints in buildings for accommodation of
IS:11817 dimensional deviations during construction
Method of test for laboratory determination of air permeability of
IS:11818 joints in buildings
IS:12440 Precast concrete stone masonry blocks
CPWD Specifications 1996.
Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of
BS:476 (Part 7) products
Method of determination of the fire resistance of elements of
BS:476 (Part 20) construction (general principles)
Methods for determination of the fire resistance of non-load
BS:476 (Part 22) bearing elements of construction
BS:5215 Specification for one-part gun grade polysulphide-based sealants
BS:5606 Guide to accuracy in building
Code of practice for the design of joints and jointing in building
BS:6093 construction
Code of practice for the design of non-load bearing external
BS:8200 vertical enclosure of building
ASTM C 332 Specification for light weight aggregate for insulating concrete
SP 23 (S&T) Hand Book on Concrete Mixes
B Bitumen
121 | P a g e
Code No Title
IS:702 Industrial Bitumen
Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and
IS:3384 damp-proofing
C Building Construction Practices
Specifications for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete
IS:1838 Parts I and II. pavements and structures.
Code of Practice for use of fixing devices in walls, ceilings, and
IS:1946 floors of solid construction.
IS:6509 Code of Practice for installation of joints in concrete pavements.
IS:11134 Code of Practice for setting out of buildings.
Parts I and II. Specifications for one part Gun grade polysulphide
IS:11433 based joint sealant.
Code of Practice for provision of water stops at transverse
IS:12200 contraction joints in masonry and concrete dams
D Cement
IS:269 33 grade ordinary Portland cement
IS:455 Portland Slag Cement
IS:650 Specification for standard sand for testing cement.
IS:1489 (Part 1) Portland pozzolana cement: Flyash based
IS:1489 (Part 2) Portland pozzolana cement: Calcined clay based
IS:3535 Method of Sampling Hydraulic Cements
IS:4031 (Parts 1 to 13) Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.
IS:4032 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
Methods of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in
IS:6925 concrete admixtures.
IS:8042 White Portland Cement
IS:8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS:12269 Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS:12330 Specification for sulphate resistant Portland cement.
E Concrete
IS:456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced
IS:457 concrete for dams and other massive structures.
IS:460 (Parts I to II) Specification for Test Sieves
IS:516 Methods of test for strength of concrete.
IS:1199 Methods of sampling & analysis of concrete.
IS:1200 Method of measurement of building and civil Engineering
IS:1343 Code of practice for prestressed concrete
IS:1607 Method of Test Sieving
IS:2386 Parts I-VIII. Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete.
IS:2430 Methods of Sampling of Aggregates of Concrete
122 | P a g e
Code No Title
IS:2438 Specification for roller pan mixer
IS:2514 Specification for concrete vibrating tables
IS:2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
IS:2645 Specifications for integral cement water proofing compounds
Specifications for portable swing batchers for concrete (double
IS:2722 bucket type)
IS:2770 Methods of testing bond in reinforced concrete part I pull out test
Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water &
IS:3025 waste water
IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids
IS:3935. Code of practice for composite construction
IS:4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant construction of building
Methods of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in
IS:6925. concrete Admixtures
IS:7242 Specifications for concrete spreaders
IS:7251 Specifications for concrete finishers
IS:7861 Parts I & II. Code of practice for extreme weather concreting.
IS:7969 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
IS:8989 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures
Methods of test for determining setting time of concrete by
IS:8142 penetration resistance
IS:9103 Specifications for admixtures for concrete
Method of making, curing and determining compressive strengths
IS:9013 of accelerated cured concrete test specimens
IS:9284 Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete
IS:10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works, Ministry of Road
MORTH Transport and Highways (Roads Wing)
IRC 6: 2014 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Roads Bridges
IRS Concrete Bridge Code
IRC : 112 Code of Practice for Concrete Road Bridges

ASTM - C - 94 Ready Mix Concrete
IS 4926:2003 Ready Mixed Concrete – Code of Practice
Specifications for Silica Fume for use in Hydraulic Cement and
ASTM – C - 1240 Mortar
F Construction Plant and Machinery.
IS:1791 Specification for batch type concrete mixers.
IS:2505 General requirements for concrete vibrators: Immersion type.
IS:2506 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrators.
IS:3366 Specification for pan vibrators.
IS:3558 Code of Practice for use of immersion vibrators for consolidating
123 | P a g e
Code No Title
concrete.
IS:4656 Specifications for form vibrators for concrete.
IS:4925 Specification for concrete batching and mixing plant.
IS:11993 Code of Practice for use of screed board concrete vibrators.
G Formwork
IS:4990 Specifications for plywood for concrete shuttering work.
Guidelines for the design and erection of false work for road
IRC:87 bridges.
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
IS:806 construction.
IS:1161 Specification of steel tubes for structural purposes.
Specification for mild steel tubes. Tubulars and other wrought
IS:1239 steel fittings.
H Gypsum and Gypsum Board
IS:2095 Gypsum plaster boards
IS:2542 (Part 1/Sec Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products:
1 to 12) plaster and concrete
IS:2542 (Part 2/Sec Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products:
1 to 8) Gypsum products
IS:2547 (Part 1) Gypsum building plaster: Excluding premixed lightweight plaster
IS:2547 (Part 2) Gypsum building plaster: Premixed lightweight plaster
I Handling and Storage
Recommendation of Stacking and Storage of construction
IS:4082 materials
Code of practice for stacking and packing of stone slabs for
IS:8348 transportation
J Instruments For Testing Cement and Concrete
IS:5513 Specification for vicat apparatus.
IS:5514 Specification for apparatus used in Le-Chaterlier test.
IS:5515 Specification for compaction factor apparatus.
IS:7320 Specification for concrete slump test apparatus.
Specification for apparatus to determine constituents of fresh
IS:7325 concrete.
IS:10080 Specification for vibration machine.
IS:10086 Specification for moulds for use in tests of cement and concrete.
IS:10510 Specification for vee-bee consistometer.
K Joint Fillers
Preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements and
structures (non extruding and resilient type): Bitumen
IS:1838 (Part 1) impregnated fibre
L Paints and Coatings
IS:102 Ready mixed paint, brushing, red lead, non-setting, priming
124 | P a g e
Code No Title
IS:109 Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster, to Indian Standard
Colour No. 361 and 631 white and off white.
IS:347 Varnish, shellac, for general purpose.
Specification for powder organic coatings for application and
stoving to aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed
sections for external architectural purposes, and for the finish on
aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated
BS:6496 with powder organic coatings
BS:EN:10152 Specification for electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat
products. Technical delivery conditions
ASTM A 164-71 Specification for electrodeposited coatings of zinc on steel
M Pigment for Cement
Specification for pigments for Portland cement and Portland
BS:1014 cement products
N Reinforcement & Structural Steel
IS:280 Mild steel wire for general Engineering purposes
Part I. Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars. Part II Hard
IS:432 drawn steel wire.
IS:814 Parts I & II. Electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel.
Classification coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding
IS:815 of structural steels
IS:816 Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel.
(Part I) Specifications for hard-drawn steel wire fabric for
IS:1566 concrete reinforcement.
Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for
IS:1786 concrete reinforcement.
Code of Practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
IS:2502 reinforcement.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanising of iron and steel.
Code of Practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars
IS:2751 for reinforced concrete construction.
IS:4759 Hot-dip zinc coating on structural steel and other allied products.
Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced
IS:5525 concrete works
Recommendations for welding cold-worked steel bars for
IS:9417 reinforced concrete construction.
Uncoated stress relieved low relaxation steel class 2 for Pre-
IS:14268 stressed concrete
IS:226 Structural steel (Standard Quality)
Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building
IS:800 construction.
IS:813 Scheme of symbols for welding.
125 | P a g e
Code No Title
Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel. (Part
IS:814 I & Part II)
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
IS:816 construction in mild steel.
IS:822 Code of practice for inspection of welds.
IS:961 Structural steel (High Tensile)
Code of practice for use of welding in bridges and structures
IS:1024 subject to dynamic loading.
IS:1161 Steel tubes for structural purposes.
Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion
IS:1182 welded butt joints in steel plates.
IS:2062 Structural steel (Fusion welding quality)
IS:3757 Specification for high tensile friction grip bolts.
IS:5624 Specification for foundation bolts.
Code of practice for testing of fusion welded (Part I) joints and
IS:3600 weld metal in steel.
IS:4923 Hollow steel sections for structural use.
IS:6227 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding in tubular structure.
Code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural
IS:801 members in general building construction.
Specifications for cold formed light gauge structural steel
IS:811 sections.
Structural Steel Micro alloyed (Medium and high strength
IS:8500 qualities)
IS:8910 General requirements of supply of weldable structural steel
Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon & carbon-
IS:9595 Manganese steels
IS:7205 Safety Code for erection of Structural Steel Works
O Aggregates
IS:383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
P Scaffolding
IS:2750 Specification for steel scaffoldings
IS:3696 (Part 1) Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders: Scaffolds
IS:3696 (Part 2) Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders: Ladders
IS:4014 (Part 1) Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding: Definition and
Materials
Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding: Safety regulations
IS:4014 (Part 2) for scaffolding
IRC:87 Guidelines for the design and erection of falsework for road
Bridges
Q Sealants
IS:10959 Glossary of terms for sealants for building purposes
126 | P a g e
Code No Title
IS:11433 (Part 1) One part grade polysulphide base joint sealant: General
Requirements
IS:11433 (Part 2) One part grade polysulphide base joint sealant: Methods of test
IS:13055 Methods of sampling and test for anaerobic adhesives and
Sealants
BS:5889 Specification for one-part gun grade silicone-based sealants.
R Wood
IS:303 Plywood for General Purposes
IS:848 Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and
aminoplastic)
IS:1141 Seasoning of Timber - Code of Practice
IS:1328 Veneered decorative plywood
IS:1659 Block Boards
Decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated
IS:2046 sheets
Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Plywood face
IS:2202 (Part 1) panels
IS:2202 (Part 2) Wooden flush door shutters (solid core (type): Particle face
panels and hardboard face panels
S Bearings
Standard specifications and code of practice for road bridges
IRC:83 Part-II Elastomeric Bearings
Standard specifications and code of practice for road bridges Pot
IRC:83 Part-III Bearings
T UPVC Pipe For Drainage
IS 4985 Unplasticized PVC Pipes for portable water supplies
U PILING
IS :2911 PART-I Bored Cast in-situ Concrete Piles
IRC:78 Standard specifications and code of practice for road bridges
Foundation And Substructure
V All Indian Railway Standards
MORTH Specifications for Road and Bridge works (latest
W Revision)
X CPWD Specifications (latest Revision)
1.2 Excavation
1.2.1 Preliminaries
Site Clearance
127 | P a g e
(1) The Contractor shall clear the Site as required by demolishing all buildings,
structures and the like, and removing vegetation, debris, trees along with their roots
and the like to locations agreed with the Engineer either on or off Site
(2) Stumps and major roots shall be grubbed up and disposed of off-site. The Contractor
shall take precautions to protect all adjacent public and private property during
these operations and shall be responsible for all and damage arising from such.
(3) The Contractor shall prevent erosion of all cleared excavation and fill areas by
providing suitable protection.
(4) The Contractor shall also prevent siltation of all areas adjacent to the Works as a
result of fines being transported from the Works by provision of suitable silt fences.
1.2.1.1 Topsoil Stripping
(1) Topsoil shall be removed as required and deposited in separate heaps at locations
agreed with the Engineer.
1.2.1.2 Removal of Unsuitable Material
(1) Unsuitable materials are defined in Volume 5, cl 1.2.2.2
(2) The Contractor shall remove all unsuitable materials and dispose of such on or off Site.
(3) Boulders, stones and other materials of value or usable again on the Works shall be
neatly stacked in graded heaps.
(4) Surplus suitable materials shall be deposited in layers of appropriate thickness and well
compacted in the designated disposal site subject to the Contract requirements.
1.2.1.3 General Excavation
(1) Excavation shall be carried out to the lines, levels and profiles shown on the Drawings.
The work shall be carried out by the Contractor in such a way as to avoid soil erosion,
groundwater pollution, accidents in habitational or frequented places, disturbance to
the surrounding ground or structures, accident to workmen and any other untoward
incident. Particular care shall be taken to maintain stability when excavating in close
proximity to existing Works. Fencing, caution signages with red lights and other safety
measures shall be employed to avoid accidents. Where necessary, signal men shall be
employed to guide the movement of people, vehicles and equipment.
128 | P a g e
(2) The work shall be carried out in a careful manner to ensure that the exposed surfaces are
as sound as the nature of the material permits and that no point shall protrude inside the
lines shown on the Drawings except as given Notice by the Engineer. In soft soil
excavation which is to remain open permanently, exposed faces shall be formed
accurately to the required slopes and profiles and properly protected by turfing or
pitching as given Notice by Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall dispose of all material arising from excavations either off the site or
to Noticed heaps on the Site, as required.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all excavations free from water from
whatever cause arising and shall provide such pumping capacity and other measures as
may be necessary for this purpose.
(5) The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and stability of all excavations
performed by him or under his control. In case of any slips or blows in the excavation,
the same shall be cleared by the Contractor at his own cost.
(6) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer without delay of any permeable strata, joints,
faults, fissures or unusual ground conditions encountered during excavation and any
excavation instability and/or collapse.
(7) The Contractor shall ensure that no air pollution takes place during excavation, storage
and transportation of earth by providing suitable measures such as appropriate cover
and the like.
(8) The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer full details of the proposed rock excavation
methods for his Notice. Excavation should be carried out by such manual/mechanical
means or methods, as to eliminate noise and dust up to the prescribed limits and without
using any blasting and/or any expansive chemicals. Similarly, the Contractor shall submit
his plans for methods for monitoring ground stability and vibration adjacent to
residential area.
(9) The Contractor shall carry out ground stabilisation measures without delay before
and/or after excavation, the Contractor may request the Engineer to accompany him
when inspecting structures and excavated rock surfaces revealed after excavation
operations.
129 | P a g e
1.2.1.4 Excavation beyond True Lines and Levels
If from any cause whatsoever excavations are carried out beyond their true line and level
other than as per the Noticed drawings then the Contractor shall make good at his own cost
to the required line and level with the appropriate grade of filling to be contained in the true
excavation, or with concrete or other material in such a manner subject to the Notice of the
Engineer
1.2.1.5 Notice for Excavation
(1) When excavations have been taken out accurately to the profiles or dimensions required
for the Works, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer for his Notice.
(2) The Contractor shall carry out additional excavation to such new profiles or dimensions
as the Engineer may give Notice.
1.2.1.6 Excavations for Structures
(1) Open excavation to lay a foundation for a structure shall be carried out to the lines and
dimensions necessary to permit the proper construction of that structure.
(2) Where a structure is to be founded on soft ground, the excavation shall be taken down
until the required suitable soil formation is exposed and prepared to the Notice of the
Engineer.
(3) In the event of excavation having been made deeper than that shown on the drawings or
as Noticed by the Engineer, the extra depth shall be made up with concrete or masonry of
the foundation grade to the cost of the Contractor. Ordinary filling shall not be used for
the purpose to bring the base of foundation to required level.
(4) Prior to any construction within that excavation the bottom of the excavation shall be re-
compacted to achieve a dense smooth and level surface longitudinally, transversely or
stepped. Subject to the Notice of the Engineer, layers of granular fill not exceeding 200
millimetres loose thickness shall be placed and compacted to 95% maximum dry density.
(5) Where required, filtered under drainage pipes shall be placed within the granular fill
layer in accordance with the Noticed designs
(6) Surfaces of excavations or filling on which plain (unreinforced) or reinforced concrete

will be formed shall be prepared with a blinding layer of concrete as shown on the
130 | P a g e
Drawings or in such other manner as will provide a suitable surface at the correct lines
and levels to the Notice of the Engineer.
1.2.1.7 Trench Excavation for Utilities and Services
(1) Trench excavation shall be performed by the use of suitable equipment, in such manner
so as to minimise disturbance to the required finished sides and bottom of the
excavation.
(2) Trenches for pipes shall be excavated to a sufficient depth and width to enable the
utility or service and the specified joint, bedding, hunching and surrounding to be
accommodated and for all loose material placed to be compacted to the required
standards.
1.2.1.8 Trenches
(1) The Contractor shall carry out excavation in a safe manner such that the sides of the
trench are adequately supported and stable till the completion of this work.
(2) The Contractor shall leave a clear adequate space between the edge of the excavation
and the inner toes of the spoil banks.
(3) Trenches shall be excavated to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings.
(4) Trenches shall not be excavated too far in advance of pipe-laying and the like and shall
be sufficiently wide to allow proper and efficient jointing to be carried out in clean and
dry conditions. Due allowance shall be made for bedding and surrounds where these
are specified.
(5) The bottoms of all trenches shall be trimmed to grade and level and compacted before
any bedding is placed or pipes laid.
(6) The widths of trenches crossing roads, or at other locations as directed shall be as
narrow as is practicably possible. The maximum width measured between undisturbed
soil in the trench sides shall not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe being laid plus
550 millimetres for pipes up to and including 800 millimetres in diameter and plus 750
millimetres for pipes over 800 millimetres in diameter.
(7) Trenches for pipes carrying water under pressure shall, except where otherwise
described in the Contract, be excavated to a sufficient depth to ensure a minimum cover
of 900 millimetres to the top of the pipes.
131 | P a g e
1.2.1.9 Road Crossings
The Contractor shall provide adequate support to all excavations within and across existing
roads. Care shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure that existing roads and services are
not damaged by road-crossing operations. Excavations in roads shall be backfilled and
roads repaired as soon as practicable taking all safety precautions.
1.2.1.10 Channels
(1) Channels shall be excavated by methods which do not endanger the stability of the
side-slopes.
(2) Existing channels, which are to be reshaped, cleared and trimmed, shall be cleared
of all weeds and growth and the beds graded to the required levels. The sides of
channels shall be trimmed to the required safe limits of slope and width.
(3) Side-banks of channels shall be trimmed to provide a neat appearance and even
surfaces.
(4) Any channels, streams, drains or pipes conducting water to or from cultivated land
shall be diverted so as to maintain their flow before being moved or broken into.
All diversions and their subsequent reinstatement shall be carried out to the
Notice of the Engineer
(5) The Contractor shall control the rates of filling and drawdown of water in channels
so as not to endanger the stability of the Works.
1.2.1.11 Notice for Excavations
(1) The Contractor shall seek the Engineer’s Notice for all excavations prior to placing
pavement layers, fill or concrete.
(2) The Contractor shall maintain open excavations in a safe and stable condition, and
shall rectify the effects of deterioration due to weather.
1.2.2 Fill
1.2.2.1 Fill - General
(1) Prior to commencement of any filling either as backfill to excavations or in the

formation of embankments, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer
for “Notice to Proceed” his proposals for carrying out the work such that the
132 | P a g e
optimum use may be made of excavated material. The proposals shall include
details of the compaction plant and methods for adjusting the moisture content of
the material.
(2) No filling shall commence until the “Notice to Proceed” to his proposals have been
received from the Engineer.
1.2.2.2 Fill Material
(1) Fill material shall be obtained only from a source agreed with the Engineer
(2) Fill material, other than for roadworks, shall be evenly graded granular material.
Material with more than 20% passing a 75 micron sieve or more than 10% in
excess of 75 millimetres size is unlikely to be suitable for use in the Works.
(3) Before compacting the fill material, clods or hard lumps of earth over 75
millimetres in greatest dimension shall be broken up.
(4) The following types of material are considered unsuitable and shall not be used for
filling.
a. Materials from swamps, marshes or bogs.
b. Peat, loam, fine silt, log, stump or organic or perishable materials.
c. Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
d. Clay of liquid limit exceeding 80% and plasticity index exceeding 55%.
e. Materials containing salts prone to inducing leaching in the embankment.
f. Any contaminated and environmentally unacceptable material.
(5) The Contractor shall carry out the following initial tests on the proposed material.
Thereafter, one set of tests shall be carried out for each 2000 cubic metres of fill,
supplied to Site or as Noticed by Engineer.
a. Wet sieve analysis.
b. Dry density/moisture content relationship
133 | P a g e
1.2.2.3 Backfill - General
Except around structures, excavations shall be backfilled with suitable excavated

material and/or Noticed material compacted in layers of 300 millimetres maximum
loose thickness to achieve a density of at least 95% of the maximum dry density.
1.2.2.4 Backfill to Structures
a) The Contractor shall not backfill around structures until the structural elements
have attained adequate strength.
b) The backfill material shall be selected excavated material or sand, thoroughly

compacted in layers not exceeding 200 millimetres loose thickness to achieve a
density of at least 95% of the maximum dry density.
1.2.2.5 Preparation of Base/Foundation for Embankment
(1) Prior to placing any embankment upon any area all clearing and grubbing
operations shall have been completed in accordance with this Contract.
(2) Where the height of embankment is 1 metre or less all sod, grass and vegetable
matter shall be removed from the ground surface and the top 150 millimeters shall
be processed as necessary and compacted to 90% of the maximum dry density.
(3) Where new embankments are to be constructed against and on existing slopes
steeper than 1 vertical to 5 horizontal continuous horizontal benches, each no
greater than 500 millimetres in vertical height shall be cut into the existing slope
and the embankment built up in successive layers. Material in the existing slope
which has been loosened shall be re-compacted simultaneously with the first level
of embankment material placed.
(4) Where an embankment is to be placed against sloping ground flatter than 1

vertical to 5 horizontal the existing ground shall first be loosened to a depth not
less than 100 millimetres to ensure adequate bond between embankment and
existing ground.
(5) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, where existing unpaved roads are to be
covered with less than 300 millimeters of fill, excluding pavement, the top of the
old road-bed shall be scarified and re-compacted with the next layer of the new
134 | P a g e
embankment. The total depth of the scarified and added material shall not exceed
the permissible depth of layer.
(6) Granular material (e.g., sand or gravel) shall be used as filling in swamps or
waterlogged ground. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed granular
fill material to the Engineer for his Notice. The Contractor shall first remove all
unsuitable material from the base of the proposed fill area and backfill with the
agreed granular material, placed and compacted in accordance with the
requirements of this Contract. Where deemed necessary the Contractor may place
a geofabric “separator” fabric to prevent “punching of the fill into the underlying
soft material in accordance with Volume 5, cl 1.2.2.6
1.2.2.6 Construction of Embankment
(1) General:
Except as otherwise required all embankments shall be constructed in layers

approximately parallel to the finished grade of the road-bed. During construction
of embankment, a smooth grade having an adequate crown or super elevation shall
be maintained to provide drainage. Embankments shall be constructed to the
required grade and completed embankments shall correspond to the shape of the
typical sections as shown on the Drawings.
(2) Earth Embankment:
a) Earth embankments shall be defined as those principally of material other

than rock and shall be constructed of Noticed material brought from
designated or other Noticed sources.
b) Except as specified for embankment in swamps, earth embankments shall be

constructed in successive layers, for the full width of the cross-section and in
such lengths as are suited to the compaction and watering methods used.
(3) Placing in swampy or waterlogged ground:
a) Embankment in or over swamps or in water shall be placed by placing

granular material in a uniformly distributed layer of thicknesses greater than
that necessary to support the equipment while placing subsequent layers,
135 | P a g e
after which the remainder of the embankment shall be constructed in layers

and compacted as specified.
b) Separation layers of either suitable geofabric and/or graded sand shall first be
placed in controlled layers to prevent excessive penetration and/or the
development of mud-waves.
(4) Preparation of subgrade:
The surface of the finished subgrade shall be neat and workmanlike and shall have
the required form, super elevation, levels, grades, and cross-section. The surface
shall be constructed to sufficient accuracy to permit the construction of subsequent
layers of material to the thickness, surface tolerance, and compaction specified.
1.2.2.7 Compaction of Embankments
(1) When necessary, each layer before being compacted shall be processed as
required to bring the moisture content sufficiently close to optimum to make
possible its compaction to the required density. The material shall be worked as
to have uniform moisture content through the entire layer.
(2) Each layer of material shall be compacted uniformly by use of adequate and
appropriate compaction equipment. The compaction shall be done in a
longitudinal direction along the embankment and shall generally being at the
outer edges and progress towards the center in such a manner that each section
receives equal amount of compaction.
(3) Hauling equipment shall be operated over the full width of each layer in so far
as practicable. There should be a minimum overlap of 150 millimetres between
each run of the rollers.
(4) Embankment or backfill compaction shall be carried out in the following way.
a) The top 200 millimetres of the finished embankment shall be compacted

to a dry density equal to or greater than 98% of the maximum dry
density.
b) Other embankment layers more than 200 millimetres below finished

surface or the underside of the lowest layer of base, subbase and
136 | P a g e
shoulder shall be compacted to a dry density equal to or greater than

95% of the maximum dry density.
1.2.2.8 Inverted Filter
(1) An inverted filter comprising of durable coarse stone aggregates with an

appropriate filter layer or geo-fabric between the filter and the subgrade shall be
constructed behind earth retaining structures.
(2) The inverted filter shall be constructed simultaneously with the filling work to the
retaining structure. Care shall be taken during placing of the filter media to ensure
that it does not cause damage to structural members or application of excessive
pressure against the retaining structure.
1.2.3 Tests
1.2.3.1 Testing of Fill - General
(1) Classification tests as per relevant Standards to which the Engineer has given his
Notice shall be carried out to ensure that true comparisons can be made between
in-situ densities, laboratory compaction densities and field trial densities so that it
can be determined that variations in properties of the fill materials are being
allowed for.
(2) Tests shall be carried out on fill to determine the degree of compaction achieved, at
the rate of one test for either each 1200 cubic metres placed or each layer
whichever is the more frequent. Compacted layers shall not be covered without
Notice from the Engineer.
(3) The density of individual compacted layers shall be determined by a method given
Noticed by the Engineer.
(4) The in-situ dry density of fill shall average 95% of the maximum reached in trials.
No single result shall be less than 92% and no more than 25% of the results on any
one layer shall fall between 92% and 95%. The average shall be computed from
the total number of tests on any one layer where the extent of the layer is defined
by the Contractor when submitting same for inspection.
137 | P a g e
1.2.3.2 Materials for Topmost Layer of Fill
(1) In addition to the general requirements for fill material, the material in the
topmost layer shall not exceed the following test values.
Plasticity Index: 6%
Liquid Limit : 35%
(2) Total fines content shall not exceed 15% and Uniformity Coefficient (Cu) shall not
be less than 4.
(3) The laboratory California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value at 95% maximum dry density
achieved after soaking for 96 hours shall not be less than 30%.
1.2.3.3 Testing of Top Layer of Fill
Tests shall be carried out on the top layer of fill as shown in the following table. Tests
shall be carried out as required by the accepted test procedures
Table 1.1: Table for Testing Frequency of Top Layer of Fill
Test
A. Laboratory tests to monitor the
Frequency of test
consistency
(Not less than one test per...)
of the Noticed material during
construction:
Maximum dry density 1000 square metres
Optimum moisture content 1000 square metres
Grading 1000 square metres
Plasticity index 1000 square metres
Linear shrinkage 1000 square metres
CBR Value 2000 square metres
B. In situ tests to confirm that the
Frequency of test
required degree of compaction is
(Not less than one test per...)
being achieved during construction:
Dry density 250 square metres
CBR Value 1500 square metres
138 | P a g e
1.3 Piling and Diaphragm Walling
1.3.1 General
1.3.1.1 Piling plant and Methods
(1) Not less than 2 weeks before any piling work is commenced the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for Notice full details of his proposed piling plant, and detailed method
statements for carrying out the Works. Such details shall include where applicable a full
description of the piling frame, hammer, helmet and packing, methods of handling,
pitching and supporting the piles before and during driving, the proposed driving
procedure to obtain the required penetration, or the proposed set and the method of
calculation of the specified working load of the piles and such further information as
the Engineer may require. Details of casings and concreting methods in respect of any
driven or bored cast-in-place concrete piles shall be included in the submission.
(2) The Contractor shall not commence any piling until the plant and methods which he
proposes to use have received a “Notice to Proceed” from the Engineer but such a
Notice shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his obligations and
responsibilities under the Contract. If for any reason the Contractor wishes to make
any change in the plant and methods of working, he shall not make any such change
without having first obtained the Engineer's „Notice to Proceed‟ for such changes.
(3) Reference shall be made to the following documents regarding matters relating to
the safety of piling works
BS8004 Code of Practice for Foundations
BS5573 Code of Practice for Safety Precautions in the Construction of large

Diameter Boreholes for Piling and Other Purposes
1.3.1.2 Records
The Contractor shall keep complete records of all data as required by the Engineer
covering the fabrication, driving and installation of each pile and shall submit two
signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than 24 hours after installation
of the piles.
139 | P a g e
1.3.1.3 Programme and Progress Report
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day of the programme of piling for the
following day and shall give adequate Notice of his intention to work outside normal hours
and at weekends.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer on the first day of each week, or on such other
date as the Engineer may decide, a progress report detailing the rate of progress to that
date and progress during the previous week and/or period of all main items of piling
works.
1.3.1.4 Setting Out
(1) The Contractor shall establish and maintain permanent datum level points, base lines
and grid lines to the Notice of the Engineer and shall set out with a suitable identifiable
pin or marker the position of each pile.
(2) The setting out of each pile shall be given Notice by the Engineer at least one day prior
to commencing work on a pile and adequate Notice for checking shall be given by the
Contractor.
(3) Notwithstanding such Notice, the Contractor shall be responsible for the correct and
proper setting out of the piles and for the correctness of the positions, levels,
dimensions, and alignment of the piles.
1.3.1.5 Tolerances
(1) Piles
a) Piles shall be driven or bored accurately vertical or to the specified rake and
the permitted deviation of the pile centre from the centre-point shown on
the setting out plan shall not exceed 50 millimetres measured at the working
level of the piling rig, or other level to which Engineer has given Notice to
proceed.
b) Deviation from specified cut-off level shall be 25 millimetres.
c) The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile shall be 1 in 75 from

the vertical for vertical piles, and for raking piles 1 in 25 from the specified
rake.
d) Forcible corrections shall not be made to piles.
140 | P a g e
e) The manufacturing tolerances for precast concrete piles shall comply with
the following requirements.
i. The external cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 0 millimetres and

+5 millimetres of the specified dimensions.
ii. The wall thickness of hollow spun concrete piles shall be within 0
millimetres and +25 millimetres of the specified thickness.
iii. There shall be no irregularity exceeding 6 millimetres in a 3 metre length

along the face of the pile measured using a 3 metre straight edge.
iv. The centroid of any cross-section of the pile shall not be more than 12
millimetres from the straight line connecting the centroids of the end faces
of the piles.
v. The centroid of any cross-section of a hollow pile shall be determined by

assuming that the pile has a solid section.
f) The diameter of cast-in-situ piles shall be at least 98% of the specified diameter.
(2) Pile caps
a) Variation in dimensions shall be limited to +50 millimetres and –10

millimetres.
b) Misplacement in plan from specified position shall be limited to 15

millimetres.
c) Surface irregularity measured with 3 metre straight edge shall be limited to

5 millimetres.
d) Variation of levels at the top shall not be beyond 25 millimetres.
1.3.1.6 Disturbances and Noise
(1) The Contractor shall carry out the piling work in such a manner and at such times as
to minimize noise and disturbance.
(2) The Contractor shall take precautions adequate enough to avoid damage to existing
utilities and services and adjacent structures.
(3) The Contractor shall ensure that damage does not occur to any part of completed
piling works and shall submit to the Engineer for Notice his proposed sequence and
141 | P a g e
timing for driving or boring piles having regard to the avoidance of damage to
adjacent piles.
1.3.1.7 Obstructions
If during the execution of the Works the Contractor encounters obstructions in the ground,
he shall immediately notify the Engineer accordingly, submit to him details of proposed
methods for overcoming the obstruction and proceed according to the Engineer's Notice.
1.3.2 Concrete Piles
1.3.2.1 Materials - General
(1) Requirements of concrete and reinforcement for precast and cast in-situ piles shall
comply with Section 1.4 of this Volume. Minimum grade of concrete shall be as per
Outlined Design Specification (Volume 4, Section 2.5) unless otherwise specified.
Minimum cement content for concrete in cast-in-place piles as per IS 2911.
(2) Precast piles shall be marked at the time of concreting with all relevant information –
eg, date, reference number, length and the like.
1.3.2.2 Reinforcement
(1) The reinforcement shall be assembled before placing in the moulds and all hoops and
links shall be of uniform length firmly wired into position. Ends of helical
reinforcement shall be firmly secured. Diagonal fork spacers shall be of an Noticed
pattern. The cover to all bars shall be not less than 45 millimetres but increased cover
thickness may be provided where piles are exposed to the action of harmful chemicals
(as in the case of concrete in contact with earth faces contaminated with such
chemicals), acid, vapour, saline atmosphere, sulphurous smoke (as in case of steam
operated railways), etc, and such increase of cover may be between 15 millimetres and
50 millimetres beyond 40 millimetres as may be specified by the Contractor subject to
the Notice of the Engineer.
(2) Joints in main longitudinal bars will be permitted only where each bar cannot be
practically supplied in one complete length. Where permitted, joints shall be provided
at agreed centres, designed to develop the full strength of the bar across the joint,
provided with adequate links or stirrups and staggered in position from those of
adjacent longitudinal bars.
142 | P a g e
(3) Welding of cold worked high tensile requirement bars at joints in main longitudinal bars
will not be permitted without the agreement of the Engineer in which case, the
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of IS 9417-1989.
Welding of hot rolled high tensile steel bars shall be permitted provided the method used
for the same will not adversely affect the properties of bars.
1.3.3 Precast Concrete Piles
1.3.3.1 Formwork
(1) Formwork shall comply with Section 1.5 below of this Volume of this Contract except as
specified below. The head of each pile shall be square to the longitudinal axis. The
corners of the head and pile shaft for a distance of 300 millimetres from the head shall
be chamfered 25 millimetres by 25 millimetres. The method of forming hollow cores
where required shall be such that a continuous core is formed. The use of previously
cast piles as side forms will not be permitted. Holes for toggle bolts shall be at right
angles to the faces of the pile and lined with steel tubes or other Noticed material. Holes
for lifting, handling and pitching shall be formed in accordance with the agreed
Drawings.
(2) Details of all pile shoes shall be submitted to the Engineer for Notice prior to
fabrication or supply. All shoes shall be fitted to the reinforcement as shown on the
agreed Drawings.
1.3.3.2 Protection of Finished Piles
Protection of finished piles against aggressive soil conditions shall be provided by one
of the following methods.
a) Using sulphate-resistant cement - ASTM or TIS Type 5 or Equivalent Indian

Standards IS 12330-1988.
b) Increasing concrete cover to the reinforcement
1.3.3.3 Lengthening Concrete Piles
(1) Where it becomes necessary to lengthen a pile, the reinforcement at the head of the pile
shall be stripped of all surrounding concrete and additional reinforcement added.
(2) The length stripped shall be not less than 40 times the maximum diameter of the
longitudinal reinforcement in the case of a spliced joint or at least 300 millimetres for a
143 | P a g e
butt-welded joint. New binders of the same size and spacings as in the original pile
head and additional blinders shall be fixed in the extension and the pile extended by
concreting between properly formed and supported moulds to the required length.
Prior to casting the extension, the existing concrete surface shall be cut to sound
concrete square to the pile axis and all loose particles removed by wire brushing. This
shall be followed by washing with water and preparing and coating with an Noticed
epoxy bonding agent applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the alignment of the extended pile across the joint is
exactly maintained.
(3) Prior to carrying out any work for the lengthening of piles, the Contractor shall submit
a detailed method statement to the Engineer for his Notice.
(4) After piles have been lengthened, driving shall not be resumed until the specified
characteristic strength of the added concrete has been attained. Subject to the “Notice
to Proceed” from the Engineer in writing, the Contractor may use rapid hardening
Portland cement conforming to IS 8041– 1990 for pile extensions in order to expedite
the work.
(5) Driving or redriving of concrete piles extended as described above shall not be
resumed until the Notice of the Engineer has been given.
1.3.4 Cast-in-Place Piles
1.3.4.1 Bored Piles
(1) The Contractor shall check and agree with the Engineer the casing position for each
pile during and immediately after placing the lining. Piles shall be constructed in a
sequence submitted in advance to the Engineer. Hydraulic rig shall be used. During
boring, the Contractor shall where take soil, rock or groundwater samples and
transport them to a Noticed testing laboratory or carry out in-place soil tests. A
complete record of the construction of each pile shall be kept by the Contractor and
made available for inspection by the Engineer.
(2) Minimum diameter of pile shall conform to IRC Code and given Notice by the
Engineer. Where enlarged bases are required, these shall be mechanically formed and
concentric with the pile shaft to within a tolerance of two per cent of the shaft
diameter and shall not be smaller than the required dimension. The sloping surface of
144 | P a g e
the frustrum forming the enlargement shall make an angle not less than 55 degrees to
the horizontal. The diameters of piles shall be verified by Koden method or other
methods subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
(3) Where bentonite drilling fluid is used in boring for maintaining stability, the level of
the fluid in the excavation shall be kept at not less than 1.5 metres as per IS:2911–
1979 above the level of the external groundwater or at such other level as will ensure
that the fluid pressure is at all times in excess of pressures exerted by the soils and
external groundwater.
(4) MS lining with adequate protection shall be used for ensuring stability of the strata
near ground level until concrete has been placed in the pile. Liner to pile shall be upto
refusals with anticorrosion treatment from outside. A pile excavation shall be
backfilled without delay where a rapid loss of drilling fluid occurs and no further
excavation at the location of that pile shall be carried out until the Contractor has
obtained the Engineer's Notice for the proposed remedial work.
(5) Pumping from a boring shall not be permitted unless Notice is given by the Engineer.
(6) Piles constructed in a stable cohesive soil with liners shall be bored and concreted
without prolonged delay which might allow collapse of any part of the pile boring.
(7) On completion of boring, all loose, disturbed or remoulded soil shall be removed from
the base of the pile. Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall inspect each and
every pile boring and submit his pile boring inspection records for Notice by the
Engineer.
1.3.4.2 Concreting
(1) The method of placing and the workability of the concrete shall be such as to ensure
that a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross section is formed. The
method of placing shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer and shall be carried
out after inspection without such interruption as would allow the previously placed
batch to have hardened. No contamination of the concrete by spoil, liquid or other
foreign matter shall be allowed.
(2) The Contractor shall take all precautions to ensure that the concrete mix and placing
of the concrete does not result in arching of concrete in a casing. Slump measured at
the time of discharge into the pile boring shall be in accordance with requirements as
145 | P a g e
specified in IS 2911-1979, Part I Section 2. Internal vibrators shall not be used to

compact concrete unless the Contractor is satisfied that no segregation or arching of
the concrete will result.
(3) Where concrete is placed in dry borings, measures shall be taken to avoid segregation
and bleeding and to ensure that the concrete at the bottom of the pile is not deficient
in cement.
(4) Concrete placed under water or drilling fluid shall be by means of a tremie and shall
satisfy requirements as per IS 2911-1979, Part I Section 2.
(5) Before concreting is commenced, the Contractor shall remove any accumulation of silt
or other material at the base of the pile or boring.
(6) The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and water-tight throughout. The pipe
shall extend to the base of the pipe or boring and a sliding plug shall be placed in the
pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the tremie pipe
and the water or drilling fluid. At all times during concreting, the tremie pipe shall
penetrate the previously placed concrete and shall not be withdrawn from the
concrete until completion of concreting. A sufficient quantity of concrete within the
pipe shall be maintained at all times to ensure that the pressure within the tremie
pipe always exceeds that from the water or drilling fluid.
(7) The internal diameter of the tremie pipe shall not be less than 200 millimetres for
concrete made with 20 millimetres aggregate, or as agreed with the Engineer.
1.3.4.3 Drilling Fluid
(1) Drilling fluid shall comprise bentonite complying with Specification IS:2720-1965;
IS:2911-1979, Part I Section 2 Appendix A or DFCP 4 of the Oil Companies Materials
Association or given Notice by the Engineer and thoroughly mixed with clean fresh
water to form a suspension meeting the specification requirements as submitted to
and given Notice by the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall obtain manufacturers' certificates of the bentonite powder
consigned to the site giving properties of each consignment and shall submit them to
the Engineer prior to commencing the work and whenever required.
146 | P a g e
(3) The temperature of the water used in mixing the suspension shall not be lower than
5○C. Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special
precautions to be maintained and brought to the Notice of Engineer. Contractor to
ensure and should take Notice to proceed from the Engineer for any modification to
the bentonite suspension or prehydrate of the bentonite in fresh water so as to make
it suitable for pile construction.
(4) The type and frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of
sampling shall be proposed by the Contractor and subject to Notice by the Engineer
prior to commencement of piling work. Such control tests on the bentonite
suspension shall be carried out during the course of the piling work.
(5) Before concreting a pile, the Contractor shall remove any heavily contaminated
bentonite suspension which could impair the free flow of concrete from the tremie
pipe. A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring
using an Noticed slurry sampling device and the specific gravity of the suspension
should not exceed 1.20 as per standard practice and also as per IS:2911. Consistency
of the mud suspension shall be controlled throughout the pouring as well as
concreting operations in order to keep the hole stabilized as well as to avoid concrete
mixing with the thicker mud suspension.
(6) All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension on
the site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Discarded bentonite shall be
removed from the Site without delay and any disposal thereof shall comply with the
regulations of all appropriate relevant authorities.
1.3.5 Pile Testing
1.3.5.1 General
Load testing of Piles shall conform to IS 2911-1985, Part IV.
1.3.5.2 Safety Precautions
(1) General
When preparing to conduct a pile load test, the Contractor shall comply with all
requirements of various acts, orders, regulations and other statutory instruments
that are applicable to the work for provision and maintenance of safe working
147 | P a g e
conditions and shall in addition make such other provision as may be necessary to
safeguard against any hazards that are involved in the testing or preparations for
testing.
(2) Personnel
All tests shall be carried out only under the direction and in presence of an
experienced and competent supervisor conversant with the test equipment and test
procedure. All personnel operating the test equipment shall have been trained in its
use.
(3) Kentledge
a) Where kentledge is used the Contractor shall construct the foundations for
the kentledge and any cribwork, beams or other supporting structures in
such a manner that there will not be differential settlement, bending or
deflection of an amount that constitutes a hazard to safety or impairs the
efficiency of the operation.
b) The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held together

to prevent it collapsing, or becoming unstable due to deflection of the
supports.
c) The weight of kentledge shall be greater than the maximum test load and if
the weight is estimated from the density and volume of the constituent
materials an adequate factor of safety against error shall be allowed.
d) No part of the kentledge support system shall be closer to the pile centre-
line than a distance of 2.5 times the shaft diameter of the pile subject to the
Notice of the Engineer.
e) The weight of the kentledge shall be transferred in manner so that:
(i) the load is transferred symmetrically around the pile head;
(ii) the suitability of the kentledge is maintained at all time, and;
(iii) any tendency of the kentledge to tilt or sway is minimized.
f) Loads shall not be allowed to be applied by supporting the kentledge

directly on the pile or pile cap.
148 | P a g e
(4) Tension piles and ground anchors
a) Where tension piles or ground anchors are used the Contractor shall ensure
that the load is correctly transmitted to all the tie rods or bolts.
b) The extension of rods by welding shall not be permitted unless it is known

that the steel will not be reduced in strength by welding.
c) The bond stresses of the rods in tension shall not exceed normal permissible
bond stresses for the type of steel and grade of concrete used.
(5) Testing equipment
a) In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load
measuring device are mounted on the pile head the whole system will be
stable up to the maximum load to be applied.
b) Means shall be provided to enable dial gauges to be read from a position

clear of the kentledge stack or test frame in conditions where failure in any
part of the system due to overloading, buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure
and so on might constitute a hazard to personnel.
c) The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be
operated under hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test
pressure of one and a half times the maximum working pressure without
leaking.
d) The maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the gauge
in use shall be displayed and all operators shall be made aware of this limit.
e) General requirements for load test equipment’s shall be as follows.
i) Load capacity not less than the maximum required load in the
schedule of testing.
ii) Adequate enough to accommodate the maximum required pile

movement specified in the schedule, in addition displacement of the
reaction system that occurs during load test.
iii) Fully controlled increase or decrease in test load
149 | P a g e
iv) Fully capable of sustaining the applied load as constant for specified
period of time.
1.3.5.3 Presentation of Results
Results to be submitted
(1) Results shall be submitted as follows.
a) Unless otherwise directed the Contractor shall submit a summary of pile

load test results in writing to the Engineer, within 24 hours after completion
of the test. This summary shall include as a minimum from the following
information.
i) For a proof test with maintained load for each stage of loading, the
period for which the load was held, the load and the maximum
settlement or uplift recorded.
ii) For Constant Rate of Penetration (CRP) or Constant Rate of Uplift

(CRU) test, the maximum load reached, and a graph showing applied
load versus penetration (movement) or applied load versus uplift -
movement.
b) Complete schedule of all recorded data shall be submitted to the Engineer as

both hard and soft copy in spreadsheet (Excel) format within seven days of
the completion of the pile load test.
1.3.5.4 Completion of a Test
(1) Measuring equipment
On completion of a test all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled,

checked and either stored so that they are available for use in further tests or
removed from the site.
(2) Kentledge
Kentledge and its supporting structure shall be removed from the test pile and
stored so that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the site.
(3) Ground anchors and temporary piles
150 | P a g e
On completion of a preliminary test, tension piles and ground anchors shall be cut
off below ground level, removed from the site and the ground made good with
Noticed material.
(4) Preliminary test pile cap
a) The pile cap, if formed in concrete, shall be broken off and the resulting
material disposed of off the Site. If the pile cap is made of steel, then it shall
be cut off and stored so that it is available for use in further tests or removed
from the Site.
b) Preliminary test piles shall not be incorporated into the Permanent Works.
They shall be broken down to 2 metres below ground level or as required
and backfilled to the original ground level with suitable material.
(5) Test pile cap
a) On completion of a test on a working pile, the test pile cap, if in concrete,

shall be stripped, the pile left in a state ready for incorporation in the
Permanent Works and the resulting material disposed of off the site.
b) If the pile cap is made of steel, it shall be cut off and stored so that it is
available for use in further tests or removed from the site as specified.
1.3.5.5 High Strain Dynamic Testing of Piles
Dynamic pile testing, which mobilizes all or part of the available pile static capacity, shall
be used where specified or required and shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
1.3.5.6 Lateral Load Tests
Lateral load tests, where required shall be carried out using temporary plant capable of
providing an unyielding reaction of at least 1.5 times the maximum lateral load to which
the pile is to be tested. Alternatively, where tension piles of the same size and type as the
permanent piles are used for providing the reaction system for vertical load tests these
may be used for the lateral load test by jacking apart. In this case the reaction piles shall be
provided with sufficient reinforcement to sustain the effects of maximum lateral load.
1.3.5.7 Pile Integrity Tests
(1) General
151 | P a g e
a) Pile integrity testing shall be used where specified or required as a method

of proof-testing a pile as work proceeds with the aim of indirectly assessing
one or more of the following.
i) The structural integrity of the pile.
ii) The relative shape of the pile shaft and an estimate of the physical
dimensions of the pile or both.
iii) The continuity of the pile
b) Pile integrity testing, when specified, shall be performed on a sufficient

number of piles.
c) All testing shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
(2) Test Procedure
Where integrity testing is required, the test to be adopted shall be one of the
following.
i) Sonic impact test (SIT)
ii) Sonic vibration test (SVT)
iii) Alternative test, as agreed
(3) Supervision and recording of results
Pile tests shall be carried out under the direction of a person experienced in the
supervision of pile integrity tests who shall record all results in both hard and
electronic form in preparation for submission to the Engineer.
1.3.6 Diaphragm Walling
1.3.6.1 General
(1) The recommendations of BS 8004 Code of Practice for Foundation and DIN 4126
Cast-in-situ concrete diaphragm walls; design and construction shall be followed
insofar as they are applicable to diaphragm wall construction. Similar Indian
Standards for guidance or adoption are; IS 9556, IS 4651 and IS 456.
(2) The Contractor shall take full account of fact that in some locations the walls may be
close to existing structures and/or within a location where headroom is limited.
152 | P a g e
(3) The Contractor shall pay particular attention to safety aspects of the work,
employing barriers and covers as necessary.
(4) Where diaphragm walls form permanent structures, these shall also comply with all
the requirements for reinforced concrete design and construction
1.3.6.2 Method Statement
(1) The Contractor shall submit a method statement giving the full details of materials,
plant and operations involved in the construction of diaphragm walls at least 4 weeks
prior to the commencement of construction of diaphragm wall. This method statement
shall include but not be limited to the following details.
a) Dimension of walls and lengths of panels.
b) Design calculation, dimensions and details of guide walls.
c) Formation of the joints between panels, including sealing the joints and installation
of water stop.
d) Sequence of excavation and concreting of panels.
e) Methods of monitoring and checking the stability of adjacent buildings, structures

properties, pavements, railways, services, utilities road furniture and the like, all
termed EBS.
f) Methods of monitoring and checking the tolerances associated with the diaphragm
wall panels.
g) Methods of monitoring and checking the stability of the diaphragm wall trench.
h) Mixing, transporting and placing equipment for the bentonite slurry.
i) the cleaning and re-use of bentonite slurry;
j) Method of disposal of contaminated bentonite slurry.
k) Type, source, chemical and physical properties of the bentonite to be used.
l) Calculations to show that the density of the bentonite and lowest head of slurry are
sufficient to maintain the stability of the trench, in the ground conditions envisaged,
to its entire length.
153 | P a g e
m) Methods of protection of any adjacent structure and utilities existing close to the
trench.
(2) Construction of diaphragm walls shall not commence until the Contractor’s proposals
have received a “Notice to Proceed” from the Engineer
(3) Unless otherwise given Notice to proceed by the Engineer, the construction of panels
shall be continuous once excavation has commenced. Excavated panels or part panels
shall not be left open at night or during weekends.
1.3.6.3 Levels of Work
(1) Diaphragm walls shall be concreted to the levels shown on the Noticed-to drawings.
(2) The effective trimmed final wall levels shall normally be taken as 250 millimetres
below top of guide wall when concrete is cast-up to top of trench. If the groundwater
table is high and if required cut-off is low and the groundwater table is also at depth,
concreting can be stopped at lower level subject to the Notice of Engineer.
(3) Any remaining bentonite within the trench shall be displaced off using lean mix
concrete, which shall be poured to the top of the guide walls.
1.3.6.4 Length of Panels
The length of the panels to be concreted shall be defined in the Contractor's method
statement and shall be subject to a “Notice to Proceed” from the Engineer.
1.3.6.5 Tolerances
(1) Construction shall be carried out in accordance with the following normal tolerances,
unless otherwise defined by the Contractor's drawings or procedures.
a) For straight or other specified profile panels, the minimum clear distance between
the faces of the guide walls shall be the specified diaphragm wall thickness plus 25
millimetres, and the maximum distance shall be the specified diaphragm wall
thickness plus 50 millimetres. The guide walls shall be propped as necessary, to
maintain these tolerances, and the inner guide wall shall be constructed to the line
as shown on the drawings.
b) The trench face of the guide wall on the side of the trench nearest to the
subsequent main excavation shall be vertical to within 1:200. The wall face shall
154 | P a g e
not vary from a straight line or the specified profile by more than +15 millimetres
in 3 metres and shall be without ridges or abrupt irregularities.
c) The plane of the diaphragm wall face to be exposed shall be vertical to within a
tolerance of 1:200, relative to a vertical line projected from the base of the guide
wall. In addition to this tolerance, 75 millimetres shall be allowed for
protuberances resulting from irregularities in the ground excavated beyond the
general face of the wall.
d) The ends of panels shall be vertical to within a tolerance of 1:80.
e) Where recesses are to be formed by inserts in the wall, they shall be positioned
within a vertical tolerance of ±75 millimetres, a horizontal tolerance measured
along the face of the wall of ±75 millimetres, and a horizontal tolerance at right
angles to the face of the wall as constructed of ±25 millimetres measured to the
reinforcement cage.
f) The tolerance in positioning reinforcement shall be as follows.
i) Longitudinal tolerance of cage head at the top of the guide wall and measured
along the trench: ±75 millimetres.
ii) Vertical tolerance at cage head in relation to the top of the guide wall: ±50
millimetres.
iii) Lateral tolerance of reinforcement position in the direction across the width of
the wall; ±25 millimetres.
g) The tolerance in positioning couplers and starter bars for subsequent structural
connections shall be as follows.
i) Longitudinal tolerance measured along the trench, ±75 millimetres.
ii) Vertical tolerance, ±50 millimetres.
iii) Lateral tolerance in the direction across the width of panel, ±25 millimetres.
h) A minimum cover to main reinforcement shall be 75 millimetres, Minimum clear

distance between reinforcement bars shall be 100 millimetres.
i) Notwithstanding the requirements of this subsection the tolerances may be aggregated

only to the extent that they do not exceed 250 millimetres.
155 | P a g e
(2) If, during the general excavation, it is detected that the above-stated tolerances have been
exceeded, the Contractor shall draw up proposals for remedying or compensating for the
defects.
1.3.6.6 Access
The Contractor shall note the restricted access to portions of the Works and shall satisfy
himself that his method of excavation, positioning of equipment, spoil handling, placement
of reinforcement cages, stop ends, and concreting can be accommodated within these
restrictions.
1.3.6.7 Adjacent EBS
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for any movement, distortion or damage resulting
from his work to adjacent EBS.
(2) The Contractor shall be deemed to have made due allowance in his rates and prices for
all ancillary treatment and all work necessary to ensure the stability of all EBS that may
be affected by his work.
(1) Reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of Section 2 of this Volume.
(2) High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement conforming to
IS 1786-1985 and structural steel sections conforming to IS 800-1984 shall be used.
(3) Structural steel sections shall be inserted into the cage where openings shall be made at
subsequent stages.
(4) All reinforcement bars and other structural steel section used shall be clean and free
from loose mill scales, dust, rust, oils, grease, paint or other coatings which may reduce
the bond with concrete.
(5) Front and rear of cages shall be marked on Site to identify them during placement and
lifting points and design of lifting lugs shall not cause distortion of the cage.
(6) Distance spacers shall be of an agreed type, capable of resisting displacement during
cage placement within the trench and shall not entrap slurry during cage placement or
concreting.
156 | P a g e
(7) The reinforcement shall be adequately fixed to avoid displacement and to maintain the
minimum specified cover during concreting.
1.3.6.9 Concrete
(1) Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Volume 5, Clause 1.4 below. Structural
concrete shall have a minimum cement content as per the Volume 4, Clause 2.5 Outline
Design Specification Civil Structures.
(2) Minimum slump of the concrete shall be 150 millimetres and the mix shall flow easily
within the tremie pipe and be designed to produce a dense impervious concrete. Such
structural concrete shall have a minimum compressive cube strength of 35 MPa at 28
days and the water: cement ratio of the mix shall not exceed 0.40 or as required by the
design.
(3) Lean mix concrete as per IS 456-2000 clauses 5 to 8 shall be used as backfill above any
cut-off level for structural concrete and be taken to the top level of the guide walls.
1.3.6.10 Test Cubes
(1) Test cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with Clause 1.4.2.3 below
(2) Test cubes shall be taken for each panel constructed. Cubes shall be marked with the
wall panel numbers and shall be sub-marked within each panel set to indicate a
location within the panel.
1.3.6.11 Bentonite
(1) Bentonite for use in the wall support slurry shall be in accordance with the
requirements of this Contract.
(2) The Contractor shall institute a programme of regular sampling and testing to
ensure that the bentonite fluid properties are suitable for use in the Works. In this
regard IS: 9556-1980 shall be used for guidance.
1.3.6.12 Storage of Bentonite
(1) Bentonite shall be stored in dry cool conditions. Particular care shall be taken with
bulk storage to prevent balling of bentonite powder due to damp, or deterioration
of properties due to damp and heat.
157 | P a g e
(2) A suitable design of hopper cone and bentonite feeding device shall be adopted. IS
4082-1996 shall be used for guidance regarding stacking and storage of
construction materials and components at site.
1.3.6.13 Alternative Materials
(1) The Contractor may, subject to the requirements of the Contract, consider and
adopt suitable additional or alternative ingredients and additives for the wall
support slurry to that of the bentonite specified above. Samples and full details
shall be obtained from the supplier and manufacturer of such ingredients.
(2) Any such materials shall have no detrimental effect upon the stability of the
excavation or concreting or formed concrete immediate as well as long term.
(3) Ingredients to counteract the loss of slurry to the surrounding strata shall be
deemed covered by this Section.
1.3.6.14 Placing Concrete by Tremie
(1) Tremie pipes shall be clean, water-tight and with a minimum internal diameter of
200 millimetres.
(2) The tremie tube shall extend to the bottom of the trench excavation prior to
concreting and care shall be taken to ensure that all bentonite slurry is expelled
from the pipe during the initial charging operation. The tremie pipe shall be
maintained with a minimum embedment of 2 metres into the concrete to prevent
the re-entry of slurry into the pipe.
(3) The Contractor shall ensure that an adequate supply of concrete to the tremie is
available at all times so that placement is continuous until completion of the panel.
(4) The number of tremie pipes per panel shall be in accordance with the method
statement. Where more than one tremie pipe is employed during concrete pouring
to any one panel, the charging of concrete into the pipes shall be arranged so that it
is evenly distributed between the pipes and so that no differential head exists at
the concrete/slurry interface over the length of the panel. This level shall be
confirmed by soundings taken during the concrete pour.
1.3.6.15 Stop Ends
(1) Stop-ends, inserted before placement of concrete in the panel, shall be clean and have
a smooth regular surface. Any shutter release agent shall have no detrimental effect
158 | P a g e
on the finished works. Where stop-ends are inserted in sections, adequate joint
connections must be provided to ensure verticality over the whole length.
(2) Extraction of stop-ends shall be carried out at such a time and in such a manner that
no damage is caused to the concrete placed against them, or to the adjacent soil and
structures.
(3) Stop-ends shall be adequately restrained to prevent movement during concreting and
not be permanently encased in the diaphragm wall
1.3.6.16 Inserts
Inserts shall be formed at the locations shown in the Contractor's drawings and in
accordance with his method statements and procedures.
1.3.6.17 Checking and Monitoring
The Contractor shall provide all necessary monitoring instrumentation necessary for the
close and continuous checking of the movements and distortions of adjacent ground and
EBS.
1.3.6.18 Safety and Emergency Procedures
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure stability of his excavations
and guide walls and shall take all necessary precautions and be responsible for the safety
of personnel in the area of operation.
The Contractor shall maintain, available for immediate use, a sufficient quantity of slurry
to allow for any sudden loss. The loss continue despite the addition of the slurry and the
stability of the trench be placed at risk, the Contractor shall backfill with lean mix concrete
to preserve the stability of the trench and ensure the safety of adjacent ground and EBS.
The cause of the loss of slurry shall be investigated and works shall not recommence until
remedial measures have been implemented.
1.3.6.19 Site Cleanliness
The Contractor shall ensure that the site is cleared of slurry and that surplus or displaced
slurry is disposed of safely and without nuisance. All operations shall be conducted in such
a manner as to minimise any spillage of slurry over the Site, or accesses thereto.
159 | P a g e
1.3.6.20 Obstructions
(1) An obstruction is defined as material, the excavation of which hinders normal progress
and the existence of which could not have been foreseen.
(2) Upon encountering an obstruction, the Contractor shall determine the method to be
employed in removing the obstruction and such method shall be subject to the Notice
of the Engineer.
1.3.6.21 Disposal of Spoil
(1) Spoil removed from the excavation shall be separated from the slurry employed in the
excavation process. It shall be disposed of as quickly as possible to locations subject to
the Notice of the Engineer and in such a manner that spillage and annoyance be
minimised.
(2) Contaminated slurry, not suitable for re-use, shall be removed from the site and
disposed off.
1.3.6.22 Joints
(1) All joints shall be fitted with a water-stop covering the full height of the wall.
(2) Where concrete is cast against previously completed wall panels, the previously formed
concrete shall be cleaned so that solid substances are removed before the joint is
formed.
(3) When the joint is exposed upon subsequent excavation, the Contractor shall
immediately repair any joints which permit jetting or spraying of water or within
which solid foreign substances greater than 3 millimetres separate the concrete in
adjacent panels.
(4) The walls and joints formed shall satisfy the water-tightness requirements of this
Contract.
1.3.6.23 Records
The following records shall be maintained and kept for each wall panel and such records
shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
a) Name of work.
b) Panel No and reference drawing number.
160 | P a g e
c) Date and time of start and finish of panel excavation.
d) Details of any obstructions encountered; time spent, and construction method

adopted in overcoming such obstructions.
e) Date and time of completion of cage placement.
f) Date and time of start and completion of panel concreting;
g) Length of panel and width and depth of panel from top of guide wall
h) Top of guide wall level and densities;
i) Top level of wall as cast, in relation to top of guide wall at the edges and at the centre.
j) A log of soil type encountered from start to finish of excavation, and of slurry levels
and densities.
k) Volume of concrete used and time of any interruptions in concrete supply where
these exceed 15 minutes.
l) Volumes of normal and lean mix concrete.
m) Cut-off level of concrete below top of guide wall level.
n) Date, place and time of slurry control tests and results recorded.
o) Concrete test cubes, w/c ratio, slump markings, date and results obtained on testing.
p) Details of reinforcement and cage type.
q) Quantity of slurry removed from site and spoil removed from Site recorded by date.
r) A graph of theoretical and placed concrete volumes with depth.
1.3.6.24 Disposal of Slurry
Used bentonite or contaminated slurry not suitable for re-use shall be disposed of in
water-tight containers. The Contractor may propose alternative means of disposal which
shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
1.4 Structural Concrete
1.4.1 Concrete Materials
1.4.1.1 General
161 | P a g e
(1) This work shall comprise the construction of all or portions of structures with
cement concrete, of the required class or classes, with or without reinforcement,
with or without admixtures, constructed in accordance with the Contract and the
relevant Standards to the lines, levels, grades and dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
(2) Constituent materials for the concrete mix shall comply with the requirements of
IS:456 or BS 5328, unless otherwise given Notice by the Engineer.
(3) Ordinary Portland cement (OPC) of 43 grade and 53 grade conforming to IS

8112-1989 and IS 12269-1987 respectively shall be used. Portland pozzolana
cement (PPC) conforming to IS 1486 can also be used. The Engineer may direct
the usage of sulphate resistant Portland cement conforming to IS 12330 for
structural elements exposed to soil. In all cases the cement shall meet the 28 day
strength requirement of IS 8112-1989 or IS 12269-1987.
(4) Testing and non-conformances affecting the standard of the concrete shall be
notified to the Engineer in-line with the Quality Assurance (QA) procedure such
that mitigation may be effected expeditiously within the critically defined
timeframes.
1.4.1.2 Cement
(1) General
If soil has soluble salts in excess of 0.5%, sulphate-resistant cement shall be used
conforming to IS12330 (or BS 4027), or total chloride content in cement shall in no
case exceed 0.05 percent by mass of cement. Also, total sulphur content calculated
as sulphuric anhydride (SO3), shall in no case exceed 2.5%and 3.0% when tri-
calcium aluminate per cent by mass is up to 5% or greater than 5% respectively
(2) Testing
a) Cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the

requirements of the relevant Standard. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the manufacturer's QA forms to demonstrate that the cement
complies with relevant standards.
162 | P a g e
b) Before ordering cement, the Contractor shall submit relevant QA details on the
proposed supplier and methods of transport, storage and certification to the
Engineers for Notice to proceed (HOLD POINT). It must be proven that the
quantity and quality required can be attained and maintained throughout the
construction period.
c) Representative samples of the proposed cement may be required to be taken

and forwarded to an independent laboratory for analyses before the source is
Noticed. If cement is imported, fresh tests as per the relevant Standards shall be
conducted in a Noticed laboratory. Subsequent to obtaining the Engineer's
Notice. The Contractor shall not change the agreed arrangements without the
prior Notice by the Engineer. Each consignment of cement shall be
accompanied by a certificate which shall be submitted to the Engineer
immediately on delivery, substantiating the place of manufacture and the
results of required testing carried out on the batch.
d) The Contractor may be required to sample cement and test such samples in
accordance with the relevant or equivalent Indian Standards. The Contractor
shall store the cement so that separate consignments can be identified and used
in order of delivery to site (first-in, first-out process). In no circumstances shall
cement that has exceeded its “use-by” date be allowed as part of the concrete
mix.
(3) Cement Delivery and Storage
a) Cement shall be delivered in bulk or in the original manufacturer's sealed and

marked bags and shall be protected from the weather by enclosed transfer
systems or other Noticed coverings. The Contractor shall provide silos to store
sufficient bulk cement for continuity of work, and cement shall be placed therein
upon delivery.
b) All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent cement dust causing a

nuisance.
c) On receipt of Notice from Engineer cement that has been damaged or does not
comply with the Contract requirements shall not be used in the Works and be
removed from the Site within 3 days of the Contractor's receipt of such Notice.
163 | P a g e
1.4.1.3 Aggregate
(1) Aggregate Sources
Prior to commencing any concrete work, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's
Notice for the proposed types and sources of aggregate. Sampling of aggregates shall
be as per IS 2430.
(2) Coarse Aggregates
a) Coarse aggregate for all classes of concrete shall conform to the

requirements of IS 383. It shall be furnished in two separate sizes; either the
20 millimetres down and or the 38 millimetres down to No. 4 as required by
the Standard.
b) Physical tests for suitability shall be carried out in accordance with IS 2386
or Parts I to VIII.
c) Coarse aggregate shall be clean, free from dust and other deleterious
material. For reinforced and pre-stressed concrete aggregate shall be well-
graded and durable with nominal 20-millimetre sized stones.
d) Hand-broken stone may be used providing such complies with the Contract
requirements.
e) Water absorption shall be less than 3% by weight (ASTM C 117)
(3) Fine Aggregate
a) Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of IS 383 or as required to

meet the design requirements.
b) Water absorption shall be less than 3% by weight
(4) Alkali-Silica Reactivity (ASR)
a) The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete mix complies with the
requirements of this Contract regarding "Minimising Risk of Alkali-Silica
Reaction in Concrete”, (Clause 1.4.1.7)
b) The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete mix complies with the
requirements of this Contract regarding "Minimising Risk of Alkali-Silica
Reaction in Concrete”, (Section 1.4.1.7)
164 | P a g e
c) The results of the Contractor's weekly ASR monitoring tests shall be

submitted in writing to the Engineer for his Notice
(5) Chloride Content
a) The chloride content of aggregates shall be within the recommended limits

stated in IS 383 or BS 882.
b) The chloride content of the concrete mix shall be within the recommended
limit of IS 456 or BS 8110.
c) Chloride levels shall be determined daily in accordance with the methods

described in BS 812.
(6) Sulphate Content
The total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix, expressed as SO3, shall
not exceed the recommended limits in IS 456 or BS 8110.
(7) Storage
a) All aggregates shall be stored in such a way that they shall be kept free from
contact with deleterious matter.
b) All aggregate shall be shaded from direct sunlight by means of a roof of

sufficient height to enable unimpeded access to plant. Spraying of aggregate
stockpiles with water shall be undertaken as necessary.
c) Aggregate of different sizes shall be stored separately shall be stored in

masonry or concrete-based bins or on stages to prevent intermixing,
segregation and the inclusion of dirt and foreign materials. . Storage bins
shall be emptied and cleaned regularly. All aggregate hoppers shall be
painted white.
(1) Steel for Reinforcement
a) Only thermo-mechanically treated reinforcing bars of grade Fe 415/500

with minimum total elongation of 14.5% conforming to IS 1786-1986 shall
be supplied and used as steel for reinforcement.
165 | P a g e
b) All reinforcement bars shall be procured from main steel suppliers and re-
rolled steel shall not be used under any circumstances.
(2) Binding/Tying Wire
Tying wire shall be finally annealed mild steel of core diameter approximately 1.25
millimetres or as specified by the Contractor and Noticed by the Engineer. Galvanized
Iron wire shall be used for binding reinforcement as well as for tying cover blocks with
reinforcement.
(3) Testing & Inspection
a) The Contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer's certificates of tests results
relating to the steel reinforcement to be supplied, and independent test results
obtained from a Noticed laboratory in respect of samples taken from reinforcement
delivered to the Site.
b) Every bar shall be inspected before before assembling and any defective, brittle
excessive rusted or burnt bar shall be removed. Cracked end of bars shall be cut-out.
(4) Storage
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above ground, on timber supports or on a concrete

slab, under cover and racked as necessary for protection. b) Stored steel shall not be at any
time in direct contract with the ground, floor, slab or racks.
1.4.1.5 Water
(1) General
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements and procure fresh potable water
for the mixing and curing of concrete. Testing of such water shall be in accordance
with IS 3025.
(2) Quality
a) Water to be used for mixing and curing concrete and mortar shall be fresh
and free from dissolved or suspended matter which may be harmful and
shall comply with the requirements of IS 456.
166 | P a g e
b) Water samples from the intended source of supply shall be taken for
analysis before any concrete work is commenced, and at intervals
throughout the duration of the works.
c) Where potable water supply is not available the Contractor shall obtain
confirmation of quality and reliability of a proposed source from the
appropriate Water Authority and shall test the water for its chemical and
other impurities before its use in the Works. Cost of all such tests shall be
borne by the Contractor.
1.4.1.6 Admixtures
(1) General
a) The Engineer’s Notice shall be obtained prior to using any admixture in any
concrete mix. The minimum cement content specified shall not be shall not
be reduced on account of use of admixtures.
b) Admixtures shall conform to IS: 9103 or BS 5075 and BS 1014.
c) Admixtures containing chlorides or other potential corrosive agents shall

not be used.
(2) Quality
a) If admixtures are permitted these shall be used in the correct quantities.

Noticed equipment and methods shall be used for dispensing and
incorporating the admixture in the concrete; the dispensing unit shall be
designed so that the discharge of the admixture is visible.
b) The concrete tests described herein shall be conducted with the admixture
incorporated to establish that specified strengths are achieved, and that
densities are not reduced. If air-entraining agents are used the density shall
not be reduced by more than 5%.
c) Set-retarding and water-reducing admixtures shall comprise ligno-

sulphonate.
d) Air-entraining agents shall comprise neutralized vinsol resin.
167 | P a g e
e) The manufacturer's declared equivalent acid soluble alkali content and the
dosage rate of any admixture or pigment to be incorporated shall be
included with details of all concrete mixes
f) The alkali content of admixtures shall be taken into account when

determining the total equivalent alkali content of the concrete mix.
1.4.1.7 Minimising the Risk of Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) in Concrete
(1) Concrete mixes for use in the Permanent Works shall comply with the Contract. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer of his proposals for complying with this
requirement.
(2) The materials shall satisfy one of the following requirements.
a) The reactive alkali content shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6% by
mass when defined and tested in accordance with this Contract.
b) The total mass of reactive alkali in the concrete mix shall not exceed 3
kg/m3 of concrete when defined, tested and calculated in accordance with
this Contract.
c) The aggregate shall be classed as non-reactive in accordance with this

Contract.
(3) Cementitious Material (Hydraulic and Latent Hydraulic Binders):
a) The term alkali refers to the alkali metals, i.e., sodium and potassium
expressed as their oxides. The reactive alkali content of Portland cements
shall be defined as the percentage by mass of equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O)
calculated from the following relationship.
b) % equivalent Na2O = % acid soluble Na2O + 0.658 x (% acid soluble K2O)
c) The method used in determining the acid soluble alkali content of the
materials shall be in accordance with BS 4550: Part 2: Subsection 16.2.
d) The Contractor shall make available the certified average acid soluble alkali
content of Portland cements on a weekly basis.
e) The Contractor shall give immediate Notice of any change which may increase
the certified average acid soluble alkali content above the level used in the mix
168 | P a g e
design for the concrete. A revised mix design for any concrete which would be
affected by the increased alkali content shall be submitted to the Engineer’s
Representative for his Notice with notification of the change.
(4) Minimising risk by use of cementitious material containing less than 0.6% of reactive
alkali.
a) These requirements shall be met provided the contribution of alkalier from other
source does not exceed 0.2 kg/m3.
b) The cementitious material shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) complying with
Indian Standards and shall have additionally a certified maximum acid soluble alkali
content not exceeding 0.6%. The Contractor shall provide on request weekly
certificates which name the source of the cement and confirm compliance with the
Contract.
c) Minimising risk by limiting the reactive alkali content of the concrete to 3 kg/m3.
d) The reactive alkali content of the concrete contributed by OPC to the concrete shall be
calculated from:
A=Cxa,
100
where
A = reactive alkali content of the concrete to the nearest 0.1 (kg/m3)
C = target mean Portland cement content of the concrete (kg/m3)
a = certified average acid soluble alkali content of OPC (%).
e) Where reactive alkalis in excess of 0.2 kg/m3 are contributed to the concrete from
sources other than the cementetious material, the limit of 3 kg/m3 from the
cementetious material shall be reduced by the total amount so contributed. The
reactive alkali contributed by sodium chloride contamination of aggregates shall be
calculated from:
H = 0.76 x (NFxMF)+(NCxMC) kg/m3

100
169 | P a g e
Where,
H = equivalent alkali contribution made to the concrete by the sodium chloride
NF = chloride ion content of the fine aggregate as a percentage by mass of dry aggregates
and measured according to BS 812: Part 4
MF = fine aggregate content (kg/m3)
NC = chloride ion content of the coarse aggregate as a percentage by mass of dry

aggregate and measured according to BS 812: Part 4: 1976 (now in draft as Part 117)
MC = coarse aggregate content (kg/m3). The factor 0.76 is obtained from a consideration
of the composition of seawater.
The chloride ion content of aggregate sources containing 0.01% of chloride ion by
mass or more shall be determined weekly in accordance with BS 812 or another
Noticed method. When the chloride ion level is less than 0.01% it shall be regarded as
nil.
(5) The Contractor shall provide certificates on request confirming compliance with the
Contract which state the following.
a) The target means cementitious material content of the concrete.
b) The names of the works manufacturing the cement.
c) A weekly report of the cement alkali determinations.
d) The certified average acid soluble alkali content of OPC.
(6) Minimising the Risk by Using Selected Aggregates
Fine and coarse aggregate material shall comply with the requirements of IS 383
and/or AASHTO Standard Specifications (M6 and M80 respectively) to be taken out to
conform to 512(2).
(7) Water
a) Water for use in the manufacture of concrete shall be obtained from a public
utility supply or from a source Noticed by Engineer.
b) Water shall be potable and comply with the requirement of IS 456 and or BS
3148
170 | P a g e
c) Where potable water supply is not available the Contractor shall obtain
confirmation of quality and reliability of a proposed source from the
appropriate water authority test the water for its chemical and other
impurities before using. Cost of all such tests shall be borne by the contractor.
1.4.2 Concrete Workmanship
1.4.2.1 Grade
(1) Mixes General
Concrete shall be provided in accordance with IS 456 or BS 5328 except where

required otherwise by this Contract.
(2) Concrete Mixes
The concrete mixes to be used in the Permanent Works shall be tabulated in the form
in a typical “Table of Concrete Mixes” as given below.
TABLE OF CONCRETE MIXES
(To be completed by the Contractor)
Description used on Drawings
Type of Mix
Type of Cement.
Type of Aggregate Coarse:
Fine:
Nominal Aggregate maximum size (mm)
Grade
Minimum cement content (kg/m3)
Sampling rate (cubic metres) - 28 day normal curing
- 7 day normal curing
Workability - Slump (millimetres)
- VB(s)
Compacting
171 | P a g e
Maximum free water/cement ratio
Maximum cement content (kg/m3)
Special cement
Special aggregate. Coarse:
Fine:
Fine aggregate (%)
Admixtures Specified:
Prohibited:
Amount:
Air content
Temperature of Fresh concrete (oC) Maximum:
Minimum:
Density of Concrete (kg/m3)
Maximum:
Minimum:
(3) Chlorides
The total chloride content of the concrete mix shall be in accordance with the limitations
given in IS 456 or BS 8110
(4) Sulphates
The total water soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix shall not exceed the
limitations given in IS 456 or BS 8110.
1.4.2.2 Trial Mixes
(1) Laboratory Trials
a) Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an average compressive strength; namely a

specified characteristic strength plus a standard deviation factor; in accordance with
acceptance criteria given in IS: 456 or relevant British Standard.
172 | P a g e
b) Not less than 35 days before commencement of concreting, the Contractor shall carry
out trials to determine the concrete mixes which will satisfy the requirements of the
Contract. The materials and conditions used shall reflect those intended to be used for
the Works. A minimum six test cubes shall be made from each of three consecutive
batches with three cubes from each batch to be tested at 7 days and three cubes at 28
days.
c) If the average 28 day strength (being defined as the measured stress when the cube
fails) exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 20% or more, and the other
requirements of IS 456 and IS 10262 or BS 5328 are met, then the trial mix
proportions may be used to commence the Permanent Works. Otherwise further
trials shall be carried out using re-designed mixes until the minimum required
strength is achieved.
d) Additional Requirements of trial mixes shall be tested to determine the following

properties of mixes proposed for initial field tests.
i. Bleeding in accordance with ASTM C232.
ii. Drying shrinkage in accordance with BS 1881.
iii. Air content, if applicable.
iv. Free water/cement ratio.
v. Workability.
vi. Wet and dry densities.
vii. Indirect tensile strength in accordance with BS 1881 including cylinder - splitting
and beam tests.
e) If the test results obtained do not satisfy the Contract or the design requirements, the
mixes shall be re-designed.
(1) Initial field tests
a) Trial mixes shall be prepared under full-scale site conditions and tested in accordance
with IS 10262 or BS 1881.
173 | P a g e
b) Samples of concrete incorporating the reinforcing details to be used shall be cast and
examined, before hardening using hand tools, and after hardening by coring to assess
the mixes. Cores shall be 150 mm diameter. by 200 mm long.
1.4.2.3 Quality Control
(1) Test Cubes
a) Cubes shall be manufactured in an on-site laboratory, specially equipped for the

purpose, in controlled conditions. They shall be made, cured, stored, transported and
tested in accordance with IS 516 and BS 1881.
b) The cube-testing machine shall be housed in a laboratory and calibrated to BS 1610

when delivered. The machine calibration shall be verified at 3- monthly minimum
intervals by a testing authority having National Accreditation Board for Testing and
Calibration Laboratories (NABL) Certification.
(2) Cubes Samples
a) A sample of concrete shall be taken at random on eight separate occasions during

each of the first five days of using a mix. The standard deviation shall be calculated
from at least 25 individual cube results each representing separate batches of similar
concrete produced by the same batching plant under the same supervision. The
margin for the concrete batching plant shall be 1.64 times the standard deviation.
b) Thereafter one sample shall be taken at random for each class of concrete from every
group of 25 batches made by each concrete batching plant, and at least one sample
shall be taken each day that concrete of a particular grade is made. Samples shall also
be taken and two cylinders cast to determine the indirect tensile strength of the
concrete at 7 days and 28 days, as specified in relevant IS code or BS 1881.
c) These samples shall be taken from every 100 batches, but at least once a week during
concreting operations, and shall coincide with samples taken for test cubes. The
frequency of sampling may be required to be varied.
d) In addition to the above requirements, at least one sample shall be taken from each
individual structural unit, or part of a unit, when the latter is the product of a single
pour.
174 | P a g e
e) From each sample two cubes shall be made for testing at 28 days and one for testing
at 7 days for control purposes. The 28-day Concrete Cube Strength (CCS) shall be the
mean of two cubes. The procedures shall be repeated when materials or design mixes
are changed.
(3) Cube Strength Results
a) The results will be unacceptable if:
i. the average strength determined from any four consecutive test cubes does not exceed
the specified CCS by 0.5 times the current margin, or;
ii. one or more values in forty is less than 85% specified CCS, or;
iii. three or more values in forty are less than specified CCS;
In which case any of the following actions may be instructed.
▪ Change the mix.
▪ Improve quality control.
▪ Cut and test cores from placed concrete.
▪ Load-test relevant structural units.
▪ Carry out non-destructive tests on as placed concrete. Cut-out and replace defective
concrete.
b) If the range of individual cube strength made from the same sample exceeds 15% of
the mean then the method of making, curing and testing cubes shall be checked.
c) In the event of a result having a range exceeding 20% the Contractor shall submit his
proposals corrective action for Notice by the Engineer.
d) The Contractor shall cut concrete cores from as-built locations as may be required by
the Engineer and test them to BS 1881 as modified by Concrete Society Report TR 11.
If the values, reduced by 0.69 Mega Pascal per week of age in excess of 28 days, are
less than 75% CCS, the concrete shall be cut out and replaced unless otherwise agreed
with the Engineer.
175 | P a g e
(4) Concrete Durability and Other Tests
a) Concrete shall be tested for drying shrinkage, water absorption and moisture
movement as directed for which 102 mm cubes and 76 mm by 76 mm prisms shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with BS 1881.
b) The concrete shall be tested for permeability according to DIN 1048 and ability to
resist chloride ion penetration according to ASTM C-1202.
c) The acceptance limits are as follows.
i. Drying shrinkage: 0.05%
ii. Moisture movement 0.03%
iii. Water absorption refer to item (5) below.
d) Cubes may be required and trials carried out to determine stripping times for
formwork, the duration of curing and to check-testing and sampling errors. The air
content of air-entrained concrete shall be determined for each batch produced until
consistency has been achieved, when fewer batches may be tested.
e) During concreting of the Permanent Works six 150 mm diameter by 200 mm long
cores shall be cut through horizontal reinforcement to assess plastic qualities. The
qualities shall be equal to those obtained in the initial field tests.
f) Compaction factor, slump, or other workability tests shall be carried out as required
during concreting of Permanent Works to control workability at the batching plant at
the site of the pour. The degree of workability shall be as for the trial mixes; permitted
tolerances shall be in accordance with IS 1199 or BS 5320.
g) Tests shall be carried out at least daily for the moisture content and weekly for
absorption value of the aggregate. The values for the aggregate at the mixer shall be
determined and changes made to the mix to compensate for variations.
(5) Concrete Durability Tests: Acceptance Criteria
Concrete Acceptable
References
Durability Tests Values
RCPT(Coulombs) <1000 (28 days) ASTM C1202
176 | P a g e
Concrete Acceptable
References
Durability Tests Values
ASTM C642 &

Water Absorption 1.50%
BS1881-122
0.2% to 0.3% by ACI 301 & ASTM

Chloride Content
wt of cement C1218, EN 206-1
Sulphate Content 3% BS1881-124
DIN 1048 & BS EN

Water Permeability <10mm
12390
Initial Surface
Absorption Test BS 1881- 208
(ISAT) 0.25ml/m2/sec
Concrete of permanent structures shall fulfil the above mentioned minimum values.
(6) Scheme for monitoring
a) Monitoring shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant Standards, as

implemented under the requirements of ISO 9002.
b) Compliance of the concrete and associated work to required levels of performance

shall be captured in the monitoring regime.
c) The scheme implemented shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer and undergo
regulatory QA checks to ensure the levels of competence in monitoring are being
consistently adopted and undertaken in the Works.
1.4.2.4 Batching
(1) Machinery
Batching shall be by weigh-batching machines equipped with accuracy checks for the
weighing mechanism. The machines shall be cleaned, checked and adjusted regularly. The
177 | P a g e
water supply to the concrete mixers shall have a metering system to control and record the
amount.
(2) Accuracy of Batching
Batched materials shall be measured to the following tolerances and discharged into the
mixer without loss.
Cement ± 2% of the weight of the cement in the batch.
Aggregate ± 2% of the weight of each aggregate in the batch.
Water ± 2% of the weight of water added to the batch.
Admixture ± 5% of the amount to be added to the batch.
(3) Calibration of Measuring Equipment
a) Measuring equipment shall be checked and calibrated at the start of preliminary

concrete tests and at weekly intervals. The necessary test weights and the like shall be
kept available on site. Scales shall be checked over their complete range by a specialist
every three month.
b) A calibrated container shall be used to check the accuracy of admixtures dispensers

once each month. The results of these checks shall be notified.
(4) Mixing
Concrete constituents shall be thoroughly mixed in batches. The machines shall be capable
of discharging while running.
(5) Ready-Mixed Concrete
a) Ready-mixed concrete shall not be used unless Noticed and shall comply with the
requirements specified herein and those of IS:4826 and BS 5328.
b) The supply and use of ready-mixed concrete shall be subject to the Contractor's QA
procedures.
c) Ready-mixed concrete shall be obtained from a depot subject to the Notice of the
Engineer. and transported to the Site in truck type mixers which shall continuously
agitate the concrete mix.
178 | P a g e
d) The concrete shall be placed in its final position and compacted within 2 hours of the
introduction of cement to the aggregates.
e) The ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Works shall comply with this Specification.
One cubic metre of each mix shall be supplied to Site before it is required in the Works
to allow the Contractor to carry out workability tests.
f) For plant-mixed concrete the delivery note for each batch shall state the time at which
the concrete was mixed and the weight of the constituents of each mix.
g) When truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall only be added under the Contractor’s
direct supervision either at the Site or at the central batching plant in accordance with
the standard Quality Procedures. In no circumstances shall extra water be added to
the concrete after the original mixing is complete.
h) Samples for testing shall be taken as the concrete is placed in its final position.
i) The Contractor shall arrange for the ready-mix concrete supplier to provide the
facilities stated in BS 5328, cl 7.1 or 13.1.
(6) Records
a) Daily returns shall be provided showing the quantities of cement and the total volume
batched of each class of concrete for each section of the Works.
b) The Contractor shall submit detailed records and test results for all test cubes and
specimens taken without delay to the Engineer for his Notice.
1.4.2.5 Control of Chlorides and Sulphates
(1) Chlorides in Concrete
a) The levels of equivalent acid-soluble chlorides as NaCl (Cl x 1.65 = NaCl) in the
constituents of concrete as stated elsewhere are indicative and are subject to the over-
riding limits for the mixes. The total estimated content as a percentage by weight of the
cement in the mix shall not exceed the following limits.
i. For reinforced concrete
0.5% if made with Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)
0.1% if made with Sulphate-Resistant Portland Cement (SRPC)
ii. For mass concrete
179 | P a g e
with OPC 0.2% if made with SRPC
0.2% if made with SRPC
b) The Contractor shall test the constituents of the concrete to establish these contents as
provided for elsewhere in this Contract.
c) In addition, regular tests to BS 1881: Part 6 for chloride content shall be made on the
hardened concrete. The following values are considered tolerable but shall be be
subject to Notice by the Engineer.
i. For reinforced concrete made with OPC
95% of the test results less than 0.4% NaCl by weight of cement and no result
greater than 0.5% NaCl by weight of cement.
ii. For reinforced concrete made with SRPC
iii. For mass concrete made with OPC
95% of the test results less than 1% NaCl by weight of cement, and no result
iv. For mass concrete made with SRPC
d) In the event that the SRPC used contains a proportion by weight of tri-calcium
aluminate which approaches 4% to 8%, then Notice shall be sought from the Engineer
for an appropriate adjustment of the relevant chloride content limits.
(2) Sulphates in Concrete
a) The level of acid-soluble sulphates (SO3) in the mix shall satisfy all of the following
requirements.
Coarse aggregate ≤ 0.4% by weight.
Fine aggregate ≤ 0.4% by weight.
Water ≤ 500 mg/l.
180 | P a g e
b) The total estimated sulphate content (SO3) of the mix including that present in the
cement shall not exceed 3.7% by weight of cement in the mix.
c) In addition, regular tests in accordance with BS 1881: Part 6 shall be carried out on the
hardened concrete to determine the total sulphate content, which shall not exceed 4%
by weight of cement in the mix.
(3) Permissible Level of Chloride and Sulphates
The permissible level of chlorides and sulphates stated in this Contract shall not be
considered as mean values for the whole of the Works but shall apply to any concrete used
in the Works.
(4) Concrete for water-retaining structures shall comply with IS 3370.
1.4.2.6 Placing
(1) General
a) Concrete shall be transported by means which prevent contamination (by dust, rain and
the like) segregation or loss of ingredients and shall be transported from the batching
plant and placed without delay.
b) Concrete shall be placed in the positions and in sequences indicated on the Drawings.
Placing shall not commence until the fixing and condition of reinforcement and items to be
embedded and the condition of the containing surfaces or formwork have been Noticed by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written notification not less
than 24 hours prior to his intention to place concrete in the Works.
c) Concrete shall be placed directly in its final position without segregation or displacement
of the reinforcement, embedded items and formwork. Where necessary concrete may be
placed in water in accordance with the Contract requirements.
d) Concrete shall not be dropped through a height greater than 1 meter.
(2) Extent of Pours
a) The limit of individual pours and the height of lifts shall be as Noticed.
b) For walls, the length of panel placed at one time shall not exceed 6m; adjacent panels shall
not be placed within 2 days but shall be placed as soon as practicable thereafter.
Subsequent vertical lifts shall not be poured within 2 days.
181 | P a g e
c) Floors, roofs and ground slabs shall be placed in a sequence of pours to the approval of the
Designer and the Notice of the Engineer.
d) If the use of slip-forms or paving trains is permitted, the above pour limits may be revised.
e) The sequence of pours shall be arranged to minimise thermal and shrinkage strains.
(3) Placing Equipment
Concrete shall generally be placed without segregation by pumping or bottom-opening skips. If

chutes are used their slopes shall not cause segregation and spouts or baffles shall be provided.
(4) Time for Placing
Concrete and mortar must be placed and compacted within 30 minutes of water being added to
the mix or otherwise included via damp aggregates, unless admixtures are in use. Partially-set
concrete shall not be used in the Works.
(5) Compaction
a) Concrete shall be compacted during placing by Noticed internal vibrators. The vibrators
shall operate at a frequency of not less than 10,000 cycles per minute and shall be
designed for continuous operation.
b) The performance of vibrators shall suit the working conditions and depending on the
thickness of layer to be compacted; 25 mm, 40 mm, 60 mm and 75 mm diameter internal
vibrators may be used. The radius of influence of the vibrator used shall ensure that the
concrete mass being vibrated is compacted at a speed commensurate with the rate of
supply of concrete.
(6) Vibrators
a) Vibrators shall penetrate the full depth of the layer of concrete placed and just into the
layer below and be withdrawn slowly to avoid the formation of voids.
b) Vibration shall not be applied directly or indirectly to concrete after the initial set has
taken place, nor shall it be used to make concrete flow in formwork.
c) The Contractor shall have a minimum of two spare vibrators available during each
concrete pour in case of mechanical breakdowns.
182 | P a g e
(7) Continuity of Placing
a) Placing in each section of work shall be continuous between construction joints. The
Contractor shall make provision for standby equipment.
b) If the placing of concrete is delayed due to breakdown then the Contractor shall erect
vertical stop-ends and form a construction joint or remove the concrete already placed
and restart after repair of the breakdown.
(8) Placing in Inclement Weather
a) Placing shall not take place in the open during rain or inclement weather. If such
conditions are likely to occur the Contractor shall provide protection for the materials,
plant and formwork so that placing of concrete may proceed.
b) If strong winds are prevalent protection from driving rain and dust shall be provided for.
c) During storms and heavy rain periods only underground or enclosed concrete pours shall
be permitted and this shall also be subject to where there is a reasonable level of
protection to the concreting work.
(9) Placing in High or Low Temperatures
a) The temperature of fresh concrete shall not exceed 32 oC, nor drop below 5oC, nor exceed
the temperatures stated in the table of mixes. The lowest of these shall be used at the time
of placing concrete.
b) The maximum concrete temperature after placement shall not exceed 50oC nor be 30oC
above the temperature at the time of placement, whichever is the lower.
c) The Contractor shall comply with the document entitled "Concrete in Hot Countries"
published by the FIP congress at New Delhi 1986. The procedures the Contractor wishes
to employ in this regard shall be subject to Notice by the Engineer’s.
d) The Contractor shall supply suitable maximum and minimum temperature

thermometers and record the shade and open-air temperatures at locations where
concrete is being placed. A recommendation for cold weather concreting is provided in
IS: 7861 (Part 2).
(10) Placement at Night
183 | P a g e
If Notice has been given for placing concrete at night or in dark interiors, adequate lighting,
ventilation and access shall be provided when mixing, transportation and placing are in
progress.
(11) Placement Underwater
a) Underwater concreting shall be carried out with minimum disturbance of the water.
Running water and wave wash shall be controlled.
b) The specified concrete grade shall be used, and the mix design shall provide for good
flowing ability.
c) Tremie pipes, bottom-dump skips, or other Noticed placing equipment shall be used.
d) Segregation shall be avoided.
e) Placing shall commence in sections and continue to completion subject to Notice by the
Engineer.
f) The tremie pipe shall be buried in the concrete for at least 1.5m and the tremie pipe
must not be emptied until the pour is complete.
g) If a bottom-dump skip is used, the contents shall be covered by canvas or similar before
lowering into the water. The doors shall be opened when the skip is resting on the
bottom with no tension in the support cable, and the skip shall be lifted gradually so
that the concrete flows out steadily.
(12) Preparation Before Placing
a) Before placing concrete for reinforced work on the ground, the formation shall be
compacted as specified and a screed of blinding concrete shall be applied to form a
surface for construction.
b) Before placing concrete on or against rock, masonry, brickwork or old concrete, loose
material shall be removed, and the surface washed down; water seepage shall be
stopped or channelled away from the work.
c) For mass concrete placed against masonry or brickwork the following shall apply.
▪ The mortar joints in the face work shall have fully hardened.
▪ The water-cement ratio of the concrete shall be increased to compensate for absorption
of moisture by the existing work.
184 | P a g e
▪ The surface shall be soaked prior to placing.
▪ The concrete shall be worked around ties and bond stones and into open joints.
(1) Reinforcement General
a) Steel rod reinforcement shall be cut, bent and fixed in accordance with IS 456 or BS
8110: Part 1.
b) Cold bending shall be used which does not damage the material.
c) Bending hot at a cherry-red heat not exceeding 840oC may be Noticed except for bars
dependent on cold-working for strength.
d) Bars shall not be cooled by quenching.
(2) Fixing
a) The number, size, form and position of pieces of reinforcement shall be as shown on the
Drawings. They shall be held in position in the formwork during the placing of concrete
by use of distance pieces and spacer bars.
b) Links shall be taut so that bars are braced, and the inside of their curved parts shall be
in contact with the bars being connected. Binding wire shall be twisted tight with pliers
and the free ends shall be bent inwards.
c) Reinforcement shall be grit-blasted before use if instructed by the Employer’s
d) Representative to remove rust, oil, grease, salt and other deleterious matter, and where
pitting has occurred the causes and products thereof.
e) Reinforcement temporarily projecting from the concrete at joints shall not be bent out
of position without Notice of Engineer, in which event the reinforcement shall be bent
over a suitably sized former to prevent any damage or over-stressing.
(3) Bar Bending Schedules
The Contractor will provide drawings detailing the reinforcement required and shall
prepare bending schedules in accordance with SP 34 of BIS and IS 5525 BS 4466. Laps
and anchorages shall be as stated in IS 456 or BS 5400, Part 4.
(1) Welding
185 | P a g e
a) Electric arc welding may be used, if Noticed, for joining bars. Covered-alloy or shielded-
arc electrodes shall conform to IS 814 and/or BS 639.
b) Workmanship shall be to IS 2251 or BS 5135.
c) Joints shall be butt-welded with standard double-V or double-U welds.
(4) Cover to Reinforcement
a) Control of the minimum thickness of concrete cover to reinforcement shall be achieved

by the use of Noticed concrete or plastic spacers. Minimum cover shall be as specified
in the Contract or IS 456.
b) If concrete spacers are used they shall be of similar concrete grade to the main concrete
and shall have non-metallic ties or Galvanized Iron protected ties. For 30 MPa or more
concrete, the spacers shall comply with the requirements of this Contract for water
absorption.
c) Cover blocks used also should be same mix as the concrete of member and be with
roughened faces
1.4.2.8 Joints
(1) Construction Joints
a) Construction joints shall be located, and the sequence of placing arranged as Noticed, to
minimise shrinkage and thermal strains in the concrete.
b) Concrete placing shall not be interrupted except where joints occur and shall continue
after normal hours if necessary to achieve this.
c) Joints shall be formed square to the work with keyways included.
d) Before placing is resumed at a joint the set surface shall be roughened to remove
laitance and expose the aggregate; the aggregate shall not be damaged. If damaging
materials have come into contact with the surface of the joint the concrete shall be cut
back, and the roughened surface cleaned by compressed air or water jets and brushed
and watered immediately before placing. If required, the surface shall be coated with a
layer of stiff cement grout prior to placing the new concrete.
e) Chemical surface-retarding agents shall not be used.
186 | P a g e
f) Construction joints shall be sealed with a Noticed sealant at external and liquid-contact
faces.
g) Construction joints in water-retaining structures shall incorporate a Noticed water-

stop.
(2) Expansion, Contraction and Movement Joints
a) Expansion, contraction and other movement joints shall be incorporated in the Works
as shown on the Drawings.
b) Where shown on the Drawings, expansion joint fillers shall be supplied and installed.
Filler material shall be stored flat on a dry surface adequately protected from rain or
moisture in such a way that the material does not deteriorate. Filler material which has
been damaged or has started to deteriorate shall not be incorporated in the works.
c) Movement joints shall be sealed with a Noticed sealant applied in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. The
surface of the concrete to which the sealant is to adhere shall be straight and cleaned of
all filler material, dirt, oil, grease and other matter. The sealant shall be applied by
methods recommended by the manufacturer so that the sealant is brought flush to the
surface of structure and a smooth surface is achieved. Excess material and spillage shall
be properly cleaned off and removed.
d) Dowel bars shall be installed and cast-in across the movement joint where shown on
the Drawings. The bars shall be straight with clean cut ends of the diameters and
lengths as shown on the Drawings or in the Schedules. Cutting and cleaning of the
dowel bars shall comply with the requirements of the Contract
e) The bars shall be firmly supported in the positions shown on the Drawings so that they
remain accurately parallel and are not displaced during the casting of the concrete in
the first part of the structure. After the concrete has hardened and the formwork
removed, the projecting ends shall be cleaned of all concrete spillage and painted with
two coats of a Noticed bituminous paint and caps shall be fitted to the free ends of the
bars. Dowel bar end caps shall be of cardboard or other material, of correct diameter
for the dowel bar and of sufficient length to allow the specified movement of the two
adjacent concrete structures. They shall be manufactured expressly for this purpose by
a Noticed manufacturer.
187 | P a g e
f) The Contractor shall take care to protect the projecting ends of dowel bars from
bending or other damage prior to concreting the succeeding bay. The bituminous paint
shall be applied as soon as practicable, but end caps shall not be fitted until
immediately prior to the succeeding concreting operations.
(3) Water-stops
The layout and installation of the water-stops shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation and shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
(4) Bolts, Inserts and Openings
a) All fixing blocks, brackets, built in bolts, holes, chases, etc., shall be accurately set out
and formed and carefully sealed prior to the concrete being placed. No cutting away of
concrete for any of these items shall be done.
b) Bolts and other inserts to be cast into the concrete shall be securely fixed to the
formwork in such a way that they are not displaced during the concreting operations,
and that there is no loss of materials from the wet concrete through holes in the
formwork.
c) Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings reinforcement shall be locally moved so that
the minimum specified cover is maintained at the locations of inserts, holes, chases, and
the like.
d) Temporary plugs shall be removed, and the threads of cast-in bolts shall be proved to
be free and shall be greased before handing over any part of the Works.
1.4.2.9 Curing and Protection
(1) Curing and Protection
Concrete shall be protected from sunshine and drying winds by Noticed shading and wind-
breaks, and from cold, rain or running water, for a period of at least 7 days after
placing. During this period or for any extended period the following measures shall be
taken to prevent the loss of moisture and to minimise thermal stresses caused by the
difference in temperature between the surface of the concrete and the core of the
concrete mass.
a) Horizontal surfaces.
▪ Polythene sheeting shall be placed immediately after finishing.
188 | P a g e
▪ After final set has taken place, the polythene shall be replaced by wet Hessian covered
with polythene. The Hessian shall be kept permanently damp.
▪ After 7 days the Hessian and polythene shall be removed and Noticed aluminised or
white resin-based curing compound applied unless an alternative method is used. The
method of application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
Alternative methods of curing shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer before use in the
Works.
b) Vertical surfaces.
▪ Polythene over wet Hessian shall be secured to the surfaces immediately after removal
of the formwork. The Hessian shall be kept permanently damp.
▪ After 7 days the Hessian and polythene shall be removed and an Noticed aluminised or
white resin based curing compound applied.
▪ Alternatively, the Hessian and polythene to stay for a further 7 days.
Water used during curing operations shall be fresh water. Curing membranes shall be
compatible with waterproofing or other materials that may subsequently be applied to the
surface of the concrete.
In case of steam curing method, the period of curing shall be as required.
(2) Contamination
Concrete shall be protected from contamination by sea or brackish water, oil, fuel and other
deleterious materials for a minimum period of 30 days after placing.
(3) Insulating Formwork
Insulating formwork shall be left in place for 72 hours after placing the concrete or until the
temperature peak of the concrete is reached. The initial curing period defined above may
then be reduced in proportion subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
(4) Protection of Joints
Rebates formed to receive sealant and the surfaces of construction joints shall be protected
from curing compound by wet Hessian to ensure proper curing of the joint surface and
adjacent concrete. The protection shall remain in place until the joint surface is sealed.
189 | P a g e
1.4.2.10 Finishes
(1) General
a) The finished faces of concrete shall be sound, even-coloured, even-textured and free
from defects. Arises shall have a 20mm by 20mm chamfer. Concrete faces shall not be
rendered, and defective concrete shall be cut out and replaced or made good. A fine
finish shall be provided unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings.
b) The Contractor shall carry out timely interfacing to ensure that appropriate finish of
concrete surface is rendered to accommodate the Employer’s Requirements.
(2) Fine Finish
Surfaces defined as having a fine finish shall be rubbed smooth by carborundum stone;
small holes shall be stopped with Noticed mortar of the same final colour as adjacent
concrete.
(1) Concrete Surfaces without Formwork
a) On upward-facing surfaces which do not require formwork or special finish the finish
shall be produced by proper placing and compacting operations alone.
b) For a fair-finish screeding, this shall be carried out by sliding and tamping a screed
board running on the top edges of the formwork, or on screeding guides, to give a dense
concrete skin.
c) For a fine finish screeding as described, the surface shall be left until the concrete has
stiffened and the film of surface moisture has disappeared. A steel or wooden float shall
then be used for a glossy or sandpaper surface as required. Working shall be the
minimum compatible with a good finish. The surface shall be protected from water
drops.
(3) Wire-Brushed Finish
After removal of the formwork the surface of the concrete shall be abraded by stiff wire
brushes and water to remove the cement laitance and expose the aggregate.
(2) Bush-Hammered Finish
a) The surface shall be abraded by carborundum stones to remove irregularities. Within 3

weeks, the surface shall be bush-hammered to remove the cement laitance and expose
190 | P a g e
the aggregate. Noticed bush hammers shall be worked to within 12 millimetres of

corners and arrisses; the remaining 12 millimetres shall be hand-chiselled to match.
b) Bush hammers shall be operated perpendicularly to the surface, and the remaining
exposed aggregates shall not be loose or fractured. The treated surface shall be washed
with water and stiffly brushed. The exposed aggregate shall be clean and free from film.
(4) Chemical Retarders
Chemical surface retarders, may be used to produce an exposed aggregate finish, and the
Contractor shall demonstrate that the durability of the concrete surface is not reduced.
(5) Carborundum Finish
a) Carborundum finish shall be achieved by sprinkling carborundum grit on the unset

surface and working-in by wooden float.
b) The carborundum grit shall vary in size between BS 1.18 millimetres mesh and BS 0.6
millimetres mesh and shall be distributed from a BS 1.18mm hand-screen at the rate of
2.15 kilograms per square metre.
(6) Specimen Panels of Concrete
If required, the Contractor shall produce specimen panels of finished concrete for the Notice
of the Engineer.
1.4.2.11 Special Concrete
(1) No-Fines Concrete
a) The aggregate for no-fines concrete shall be coarse-graded from 10mm to 20mm. A
small percentage of fines from 10mm to 5mm may be added to improve the strength if
Noticed.
b) Cement shall be mixed with the aggregate in the proportion of 1 to 8 by volume.
c) Segregation of the cement grout shall be prevented.
(2) Granolithic Concrete
a) Granolithic concrete shall consist of one part by weight cement to three parts of
combined coarse and fine aggregate.
191 | P a g e
b) Granolithic concrete shall preferably be laid on top of the unset base concrete and
compacted and worked to the correct levels. The surface shall be floated with a steel
float after hardening until water sheen has disappeared. Cement or cement-sand shall
not be sprinkled onto the surface. The layer shall be 12mm to 18mm thick.
c) If a granolithic layer is required to be placed on set concrete, the latter shall be

scrabbled and cleaned to expose the aggregate, and an Noticed bonding agent applied.
The layer shall not be less than 50mm thick.
d) If required, compounds shall be added or applied to give a concrete with improved

dust-proof and oil-proof qualities of any desired colouring. The compounds shall be
used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
e) Granolithic concrete paving shall be placed in panels not exceeding 3 metre square.
Contraction joints shall be provided around the perimeter of each panel.
(3) Cement - Mortar, Grout, and Rendering
a) Cement-mortar shall consist of one-part cement and four parts fine sand by volume
with just enough water to achieve work-ability.
b) Cement-lime-mortar shall consist of three parts of sand to one part of mixture

comprising one part of cement to one part of hydrated lime.
c) Grout shall consist of cement mixed with water in designed proportions. Fine sand may
be included in Noticed quantities.
d) Rendering shall consist of three parts fine, sharp sand to one-part cement applied in
two 10mm thick coats and one 5 mm thick finishing coat. The colour of the finishing
coat shall be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
e) Acid-resistant epoxy mortar shall be obtained from a Noticed manufacturer and applied
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
f) Mortar, render and grout shall be used freshly mixed.
1.4.2.12 Protective Coatings
(1) External Sheet Tanking Membrane
a) External protection to concrete substructures where required shall be as Noticed by the

Engineer and fixed to surface in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
192 | P a g e
b) Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the Contract waterproofing.
(1) External Brush-Applied Tanking Membrane
a) Substructures shall be protected externally, where required with a Noticed membrane

applied to the top of the blinding concrete and to the outside surfaces of all buried
concrete and continued where appropriate to 300mm above finished ground level.
b) The surfaces shall be cleaned and brought to a fine finish before coating. Each coat shall
be applied at the rate specified by the manufacturer. Coatings shall be protected by
hardboard or similar materials during backfilling.
(2) Internal Protection to Concrete
Protection to internal concrete faces shall be provided as required.
(2) Protection of Concrete Above Ground Level
a) All exposed concrete surfaces above tanking membrane tuck-in level shall be coated
with an Noticed two-coat protection level system, subsequently over-coated with an
Noticed compatible two-coat Epoxy based paint.
b) Sample panels of minimum area 10 square metres shall be made on finished concrete
to prove the finish quality and enable the colour to be selected. Only those panels finally
Noticed may be included in the Works.
1.4.2.13 Tolerances
The tolerances of concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with the following.
Precast Concrete BS 8110 Members Subsection 6.11.3
Foundations and other BS 5606 in-situ buried concrete
Exposed concrete BS 5606 (including internal surfaces of sewer culverts)
Other concrete surfaces: As shown on drawings/schedule of finishes
1.4.3 Precast Concrete
1.4.3.1 Manufacture Off-Site
(1) Casting of members shall not begin until Notice has been given by Engineer to the shop
drawings, required computation, pre-stressing system (if required) and method of
manufacture.
193 | P a g e
(2) When the drawings and method of manufacture have been Noticed, no changes shall be
made without the Notice of the Engineer
(3) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance of the date of commencement of
manufacture and casting of each type of member. Concrete reinforcement and
workmanship shall be as per IS 456.
(4) A copy of all cube test results for the precast concrete works shall be sent to the
Engineer as soon as these are available.
(5) No members to which the tests relate shall be dispatched to the Site until the tests have
been satisfactorily completed and Noticed by the Engineer.
(6) All members shall be indelibly marked to show the “member mark” as described in the
Contract, the production line on which they were manufactured, the date on which the
concrete was cast and, if they are of symmetrical section, the face that will be
uppermost when the member is in its correct position in the works. The markings shall
be so located that they are not exposed to view when the member is in its permanent
position.
1.4.3.2 Forms
The design and engineering of the forms and false work as well as their construction shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All exposed surfaces of each element of the structure shall be formed with similar material
to produce similar concrete surface textures, colour, and appearance.
Forms shall be inspected prior to authorizing casting operations. Details shown on the
Drawings shall be built into the forms. Worn, damaged, or otherwise unacceptable forms
shall be repaired before casting of any member will be authorised.
The forms may be made either of steel or of plywood. If the Contractor elects to use
plywood forms, it shall be high quality plywood, 19mm minimum thickness marine grade
subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
Forms shall be structurally adequate to support the members within permissible tolerances.
The form design shall incorporate the method and the necessary hardware to adjust and
maintain grade and alignment. Details of the hardware and adjustment procedure shall be
included in the required plans.
194 | P a g e
Forms shall be coated with Noticed form-release agent prior to use. Form release agents
shall be of commercial quality, of oil or other equivalent substances which permit the ready
release of forms and will not discolour the concrete. Excess form release agents shall not be
allowed to stand in puddles in the forms nor shall coating be allowed to come in contact
with reinforcing steel or hardened concrete.
Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting forms provided the
arrangement shall be to the Notice of the Engineer.
The use of driven or drilled types of anchorages for fastening forms or form supports to
concrete shall not be permitted.
1.4.3.3 Curing
(1) The steam curing shall be at 100% relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and
to provide moisture for proper hydration of the cement. Application of the steam shall
not be directly on the concrete. During application of the steam, the ambient air
temperature shall increase at a rate not exceeding 22 degrees Celsius per hour (oC/h)
until the maximum temperature has been reached. Curing shall comply with the
(2) Steam curing process may be used as an alternative to water curing. The casting bed
for any unit cured with steam shall be completely enclosed to prevent steam escaping
and exclude outside atmosphere. 2 to 4 hours after placing concrete and after the
concrete has undergone initial set, the first application of steam shall be made, unless
retarders are used, in which case the waiting period before application of the steam
shall be increased to from 4 to 6 hours. Water curing methods to be used from the
time concrete is placed until steam is first applied.
(3) Where the steam has been raised the maximum temperature shall be held until the
concrete has reached the desired strength. In discontinuing the steam application, the
ambient air temperature shall not decrease at a rate to exceed 220C/h until a
temperature has been reached 10 0C above the temperature of the air to which the
concrete shall be exposed. The maximum curing temperature shall be from 600C
degrees to 670C.
(4) If the Contractor elects to cure by any other special method, the method and its details
shall be subject to Notice by the Engineer.
195 | P a g e
1.4.3.4 Storage
When members are stored, they shall be firmly supported only at the points specified.
(1)The accumulation of trapped water and deleterious matter in the units shall be
prevented.
(2)Care shall be taken to avoid rust staining and efflorescence.
1.4.3.5 Handling and Transport
(1) Members shall be lifted or supported only at points specified or otherwise given
Notice by the Engineer and shall be handled and placed without impact.
(2) The Contractor shall define the method of lifting, the type of equipment and
transport to be used, and the minimum age of the members to be handled and shall
be subject to the Notice of the Engineer.
1.4.3.6 Assembly and Erection
(1) The method of assembly and erection described in the Contract shall be as practicable
and be strictly adhered to on site.
(2) Immediately after a unit is in position, and before the lifting equipment is removed,
temporary supports or connections between members, as necessary, shall be
provided.
(3) The final structural connections shall be completed as soon as possible.
1.4.3.7 Forming Structural Connections
(1) No structural connections shall be made until the Engineer's Notice has been received.
(2) Unless otherwise Noticed by the Engineer, the composition and water: cement ratio of
the in-situ concrete or mortar used in any connection and the packing of joints shall
be in accordance with the assembly instructions.
(3) Levelling devices shall only be released or removed subject to the Notice of the
Engineer.
1.4.3.8 Epoxy Grout for Structural Connections (if required)
(1) Description
Epoxy shall be furnished as two components mixed together at the Site.
196 | P a g e
(2) Sampling and Testing
All tests will be conducted in accordance with the latest test methods of the American
Society for Testing and Materials, Federal Test Method Standard No. 141 or
equivalent British Standard.
(3) Packaging, Labelling and Storing
a) Each component shall be packaged in steel containers not larger than 20 litres in
volume. When the components are to be mixed at a ratio of 2 parts A to one-part
B, by volume, the container containing component B shall be one half the volume
of the container containing component A.
b) The containers shall have lug type crimp lids with ring seals, shall be new, not
less than 0.6mm nominal thickness and shall be of such character as to resist any
action by the components.
c) Each container shall be clearly labelled with the designation (Component A or B),
type (Standard or Rapid) if applicable, manufacturer's name, date of
manufacture, batch number (a batch shall consist of a single charge of all
components in a mixing chamber), lot number, all directions for use specified
elsewhere and the following warning in Hindi, Marathi and English:
"CAUTION” or Equivalent in Hindi/Marathi
"This material will cause severe dermatitis if it is allowed to come in contact with
the skin or eyes. Use gloves and protective creams on the hands. Should this
material contact the skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Do not attempt
to remove this material from the skin with solvents. If any gets in the eyes, flush
for 10 minutes with water and secure immediate medical attention."
d) Attention is directed to the characteristic of some epoxy components to crystallize

or thicken excessively prior to use when stored at temperatures below 2oC. Any
material which shows evidence of crystallization or a permanent increase in
viscosity or settling of pigments which cannot be readily re-dispersed with a
paddle shall not be used.
197 | P a g e
(4) Directions for Use
a) At the time of mixing, components A and B shall be at a temperature between 16

degrees and 29oCunless otherwise specified. Any heating of the adhesive
components shall be done by application of indirect heat. Immediately prior to
mixing, each component shall be thoroughly mixed with a paddle. Separate paddles
shall be used to stir each component. Immediately prior to use, the two
components shall be thoroughly mixed together in the specified ratios. When
mixed, all adhesives shall have a uniformly grey colour without black or white
streaks. No solvent shall be added to any epoxy.
b) After mixing, all epoxies shall be placed in the work and any overlaying or inserted
be cleaned and it shall have moisture content of not more than 0.5% when tested.
The maximum size of the aggregate shall not exceed that of material which is to be
bonded to the work by the epoxy. It shall also be placed before thickening of the
epoxy has begun. Surfaces upon which epoxy is to be placed shall be free of rust,
paint, grease, asphalt, moisture and loose and deleterious material. When epoxy is
used as a binder to make epoxy concrete or grout, the two components of epoxy
shall be thoroughly mixed together before the aggregate is added and, unless
otherwise specified, the mix proportions shall consist of one part of binder to
approximately 4 parts of aggregate, by volume. Aggregate for use in epoxy
concrete and grout shall one-fourth of the thickness of the joint to be grouted. All
surfaces against which epoxy concrete and grout are to be placed shall be primed
with a coat of the epoxy used just prior to placing the grout.
c) No more material shall be mixed than can be used within 20 minutes from the time
mixing operations are started. Pot life of the epoxy mixture shall be 45 minutes.
(5) Epoxy Grout Strength Requirements
The compressive strength of 38mm cubes of epoxy grout tested in accordance with
ASTM C39 after 10 hours of curing at 20oCshall be not less than the design strength of
the pre-cast member.
198 | P a g e
1.4.3.9 Protection
At all stages of construction, pre-cast concrete units and other concrete associated
therewith shall be properly protected to prevent damage to permanently exposed concrete
surfaces, especially arises and decorative features.
1.5 Formwork
1.5.1 General
These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the MORTH specifications and MCGM
specifications with correction slips/amendments up to date, and other relevant
specifications described in Section 1of this Volume 5.
1.5.2 Materials
Formwork shall be of timber, plywood (including marine plywood), steel or any other
suitable material capable of resisting damage to the contact faces under normal conditions
of erecting forms, fixing steel and placing concrete. The selection of materials suitable for
formwork shall be made by the Contractor based on the quality consistent with the
specified finishes and safety. The entire responsibility of planning, designing, erecting,
dismantling, shifting and safety of false work lies with the Contractor.
All formwork and formwork support (centering, props, scaffolds, ladders etc.) shall be in
structural steel only and preferably of pipes conforming to IS:806, IS:1161, IS:1239, IS:2750.
Wooden ballies shall not be permitted as props/formwork supports. All props shall be
properly braced using x & k bracings. Ladders to be used at site should have treads and
shall be fabricated from structural steel. Wooden/ bamboo/aluminium/pipe ladders shall
not be permitted.
1.5.2.1 Timber
Timber used for formwork shall be easily workable with nails without splitting. It shall be
stable and not liable to warp when exposed to sun and rain or wetted during concreting.
1.5.2.2 Plywood
Plywood used for formwork shall be minimum 12mm thick. Shuttering quality plywood
complying with IS:4990. Suitable stiffeners and walers shall be provided depending on the
shuttering design.
1.5.2.3 Steel
199 | P a g e
Steel formwork shall be made of minimum 4mm thick black sheets stiffened with angle iron
frame made out of M.S. angles 40mm x 6 mm supported at suitable spacing.
1.5.3 Design & Drawings
The permissible stresses in materials in all Temporary Works such as formwork, falsework,
staging, launching and the like. shall be the same as for the Permanent Works. The
Contractor’s checked and verified calculations and drawings of the same including
construction sequence (along with soft copy in CD ROM) shall be submitted to Engineer for
his Notice well in advance of work.
All constructed Temporary Works shall be also inspected by the Lead Designer and an
inspection report shall be submitted to Engineer. All Temporary Works shall be robust, safe
and constructed such a way that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly
compacted to obtain the required shape, position and level subject to specified tolerances. It
is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the results required by the Engineer,
whether or not some of the work is sub-contracted. Agreement of the temporary works by
the Engineer shall not diminish the Contractor's responsibility for the satisfactory
performance of the same, nor for the safety and co-ordination of all operations.
The design of false work should be such as to facilitate easy and safe access to all parts for
proper inspection.
Methodology for removal of form should be planned as a part of total formwork design
process.
In case of pre-stressed concrete work, careful consideration shall be given to re-distribution

of loads due to pre-stressing.
1.5.4 Formwork for Exposed Concrete Surfaces
The facing formwork, unless indicated otherwise in drawings, shall generally be made with
materials not less than the thickness mentioned below for different elements of the
structure:
(1) Plain slab soffit, and sides of beams, joists and ribs and side of walls, , parapets, etc
shall be made with:
a) Steel plates not less than 4mm thick of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable
structural framework and fabricated true to plane
200 | P a g e
b) Timber planks of 20mm actual thickness and of specified surface finish, width
and reasonable length,
c) Plywood not less than 12mm thick (IS:4990 - Specification for Plywood for
Concrete Shuttering Work) stiffened with a suitable timber frame work or 3mm
thick plywood with a 20mm timber plank backing, of specified sizes stiffened
with a suitable timber framework and bracing. At joints 6mm/10mm sponge to
be provided.
(2) Bottoms of beams, sides of columns shall be formed using the following materials.
a) Steel plates not less than 5mm thick of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable
structural framework, and fabricated true to plane
b) Timber planks of 35mm actual thickness and of specified surface finish, width
and reasonable length,
c) Plywood not less than 12mm thick (IS:4990), of specified sizes stiffened with a
suitable timber framework.
(3) For precast segments, portals, tunnel connections and the like suitable steel
formwork shall be used.
1.5.5 Formwork for Sloped Surfaces
(1) Forms for sloped surfaces shall be built so that the formwork can be placed board-by-
board immediately ahead of concrete placement so as to enable ready access for
placement, vibration, inspection and finishing of the concrete.
(2) The formwork shall be built in such a way so that the boards can be removed one by
one from the bottom up as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to
prevent sagging. Surfaces of construction joints and finished surfaces with slopes
steeper than 2 horizontal: 1 vertical shall be formed as required herein.
1.5.6 Formwork for Curved Surfaces
(1) The Contractor shall interpolate intermediate sections as necessary and shall construct
the forms so that the curvature will be continuous between sections. Where necessary
to meet requirements for curvature, the form lumber shall be built up of laminated
splices cut to make tight, smooth form surfaces.
201 | P a g e
(2) After the forms have been constructed, all surface imperfections shall be corrected and
all surface irregularities at matching faces of form material shall be dressed to the
specified curvature.
1.5.7 Erection of Formwork
The following shall apply to all formwork:
(1) Before fabricating the forms the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s Notice the
design of forms and the types of material to be used. (Ref. ACI 347 Formwork for
Concrete or equivalent I.S. Code).
(2) All shuttering planks and plates shall be adequately backed by a sufficient number and
size of walers or framework to ensure rigidity during concreting. All shutters shall be
adequately strutted, braced and propped to prevent deflection under deadweight of
concrete and superimposed live load of workmen, materials and plant, and to
withstand pouring rate and vibration.
(3) Vertical props shall be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken so that
the props can be gently lowered vertically during removal of the formwork. Props for
an upper level shall be placed directly over those in the level immediately below, and
the lowest props shall bear on a sufficiently strong area. Care shall be taken that all
formwork is set plumb and true to line and level or camber or better where required.
(4) Provision shall be made for adjustment of supporting struts where necessary. When
reinforcement passes through the formwork care should be taken to ensure close
fitting joints against the steel bars so as to avoid loss of fines during the compaction of
concrete.
(5) If the formwork is held together by bolts, these shall be so fixed that no iron will be
exposed on surfaces against which concrete is to be laid and within the concrete cover
to the steel reinforcement. In any case wires shall not be used with exposed concrete
formwork. If the Contractor elects to use tie-bolts running through the concrete then
the Contractor shall define the location and size of such tie-bolts and submit his
proposals for Notice by the Engineer. The tie-bolts shall be so designed that their
removal on de-shuttering does not leave any embedment with in the concrete cover to
steel reinforcement. Holes left in the concrete by these tie-bolts shall be filled by the
202 | P a g e
concrete repair material and the methodology set out in the Contractor’s Noticed
proposal.
(6) Provision shall be made in the shuttering for beams, columns, and walls for a port hole
of convenient size so that all extraneous materials that may be collected could be
removed just prior to concreting.
(7) Formwork shall be so arranged as to permit removal of forms without jarring the
concrete. Wedges, clamps and bolts shall be used wherever practicable instead of nails.
The formwork for beams and slabs shall be so erected that forms on the sides of the
beams and the soffit of slabs can be removed without disturbing the beam bottoms or
props under beams.
(8) Surfaces of forms in contact with concrete shall be oiled with a mould oil of Noticed
quality form releasing agent. The use of mould oil which results in blemishes of the
surface of the concrete including diesel, burnt oil and any other lubricating oil shall not
be allowed. Mould oil shall be applied before reinforcement has been placed and care
shall be taken that no oil comes in contact with the reinforcement while it is being
placed in position. The formwork shall be kept thoroughly wet during concreting and
the whole time that is left in place. Nothing extra shall be paid to Contractor for oiling
the moulds.
(9) Immediately before concreting is commenced, the formwork and other related
arrangements shall be carefully examined to ensure the following.
a) Removal of all dirt, shavings, sawdust and other refuse by brushing, washing
and compressed air/vacuum cleaning.
b) The tightness of joints between panels of sheathing and between these and any
hardened core.
c) The correct location of tie bars, bracing and spacers, and especially connections
of bracing.
d) Adequate cover blocks are in place
e) Straightness and plumbness of the form work
f) Side supports/restraints for the form work are enough and robust
g) Construction joint (wherever applicable) is properly prepared
203 | P a g e
h) That all wedges are secured and firm in position.
i) That provision is made for traffic on formwork not to bear directly on

reinforcing steel.
j) Pouring platform along with its approach from ground is robust and safe for
workers movement.
k) Arrangement for vibrators for compaction of concrete
l) Sequence of concrete pouring is well defined and is agreed upon by the

Engineer and is explained to concrete pouring team
m) The Pouring area is well lit.
n) Curing arrangements are well planned and agreed upon by the Engineer.
o) The concrete protection measures in accordance with the Contract are in place.
(10) The Contractor shall ensure dimensional accuracies of the work and for the general
arrangement of propping and bracing. (IS:3696 - Safety Code of Scaffolds and Ladders,
IS:4014 Steel Tubular Scaffolding I & II). All scaffolding and staging shall be either of
steel tubes or built up section of rolled steel with adequate bracing at several levels in
each perpendicular direction connecting each prop. In addition to this diagonal bracing
should be provided in elevation ideally at 45 degrees or between 30 degrees and 60
degrees. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of propping, and
for keeping the wedges and other locking arrangements undisturbed through the de-
centering period. (IS:8989 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures)
(11) Formwork shall be continuously watched during the process of concreting. If during
concreting any weakness develops and formwork shows any distress the work shall be
stopped and remedial action shall be taken.
1.5.8 Concrete Finishes
This section deals with the surface of concrete on which forms had been fixed while
concreting.
1.5.8.1 Formed Surface
Allowable deviation from plumb or level and from the alignment profile, grades and
dimensions shown on the drawings is defined as "tolerance" and is to be distinguished from
204 | P a g e
irregularities in finishes as described herein. Tolerances in concrete construction are

specified elsewhere.
The classes of finish and requirements for finishing of concrete surface shall be as shown on
the drawings or as hereinafter specified.
Completed concrete surface shall be tested, where necessary to determine whether surface
irregularities are within the limits specified hereinafter.
Surface irregularities are classified as "Abrupt" or "Gradual". Offsets caused by displaced or

misplaced form sheathing, or form sections or by loose knots or otherwise defective timber
form will be considered as abrupt irregularities and shall be tested by direct measurements.
All other irregularities shall be considered as gradual irregularities and will be tested by use
of template, consisting of a straight edge or the equivalent thereof for curved surfaces. The
length of the template shall be 150 cm for testing of formed surfaces and 300 cm for testing
of unformed surfaces.
The classes of finish for formed concrete surfaces are designated by one of the symbols F1,
F2, F3 and F4. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings, these classes of finish
shall apply as follows:
Finish F1: This finish applies to surfaces where roughness is not objectionable, or surface
that will otherwise be permanently concealed. Surface treatment shall be the repair of
defective concrete, correction of surface depressions deeper than 25 mm and filling of tie
rod holes. Form sheathing will not leak mortar when concrete is vibrated. Forms may be
manufactured with a minimum of refinement.
Finish F2: This finish is required on surfaces permanently but not prominently exposed to
public view for which other finishes are not specified except F1. Forms shall be
manufactured in a workmanlike manner to the required offsets or bulges. Surface
irregularities shall not exceed 5mm for abrupt and 8mm for gradual irregularities measured
with a 1.5 m template.
Finish F3: This finish is required for coarse textured concrete surfaces intended to receive
plaster, stucco or wainscoting. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 5mm for both abrupt
and gradual irregularities.
Finish F4: This finish is designated for surfaces prominently exposed to public view where
appearance is also of special importance. To meet with requirements for F4 finish, forms
205 | P a g e
shall be manufactured in a skilful, workmanlike manner, accurately to dimensions. There

should be no visible offsets, bulges or misalignment of concrete. At construction joints, the
forms shall be rightly set and securely anchored close to the joint. Abrupt and gradual
irregularities shall not exceed 3mm. Irregularities exceeding this limit shall be reduced by
grinding to a level of 1:20 ratio of height to length. Jute bag subbing or sand blasting shall
not be used.
1.5.8.2 Unformed Surfaces
The classes of finish for unformed surfaces are designated by symbols U1, U2, U3 and U4.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings, these classes of finish shall apply as
follows:
Finish U1: This finish applies to unformed surfaces that will be concealed permanently or
otherwise where a screeded surface finish meets the functional requirements. Finish U1 is
also used as the stage of finishes for U2 and U3. Finishing operations shall consist of
sufficient levelling and screeding to produce an even uniform surface. Surface irregularities
shall not exceed 10mm.
Finish U2: This is floated finish, and used on all outdoor, unformed surfaces. Finish U2 is
also used as the second stage of finish for U3. Floating to be performed manually or
mechanically on stiffened screed surface shall be minimum to produce textured surface. If
finish U3 is to be applied, floating shall be continued till a small amount of mortar without
excess water is brought to the surfaces so as to permit effective trowelling. Surface
irregularities shall be removed
Finish U3: This is a trowelled finish and shall be used for tops of parapets, etc prominently
exposed to view. When the floated surface has hardened sufficiently, steel trowelling shall
be started. Steel trowelling on hardened, floated surface shall be performed with firm
pressure to produce a dense uniform surface free from blemishes and trowel marks and
having slightly glossy appearance. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 5mm.
Finish U4: This is a steel-trowelled finish, similar to finish U3, except that light surface
pitting and light trowel marks such as obtained from the use of machine trowelling will be
acceptable, provided that surface irregularities do not exceed the limits specified for finish
U3.
206 | P a g e
Unformed surfaces which are nominally level shall be sloped for drainage as shown on
drawings unless the use of other slopes or level surface is indicated on drawings. Narrow
surface such as tops of parapets, walls and kerbs shall be sloped approximately 10mm per
300mm of width. Broader surface such as roadways platform shall be sloped approximately
5mm per 300mm of width. Finishes of floor and roof slabs shall be sloped Exposed Concrete
Work
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be smooth and even, originally as stripped without any
finishing or rendering. The surface shall be rubbed with carborundum stone immediately
on striking the forms. The Contractor shall exercise special care and supervision of
formwork and concreting to ensure that the cast members are made true to their sizes,
shapes and positions and to produce the surface patterns desired. No honeycombing shall
be allowed. Honeycombed parts of the concrete including the other surface defects in the
concrete shall be removed by the Contractor as per the methods, which do not affect the
strength of adjoining concrete.
Part of defective concrete thus removed shall be re-cast using fresh concrete of same grade
or Noticed quality concrete repair material depending upon the size, location, thickness of
the defective concrete and structural behaviour of the member having defective concrete at
no additional cost. Contractor shall ensure that no air bubbles are formed on the exposed
surface. Concrete pouring sequence, vibration methodology etc shall be planned to avoid air
bubbles.
1.5.9 Age of Concrete at Removal of Formwork
In accordance with IS: 456. Immediately after the forms are removed, they shall be cleaned
with a jet of water and a soft brush.
1.5.10 Stripping of Formwork
The work of form work removal should be planned, and a definite scheme of operation
worked out. Formwork shall be removed carefully without jarring the concrete and curing
of the concrete shall be commenced immediately. Concrete surfaces to be exposed shall be
rubbed down with carborundum stone or bush-hammer to obtain a smooth and even finish.
Where the concrete requires plastering or other finish later the concrete surface shall be
immediately hacked lightly all over using Noticed methods. No extra payment will be due to
the Contractor for such work on concrete surfaces after removal of forms.
207 | P a g e
1.5.11 Reuse of Forms
The Contractor shall not be permitted reuse of timber facing formwork brought new on the
works for more than 5 times for exposed concrete formwork and 8 times for ordinary
formwork. 5 or 8 uses shall be permitted only if forms are properly cared for, stored and
repaired after each use. Use of different quality boards or the use of old and new boards in
the same formwork shall not be allowed. If any other type of special or proprietary form
work is used, the number. of times they can be used shall be given a Notice by the Engineer.
1.5.12 Formwork for Precast / Prestressed Concrete
(1) The provisions in this section shall be considered supplementary to the general
provisions stated above and additional Technical Specifications for pre-cast segments.
Pre-cast concrete members and panels shall be made in accurately constructed moulds,
on a properly prepared casting bed.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of formwork to the Engineer for his
Notice. Finishing with cement mortar shall not be allowed.
(2) The formwork should be so designed that it does not restrain the shrinkage movements
and possible shortening due to pre-stress of the concrete. The formwork shall be of
sturdy construction with special considerations to shutter vibrators when used. All
edges and joints of the formwork should be designed and sealed so that no cement
grout can escape and there is no wedging or keying to the concrete. The effect of curing
on the formwork should be given special consideration. Depending on care, curing,
erection and maintenance of the formwork after stripping, the following number of
uses can be made with different types of formwork.
(3) Stripping
As soon as the pre-cast units have attained sufficient strength, the formwork shall be
stripped. The pre-cast unit shall be lifted uniformly out of the formwork without being
subjected to tilting or restraint effects.
1.5.13 Special Architectural Finishes
Special Noticed architectural finishes like grooves, logos, engravings/projections in inset

and out set as per the Noticed design shall be provided by fixing monolithic rubber forms
or any other Noticed material fixed on the entire surface of the form work. The shore
hardness of the rubber shall be 600 5A to ensure strength, flexibility and elasticity. The
208 | P a g e
rubber shall be cold cured (preferably polyurethane based) and fixed to the formwork
under controlled conditions in shade and air temperature not exceeding 280oC.
The form liners should be shrinkage free, solvent free and should be impervious to
abrasion by Concrete, resistant to concrete pressure and heat resistant up to 700 oC dry
heat. Formwork liner fixation should be factory made under close tolerances and stage
inspections.
If proprietary system of formwork is used, detailed information as given in Appendix A
herein shall be furnished to Engineer for his Notice before use.
209 | P a g e
Appendix A
Information to be supplied by Manufacturers of Proprietary Systems of form Work
1. General
1.1 The information which the manufacturer is required to supply shall be in such detail as to
obviate unsafe erection and use of equipment due to the intention of the manufacturer not
having been made clear or due to wrong assumptions on the part of the user.
1.2 The user shall refer unusual problems of erection/assembly not in keeping with intended use
of equipment, to the manufacturer of the equipment.
2. Information Required
2.1 The manufacturers of proprietary systems shall supply the following information;
a) Description of basic functions of equipment.
b) List of items of equipment available, giving range of sizes, spans and such like, with
manufacturer’s identification number or other references.
c) The basis on which safe working loads have been determined and whether the factor of safety
given applies to collapse or yield.
d) Whether the supplier’s data are based on calculations or tests. This shall be clearly stated as
there may be wide variations between results obtained by either method.
e) Instructions for use and maintenance, including any points which require special attention
during erection, especially where safety is concerned.
f) Detailed dimensional information, as follows:
i. Overall dimensions, depths and widths of members.
ii. Line drawings including perspectives and photographs showing normal uses.
iii. Self-weight.
iv. Full dimensions of connections and any special positioning and supporting
arrangements.
v. Sizes of members, including tube diameters and thicknesses of material.
vi. Any permanent camber built into the equipment.
210 | P a g e
vii. Sizes of holes and dimensions giving their positions.
viii. Manner of fixing including arrangements for sealing joints.
ix. Method of de-stripping, storing & shifting.
g) Data relating to strength of equipment as follows:
i. Average failure loads as determined by tests.
ii. Recommended maximum working loads for various conditions of use.
iii. Working resistance moments derived from tests.
iv. Working shear capacities derived from tests.
v. Recommended factors of safety used in assessing recommended loads and deflections based
on test results.
vi. Deflections under load together with recommended pre-camber and limiting deflections.
vii. If working loads depend on calculations, working stresses should be tested. If deflections
depend on theoretical moments of inertia or equivalent moments of inertia rather than
tests, this should be noted.
viii. Information on the design of sway bracing against wind and other horizontal loadings.
ix. Allowable loading relating maximum extension of bases and/or heads.
x. Any restrictions regarding usage of any component or full assembly with regard to spans,
heights and loading conditions.
Structural Steelwork
1.5.14 General
Workmanship and materials shall be generally in accordance with relevant Indian

Standards or where alternatively Noticed by the Engineer, in accordance with BS-EN or
ASTM standards.
1.5.15 Material Properties
(1) Steel for rolled sections, plates and bars shall normally comply with IS 226/ IS 2062 or
BS 5950, Part 2 Grade 43, or special steel as per design requirement.
211 | P a g e
(2) Dimensional properties, tolerances and rolling margins shall comply with the relevant
Standards.
(3) The condition of steel for fabrication shall be to IS 2062 or Swedish Standard 05 5900,
Grade C unless otherwise detailed.
(4) Bolts and nuts shall comply with design requirement.
(5) Washers shall comply with BS 4320.
(6) Stainless steel shall be grade 316 S31 to BS 970: Part 1, unless detailed otherwise.
1.5.16 Testing
(1) The Contractor shall perform tests and submit test certificates for the materials to be
used in the work. The tests shall include the following in accordance with IS: 226/IS:
2062 or BS-EN 1993:2006 or applicable Indian Standard.
a) Chemical analysis
b) Tensile tests
c) Bend tests
d) Flattening tests
(2) The tests shall be carried out by a Noticed testing authority and Notice shall be given of
the intended execution of any such test. The specimens for testing shall be a random
sampling of steelwork to be used for the project.
(3) If any sample fails a test, the consignment it represents may be rejected in part or in
whole. Alternatively, it may be possible to either:
a) retest the consignment using another sampling set or;
b) Notice the criteria for acceptance of this particular consignment, should the Engineer
allow an acceptance for a particular use justified by the design requirements
(4) In no way do these specific qualifications provide a precedent for future acceptance of
any failed consignment.
212 | P a g e
1.5.17 Fabrication
(1) The work of fabrication shall comply with the requirements of IS: 800 or other relevant
codes of practice Noticed to the Engineer, in accordance with BS-EN 1993: 2006 or
ASTM. Fabrication accuracy shall be within the limits detailed in BS-EN 1993: 2006.
(2) All parts assembled for bolting shall be in close contact over the whole surface and all
bearing stiffeners shall bear tightly at top and bottom without being drawn or caulked.
The component parts shall be so assembled that they are neither twisted not otherwise
damaged as specified cambers if any shall be provided. Drilling done during assembling
shall not distort the metal or enlarge holes. The butting surfaces at all joints shall be so
cut and milled so as to butt in close contact throughout the finished joints.
(3) Cutting shall be done automatically. Hand flame cutting will not be permitted.
(4) The edges and ends of all cut/sheared flange plates, web plates of plate girders, and all
cover plates, and the ends of all angles, tees, channels and other sections forming the
flanges of plate girders, shall be planed/ground.
(5) Holes for bolts shall be drilled to conform to clause 10 of IS:7215 (1974). Punching of
holes will not be permitted. All drilling shall be free from burrs. No holes shall be made
by gas cutting process.
(6) All welding for the works shall be carried out by first class welders and shall be in
accordance with IS:816, IS:819, IS:1024, IS:1261, IS:1323 and IS:9595. The Engineer
may at his discretion order periodic tests of the welder and/or of the welds produced
by them. All such tests shall be carried out by the Contractor at his cost.
(7) Safety requirements should conform to IS: 7205, IS : 7273 and IS : 7269 as applicable
and should conform to safety, economy and rapidity.
(8) As much work as possible shall be welded in shops. The pieces shall be manipulated to
ensure down hand welding for all shop joints as far as possible. All parts to be welded
shall be arranged so as to fit properly on assembly. After assembly and before the
general welding is to commence the parts are to be tack welded with small fillet or butt
welds as the case may be. The tack welding must be strong enough to hold the parts
together but small enough to be covered by the general welding. The welding
procedure shall be so arranged that the distortion and shrinkage stresses are reduce to
a minimum.
213 | P a g e
(9) All joints required in structure to facilitate transport or erection shall be shown on the
drawings. The lengths of structural shall be the maximum normally available in the
market and the jointing of shorter length in order to make up lengths required shall not
be permitted.
(10) Each piece of steel work shall be marked distinctly before delivery, indicating the
position and direction in which it is to be fixed. Three copies of a complete marking
plan shall be supplied to the Engineer before erection commences.
(11) In the case of welded fabrication any distortion remaining in the member after welding
operations are completed shall be rectified by and/or at the expense of the Contractor.
(12) All members of trusses and lattice girders shall be straight throughout their length,
unless shown otherwise on the drawings, and shall be accurately set to the lines shown
on the drawings. Sheared edges of gussets or other members to be straightened and
dressed where necessary.
(13) Templates and jigs used throughout the work shall be all steel. In cases where actual
materials have been used as templates for drilling similar pieces, the Engineer’s Notice
shall be obtained to use as parts of the finished structure.
(14) Apart from the requirements of welding specified under the above sub clauses, sections
above, the Contractor shall ensure the following requirements in the welded joints.
(15) Strength-quality with parent metal.
(16) Absence of defects
(17) Corrosion resistance of the weld shall not be less than that of parent material in an
aggressive environment.
(18) No gasket or other flexible material shall be placed between the holes. The holes in
parts to be joined shall be sufficiently well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in
position. Driving of bolts is not permitted. The nuts shall be placed so that the
identification marks are clearly visible after tightening. Nuts and bolts shall always be
tightened in a staggered pattern and, where there are more than four bolts in any one
joint, they shall be tightened from the centre of the joint outwards.
214 | P a g e
1.5.18 Detailing of Connections
(1) Detailing of connections shall ensure that inaccessible pockets/gaps are avoided. In this
respect, back-to-back angles with spacers and similar details which would prevent full
accessibility for painting are not acceptable.
(2) Where cope holes are required to allow completion of butt welding they shall be of
adequate size to allow fillet welding to seal the connection, while still allowing full
accessibility for subsequent painting.
(3) Snipping of stiffeners at the root radii of rolled members is not acceptable. Stiffeners
shall be cut to the required profile to fit closely into all such radii, and seal welded.
(4) High-strength friction grip (HSFG) bolts shall be used only on mating surfaces as
specified herein.
(5) HSFG bolted connections, slip-bolted connections and welded connections shall not be
used interchangeably or in tandem with each other. The use of each of these types of
connections shall be separate and distinct.
1.5.19 Submissions
(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two initial copies of each shop drawing and
subsequently four copies of the final shop drawings for retention by the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall submit for Notice details of erection procedures. The procedure
should contain details of safety precautions to be taken during erection - refer IS 7205.
1.5.20 Welding
(1) Metal-arc welding of steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of relevant IS,
BS-EN or ASCI standards.
(2) Run-on/run-off plates shall be used during butt welding.
(3) Fillet welds shall be continuous to form a complete seal where two members join or abut.
1.5.21 Electrodes
Welding consumables shall be suitable for the type of steel and position of welding and shall
give a weld deposit with mechanical properties not less than the minimum specified in the
relevant welding standards. Hydrogen-controlled electrodes shall be used for butt welding of
steel over 25 millimetres thick.
215 | P a g e
1.5.22 Welders
Welders employed on the work shall be tested to BS 4871 and BS 4872: Part 1. Welding shall
be carried out under the supervision of a competent welding technologist and the test pieces
shall be tested to BS 4870.
1.5.23 Testing
(1) The Contractor shall make radiographic examination of butt welds in accordance with
Section 8 of American Petroleum Industry (API) Standard 1104 and shall carry out dye-
penetrant tests in accordance with BS 6443.
(2) Not less than 10% of the length of each butt weld shall be radiographically inspected
and 10% shall be tested using the dye-penetrant method.
(3) Not less than 5% of the length of each fillet weld shall be tested using dye-penetrant
testing.
1.5.24 Site Welding
(1) The Contractor may, subject to prior Notice, use site welding as an alternative to bolted
connections.
(2) Site-welded joints shall be inspected by radiography in accordance with Section 8 of

API Standard 1104 or by ultrasonic means when given Notice by the Engineer. Initially
100% of each butt weld shall be inspected. At the Notice of the Engineer, the number of
inspections may subsequently be reduced.
(3) Finished welds shall comply with Section 6 of API Standard 1104. Defective welds shall
be cut out, remade and retested as Noticed.
1.5.25 Erection of Steelwork
Erection of steelwork shall comply with the requirements of BS-EN 1993: 2006, Stanchions
shall be plumbed using steel packs and wedges and restrained while the spaces beneath the
base-plates are filled with a Noticed non-shrink cementitious grout. Packs and wedges shall
be protected by grout to a minimum thickness of 50mm.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the alignment and level of foundation and
correctness of foundation bolt centres, well in advance of starting erection work, and shall
be responsible for any consequences for non-compliance thereof. Discrepancies if any shall
immediately be brought to the Notice of the Engineer.
216 | P a g e
The structure should be divided into erectable modules as per the total scheme. This should
be pre-assembled in a suitable yard/platform and its matching with members of the
adjacent module checked by trial assembly before erection.
Immediately prior to erection any rust in the paint area shall be removed by power wire
brushing to a standard equivalent to SA3.
During erection the rough handling of fabricated materials such as bending, straining or
pounding with sledges shall be avoided. Any damage to the structure during transportation
or erection shall be immediately rectified by the Contractor at his own cost. The
straightening of bend edges of plates, angles and other sections shall be done by methods
which will not cause fracture.
Following the completion of the straightening, the surface of the member shall carefully be
inspected for damage before further use.
The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately positioning, levelling and plumbing of all
steelwork and placing of every part of the structure in accordance with the Noticed
drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All stanchion base, beam and girder
bearings etc. shall be securely supported on suitable steel packs. All reference and datum
points shall be fixed near the work site for facilitating the erection work.
All equipment used by the Contractor shall be sufficient for the purpose and for erection of
steel work, in the time specified in contract. Any lifting or erecting machinery shall be
noticed to be removed from the site. If the Engineer considers such appliances dangerous or
unsuitable for their functions. Notice of Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibilities for loads to which the erection of equipment shall be called upon to carry
out. Adequate arrangement shall be made to resist wind loads and lateral forces arising at
the time of erection.
The Contractor is entirely responsible for the stability of the structure during erection and
shall arrange that sufficient tack bolts, braces or guy ropes are used to ensure that work will
remain rigid until final bolting, rivetting or welding is completed. The Contractor shall
supply and fix, without extra charge, any temporary bracing which may be necessary.
All steelwork shall be erected in the exact position as shown on the Drawings. All vertical
members shall be truly vertical throughout and all horizontal members truly horizontal,
fabrication being such that all parts can be accurately assembled and erected. No permanent
217 | P a g e
bolting, welding or grouting shall be done until proper alignment has been obtained and
checked.
At stanchion splices and at other positions where concrete cover to the steel is liable to be
restricted, bolts will be placed with their heads on the outside of the members.
All field assembly bolting and welding shall be executed in accordance with the
requirements for shop fabrication excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions
only. Where steel has been delivered painted the paint shall be removed before field
welding for a distance of at least 50mm on either side of the joints. The number of washers
on permanent bolts shall not be more than two for the nut and one for the bolt head.
1.5.26 Tolerances
The tolerances for erected steelwork shall be as shown on the Drawings. In-lieu of other
information the tolerances from BS-EN 1993:2006 shall be adopted.
1.5.27 Bolted Connections
(1) Bolts shall be threaded only over the length of shank which is outside the parts
bolted together. The bolt shall protrude by at least two complete threads and not
more than four complete threads beyond the outer face of the tightened nut.
(2) Holes shall not be distorted or enlarged by the use of drifts.
(3) High strength friction grip bolts shall be fitted in accordance with BS 4604, Part 2.
(4) Load-indicating washers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
1.5.28 Transportation and Storage
Steelwork and protective coatings shall be protected from damage during packing, handling,
transportation and storage. The Contractor shall ensure that members are not subjected to
greater stresses than those allowed in BS 5950, Part 2 during fabrication, transportation,
storage and erection. Stored items shall not be in contact with each other and shall be clear
of the ground.
1.5.29 Damaged Material
Steelwork deemed to be damaged during the Contract period shall be replaced. The
Contractor shall provide Noticed by the Engineer for remedial work to damaged material if
218 | P a g e
repairable. The method of repair and final repaired condition shall be obtained a Notice by
the Engineer.
1.5.30 Galvanising
(1) Galvanising of steelwork, if required, shall be carried out after fabrication is

complete. Steelwork required to be galvanised shall be pickled in dilute
hydrochloric acid, washed, fluxed and stoved, and then coated with zinc by dipping
in a bath of molten zinc. Components shall be immersed in the bath only for the
period sufficient to attain the temperature of the bath and shall be withdrawn at a
speed which ensures that a coating of 610 grams per square metre of surface is
achieved – ie, 85 microns minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT). Components shall be
covered evenly on all surfaces. Items shall not be galvanised in more than one dip
event due to potential warping or additional stresses that may be induced in the
metal.
(2) Items described as heavily galvanised shall be grit or sand blasted prior to
galvanising and shall receive a minimum coating of 1000 gram per square metre of
surface – ie,140 microns minimum DFT.
(3) Lightweight gauge metalwork shall be galvanised by the hot-dip process as specified
in BS 3083 or BS 2989.
(4) Contact between galvanised steel members and aluminium surfaces or between
galvanised and ungalvanized steel members shall be prevented by means of Noticed
insulating washers and grommets.
(5) Galvanised steelwork shall be cleaned, degreased and etch primed before
application of the specified paint treatment.
1.5.31 Preparation of Steelwork for Protective Treatment
(1) Surfaces shall be cleaned to BS 7079 before any protective treatment is commenced.
(2) Steelwork shall be degreased and shot or grit blasted to Sa 2.5 quality standard with
surface amplitude of 50 to 75 microns to remove rust and mill scale. Dust and debris
shall be removed by vacuum cleaner, compressed air or brush. Site welds and
adjacent steelwork shall be blast cleaned and similarly prepared. Surface defects
shall be removed in accordance with BS 5950.
219 | P a g e
(3) Regular mill scale detection tests shall be made using the Copper Sulphate method.
1.5.32 Painting Generally
(1) Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions. When permitted, thinners shall be added to paint in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s permitted percentages.
(2) Brushes stored in thinners shall be worked to remove thinners before re-use.
(3) Painting shall not be carried out when the steelwork temperature is below 4oC,
above 50oC, less than 3oCabove the dew point, or when the relative humidity is
above 80%.
(4) Stripe coats shall be applied to welds and steel edges before painting.
(5) Strong paint films shall be achieved on all cleats, arisses, bolt holes, bolt heads and
the like.
(6) Protective treatment, other than the site-applied coatings, shall be applied under
factory conditions in an enclosed shop. Completed coats shall be checked for
continuity by a low-voltage wet sponge holiday detector and for thickness by an
Elcometer. The colour of each coat shall be sufficiently different to permit
detection of incomplete application.
(7) If a required film thickness is specified, it shall be the minimum dry film thickness
(DFT) as measured by a Noticed gauge. The gauge shall be calibrated for each
coating by the use of a shim placed on the shot blasted blank or on the underlying
coat. The shim shall correspond to the theoretical film thickness of the coating to
be measured. Otherwise, a full coating shall be applied in accordance with the rate
of coverage recommended by the manufacturer, having regard to the surface
profile of the steel and the conditions of application.
(8) Sample plates shall be prepared for approval and shall thereafter be adopted as the
standard to be achieved in the finished work.
(9) The Contractor shall prevent dust and dirt coming into contact with freshly painted
surfaces.
220 | P a g e
(10) Before the site painting coats are applied, the surfaces shall be lightly abraded, if
required by the manufacturer's instructions, and washed with clean water to
remove salt and other impurities.
(11) Paint shall not be applied to the embedded portions of metal items except those
within 75 millimetres of the finished concrete surface.
1.5.33 Application of Protective Layers
Blast-cleaned surfaces shall be kept dry and shall receive the first coat within 4 hours of
the start of cleaning – i.e, 2 hours for outdoor blast-cleaning. They shall be treated in
accordance with the protective treatment schedule, except the faying surfaces for high
strength friction grip bolt connections.
1.5.34 Protection of Bolts etc.
Bolts, including high strength friction grip bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dip spun-
galvanised or as Noticed by the Engineer. The threads of nuts may be re-tapped as provided
for in BS 729.
1.5.35 High Strength Friction Grip Connections
(1) Faying surfaces for high strength friction grip connectivity shall be blast-cleaned to Sa
2.5 quality standard, masked within two hours to exclude air and exposed just before
bolting-up. Paint and other contaminants shall not be allowed on faying surfaces.
(2) Each consecutive coat of paint shall be stepped back from the edge of the faying surface
by 15 millimetres.
1.5.36 Protective Treatment
(1) Damaged paintwork shall be blast-cleaned if bare metal is exposed or corrosion is

present. If the first coat is intact the surface shall be prepared by power wire brushing.
The prepared surface shall be protected with a nominated full paint protection system.
(2) Submerged steelwork shall, in addition, be coated with a compatible chlorinated

rubber-based anti-fouling paint to a DFT of 75 microns.
221 | P a g e
1.5.37 Paintwork Executed on Site
(1) Following erection, the exposed parts of galvanised nuts, washers and bolts (except
chain fixing bolts) shall be degreased, etch-primed and painted to the specification for
adjacent steelwork. Freshly galvanised surfaces shall be abraded and washed before
application of the etch-primer.
(2) After the preceding operations, and prior to the erection of cladding, if any, the
Contractor shall apply to the superstructure steelwork the finish coat(s) as specified.
Any damage to shop-coats will be made good on site prior to application of the Site
coats. If steel has been exposed, then the area shall be blast-cleaned primed and receive
all shop-coats or Site-coats to the required standard.
(3) Before the Site-coats are applied, the surfaces shall be lightly abraded, if required by
the manufacturer's instructions, and washed with clean water to remove salt and other
impurities. Paint shall not be applied to the embedded portions of metal items except
those within 75 millimetres of the finished concrete surface.
1.6 Cut and Cover Construction
1.6.1 General
(1) Cut and cover construction shall comply with the relevant requirements of the Contract
for temporary ground support including elements to be incorporated into Permanent
Works.
(2) Temporary ground support including elements to be incorporated into the Permanent
Works are described in Volume 5, Section 3, subsections 1.2, 1.4 & 1.5.
(3) Support by bracing, ties or anchors: are described in Volume 5, Section 3, subsections
1.4 & 1.7.
(4) Excavation and backfilling: are described in Volume 5, Section 3, subsection 1.2.
(5) Reinforced concrete construction is described in Volume 5, Section 3, sub sections 1.5.
(6) Vibration recording devices shall be provided to monitor for vibrations which may
cause damage to the proposed constructions and EBS. These devices shall be installed
at intervals and locations to provide comprehensive coverage of the Works. Unless
otherwise directed by the Fire/Life Safety Committee, these devices shall record
ground accelerations generated by the Works to ensure that these accelerations do not
222 | P a g e
exceed the values set by the relevant Authorities or those determined by the Contractor
for the stability and safety of the Temporary and Permanent Works and adjacent EBS.
1.6.2 Waterproofing
1.6.2.1 General
(1) Submission, Requirements, Method Statements and Working Drawings
a) The Contractor shall include details of his intended waterproofing methods in his
design submissions for Notice by the Engineer.
b) Manufacturer's literature shall be provided where necessary to confirm the

suitability of the proposed details.
c) The Contractor shall produce and submit comprehensive Working Drawings

showing all details and procedures for waterproofing of the Works.
d) The proposed waterproofing material shall be suitably resistant to all chemicals

with which they are likely to come into contact.
1.6.2.2 Waterproofing Application
a) Waterproofing material shall be installed only by the manufacturer of the products or

his Noticed applicator. The Contractor shall submit a method statement, prepared in
conjunction with the applicator and endorsed by the manufacturer of the material,
describing the details of the waterproofing works including protective measures at all
stages.
b) Waterproofing material shall be stored in a cool place. The material which are
subsequently exposed to sunlight shall not be affected by atmospheric conditions or
ultra violet light.
c) No material shall be used which is beyond its manufacturer’s expiry date.
1.6.2.3 Structural Concrete Works
(1) Concrete Joints
a) Notwithstanding the provision of waterproofing membranes, the Contractor shall

construct his concrete works so as to minimise the likelihood of water penetration.
Before placing new concrete against concrete that has already hardened, the face of
the old concrete shall be treated in accordance with Subsection 1.4.2.6 of this
section.
223 | P a g e
b) Concrete shall be cast water-tight between construction joints. Should such concrete
be found to leak or to have moist patches, the affected concrete shall be rectified by
injection of resin material, breaking out and recasting, or other methods of sealing
within the concrete. Inside rendering will not be accepted as a method of making
watertight.
(2) Water-stops
All water-stops used in the Works shall be of PVC material and of a type appropriate
to the location. All joints shall be made with moulded or prefabricated intersection
pieces properly jointed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
water-stops shall be installed so that they are securely held in their correct
positions whilst the concrete is being placed. No holes shall be made through any
water-stop except where provided for by the manufacturer.
(3) Piles and Pile caps
Where the waterproofing membrane is discontinuous to permit structural

connections to piles and pile caps, water tightness shall be achieved by use of a
concrete additive or bituminous material in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(4) Fillers and Sealants to Expansion Joints
a) All materials used to fill expansion joints shall be such that they will accept the
calculated movements of the joints without extrusion and shall not shrink away
from either surface of the joints. Backing strips and fillers agreed with the
Engineer shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
b) Where joints are required to be filled with polysulphide or polyurethane

sealants, the material shall comply with BS 4254 or BS 5212.
c) The appropriate sealant grades shall be used for horizontal and vertical joints,
and the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed with the appropriate
primer before applying the sealant. The sealant shall be of a colour to match as
nearly as possible the colour of the adjoining surfaces where it is to be
permanently exposed. The sealing material shall be used and applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor's attention is
drawn to the undesirability of the sealant being smeared over the adjacent
224 | P a g e
surfaces, and appropriate precautionary measures, including the use of masking

tape, shall be taken to avoid this.
1.6.2.4 Cleaning and Preparation of Surfaces
No laying shall be commenced until all rough edges and excrescencies have been
removed from the surfaces to receive the membrane. Surface depressions shall be filled
in accordance with the Noticed procedures and the filling allowed to set. The surface to
be waterproofed shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried and swept, and kept clean and dry
at all stages until the work is completed.
1.6.2.5 Waterproofing Underground Structures
The following requirements are applicable to all underground structures built by cut
and cover methods. A complete method statement for the Works together with relevant
shop drawings and details shall be submitted to the Engineer for Notice prior to
application of the system. The method statement shall include all QA/QC procedures
required to ensure the integrity of the system. Proposed manufacturers and applicators
should have similar experience on previous metro projects in India.
(1) Base Slabs
a) Waterproofing shall consist of a fully-bonded membrane system applied to a

blinding concrete layer, or other similar system Noticed by the Engineer.
b) Binding concrete shall be a minimum of 75 millimetres thick. Where ground

conditions are such that there would be risk of localised settlement of this blind
layer during or after subsequent construction operations, the concrete thickness
shall be increased and reinforced as necessary to avoid such localised settlement.
A drainage layer shall be provided beneath the blinding concrete where
necessary to ensure that the blinding concrete is not damaged by hydrostatic
pressures prior to casting of the structural slab.
c) The waterproofing membrane shall be laid by the manufacturer’s applicators

strictly in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and with
accepted good practice in the trade. Proper accessories such as anchor strips,
pipe collars, outside and inside corners, steel laminated plates etc. shall be used
for the correct and secure application of the waterproofing system.
225 | P a g e
d) When laying the membrane, no other works shall be carried out in the vicinity
which may cause personnel or equipment to intentionally or accident ally come
into contact with the membrane before it has been protected. Expanded
polystyrene boards or similar shall be used by the persons laying the membrane
to avoid stepping directly on to the laid membrane.
e) The membrane may be laid across changes in the plane of the concrete surface
where the material is sufficiently pliable to enable the adhesive to remain in
continuous contact with the primed concrete. Where this cannot be achieved,
preformed angles or similar features shall be provided and bonded to the
concrete surface.
f) Where openings must be left in the membrane for structural continuity of

piles or for other items projecting below the soffit of the base slab, the size of
opening in the membrane must be kept to a minimum. The opening shall be
sealed all round by a bituminous liquid.
g) Where external wall above the base slab are to be constructed in open cut,
the membrane laid beneath the base slap shall extend 300 millimetres
beyond the limits of the structural slab in order that waterproofing to the
wall may be lapped on to it. Blinding concrete beneath the membrane shall
extend 500 millimetres beyond the limits of the structural slab.
h) Where the structural base slap will be cast against diaphragm walls, piled
walls, or rock faces, the membrane shall be turned up against the face of the
wall by a minimum of 100 millimetres and then turned horizontally into a 20
millimetres by 20 millimetres chase cut into the wall face, and sealed with a
bituminous compound. The wall surface shall first be leveled by the
application of a steel trawled mortar coat where there is any risk that its
roughness may cause the membrane to be punctured. The construction
joints shall form a sealed compartment for which general arrangement is
indicated in the drawings.
(2) External Walls to Structures Built in Open Excavation
a) Waterproofing shall be provided and shall conform to the requirements of this

Contract. Concrete surfaces to be waterproofed shall be prepared where
226 | P a g e
necessary by grinding and local filling with mortar having a steel toweled finish
to provide a smooth surface free from voids, loose aggregate and sharp
protrusions. A brickwork protection layer shall be provided to the membrane
system to ensure that no damage is suffered to the membrane during backfilling
operations.
b) Where pipe penetrations are required through the wall, these shall be formed as
sections of galvanized steel pipe of the required diameter, with 36 millimetre
welded flange plates having outside diameter 300 millimetres greater than the
diameter of the pipe. The waterproofing membrane shall be fitted into the pipe
penetration to maintain the integrity of the waterproofing system as per a
recommended detail which shall be proposed by the waterproofing manufacture
and Noticed by the Engineer.
(3) External walls Built against Diaphragm Walls
a) Where in-situ concrete lining walls are cast against diaphragm walls having
water-bars at panel joints, no waterproofing membrane is required at the
interface between the diaphragm and in-situ walls. At base and roof slab levels,
water bar shall be provided or allowance for caulking by grout injection.
b) In all cases where slabs are cast against diaphragm walls an injection grouting
system shall be provided in each diaphragm wall panel joint at the base and roof
slab level, sufficient to enable the joint to be grouted between the inner face of
the diaphragm wall and the innermost water bar across the panel joint. After
completion of the base slab but before concreting of the in-situ lining wall, if any,
the base slab level grout injection shall be carried out.
c) After the grout has set the groundwater level beneath the joint shall be allowed to
rise to 1 meter above slab level and left for 7 days. The panel joint shall be
inspected for water leakage or dampness and if present the joint shall be re-
grouted and re-tested. Grout injection at roof slab level shall be carried out after
completion of the roof slab.
(4) External Walls Built Against Pile Walls or Rock or Soil Faces
a) Where in-situ concrete walls are cast against temporary pile walls, rock or soil
faces, or any other material, a fully bonded membrane system shall be provided.
227 | P a g e
The face against which the in-situ wall is to be cast shall be built up by with a
steel-trowelled finish, to provide a smooth surface free from voids, loose
aggregating and sharp protrusions. Where the thickness of mortar would be
excessive, concrete shall be cast as primary filler.
b) Material and application requirement for the waterproofing membrane shall be

in accordance with this Contract for base slabs. The membrane shall be lapped to
the base slab membrane and continued upwards to 300 millimetres above roof
slab level, or to the limit of the face against which the in-situ wall is to be cast if
this is lower. In such cases suitable provision shall be made for continuity of the
membrane with the water-tightness provisions to the wall above. Unless it is to
be bonded to the structural wall the membrane shall be protected by suitable
geofabric (fleece) sheeting hung from above and left in place
(5) Roof/Top Slab
a) Waterproofing shall be provided by fully bonded membrane system and shall

conform to the requirements of this Contract.
b) Where external walls above the base slab are to be constructed in open cut or
cast directly against diaphragm walls, piled walls and the like, the roof/top slab
membrane shall be extended and turned down the wall and welded to the
external water-bar across the roof slab/wall construction joint to form the sealed
compartment as per the Contract requirements.
c) A 75-millimetre-thick concrete protection layer shall be applied over the

membrane system for protection during backfilling operations.
(6) Waterproofing of Below Grade Construction Joints
All below-grade construction joints shall incorporate a re-injectable hose which shall be
capable of performance in the following manner:
a) The hose should be of a re-injectable nature and be capable of re-injection several

times over the life of the structure.
b) Installation should be seamless and without cuts and joints when installed at
multiple bends/corners/circular paths in congested heavily reinforced concrete.
228 | P a g e
c) The hose shall be capable of following infinite changes in direction and turn
corners with ease without impeding the path of grout injected through the hose.
d) Valves shall be enclosed in a retaining mesh to avoid displacement of these

during pressure testing and injection.
e) The injection resin should be of a re-sealable type made of an acrylate hydrogel,

capable of being vacuumed out of the hose with water (not flushed), before it
gels.
f) The injection resin should be of a low viscosity (<50 Centipoises) to enable

maximum penetration of very narrow fissures.
The system shall be placed in 10 to 12 metre lengths with entry port and vent ends
terminating in a junction box and shall offer the user the option of vacuuming and re-
injection should this be necessary. The junction box shall be placed in vertical
elements adjacent to the joint. Should this not be possible the junction box and its
cover should be installed flush with the floor level and should be able to tolerate
vehicular traffic.
The system should be used to seal off the construction joints permanently thus
providing protection to the steel reinforcement.
Where indicated, all construction joints (vertical and horizontal) shall have the re-
injectable hose installed. The re-injectable hose system shall be injected at least once,
prior to switching off the dewatering with a vinyl ester methacrylate based injection
resin of viscosity < 40milli Pascal (mPas).
1.6.2.6 Waterproofing to Surface and Partially Underground Structures
(1) Ground Slabs
Waterproofing to ground slabs shall be the same as for all underground structures
defined in this Contract
(2) External Walls Below Ground Level
The requirements of this Contract shall apply to all external walls at greater depth
than 500 millimetres below ground level
229 | P a g e
1.6.2.7 Stray current collectors
These shall be provided as per the Contract.
1.6.2.8 Warranty
(1) All waterproofing systems shall be warranted against all defects for a minimum
period of 10 years from the date of completion of the Works.
(2) The warranties shall cover the whole of the waterproofing systems and shall be
provided jointly and severally by the Contractor.
1.7 Prestressed Members
1.7.1 Pre-stressing Tendons

1.7.1.1 Materials
(1) Steel Wire
Steel wire shall comply with BS 5896.
(2) Cold worked high tensile alloy bar
Cold worked high tensile alloy steel bars for prestressing shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4486.
(3) Stress-relieved seven-wire strand
Stress relieved seven-wire strand shall comply with the requirements in TIS 420,
Grade 1860, nominal diameter 12.7 millimetres or 15.2 millimetres, or have
properties that are not inferior. The characteristic breaking load shall not be less
than that specified by the Contractor.
(4) Sampling and Testing
(a) When it is proposed to use super strand complying with BS 5896 Table 6 or
other than the lowest strength 3,4,5,6 or 7 mm diameter wire complying with
BS 5896 Tables 4 or 5 the following shall apply:
(i) A sample shall be taken from each reel of material proposed for use in the
Works
(ii) A reel shall only be accepted if both the breaking load and the 0.1% proof
load of the sample exceeds the specified characteristic loads given in Tables
230 | P a g e
4 or 6 of B5 5896. In the case of Table 5 this requirement shall apply to the

breaking load and the load at 1% elongation.
(iii) These requirements shall be additional to any other requirements of the

Contract.
(b) The Contractor shall arrange for samples of the steel intended for use in the
Works to be tested at a noticed laboratory.
1.7.1.2 Handling and Storage
(1) Care shall be taken to avoid mechanically damaging, work-hardening or heating pre-
stressing tendons while handling. All pre-stressing tendons shall be stored clear of
the ground and protected from weather, from splashes from any other materials,
from the cutting operation of an oxy-acetylene torch, or arc-welding processes in the
vicinity.
(2) In no circumstances shall pre-stressing tendons after manufacture be subjected to

any welding operation, or 'on-site' heat treatment or metallic coating such as
galvanising. This does not preclude cutting as specified in this Contract.
(3) All wires, strands or bars stressed in one operation shall be taken, where possible,
from the same parcel. Each cable shall be tagged with its number from which the coil
numbers of the steel used can be identified. Cables shall not be kinked or twisted.
Individual wires and strands for which extensions are to be measured shall be readily
identifiable at each end of the member. No strand that has become unraveled shall be
used.
1.7.1.3 Surface Condition
Pre-stressing tendons anchorages, blocking devices and internal and external surfaces of
ducts shall be clean and free from pitting, loose rust, loose scale and chloride
contamination at the time of incorporation in the work. If any surface cleaning is required
it shall not heat, damage or polish the surface, or coat it with oil, grease or any other
material.
231 | P a g e
1.7.1.4 Straightness
(1) Prestressing Wire
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, low relaxation and normal relaxation
wire shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure that wire pays off
straight.
(2) Strand
Pre-stressing strand, however manufactured, shall be in coils of sufficiently large

diameter to ensure that the strand pays off reasonably straight.
(3) Bars
Pre-stressing bars as delivered shall be straight. Bars bent in the threaded portion
shall be rejected. Any straightening of bars shall be carried out cold but at a
temperature of not less than 5oC. Any necessary heating shall be by means of steam or
hot water.
(4) Reinforcement mesh or wire
Mesh or wire shall be delivered in sheets or coils. Any straightening of bars shall be
carried out cold but at a temperature of not less than 5oC. Any necessary heating shall
be by means of steam or hot water.
(5) Cutting
All cutting of wire, strand or bar shall be carried out using either:
(a) a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel, friction saw at not less than one diameter
from the anchor or any other mechanical method noticed by the Engineer, or
(b) an oxy-acetylene cutting flame, using excess oxygen to ensure a cutting rather
than a melting action not less than 75 millimetres from the anchor whilst the
temperature of the tendon adjacent to the anchor shall not be greater than
200oC. Care shall be taken that neither the flame nor splashes come into
contact with either the anchorage or other tendons or reinforcement.
1.7.2 Pre-cast Construction
Care shall be exercised in the set-up of each member. All materials to be encased within
the concrete of the member shall be properly positioned and supported. Provisions for all
232 | P a g e
projections, recesses, notches, openings, blackouts and the like shall be made in
accordance with the Drawings.
1.7.3 Stressing Tendons
1.7.3.1 General
(1) It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to provide a technician skilled in pre-
stressing systems to supervise or provide appropriate surveillance of the work and
give the Engineer such pertinent information as he may require for inspecting the
work. Such a representative shall be available full-time on all days during which the
stressing and grouting of tendons is in progress.
(2) All post-tensioning steel shall be tensioned by means of hydraulic jacks so that the
force of the pre-stressing steel shall not be less than the value shown on the noticed
working drawings. The maximum temporary tensile stress (stressing stress) in pre-
stressing steel shall not exceed 80% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength of the pre-stressing steel.
1.7.3.2 Tensioning Apparatus
The tensioning apparatus shall meet the following general requirements: -
(a) The means of attachment of the tendon to the jack or tensioning device shall be
safe and secure.
(b) Where two or more wires or strands are stressed simultaneously, they shall be
approximately of equal length between anchorage points at the datum of load and
extension measurement. The degree of variation shall be small compared with the
expected extension.
(c) The tensioning apparatus shall be such that a controlled total force is imposed
gradually, and not dangerous secondary stresses are induced in the tendons,
anchorage or concrete.
(d) The force in the tendons during tensioning shall be measured by direct-reading
load cells or obtained indirectly from gauges fitted in the hydraulic system to
determine the pressure in the jacks. Facilities shall be provided for the
measurement of the extension of the tendon and of any movement of the tendon in
the gripping devices. The load-measuring device shall be calibrated to accuracy
233 | P a g e
within ± 2% and checked at intervals Elongation of the tendon shall be measured

to accuracy within 2% or ±2 millimetres, whichever is the more accurate.
(e) The tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the tensioning operation and
at intervals of months or as noticed by the Engineer.
(f) Any indication in the loss of strength in tendons during the tensioning operation
shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Any corrective measures which
may be required in procedures and/or material shall be noticed by the Engineer.
(g) When friction must be reduced, water-soluble oil may be used upon receiving
Notice from the Engineer. This oil may be flushed from the duct as soon as possible
after stressing is completed by use of water pressure. These ducts shall be flushed
again just prior to the grouting operations. Each time the ducts are flushed, they
shall be immediately blown dry with oil-free air
(h) Loss in strength of tendons may occur from wedge pull-in, bond failure tendon
slippage or concrete elastic shortening, and these shall be separately identified by
methods agreed with the Engineer. Immediate loss in strength must also be
identified from relaxation loss for the purposes of design and testing.
1.7.4 Testing by Contractor
(1) For the purpose of accurately determining the tendon elongations while stressing, the
Contractor shall bench-test two samples of each size and type of strand tendon to
determine the modulus of elasticity prior to stressing the initial tendon. The bench
should be at least 6 metres long, with concrete anchorage blocks having a constant
area end section of at least four times that of the anchorage assembly area. The
tendon shall be straight and centered on the cross-sectional area of the bench.
(2) The test procedure shall consist of stressing the tendon at an anchor assembly with
the dead end consisting of a load cell. The test specimen shall be tensioned to 80% of
ultimate in a minimum of 10 increments.
(3) For each increment, the gauge pressure, elongation and load cell force shall be
recorded. The data shall be furnished to the Engineer. The theoretical elongations
shown on the post-tensioning working drawings shall be re-evaluated by the
Contractor using the results of the tests and corrected as necessary.
234 | P a g e
(4) Revisions to the theoretical elongations shall be noticed to the Engineer. Apparatus
and methods used to perform the tests shall be proposed by the Contractor. After the
initial testing, five (5) more tests shall be performed. These tests shall be spaced
evenly throughout the duration of the Contract.
1.7.5 Pre-tensioning
Where pre-tensioning methods are used, the tension shall be fully maintained by some
positive means during the period between tensioning and transfer. The transfer of stress
shall take place slowly to minimize shock. It is important to identify the different modes of
stress transfer between and ungrouted tendons and allow for the test system to behave in
the appropriate manner for each setup.
1.7.5.1 Straight Tendons
(1) In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient locator plates shall be distributed
throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the wires or strands are maintained
in their proper position during concreting.
(2) Where a number of units are made in the line, they shall be free to slide in the
direction of their length and thus permit transfer of the pre-stressing force to the
concrete along the whole line for grouted tendons. In the individual mould system,
the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the pre-stressing force
without distortion. In ungrouted tendons the locator plates must be fashioned so that
load transfer is not incorrectly carried out at these plate locations but only at the
external concrete faces by bearing.
1.7.5.2 Deflected Tendons
(1) Where possible the mechanisms for holding down or holding up tendons shall ensure
that the part in contact with the tendon is free to move in the line of the tendon so
that frictional losses are nullified. If, however, a system is used that develops a
frictional force, this force shall be determined by test and due allowance made as
agreed with the Engineer.
(2) For single tendons the deflector in contact with the tendon shall have a radius of not
less than 5 times the tendon diameter for wire or 10 times the tendon diameter for a
strand, and the total angle of deflection shall not exceed 15 degrees. Where the radius
is less than 5 times the diameter of the tendon and the angle of deflection exceeds 15
235 | P a g e
degrees, the loss of strength of the tendon shall be determined by test and due
allowance made.
(3) The transfer of the pre-stressing force to the concrete shall be effected in conjunction
with the release of hold-down and hold-up forces as noticed by the Engineer.
1.7.6 Post-tensioning
(1) Arrangement of Tendons
Where wires, strands or bars in a tendon are not stressed simultaneously, the use
of spacers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the system
manufacturer.
(2) Anchorages
(a) Anchorages shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 4447
(b) For each anchorage system used in the Works, the characteristic value for
anchorage efficiency shall be not less than 90%.
(c) Proprietary anchorages shall be handled and used strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
(3) Deflected Tendons
The deflector in contact with the tendon shall, have a radius of not less than 50
times the diameter of the tendon, and the total angle of deflection shall not exceed
15 degrees unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
(4) Tensioning Procedure
a. Before tensioning, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all tendons are free
to move in the ducts unless the geometry of the ducts makes this
impracticable as agreed with the Engineer. Tensioning shall be carried out in
such a manner that the stress in the tendons increases at a gradual and
steady rate.
b. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, concrete shall not be stressed

until it has reached at least the age at which 2 test cubes taken from it attain
the specified transfer strength. The test cubes shall be made and tested as
236 | P a g e
described in BS 1881. They shall be cured in similar conditions to the

concrete to which they relate in a manner noticed by the Engineer.
c. The Contractor shall cast sufficient cubes to demonstrate that the required
strength of the concrete at transfer has been reached.
d. The Contractor shall ensure that those carrying out the stressing are
provided with particulars of the required tendon loads, order of stressing and
extensions. Allowance shall be made during stressing for the friction in the
jack and in the anchorage, although the former is not necessary when using
load cells.
e. Any allowance for draw-in of the tendon during anchoring shall be noticed to
the Engineer.
f. Stressing shall continue until the required extension and tendon load are
reached or are noticed by the Engineer.
g. The extension shall allow for any draw-in of the tendon occurring at the non-
jacking end, but measurement shall not commence until any slack in the
tendon has been taken up.
h. Immediately after anchoring, the forces in the pre-stressing tendons shall not
exceed 70% of their characteristic strength. During stressing the value may
exceed 70% of their characteristic strength, with notice to the Engineer, but
shall not exceed 80%.
i. After the tendons have been anchored, the force exerted by the tensioning
apparatus shall be decreased gradually and steadily so as to avoid shock to
the tendon or the anchorage. Full records shall be kept of all tensioning
operations, including the measured extensions, pressure-gauge or load-cell
readings, and the amount of draw-in at each anchorage. Copies of these
records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning
operation.
j. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer tendons shall not be cut less than
3 days after grouting.
237 | P a g e
1.7.7 Pre-stressing Tendons - Protection and Bond
(1) The pre-stressing tendons shall be protected in their permanent positions from both
mechanical damage shall be applied to all unbonded pre-stressing tendons within 28
days of installation of the tendon in the duct. The tendon protection compound shall
be applied to the ends to avoid corrosion as described in the Contract and the
following sub-clauses.
(2) The exposed tendons at the anchorages and anchorages themselves shall be sealed
within a closed box and protected from both mechanical damage and corrosion.
Suitable access shall be left for jacking equipment for the later removal of strands of
unbonded tendons. The means of protection shall be designed by the pre-stressed
steel supplier and the same to be noticed by the Engineer.
(3) A tendon protection compound shall be a micro-crystalline wax (petrolatum) base

material containing additives to enhance the corrosion inhibiting, wetting, and
moisture displacing properties, as well as the ability to form a polar bond with the
tendon steel.
(4) The compound manufacturer shall provide test data verifying that the following
properties are met for the service life of 120 years and temperature range of 0 oC to
50oC
(a) Freedom from cracking and brittleness;
(b) Continuous self-healing film over the coated surfaces;
(c) Chemical and physical stability;
(d) Non-reactivity with the surrounding and adjacent materials such as concrete,
tendons, and ducts;
(e) Moisture displacing characteristics.
(5) Additionally, it shall remain flexible to allow removal and replacement of the tendons.
The tendon protection compound and its method of installation shall be Noticed by
the Engineer.
(6) Provision shall be made for expansion of the tendon protection compound during the
lifetime of the structure.
238 | P a g e
(7) Before installing the tendon, protection compound it shall be demonstrated that the
ducts, U-bend anchorage and anchorages are clean and free of water and chlorides.
(8) The tendons, internal face of the steel u-bend anchorage, stressing anchorages and
any other metallic components of the pre-stressing system shall additionally be pre-
treated with a protection compound before delivery to site. The protection compound
shall be applied to each strand of the tendon and shall be compatible with the tendon
protection compound injected into the ducts. The protection compound shall be
noticed by the Engineer.
(9) The Contractor shall obtain notice from the Engineer on tendon protection compound
suppliers proposals which shall describe how the tendon protection compound can
be removed and re-injected into ducts, including buried ducts, and within the
permanent works.
(10) All materials used in the pre-stressing systems shall not give off toxic fumes at
temperatures below 50oCand shall not support combustion.
1.7.8 Ducts for Bonded Tendons
1.7.8.1 Ducts
(1) Ducts for longitudinal, transverse or vertical tendons embedded into the concrete
may be of flexible, semi-rigid, or rigid galvanized, ferrous metal capable of
withstanding concrete pressures without deforming or permitting the entrance of
cement paste during casting of the member.
(2) Ducts shall retain their shape and be capable of transferring bond stresses. The semi-
rigid duct must be rigid enough to remain straight when supported at 1200
millimetres maximum intervals but flexible enough to allow 3600 millimetres radius
curves. Flexible duct shall be secured or supported at not more than 300 millimetres
intervals.
1.7.8.2 Grouting of Pre-stressing Tendons
(1) General
The Contractor shall undertake grouting trials when required by the Engineer.
(2) Materials
239 | P a g e
(a) Unless otherwise directed or agreed by the Engineer as a result of grouting trials,
the grout shall consist only of Ordinary Portland Cement.
(b) Cement and water. The water/cement ratio shall be as low as possible
consistent with the necessary workability, and under no circumstances shall
the water: cement ratio exceed 0.45 by weight.
(c) The grout shall not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2% after 3 hours or 4%
maximum when measured at 25oCor such other temperature as may be
noticed by the Engineer, in a covered cylinder approximately 100 millimetres
diameter with a height of grout of approximately 100 millimetres and the
water shall be reabsorbed by the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
(d) Admixtures may be used with the written permission of the Engineer and shall
be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions in excess of 0.25 % by weight.
(e) Dry materials shall be measured by weight.
(3) Ducts
(a) Air vents shall be provided at any crests in the duct profile and elsewhere as
specified.
(b) All ducts shall be thoroughly clean before grouting. Ducts formed without metal
sheathing shall be provided with effective drainage and, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, shall be flushed with water before grouting.
(c) All surplus water shall be removed by compressed air injection.
(d) All anchorages shall be sealed or fitted with grouting connections.
(4) Grouting Equipment
(a) The mixing equipment shall produce a grout of homogeneous consistency and shall
be capable of providing a continuous supply to the injection equipment.
(b) The injection equipment shall be capable of continuous operation with little
variation of pressure and shall include a system for recirculating the grout while
actual grouting is not in progress. Compressed air shall not be used.
240 | P a g e
(c) The equipment shall have a sensibly constant delivery pressure not exceeding 1
MPa. All piping to the grout pumps shall have a minimum of bends, valves and
changes in diameter. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with 1.18-millimetre
sieve strainers. All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed
through with clean water after every series of operations and at the end of use for
each day. The interval between washing shall not exceed 3 hours.
(d) The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted

ducts and shall be fitted with a valve that can be locked off without loss of pressure
in the duct.
(5) Mixing
Water shall be added to the mixer first, then the cement. When these are thoroughly
mixed, the admixture, if any, shall be added. Mixing shall continue until a uniform
consistency is obtained. Mixing shall not be by hand.
(6) Injecting Grout
(a) Grouting shall be carried out as soon as is practicable after the tendons in them
have been stressed and anchors trimmed and the Engineer's permission to
commence has been obtained.
(b) Injection of grout shall be continuous, and it shall be slow enough to avoid
producing segregation of the grout. The method of injecting grout shall ensure
complete filling of the ducts and complete surrounding of the steel. Grout shall be
allowed to flow from the free end of the duct until its consistency is equivalent to
that of the grout injected. The opening shall then be firmly closed. Any vents or
bleed holes shall be closed in a similar manner one after another in the direction
of the flow. After an appropriate time, further injections shall be carried out to fill
any possible cavities.
(c) The injection tubes shall then be sealed off under pressure until the grout has set.
(d) The filled ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 1 day of
grouting.
(e) Not less than 2 days after grouting, the level of grout in the injection and vent
tubes shall be inspected and made good as necessary.
241 | P a g e
(f) The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date each duct
was grouted, the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure,
details of any interruptions and topping up required. Copies of these records shall
be supplied to the Engineer within 3 days of grouting.
(g) The Contractor shall provide facilities and attendance for the radiographic testing
of the grouted duct.
(7) Strength of Grout
The compressive strength of 100 millimetres cubes made of the grout shall exceed 17
MPa at 7 days. Cubes shall be cured in a moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and
subsequently in water.
1.7.9 Ducts for Unbonded Tendons
(1) Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ducts and injection tubes in the
superstructure and substructure shall be formed from high density polyethylene
(HDPE) which shall incorporate a stabilizing agent to prevent Ultra Violet Light (UVL)
degradation.
(2) The minimum wall thickness of the ducts shall be such that the ducts are capable of
resisting the pressures developed during installation of the protection compound.
The ducts shall be smooth bore.
(3) Ducts with external diameters greater than 70 millimetres shall be transported and
stored in straight lengths without stacking. The distance between supports shall be
limited to 3 metres and the height of storage to 1.5 metres. Alternatively, ducts may
be transported and stored in coils provided that they are fixed to the designed
tolerances. Damaged ducts shall not be used in the Works.
(4) No boring of any holes in the ducts shall be permitted once the tendons are installed.
(5) U-bend anchorages shall be formed from smooth-bore unwelded steel tubes and shall
comply with the requirements of BS 4360.
(6) Joints between ducts, ducts with anchorages and ducts with U-bend anchorages shall
be formed by a coupling device using thermo-fusion techniques which shall provide a
water-tight seal to the ducts and shall be capable of resisting the pressure developed
during installation of the tendon protection compound. The inner surfaces of the
242 | P a g e
joints shall form a smooth transition between ducts and U-bend anchorages to allow
satisfactory installation of the tendons. All coupling devices shall be noticed by the
Engineer.
(7) Injection tubes shall be provided at the U-bend anchorages, the stressing anchorages
and at any other positions on the length of the ducts which are required to achieve
satisfactory installation of the tendon protection compound. The injection tubes at
the U-bend anchorages shall also be used as drainage points for the U-bend. The
connection between the ducts and the injection tubes shall be water-tight and
capable of resisting the pressure developed during installation of the tendon
protection compound.
(8) All injection tubes shall be sealed after use to prevent the ingress of water
(9) After completion of all duct joints and before completion of the in-situ joints between
pre-cast segments and before installation of the tendons, all ducts shall be air tested
to an equivalent 100 millimetres water gauge. The test shall be performed in
accordance with BS 8301 Section 5.
(10) Any ducts which do not contain tendons shall remain empty and shall be sealed at
each end to prevent the ingress of water.
1.7.10 Pre-stressing Tendons - Trial Construction-Unbonded Tendons
(1) Before commencing construction of the pre-cast segments, a trial shall be carried out
which shall demonstrate the satisfactory installation, removal and replacement of a
pre-stressing strand together with the proposed techniques for duct jointing, duct
testing and installation of the tendon protection compound.
(2) The tendons shall be stressed in accordance with this Contract.
(3) The ducts shall be filled with a tendon protection compound in accordance with this
Contract and the tendon extension and anchorage shall be protected as if they were to
be included in the permanent works.
(4) The trial shall demonstrate that any one strand may be destressed, removed,
inspected, replaced and restressed and that no voids are created within the tendon
protection compound.
243 | P a g e
(5) The trial shall also demonstrate that all of the strands in a duct may be removed and
that the tendon protection compound can be removed from the ducts and U-bend
anchorage
(6) The trial shall be undertaken using the pre-stressing system to be used in the
Permanent Works and shall be noticed by the Engineer.
1.7.11 Pre-stressing Tendons - Temporary Tendons
(1) Temporary tendons may be re-used as temporary tendons elsewhere provided special
precautions are incorporated at the anchorages to ensure tendons are not damaged.
These precautions shall be noticed by the Engineer.
(2) The tendons shall be enclosed within a duct throughout their length.
(3) The tendons shall be pre-treated in accordance with the Contract and the protection
compound shall be applied to the outer surfaces of the tendon after each use.
(4) The maximum jacking force for the re-usable temporary tendons shall not exceed 70%
of their guaranteed minimum breaking load.
(5) After removal of the tendons the ducts shall be sealed at each end to prevent the
ingress of water.
1.7.12 Preparation for Casting
(1) The Contractor shall submit for notice, in accordance with the provisions of the
Employer's Requirements, working drawings of the pre-stressing system proposed
for use. For initial notice, 3 sets of such drawings shall be submitted.
(2) After notice, between 6 and 12 sets, shall be submitted the working drawings of the
pre-stressing system shall show complete details and be accompanied by
substantiating calculations of the method and materials the Contractor proposes to
use in the pre-stressing operations, including any additions or rearrangement of
reinforcing steel from that shown on the Drawings. Such details shall outline the
method and sequence of stressing and shall include complete specifications and
details of the pre-stressing steel and anchoring devices, working stresses, anchoring
stresses, type of ducts, and all other data pertaining to the pre-stressing operation,
including the proposed arrangement of the pre-stressing steel in the members.
244 | P a g e
(3) Working drawings shall be A1 size and each drawing and calculation sheet shall
include the job site, name of the structure as shown on the Contract Drawings and
Contract name.
(4) Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of start of the affected
work to allow time for Notice by the Engineer and correction by the Contractor of the
drawings without delaying the work. Such time shall be proportional to complexity of
the work but in no case shall such time be less than eight (8) weeks.
(5) At the completion of each structure, one set of reproducible Mylar of the corrected
original tracing of all working drawings for said structure shall be furnished to the
Engineer. Drawings which are common to more than one structure shall be provided
for each structure. An index prepared specifically for the working drawings for each
structure containing sheet numbers and titles shall be included.
(6) Reinforcing steel shall be fabricated and placed in accordance with the Drawings and
as required herein. No reinforcing steel shall be cut and removed to permit proper
alignment of stressing ducts. Any bar that cannot be fabricated to clear the conduits
shall be replaced by additional bars with adequate lap lengths and shall be submitted
to the Engineer. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete,
bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 12 millimetres or one-tenth
(1/10) of the spacing between bars, whichever is less.
(7) All pre-stressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust or other
results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting or encasing in concrete.
Pre-stressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall be rejected.
The development of visible rust or other results of corrosion shall be cause for
rejection, Pre-stressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping forms for the
protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and
storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall
be placed in the package or form or shall be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor
carrier type packaging material, may be applied directly to the steel, with notice to
the Engineer. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or
concrete or bond strength of steel to concrete. Packaging or forms damaged from any
cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to original condition.
245 | P a g e
(8) The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that the
package contains high-strength pre-stressing steel, and the care to be used in
handling; and the type, kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used, including the
date when placed, safety orders and instructions for use.
(9) Pre-stressing steel for post-tensioning which is installed in members prior to placing
and curing of the concrete, shall be continuously protected against rust or other
corrosion, until grouted, by means of a corrosion inhibitor placed in the ducts or
applied to the steel in the duct. The corrosion inhibitor shall conform to the
requirements specified herein.
(10) When steam curing is used, pre-stressing steel for post-tensioning shall not be
installed until the steam curing is completed.
(11) All water used for flushing ducts shall contain either quick lime (calcium oxide) or
slaked lime (calcium hydroxide) in the amount of 13 grams per litre. All compressed
air used to blow out ducts shall be oil free.
(12) When acceptable pre-stressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in the ducts after
completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are completed within 10
calendar days after the installation of the pre-stressing steel, rust which may form
during said 10 days will not be cause for rejection of the steel. Pre-stressing steel
installed, tensioned and grouted in this manner, all within 10 calendar days, will not
require the use of a corrosion inhibitor in the duct following installation of the pre-
stressing steel. Pre-stressing steel installed as above but not grouted within 10
calendar days shall be subject to all the requirements in this Section pertaining to
corrosion protection and rejection because of rust.
(13) Any time acceptable pre-stressing steel for pre-tensioning is placed in the stressing
bed and is exposed to the elements for more than 36 hours prior to encasement in
concrete, adequate measures shall be taken by the Contractor, as noticed by the
Engineer, to protect said steel from contamination or corrosion.
(14) All ducts shall be located within 5 millimetres of the locations given on noticed
fabrication plans. Method and spacing of supports for ducts shall be shown on the
working drawings. After installation in the forms, the end of the ducts shall at all
times be sealed to prevent entry of water and debris. Following each pour of concrete,
246 | P a g e
the Contractor will be required to demonstrate that all empty ducts are free of water
and are unobstructed and undamaged. Immediately prior to installation of the pre-
stressing steel, the Contractor shall again demonstrate that all ducts are unobstructed
and that they are free of water and debris.
(15) Where tendons are described in the Contract as debonded from the concrete they
shall be covered with sleeves noticed by the Engineer. The ends of the sleeves shall be
taped to the tendon to prevent the ingress of grout.
(16) Concrete shall not be deposited into forms until the entire set-up of the forms,
reinforcement, ducts, and anchorage has been thoroughly inspected and checked. The
Contractor shall submit a proposal to the effect that the rate of producing and placing
concrete will be sufficient to complete the proposed pour and finishing operations
within the scheduled time, that experienced concrete finishers are available where
required for finish work and all necessary finishing tools and equipment are on hand
at the site of the work and are in satisfactory condition for use.
(17) Concrete on sloped forms shall be placed on the lowest end or edge and worked to the
higher end or edge to avoid loss of water and compaction. Self-levelling concrete may
be used where access is limited, however vibration is still necessary.
(18) Conveying equipment shall be of a size and design that will permit the placing of
concrete within the time limits specified. Conveying equipment shall be cleaned at the
end of each operation or work day and just prior to reuse shall again be checked and
cleaned of hardened concrete and foreign materials.
(19) Belt conveyors shall be horizontal or at a slope which will not cause excessive
segregation of loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be protected against undue drying or
rise in temperature. A noticed arrangement shall be used at the discharge end to
prevent aggregate segregation. Mortar shall not be allowed to adhere to the return
length of the belt. Concrete shall be discharged into a hopper or through a baffle.
(20) The concrete shall be first placed in the web forms followed by placement at the
bottom slab and then in the top form. Any alternate sequence shall be submitted
noticed to the Engineer.
(21) For pours conducted in stages, the concrete from the first stage interfacing with the
newer pour should be clean and moistened. Older concrete surfaces should be
247 | P a g e
scabbled to allow aggregates to be partially visible or else scarified and roughened if

the first pour is fairly recent.
(22) All concrete shall be consolidated by means of noticed vibrators together with any
other equipment necessary to perform the work as specified. Internal vibrators shall
have a minimum frequency of 8,000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to
consolidate the concrete effectively.
(23) Vibrators should be of sufficient size but not oversized for the particular pour – eg,
the vibrators should be able to fit between reinforcement cages, rebar spacings and
into corners. Vibration time shall be controlled such that segregation is not caused by
keeping the vibrator in one place for prolonged periods. Typical diameters range
from ½” to ¾” (12 to 18 millimetres) for standard pours and to be determined by
trial pours prior to use on actual works. Honeycombing from air-entrainment is also
reduced by proper vibration, especially between the reinforcement and form faces.
(24) At least two (2) stand-by vibrators in working condition shall be provided for
emergency use in case of malfunction. The use of external vibrators or vibrating
forms for consolidating concrete will be permitted and may be required when the
concrete is inaccessible for adequate consolidation. When external vibration is used,
the forms shall be constructed sufficiently rigid to resist displacement or damage.
Vibrating of concrete shall be done with care and in such a manner as to avoid
displacement of reinforcing, conduits, and other items to be fixed in place.
1.8 Glazed Roof for Transition Ramps
(1) Where shown on the construction Drawings, entrances shall be constructed of

glazed stainless steel to comply with the following standards and the finish product
shall be to No. 4 satin stainless-steel finish.
(2) Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel elements shall conform to the following:
a) Sheet: ASTM A167, ASTM A480, and AISI Type 302 or 304,2mm minimum
thickness.
b) Castings: ASTM A296, iron-chromium, nickel.
c) Extruded Shapes: Manufacturer's standard complying with drawings.
d) Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A36.
248 | P a g e
e) Glazing: Glass for glazing complying to BS 952.
f) Glazing Gaskets: Neoprene formulated complying to the requirements of

ASTM C509.
g) Weather strips Closed cell neoprene sweep strip, conforming to ASTM C509.
h) Fasteners and Anchorage Materials: Welding electrodes and filler metal shall
be an alloy and type required for strength, work-ability, compatibility and
colour to match the fabricated product.
i) Hardware: Provide hinges, springs, locksets, closers, handles, rails in BHMA

630 or US32D satin stainless-steel finish to match the finish metal of the roof
1.8.1 Glass
(1) The Contractor shall submit samples not less than 150mm square of the various
types of glass, as notice to Engineer before cutting panes.
(2) Glass for glazing shall conform to the requirements of BS 952 for the respective
types.
(3) Glass shall be free from specks, air bubbles, wanes, air holes, scratches and other
defects. Glazing shall comply with the requirements of BS 6262.
(4) Toughened glass shall be float type conforming to BS 952, clear or body tinted as
required, flat and parallel surfaces, provide a clear and undistorted vision and shall
have a minimum thickness of 12mm.
(5) Toughened glass shall have a flexural strength a minimum of four to five times
greater than normal glass before treatment.
(6) Glass shall be cut to accurate sizes as determined by accurate field measurements
before the tempering treatment. No cutting or treating of edges in the field shall be
allowed. All cut, and process edges shall be done in accordance with the glass
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.8.2 Glazing Compounds and Accessories

(1) Glazing compounds, including putties, shall be of a type recommended by the window
and glass manufacturers and suitable for tropical use.
249 | P a g e
(2) Distance pieces and location blocks shall be of PVC with a thickness equal to the
specified space between glass and bead and of a depth to give not less than 6mm cover
of sealant.
(3) Setting blocks shall be of lead, sealed hardwood or nylon.
(4) Sleeves and washers for fixing mirrors shall be polyethylene.
1.8.3 Glazing Generally

(1) Glazing shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6262.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure that rebates are dry and clean and have been primed or
sealed as required.
(3) Setting and location blocks shall be used in panes of ordinary glazing over 0.2m2 and
with all sizes of laminated glass, toughened glass and factory made double glazing units.
(4) Distance pieces shall be provided to all panes where a non-setting compound is used
and they shall not be located coincident with setting and location blocks. In laminated
and toughened glazing or with factory made double-glazing units the positions and sizes
shall be as recommended by the glass or unit manufacturer.
1.8.4 Compound Glazing
Glazing in compound or putty shall be executed with proper bed and back putties, sprigs,
clips and splayed and mitred front putties. The back putties shall be trimmed off flush with
the tops of the rebates and the splayed front putties shall be finished 3mm back from sight
lines to allow for sealing between glass and putty with paint.
1.8.5 Cleaning and Protection

(1) Painted or stuck on indicators on solar control or coloured glass shall not be used.
Whitewash may be used on ordinary glass but must be restricted to small central
areas of panes.
(2) The Contractor shall remove all smears and excess compound and leave clean inside
and out and free from scratches.
All glass and fixing materials broken or damaged before acceptance of that part of the
Works as substantially completed shall be replaced.
250 | P a g e
Volume 2
IndiaWebsite: http://portal.mcgm.gov.in
1|Page
GOREGAON MULUND LINK ROAD (GMLR)
Disclaimer


Appendices 1 to 19

Note: The Tenderers, whilst compiling their rates, must carefully consider all the
requirements of the documents listed above, and the Request for Qualification (RFQ)
documents for the Package concerned, as all these documents will form part of the Contract.
2|Page
Volume 2
Section IV
General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
The General Conditions of Contract shall be those contained in the “Conditions of Contract for
Plant and Design-Build(First Edition, 1999)”, published by the Federation International des
Ingenieurs – Conseils (FIDIC). The Clauses of these conditions shall be considered valid and
binding in relation to the present contract, insofar as they are relevant and within the Laws of
India.
Tenderers are deemed to be in possession of their own copy of the above document and to be
fully aware of and have understood the contents therein.
3|Page
Goregaon Mulund link Road (GMLR)
Volume 2
Section V
Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
4|Page
Part II
Plant and Design-Build(First Edition, 1999)”, published by the Federation InternationaleDes
Ingenieurs – Conseils (FIDIC).
The General Conditions of Contract (GCC) are linked with the Particular Conditions of Contract
(PCC) by the corresponding numbering of the Clauses, so that the GCC and the PCC together
comprise the rights and obligations of the parties. In the case of any discrepancy between the
conditions contained in the GCC and the PCC, the conditions contained in the PCC shall prevail
over that of the GCC.
The Clauses of these conditions shall be considered valid and binding in relation to the present
contract, insofar as they are relevant and within the Laws of India.Words indicating persons
or parties include corporations and other legal entities, except where the context requires
otherwise.
Tenderers are advised to purchase copies of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract and deemed to
be in possession of their own copy of the above document and to be fully aware of and have
understood the contents therein.
5|Page
Units & Abbreviations

Units of measurement, symbols and abbreviations expressed in the Tender Documents
Tenderer shall comply with the System International Units (SI Units).
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations shall be used in the Bid Document:
Prime Minister of India
PM
Chief Minister of Maharashtra
CM
Government of India
GOI
6|Page
Government of Maharashtra
GOM
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climatic Changes
MoEFCC
Ministry of Urban Developments
MoUD
Environment Appraisal Committee
EAC
State Environment Appraisal Committee
7|Page
SEAC
State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority
SEIAA
Maharashtra Coastal Zone Management Authority
MCZMA
MCGM
Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
MC
8|Page
Additional Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
AMC
Deputy Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
DMC
Chief Engineer
Ch.E.
Central Pollution Control Board
CPCB
9|Page
State Pollution Control Board
SPCB
Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board
MPCB
Urban Development Department
UD
Maharashtra Maritime Board
10 | P a g e
MMB
Maharashtra State Road Development Corporation Ltd.
MSRDC
Mumbai Urban Infrastructure Project
MUIP
Mumbai Urban Transport Project
MUTP
Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation
MMRC
Mumbai Metro Line
11 | P a g e
MML
Mumbai Tran Harbour Link
MTHL
Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Development Authority
MMRDA
High Power Committee
HPC
12 | P a g e
Mumbai Heritage Conservation Committee
MHCC
NIO
Development Planning Department
DPD
Water Supply Project Department
WSP
Chief Fire Officer
13 | P a g e
CFO
Hydraulic Engineer Department
HE
Airport Authority of India
AAI
Mumbai Traffic Police
14 | P a g e
MTP
Mumbai Port Trust
MbPT
Employer’s Requirements (For Documents)
ER
Employer’s Representative (For Agency or Person)
ER
General Consultant
15 | P a g e
GC
Project Management Consultant
PMC
General Conditions of Contract
GCC
Development Plan
DP
Coastal Zone Management Plan
16 | P a g e
CZMP
Public Works Department
PWD
Indian National Rupees
INR
Interim Payment Certificate(for Tender)
IPC
Indian Penal Code (for Law)
17 | P a g e
IPC
Hector
Ha
Town Hall Datum
THD
Chart Datum
18 | P a g e
CD
Mean Sea Level
MSL
High Tide Level
HTL
Low Tide Level
19 | P a g e
LTL
Kilometer
km
Chainage
CH
Non-Pressure
NP
Number
20 | P a g e
No.
Particular Conditions of Contract
PCC
Provisional Sum
PS
Reinforced Cement Concrete
21 | P a g e
RCC
Safe Bearing Capacity
SBC
Slum Rehabilitation Authority
SRA
Removal & Rehabilitation
R&R
State Bank of India Prime Lending Rate
22 | P a g e
SBI PLR
Tender Data Sheet (For Tender)
TDS
Tax Deducted at Source (For Taxes)
TDS
Bombay Electric Supply & Transport
BEST
TATA Power Company Ltd.
23 | P a g e
TPCL
24 | P a g e
GCC GCC Clause PCC PCC Clause & Description

Clause Clause
No. No.
1 General
Provisions General Provisions
1.1 Definition 1.1
Clause 1
Add to Sub-Clause 1.1 Definitions
(i) “The Employer” means:
The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM)/The
Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai for time being
holding office Municipal Head Office Building, Mahapalika Marg,
Fort,Mumbai 400 001,India.
(ii) MCGM will be represented by the following officer as his
authorized representative
The Chief Engineer
OR any other person appointed by the Employer and notified in
writing to the Contractor.
1.1 Definition 1.1
The “Corporation” or the “Municipal Corporation” shall mean
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai constituted under
the Mumbai Municipal Corporation Act.
The “Commissioner” shall mean the Commissioner for

Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, for the time being
holding the said office, and shall also include all the Additional
Municipal Commissioners and officers to whom the powers of
the Commissioner have been delegated under Section 56 and
56-B of the Bombay Municipal Corporation Act.
1.1.2.4 Engineer The term “the Engineer” in the tender documents shall also
1.1(a)
mean “the Employer’s Representative” (General Consultant –
25 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
GC) and “the Employer’s Personnel” (Project Management
Consultant – PMC)
1.1 Definition 1.1(a) Hierarchy of Administration:
(i)
The Employer→The Engineer→ The Employer’s Representative
(GC)→ The Employer’s Personnel(PMC) →The Contractor
1.1.1.6 Schedules 1.1(b) Add at the end of the Sub-Clause 1.1.1.6:
“Contract Forms”, “Schedules”, “Annexures” and “Annexes”
means the document(s) enclosed Contract Forms, Schedules,
Annexures and Annexes completed by the Contractor and
submitted with the Tender, as included in the Contract. Such
document may include data, lists and schedules of payments
and/or prices
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(c) Add a new Sub- Clause 1.1.1.:
“Notice to Proceed” means the Notice issued by the Employer /
the Engineer or the person appointed from time to time by the
Employer to perform specified duty to the Contractor
communicating the consent by which the Works are to be
commenced.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(d)
Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.12:
“Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental (OSH&E)

Manual” means the Employer’s manual containing the
requirements and conditions to be met during the execution of
the Works by the Contractor.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(e) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.13:
“Particular Conditions of Contract” means any Particular
Conditions of Contract issued by the Employer over and above
the General Conditions of Contract, issued by the Employer prior
to submission of the Tender or negotiated and agreed in writing
by the Employer and the Contractor prior to and conditional
upon acceptance of the Tender.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(f) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.14:
“Works Programme” means the programme showing the
sequence, method and timing of investigations, design, issue of
26 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Notice to Proceed, execution, manufacture, delivery to site,
erection, installation, testing, commissioning of the Works
(including Integrated Testing and Commissioning),
indigenisation (where applicable) and related activities in the
form and content prescribed by the Employer’s Requirements,
or any amended or varied version thereof, as submitted by the
Contractor and for which the Engineer has issued a Notice to
Proceed .
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(g) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.15:
i.) The “General Consultant” (GC) means the consultant
appointed from time to time by the Employer to
perform specified duty as per the Contract entered in
between the Employer and the consultant or the
person as “General Consultant”. And to act on behalf of
the Employer and coordinate project for the Engineer.
As named in the Appendix FT – 1 Contract Data of
Volume 1.
ii.) Project Management Consultant (PMC) means any
consultant or the person appointed from time to time
by the Employer to perform specified duty as per the
Contract entered in between the Employer and the
consultant or the person as Project Management
Consultant. As named in the Appendix FT – 1 Contract
Data of Volume 1.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(h) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.16:
The word “tender” is synonymous with “bid”, and “tenderer”
with “bidder” and the words “tender documents” with
“bidding documents”
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(i) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.17:
The word “Contract Price” is synonymous with “Contract Sum”.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(J) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.18:
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, constituted
under the M.M.C. Act 1888 as amended up to date.
27 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1.1.2 Parties and 1.1(k) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.2.11:
Persons
“Interface Contractors ” means any of the following whose
activities or the works they are engaged to carry out, affect or
are affected by the Works, in any way or at any time:
a) contractors, design consultants and utility authorities
engaged on the Project from time to time by the
Employer;
b) Sub-contractors of any tier of the contractors above;
provided that the definition shall exclude the Contractor
and his sub-contractors of any tier in relation to the
Works.
1.1.2 Parties and 1.1(l) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.2.12:
Persons
“Designer” means the agency, or part of the group forming the
agency, person, firm or company or group of companies, or any
replacement, carrying out the Design of Works or part thereof
“Designer” means the person firm or company, or group of
companies engaged by the Contractor for carrying out the
design of the works.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(m Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.10:
Periods and )
“Contract Period” means the period from the Commencement
Completion
Date to the completion of the Works;
“Defects Liability Period (DLP)” means the period stated for
remedying any defects from the date of taking over the work till
the end of the Defects Liability Period. The terms “Maintenance
Period” or “Period of Maintenance” is synonymous with “Defects
Liability Period”.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(n) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.11:
Periods and
“Key Date (KD)” means a date identified as such in the Contract
Completion
to achieve a particular activity, and the same may be extended
pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 8.4.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(o) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.12:
Periods and
“Milestone” means the completion of a part of the Works or the
Completion
occurrence of an event identified as such in the Schedule of
Milestones.
28 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(p) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.13:
Periods and
“Factory Tests” means the tests required to be carried out in
Completion
the factory premises on components, equipment, subsystem,
system, etc. During and/or after manufacture in the factory,
before shipped.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(q) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.14:
Periods and
“Integrated Testing” means the programme of tests performed
Completion
by the Contractor at the direction of the Engineer following
satisfactory completion of Contractor’s tests on his equipment,
sub-systems or system to verify and confirm the compatibility
and compliant performance of his equipment/sub-
system/system with the equipment/sub-system/system
provided by others.
1.1.6.9 Variations 1.1(r) Add to Sub-Clause 1.1.6.9 with the following:
Changes to temporary works, any sequence, method or timing of
construction, manufacture or installation and changes to any
part of the Site or the Works Areas or access thereto will not
constitute Variation.
1.5 Priority of 1.5 Replace Sub-Clause 1.5 with the following:

Documents
The priority of the documents shall be with the following
sequence:
a) Contract Agreement
b) Letter of Acceptance (LOA)
c) Letter of Tender
d) Letter of Clarification, if any.
e) Addendum/Corrigendum to Tender
f) Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
g) FIDC Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design – Build
Contract First Edition, 1999 (GCC)
h) Employer’s Requirements
i) Pricing Document
j) Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)
k) Outline Design & Construction Specifications
29 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
l) Tender Drawings
m) Contractor’s Technical &Financial Proposal
n) All RFQ Documents with its all Addendum/Corrigendum
o) Reference Documents
p) Any other Forms, statements as part of Tender Technical
& Financial Documents
q) If an ambiguity or discrepancy is found in the documents,
the Engineer shall issue any necessary clarification or
instruction
Note: The Costs of stamp duties and similar charges (if any)
imposed by law in connection with entering into the Contract
Agreement shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.6 Contract 1.6 Add a new Sub-Clause 1.6.1:
Agreement
Till the execution of formal agreement, the Letter of Acceptance
(LOA) will form the agreement.
1.7 Assignment 1.7 Add a new Clause 1.7.1:
The Employer shall be fully entitled without consent of the
contractor to assign any part of work to any third party by giving
14 days’ notice when the contractor is behind the schedule and
causing undue delay, at the risk and cost of the contractor.
1.8 Care and 1.8 Add Sub-Clause 1.8 as under:
Supply of
As-Built Drawings
Documents
Based on all Drawings relating to the work, the Contractor, at his
own expense, shall prepare. “As- Built Drawings” using the latest
software Auto CAD/*dxf to record the precise details of the work
completed.
A copy of the Auto CAD/*dxf Drawings shall be provided to the
Engineer or his representative on a monthly basis for approval
and to record all details relating to progress and developments.
The final copy of the Auto CAD/*dxf Drawings shall be provided
on soft copy digital files as well as 8 sets of hard copies (A1 size)
at the time of issue of the Taking Over Certificate. Failure to
provide within 60 days from the date of issue of the Taking Over
30 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Certificate of project, the amount will be withheld as per
Payment Schedule.
1.8 Care and 1.8 Add Sub-Clause 1.8.2 as under:
Supply of
The Contractor shall also arrange to take photographs as
Documents
directed by the Engineer or his representative, depicting various
details and stages of progress of works and submit them in
duplicate in proper albums for records.
All detailed working drawings, design calculations and
fabrication drawings for temporary works (such as form work,
staging, centering, scaffolding, specialized construction,
handling and launching equipment and the like) and permanent
works as well as bar bending schedule for reinforcement,
material list for structural fabrication as well as detailed
drawings for templates and anchorage and temporary support
details for pre-stressing cables etc. shall be prepared by the
Contractor at his own cost and submitted to the Engineer or his
representative at least three weeks in advance of actual
constructional requirements. Within two weeks of receipt, the
Engineer or his representative will check and return one copy of
the same for the Contractor’s use with amendments if any,
marked on them after due discussion and agreement with the
contractor. Such Notice shall not relieve the contractor of any of
his responsibilities in connection with the temporary works. The
Contractor will supply two copies of the Noticed drawings for
the Engineer or his representative’s use. The cost of preparing
all such items of work shall be deemed to have been included in
the price quoted by the Contractor.
1.13 Compliance 1.13 Sub-Clause: 1.13:
with Laws
Compliance with Law
Replace Sub-Clause 1.13(b) with the following:
b) The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all taxes, duties and
fees, and obtain all permits, wherever required such as
Permission from GOI,GOM, MoEFCC, MoUD, EAC, MMRDA,
MMRCL, MSRDC, Traffic Police, MCGM, PWD, MCZMA, SEIAA,
31 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
AAI, MPCB, SEAC, CPCB, UD, MUTP, MML, MTHL, HPC, MHCC,
NIO, MbPT, SRA,TPCL, External and, authority of Sanjay Gandhi
National Park, etc. Licenses and approvals, as required by the
Laws in relation to the execution and completion of the Works
and the remedying of any defects; and the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold the Employer harmless against and from the
consequences of any failure to do so.
1.14 Joint and 1.14 Add to Sub-Clause 1.14:
Several
d) The Contractor shall ensure that each and every member of
Liability
JV participates actively and contributes in execution of the
Works under the Contract, which shall be commensurate with
their respective main scope of Works as stated in the JV
Agreement, in mobilization/ deployment of technical resources
(including manpower and equipment etc.) for the satisfactory
execution of the Works under the Contract.
e) The Contractor shall ensure that for execution of the Works
under the Contract, each and every member of the JV deploys
their respective technical expertise relating to their specific
partof expertise as claimed in the RFQ stage and utilizes it to the
maximum extent for the successful project
delivery/implementation of the Contract.
1 General 1.15 Sub-Clause: 1.15
Provisions
Add new Sub-Clause
Inspection and Audit by Employer:
The Contractor shall permit the Employer, or the persons
appointed by the Employer to inspect the site and /or the
Contractors accounts and records relating to the performance of
the Contract and to have such accounts audited by the Employer
or the Auditors appointed by the Employer if required by the
Employer.
Provisions
Add new Sub-Clause
Details to be Confidential
32 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall treat the details of the Contract as private
and confidential, except to the extent necessary to carry out
obligations under it or as agreed with the Employer. The
Contractor shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose
any particulars of the Works in any trade or technical paper or
elsewhere except with the written consent of the Engineer and
subject to such conditions as he may prescribe.
2 The The Employer
Employer
2.1 Right of 2.1 Clause 2
Access to the
Sub-Clause 2.1: Right of Access to the Site
site
Delete Sub-Clause 2.1(b)
2.2 Permits, 2.2 Add to Clause 2.2:
Licenses or
(c) by organizing official meetings with the relevant authorities,
Approvals
and
The Contractor is responsible for the preparation of necessary
documents and, if required, explanations to the relevant
authorities to get Permits, Licenses or Approvals from the
relevant authorities in the approval process.
The rendering of such assistance by the Employer shall not be
interpreted as a pretext by the Contractor as condoning of any
delay or non-performance of any of the Contractors obligations.
The following-up of all such requirements shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2.4 Employer’s 2.3 Sub-Clause 2.4:
Financial
Employer’s Financial Arrangements
Arrangemen
ts Delete Sub-clause 2.4
2.5 Employer’s 2.5 Add to Sub-Clause 2.5:
Claims
The Employer is entitled to recover:
a) Claims for amounts not insured by the Contractor
b) Claims for amounts not recovered from insurers
c) Claims for the damage caused to interfacing
contractors, third parties, Employers / Engineer’s
property.
33 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
3. The 3 The Engineer
Engineer
3.1 Engineer's 3.1 Engineer’s Duties and Authority
Duties and
“The Employer’s Administration”
Authority
1. The Employer may appoint an Employer’s
Representative to act on his behalf under the Contract.
In this event, he shall give notice to the Contractor of the
name, address, duties and authority of the Employer’s
Representative.
The Employer’s Representative shall carry out the duties
assigned to him, and shall exercise the authority
delegated to him, by the Employer. Unless and until the
Employer notifies the Contractor otherwise, the
Employer’s Representative shall be deemed to have
authority of the Employer under the Contract, except in
respect of Termination by the Employer. If the Employer
wishes to replace any person appointed as Employer’s
Representative, the Employer shall give the Contractor
not less than 14 days’ notice of the replacement’s name,
address, duties and authority, and of the date of
appointment.
2. The Employer or the Engineer or the Employer’s

Representative may from time to time assign duties and
delegate authority to assistants and may also revoke
such assignment or delegation with the Employer’s
approval. These assistants may include a resident
engineer, and/or independent inspectors appointed to
inspect and/or test items of Plant and/or Materials. The
assignment, delegation or revocation shall not take
effect until a copy of it has been received by the
Contractor. Assistants shall be suitably qualified
persons, who are competent to carry out these duties
and exercise this authority, and who are fluent in the
language for communication.
34 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Sub-Clause, if, in

the opinion of the Engineer, an emergency occurs affecting the
safety of life or of the works or of adjoining property, he may,
without relieving the Contractor of any of his duties and
responsibilities under the Contract, instruct the Contractor to
execute all such work or to do all such things as may, in the
opinion of the Engineer, be necessary to abate or reduce the
risk. The Contractor shall forthwith comply, despite the
absence of approval of the Employer, with any such instruction
of the Engineer.
3.6 Add a new Sub-Clause 3.6 as under:
Site Meetings
The Engineer shall summon all parties concerned to the first Site
Meeting where he shall decide upon the future meetings. It is the
duty of the Contractor or his Representative to participate in the
Site Meetings. The purpose of the Site Meetings is to coordinate
the various work components with the Contractor, to register
the time in relation to the Program and to record the progress
made.
4. The The Contractor
Contractor
4.1 Contractor’s 4.1
General Add the following Sub-Clauses after Sub-Clauses 4.1
Obligations
Add Sub-Clause 4.1.1 as under:
The Contractor shall maintain all the records and submit the
same in hard copies and soft copies till the completion of defect
liability period or till the claims and court matters, if any,
pertaining to the work are settled whichever is later and
handover the same to the Employer through the Engineer or his
representative.
4.1 Contractor’s 4.1 Add Sub-Clause 4.1.2 as under:
General
Maintenance of Existing Roads/Flyovers/Bridges
Obligations
35 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
In case of works of improvement to the existing
Roads/Flyovers/Bridges, including widening of the
Roads/Flyovers/Bridges (subject to the amendments if any, as
specified), the Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance (Ordinary Repairs) of the complete length of the
road within site limit right from the date of the work order, even
though he proposes to take up the length for improvement in
phases. His offer/rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of the
cost of such repairs and no separate payment towards
maintenance (Ordinary Repairs) would be payable to him. In
case the Contractor neglects or fails to carry out maintenance to
the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative, the
Engineer or his representative shall have the authority to get the
same carried out through any other agency at the risk and cost
of the Contractor. The Contractor is supposed to maintain an
O&M manual and it has to be regularly updated and shared with
the client on satisfactory completion of all maintenance work.
General Add Sub-Clause 4.1.3: Contractor’s General Obligation
Obligations The Contractor accepts entire responsibility for the Contractor's
Technical Proposals, the Design Data, and for any mistake,
inaccuracy, discrepancy or omission contained therein. Nothing
contained in the Contractor's Technical Proposals and the Design
Data shall relieve the Contractor in any way from his obligations.
The Contractor warrants to the Employer that:
a) He has exercised and will continue to exercise in the
design of the Works all the skill and care to be expected
of a professionally qualified and competent designer
experienced in work of similar nature and scope of the
Works;
b) The Works will, when completed, comply in all respects
with the Employer's Requirements, the Contractor’s
Technical Proposals, the Design Data and the intended
use of the Works;
36 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
c) The Works have been or will be designed, manufactured,
installed and otherwise constructed and to the highest
standards available using proven up-to-date good
practice;
d) The Works will, when completed, comply with
enactments and regulations relevant to the Works;
e) No Materials generally known to be deleterious or not in
accordance with good engineering practice have been or
will be specified or selected or incorporated in the
Works by the Contractor; and
f) The design of the Works and the manufacture of Plant
have taken or will take full account of the effects of the
intended manufacturing and installation methods,
Temporary Works and Contractor's Equipment.
The Contractor shall not, under any circumstance, make any

claim for additional payment or an extension of time or be
relieved from any liability or obligation under the Contract,
where the cause of delay, suspension, impediment to or adverse
effect upon the progress of the Works is due to any mistake,
inaccuracy, discrepancy or omission in or between the
Contractor's Technical Proposals, the Technical Design, and the
Construction Design, or any failure by the Contractor to prepare
any Design Data or submit the same to the Engineer in due time.
4.2 Performanc 4.2
e Security Add Sub-Clause 4.2.1 as under:
The Performance Guarantee and Contract Deposit amount as per
Appendix to tender submitted by the Contractor in accordance
with Sub-Clause 4.2, shall be either in the form of demand draft
drawn in favour of MCGM or in the form of bank guarantee
furnished by a scheduled Bank of India approved by RBI and
issued from any of its branches in Mumbai. Performance
Guarantee shall be furnished within 28 days from the date of
Receipt of Letter of Acceptance, failing which the Contractor will
37 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
be liable for action as per Sub-Clause5.5.3 of ITT. The
Performance Guarantee and Contract Deposit shall be valid till
the issue of Taking Over Certificate and it shall carry no interest.
4.4 Subcontract 4.4 Add Sub-Clause 4.4 with:

ors
Notwithstanding any consent to sub-contract given by the
Employer / the Engineer, if in his opinion he considers it
necessary, the Engineer shall have full power to order the
removal of any sub-contractor from the Site or off-Site place of
manufacture or storage, by giving 7 days’ Notice to the
Contractor.
Add (d) The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements
imposed on the Contractor by Sub-Clause 1.12 [Confidential
Details] apply equally to each Subcontractor. Where practicable,
the Contractor shall give fair and reasonable opportunity for
contractors from this Country to be appointed as Sub-
contractors.
4.6 Cooperation 4.6 Replace Sub- Clause 4.6 with the following:
Replace Sub-Clause 4.6 with the following:

The Contractor shall not impede and shall afford all necessary
facilities, access and/or services to the Employer, the Engineer,
the General Consultants(GC), the Project Management
Consultants (PMC), the Designated Contractors, utility
undertakings, other relevant authorities and other contractors
(whether employed by the Employer or not) who are carrying
out on, or in the vicinity of, the Site, works not included in the
Contract:
(a) The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that
the Works are co-ordinated and integrated with the design,
manufacture, installation execution and testing of such other
works and shall in particular (but without limitation):
38 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
i. Comply with any direction which the Engineer may give
for integration of the design of the works with the design
of any other part of the project.
comply with any direction which the Engineer may give

for the integration of the design of the Works with the
design of any other part of the Project;
ii. consult, liaise and co-operate with those responsible for
carrying out such other works, including where necessary,
in the preparation of the respective designs, the
preparation of co-ordinated programmes, method
statements co-ordination drawings and specifications
together with arrangements of service priorities and
zoning;
iii. participate in Integrated Testing and Commissioning of
the system with Designated Contractors and demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the Works have
been designed and constructed in a manner compatible
with the works of Designated Contractors.
a) The Contractor shall share within the Site, areas for the
use of Designated Contractors, if Employer / Engineer
directs.
b) Any other contract which depends for its execution on the

Contract or upon which the Contract is dependent for its
own execution shall be identified by the Engineer as a
"Designated Contract". The Contractor shall provide
attendance on Designated Contractors in accordance
with the Employer's Requirements and as instructed by
the Engineer. The identity of the contractor for a
Designated Contract may not be known before the
execution of the Contract but this shall not be a ground
39 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for the Contractor to object to the subsequent
appointment of a Designated Contractor.
c) The Contractor shall afford all reasonable opportunities,

for carrying out their work, to other contractors
employed by the Employer and their workmen
respectively and the workmen of the Employer who may
be engaged on or near the Site of any work, ancillary to
the Works, but, not included in the Contract and shall not
cause them inconvenience.
d) If the Contractor shall suffer delay by reason of failure by
any Designated Contractor to meet the specified
installation interfacing and co-ordination, completion
dates, which delay shall be caused otherwise than by fault
of the Contractor, or, if compliance with Sub-Clause (e)
herein shall involve the Contractor in delay beyond that
which could be reasonably foreseen by an experienced
contractor at the time of tender, then the Engineer shall
take such delay into account in determining any
extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled
under the Contract.
e) The Contractor shall be deemed to have made adequate
allowance in the Contract Price and in the Works
Programme in respect of these obligations. If any act or
omission of the Contractor whether directly or indirectly
results in the delay in the execution of the works of a
Designated Contractor, the Contractor, in addition to his
liability in respect of delay and associated damages if they
become due, shall pay to the Employer, or the Engineer
may deduct from Interim Payment Certificates such
amount as the Engineer shall have certified in respect of
additional payments or costs to the Designated
Contractor in respect of such delay.
40 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
4.7 Setting Out 4.7 Replace Sub-Clause 4.7 with the following:
4.7.1The Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) Validating the accuracy of the original points, lines,
alignment, levels etc. which are basis for proceeding with the
work.
(b) the accurate setting out of the Works in relation to the
original points, lines and levels of reference given by the
Engineer in writing
(c) the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and
alignments of all parts of the Works
(d) employ of all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus
and labour in connection with the foregoing responsibilities
(e) Carefully protecting and preserving all bench marks,
reference points, pegs and other things used in setting out
the Works.
The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the
Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the accuracy or correctness thereof and the
Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench-marks,
reference points, pegs and other things used in setting out the
Works.
4.7 Setting Out 4.7 4.7.2 Errors in Setting out
If, at any time during the execution of the Works, any error
appears in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any
part of the Works, the Contractor, on being required so to do by
the Engineer or his representative, shall, at his own cost, rectify
such error to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his
representative, unless such error is based on incorrect data
supplied in writing by the Engineer or his representative. In such
case the Engineer or his representative shall determine an
addition to the Contract Price and shall notify the Contractor
accordingly, with a copy to the Employer in which case the cost
of rectification shall be borne by the Employer.
4.8 Safety 4.8 Add to Sub-Clause 4.8:
Procedures
41 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
4.8.1: Site Safety Plan
Within 60 days of the commencement date, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed and comprehensive contract-specific Site
Safety Plan based on the Employer’s Occupation Safety, Health
and Environmental Manual (OSH&E Manual).
The Contractor shall adhere to the Site Safety Plan and shall
ensure that all sub-contractors of all tiers have a copy of the Site
Safety Plan and comply with its provisions.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary access, assistance and

facilities to enable the Engineer and the Employer to carry out
surveillance to verify that the Site Safety Plan is being properly
and fully implemented.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any
occurrence or incident that results in death or serious injury as
defined in the Indian Penal Code. Such initial notification may be
verbal and confirmed in writing thereafter and shall be followed
by a comprehensive written report within 24 hours of the
occurrence/incident. The Contractor shall duly complete
standard forms as required by the Engineer and Statutory
Authorities.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary

temporary fire protection and firefighting facilities on the Site
during the construction of the Works in accordance with the
statutory regulations and as required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all gases, fuels and other
dangerous Materials and goods are stored and handled in a safe
manner and in accordance with the statutory regulations and as
The obligations and requirements for safety and industrial
health under this Contract are entirely without prejudice to, and
42 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
do not derogate from, the Contractor’s statutory obligations,
with respect to safety and industrial health.
4.8.2 First Aid Base

First -aid personnel and facilities
a) The Contractor shall make available first-aiders, first-aid
boxes and or first aid stations as per statutory
requirements. The persons holding current certificates
of competency of recognized institutions in prescribed
numbers as per any governing statute and in the absence
of such regulatory requirement a minimum of two first-
aiders for each area of work for every hundred
workmen. First-aiders' names shall be prominently
displayed.
b) The first -aid boxes shall display contents of medical and
medicinal articles with quantity maintained, which shall
be in accordance with governing statute. Nominated
first-aider shall replenish stock promptly.
The first-aid refresher training shall be provided at least

once in a year and all employees shall be encouraged to
undergo first-aid training. A record shall be kept of all first
aid treatments with particulars of treatment and personnel
providing the treatment.
4.8.3 Precautions for works in thorough-fares:
While the execution of any work is in progress in any street or

thoroughfare the Contractor at his own cost shall make
adequate provision for the passage of traffic, for securing safe
access to all premises approached from such While the
execution of any work is in progress in any street or
thoroughfare, and for any drainage, water supply, or means of
lighting or any other utility service which may be interrupted
43 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
by reason of execution of the work. Whenever it may be
necessary to stop the traffic in any street or thoroughfare
permission must first be obtained from the Engineer and the
Contractor shall then put up such barriers and adopt such other
measures or take precautions as may be necessary or as the
Engineer may direct for regulation of traffic. The work shall in
such cases be executed night and day or for as long a period as
practicable if so ordered by the Engineer, and with such speed
and vigour as he may require, so that the traffic may be impeded
for as short a time as possible. The Contractor shall remove the
barriers as soon as the necessity for them has ceased. Care shall
be taken by the Contractor to cause the least possible
obstruction to traffic during the progress of the work.
The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any
of the roads or bridges communicating with or on the routes
from the site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the
contractor or any of his subcontractors and, in particular, shall
select routes, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute
loads so that any such extraordinary traffic as will inevitably
arise from moving of materials, Plant, Contractor’s equipment or
Temporary works from and to the site shall be limited, as far as
reasonably possible and so that no unnecessary damage or
injury may be occasioned to such roads and bridges.
Save in so far as the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor
shall be responsible for and shall pay the cost of strengthening
any bridges or altering or improving any road communicating
with or on the routes to the site to facilitate the movement of
Contractors equipment or Temporary Works and the Contractor
shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against all
claims for damage to any such road or bridge caused by such
movement; including such claims as may be made directly
against the employer, and shall negotiate and pay all claims
arising safely out of such damage.
44 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
If it is found necessary for the Contractor to move one or more
loads of heavy constructional equipment, materials or pre-
constructed units or parts of units of work over roads, highways,
bridges on which such oversized and overweight items are not
normally allowed to be moved, the Contractor shall obtain prior
permission from the concerned authorities. Payments for
complying with the requirements, if any, for protection of or
strengthening of the roads, highways or bridges shall be
included in his contract price.
Where the nature of Works is such as to require the use by the

Contractor of waterborne transport the forgoing provisions of
this Clause shall be construed as though “road included a lock,
dock, sea wall or other structure related to waterway and
“vehicle” included craft and shall have effect accordingly. Any
non-compliance to these precautions will attract penalties.
4.8.4 Maintenance of underground utility services:
All the underground utility services such as water pipes, gas
pipes, drains, sewers, cables, etc. which may be met up in or
about any excavation, shall if the Engineer deem it practicable,
be properly maintained and protected by the Contractor himself
or through other agency by means of shoring, strutting, planking
over, padding or otherwise as directed by the Engineer during
the progress of the work without claiming any extra charges.
Any damage to these underground utility services shall be
immediately remedied by the Contractor or by other agency at
its own cost, failing which the Engineer may with or without
notice adopt such measures as he may deem necessary at the
If on the other hand, the Engineer considers it impracticable for
the Contractor to maintain any such underground utility
services and that the exigencies of the work necessitate, the
breaking down, removal or diversion of the said utility services,
the cost of such breaking down, removal or diversion including
45 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
that of rebuilding, replacing, diverting and reinstating of any
such utility services shall be paid to the Contractor if done by
him. However, the cost of providing pumps, chutes or other
appliances as the Engineer may direct for the raising or
temporary passage of the water or sewage and the cost of
pumping out or removing as often as the Engineer may direct,
any water or sewage which may escape from any such
underground utility services, shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.9 Quality 4.9 Add Sub-Clause 4.9.1 as under:
Assurance
Working Methods
a. The Contractor shall submit within the time stipulated by
the Engineer or his representative in writing, the details of
actual methods that would be adopted by the Contractor
for the execution of any item as required by the Engineer
or his representative at each of the locations, supported by
necessary detailed drawings and sketches including those
of the equipment’s and machinery that would be used,
their locations, arrangements for conveying and handling
materials etc. and obtain prior approval of the Engineer or
his representative well in advance of starting of such item
of work. The Engineer or his representative reserves the
right to suggest modifications or make complete changes
in the methods proposed by the Contractor, whether
accepted previously or not, at any stage of work with prior
approval of the Employer to obtain the desired accuracy,
quality, safety and progress of work which shall be binding
on the Contractor and no claims on account of such change
in methods of execution will be entertained by the
Employer, so long as specifications of the items remains
unaltered.
b. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient plant, equipment
and labour as may be necessary to maintain the progress
schedule. The working and shift hours for operations to be
done under the supervision shall be such as may be
46 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
approved by the Engineer or his representative. They shall
not be varied without prior approval of the Engineer or his
representative. The Contractor shall provide necessary
lighting arrangements etc. for night work, as directed by
the Engineer or his representative with no extra cost.
c. A work order book shall be maintained on the site and it
shall be the property of the Employer and the Contractor
shall promptly sign orders given therein by the Engineer or
his representative or his authorized representatives to
comply with them. The compliance shall be reported by the
Contractor to the Engineer or his representative in good
time so that it can be checked. The blank work order book
with machine numbered pages in quadruplicate with
perforated sheet for three copies to be detached will be
provided by the Engineer or his representative for this
purpose. Whenever any instructions are written in the
work order book, the Contractor will be supplied the first
carbon copy.
4.10 Site Data 4.10 Substitute Sub-Clause 4.10 by the following:
Site Data
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, prior to the Base
Date, the Employer,
a) provided non-binding background information to the
Contractor during the tender process that preceded this
Contract, including the information set out in a separate
volume of background site and additional technical
information; and
provided non-binding background information to the

b) Made relevant and readily available data which was in
the Employer’s possession on sub-surface, hydrological
47 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
and climatic conditions at the site, including
environmental aspects, available to the Contractor, for
the Contractor information.The Contractor shall be
responsible and bear all liability for the
interpretation and use of all such data referred to in
this Sub-Clause 4.10 provided by the Employer
prior to and after the Base Date (collectively, the
“Data”). All Data provided by the Employer,
including any background information provided by
the Employer during the tender process that
preceded this Contract is indicative and for the
information of the Contractor only, and any reliance
by the Contractor on the Data shall be at the
Contractor’s own risk. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have inspected and examined the Site for
the purpose of preparing the Tender Submission
and the Schedule of Payments, and is deemed to
have made all sufficient enquiries to satisfy himself
with respect to the accuracy, completeness and
fitness for purpose of the Data, the existing
structures and facilities, the Site conditions and
ground conditions and other surroundings and
utilities, including, but not limited to, the following
matters:Structures and facilities, utilities and other
installations;
c) The hydrological and climatic conditions;
d) The extent and nature of the work and Materials
necessary for the execution and completion of the
Works, and the remedying of any defects;
e) The means of access to the site and the accommodation
he may require;
48 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
f) The adequacy, suitability and reliability of the data
provided for use in preparation of his Tender
Submission and execution of the Works,
g) Works necessary in obtaining and due compliance with
all necessary consents, permissions, licenses, easements
and statutory requirements in order to execute the
Works; any interference or disruption to the Works
caused by third parties; and
h) Any nuisance, interference and compliance with
directions from statutory and public bodies.
Any nuisance, interference and compliance with

The Employer provides no warranty or undertaking of whatever
nature in respect of the Data. The Contractor acknowledges and
confirms that:
1) It was cautioned during the tender process that
preceded this Contract that the interpretation and use
of the Data is at the Contractor’s own risk;
2) It has conducted its own analysis and review of the
data and has, before the execution and delivery of this
contract, satisfied itself as to the accuracy,
completeness and fitness for purpose of any such data
upon which it places reliance; and
3) It shall not be entitled to and shall not make any claim
against the Employer (Whether in contract, tort or
otherwise), including, without limitation, any claim in
damages, for extensions of time or for additional
payments under this Contract on the grounds:
a. Of any misunderstanding or misapprehension in
respect of the data;
b. That the data was incorrect neither insufficient,
nor shall the Contractor be relived from any of its
49 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
obligations under this Contract on any such
ground.
That the Data was incorrect neither insufficient, nor shall the
Contractor be relieved from any of its obligations under this
contract on any such ground.
4.10 Site Data 4.10
The foundation strata indicated on the drawing supplied with
the bid is indicative only. The cost of taking one bore at each of
the foundation location as per technical proposal of the
Contractor and at 50-meter interval along the tunnel and one
bore hole at 20 m beyond the end of Tunnel will be deemed to
be included in the Bid. In case of adjacent carriageways, separate
borehole under each adjacent foundation is not obligatory. The
Contractor shall be responsible for preserving the samples and
testing the samples to justify the assumptions made in the
design at his own costs. The boring shall be extended to a depth
of 10 meters in soft rock strata (RQD<50%) or 5 meters in hard
rock strata (RQD>50%) whichever is struck earlier. Irrespective
of the above criteria in rock the boring shall extend minimum
5.00 meters below proposed foundation level if the geological
formations suggest rapid changes in the strata.
4.12 Unforeseeab 4.12 Substitute the Sub-Clause 4.12 by the following:
le Physical
4.12 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions
Conditions
In this Sub-Clause, "physical conditions" means natural physical
conditions and man-made and other physical obstructions and
pollutants, which the Contractor encounters at the Site when
executing the Works, including sub-surface and hydrological
conditions but excluding climatic conditions. If the Contractor
encounters adverse physical conditions which he considers
having been Unforeseeable, the Contractor shall give notice to
the Engineer as soon as practicable.
50 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
This notice shall describe the physical conditions, so that they
can be inspected by the Engineer, and shall set out the reasons
why the Contractor considers them to be Unforeseeable. The
Contractor shall continue executing the Works, using such
proper and reasonable measures as are appropriate for the
physical conditions, and shall comply with any instructions
which the Engineer may give. If an instruction constitutes a
Variation, Clause 13 [Variations and Adjustments] shall apply.
If and to the extent that the Contractor encounters physical
conditions which are unforeseeable, gives such a notice, and
suffers delay due to these conditions, the Contractor shall be
entitled subject to Sub-Clause 20.1 [Contractor’s Claims] to:
a) An extension of time for any such delay, if completion is
or will be delayed, under Sub-Clause 8.4 [Extension of
Time for Completion].
b) Deleted.
After receiving such notice and inspecting and/or investigating
these physical conditions, the Engineer shall proceed in
accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to agree or
determine (i) whether and (if so) to what extent these physical
conditions were Unforeseeable, and (ii) the matters described
above related to this extent.
However, extension of time will be determined by the Engineer
after review, whether other physical conditions in similar parts
of the works (if any) were more favorable than could reasonably
have been foreseen when the contractor submitted the Tender.
The Engineer may take account of any evidence of the physical
conditions foreseen by the Contractor when submitting the
Tender, which may be made available by the Contractor, but
shall not be bound by any such evidence.
4.12 Unforeseeab 4.12 Add the Sub-Clause 4.12.1
le Physical
Delay in Completion Time
Conditions
For delay in any time period beyond the contract period, the
consultancy fees shall be compensated on time and material
51 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
basis to PMC on prorate in proportionate to actual services
provided by PMC. If delay is on the part of the Contractor, the
Consultancy fees for the extended services of PMC beyond the
scheduled time shall be liable to be recovered from the
Contractor’s bills as a liquidated damages /penalty for the
delayed period and shall be reimbursed to PMC.
4.13 Rights of 4.13 Add to Sub-Clause 4.13 with:
Way and
The Employer reserves the right to make use of these service
Facilities
roads/rights of way for itself or for other contractors working in
the area, as and when necessary without any payment to the
Contractor
4.17 Contractor’s 4.17 Add to Sub-Clause 4.17:
Equipment
Plant and Equipment: The Contractor shall arrange at his own
expense all tools, plant and equipment required for execution of
Works. If required by the Contractor and if available the
Municipal Corporation may supply such of the tools, plant and
equipment as are available, to the Contractor at the rates and
terms to be specified by the Engineer. No tools, plant and
equipment once brought to the work site shall be removed
without the written permission or order of the Engineer, until he
has certified the completion of the work.
If any Tools, Plants and equipment brought on site, are in the

opinion of the Engineer inefficient, bad or of inferior quality or
are unsuited for the Works then such tools, plant and equipment
shall not be used on the Works but shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own expense within twenty four hours after
the service of a written order or notice from the Engineer to that
effect and fresh tools, plant and equipment be substituted in lieu
of that ordered to be removed by the Engineer. The Employer
will use his best endeavor’s in assisting the Contractor, where
required, in obtaining clearance through the Customs of
Contractor’s equipment, material and other things required for
52 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Works but shall not be liable to the Contractor for any loss
resulting from clearance being delayed or refused.
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer, for a Notice to Proceed, within the time stipulated
against each item given below:
a) A general layout plan for construction plant and
equipment required for the execution of the Works, within
60 days from the Commencement Date; and
b) Drawings showing the locations of major facilities,
including the Contractor’s, Employer’s and Engineer’s site
offices, which he proposes to build/erect on site, within 60
days from the Commencement Date; and
c) Any other details and drawings as required under the
Contract, within the time as specified in the Contract.
Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove

from the Site the entire said Contractor’s Equipment,
Temporary works and his unused materials within 45 days
after the issuing of Taking-Over Certificate.
4.18 Protection of 4.18 Add to Sub-Clause 4.18 with:
the
Within 60 days of commencement date, the Contractor shall
Environmen
t submit a detailed and comprehensive Site Environmental Plan
based on the Employer’s Safety, Health and Environmental
Manual (SHE Manual), and shall include such further material,
which the Contractor considers necessary and relevant.

facilities to enable the Engineer to monitor and conduct tests to
verify that the Site Environmental Plan is being properly and
fully implemented.
4.19 Electricity, 4.19 Replace Sub-Clause 4.19 with the following:
water and
The Contractor shall be responsible for making his own
Gas
arrangements at his own cost to obtain supply of water,
electricity or gas for the Works. In this regard the conditions
53 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
stipulated by the statutory authorities shall be adhered to. The
Employer where feasible may at his discretion assist the
Contractor in giving recommendatory letters etc.
4.20 Employer’s 4.20 Replace with Sub-Clause 4.20 with the following:
Equipment
and Free No material, tools, plant and equipment shall be supplied by the
Issue of Employer. The Contractor shall arrange at his own expense all
Material
tools, plant and equipment required for execution of Works as
well as construction materials required for the work. No tools,
plant and equipment once brought to the work site shall be
removed without the written permission or order of the
Engineer, until he has certified the completion of the work. If any
Tools, Plants and equipment brought on site, are in the opinion
of the Engineer inefficient, bad or of inferior quality or are
unsuited for the Works then such tools, plant and equipment
of that ordered to be removed by the Engineer.
4.21 Progress 4.21 Replace Sub-Clause 4.21 item (f) with the following:
Reports
(f) List of Variations, list of notices given under Sub-Clause 2.5
[Employer's Claims] and list of notices given under Sub-Clause
20.1 [Contractor's Claims], no claims narrative is required in the
Progress Reports;
Insert the following at the end of Sub-Clause 4.21:
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, a detailed cash flow

estimates in respect of the Works, within 3 months from the
Commencement Date. This shall be up-dated and submitted
every three (3) months thereafter until the Completion of the
Works is achieved or at any time upon the request of the
Engineer.
54 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, at weekly intervals, a written report as to the progress
of off-Site manufacture of Plant, and Materials etc.
Add Sub-Clause 4.21.1 as under
Progress Schedules:
a. The Contractor shall submit the progress of work in prescribed
forms and statements at quarterly intervals in the form of
progress charts, forms, statements and / or reports as may be
approved by the Engineer or his representative.
b. The Contractor shall maintain pro-forma, charts, and details
regarding machinery, equipment, labour, materials, and
periodical returns thereof as may be specified by the Engineer
or his representative.
4.22 Security of 4.22 Replace Sub-Clause 4.22:

the Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site in
his possession. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary
to ensure such security, including exercising control over all
persons and vehicles which are employed or engaged on the Site
or in connection with the Works or the other works comprising
the Project and with the security arrangements applicable to any
other site within the Project.
The Contractor shall arrange the issue of passes for the
admission of all persons and vehicles to the Site or to any part
thereof and may refuse admission to or remove from the Site any
person or vehicle failing to show an appropriate pass on demand
from any duly authorized person.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a list
identifying all persons to whom passes have been issued
together with two photographs of each person and all entities to
which a pass has been issued in respect of any vehicle and shall
satisfy the Engineer of the sincerity of any such person or entity.
The Contractor shall not, without the written permission of the
Employer/the Engineer or otherwise in accordance with the
55 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Contract, allow access to the Site to any person unless the
presence on Site of such person is necessary in connection with
the execution of the Works or with the discharge of the duties of
any relevant authority.
4.23 Contractor’s 4.23 Add to Sub Clause 4.23
Operations
If the Contractor fails to remove within 84 days after the issue of
on Site
the Taking-over Certificate, any remaining Contractor’s
Equipment, surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and Temporary
Works, the Employer may sell or otherwise dispose of such
items without any reference to the Contractor. The Employer
shall be entitled to retain from the proceeds of such sale, a sum
sufficient to meet the costs incurred in connection with the sale
or disposal, and in restoring the Site. Any balance of the
proceeds shall be paid to the Contractor. If the proceeds of the
sale are insufficient to meet the Employer’s costs, the
outstanding balance shall be recoverable from the Contractor’s
dues by the Employer. However, the Contractor may retain on
Site, during the Defects Notification Period, such goods as are
required for the Contractor to fulfil the obligations under the
Contract only on such portion and area of the Site as approved
by the Engineer or his representative.
4.25 Assignment 4.25 Add a new Sub-Clause 4.25 :
of
Assignment of Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s
Contractor’s
and Sub- Obligations
Contractor’s
The Contractor shall not assign a right or benefit under the
Obligations
Contract without first obtaining Employer’s prior written
consent, otherwise than by:
a) A charge in favour of the Contractor’s bankers of any
money due or to become due under the Contract, or
b) Assignment to the Contractor’s insurers (in cases where
the insurers have discharged the Contractor’s loss or
liability) of the Contractor’s right to obtain relief against
any other party liable.
56 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
If a Subcontractor’s obligations extend beyond the expiry date of
the Defects Liability Period then the Contractor shall assign the
benefits of such obligations to the Employer.
In the event that a sub-contractor of any tier provides to the
Contractor or any other sub-contractor a warranty in respect of
Plant, Materials or services supplied in connection with the
Works, or undertakes a continuing obligation of any nature
whatsoever in relation to such Plant, Materials or services
(including without limitation an obligation to maintain stocks of
spare parts) extending for a period exceeding that of the Defects
Liability the Contractor shall immediately assign or obtain the
assignment of the benefit of such warranty or obligation to the
Employer or at the direction of the Employer.
4.26 Add a new Sub-Clause4.26 :
Compensation for Breach
Any breach of Sub-Clauses 4.5 and 4.24 of Particular Conditions
of Contract shall entitle the Employer to rescind the Contract
under Sub-Clause 15.2 of GCC and also render the Contractor
liable for loss or damage arising due to such termination.
4.27 Add a new Sub-Clause4.27:
Sheds, Stores, Yards
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his
own expense the required sheds, store houses, and yards for
both Permanent and Temporary Works and provide free access
to the Engineer and Employer who will have right of inspection
including that of instructing the Contractor to remove a
particular material from the stores and not to use the same on
the Works.
4.28 Add a new Sub-Clause 4.28:

Temporary Works
All temporary works necessary for the proper execution of the
Works shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor at his
cost and subject to the consent of the Engineer shall be removed
57 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
by Contractor at his own expense when they are no longer
required and in such manner as the Engineer shall direct. In case
the Contractor fails to remove the temporary works on
completion the Engineer is authorized to get the same removed
and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor.
Access for Engineer
The Contractor shall allow at all times the Engineer or any other
person authorised by the Engineer access to the Site and to any
place where work in connection with the Contract is being
carried out or is intended to be carried out and to any place
where materials or plant are being manufactured, fabricated
and/or assembled for the Works. The Contractor shall ensure
that sub contracts if any shall contain provisions entitling the
Engineer or any person authorised by him to have such access.
Contractor to keep Site Clear
On completion of Work the Contractor shall also clear away the
labour camps, hutments and other related installations and
restore the land to its original condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer within 45 days of the physical completion of Work. The
cost on account of delay in return of land and reinstatement of
original condition within the stipulated time as determined by
Engineer will be recovered from the Contractor’s dues.
No final payment in settlement of the accounts for Works shall
be made till, in addition to any other condition necessary for
such final payment, site clearance and clearances of labour
camps etc. shall have been effected by him.
Publicity
The Contractor shall not publish or otherwise circulate alone or
in conjunction with any other person, any articles, photographs
or other materials relating to the Contract, the Site, the Works,
the Project or any part thereof, nor impart to the press, or any
58 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
radio or television network any information relating thereto,
nor allow any representative of the media access to the Site,
Contractor's Works Areas, or off-Site place of manufacture, or
storage except with the permission, in writing, of the Employer.
Disclosure of Relationship
If the Contractor or any partner of the Contractor or Director of
the Contractor’s company is closely related to any of the Officers
of the Employer or the Engineer, or alternatively, if any close
relative of an officer of the Employer or the Engineer has
financial interest / stake in the Contractor’s firm, the same shall
be disclosed by the Contractor at the time of filing his tender.
Any failure to disclose the interest involved, shall entitle the
Employer to rescind the Contract, without payment of any
compensation to the Contractor. The Contractor shall note that
he is prohibited from developing such interest during the
Contract period.
4.33 Add new Sub-Clause 4.33:
Use of Explosives
Explosives shall not be used on the Works or on the Site by the
Contractor without the consent of the Engineer and shall be used
in the manner and to the extent permitted by the Engineer. The
explosives shall be handled and used under the strict
supervision of persons licensed for this purpose under the
requisite statutory rules and regulations. When explosives are
required for the Works they shall be stored in a special magazine
to be provided at the cost of the Contractor in accordance with
the requisite statutory rules and regulations. The Contractor
shall take all precautions in transporting and using the
explosives and avoid damage to nearby structures and utilities.
The Contractor shall also obtain necessary licence for the
storage and the use of explosives as per the appropriate laws
and permitted/approved by the relevant/competent Authority.
All operations, in which or for which the explosives are
59 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
employed shall be at the sole risk and responsibility of the
Contractor and the Contractor shall hold the Employer harmless
and shall indemnify the Employer in respect thereof.
Corrupt or fraudulent practices
i. Will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the
tenderer recommended for award has engaged in
corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the
contract in question;
ii. Will recognize a Contractor as ineligible, for a period

determined by the Employer, to be awarded a contract,
if it at any time determines that the Contractor has
engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing
for, or in executing, another contract with the Employer.
Work by Persons Other than Contactor
If by reason of any accident or failure or other event occurring
to, in, or in connection with the Works any remedial or other
work shall, be urgently necessary and the Contractor is unable
or unwilling at once to do such remedial or other work, the
Engineer may authorise the carrying out of such remedial or
other work by a person other than the Contractor. All expenses
properly incurred in carrying out the same shall be recoverable
by the Employer from the Contractor. Provided that the
Engineer shall, as soon after the occurrence of any such
emergency as may be reasonably practicable, notify the
Contractor thereof in writing.
Further, the Employer may enter on to the Site and take over the
responsibility for the or part thereof if:
a) the Contractor has failed to remedy any defect or
damage which has resulted in the performance
requirements of this Contract within a time period set by
60 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Employer or Engineer under the Conditions of
Contract; or
b) the Employer considers that it must take over
responsibility for the Works or part thereof to prevent a
serious threat to health, safety or the environment; or
c) The Employer considers that maintenance of the Works
is not being carried out in accordance with the Contract;
or
d) If the Employer takes over responsibility for the Works
or part thereof, the following shall apply:
i. All payment to the Contractor in respect of the Works
or part thereof for which the Employer has stepped in
shall be suspended, and except as otherwise set out in
Terms of Payments, no payment shall be owing to the
Contractor in respect of the Works or part thereof
performed by the Employer.
ii. All additional costs and expenses properly incurred by
the Employer in taking over all or part of the
Consultancy, Operation & Maintenance Service in this
event shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the
Employer.
Confidentiality of Information
The Contractor shall not use or divulge, except for the purpose
of the Contract or with the written permission of the Employer,
any information relating to the Works or the Project provided in
the Contract or otherwise provided by the Employer, or the
Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that his sub-contractors
of any tier shall be bound by a similar confidentiality
undertaking.
5 Design Design

Undertaking
61 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) The Contractor shall be fully responsible, for the
suitability, adequacy, integrity, durability and
practicality of the Contractor’s proposal.
b) The Contractor warrants that the Contractor’s Proposals
meet the Employer’s Requirements and is fit for the
purpose thereof. Where there is any inadequacy,
insufficiency, impracticality or unsuitability in or of the
Employer’s Requirements or any part thereof, the
Contractor’s Proposal shall take into account, address or
rectify such inadequacy, insufficiency, impracticality or
unsuitability at Contractor’s own cost.
c) The Contractor shall also provide a guarantee from the
Designer for the design for suitability, adequacy,
practicality of design for Employer’s Requirements
d) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against

any damage, expense, liability, loss or claim, which the
Employer might incur, sustain or be subject to arising
from any breach of the Contractor’s design
responsibility and/or warranty set out in this Clause.
e) The Contractor further specifies and is deemed to have

checked and accepted full responsibility for the
Contractor’s Proposal and warrants absolutely that the
same meets the Employer’s Requirements:
i. Notwithstanding that such design may be or have
been prepared, developed or issued by the
Employer, any of the Contractor’s consultants, his
sub-contractors and/or his qualified
personnel/persons or cause to be prepared,
developed or issued by others.
ii. Notwithstanding any warranties, guaranties
and/or indemnities that may be or may have been
submitted by any other person.
62 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
iii. Notwithstanding that the same have been
accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Plants,
Materials, goods, workmanship, preparing, developing and
coordinating all design Works to enable that part of the Works
to be constructed and/or to be fully operational in accordance
with the Contract’s requirements.
Apart from the Contractor, the above warranty shall also be
applicable for his designer. This warranty shall be a part of his
sub contract with the designer and should be made available at
the time of signing of the Agreement.
No claim for additional payment or extension of time shall be
entertained and/or the Contractor shall not be relieved from any
obligation/liability under the Contract, for any delay,
suspension, impediment to or adverse effect upon the progress
of the Works due to any mistake, inaccuracy, discrepancy or
omission in or between the Contractor’s, the Definitive Design
and the final design, or any failure by the Contractor to prepare
any Design Data or submit the same to the Engineer in due time
and the Contractor shall promptly make good any such defect at
his own cost.
Intellectual Property Rights and Royalties
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer and the Engineer

from and against all claims and proceedings on account of
infringement (or alleged infringement) of any patent rights,
registered designs, copyright, design, trademark, trade name,
know-how or other intellectual property rights in respect of the
Works, the Contractor's Equipment, machines, work method, or
Plant, or Materials, or anything whatsoever required for the
Works and from and against all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.
63 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall, in the event of infringement of Intellectual
Property Rights, rectify, modify or replace at his own cost the
Works, Plant or materials or anything whatsoever required for
the Works so that infringement no more exist or in the
alternative shall procure necessary rights/license so that there
is no infringement of Intellectual Property Rights.
The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under
this Sub- Clause made against the Employer. The Contractor
shall, at his cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such
claim, and any litigation or arbitration that may arise from it. The
Employer or the Engineer shall not make any admission which
might be prejudicial to the Contractor, unless the Contractor has
failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations, litigation or
arbitration within a reasonable time after having been so
requested. In the event of the Contractor failing to act at the
Engineer notice, the Employer shall be at full liberty to deduct
any such amount of pending claim from any amount due to the
Contractor under this Contract or any other Contract.
Insofar as the patent, copyright or other intellectual property

rights in any Plant, Design Data, plans, calculations, drawings,
documents, Materials, know-how and information relating to
the Works shall be vested in the Contractor, the Contractor shall
grant to the Employer, his successors and assignees a royalty-
free, non-exclusive and irrevocable licence to use and reproduce
any of the works, designs or inventions incorporated and
referred to in such Plant, documents or Materials and any such
know-how and information for all purposes relating to the
Works (including without limitation the design, manufacture,
installation, reconstruction, Testing, commissioning,
completion, reinstatement, extension, repair and operation of
the Works) for the Employer’s own use.
If any patent, registered design or software is developed by the

Contractor specifically for the Works, the title thereto shall vest
64 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
in the Employer and the Contractor shall grant to the Employer
a non-exclusive irrevocable and royalty-free licence to use,
repair, copy, modify, enhance, adapt and translate in any form
such Software for Employer’s own use.
If the Contractor uses proprietary software for the purpose of

storing or utilising records the Contractor shall obtain at his
own expense the grant of a licence or sub-licence to use such
software in favour of the Employer and shall pay such licence fee
or other payment as the grantor of such licence may require
provided that the use of such software under the licence may be
restricted to use relating to the design, construction,
reconstruction, manufacture, completion, reinstatement,
extension, repair and operation of the Works or any part thereof.
The Contractor's permission referred to above shall be given,

inter alia, to enable the Employer to disclose (under conditions
of confidentiality satisfactory to the Contractor) programmes
and documentation for a third party to undertake the
performance of services for the Employer in respect of such
programmes and documentation.
If any software is developed under the Contract or used by the

Contractor for the purposes of storing or utilising records over
which the Contractor or a third party holds title or other rights,
the Contractor shall permit or obtain for the Employer (as the
case may require) the right to use and apply that Software free
of additional charge (together with any modifications,
improvements and developments thereof) for the purpose of the
design, manufacture, installation, reconstruction, testing,
commissioning, completion, reinstatement, extension, repair,
modification or operation of the Works, or any part thereof, or
for the purpose of any Dispute.
The Employer reserves the right to use other Software on or in

connection with the Works.
6 Staff and Staff and Labour
Labour
65 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.1 Engagement 6.1 Add Sub-Clause 6.1.1 as under:
of Staff and
The Contractor shall, at his own expenses, maintain sufficient
Labour
qualified and experienced supervisory staff etc. required for the
work and shall make his own arrangement for housing such
staff.
6.2 Rates of 6.2 Add to Sub-Clause 6.2 with the following:
Wages and
Conditions Full compliance of statutory requirements apart, the Contractor
of Labour
shall pay rates of wages and observe conditions of labour not
less favourable than those established for the trade or the
industry where the work is carried out.
The Contractor shall make him aware of all labour regulations

and their impact on the cost and build up the same in the
Contract Price. During the Contract Period no extra amount in
this regard shall be payable to the Contractor, for whatsoever
reason including any revision of rates payable to the labour due
to revision of rates payable in Minimum Wages Act.
Labour provided by the Contractor, either directly or through

sub-contractors, for the exclusive use of the Employer or the
Engineer, shall, for the purpose of this Sub-Clause, be deemed to
be employed by the Contractor.
In the event of default being made in the payment of any money

in respect of wages of any person employed by the Contractor or
any of its sub-contractors of any tier in and for carrying out of
this Contract and if a claim therefore is filed in the office of the
Labour Authorities and proof thereof is furnished to the
satisfaction of the Labour Authorities, the Employer may, failing
payment of the said money by the Contractor, make payment of
such claim on behalf of the Contractor to the said Labour
Authorities and any sums so paid shall be recovered by the
Employer from the Contractor.
66 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.3 Persons in 6.3 Add to Sub-Clause 6.3:
the Services
The Contractor either at the tendering stage or during
of Employer
construction stage will not employ any retired employee of
Employer in any capacity unless such employee has completed
at least two years post retirement period or has obtained the no-
objection certificate from Employer for being employed with the
Contractor. It will be responsibility of the Contractor to collect
the Employer’s no objection certification from such retired
employee and submit the same back to the Employer.
The contractor shall not poach any technically qualified
engineers from fellow contractor of same project.
6.4 Labour Laws 6.4 Add to Sub-Clause 6.4:
The Contractor shall be accountable for the violation of any

labour laws solely by themselves or their sub-contractors and
will pay any such claim/damage to the Relevant Authorities
forthwith on demand. If any moneys shall, as a result of any
instructions, directions or decisions from the Relevant
Authorities or claim or application made under any of the labour
laws or regulations, be directed to be paid by the Employer, such
moneys shall be deemed to be moneys payable to the Employer
by the Contractor and he will pay the same to the Employer
forthwith on demand, without demur and without asking for any
reasons/explanations from the Employer. On failure of the
Contractor to repay the Employer any moneys paid or to be paid
by it as aforesaid within seven days after the same shall have
been demanded, the Employer shall be entitled to recover the
amount from any moneys due or accruing to the Contractor
under this or any other Contract with the Employer.
The Employer is the main employer of labour for this Contract;

hence any issues related to labour can be issued directly from
the Government to the Employer who shall then copy to the
Engineer for distribution to the Contractor.
67 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall formally register with the appropriate
labour department listing the Employer as the principle
employer of labour for this Contract.
All labour laws of government of Maharashtra and government
of India will prevail. The Employment of labour, and the labour
laws and regulations enumerated in Section 6 of Standard
General Conditions of Contract for Construction works
published by MCGM shall form part of this PCC and shall be
adhered to.
6.4 Labour Laws 6.4 Add Sub-Clause 6.4.1 as under:
The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient numbers either
directly or through subcontractors to maintain the required rate
of progress and of quality to ensure workmanship of the degree
specified in the contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer
a) The Contractor shall not employ in connection with
works, any person who has not completed his eighteenth
year of age.
b) The Contractor shall not recruit or attempt to recruit his
staff and labour from amongst persons in the service of
the Employer or the Engineer or his representative.
c) The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer or his
representative, fortnightly distribution returns of the
number and description by category of works, for which
the labours are employed.
d) The Contractor shall pay to the labour employed by him,
either directly or through sub-contractors, wages not
less than fair wages as defined in the Contract Labour
Regulations as contained hereinafter in regard to
matters provided therein.
e) The Contractor shall at all times, indemnify the
Employer against all claims, damages of compensation
under the provision of Payments of Wages Act 1948,
Employees Liability Act 1938, Industrial Dispute Act
68 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1947, Maternity Benefit Act 1961, Contract Labour
(Regulation of Abolition) Act 1970 and Inter State
Migrant Workman (Regulation of Employment and
Condition of Services) Act 1979, or any modifications
thereof or any other law relating thereto and rules made
there under from time to time, or as a consequence of
any accident or injury to any workman or other person
in or about works, whether in the employment of the
contractor or not and also against all costs, charges and
expenses or any suit action or proceedings arising out of
such accident or injury and against all sum or sum which
may, with the consent of the contractor be paid to
compromise or compound any such claim without
limiting his obligation and liabilities as above, and the
contractor shall insure against all claims, damages or
compensation payable under the Workmen’s
Compensation Act 1923, or any modifications thereof or
any other law relating thereto and the insurance
policy/policies shall be kept valid by the Contractor
throughout the period of Contract.
f) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against
any payment to be made under and for the observation
of the Regulations aforesaid without prejudice to his
right to claim indemnification from his Sub-Contractor.
g) The decision of the Engineer or his representative in
matters relating to the reports from the Inspecting
Officers as defined in “Contractor – Labour Regulation”
(Contained hereinafter) shall be final and binding and
deductions or recovery in regard to any amount payable
to the Contractor.
h) The Contractor shall be responsible for the return to the
place from where they were recruited or to their
domicile of all such persons as he recruited and
employed for the purpose of or in connection with the
69 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
contract and shall maintain such persons as are to be
referred in a suitable manner until they shall have left
the site.
i) The register of workmen and the register of wages cum
muster roll required to be maintained under these
Regulations shall be preserved for 3 years after the date
on which the last entry is made therein.
j) On any question as to the application, interpretations or
effect of these Rules, the decision of the Chief Labour
Commissioner or Deputy Labour Commissioner or any
other competent authority shall be final and binding.
Definitions: In these rules/regulations, unless otherwise
expressed or indicated, the following words and expressions
shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them.
a) ‘Labour’ would mean, “Workmen” as defined in Chapter 1 of
the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970 as
amended from time to time
b) ‘Fair Wage’ means Wages, which shall include wage for
weekly day of rest and other allowances whatever for time or
piece work taking into consideration prevailing market rates for
similar employment in the neighbourhood and shall not be less
than the minimum rates of wages fixed under Minimum Wages
Act.
c) ‘Contractor’ for the purpose of these Regulations shall include
an agent or subcontractor employing labour on the work taken
on Contract.
d) ‘Inspecting Officer’ means any Labour Enforcement Officer or
Assistant Labour Commissioner of the Chief Labour
Commissioner Organization.
e) ‘Form’ means a form appended to these Regulations.
f) ‘Work Place’ means a place at which on an average 20 or more
workers are employed.
70 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
g) ‘Large Work Place’ means a place at which on an average 500
or more workers are employed.
a) The Contractor shall during the currency of the Contract,
when called upon by the Engineer, engage and also ensure
engagement by the Sub-contractor and other employed by the
Contractor in connection with the works, such number of
Apprentices in the categories mentioned in Clause 6.4.2 C and
for such period as may be required by the Engineer.
b) The Contractor shall train them as required under the
Apprentice Act 1961 and shall be responsible for all obligations
of the Employer under the Act including the liability to make
payment to Apprentices as required under the Act.
c) The number of Apprentices to be engaged in different
categories shall be as required under “Apprentices Act 1961”
and rules and regulations made there under and as amended
from time to time.
d) The Contractor shall, duly comply with the provision of the
Apprentices Act 1961, the rules there under, and the order that
may be issued from time to time under the said Act and said
rules and on his failure or neglect to do so, he shall be subject to
all the liabilities and penalties provided by the said ‘Act and said
Rules’ valid by the contractor throughout the period of contract.
6.6 Facilities for 6.6 Sub-Clause 6.6 - Facilities for Staff and Labour
Staff and
Delete the first paragraph and replace by:
Labour
Except as otherwise stated in the Employer’s requirements, the
Contractor shall provide and maintain such accommodation and
amenities as he may consider necessary for all his staff and
labour, employed for the purposes of or in connection with the
Contract, inducing all fencing, water supply (both for drinking
and other purposes), electricity supply, sanitation, cook houses,
fire prevention and fire-fighting equipment, furniture and other
requirements in connection with such accommodation or
amenities. On completion of the Contract, unless otherwise
71 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
agreed with the Employer, the temporary camps/housing
provided by the Contractor shall be removed and the site
reinstated to its original condition, all to the approval of the
Engineer or his representative. The Contractor shall also
provide facilities for the Employer’s Personnel as stated in the
Employer’s Requirements.
6.7 Health and 6.7 Sub-Clause 6.7 - Health and Safety
Safety
Add
The Engineer will undertake the major roles of the

implementation including formulation of the HIV/AIDS
Prevention Program, co-working with other stakeholders,
supervision and management of the Program implementation
progress, undertaking of regular monitoring, evaluating and
reporting and supervision of the Contractor’s obligations.
HIV-AIDS Prevention.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-operating with the
Service Provider in implementing the HIV Prevention
Programme among the Contractor’s Personnel for the duration
of the Contractor’s contract and commencing as soon as
practicable after the Contractor’s Personnel arrive at the site(s)
in conjunction with occupational health staff of the Contractor
and the local health authorities involved in HIV/AIDS
prevention.
The Contractor shall conduct an HIV-AIDS awareness
programme via an approved service provider and shall
undertake such other measures as are specified in this Contract
to reduce the risk of the transfer of the HIV virus between and
among the Contractor’s Personnel and the local community, to
promote early diagnosis and to assist affected individuals.
6.8 Contractor’s 6.8 Sub-Clause 6.8 - Contractor's Superintendence
Superintend
The following shall be added to Clause 6.8
ence
The Contractor's Key Staff shall be approved by the Employer
before starting working on site. The Employer may require
interviewing and test the proposed staff before approval.
72 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.10` Records of 6.10 Sub-Clause 6.10 - Records of Contractor's Personnel and
Contractor’s
Equipment
Personnel
and Add the following:
Equipment
a) The Contractor shall maintain such records and make such
reports concerning safety, health and welfare of persons and
damage to property as the Engineer or his representative may
from time to time prescribe.
b) The Contractor shall report to the Engineer or his
representative details of any accident as soon as possible after
its occurrence. In the case of any fatality or serious accident, the
Contractor shall, in addition, notify the Engineer or his
representative immediately by the quickest available means.
6 Staff and 6.12 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.12
Labour
Implementation of Labour Welfare Provisions to
Contractor's Personnel
“During continuance of the contract, the Contractor and his sub-
Contractors shall abide at all times by all existing labour
enactments and rules made there under, regulations,
notifications and bye laws of State or Central Government or
local authority and any other labour law (including rules),
regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notification that may
be issued under any labour law in future either by the State or
the Central Government or the local authority. Salient features
of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to
construction industry are given below. The Contractor shall
keep the Employer indemnified in case any action is taken
against the Employer by the competent authority on account of
contravention of any of the provisions of any Act or rules made
there under, regulations or notifications including amendments.
If the Employer is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as
may be necessary to cause or observe, or for non-observance of
the provisions stipulated in the notifications/bye
laws/acts/rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on
the part of the Contractor, the Engineer/Employer shall also
73 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
have right to recover from the contractor any sum required or
estimated to be required for making good the loss or damage
suffered by the Employer.
The employees of the Contractor and the sub-contractor in no
case shall be treated as the employees of the Employer at any
point of time.
SALIENT FEATURES OF SOME MAJOR LABOUR LAWS
APPLICABLE TO ESTABLISHMENTS ENGAGED IN
CONSTRUCTION WORK.
i. Workmen Compensation Act 1923
The Act provides for compensation in case of injury by
accident arising out of and during employment.
ii. Payment of Gratuity Act 1972

Gratuity is payable to an employee under the Act on
satisfaction of certain conditions on separation if an
employee has completed 5 years’ service or more or on
death at the rate of 15 days wages for every completed
year of service. The Act is applicable to all
establishments employing 10 or more employees.
iii. Employees PF and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952
The Act provides for monthly contributions by the
Contractor and his workers @ 10% or 8.33%. The
benefits payable under the Act are:
a) Pension or family pension on retirement or death as the
case may be.
b) Deposit linked insurance on the death in harness of the
worker.
c) Payment of PF accumulation on retirement/death etc.
iv. Maternity Benefit Act 1951
The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to
women employees in case of confinement or miscarriage
etc.
74 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
v. Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act
1970
The Act provides for certain welfare measures to be
provided by the contractor to contract labour and in case
the contractor fails to provide, the same are required to
be provided by the Principal Employer by Law. The
principal employer is required to take Certificate of
Registration and the Contractor is required to take a
License from the designated Officer. The Act is
applicable to the establishments or contractor of
principle employer if they employ 20 or more contract
labours.
vi. Minimum Wages Act 1948
An employer is supposed to pay not less than the
Minimum Wages fixed by appropriate Government as
per provisions of the act if the employment is a
scheduled employment. Construction of Buildings,
Roads, and Runways are scheduled employments.
vii. Payment of Wages Act 1936
It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be paid,
when it will be paid and what deductions can be made
from the wages of the workers.
viii. Equal Remuneration Act 1979
The Act provides for payment of equal wages for work of
equal nature to Male and Female workers and not for
making discrimination against Female employees in the
matters of transfers, training and promotions etc.
ix. Payment of Bonus Act 1965
The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 20
or more workmen. The Act provides for payment of
annual bonus subject to a minimum of 8.33% of wages
and maximum of 20% of wages to employees drawing
Rs.3, 500/- per month. or less. The bonus to be paid to
employees getting Rs.2, 500/- per month or above
75 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
uptoRs. 3,500/- per month shall be worked out by taking
wages as Rs. 2,500/- per month only. The Act does not
apply to certain establishments. The newly set up
establishments are exempted for five years in certain
circumstances. Some of the State Governments have
reduced the employment size from 20 to 10 for the
purpose of applicability of the Act.
x. Industrial Disputes Act 1947
The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for
resolution of industrial disputes, in what situations a
strike or lock-out becomes illegal and what are the
requirements for laying off or retrenching the
employees or closing down the establishment.
xi. Industrial Employment (standing orders) Act 1946

It is applicable to all establishments employing 100 or
more workmen (employment size reduced by some of
the States and Central Government to 50). The Act
provides for laying down rules governing the conditions
of employment by the employer on matters provided in
the Act and get the same certified by the designated
Authority.
xii. Trade Unions Act 1928
The Act lays down the procedure for registration of
trade unions of workmen and employers. The trade
unions registered under the Act have been given certain
immunities from civil and criminal liabilities.
xiii. Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act 1986
The Act prohibits employment of children below 14
years of age in certain occupations and processes and
provides for regulation of employment of children in all
other occupations and processes. Employment of child
labour is prohibited in Building and Construction
Industry.
76 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
xiv. Inter-State Migrant Workmen’s (Regulation of
Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 1979
The Act is applicable to an establishment which
employees 5 or more inter-state migrant workmen
through an intermediary (who has recruited workmen
in one state for employment in the establishment
situated in another state).The inter-state migrant
workmen, in an establishment to which this Act becomes
applicable, are required to be provided certain facilities
such as housing, medical aid, traveling expenses from
home upto the establishment and back, etc.
xv. The Building and other Construction Workers

(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of
Service) Act 1996 and the Cess Act 1996
All the establishments who carry on any building or
other construction work and employs 10 or more
workers are covered under this Act. All such
establishments are required to pay cess at rate as may
be notified by the Government. The Contractor
(employer of the establishment) is required to provide
safety measures at the Building or Construction work
and other welfare measures, such as Canteens, First-aid
facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodation for
Workers near the workplace etc. The employer to whom
the Act applies has to obtain a registration certificate
from the Registering Officer appointed by the
Government.
xvi. The Factories Act 1948
The Act lays down the procedure for approval of plans
before setting up a factory, health and safety provisions,
welfare provisions, working hours, annual earned leave
and rendering information regarding accidents or
dangerous occurrences to designated authorities. It is
77 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
applicable to premises employing 10 persons or more
with aid of power or 20 or more persons without the aid
of power engaged in manufacturing process.
6 Staff and 6.13 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.13 - Objection to Contractor's
Labour
Employees
If the proficiency in the English Language and capabilities
required of the Contractor's Key Staffis found not to be
acceptable, the Engineer may require the employee replaced by
one acceptable to the Engineer.
6 Staff and 6.15 Add Sub-Clause 6.14
Labour
Measures against Insect and Pest Nuisance
The Contractor shall always take the necessary precautions to
protect all staff and labour employed on the site from insect
nuisance, rats and other pests and reduce the dangers to health
and the general nuisance occasioned by the same. The
Contractor shall provide his staff and labour with suitable
prophylactics for the prevention of malaria and take steps to
prevent the formation of stagnant pools of water. He shall
comply with all the regulations of the local health authorities in
these respects and shall in particular arrange to spray
thoroughly with approved insecticide all buildings erected on
the Site. Such treatment shall be carried out at least once a year
or as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall warn his
staff and labour of the dangers of Bilharzias and wild animals.
6 Staff and 6.15 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.15 –
Labour
Supply of Water and Other requirements
The Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, having
regard to local conditions, provide on the Site an adequate
supply of drinking and other water for the use of his staff and
labour.
The Contractor shall not give, barter, or otherwise dispose of, to
any person, any arms or ammunition of any kind, or allow
Contractor's Personnel to do so.
Labour
78 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Festivals and Religious Customs
The Contractor shall respect the Country's recognized festivals,
days of rest and religious or other customs. The Contractor shall
in all dealings with his staff and labour have due regard to all
recognized festivals, days of rest and religious or other customs.
6 Staff and 6.17 Add a new 6.17
Labour
Prohibition of Child Labour
The Contractor shall not employ any child to perform any work
6 Staff and 6.18 Add a new Sub-Clause6.18
Labour
Employment Records of Workers
The Contractor shall keep complete and accurate records of the
employment of labour at the Site. The records shall include the
names, ages, genders, hours worked, and wages paid to all
workers. These records shall be summarized on a monthly basis
and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer during
normal working hours. These records shall be included in the
details to be submitted by the Contractor under Sub-Clause 6.10
[Records of Contractor’s Personnel and Equipment].
6 Staff and 6.19 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.19 :

Labour
The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report sets limits
for the impact of the Contractor’s activities and the Contractor’s
Environmental Plan must ensure that the construction activities
shall not exceed any of these limits. (A copy of the EIA Report
can be obtained from the Employer).
The EIA Report recommends specific mitigation measures. The

Contractor shall implement these measures where applicable.
The Employer will be undertaking Environmental Monitoring

and Audits during construction to measure the environmental
impacts. Should the impact measurements exceed the respective
limits detailed in the EIA Report, the Contractor shall be
required to review and to implement effective measures as
79 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
required to ensure that the impact of the construction works will
not exceed the respective limits set forth in the EIA report.
7 Plant, Plant, Materials and Workmanship
Materials
and
Workmansh
ip
7.4 Testing 7.4 Clause 7.4 -
Para 5 sub para (b) deleted
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Sub-Clause 7.4.1 as under:
Laboratory for Testing
The Contractor shall, for the purpose of testing the material,
establish a field Laboratory of adequate floor area as approved
by the Engineer or his representative at the Contractor’s cost.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment’s as per list attached
elsewhere in this document.
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Sub-Clause 7.4.2 as under: Office Laboratory Testing
The material, for which tests cannot be carried out at the field
laboratory, shall be tested at the laboratory approved by the
Engineer or his representative and in presence of the Engineer
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Clause 7.4.3 with:
The expense of conducting all Tests and expenses towards travel
and accommodation for Employer or the Engineer attending the
test for the purpose of clause 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5 shall be borne by
the Contractor.
7 Plant, 7.9 Add a new Sub-Clause 7.9 as under: Taxation
Materials
The Contractor and his staff shall pay all taxes, duties, levies,
and
Workmansh outgoings etc. (present as well as future) of the Government of
ip
India and the Government of the State of Maharashtra or other
competent authorities as per the laws for the time being in force
and applicable in India or in the said State in relation to the work.
Sub-Clause 7.9.1
Add
Deduction of Income Tax and other taxes, if any, shall be made
from each certificate of payment as per the relevant provision of
80 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Income Tax Act or the rules framed there under and as per
the prevailing Tax laws
Sub-Clause 7.9.2
Add
Foreign Taxation
The Tendered Amount by the Contractor shall include all the
duties and other charges (present as well as future) imposed
outside the Employer’s country on the production, manufacture,
sale and transport of the Constructional Plant, Materials and
Supplies to be used on or furnished under the Contract and on
the service performed under the Contract. It shall be the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor to bear the same.
Sub-Clause 7.9.3
Add
Local Taxation
The Bid is deemed to include all excise duties, custom duties,
import duties, sale tax, Royalties, toll charges and other local
direct/indirect taxes etc. that may be levied according to the
laws and regulations for the time being in force, on the
construction plants materials and supplies (both permanent,
temporary and consumable) acquired for the purpose of the
contract and on the services performed under the contract.
Nothing in the contract shall relieve the Contractor from his
responsibilities to pay any tax that may be levied in the
Employer’s country on profits made by him in respect of the
contract.
Sub-Clause 7.9.4
Add
Income Tax on Staff
The Contractor’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay
personnel income taxes in the Employer’s country in respect of
such of their salaries and wages as are chargeable under the
81 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
laws and regulations in force and the Contractor shall perform
such duties in regard to such laws and regulations.
Sub-Clause 7.9.5
Add
Sales Tax
The Bid shall be deemed to be inclusive of the sales tax on all the
materials that he will have to purchase for performance of this
Contact.
a) The Bid shall also be inclusive of the tax leviable in respect
of works contract under the provision of Maharashtra
Sales Tax on transfer of property in goods involved in the
deduction of Works Contract Act 1985.
b) If the Contractor is a Sales Tax Assesse, he should produce
a valid Sales Tax Clearance Certificate before the payment
of the final bill otherwise the final payment to the
Contractor will be withheld. If the Contractor is not liable
to Sales Tax Assessment, a certificate to this effect from the
competent Sales Tax Authorities shall be produced before
the final payment to the Contractor.
8 Commencem Commencement, Delays and Suspension
ent, Delays
and
Suspension
8.1 Commencem 8.1 Replace Sub-Clause 8.1 with the following:
ent of
The Contractor shall commence the Works on the date specified
Works
in the Form FT – 1 of Volume 1. Thereafter the Contractor shall
proceed with due diligence, without delay, and in accordance
with the programme or any revised or modified programme of
the Works.
The Contractor shall not commence the construction,
manufacture or installation of the Works or of any part of the
Works unless and until the Engineer has endorsed the relevant
Construction Reference Drawings in accordance with the
82 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
8.2 Time for 8.2 Sub-Clause 8.2 Time for Completion

Completion
Add
The Contractor shall complete the sections of the works and

each section (with in the Mile – Stone given in Sub-Clause 8.7
below) so as to allow the use by the Traffic within the Time for
completion.
8.3 Programme 8.3 Add to Sub-Clause 8.3 with the following:
8.3.1Design Submission Programme
Design Submission Programme

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, the Design
Submission Programme and updated versions thereof in the
form and content and at the times prescribed in the Employer's
Requirements – Design, including the dates on which major
decisions should be made.
In the second and subsequent submissions of the Design
Submission Programme, the Contractor shall not, without the
prior written consent of the Engineer:
a.) Revise the description or content of any design package (as
referred to in the Employer’s Requirements -Design )
identified in the initial version of Design Submission
Programme;
b.) Reduce the periods provided for review by the
Employer/Engineer of any submission of Design Data as set
out in the initial version of the Design Submission
Programme;
c.) Revise the sequence of submission of Design Data shown in
the initial version of the Design Submission Programme.
revise the sequence of submissions of Design Data shown in

83 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Any amendment of the Design Submission Programme in breach
of the above requirements shall have no effect whatsoever
under the Contract.
Monthly Payment Curves
Within 30 days of the date of consent of works programme, the
Contractor shall, submit to the Engineer Monthly Payment
Curves. The Monthly Payment Curves shall be revised from time
to time as the Works Programme will be revised in accordance
with the above provision.
8.3.2 Three Month Rolling Programme
Three Month Rolling Programme

Within 45 days of the Commencement Date, & thereafter at the
end of each calendar month, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer his Three Month Rolling Programme for each agreed
major section of Works in the Contract, in the form and detail
prescribed in Part 2 - Employer's Requirements setting out the
work to be carried out during the following three months.
8.4 Extension of 8.4 Replace Sub-Clause 8.4 with the following:
Time for
Completion 8.4.1 Extension of Time
The Contractor may apply for an extension of the Time for

Completion if the Work is or will be delayed either before or
after the Time for Completion by any of the following causes:
a. “Force Majeure” referred to in Clause 19.0 (GCC)

b. Instruction of the Engineer to suspend the Works
and the Contractor not being in default as to
reasons of suspension.
c. Acts or omissions of other Designated Contractors
in executing work not forming part of this
Contract and on whose performance, the
performance of the Contractor necessarily
depends.
d. Any act of prevention or Breach of the Contract by
the Employer and not mentioned in this Clause
84 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
e. Any order of Court restraining the performance of
the Contract in full or in any part thereof and the
Contractor not being in default as to reason of
such order of court.
f. Any other event or occurrence which, according to
the Employer is not due to the Contractor’s
failure or fault and is beyond his control without
the Employer being responsible for the same.
8.4.2 Extension of Time not permissible
However, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of

time where the instructions or acts of the Employer or the
Engineer are necessitated by or intended to cure any default of
or breach of Contract by the Contractor or where any delay is
due to
a) the failure of sub-contractor, to commence or to carry out

work in due time,
b) non-availability, or shortage of Contractor’s equipment,
labour, utility services, Plant and Materials,
c) inclement weather conditions, other than once in 50 year
cycle, and
d) the Contractor not fulfilling his obligations under Sub-
Clause 4.6.
If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to an extension

of time for Completion, he shall give notice to the Engineer of
such intention as soon as possible and in any event within 28
days of the start of the event giving rise to the delay and full and
final supporting details of his application within 21 days of the
last day of delay, together with any notice required by the
Contract and relevant to such Clause. If the cause of delay
continued for a period exceeding 7 days, the Contractor shall
submit interim details at intervals of not more than 28 days
(from the first day of such delays).
85 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Engineer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 to

agree or determine either prospectively or retrospectively such
extension of the Time for Completion as may be due. The
Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly.
8.4.3 Extension of time for completion for other reasons

Whether or not the Contractor fails to achieve any Milestone by
reason of any delay shall not by itself be material to the
Contractor's entitlement to an extension of time.
Any extension to a Key Date shall not by itself entitle the
Contractor to an extension to any other Key Date and the Time
for Completion.
8.4.4 Extension of time for delays due to Contractor

If the delay in the completion of the whole Works or a portion of
the Works, for which an earlier completion period is stipulated,
is due to the Contractor’s failure or fault, and the Engineer is of
the view that the remaining Works or the portions of Works can
be completed by the Contractor in a reasonable and acceptable
short time, then, the Engineer may allow the Contractor
extension or further extension of time at its discretion with or
without penalty for the delay in achieving the Key Date, for
completion, as he may decide.
8.5 Delay 8.5 Please replace the last sentence by “sub paragraph (f) of PCC
caused by
Sub-Clause 8.4.1
Authorities
8.7 Delay 8.7 Sub-Clause 8.7 Delay damages for the Works
Damages As per Appendix to tender.
8.9 Consequenc 8.9 Add to Sub-Clause 8.9:
es of The Contractor shall not be entitled to extra cost (if any),
Suspension incurred by him, during the period of suspension of Work, if such
suspension is
a) provided for in the Contract, or
b) necessary for proper execution of Works or by reasons
of weather condition or by some default on the part of
the Contractor, or
c) necessary for the safety of Works or any part thereof or
86 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
d) necessary for the safety of adjoining public or other
property or safety of the public or workmen or those
who have to be at the site or
e) to ensure safety and to avoid disruption of traffic and
utilities, as also to permit fast repairs and restoration of
any damaged utilities.
The following are the details of compensation for various
periods of suspension.
Sl. Suspensi Extensi Compen Rema
No. on on of sation rks
Period Time for the
suspensi
on
period
1. Upto 14 NO NO Engin
days eer
may
give
exten
sion
of
time
in
excep
tional
circu
mstan
ces.
2. 15 - 30 YES NO Exten
days sion
of
time
as
consi
dered
prope
r by
the
Engin
eer
3. Above 30 YES -As per Comp
days Daily ensati
upto 90 rate of on as
days wages assess
for idle ed by
labour / the
employe Engin
es. eer on
-70% of submi
the rate ssion
87 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for hire of
charges docu
for idle menta
plant ry
and proof
machine by the
ry Contr
(excludi actor
ng cost to the
of fuel Engin
and eer’s
lubricant satisfa
s) ction
-15% and is
above all final.
these
items to
cover
overhea
d costs.
4. Above 90 NO NO Contract
days or may
ask for
closure of
the
Contract,
or
deletion
from the
Contract
of that
part of
works
which
has been
suspende
d.
10 Employer’s Employer’s Taking Over
Taking Over
10.2 Taking over 10.2 Add new Sub-Clause
of Parts of Sub-Clause 10.2 Taking over of Parts of the Works:
the Works Add as Second Para
Notwithstanding anything contained in the provisions of other
clauses of the contract, Parts of the Works of the Sections when
substantially completed shall be handed over by the Contractor
88 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for use of the Employer without any cost to the Employer arising
out wear and tear, before carrying out “Tests after completion”
10.3 Interference 10.3 Sub-Clause 10.3 Interference with Tests on Completion:
with Tests
10.3 para 3 sub para (b) – deleted
on
Completion
10.3 Interference 10.3 Add Sub-Clause 10.3.1 as under: Prevention from Testing
with Tests
If the Contractor is prevented from carrying out the tests on
on
Completion completion by a cause for which the Employer or the Engineer
or his representative or other Contractors employed by the
Employer are responsible, the Employer shall be deemed to
have taken over the works on the date when the tests on
completion would have been completed. But for such
prevention, the Engineer or his representative shall issue a
Taking over Certificate accordingly, provided always that the
works shall not be deemed to have been taken over if they are
not substantially completed in accordance with the contract.
If the works are taken over under this Sub-Clause the contractor
shall nevertheless carry out the tests on completion during the
Defects Liability period. The Engineer or his representative shall
require the tests to be carried out by giving 14 days- notice.
Any additional costs to which the Contractor may be put, in
making the tests on completion during the Defects Liability
Period shall be added to contract price.
11 Defects Defects Liability
Liability
11 Defects 11.1 Add a Sub-Clause 11.1.1
Liability
Visit of Contractor during Defect Notification Period
The Contractor shall carry out inspection once in every 3 months
during the first year after completion of the work and carry
minimum 2 inspections per year for the remaining years of
Defect Liability Period. The inspection shall be in the company
of the representative of Engineer and representative of
Employer. The defects noticed during the inspections shall be
recorded and signed by the Contractor and representative of
Engineer and representative of Employer. The Contractor shall
89 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
rectify the defects, if any, within 15 days or such period as may
be notified by the Engineer or his representative. The defect
rectification period shall be 24 months.
11.2 Emergency 11.12 Add a new Sub-Clause 11.12:
defect
Emergency defect rectification
rectification
If any defect or damage is one requiring immediate attention
from safety, environmental or operational viewpoint, the
Engineer has the authority to proceed with rectification at the
cost of the contractor in any manner suitable and deduct such
sums from the Contract Price.
12 Test after Test after Completion
Completion
12.1 Procedure 12.1 Procedure for Tests after Completion:
for Test
12.1 Delete 12.1 (a)
After
Completion Add at the end of 12.1:
If the Contractor fails to carry out the Tests after Completion the
Employer may (at his option): Carryout the Tests himself or by
others, in a reasonable manner and at the Contractors Cost but
the Contractor shall have no responsibility for this Tests; and the
Contractor shall subject to Sub-Clause 2.5: Employer’s Claims,
pay to the Employer the costs reasonably incurred by the
Employer in carrying out the Tests.
12.4 Failure to 12.4 12.4 Failure to Pass Tests after Completion
pass Tests
Add at the end of 12.4:
after
Completion If the Contractor fails to carry out the adjustments or
modifications to pass a Test after Completion to the Works or
such Section, the Employer may (at his option):
Carryout the adjustments or modifications himself or through
some other agency, in a reasonable manner and at the
Contractors Cost but the Contractor shall have no responsibility
for this adjustments or modifications and the Contractor shall
subject to Sub-Clause 2.5 (Employer’s Claims) pay to the
Employer the costs reasonably incurred by the Employer in
carrying out the adjustments or modifications.
90 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
13 Variations Variations and Adjustment
and
Adjustment
13.1 Right to vary 13.1 Add to Sub-Clause 13.1 :
No Variation shall in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract.
The Contractor shall not make any alteration and/or
modification of the Works, unless and until the Engineer
instructs or gives consent to a Variation. If the Construction
and/or Manufacture Documents or Works are not in accordance
with the Contract, the rectification shall not constitute a
Variation.
13.3 Variation 13.3 Replace Sub-Clause 13.3 with the following:
Procedure
“Employer’s Variation” means a change in the Employer's
Requirements which makes necessary alteration or
modification of the Design, quality or scope of Works as
described by or referred to in the Employer's Requirements.
Changes to any sequence, method or timing of manufacture,
testing and Commissioning including Integrated Testing and
Commissioning and changes to any part of the Site or access
thereto will not constitute Employer's Variation.
An Employer's Variation shall be requested and implemented in

accordance with and subject to the following provisions:
a.) Within 14 days (or such other period as the Employer
/Engineer may allow) of the Employer /Engineer informing
the Contractor in writing of the intention to request an
Employer’s Variation, the Contractor shall notify the
Employer/Engineer in writing whether in his opinion the
Employer's Variation would, if ordered:
i. give rise to any entitlement to an extension of time; or
ii. affect the achievement of any Milestone; or
iii. give rise to any entitlement to additional payment; or
iv. affect the warranties of the Contractor set out in Clause
4.2
91 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
and shall submit his proposals as to the terms upon which he
would agree to implement the Employer's Variation. The
Contractor shall furnish sufficient information in terms of
rates/prices of the equipment/components manufactured by
the Contractor or sourced from the Vendors/Sub-contractors
such as: estimated man-hours, man-hours rates for
manufactured items, design costs, basic rate of materials, sub-
assemblies, taxes, duties, overheads & profits and inflation rate,
so as to establish the reasonableness of the variation price.
b.) any agreement between the Employer/Engineer and the

Contractor as to the terms upon which an Employer's
Variation may be implemented shall have no contractual or
other legal effect, until it is in writing and is signed by b.) the
Contractor and the Employer/Engineer. The Employer
/Engineer before signing such agreement shall take prior
approval of the Employer. The terms of this agreement will
be binding upon the Contractor and the Employer. This
agreement shall determine the amount which should be
added to or deducted from the relevant Cost Centre Amount
and/or the revisions (if any) which should be made to the
Milestone Payment Schedules as a result of the Variation.
In the event of the Employer/Engineer and the Contractor

failing to reach agreement on the revisions to be made to the
Cost Centre Amounts, the Employer/Engineer shall, with the
approval of the Employer, determine the amount which
should be added or deducted from the relevant Cost Centre
amount which shall be binding on the Contractor. In case the
Contractor supplies part/ incomplete information or refuses
to supply the required information, the Employer shall
determine the cost of Variation based on the information
available to him from any sources which in his judgment can
be used to determine the case. The Contractor will proceed
92 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
with the Work on this basis but may submit his Claim if
necessary, in accordance with Clause 20.
In assessing work covered by any sub-contract, the
Employer/Engineer will have, where he deems necessary,
access to the original sub-contract conditions, rates, prices
and details of the variation claimed, to assist in evaluating
any Variations.
c.) if the Employer/Engineer withdraws the request for an
Employer's Variation, the Contractor shall have no claim of
any kind whatsoever arising out of or in connection with any
of the proposals made or any failure to reach agreement. In
case the Employer’s Variation involves omission of part of
the Works, the agreement shall address the issue of
reduction in the Contract Price.
13.7 Taxes and 13.7 Add to Sub-Clause 13.7 :

Duties
Taxes and Duties
13.7.1
The Contract Price, subject to any adjustment thereto in
accordance with the Contract shall be inclusive of all taxes,
duties, royalties, cess, etc. including Value Added Tax
(VAT)/GST, paid under Maharashtra VAT Act 2002 where work
is done in Maharashtra and Value added tax(VAT) paid under
other state Governments VAT act work is done in that state.
13.7.2
Taxes and duties paid by the sub-vendors shall not be paid
separately and therefore are to be included in the price.
13.7.3
Nothing extra shall be payable over the quoted rates,
notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in any law for the
time being in force, save and except what is specifically provided
in the GCC.
13.7.4
93 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
In the event of exemption of custom duties, excise duties,
CST/VAT/GST or any other cess/levy being granted by the
Government in respect of the Works, the benefit of the same
shall be passed on to the Employer. The Contractor shall
therefore maintain meticulous records of all taxes and duties
paid and provide the same as and when required by the
Employer, so that the Employer is able to avail the
reimbursement for which the Employer may issue a procedure
order separately. Alternately, the Employer may direct the
Contractor to get the reimbursement based on exemption
certificate/ government’s order and it shall be obligatory on part
of the Contractor to get the reimbursement from the statutory
authorities and pass on the benefit to the Employer.
13.7.6
In case of Contractor’s failure in availing the exemption as
stipulated above, the recovery of equivalent amount will be
made from Contractor’s bills.
The contract price shall be adjusted to take into account of any
increase or decrease in cost resulting from a change in the Laws
of the Country/ State/ Urban Local Body (including the
introduction of new Laws and the repeal or modification of
existing laws) or in the judicial or official government
interpretation of such Laws, made after the Base Date (28 days
prior to Bid Due Date), which affect the contractor in the
performance of obligations under the Contract. This increase or
decrease in cost resulting from a change in the legislation shall
be evaluated as follows –
13.7.1. If as a result of change in Law, the Contractor suffers any
additional costs in the execution of the works or in relation to
the performance of its other obligations under this Agreement,
the Contractor shall notify the Authority of such additional cost
due to Change in Law.
13.7.2 If a result of Change in Law, the Contractor benefits from
any reduction in costs for the execution of this Agreement or in
94 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, either Party
shall notify the other Party of such reduction in cost due to
Change in Law.
12.7.3 The Authority’s Engineer shall on receipt of the notice
from the Contractor or the Authority determine any addition or
reduction to the Contract Price, as the case may be, due to the
Change in Law.
13.8 Price 13.8 Add to Sub-Clause 13.8:

Variation
13.8 Price Variation Adjustment
Adjustment
The rates and price as per Pricing document shall be applicable
till the completion of the Work and will be varied only to the
extent of permissible price variation under this Clause.
However, this adjustment shall be to the extent that full
compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the Contractor is not
covered by the Price variation formula, the rates and price in the
Pricing Document shall be deemed to include amounts to cover
the contingency of such rise or fall of costs.
Price Variation Adjustment Formula
Payment as per the Contract shall be subject to adjustment in
accordance with the following Price Variation formula, and
other terms given herein, to provide for variation in the market
rates of inputs like labour, materials and fuel / energy during the
currency of the Contract:
Price Adjustment:
Contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates
and prices of labour materials, fuels and lubricants in
accordance with the following principles and procedures and as
per formula given hereunder.
Formula for Price variationAdjustment :

Pn = a + b Ln + cEn + d Mn + e Sn + f Tn
Lo EoMo So To
95 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Pn= is the adjustment multiplier to be applied to the current
interim payment certificate (IPC) for increase/decrease in the
cost of the work done during the month.
a = Fixed co-efficient, representing non-adjustable portion in

IPC.
In this case ‘a’ = 15% (0.15)
b = Percentage of Labour components of the work is 25% (0.25)
LO =Consumer Price Index for industrial workers for Mumbai as
available on the date of 28 days prior to the date of submission
of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
Ln = Consumer Price Index for industrial workers for Mumbai as
available on the 1st day of the month preceding the month under
consideration as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
c = percentage of cement component of the work is 15% (0.15)
Eo = Wholesale price index for cement (cement lime and plaster)

for Mumbai as available on the date of 28 days prior to the date
of submission of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt.
of India.
Wholesale price index for cement (cement lime and plaster) for
Mumbai as available on the date of 28 days prior to the date of
submission of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of
India.
En = wholesale price index for cement (cement, lime and plaster)

for Mumbai as available on the 1st day of the month preceding
the month under consideration as published by Economic
Advisor Govt. of India.
wholesale price index for cement (cement, lime and plaster) for
Mumbai as available on the 1st day of the month preceding the
96 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
month under consideration as published by Economic Advisor
Govt. of India.
d = percentage of fuel and lubricant component of the work is
10% (0.10)
Mo = wholesale price index of Fuel and Power for Mumbai as

of tender, as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
Mn= wholesale price index of Fuel and Power for Mumbai as on

the 1st day of the month preceding the month under
consideration, as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
e = percentage of steel component of the work is 25% (0.25)
So = whole sale price index of mildsteel long for Mumbai as

Sn = whole sale price index of mild steel long for Mumbai as on

f = percentage of plant & machinery component of the work is

10% (0.10)
To =whole sale price index of construction machinery and parts

of submission of tender, as published in RBI Bulletin, Govt. of
India.
Tn= whole sale price index for construction machinery and parts
97 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
month under consideration as published in RBI Bulletin, Govt.
of India.
Period of Work under consideration will mean as under:
i.In the case of first Interim Payment the period from the
Commencement Date to the date of measurement of the first
Interim Payment.
ii.In the case of second and subsequent Interim Payment and Final
Payment, the Period from the date of measurement for previous
payment to the date of measurement of that Payment.
Procedure in case of Delay in Availability of Final RBI
Indices
Where the final Price Indices are not available in the Reserve
Bank of India Bulletins, while making payment towards Interim
Payments payment towards Price Variation will be made on
provisional basis based on the indices available, to be adjusted
in subsequent Payment as and when the final Indices figures
become available.
Limit of Adjustment on Account of Price Variation
Adjustment on account of Price Variations may be positive (in
which case extra amount shall be paid to the Contractor), or
negative (in which case the amount of Price Variation shall be
recovered from the Contractor). Adjustment on account of Price
Variation shall be calculated separately, for each period,
between two successive dates of measurements for Payments
and paid along with each Payment.
The maximum permissible price variations Adjustment
are limited to 30%.
Price Variation Adjustment during Extended Period of
Completion
The price adjustment as worked out above i.e. either increase or
decrease will be applicable up to the stipulated date of
completion of the work including the extended period of
98 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
completion where such extension has been granted under Sub-
Clause 8.4.1. However, where extension has been granted under
Sub-Clause 8.4.3, price adjustment will be due as follows:
In case the indices increase above the indices applicable to a

payment made on the last date of original completion period or
the extended period under Sub-Clauses 8.4., the price
adjustment for the period of extension under Sub-Clause 8.4.3
will be limited to the amount payable as per the indices
applicable to a Payment made on the last date of the original
completion period or the extended period under Sub-Clauses
8.4.1 as the case may be.
In case the indices fall below the indices applicable to a payment
made on the last date of the original or extended period of
completion, then the lower indices will be adopted for Price
Adjustment for the period of extension under Clause 8.4.3.
Price Variations Adjustment for Extra/Varied Item

Normally, no price variation clause shall be applicable to any
extra item/new rates not originally included in the accepted
Pricing Document and for which the rates are fixed separately
under Clause 12. It shall, however, be open to the
Employer/Engineer to accept Price Variation clause in such
cases where the rates are not based on actuals and the work is
likely to continue for more than one year.
14. Contract Contract Price and Payment

Price and
Payment
14.2 Advance 14.2 Replace Sub-Clause 14.2 with the following:
Payment
Add new Sub-Clauses:
14.2.1 Mobilisation Advance
Mobilisation Advance Payment shall be paid in Indian Rupees up
to 10% of the Contract Price in equal two instalments. The first
instalment shall be paid on Submission of BG and second shall
99 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
be paid after Engineer/ Employer has confirmed satisfactory
utilisation of the first advance payments and submission of BG.
Satisfactory utilisation means establishment of casting yard,
batching plant, mobilisation of important machineries,
construction of jetty, mobilisation and carrying out of works at
multiple fronts wherever necessary etc.
The Mobilisation Advance shall carry on interest at 13% and
shall be paid within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s
written request by the Employer and submission of the
Performance Guarantee and Bank Guarantees for 110% of
advance Payment.
14.2.2 Advance against Procurement of TBM
This advance is payable against procurement of TBM, provided
the same have reached the site, meant specifically for the works,
firm purchase order has been placed and the invoices received.
The TBM shall be valued by the Employer /the Engineer at 80%
of purchase price, and it should be new.
The total advance for TBM shall be limited to 10% of the
Contract Price and will be with interest @ 13% in Indian Rupees
against submission of Bank Guarantees for the like amount as
per format given in Schedule 8 to PCC from an Indian Schedule
bank or from a schedule Foreign Bank as defined in Section 2(e)
of RBI Act 1934 read with Second Schedule.
The Advance against TBM will be paid by the Employer within
30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s written request with
invoices / Letter of credit (in case of imported) and submission
of Bank Guarantees for Advance Payment.
14.2.3 Recovery of Advances
a) The recovery of the Mobilization and TBM Advances
shall each be made in equal instalments commencing
from when 20% of Contract Sum is paid and completed
before 85% of Work is paid or the original period of
completion whichever is earlier.
100 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
b) Bank Guarantee shall be submitted as per Schedule 8 of
PCC. Following 50% recovery by the Employer, the
Contractor may be permitted to submit a corresponding
Bank Guarantee at the discretion of the Employer.
14.2.4 Advances to be Used only for This Work.

The advances shall be used by the Contractor strictly for the
purpose of the Contract, and for the purpose for which they are
paid. Under no circumstances, shall the advances be diverted for
other purposes. Any such diversion shall be construed as a
breach of the Contract and the Contractor shall be asked to
return the advance at once. The Contractor shall return the
advance in one go without demur.
The Employer reserves the right for any other remedy
prescribed for breach of Contract in this regard.
The Contractor, if required by the Employer shall provide the
details of Mobilization advance expended or to be expended.
14.3 Application 14.3 Add to Sub-Clause 14.3:
for Interim
The Contractor shall not submit more than one request for
Payment
Certificates interim payment per month subject to the Contractor’s Monthly
Statement meeting the minimum value of 2% of Contract Price
or otherwise agreed by Employer / Engineer.
Add at end of Sub-Clause 14.3
The percentage of retention in each interim payment shall be
ten percent (10%) starting from the first IPC, until the limit of
Retention Money equal to five percent (5%) of the Contract
Price is reached.
14.5 Plant & 14.5 14.5 Plant & Machinery Intended for Works
Machinery
Delete Sub-Clause 14.5
Intended for
Works
14.7 Payment 14.7 Replace Sub-Clause 14.7 (b) with the following:
(b)
a) After scrutiny and certification by the Engineer within
28 days of submission of statement and supporting
101 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
documents, the payment of the certified interim amount
shall be made by the Employer within 21 days from the
date of issue of Interim Payment Certificate by the
Engineer.
b) All payments to the Contractor shall be made by
RTGS/NEFT. The Contractor is entitled to a simple
interest at 8% PA for any sum paid after 56 days from
the date of certification. This shall not apply to the final
payment.
14.9 Payment of 14.9 Replace Sub-Clause 14.9 with the following:
Retention
Retention money is 5% of the Contract Sum which will be
Money
recovered as stated in FT – 1, Volume 1 and retained by the
Employer.
The Retention monies shall be held by the Employer without
obligation to invest them or account for interest thereon or to
place them in a designated account. No interest of whatsoever
nature and type will be paid to the Contractor by the Employer
in respect of Retention monies.
The Retention monies shall become due to the Contractor
within 28 days of issuing the Performance Certificate.
14.15 Currencies 14.15 Replace Sub-Clause 14.15 with the following:
of Payment
All payments and deduction made by the Employer pursuant to
the terms of the Contract shall be in Indian Rupees (INR).
Tax 14.18 Add a new Sub-Clause14.18:
Deduction at
Tax Deduction at Source
Source
Tax deductions will be made at source as per statutory
requirement from every payment made to the Contractor at
rates notified from time to time.
Recovery of 14.20 Add a new Sub-Clause 14.20:
money due
Recovery of money due to the Employer
to the
Employer All damages (including, without limitation, liquidated
damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts, or sums for which
the Contractor is liable to the Employer under any provision of
the Contract may be deducted by the Employer from monies
102 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
due to the Contractor under the Contract including, without
limitation, and the Employer shall have the power to recover
any balance not so deducted from monies due to the Contractor
under any other contract between the Employer and the
Contractor.
15 Termination Termination by Employer
by Employer
15.2 Termination 15.2 Sub paragraph (c) of Sub-Clause 15.2 is replaced with the
by Employer
following:
(C) Without reasonable excuse fails to proceed with the
Works in accordance with Clause 8 [Commencement, Delays
and Suspension] and in the case of delay, incurs a delay in the
completion of the works and such delay is not remedied by the
contractor within 30 days from receipt by the Contractor of a
notice from the Employer of such delay. For purposes of this
Sub-Clause 15.2, the term “delay” shall mean a slippage of 10%
of the physical progress from the approved works programme,
Add a New Sub-Clause 15.2.2
On termination of Contract due to Contractor’s default, the
Employer shall be entitled to
a. forfeit the whole or such portion of the Performance
Guarantee amount as he may consider fit.
17 Risk and Risk and Responsibility
Responsibili
ty
Care of the
All operations necessary for the execution and completion of the
Works
works and the remedying of any defects therein shall, so far as
compliance with the requirements of the contract permits, be
carried on so asnot to interfere unnecessarily or improperly
with:
a) The convenience of the public, or
b) The access to use, and occupation of public or private
roads or railway and any other right of way and
footpaths to or of properties whether in the possession
103 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
of the Employer or of any other person or any other
departments.
The contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Employer
in respect of all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and
expenses whatsoever arising out of, or in relation to, any such
matters insofar as the Contractor is responsible therefore.
In case any operation connected with traffic necessitates
diversion, obstruction or closure of any road, existing road,
railway or any other right of way, the approval of the Engineer
or his representative and the concerned authorities shall be
obtained well in advance by the Contractor.
loads of heavy constructional plant and equipment, materials of
pre-constructed units or part of units of work over roads,
highways, Flyovers on which such oversized and over-weight
items are not normally allowed to be moved, the Contractor shall
obtain prior permission from the relevant authorities. Payments
for complying with the requirements, if any, for protection of or
strengthening of the roads, highway or Flyovers shall be made
by the Contractor and such expenses shall be deemed to be
included in his bid price.
17.5 Intellectual 17.5 Sub-Clause 17.5 Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights
and
Sub-Clause 17.5 is deleted in it’s entirely and replaced with the
Industrial
Property following;
Rights
17.5.1 Infringement
a. The Contractor agrees to defend or settle at its own
expense all suits for infringement of any patent,
copyright, trademark or other form of intellectual
property right in any country of the works, for the use
and operation of the Works as supplied by Contractor
and for any component part thereof or material or
equipment used therein (or the manufacture of any
104 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
material or the normal use thereof) provided by the
Contractor or on its behalf pursuant to this Contract
and will hold the Employer harmless from all expense
of defending any such suit and all payments for final
judgment assessed on account of such infringement,
except such infringement or claim arising from :
i. the contractor’s adherence to the Employer’s
directions in the design and configuration of
the Works or to use materials, parts or
equipment of the Employer’s selection;
ii. such material, parts or equipment furnished
to the contractor by the Employer, other
than in each case, items of the Contractor’s
design or selection or the same as any of the
Contractor’s commercial merchandise or in
processes or machines of the Contractor’s
design or selection used in the manufacture
of such standard products or parts;
iii. use of the Works or the materials, parts or
equipment furnished by contractor other
than for the purposes indicated in, or
reasonably to be inferred from, this
Contractor
iv. modification of the Works or the materials,
parts or equipment furnished by the
Contractor, or connection of the works to
another system by any person or entity other
than Contractor, without prior approval by
Contractor.
b. The Employer will, at its own expense, defend all suits
against the Contractor for such excepted infringement
and hold the Contractor harmless from all expense of
defending any such suit and from all payments by final
105 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
judgment assessed against the Contractor on account
of such excepted infringement.
c. The Parties agree to give each other prompt written
notice of claims and suits for infringement, full
opportunity and authority to assume the sole defence,
including appeals and, upon request and at its own
expense, the other agrees to furnish all information
and assistance available to it for such defence.
d. If all or any portion of the Work or any material, part
or equipment provided by the Contractor or on its
behalf is held to constitute an infringement (excluding
such excepted infringements specified in Sub-Clause
17.5.1(a)) and is subject to an injunction restraining
its use or any order providing for its delivery up to or
destruction, or it in respect of any such claim of
infringement the Contractor deems it advisable to do
so, the Contractor shall at its own expense either:
i. Procure for the Employer the right to retain and
continue to use the Work, the affected portion
thereof, or any such material, part or equipment
without interruption for the Employer;
ii. Replace or modify the Work, the affected
portion thereof, or any material, part or
equipment so that it becomes non-infringing
while continuing to meet the Employer’s
Requirements or
iii. If the remedies specified in Sub-Clause
17.5.1(d)(i) and 17.5.1(d)(ii) are not feasible,
refund to the Employer the full purchase price
paid for the Works, the affected portion thereof,
or any material, part of equipment found to be
infringing.
17.5.2 Safeguarding of Information and Technology
106 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) In performance of this Contract, it may be mutually
advantageous to the Parties hereto to share certain
specifications, designs, plans, drawings, software,
market research or operating data, prototypes, or other
business, financial, and /or technical information related
to products, services, or systems which are proprietary
to the disclosing Party or its affiliates (and in the case of
Contractor, Contractor’s Parent company) (together
with this Contract and related documents,
“Information”).The parties recognize and agree that
Information includes information that was supplied in
contemplation here of prior to execution of this Contract,
and further agree that information includes information
in both tangible and intangible form.
b) Unless such Information was previously known to the
Party receiving such Information free of any obligation
to keep it confidential, or such Information has been or
is subsequently made public through other than
unauthorized disclosure by the receiving Party or is
independently developed by the receiving Party (as
documented by the records of the receiving Party), it
shall be kept confidential by the party receiving such
information, shall be disclosed only in the performance
of this Contract, and may not be disclosed for any other
purposes except upon such terms as may be agreed upon
in writing by the Party owning such Information. The
receiving Party may disclose such Information to other
persons, upon the furnishing Party’s prior written
authorization, but solely to perform acts which this Sub-
Clause expressly authorizes the receiving Party to
perform itself and further provided such other person
agrees in writing (a copy of which writing will be
provided to the furnishing Party at its request) to the
same conditions respecting disclosure and use of
107 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Information contained in this Sub-Clause and to any
other reasonable conditions requested by the furnishing
Party. Nothing herein shall prevent a Party from
disclosing Information (i) upon the order of any court or
administrative agency, (ii) upon the request or demand
of, or pursuant to any regulation of, any regulatory
agency or authority, (iii) to the extent reasonably
required in connection with the exercise of any remedy
hereunder and (iv) to a Party’s legal counsel or
independent auditors.
17.6 Limitation of 17.6 Sub-Clause 17.6

Liability
Limitation of Liability
Add the following paragraph at the end of this Sub-Clause:
Notwithstanding anything stated elsewhere in this document,
the following provision shall prevail: reason and entrust this to
another agency for execution at the risk and cost of the
Contractor. In the event of Contractor going bankrupt, the
Employer at the recommendation of Engineer may withdraw
/omit part of the contract work, for whatever reason and entrust
this to another agency for execution at the risk and cost of the
Contractor. In the event of contractor failing to achieve any mile
stone, at the recommendation of Engineer, the Employer may
withdraw /omit part of the contract work, for whatever reason
and give this to another agency for execution at the risk and cost
of the Contractor.
17.7 Add new Sub-Clause 17.7
Urgent Repairs
If, by reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring
to or in connection with the Works, or any part thereof, either
during the execution of the Works, or during the Defects Liability
Period, any remedial or other work or repair shall, in the opinion
of the Engineer, be urgently necessary for the safety of the
Works and the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to do
108 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
such work or repair, the Employer may employ and pay any
other Contractor to carry out such work or repair as the
Engineer may consider necessary.
If the work or repair so done by the Employer is work which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor was liable to do at his
own expense under the Contract, all expenses properly incurred
by the Employer in so doing shall be recoverable from the
Contractor by the Employer, or may be deducted by the
Employer from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor. Provided always that the Engineer shall, as soon
after the occurrence of any such emergency as may be
reasonably practicable, notify the Contractor thereof in writing.
18 Insurance Insurance
18.1 General 18.1 Sub-Clause 18.1 General Requirements for Insurances
Requiremen
Add the following to the end of Sub-Clause 18.1:
t for
Insurances Insurances (Contractor All Risk Policy) obtained by the
Contractor under this Clause must meet the requirements of and
be acceptable to the Employer. The Contract Price is inclusive of
all costs related to these insurances.
18.1.1 The contractor whose tender is accepted will be required
to produce to satisfaction of the Concerned Authority valid and
current license issued in his favour under the provision of the
contract labour (Regulations and abolition) Act 1970 and in case
of failure to do so the acceptance of the tender would be liable to
be withdrawn and earnest money forfeited.
Contractor shall take out necessary Insurance Policy/Policies so

as to provide adequate insurance cover for execution of the
awarded contract work from the “Directorate of Insurance,
Maharashtra State, Mumbai - 400 051” only. Insurance Policy /
Policies taken out from any other insurance Company will not be
accepted. However, if the contractor desires to effect insurance
with the local office of any insurance company, the same should
be under the co-insurance-cum-servicing arrangements (with
109 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
G.I.F.’s share at 60% and insurance Company’s share at 40%)
approved by the Directorate of Insurance. If the policy taken out
by the contractor is not on co-insurance basis the same will not
be accepted and the amount of premium calculated by the
Directorate of Insurance will be recovered directly from the
amount payable to the contractors for the executed contract
work.

Insurance for Design
The Contractor shall effect and maintain professional indemnity
insurance for the amount in Indian Rupees stipulated in
Appendix to the Form of Tender in respect of any design of the
Works to be carried out by, or on behalf of the Contractor. This
insurance, which shall ensure the Contractor’s liability by reason
of professional negligence and errors in the design of the Works,
shall be valid from the date of commencement of Works, until
after the date of issue of Performance Certificate with a clause in
the Insurance Policy stipulating the discovery period of claim for
5 years from the date of issuance of Performance Certificate.
The Engineer will not issue Final Payment Certificate until the
Contractor has produced evidence that coverage of the
professional indemnity insurance has been provided for the
aforesaid period.
Sub-Clause 18.5 Insurance for Automobile Liability
Add the following to Sub-Clause 18.5:
The Contractor shall effect and maintain comprehensive (or
business) automobile liability insurance for all owned (if any),
non-owned and hired vehicles written in an amount with
combined single limits not less than the amount required by
Indian Laws.
19 Force Force Majeure
Majeure
110 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
19.8 Add a new Sub-Clause 19.8
Resumption of Work
The obligations under the Contract shall be resumed as soon as
practicable after the event has come to an end or ceased to exist.
In case of doubt or dispute, whether a particular occurrence
should be considered an “event” as defined under this clause, the
decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding.
Works that have already been measured shall be paid for by the
Employer even if the same is subsequently destroyed or
damaged as a result of the event. The cost of rebuilding or
replacing any work that has been measured shall be borne by
the Employer.
20 Claims, Claims, Disputes and Arbitration
Disputes
and
Arbitration
20.2 Appointmen 20.2 Replace Sub-Clause 20.2 with the following:
t of the
The Parties shall use their best efforts to settle amicably all
Dispute
Adjudication disputes arising out of or in connection with this Contract or the
Board
interpretation thereof. If any dispute or differences of any kind
whatsoever other than those in respect of which, the decision of
any person is, by the Contract, expressed to be final and binding
shall arise between the Employer and the Contractor or the
Engineer and the Contractor in connection with or arising out of
the Contract or carrying out of the Works (Whether during the
progress of the Works or after their completion and whether
before or after the termination, abandonment or breach of the
Contract), if the aggrieved party may refer such dispute within a
period of 7 days to the concerned Additional Municipal
Commissioner who shall constitute a committee comprising of
three officers i.e. concerned Deputy Municipal Commissioner or
Director (ES&P), Chief Engineer other than the Engineer of the
Contract and concerned Chief Accountant. The Committee shall
give decision in writing within 60 days. Appeal on the Order of
the Committee may be referred to the Municipal Commissioner
111 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
within 7 days. Thereafter the Municipal Commissioner shall
constitute a Committee comprising of three Additional
Municipal Commissioners including Addl. Municipal
Commissioner in charge of Finance Department. The Municipal
Commissioner shall give written notice of committee’s decision
to the Contractor as given in further clause.
20.3 Failure to 20.3 Replace Sub-Clause: 20.3 & 20.4 with the following :
Agree
If any dispute or differences of any kind whatsoever other than
Dispute
Adjudication those in respect of which, the decision of any person is, by the
Board
Contract, expressed to be final and binding) shall arise between
20.4 Obtaining
Dispute the Employer and the Contractor or the Engineer and the
Adjudication
Contractor in connection with or arising out of the Contract or
Board’s
Decision carrying out of the Works (Whether during the progress of the
Works or after their completion and whether before or after the
termination, abandonment or breach of the Contract) it shall in
the first place be referred to and settled by the Commissioner
who within a period of 90 days after being requested to do so
shall give written notice of his decision to the Contractor. Save
as herein provided such decision in respect of every matter so
referred shall be final and binding upon both parties until the
completion of the works and shall forthwith be given effect to by
the Contractor who shall proceed with the works with due
diligence, whether he requires arbitration as hereinafter
provided or not. If the Commissioner has given written notice of
his decision to the Contractor and no Claim to arbitration has
been communicated within a period of 90 days from receipt of
such notice the said decision shall remain final and binding upon
the Contractor.
20.6 Arbitration 20.6 Replace Sub-Clause:
20.6 Arbitration with the following:
If the Commissioner shall fail to give notice of his decision as
aforesaid within a period of 90 days after being requested as
aforesaid, or if the Contractor be dissatisfied with any such
decision, then and in any such case the Contractor may within
112 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
90 days after receiving notice of such decision or within 90
days after the expirations of the first named period of 90 days
(as the case may be) require that the matter or matters in
dispute be referred to arbitration as hereinafter provided. All
disputes or differences in respect of which the decision (if any)
of the Commissioner has not become final and binding as
aforesaid shall be finally settled by arbitration as follows:
Arbitration shall be effected by a single arbitrator agreed upon
by the parties. The sole arbitrator shall be appointed as follows:
The Employer will nominate a panel of three arbitrators. The
arbitrators shall be internationally / nationally recognised
technical experts or Engineers of repute with extensive
knowledge and experience in the area and in relation to the
matter of dispute. The Contractor will be asked to choose one
arbitrator from the panel, who will act as the sole arbitrator
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the
provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 as
amended from time to time, and shall be held at such place and
time within the limits of Brihan Mumbai as the arbitrator may
determine. The decision of the arbitrator shall be final and
binding upon the parties hereto and the expense of the
arbitration shall be paid as may be determined by the arbitrator.
Performance under the Contract shall, if reasonably be possible,
continued during the arbitration proceedings and payment due
to the Contractor by the Employer shall not be withheld unless
they are the subject matter of arbitration proceedings.
The said arbitrator shall have full power to open up, review and
revise any decision, opinion, direction, certification or valuation
of the Commissioner and neither party shall be limited in the
proceedings before such arbitrator to the evidence or
arguments put before the Commissioner for the purpose of
obtaining his said decision. No decision given by the
Commissioner in accordance with the foregoing provisions shall
disqualify him from being called as a witness and giving
113 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
evidence before the arbitrator on any matters whatsoever
relevant to the disputes or difference referred to the arbitrator
as aforesaid.
All awards shall be in writing and for claims equivalent to Rs
5,00,000 or more such awards shall state reasons for amounts
awarded.The expenditure of arbitration shall be paid as may be
determined by arbitrator. The arbitration expenditure shall be
shared equally between Employer and Contractor.
20.6 Arbitration 20.6 Add at the end of replaced Clause 20.6
Substitute Arbitrators
If for any reason an arbitrator is unable to perform his function, a
substitute shall be appointed in the same manner as the original
arbitrator.
No legal action till Dispute Settlement Procedure is exhausted
Any and all Disputes shall be settled in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 20. No action at law concerning or arising out
of any Dispute shall be commenced unless and until all applicable
Dispute resolution procedures set out in Clause 20 shall have been
finally exhausted in relation to that Dispute or any Dispute out of
which that Dispute shall have arisen with which it may be or may
have been connected.
Notice of Dispute
For notice of dispute, a Dispute shall be deemed to arise when one
party serves on the other party a notice in writing (hereinafter
called a "Notice of Dispute") stating the nature of the Dispute,
provided that no such notice shall be served later than 28 days
after the date of issue of Performance Certificate by the Engineer.

Rules for Arbitration & Jurisdiction of Court
Arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with
114 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) “The Arbitration and Conciliation Act -1996” and
amendment at 2015 and as amended from time to time.
b) The place of Arbitration shall be Mumbai
c) Courts at Mumbai shall have the exclusive jurisdiction to
try all disputes between the parties.
VOLUME – V
PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SCHEDULES TO PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (PCC)
115 | P a g e
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCHEDULES TO PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Schedule SCHEDULES: Description Page No.

No.
116 | P a g e
1 Contract Agreement
2 Performance Guarantee
3 Parent Company Undertaking
4 Parent Company Guarantee
5 Contractor’s Warranty
6 Designer’s Warranty
7 Sub-Contractor’s Warranty
8 Form of Bank Guarantee for Advance

Payments
Note: The Schedules as above may be modified as considered necessary at the time of
finalisation of the Contract.
117 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
Refer Annexure 7 of Volume 1
118 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 2
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
119 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 3
PARENT COMPANY UNDERTAKING
120 | P a g e

(Refer Sub - Clause 4.2 of GCC)
THIS UNDERTAKING is made the day of
BY [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Parent

Company").
TO
The MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI together with its successors and
assigns, "the Employer") of:Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM), 2nd Floor,
Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort, Mumbai – 400 001.
WHEREAS
(A) By a Contract No. MCR/South/P IV dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between
(1) the MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI (“the Employer”) and
(2) [ ] ("the Contractor") the Contractor has agreed to design, execute,

complete and remedy any defects in the works ("the Works") upon the terms and
conditions contained in the Contract.
(B) Pursuant to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor has agreed to procure the
provision of an undertaking in the terms hereof.
(C) The Parent Company is the beneficial owner of [ ] % [see Note 1] of the issued share
capital of [the Contractor] [see Note 2].
(D) At the request of the Contractor, the Parent Company has agreed to provide this
undertaking.
NOW IT IS HEREBY UNDERTAKEN AND AGREED as follows:
1. In consideration of the Employer entering into the Contract with the Contractor, the
Parent Company hereby undertakes to the Employer that, without the written consent
of the Employer, it will not [and will ensure that none of the companies referred to in
Recital (C) will] [see Note 5]:-
(a) sell transfer assign or otherwise dispose of or deal with ownership of the
whole or any part of EITHER [the shareholding or other interest in the
[Contractor] [see Note 3] OR [the shareholdings or other interests] [see Note
4] referred to in Recital (C) in any way which will affect the beneficial
ownership and control in [the Contractor] [see Note 3] of the Parent Company
[and the other companies referred to in Recital (C)] [see Note 5]; and
(b) take any action which may result in the Contractor being unable to comply
with his obligations or perform in any way his duties under the Contract [or
121 | P a g e
take any action which may result in [the subsidiary forming part of the
Contractor] [see Note 3] being unable to comply with his obligations or
perform in any way his duties under the [joint venture or other relevant]
agreement] [see Note 6]]
until such time as the Works shall have been completed, all the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract shall have been performed and the Maintenance and
Defects Liability Period (as defined in the Contract) for the whole and every part of the
Works shall have elapsed and further that it will ensure [that the subsidiary forming
part of the Contractor will take all steps necessary to ensure [see Note 6]] compliance
by the Contractor with the provisions of the Contract.
2. The obligations of the Parent Company under this Undertaking shall remain in full
force and effect and shall not be affected or discharged in any way and the Parent
Company hereby waives notice of:-
(a) any suspension of the Works, variation or amendment to the Contract

(including without limitation extension of time for performance) or any
concession or waiver by the Employer in respect of the Contractor's
obligations [and/or the obligations of
[ ] [see Note 7];
(b) any provision of the Contract being or becoming illegal, invalid, void, voidable
or unenforceable;
(c) the termination of the Contract or of the employment of the Contractor
[and/or
[ ]] [see Note 7] under the Contract for any reason;
(d) any forbearance or waiver of any right of action or remedy the Employer may
have against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 7] or negligence by the
Employer in enforcing any such right of action or remedy;
(e) any bond, undertaking, security or other guarantee held or obtained by the
Employer for any of the obligations of the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note
7] under the Contract or any release or waiver thereof.
3. This Undertaking shall extend to any variation of or amendment to the Contract and
to any agreement supplemental thereto agreed between the Employer and the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 7] and for the avoidance of doubt the Parent
Company hereby authorises the Employer and the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note
7] to make any such amendment, variation or supplemental agreement.
4. All documents arising out of or in connection with this Undertaking shall be served:
(a) upon the Employer: Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM)

2nd Floor, Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort Mumbai – 400 001.
(b) upon the Parent Company, at [ ] India. [Note 8]
122 | P a g e
5. The Employer and the Parent Company may change their respective nominated
addresses for service of documents to another address in India but only by prior
written notice to each other. All demands and notices must be in writing.
6. This Undertaking shall be governed by and construed according to the laws for the
time being in force in India and the Parent Company agrees to submit to the
jurisdiction of the courts of India.
IN WITNESS where of this Undertaking has been executed as a deed on the date first before
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
was affixed hereto
in the presence of:-
Notes: (for preparation of but not for inclusion in the engrossment of this Undertaking)
1. If the Parent Company is not the immediate parent company, the chain of ownership
must be recited, identifying each company in the chain and the shareholdings or other
interests in each subsidiary.
2. If the Contractor comprises more than one company, that fact and the joint venture or
other relevant agreement must be recited. In such case, insert the name of the
subsidiary forming part of the joint venture or partnership, and in respect of which
the parent company undertaking is being given.
3. If Note 2 applies, refer to the subsidiary of the Parent Company and not the Contractor.
4. If Note 1 applies, use this alternative.
5. If Note 1 applies, add this provision.
123 | P a g e
7. If Note 2 applies, add this provision and insert the name of the subsidiary.
8. The address for service shall be in India.
124 | P a g e
VOLUME - 2
SCHEDULE 4
PARENT COMPANY GUARANTEE
125 | P a g e

THIS GUARANTEE is made the day of
BETWEEN:-
(1) [ ] whose registered office is at [ ] [and [ ] whose registered

office is at [ ]] ("the Guarantor").
TO The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (together with its successors and
assigns, "the Employer") of:
Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C), Civic
Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali (E), Mumbai,
400066 India
WHEREAS
(A) By a contract MCR/South/ P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1)
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”) and
(2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the Contractor has agreed to design, execute, complete
and remedy any defects in the Works upon the terms and conditions contained in the
Contract.
provision of a guarantee in the terms hereof. [seeNote 1].
(C) At the request of the Contractor, the Guarantor has agreed to guarantee performance
of the Contract by the [Contractor] [see Note 2] as set out herein.
IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees to the Employer as a primary
obligation and not as a surety due performance by the [Contractor] [see Note 2] of all
of its obligations and liabilities under and in accordance with the Contract save that
nothing herein shall be construed as imposing greater obligations or liabilities on the
Guarantor than are imposed on the [Contractor] [see Note 2] in the Contract.
126 | P a g e
2. The obligations of the Guarantor under this Guarantee shall remain in full force and
effect and shall not be affected or discharged in any way by and the Guarantor hereby
waives notice of: -
(a) any suspension of the Works, variation to or amendment of the Contract

obligations [and/or the obligations of [
]] [see Note 3] under the Contract;
or unenforceable;
(c) the termination of the Contract or of the engagement of the Contractor [ and /
or [….]] [see Note 3] under the Contract for any reason;
have against the Contractor [ and / or [….]] [see Note 3] or negligence by the
Employer for any of the obligations of the Contractor [ and / or […..] [see Note
3. This Guarantee shall extend to any variation of or amendment to the Contract and to
any agreement supplemental thereto agreed between the Employer and the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] and for the avoidance of doubt the Guarantor
hereby authorizes the Employer and the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] to
make any such amendment, variation or supplemental agreement.
4. This Guarantee is a continuing guarantee and accordingly shall cover all of the
obligations and liabilities of the [Contractor] [see Note 2] under the Contract and
remain in full force and effect until all the said obligations and liabilities of the
Contractor shall have been carried out, completed and discharged in accordance with
the Contract. This Guarantee is in addition to any other security which the Employer
may at any time hold and may be enforced without first having recourse to any such
security or taking any steps or proceedings against the Contractor.
5. Until expiry of the Maintenance and Defects Liability Period (as defined in the
Contract) for the whole and every part of the Works, the Guarantor shall not on any
ground whatsoever make any claim or threaten to make any claim whether by
127 | P a g e
proceedings or otherwise against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] for the
recovery of any sum paid by the Guarantor pursuant to this Guarantee. Any such claim
shall be subordinate to any claims (contingent or otherwise) which the Employer may
have against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] arising out of or in connection
with the Contract until such time as such claims shall be satisfied by the Contractor
[and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] or the Guarantor as the case may be. To that intent the
Guarantor shall not claim or have the benefit of any security which the Employer holds
or may hold for any monies or liabilities due or incurred by the Contractor [and/or [
]] [see Note 3] to the Employer and, in case the Guarantor receives any sum from the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] in respect of any payment by the Guarantor
hereunder, the Guarantor shall hold such sum in trust for the Employer for so long as
any sum is payable (contingently or otherwise) under this Guarantee.
6. The Employer shall be entitled to assign the benefit of this Guarantee at any time
without the consent of the Guarantor or the [Contractor] [see Note 2] being required.
7. All documents arising out of or in connection with this Guarantee shall be served:
(a) upon the Employer: Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM), 2nd
Floor, Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort, Mumbai – 400 001.
(b) Upon the Guarantor, at [ ] India [Note 4]
8. The Employer and the Guarantor may change their respective nominated addresses
for service of documents to another address in India but only by prior written notice
to each other. All demands and notices must be in writing.
9. This Guarantee shall be governed by and construed according to the laws for the time
being in force in India and the Contractor agrees to submit to the jurisdiction of the
courts of India.
IN WITNESS whereof this Guarantee has been executed as a deed on the date first before
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
128 | P a g e
[ ]
)
was affixed hereto in
)
the presence of: -
)
Notes (for preparation of but not inclusion in the engrossment of this Guarantee)
1. If the Contractor comprises more than one company, that fact, the joint venture or
other relevant agreement and the relationship of the Guarantor to its subsidiary
forming part of the Contractor must be recited.
2. If Note 1 applies, replace the word "Contractor" with name of the subsidiary being
guaranteed.
3. If Note 1 applies, add additional wording and insert the name of the subsidiary being
guaranteed.
4. The address for service shall be in India
129 | P a g e
VOLUME - 2
SCHEDULE 5
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY
130 | P a g e
(Refer Sub-Clause 4.2 of GCC)
THIS WARRANTY is made the day of
BY [ ] of [ ] [and [see Note 1]] ([jointly] "the Contractor")
TO [ ] [of]/[whose registered office is at] [ ] (together with its

successors and assigns, "the Employer")
WHEREAS
(A)
By a contract No. MCR/South/P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1) the
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai("the Employer") and (2) the Contractor, the
Contractor has agreed to design, execute, complete, test and commission (including Integrated
Testing and Commissioning ) and remedy any defect in the Works upon the terms and
(B) [See Note 3].
(C) At the request of the Employer and pursuant to the terms of the Contract the
Contractor has agreed to provide this Warranty.
NOW IT IS AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
1. The Contractor hereby warrants and undertakes that:
(a) the Contractor will design, execute, complete, test and commission (including
Integrated Testing and Commissioning) and remedy any defect in the Works
in accordance with the terms of the Contract; and
(b) the Contractor owes a duty of care to the Employer in relation to the
performance of its duties under the Contract; and
131 | P a g e
(c) the Contractor will replace free of cost to the Employer any defect or failure of
equipment provided in the Works for a period of 24 months from the date of
taking over of whole of the Works; and
(d) the Contractor agrees that should any design modification be required to any
equipment or component as a consequence of failure analysis, the period of 24
months shall re-commence from the date when the modified part is
commissioned into service if the date of modification is later than the date of
taking over of last whole of the Works, and such modification shall be carried
out free of cost to the Employer in the Works; and
(e) the Contractor shall maintain the manufacture & supply of spares (including
those of his Sub-Contractors/Vendors) for the equipment’s supplied in the
Contract for at least 10 years from the date of Completion of the Contract; and
(f) the Contractor has exercised and will continue to exercise in the design of the
Underground Stations and Tunnels including Ventilation and Air conditioning
all the skill and care to be expected of a professionally qualified and competent
designer experienced in work of similar nature and scope as the Works; and
(g) the Works will, when completed, comply in all respects with the Employer's
Requirements, the Contractor’s Technical Proposals, the Final Design
Document and the intended use of the Works; and
(h) the Works has been or will be designed, manufactured, installed and otherwise
constructed and to the highest standards available using internationally
proven up-to-date good practice; and
(i) the Works will, when completed, comply with enactments and regulations
relevant to the Works; and
(j) no Materials generally known to be deleterious or not in accordance with good

engineering practice have been or will be specified or selected or incorporated
in the Works by the Contractor.
(k) The design of the Works and manufacture of Plant have taken or will take full
account of the effects of the intended manufacturing and installation methods,
Temporary Works and Contactor’s Equipment.
2. The liability of [the companies comprising [see Note 3]] the Contractor under this
Warranty [shall be joint and several and [see Note 3]] shall not be released, diminished
or in any way affected by any independent inquiry or investigation into the Works or
132 | P a g e
any matter related to the Contract whether carried out by or on behalf of the Employer
or any liability or right of action which may arise out of such inquiry or investigation.
3. Insofar as the copyright or other intellectual property rights in any plans, calculations,
drawings, documents, materials, plant, know-how and other information relating to
the Works shall be vested in the Contractor, the Contractor grants to the Employer his
successors and assigns a royalty free, non-exclusive and irrevocable license (carrying
the right to grant sub-licenses) to use and reproduce any of the works designs or
inventions incorporated and referred to in such documents or materials and any such
know-how and information for all purposes relating to the Works or the Goregaon
Mulund Link Road including without limitation the design, manufacture, installation,
completion, testing and commissioning (including Integrated Testing and
Commissioning) reinstatement, extension and the remedy of any defect in the Works.
To the extent that beneficial ownership of any such copyright or other intellectual
property rights is vested in anyone other than the Contractor, the Contractor shall use
best endeavors to procure that the beneficial owner thereof shall grant a like license
to the Employer. For the avoidance of doubt, any such license granted shall not be
determined if the Contractor shall for any reason cease to be employed in connection
with the Works.
4. The provisions of this Warranty shall be without prejudice to and shall not be deemed
or construed so as to limit or exclude any rights or remedies which the Employer may
have against the Contractor, whether in tort or otherwise.
5. Nothing contained in this Warranty shall vary or affect the Contractor's rights and
obligations under the Contract.
6. The address for service of all documents arising out of or in connection with this
Warranty shall be: -
(a)
Upon the Employer Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai; Municipal

Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),Civic
Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali (E),
Mumbai, 400066 India
133 | P a g e
(b)
Upon the Contractor at [ ] India. [Note 4]
7. The Employer and the Contractor may change their respective nominated addresses
to another address in India but only by prior written notice to each other. All notices
must be in writing.
8. This Warranty shall be governed by and construed according to the laws for the time
being in force in India.
9. (1) Any dispute or difference of any kind whatsoever between the Employer and
the Contractor arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty shall
be referred to arbitration in accordance with the Conciliation and Arbitration
rules set out in the General Conditions of Contract. “Dispute” as defined in the
Contract shall be deemed to include any such dispute or difference between
the Employer and Contractor.
(2) In the event that the Employer is of the opinion that the issues in such a dispute
or difference will or may touch upon or concern a dispute or difference arising
under out of or in connection with the Contract ("the Contract Dispute") then
provided that an arbitrator has not already been appointed pursuant to Clause
9(1), the Employer may by notice in writing to the Contractor require and the
Contractor shall be deemed to have consented to the referral of such dispute
or difference to the arbitrator to whom the Contract Dispute has been or will
be referred.
(3) Save as expressly otherwise provided, the arbitrator shall have full power to
open up, review and revise any decision, opinion, instruction, notice, order,
direction, withholding of approval or consent, determination, certificate,
statement of objections relating to the dispute.
(4) Subject to the foregoing provisions of this clause 9, the Employer and the
Contractor agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of India at Mumbai.
IN WITNESS whereof this Warranty has been executed as a deed on the date written at the
head hereof.
134 | P a g e
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
the presence of: -
Notes (for preparation of and not inclusion in the engrossment of this Warranty)
(1) If the Contractor comprises more than one company, each such company shall be a
party and liability under this warranty will be joint and several, with consequential
grammatical changes.
(2) If Note 1 applies, that fact and the joint venture or other relevant agreement must be
recited.
(3) Delete if Note 1 does not apply.
(4) The address for service shall be in India.
135 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 6
DESIGNER'S WARRANTY
136 | P a g e
DESIGNER’S WARRANTY
(Refer Clause 5.3 of the GCC)
BETWEEN:
(1) [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Designer"); and
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (together with its successors and assigns, "the
Employer") of Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.
& R.C), Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
(E), Mumbai, 400066 India
(2)
WHEREAS:
(a)
By a contract ______dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1) Municipal Corporation

of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”) and (2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the Contractor
has agreed to design, execute, complete, test and commission (including Integrated Testing
and Commissioning) and remedy any defect in the Works upon the terms and conditions
contained in the Contract.
(b) The _________Name of the Contractor/Designer_____ hereinafter called “Designer” has

had an opportunity of reading and noting the provisions of the Contract (other than
details of the Contractor's prices and rates).
(c) Pursuant to the Contract, the Contractor wishes to enter into an agreement with the
Designer and Designer agrees to the wishes of the Contractor (the Consultancy
agreement) to carry out the Contractor's obligations under the Contract in relation to
the design and functions ascribed to the Designer in the Contract.
(d) The Contract stipulates that [the Contractor shall ensure that] the Designer executes a
warranty agreement in favour of the Employer.
[ ] in case Contractor is the Designer also, the remarks within [ ] to be deleted
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows:
137 | P a g e
1. In consideration of the Employer not objecting to the Contractor and the Designer
entering into the Consultancy Agreement, the Designer warrants and undertakes to
the Employer that he has exercised and will continue to exercise all the skill and care
to be expected of a professionally qualified and competent designer experienced in
work of similar nature and scope as the Works in carrying out the design of the
temporary and Permanent Works and in performing the other duties and functions
ascribed to him in the Contract.
2. The Designer agrees that, in the event of the termination of the Contract by the
Employer, the Designer will, if so required by notice in writing given by the Employer,
accept subject to Clause 4 the instructions of the Employer or his appointee to the
exclusion of the Contractor in respect of the carrying out and completion of the Works
upon the terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement.
3. The Designer further agrees that he will not, without first giving the Employer not less
than 21 days' previous notice in writing, exercise any rights it may have to terminate
the Consultancy Agreement or to treat the same as having been as repudiated by the
Contractor or to discontinue the performance of any duties to be performed by the
Designer pursuant thereto. The Designer's right to terminate the Consultancy
Agreement or to treat the same as having been repudiated or to discontinue the
performance thereof shall cease if, within such period of notice and subject to Clause
4, the Employer shall give notice in writing to the Designer requiring the Designer to
accept the instructions of the Employer or his appointee to the exclusion of the
Contractor in respect of the carrying out and completion of the Contract Works upon
the terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement.
4. Any notice given by the Employer under Clause 2 or 3 shall state that the Employer or
his appointee accepts liability for payment of the fees payable to the Designer under
the Consultancy Agreement and for performance of the Contractor's obligations under
the Consultancy Agreement, including payment of any fees outstanding at the date of
such notice.
5. The Employer shall be entitled to assign the benefit of this Warranty at any time
without the consent of the Designer being required.
6. All documents arising out of or in connection with this Warranty shall be served:
138 | P a g e
(1)
upon the Employer: Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai; at

Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),
Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
(2) upon the Designer at [ ].
7. The Employer and the Designer may change their respective nominated addresses for
service of documents to another address in India but only by prior written notice to
each other. All demands and notices must be in writing.
9. Except to the extent (if any) expressly permitted by the Consultancy Agreement, the
Designer shall not sub-contract any of the Designer's obligations under the
Consultancy Agreement without the prior written consent of the Employer's
Representative.
10. Without prejudice to its obligations under this Warranty, the Designer shall maintain
with well-established underwriters of repute and on terms and conditions reasonably
acceptable to the Employer, Professional Indemnity Insurance (as per Sub-Clause 18.6
of the Particular Conditions of Contract and Form of Tender – Appendix FT-1) in
respect of the Designer and its sub-consultants in relation to his design of the Works
for any one occurrence or series of occurrences arising out of any one event from the
date of Letter of Acceptance until 5 years after the issue of Performance Certificate for
the whole of works. The Designer shall immediately inform the Employer if for any
reason Professional Indemnity Insurance is not maintained in accordance with this
Warranty or becomes void or unenforceable.
11. Insofar as the patent, copyright or other intellectual property rights in any Design Data
(as defined in the Contract), plans, calculations, drawings, documents, materials,
computer software, know-how and information relating to the Works shall be vested
in the Designer, the Designer grants to the Employer his successors and assigns a
royalty-free, non-exclusive and irrevocable license (carrying the right to grant sub-
licenses) to use and reproduce any of the works designs or inventions incorporated
139 | P a g e
and referred to in such documents or materials and any such know-how and
information for all purposes relating to the Works (including without limitation the
design, construction, reconstruction, completion, reinstatement, extension, repair and
operation of the Works). To the extent beneficial ownership of any such patent,
copyright or other intellectual property right is vested in anyone other than the
Designer or the Contractor, the Designer shall use his best endeavors to procure that
the beneficial owner thereof shall grant a like license to the Employer. Any such
license granted shall not be determined if the Designer shall for any reason cease to
be employed in connection with the Works.
the Designer arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty shall be
referred to arbitration in accordance with Clause 104 of PCC “Dispute” as
defined in the Contract shall be deemed to include any such dispute or
difference between the Employer and the Designer.
provided that an arbitrator has not already been appointed, the Employer may
by notice in writing to the Designer require and the Designer shall be deemed
to have consented to the referral of such dispute or difference to the arbitrator
to whom the Contract Dispute has been or will be referred.
direction, withholding of approval or consent, statement of objection,
determination, certificate, assessment or valuation by the Employer's
Representative or the Contractor, relating to the dispute or difference.
IN WITNESS whereof this Warranty has been executed as a deed on the date first before
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
140 | P a g e
[Designer ]
the presence of:-
Note : In case of Contractor and Designer being the same, the wordings of the Para to be
suitably modified acceptable to the Employer.
141 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 7
SUB-CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY
142 | P a g e
SUB-CONTRACTOR’S / VENDOR’S WARRANTY
THIS AGREEMENT is made the day of
BETWEEN:
1. [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Sub-

contractor") and
TO
The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai(together with its successors and assigns, "the
Employer") of: Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.
& R.C),Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
WHEREAS
(A)
By a contract MCR/South/P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1 Municipal

Corporation of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”)and (2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the
Testing and Commissioning) and remedy any defects in works upon the terms and conditions
(B) The Sub-contractor has had an opportunity of reading and noting the provisions of the
Contract (other than details of the Contractor's prices and rates).
(C) Pursuant to the Contract, the Contractor wishes to enter into an agreement with the
Sub-contractor ("the Sub-contract") for the Sub-contractor to carry out and complete
a part of the Works as more particularly described in the Sub-contract ("the Sub-
contract Works").
143 | P a g e
(D) The Contract stipulates that the Contractor shall obtain the consent of the Employer's
Representative before entering into the Sub-contract, and that the Contractor shall
procure that the Sub-contractor executes a warranty agreement in favour of the
Employer.
144 | P a g e
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows: -
1. In consideration of the Engineer consenting to the Contractor and the Sub-contractor

entering into the Sub-contract, the Sub-contractor warrants and undertakes to the
Employer that:
(a) he will execute and complete the Sub-contract Works, and will carry out each
and all of the obligations, duties and undertakings of the Sub-contractor under
the Sub-contract when and if such obligations, duties and undertakings shall
become due and performable, in accordance with the terms of the Sub-contract
(as the same may from time to time be varied or amended with the consent of
the Employer); and
(b) he will supply to the Contractor and in specific cases wherever required to the
Employer's Representative with all information as may be required from time
to time in relation to progress of the Sub-contract Works.
2. The Sub-contractor undertakes to indemnify the Employer against each and every
liability which the Employer may have to any person whatsoever and against any
claims, demands, proceedings, loss, damages, costs and expenses sustained, incurred
or payable by the Employer provided that the Sub-contractor shall have no greater
liability to the Employer by virtue of this Warranty than the liability of the Contractor
to the Employer under the Contract insofar as and to the extent that the same has
arisen by reason of any breach by the Sub-contractor of his obligations under the Sub-
contract.
3 No allowance of time by the Employer hereunder or by the Contractor under the Sub-
contract nor any forbearance or forgiveness in or in respect of any matter or thing
concerning this Warranty or the Sub-contract on the part of the Employer or the
Contractor, nor anything that the Employer or the Contractor may do or omit or
neglect to do, shall in any way release the Sub-contractor from any liability under this
Warranty.
4. The Sub-contractor agrees that he will not without first giving the Employer not less
than 21 day’s prior notice in writing exercise any right he may have to terminate the
Sub-contract or treat the same as having been repudiated by the Contractor or
withhold performance of its obligations under the Sub-contract.
5. (1) In the event that the Contract or the employment of the Contractor under the
145 | P a g e
Contract is terminated for any reason whatsoever and if so requested by the

Employer in writing within 21 days of such termination, the Sub-contractor
shall carry out and complete his obligations under this Warranty and shall
enter into a novation agreement with the Employer and the Contractor in
which the Sub-contractor will undertake inter alia to perform the Sub-contract
and be bound by its terms and conditions as if the Employer had originally
been named as a contracting party in place of the Contractor. The said
novation agreement will be in such form as the Employer may reasonably
require.
(2) In the event that the Employer does not require the Sub-contractor to enter
into a novation agreement as required by Sub-Clause 5(1), the Sub-contractor
shall have no claim whatsoever against the Employer for any damage, loss or
expense howsoever arising out of or in connection with this Warranty.
6. Insofar as the copyright or other intellectual property rights, in any plans, calculations,
drawings, documents, materials, know-how and information relating to the Sub-
contract Works shall be vested in the Sub-contractor, the Sub-contractor grants to the
Employer, his successors and assignees a royalty free, non-exclusive and irrevocable
licence (carrying the right to grant sub-licences) to use and reproduce any of the works
designs or inventions incorporated and referred to in such documents or materials
and any such know-how and information for all purposes relating to the Works of the
Goregaon Mulund Link Road Project, without limitation the design, manufacture,
installation, reconstruction, completion, reinstatement, extension, remedy of any
defect of the Works. To the extent beneficial ownership of any such copyright or other
intellectual property right is vested in anyone other than the Sub-contractor, the Sub-
contractor shall use best endeavors to procure that the beneficial owner thereof shall
grant a like license to the Employer. For the avoidance of doubt, any such license
granted shall not be determined if the Sub-contractor shall for any reason cease to be
employed in connection with the Sub-contract Works.
7. In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the terms of the Sub-contract and
this Warranty, the terms of this Warranty shall prevail.
have against the Sub-contractor whether in tort or otherwise.
146 | P a g e
9. Nothing contained in this Warranty shall vary or affect the Sub-contractor's rights and
obligations under the Sub-contract.
without the consent of the Sub-contractor being required.
(1)
Upon the Employer: Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief

Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near
National Park, Borivali (E), Mumbai, 400066 IndiaMarked for the attention of
Managing Director.
(2)
Upon the Sub-contractor, at [ ] India.
12. The Employer and the Sub-contractor may change their respective nominated
the Sub-contractor arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty
shall be referred to arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration as described
in the Contract.
14(1), the Employer may by notice in writing to the Sub-contractor require
and the Sub-contractor shall be deemed to have consented to the referral of
147 | P a g e
such dispute or difference to the arbitrator to whom the Contract Dispute has
been or will be referred.
statement of objection, assessment or valuation by the Employer's
Representative or the Contractor relating to the dispute or difference.
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
the presence of: - )
148 | P a g e
VOLUME – V
SCHEDULE 5
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENTS
149 | P a g e

(Refer. Sub - Clause 14.2 of GCC)
Ref_________
Ba
nk Guarantee____________
Date __________
Dear Sir,
In consideration of M/s. ____ (hereinafter referred as the “Employer” \, which expression shall, unless repugnant
to the context or meaning thereof include it successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to M/s. _____
(hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context of meaning
thereof, include its successor, administrators, executors and assigns), a contract by issue of Contract Agreement
No.________ dated ______ and the same having been unequivocally accepted by the Contractor, resulting in a
Contract valued at ______ for ______Contract (hereinafter called the
“Contract”).
and the Employer having agreed to make an advance payment to the Contractor for performance of the above
Contract amount to _______ (in words and figures) as an advance against Bank Guarantee to be furnished by the
Contractor.
We _____ (Name of the Bank) having its Head Office at ______(hereinafter referred to as the Bank, which expression
shall unless repugnant to the context of meaning thereof, include its successors, administrators executors and
assigns) do hereby unconditionally, irrevocably and without demur guarantee and undertake to pay the
Employer immediately on demand any or, all monies payable by the Contractor to the extent of _____ as aforesaid
at any time upto ________@___ without any demur reservation, context, recourse or protest and or without any
150 | P a g e
reference to the Contractor. Any such demand made by the Employer on the Bank shall be conclusive and binding
notwithstanding any difference between the Employer and the Contractor or any dispute pending before any
Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any other authority. We agree that the Guarantee herein contained shall be
irrevocable and shall continue to be enforceable till the Employer discharges this guarantee.
151 | P a g e
The Employer shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of Bank under this Guarantee,
from time to time to vary the advance or to extend the time for performance of the contract by the Contractor.
The Employer shall have the fullest liberty without affecting this guarantee, to postpone from time to time the
exercise of any powers vested in them or of any right which they might have against the Employer and to exercise
the same at any time in any manner, and either to enforce or to forebear in enforce any convents, contained or
implied, in the Contract between the Employer and Contractor any other course or remedy or security available
to the Employer. The bank shall not be relieved of its obligation under these presents by any exercise by the
Employer of its liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or any of them or by reason of any other act or
forbearance or other acts of omission or commission on the part of the Employer or any other indulgence shown
by the Employer or by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law would but for this provision have
the effect of relieving the Bank.
The Bank also agrees that the Employer at his option shall be entitled to enforce this Guarantee against the Bank
as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the Contractor and notwithstanding any
security or other guarantee that the Employer may have in relation to the Contractor’s liabilities.
The outstanding liability of the Bank under this guarantee will reduce by such amounts as may be notified to the
Bank in your authorized writing and stated to be the reduction of this guarantee required to be made in
accordance with the Contract by reason of the repayments made by the Contractor.
Courts at Mumbai, India will have exclusive jurisdiction for contesting legal cases arising out of encashment of
the Guarantee.
152 | P a g e
Notwithstanding anything contained herein above, or liability under this guarantee is limited to ___ and it shall
remain in force until the Employer receive full repayment of the same amount from the Contractor and shall be
extended from time to time for such period as may be desired by M/s. ______ on whose behalf this guarantee has
been given.
Dated this _________ day of ________ 19 ___ at ____________________
WITNESS: ____________________________
_____________
(Signature)
(Signature)
___
_______________
(Name)
(Name)
Office Address:
_____________________
______________________
De
signation (with Bank stamp)
Att
orney as Power of
153 | P a g e
Att
orney No._________
Da
te ________________
@The date will be ninety (90) days after the date of completion of the Works.
Notes:
1. The stamp papers of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of the Bank, who issues the ‘Bank
Guarantee’.
2. The ‘Bank Guarantee’ shall be from an Indian Schedule bank (excluding Cooperative Banks) or from a
schedule Foreign Bank as defined in Section 2(e) of RBI Act 1934 read with Second Schedule.
154 | P a g e
Volume 2
1|Page
Disclaimer


Appendices 1 to 19

Note: The Tenderers, whilst compiling their rates, must carefully consider all the
requirements of the documents listed above, and the Request for Qualification (RFQ)
documents for the Package concerned, as all these documents will form part of the Contract.
2|Page
Volume 2
Section IV
General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Plant and Design-Build(First Edition, 1999)”, published by the Federation International des
Ingenieurs – Conseils (FIDIC). The Clauses of these conditions shall be considered valid and
binding in relation to the present contract, insofar as they are relevant and within the Laws of
India.
Tenderers are deemed to be in possession of their own copy of the above document and to be
fully aware of and have understood the contents therein.
3|Page
Goregaon Mulund link Road (GMLR)
Volume 2
Section V
4|Page
Part II
Plant and Design-Build(First Edition, 1999)”, published by the Federation InternationaleDes
Ingenieurs – Conseils (FIDIC).
The General Conditions of Contract (GCC) are linked with the Particular Conditions of Contract
(PCC) by the corresponding numbering of the Clauses, so that the GCC and the PCC together
comprise the rights and obligations of the parties. In the case of any discrepancy between the
conditions contained in the GCC and the PCC, the conditions contained in the PCC shall prevail
over that of the GCC.
The Clauses of these conditions shall be considered valid and binding in relation to the present
contract, insofar as they are relevant and within the Laws of India.Words indicating persons
or parties include corporations and other legal entities, except where the context requires
otherwise.
Tenderers are advised to purchase copies of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract and deemed to
be in possession of their own copy of the above document and to be fully aware of and have
understood the contents therein.
5|Page

Units of measurement, symbols and abbreviations expressed in the Tender Documents
Tenderer shall comply with the System International Units (SI Units).
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations shall be used in the Bid Document:
Prime Minister of India
PM
Chief Minister of Maharashtra
CM
Government of India
GOI
6|Page
Government of Maharashtra
GOM
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climatic Changes
MoEFCC
Ministry of Urban Developments
MoUD
Environment Appraisal Committee
EAC
State Environment Appraisal Committee
7|Page
SEAC
State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority
SEIAA
Maharashtra Coastal Zone Management Authority
MCZMA
MCGM
Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
MC
8|Page
Additional Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
AMC
Deputy Municipal Commissioner of Mumbai
DMC
Chief Engineer
Ch.E.
Central Pollution Control Board
CPCB
9|Page
State Pollution Control Board
SPCB
Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board
MPCB
Urban Development Department
UD
Maharashtra Maritime Board
10 | P a g e
MMB
Maharashtra State Road Development Corporation Ltd.
MSRDC
Mumbai Urban Infrastructure Project
MUIP
Mumbai Urban Transport Project
MUTP
Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation
MMRC
Mumbai Metro Line
11 | P a g e
MML
Mumbai Tran Harbour Link
MTHL
Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Development Authority
MMRDA
High Power Committee
HPC
12 | P a g e
Mumbai Heritage Conservation Committee
MHCC
NIO
Development Planning Department
DPD
Water Supply Project Department
WSP
Chief Fire Officer
13 | P a g e
CFO
Hydraulic Engineer Department
HE
Airport Authority of India
AAI
Mumbai Traffic Police
14 | P a g e
MTP
Mumbai Port Trust
MbPT
Employer’s Requirements (For Documents)
ER
Employer’s Representative (For Agency or Person)
ER
General Consultant
15 | P a g e
GC
Project Management Consultant
PMC
General Conditions of Contract
GCC
Development Plan
DP
Coastal Zone Management Plan
16 | P a g e
CZMP
Public Works Department
PWD
Indian National Rupees
INR
Interim Payment Certificate(for Tender)
IPC
Indian Penal Code (for Law)
17 | P a g e
IPC
Hector
Ha
Town Hall Datum
THD
Chart Datum
18 | P a g e
CD
Mean Sea Level
MSL
High Tide Level
HTL
Low Tide Level
19 | P a g e
LTL
Kilometer
km
Chainage
CH
Non-Pressure
NP
Number
20 | P a g e
No.
Particular Conditions of Contract
PCC
Provisional Sum
PS
Reinforced Cement Concrete
21 | P a g e
RCC
Safe Bearing Capacity
SBC
Slum Rehabilitation Authority
SRA
Removal & Rehabilitation
R&R
State Bank of India Prime Lending Rate
22 | P a g e
SBI PLR
Tender Data Sheet (For Tender)
TDS
Tax Deducted at Source (For Taxes)
TDS
Bombay Electric Supply & Transport
BEST
TATA Power Company Ltd.
23 | P a g e
TPCL
24 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1 General
Provisions General Provisions
1.1 Definition 1.1
Clause 1
Add to Sub-Clause 1.1 Definitions
(i) “The Employer” means:
The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (MCGM)/The
Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai for time being
holding office Municipal Head Office Building, Mahapalika Marg,
Fort,Mumbai 400 001,India.
(ii) MCGM will be represented by the following officer as his
authorized representative
The Chief Engineer
OR any other person appointed by the Employer and notified in
writing to the Contractor.
1.1 Definition 1.1
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai constituted under
the Mumbai Municipal Corporation Act.
The “Commissioner” shall mean the Commissioner for

Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, for the time being
holding the said office, and shall also include all the Additional
Municipal Commissioners and officers to whom the powers of
the Commissioner have been delegated under Section 56 and
56-B of the Bombay Municipal Corporation Act.
1.1.2.4 Engineer The term “the Engineer” in the tender documents shall also
1.1(a)
mean “the Employer’s Representative” (General Consultant –
25 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
GC) and “the Employer’s Personnel” (Project Management
Consultant – PMC)
1.1 Definition 1.1(a) Hierarchy of Administration:
(i)
The Employer→The Engineer→ The Employer’s Representative
(GC)→ The Employer’s Personnel(PMC) →The Contractor
1.1.1.6 Schedules 1.1(b) Add at the end of the Sub-Clause 1.1.1.6:
“Contract Forms”, “Schedules”, “Annexures” and “Annexes”
means the document(s) enclosed Contract Forms, Schedules,
Annexures and Annexes completed by the Contractor and
submitted with the Tender, as included in the Contract. Such
document may include data, lists and schedules of payments
and/or prices
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(c) Add a new Sub- Clause 1.1.1.:
“Notice to Proceed” means the Notice issued by the Employer /
the Engineer or the person appointed from time to time by the
Employer to perform specified duty to the Contractor
communicating the consent by which the Works are to be
commenced.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(d)
Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.12:
“Occupational, Safety, Health and Environmental (OSH&E)

Manual” means the Employer’s manual containing the
requirements and conditions to be met during the execution of
the Works by the Contractor.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(e) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.13:
“Particular Conditions of Contract” means any Particular
Conditions of Contract issued by the Employer over and above
the General Conditions of Contract, issued by the Employer prior
to submission of the Tender or negotiated and agreed in writing
by the Employer and the Contractor prior to and conditional
upon acceptance of the Tender.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(f) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.14:
“Works Programme” means the programme showing the
sequence, method and timing of investigations, design, issue of
26 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Notice to Proceed, execution, manufacture, delivery to site,
erection, installation, testing, commissioning of the Works
(including Integrated Testing and Commissioning),
indigenisation (where applicable) and related activities in the
form and content prescribed by the Employer’s Requirements,
or any amended or varied version thereof, as submitted by the
Contractor and for which the Engineer has issued a Notice to
Proceed .
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(g) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.15:
i.) The “General Consultant” (GC) means the consultant
appointed from time to time by the Employer to
perform specified duty as per the Contract entered in
between the Employer and the consultant or the
person as “General Consultant”. And to act on behalf of
the Employer and coordinate project for the Engineer.
As named in the Appendix FT – 1 Contract Data of
Volume 1.
ii.) Project Management Consultant (PMC) means any
consultant or the person appointed from time to time
by the Employer to perform specified duty as per the
Contract entered in between the Employer and the
consultant or the person as Project Management
Consultant. As named in the Appendix FT – 1 Contract
Data of Volume 1.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(h) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.16:
The word “tender” is synonymous with “bid”, and “tenderer”
with “bidder” and the words “tender documents” with
“bidding documents”
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(i) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.17:
The word “Contract Price” is synonymous with “Contract Sum”.
1.1.1 The Contract 1.1(J) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.1.18:
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, constituted
under the M.M.C. Act 1888 as amended up to date.
27 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1.1.2 Parties and 1.1(k) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.2.11:
Persons
“Interface Contractors ” means any of the following whose
activities or the works they are engaged to carry out, affect or
are affected by the Works, in any way or at any time:
a) contractors, design consultants and utility authorities
engaged on the Project from time to time by the
Employer;
b) Sub-contractors of any tier of the contractors above;
provided that the definition shall exclude the Contractor
and his sub-contractors of any tier in relation to the
Works.
1.1.2 Parties and 1.1(l) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.2.12:
Persons
“Designer” means the agency, or part of the group forming the
agency, person, firm or company or group of companies, or any
replacement, carrying out the Design of Works or part thereof
“Designer” means the person firm or company, or group of
companies engaged by the Contractor for carrying out the
design of the works.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(m Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.10:
Periods and )
“Contract Period” means the period from the Commencement
Completion
Date to the completion of the Works;
“Defects Liability Period (DLP)” means the period stated for
remedying any defects from the date of taking over the work till
the end of the Defects Liability Period. The terms “Maintenance
Period” or “Period of Maintenance” is synonymous with “Defects
Liability Period”.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(n) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.11:
Periods and
“Key Date (KD)” means a date identified as such in the Contract
Completion
to achieve a particular activity, and the same may be extended
pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 8.4.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(o) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.12:
Periods and
“Milestone” means the completion of a part of the Works or the
Completion
occurrence of an event identified as such in the Schedule of
Milestones.
28 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(p) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.13:
Periods and
“Factory Tests” means the tests required to be carried out in
Completion
the factory premises on components, equipment, subsystem,
system, etc. During and/or after manufacture in the factory,
before shipped.
1.1.3 Dates, Tests, 1.1(q) Add a new Sub-Clause 1.1.3.14:
Periods and
“Integrated Testing” means the programme of tests performed
Completion
by the Contractor at the direction of the Engineer following
satisfactory completion of Contractor’s tests on his equipment,
sub-systems or system to verify and confirm the compatibility
and compliant performance of his equipment/sub-
system/system with the equipment/sub-system/system
provided by others.
1.1.6.9 Variations 1.1(r) Add to Sub-Clause 1.1.6.9 with the following:
Changes to temporary works, any sequence, method or timing of
construction, manufacture or installation and changes to any
part of the Site or the Works Areas or access thereto will not
constitute Variation.
1.5 Priority of 1.5 Replace Sub-Clause 1.5 with the following:

Documents
The priority of the documents shall be with the following
sequence:
a) Contract Agreement
b) Letter of Acceptance (LOA)
c) Letter of Tender
d) Letter of Clarification, if any.
e) Addendum/Corrigendum to Tender
f) Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
g) FIDC Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design – Build
Contract First Edition, 1999 (GCC)
h) Employer’s Requirements
i) Pricing Document
j) Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)
k) Outline Design & Construction Specifications
29 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
l) Tender Drawings
m) Contractor’s Technical &Financial Proposal
n) All RFQ Documents with its all Addendum/Corrigendum
o) Reference Documents
p) Any other Forms, statements as part of Tender Technical
& Financial Documents
q) If an ambiguity or discrepancy is found in the documents,
the Engineer shall issue any necessary clarification or
instruction
Note: The Costs of stamp duties and similar charges (if any)
imposed by law in connection with entering into the Contract
Agreement shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.6 Contract 1.6 Add a new Sub-Clause 1.6.1:
Agreement
Till the execution of formal agreement, the Letter of Acceptance
(LOA) will form the agreement.
1.7 Assignment 1.7 Add a new Clause 1.7.1:
The Employer shall be fully entitled without consent of the
contractor to assign any part of work to any third party by giving
14 days’ notice when the contractor is behind the schedule and
causing undue delay, at the risk and cost of the contractor.
1.8 Care and 1.8 Add Sub-Clause 1.8 as under:
Supply of
As-Built Drawings
Documents
Based on all Drawings relating to the work, the Contractor, at his
own expense, shall prepare. “As- Built Drawings” using the latest
software Auto CAD/*dxf to record the precise details of the work
completed.
A copy of the Auto CAD/*dxf Drawings shall be provided to the
Engineer or his representative on a monthly basis for approval
and to record all details relating to progress and developments.
The final copy of the Auto CAD/*dxf Drawings shall be provided
on soft copy digital files as well as 8 sets of hard copies (A1 size)
at the time of issue of the Taking Over Certificate. Failure to
provide within 60 days from the date of issue of the Taking Over
30 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Certificate of project, the amount will be withheld as per
Payment Schedule.
1.8 Care and 1.8 Add Sub-Clause 1.8.2 as under:
Supply of
The Contractor shall also arrange to take photographs as
Documents
directed by the Engineer or his representative, depicting various
details and stages of progress of works and submit them in
duplicate in proper albums for records.
All detailed working drawings, design calculations and
fabrication drawings for temporary works (such as form work,
staging, centering, scaffolding, specialized construction,
handling and launching equipment and the like) and permanent
works as well as bar bending schedule for reinforcement,
material list for structural fabrication as well as detailed
drawings for templates and anchorage and temporary support
details for pre-stressing cables etc. shall be prepared by the
Contractor at his own cost and submitted to the Engineer or his
representative at least three weeks in advance of actual
constructional requirements. Within two weeks of receipt, the
Engineer or his representative will check and return one copy of
the same for the Contractor’s use with amendments if any,
marked on them after due discussion and agreement with the
contractor. Such Notice shall not relieve the contractor of any of
his responsibilities in connection with the temporary works. The
Contractor will supply two copies of the Noticed drawings for
the Engineer or his representative’s use. The cost of preparing
all such items of work shall be deemed to have been included in
the price quoted by the Contractor.
1.13 Compliance 1.13 Sub-Clause: 1.13:
with Laws
Compliance with Law
Replace Sub-Clause 1.13(b) with the following:
b) The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all taxes, duties and
fees, and obtain all permits, wherever required such as
Permission from GOI,GOM, MoEFCC, MoUD, EAC, MMRDA,
MMRCL, MSRDC, Traffic Police, MCGM, PWD, MCZMA, SEIAA,
31 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
AAI, MPCB, SEAC, CPCB, UD, MUTP, MML, MTHL, HPC, MHCC,
NIO, MbPT, SRA,TPCL, External and, authority of Sanjay Gandhi
National Park, etc. Licenses and approvals, as required by the
Laws in relation to the execution and completion of the Works
and the remedying of any defects; and the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold the Employer harmless against and from the
consequences of any failure to do so.
1.14 Joint and 1.14 Add to Sub-Clause 1.14:
Several
d) The Contractor shall ensure that each and every member of
Liability
JV participates actively and contributes in execution of the
Works under the Contract, which shall be commensurate with
their respective main scope of Works as stated in the JV
Agreement, in mobilization/ deployment of technical resources
(including manpower and equipment etc.) for the satisfactory
execution of the Works under the Contract.
e) The Contractor shall ensure that for execution of the Works
under the Contract, each and every member of the JV deploys
their respective technical expertise relating to their specific
partof expertise as claimed in the RFQ stage and utilizes it to the
maximum extent for the successful project
delivery/implementation of the Contract.
Provisions
Add new Sub-Clause
Inspection and Audit by Employer:
The Contractor shall permit the Employer, or the persons
appointed by the Employer to inspect the site and /or the
Contractors accounts and records relating to the performance of
the Contract and to have such accounts audited by the Employer
or the Auditors appointed by the Employer if required by the
Employer.
Provisions
Add new Sub-Clause
Details to be Confidential
32 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall treat the details of the Contract as private
and confidential, except to the extent necessary to carry out
obligations under it or as agreed with the Employer. The
Contractor shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose
any particulars of the Works in any trade or technical paper or
elsewhere except with the written consent of the Engineer and
subject to such conditions as he may prescribe.
2 The The Employer
Employer
2.1 Right of 2.1 Clause 2
Access to the
Sub-Clause 2.1: Right of Access to the Site
site
Delete Sub-Clause 2.1(b)
2.2 Permits, 2.2 Add to Clause 2.2:
Licenses or
(c) by organizing official meetings with the relevant authorities,
Approvals
and
The Contractor is responsible for the preparation of necessary
documents and, if required, explanations to the relevant
authorities to get Permits, Licenses or Approvals from the
relevant authorities in the approval process.
The rendering of such assistance by the Employer shall not be
interpreted as a pretext by the Contractor as condoning of any
delay or non-performance of any of the Contractors obligations.
The following-up of all such requirements shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2.4 Employer’s 2.3 Sub-Clause 2.4:
Financial
Employer’s Financial Arrangements
Arrangemen
ts Delete Sub-clause 2.4
2.5 Employer’s 2.5 Add to Sub-Clause 2.5:
Claims
The Employer is entitled to recover:
a) Claims for amounts not insured by the Contractor
b) Claims for amounts not recovered from insurers
c) Claims for the damage caused to interfacing
contractors, third parties, Employers / Engineer’s
property.
33 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
3. The 3 The Engineer
Engineer
3.1 Engineer's 3.1 Engineer’s Duties and Authority
Duties and
“The Employer’s Administration”
Authority
1. The Employer may appoint an Employer’s
Representative to act on his behalf under the Contract.
In this event, he shall give notice to the Contractor of the
name, address, duties and authority of the Employer’s
Representative.
The Employer’s Representative shall carry out the duties
assigned to him, and shall exercise the authority
delegated to him, by the Employer. Unless and until the
Employer notifies the Contractor otherwise, the
Employer’s Representative shall be deemed to have
authority of the Employer under the Contract, except in
respect of Termination by the Employer. If the Employer
wishes to replace any person appointed as Employer’s
Representative, the Employer shall give the Contractor
not less than 14 days’ notice of the replacement’s name,
address, duties and authority, and of the date of
appointment.
2. The Employer or the Engineer or the Employer’s

Representative may from time to time assign duties and
delegate authority to assistants and may also revoke
such assignment or delegation with the Employer’s
approval. These assistants may include a resident
engineer, and/or independent inspectors appointed to
inspect and/or test items of Plant and/or Materials. The
assignment, delegation or revocation shall not take
effect until a copy of it has been received by the
Contractor. Assistants shall be suitably qualified
persons, who are competent to carry out these duties
and exercise this authority, and who are fluent in the
language for communication.
34 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Sub-Clause, if, in

the opinion of the Engineer, an emergency occurs affecting the
safety of life or of the works or of adjoining property, he may,
without relieving the Contractor of any of his duties and
responsibilities under the Contract, instruct the Contractor to
execute all such work or to do all such things as may, in the
opinion of the Engineer, be necessary to abate or reduce the
risk. The Contractor shall forthwith comply, despite the
absence of approval of the Employer, with any such instruction
of the Engineer.
3.6 Add a new Sub-Clause 3.6 as under:
Site Meetings
The Engineer shall summon all parties concerned to the first Site
Meeting where he shall decide upon the future meetings. It is the
duty of the Contractor or his Representative to participate in the
Site Meetings. The purpose of the Site Meetings is to coordinate
the various work components with the Contractor, to register
the time in relation to the Program and to record the progress
made.
4. The The Contractor
Contractor
General Add the following Sub-Clauses after Sub-Clauses 4.1
Obligations
The Contractor shall maintain all the records and submit the
same in hard copies and soft copies till the completion of defect
liability period or till the claims and court matters, if any,
pertaining to the work are settled whichever is later and
handover the same to the Employer through the Engineer or his
representative.
General
Maintenance of Existing Roads/Flyovers/Bridges
Obligations
35 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
In case of works of improvement to the existing
Roads/Flyovers/Bridges, including widening of the
Roads/Flyovers/Bridges (subject to the amendments if any, as
specified), the Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance (Ordinary Repairs) of the complete length of the
road within site limit right from the date of the work order, even
though he proposes to take up the length for improvement in
phases. His offer/rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of the
cost of such repairs and no separate payment towards
maintenance (Ordinary Repairs) would be payable to him. In
case the Contractor neglects or fails to carry out maintenance to
the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative, the
Engineer or his representative shall have the authority to get the
same carried out through any other agency at the risk and cost
of the Contractor. The Contractor is supposed to maintain an
O&M manual and it has to be regularly updated and shared with
the client on satisfactory completion of all maintenance work.
General Add Sub-Clause 4.1.3: Contractor’s General Obligation
Obligations The Contractor accepts entire responsibility for the Contractor's
Technical Proposals, the Design Data, and for any mistake,
inaccuracy, discrepancy or omission contained therein. Nothing
contained in the Contractor's Technical Proposals and the Design
Data shall relieve the Contractor in any way from his obligations.
The Contractor warrants to the Employer that:
a) He has exercised and will continue to exercise in the
design of the Works all the skill and care to be expected
of a professionally qualified and competent designer
experienced in work of similar nature and scope of the
Works;
b) The Works will, when completed, comply in all respects
with the Employer's Requirements, the Contractor’s
Technical Proposals, the Design Data and the intended
use of the Works;
36 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
c) The Works have been or will be designed, manufactured,
installed and otherwise constructed and to the highest
standards available using proven up-to-date good
practice;
d) The Works will, when completed, comply with
enactments and regulations relevant to the Works;
e) No Materials generally known to be deleterious or not in
accordance with good engineering practice have been or
will be specified or selected or incorporated in the
Works by the Contractor; and
f) The design of the Works and the manufacture of Plant
have taken or will take full account of the effects of the
intended manufacturing and installation methods,
Temporary Works and Contractor's Equipment.
The Contractor shall not, under any circumstance, make any

claim for additional payment or an extension of time or be
relieved from any liability or obligation under the Contract,
where the cause of delay, suspension, impediment to or adverse
effect upon the progress of the Works is due to any mistake,
inaccuracy, discrepancy or omission in or between the
Contractor's Technical Proposals, the Technical Design, and the
Construction Design, or any failure by the Contractor to prepare
any Design Data or submit the same to the Engineer in due time.
4.2 Performanc 4.2
e Security Add Sub-Clause 4.2.1 as under:
The Performance Guarantee and Contract Deposit amount as per
Appendix to tender submitted by the Contractor in accordance
with Sub-Clause 4.2, shall be either in the form of demand draft
drawn in favour of MCGM or in the form of bank guarantee
furnished by a scheduled Bank of India approved by RBI and
issued from any of its branches in Mumbai. Performance
Guarantee shall be furnished within 28 days from the date of
Receipt of Letter of Acceptance, failing which the Contractor will
37 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
be liable for action as per Sub-Clause5.5.3 of ITT. The
Performance Guarantee and Contract Deposit shall be valid till
the issue of Taking Over Certificate and it shall carry no interest.
4.4 Subcontract 4.4 Add Sub-Clause 4.4 with:

ors
Notwithstanding any consent to sub-contract given by the
Employer / the Engineer, if in his opinion he considers it
necessary, the Engineer shall have full power to order the
removal of any sub-contractor from the Site or off-Site place of
manufacture or storage, by giving 7 days’ Notice to the
Contractor.
Add (d) The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements
imposed on the Contractor by Sub-Clause 1.12 [Confidential
Details] apply equally to each Subcontractor. Where practicable,
the Contractor shall give fair and reasonable opportunity for
contractors from this Country to be appointed as Sub-
contractors.
4.6 Cooperation 4.6 Replace Sub- Clause 4.6 with the following:
Replace Sub-Clause 4.6 with the following:

The Contractor shall not impede and shall afford all necessary
facilities, access and/or services to the Employer, the Engineer,
the General Consultants(GC), the Project Management
Consultants (PMC), the Designated Contractors, utility
undertakings, other relevant authorities and other contractors
(whether employed by the Employer or not) who are carrying
out on, or in the vicinity of, the Site, works not included in the
Contract:
(a) The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that
the Works are co-ordinated and integrated with the design,
manufacture, installation execution and testing of such other
works and shall in particular (but without limitation):
38 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
i. Comply with any direction which the Engineer may give
for integration of the design of the works with the design
of any other part of the project.
comply with any direction which the Engineer may give

for the integration of the design of the Works with the
design of any other part of the Project;
ii. consult, liaise and co-operate with those responsible for
carrying out such other works, including where necessary,
in the preparation of the respective designs, the
preparation of co-ordinated programmes, method
statements co-ordination drawings and specifications
together with arrangements of service priorities and
zoning;
iii. participate in Integrated Testing and Commissioning of
the system with Designated Contractors and demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the Works have
been designed and constructed in a manner compatible
with the works of Designated Contractors.
a) The Contractor shall share within the Site, areas for the
use of Designated Contractors, if Employer / Engineer
directs.
b) Any other contract which depends for its execution on the

Contract or upon which the Contract is dependent for its
own execution shall be identified by the Engineer as a
"Designated Contract". The Contractor shall provide
attendance on Designated Contractors in accordance
with the Employer's Requirements and as instructed by
the Engineer. The identity of the contractor for a
Designated Contract may not be known before the
execution of the Contract but this shall not be a ground
39 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for the Contractor to object to the subsequent
appointment of a Designated Contractor.
c) The Contractor shall afford all reasonable opportunities,

for carrying out their work, to other contractors
employed by the Employer and their workmen
respectively and the workmen of the Employer who may
be engaged on or near the Site of any work, ancillary to
the Works, but, not included in the Contract and shall not
cause them inconvenience.
d) If the Contractor shall suffer delay by reason of failure by
any Designated Contractor to meet the specified
installation interfacing and co-ordination, completion
dates, which delay shall be caused otherwise than by fault
of the Contractor, or, if compliance with Sub-Clause (e)
herein shall involve the Contractor in delay beyond that
which could be reasonably foreseen by an experienced
contractor at the time of tender, then the Engineer shall
take such delay into account in determining any
extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled
under the Contract.
e) The Contractor shall be deemed to have made adequate
allowance in the Contract Price and in the Works
Programme in respect of these obligations. If any act or
omission of the Contractor whether directly or indirectly
results in the delay in the execution of the works of a
Designated Contractor, the Contractor, in addition to his
liability in respect of delay and associated damages if they
become due, shall pay to the Employer, or the Engineer
may deduct from Interim Payment Certificates such
amount as the Engineer shall have certified in respect of
additional payments or costs to the Designated
Contractor in respect of such delay.
40 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
4.7 Setting Out 4.7 Replace Sub-Clause 4.7 with the following:
4.7.1The Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) Validating the accuracy of the original points, lines,
alignment, levels etc. which are basis for proceeding with the
work.
(b) the accurate setting out of the Works in relation to the
original points, lines and levels of reference given by the
Engineer in writing
(c) the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and
alignments of all parts of the Works
(d) employ of all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus
and labour in connection with the foregoing responsibilities
(e) Carefully protecting and preserving all bench marks,
reference points, pegs and other things used in setting out
the Works.
The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the
Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the accuracy or correctness thereof and the
Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all bench-marks,
reference points, pegs and other things used in setting out the
Works.
4.7 Setting Out 4.7 4.7.2 Errors in Setting out
If, at any time during the execution of the Works, any error
appears in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any
part of the Works, the Contractor, on being required so to do by
the Engineer or his representative, shall, at his own cost, rectify
such error to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his
representative, unless such error is based on incorrect data
supplied in writing by the Engineer or his representative. In such
case the Engineer or his representative shall determine an
addition to the Contract Price and shall notify the Contractor
accordingly, with a copy to the Employer in which case the cost
of rectification shall be borne by the Employer.
4.8 Safety 4.8 Add to Sub-Clause 4.8:
Procedures
41 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
4.8.1: Site Safety Plan
Within 60 days of the commencement date, the Contractor shall
submit a detailed and comprehensive contract-specific Site
Safety Plan based on the Employer’s Occupation Safety, Health
and Environmental Manual (OSH&E Manual).
The Contractor shall adhere to the Site Safety Plan and shall
ensure that all sub-contractors of all tiers have a copy of the Site
Safety Plan and comply with its provisions.

facilities to enable the Engineer and the Employer to carry out
surveillance to verify that the Site Safety Plan is being properly
and fully implemented.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any
occurrence or incident that results in death or serious injury as
defined in the Indian Penal Code. Such initial notification may be
verbal and confirmed in writing thereafter and shall be followed
by a comprehensive written report within 24 hours of the
occurrence/incident. The Contractor shall duly complete
standard forms as required by the Engineer and Statutory
Authorities.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary

temporary fire protection and firefighting facilities on the Site
during the construction of the Works in accordance with the
statutory regulations and as required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all gases, fuels and other
dangerous Materials and goods are stored and handled in a safe
manner and in accordance with the statutory regulations and as
The obligations and requirements for safety and industrial
health under this Contract are entirely without prejudice to, and
42 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
do not derogate from, the Contractor’s statutory obligations,
with respect to safety and industrial health.
4.8.2 First Aid Base

First -aid personnel and facilities
a) The Contractor shall make available first-aiders, first-aid
boxes and or first aid stations as per statutory
requirements. The persons holding current certificates
of competency of recognized institutions in prescribed
numbers as per any governing statute and in the absence
of such regulatory requirement a minimum of two first-
aiders for each area of work for every hundred
workmen. First-aiders' names shall be prominently
displayed.
b) The first -aid boxes shall display contents of medical and
medicinal articles with quantity maintained, which shall
be in accordance with governing statute. Nominated
first-aider shall replenish stock promptly.
The first-aid refresher training shall be provided at least

once in a year and all employees shall be encouraged to
undergo first-aid training. A record shall be kept of all first
aid treatments with particulars of treatment and personnel
providing the treatment.
4.8.3 Precautions for works in thorough-fares:
While the execution of any work is in progress in any street or

thoroughfare the Contractor at his own cost shall make
adequate provision for the passage of traffic, for securing safe
access to all premises approached from such While the
execution of any work is in progress in any street or
thoroughfare, and for any drainage, water supply, or means of
lighting or any other utility service which may be interrupted
43 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
by reason of execution of the work. Whenever it may be
necessary to stop the traffic in any street or thoroughfare
permission must first be obtained from the Engineer and the
Contractor shall then put up such barriers and adopt such other
measures or take precautions as may be necessary or as the
Engineer may direct for regulation of traffic. The work shall in
such cases be executed night and day or for as long a period as
practicable if so ordered by the Engineer, and with such speed
and vigour as he may require, so that the traffic may be impeded
for as short a time as possible. The Contractor shall remove the
barriers as soon as the necessity for them has ceased. Care shall
be taken by the Contractor to cause the least possible
obstruction to traffic during the progress of the work.
The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any
of the roads or bridges communicating with or on the routes
from the site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the
contractor or any of his subcontractors and, in particular, shall
select routes, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute
loads so that any such extraordinary traffic as will inevitably
arise from moving of materials, Plant, Contractor’s equipment or
Temporary works from and to the site shall be limited, as far as
reasonably possible and so that no unnecessary damage or
injury may be occasioned to such roads and bridges.
Save in so far as the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor
shall be responsible for and shall pay the cost of strengthening
any bridges or altering or improving any road communicating
with or on the routes to the site to facilitate the movement of
Contractors equipment or Temporary Works and the Contractor
shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against all
claims for damage to any such road or bridge caused by such
movement; including such claims as may be made directly
against the employer, and shall negotiate and pay all claims
arising safely out of such damage.
44 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
loads of heavy constructional equipment, materials or pre-
constructed units or parts of units of work over roads, highways,
bridges on which such oversized and overweight items are not
normally allowed to be moved, the Contractor shall obtain prior
permission from the concerned authorities. Payments for
complying with the requirements, if any, for protection of or
strengthening of the roads, highways or bridges shall be
included in his contract price.
Where the nature of Works is such as to require the use by the

Contractor of waterborne transport the forgoing provisions of
this Clause shall be construed as though “road included a lock,
dock, sea wall or other structure related to waterway and
“vehicle” included craft and shall have effect accordingly. Any
non-compliance to these precautions will attract penalties.
4.8.4 Maintenance of underground utility services:
All the underground utility services such as water pipes, gas
pipes, drains, sewers, cables, etc. which may be met up in or
about any excavation, shall if the Engineer deem it practicable,
be properly maintained and protected by the Contractor himself
or through other agency by means of shoring, strutting, planking
over, padding or otherwise as directed by the Engineer during
the progress of the work without claiming any extra charges.
Any damage to these underground utility services shall be
immediately remedied by the Contractor or by other agency at
its own cost, failing which the Engineer may with or without
notice adopt such measures as he may deem necessary at the
If on the other hand, the Engineer considers it impracticable for
the Contractor to maintain any such underground utility
services and that the exigencies of the work necessitate, the
breaking down, removal or diversion of the said utility services,
the cost of such breaking down, removal or diversion including
45 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
that of rebuilding, replacing, diverting and reinstating of any
such utility services shall be paid to the Contractor if done by
him. However, the cost of providing pumps, chutes or other
appliances as the Engineer may direct for the raising or
temporary passage of the water or sewage and the cost of
pumping out or removing as often as the Engineer may direct,
any water or sewage which may escape from any such
underground utility services, shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.9 Quality 4.9 Add Sub-Clause 4.9.1 as under:
Assurance
Working Methods
a. The Contractor shall submit within the time stipulated by
the Engineer or his representative in writing, the details of
actual methods that would be adopted by the Contractor
for the execution of any item as required by the Engineer
or his representative at each of the locations, supported by
necessary detailed drawings and sketches including those
of the equipment’s and machinery that would be used,
their locations, arrangements for conveying and handling
materials etc. and obtain prior approval of the Engineer or
his representative well in advance of starting of such item
of work. The Engineer or his representative reserves the
right to suggest modifications or make complete changes
in the methods proposed by the Contractor, whether
accepted previously or not, at any stage of work with prior
approval of the Employer to obtain the desired accuracy,
quality, safety and progress of work which shall be binding
on the Contractor and no claims on account of such change
in methods of execution will be entertained by the
Employer, so long as specifications of the items remains
unaltered.
b. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient plant, equipment
and labour as may be necessary to maintain the progress
schedule. The working and shift hours for operations to be
done under the supervision shall be such as may be
46 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
approved by the Engineer or his representative. They shall
not be varied without prior approval of the Engineer or his
representative. The Contractor shall provide necessary
lighting arrangements etc. for night work, as directed by
the Engineer or his representative with no extra cost.
c. A work order book shall be maintained on the site and it
shall be the property of the Employer and the Contractor
shall promptly sign orders given therein by the Engineer or
his representative or his authorized representatives to
comply with them. The compliance shall be reported by the
Contractor to the Engineer or his representative in good
time so that it can be checked. The blank work order book
with machine numbered pages in quadruplicate with
perforated sheet for three copies to be detached will be
provided by the Engineer or his representative for this
purpose. Whenever any instructions are written in the
work order book, the Contractor will be supplied the first
carbon copy.
4.10 Site Data 4.10 Substitute Sub-Clause 4.10 by the following:
Site Data
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, prior to the Base
Date, the Employer,
a) provided non-binding background information to the
information; and
provided non-binding background information to the

b) Made relevant and readily available data which was in
the Employer’s possession on sub-surface, hydrological
47 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
and climatic conditions at the site, including
environmental aspects, available to the Contractor, for
the Contractor information.The Contractor shall be
responsible and bear all liability for the
interpretation and use of all such data referred to in
this Sub-Clause 4.10 provided by the Employer
prior to and after the Base Date (collectively, the
“Data”). All Data provided by the Employer,
including any background information provided by
the Employer during the tender process that
preceded this Contract is indicative and for the
information of the Contractor only, and any reliance
by the Contractor on the Data shall be at the
Contractor’s own risk. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have inspected and examined the Site for
the purpose of preparing the Tender Submission
and the Schedule of Payments, and is deemed to
have made all sufficient enquiries to satisfy himself
with respect to the accuracy, completeness and
fitness for purpose of the Data, the existing
structures and facilities, the Site conditions and
ground conditions and other surroundings and
utilities, including, but not limited to, the following
matters:Structures and facilities, utilities and other
installations;
c) The hydrological and climatic conditions;
d) The extent and nature of the work and Materials
necessary for the execution and completion of the
Works, and the remedying of any defects;
e) The means of access to the site and the accommodation
he may require;
48 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
f) The adequacy, suitability and reliability of the data
provided for use in preparation of his Tender
Submission and execution of the Works,
g) Works necessary in obtaining and due compliance with
all necessary consents, permissions, licenses, easements
and statutory requirements in order to execute the
Works; any interference or disruption to the Works
caused by third parties; and
h) Any nuisance, interference and compliance with
Any nuisance, interference and compliance with

The Employer provides no warranty or undertaking of whatever
nature in respect of the Data. The Contractor acknowledges and
confirms that:
1) It was cautioned during the tender process that
preceded this Contract that the interpretation and use
of the Data is at the Contractor’s own risk;
2) It has conducted its own analysis and review of the
data and has, before the execution and delivery of this
contract, satisfied itself as to the accuracy,
completeness and fitness for purpose of any such data
upon which it places reliance; and
3) It shall not be entitled to and shall not make any claim
against the Employer (Whether in contract, tort or
otherwise), including, without limitation, any claim in
damages, for extensions of time or for additional
payments under this Contract on the grounds:
a. Of any misunderstanding or misapprehension in
respect of the data;
b. That the data was incorrect neither insufficient,
nor shall the Contractor be relived from any of its
49 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
obligations under this Contract on any such
ground.
That the Data was incorrect neither insufficient, nor shall the
Contractor be relieved from any of its obligations under this
contract on any such ground.
4.10 Site Data 4.10
The foundation strata indicated on the drawing supplied with
the bid is indicative only. The cost of taking one bore at each of
the foundation location as per technical proposal of the
Contractor and at 50-meter interval along the tunnel and one
bore hole at 20 m beyond the end of Tunnel will be deemed to
be included in the Bid. In case of adjacent carriageways, separate
borehole under each adjacent foundation is not obligatory. The
Contractor shall be responsible for preserving the samples and
testing the samples to justify the assumptions made in the
design at his own costs. The boring shall be extended to a depth
of 10 meters in soft rock strata (RQD<50%) or 5 meters in hard
rock strata (RQD>50%) whichever is struck earlier. Irrespective
of the above criteria in rock the boring shall extend minimum
5.00 meters below proposed foundation level if the geological
formations suggest rapid changes in the strata.
4.12 Unforeseeab 4.12 Substitute the Sub-Clause 4.12 by the following:
le Physical
4.12 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions
Conditions
In this Sub-Clause, "physical conditions" means natural physical
conditions and man-made and other physical obstructions and
pollutants, which the Contractor encounters at the Site when
executing the Works, including sub-surface and hydrological
conditions but excluding climatic conditions. If the Contractor
encounters adverse physical conditions which he considers
having been Unforeseeable, the Contractor shall give notice to
the Engineer as soon as practicable.
50 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
This notice shall describe the physical conditions, so that they
can be inspected by the Engineer, and shall set out the reasons
why the Contractor considers them to be Unforeseeable. The
Contractor shall continue executing the Works, using such
proper and reasonable measures as are appropriate for the
physical conditions, and shall comply with any instructions
which the Engineer may give. If an instruction constitutes a
Variation, Clause 13 [Variations and Adjustments] shall apply.
If and to the extent that the Contractor encounters physical
conditions which are unforeseeable, gives such a notice, and
suffers delay due to these conditions, the Contractor shall be
entitled subject to Sub-Clause 20.1 [Contractor’s Claims] to:
a) An extension of time for any such delay, if completion is
or will be delayed, under Sub-Clause 8.4 [Extension of
Time for Completion].
b) Deleted.
After receiving such notice and inspecting and/or investigating
these physical conditions, the Engineer shall proceed in
accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to agree or
determine (i) whether and (if so) to what extent these physical
conditions were Unforeseeable, and (ii) the matters described
above related to this extent.
However, extension of time will be determined by the Engineer
after review, whether other physical conditions in similar parts
of the works (if any) were more favorable than could reasonably
have been foreseen when the contractor submitted the Tender.
The Engineer may take account of any evidence of the physical
conditions foreseen by the Contractor when submitting the
Tender, which may be made available by the Contractor, but
shall not be bound by any such evidence.
4.12 Unforeseeab 4.12 Add the Sub-Clause 4.12.1
le Physical
Delay in Completion Time
Conditions
For delay in any time period beyond the contract period, the
consultancy fees shall be compensated on time and material
51 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
basis to PMC on prorate in proportionate to actual services
provided by PMC. If delay is on the part of the Contractor, the
Consultancy fees for the extended services of PMC beyond the
scheduled time shall be liable to be recovered from the
Contractor’s bills as a liquidated damages /penalty for the
delayed period and shall be reimbursed to PMC.
4.13 Rights of 4.13 Add to Sub-Clause 4.13 with:
Way and
The Employer reserves the right to make use of these service
Facilities
roads/rights of way for itself or for other contractors working in
the area, as and when necessary without any payment to the
Contractor
Equipment
Plant and Equipment: The Contractor shall arrange at his own
expense all tools, plant and equipment required for execution of
Works. If required by the Contractor and if available the
Municipal Corporation may supply such of the tools, plant and
equipment as are available, to the Contractor at the rates and
terms to be specified by the Engineer. No tools, plant and
equipment once brought to the work site shall be removed
without the written permission or order of the Engineer, until he
has certified the completion of the work.
If any Tools, Plants and equipment brought on site, are in the

opinion of the Engineer inefficient, bad or of inferior quality or
are unsuited for the Works then such tools, plant and equipment
of that ordered to be removed by the Engineer. The Employer
will use his best endeavor’s in assisting the Contractor, where
required, in obtaining clearance through the Customs of
Contractor’s equipment, material and other things required for
52 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Works but shall not be liable to the Contractor for any loss
resulting from clearance being delayed or refused.
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer, for a Notice to Proceed, within the time stipulated
against each item given below:
a) A general layout plan for construction plant and
equipment required for the execution of the Works, within
60 days from the Commencement Date; and
b) Drawings showing the locations of major facilities,
including the Contractor’s, Employer’s and Engineer’s site
offices, which he proposes to build/erect on site, within 60
days from the Commencement Date; and
c) Any other details and drawings as required under the
Contract, within the time as specified in the Contract.
Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove

from the Site the entire said Contractor’s Equipment,
Temporary works and his unused materials within 45 days
after the issuing of Taking-Over Certificate.
4.18 Protection of 4.18 Add to Sub-Clause 4.18 with:
the
Within 60 days of commencement date, the Contractor shall
Environmen
t submit a detailed and comprehensive Site Environmental Plan
based on the Employer’s Safety, Health and Environmental
Manual (SHE Manual), and shall include such further material,
which the Contractor considers necessary and relevant.

facilities to enable the Engineer to monitor and conduct tests to
verify that the Site Environmental Plan is being properly and
fully implemented.
4.19 Electricity, 4.19 Replace Sub-Clause 4.19 with the following:
water and
The Contractor shall be responsible for making his own
Gas
arrangements at his own cost to obtain supply of water,
electricity or gas for the Works. In this regard the conditions
53 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
stipulated by the statutory authorities shall be adhered to. The
Employer where feasible may at his discretion assist the
Contractor in giving recommendatory letters etc.
4.20 Employer’s 4.20 Replace with Sub-Clause 4.20 with the following:
Equipment
and Free No material, tools, plant and equipment shall be supplied by the
Issue of Employer. The Contractor shall arrange at his own expense all
Material
tools, plant and equipment required for execution of Works as
well as construction materials required for the work. No tools,
plant and equipment once brought to the work site shall be
removed without the written permission or order of the
Engineer, until he has certified the completion of the work. If any
Tools, Plants and equipment brought on site, are in the opinion
of the Engineer inefficient, bad or of inferior quality or are
unsuited for the Works then such tools, plant and equipment
of that ordered to be removed by the Engineer.
4.21 Progress 4.21 Replace Sub-Clause 4.21 item (f) with the following:
Reports
(f) List of Variations, list of notices given under Sub-Clause 2.5
[Employer's Claims] and list of notices given under Sub-Clause
20.1 [Contractor's Claims], no claims narrative is required in the
Progress Reports;
Insert the following at the end of Sub-Clause 4.21:
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, a detailed cash flow

estimates in respect of the Works, within 3 months from the
Commencement Date. This shall be up-dated and submitted
every three (3) months thereafter until the Completion of the
Works is achieved or at any time upon the request of the
Engineer.
54 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, at weekly intervals, a written report as to the progress
of off-Site manufacture of Plant, and Materials etc.
Add Sub-Clause 4.21.1 as under
Progress Schedules:
a. The Contractor shall submit the progress of work in prescribed
forms and statements at quarterly intervals in the form of
progress charts, forms, statements and / or reports as may be
approved by the Engineer or his representative.
b. The Contractor shall maintain pro-forma, charts, and details
regarding machinery, equipment, labour, materials, and
periodical returns thereof as may be specified by the Engineer
4.22 Security of 4.22 Replace Sub-Clause 4.22:

the Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Site in
his possession. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary
to ensure such security, including exercising control over all
persons and vehicles which are employed or engaged on the Site
or in connection with the Works or the other works comprising
the Project and with the security arrangements applicable to any
other site within the Project.
The Contractor shall arrange the issue of passes for the
admission of all persons and vehicles to the Site or to any part
thereof and may refuse admission to or remove from the Site any
person or vehicle failing to show an appropriate pass on demand
from any duly authorized person.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a list
identifying all persons to whom passes have been issued
together with two photographs of each person and all entities to
which a pass has been issued in respect of any vehicle and shall
satisfy the Engineer of the sincerity of any such person or entity.
The Contractor shall not, without the written permission of the
Employer/the Engineer or otherwise in accordance with the
55 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Contract, allow access to the Site to any person unless the
presence on Site of such person is necessary in connection with
the execution of the Works or with the discharge of the duties of
any relevant authority.
4.23 Contractor’s 4.23 Add to Sub Clause 4.23
Operations
If the Contractor fails to remove within 84 days after the issue of
on Site
the Taking-over Certificate, any remaining Contractor’s
Equipment, surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and Temporary
Works, the Employer may sell or otherwise dispose of such
items without any reference to the Contractor. The Employer
shall be entitled to retain from the proceeds of such sale, a sum
sufficient to meet the costs incurred in connection with the sale
or disposal, and in restoring the Site. Any balance of the
proceeds shall be paid to the Contractor. If the proceeds of the
sale are insufficient to meet the Employer’s costs, the
outstanding balance shall be recoverable from the Contractor’s
dues by the Employer. However, the Contractor may retain on
Site, during the Defects Notification Period, such goods as are
required for the Contractor to fulfil the obligations under the
Contract only on such portion and area of the Site as approved
by the Engineer or his representative.
4.25 Assignment 4.25 Add a new Sub-Clause 4.25 :
of
Assignment of Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s
Contractor’s
and Sub- Obligations
Contractor’s
The Contractor shall not assign a right or benefit under the
Obligations
Contract without first obtaining Employer’s prior written
consent, otherwise than by:
a) A charge in favour of the Contractor’s bankers of any
money due or to become due under the Contract, or
b) Assignment to the Contractor’s insurers (in cases where
the insurers have discharged the Contractor’s loss or
liability) of the Contractor’s right to obtain relief against
any other party liable.
56 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
If a Subcontractor’s obligations extend beyond the expiry date of
the Defects Liability Period then the Contractor shall assign the
benefits of such obligations to the Employer.
In the event that a sub-contractor of any tier provides to the
Contractor or any other sub-contractor a warranty in respect of
Plant, Materials or services supplied in connection with the
Works, or undertakes a continuing obligation of any nature
whatsoever in relation to such Plant, Materials or services
(including without limitation an obligation to maintain stocks of
spare parts) extending for a period exceeding that of the Defects
Liability the Contractor shall immediately assign or obtain the
assignment of the benefit of such warranty or obligation to the
Employer or at the direction of the Employer.
4.26 Add a new Sub-Clause4.26 :
Compensation for Breach
Any breach of Sub-Clauses 4.5 and 4.24 of Particular Conditions
of Contract shall entitle the Employer to rescind the Contract
under Sub-Clause 15.2 of GCC and also render the Contractor
liable for loss or damage arising due to such termination.
Sheds, Stores, Yards
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his
own expense the required sheds, store houses, and yards for
both Permanent and Temporary Works and provide free access
to the Engineer and Employer who will have right of inspection
including that of instructing the Contractor to remove a
particular material from the stores and not to use the same on
the Works.

Temporary Works
All temporary works necessary for the proper execution of the
Works shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor at his
cost and subject to the consent of the Engineer shall be removed
57 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
by Contractor at his own expense when they are no longer
required and in such manner as the Engineer shall direct. In case
the Contractor fails to remove the temporary works on
completion the Engineer is authorized to get the same removed
and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor.
Access for Engineer
The Contractor shall allow at all times the Engineer or any other
person authorised by the Engineer access to the Site and to any
place where work in connection with the Contract is being
carried out or is intended to be carried out and to any place
where materials or plant are being manufactured, fabricated
and/or assembled for the Works. The Contractor shall ensure
that sub contracts if any shall contain provisions entitling the
Engineer or any person authorised by him to have such access.
Contractor to keep Site Clear
On completion of Work the Contractor shall also clear away the
labour camps, hutments and other related installations and
restore the land to its original condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer within 45 days of the physical completion of Work. The
cost on account of delay in return of land and reinstatement of
original condition within the stipulated time as determined by
Engineer will be recovered from the Contractor’s dues.
No final payment in settlement of the accounts for Works shall
be made till, in addition to any other condition necessary for
such final payment, site clearance and clearances of labour
camps etc. shall have been effected by him.
Publicity
The Contractor shall not publish or otherwise circulate alone or
in conjunction with any other person, any articles, photographs
or other materials relating to the Contract, the Site, the Works,
the Project or any part thereof, nor impart to the press, or any
58 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
radio or television network any information relating thereto,
nor allow any representative of the media access to the Site,
Contractor's Works Areas, or off-Site place of manufacture, or
storage except with the permission, in writing, of the Employer.
Disclosure of Relationship
If the Contractor or any partner of the Contractor or Director of
the Contractor’s company is closely related to any of the Officers
of the Employer or the Engineer, or alternatively, if any close
relative of an officer of the Employer or the Engineer has
financial interest / stake in the Contractor’s firm, the same shall
be disclosed by the Contractor at the time of filing his tender.
Any failure to disclose the interest involved, shall entitle the
Employer to rescind the Contract, without payment of any
compensation to the Contractor. The Contractor shall note that
he is prohibited from developing such interest during the
Contract period.
4.33 Add new Sub-Clause 4.33:
Use of Explosives
Explosives shall not be used on the Works or on the Site by the
Contractor without the consent of the Engineer and shall be used
in the manner and to the extent permitted by the Engineer. The
explosives shall be handled and used under the strict
supervision of persons licensed for this purpose under the
requisite statutory rules and regulations. When explosives are
required for the Works they shall be stored in a special magazine
to be provided at the cost of the Contractor in accordance with
the requisite statutory rules and regulations. The Contractor
shall take all precautions in transporting and using the
explosives and avoid damage to nearby structures and utilities.
The Contractor shall also obtain necessary licence for the
storage and the use of explosives as per the appropriate laws
and permitted/approved by the relevant/competent Authority.
All operations, in which or for which the explosives are
59 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
employed shall be at the sole risk and responsibility of the
Contractor and the Contractor shall hold the Employer harmless
and shall indemnify the Employer in respect thereof.
Corrupt or fraudulent practices
i. Will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the
tenderer recommended for award has engaged in
corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the
contract in question;
ii. Will recognize a Contractor as ineligible, for a period

determined by the Employer, to be awarded a contract,
if it at any time determines that the Contractor has
engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing
for, or in executing, another contract with the Employer.
Work by Persons Other than Contactor
If by reason of any accident or failure or other event occurring
to, in, or in connection with the Works any remedial or other
work shall, be urgently necessary and the Contractor is unable
or unwilling at once to do such remedial or other work, the
Engineer may authorise the carrying out of such remedial or
other work by a person other than the Contractor. All expenses
properly incurred in carrying out the same shall be recoverable
by the Employer from the Contractor. Provided that the
Engineer shall, as soon after the occurrence of any such
emergency as may be reasonably practicable, notify the
Contractor thereof in writing.
Further, the Employer may enter on to the Site and take over the
responsibility for the or part thereof if:
a) the Contractor has failed to remedy any defect or
damage which has resulted in the performance
requirements of this Contract within a time period set by
60 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Employer or Engineer under the Conditions of
Contract; or
b) the Employer considers that it must take over
responsibility for the Works or part thereof to prevent a
serious threat to health, safety or the environment; or
c) The Employer considers that maintenance of the Works
is not being carried out in accordance with the Contract;
or
d) If the Employer takes over responsibility for the Works
or part thereof, the following shall apply:
i. All payment to the Contractor in respect of the Works
or part thereof for which the Employer has stepped in
shall be suspended, and except as otherwise set out in
Terms of Payments, no payment shall be owing to the
Contractor in respect of the Works or part thereof
performed by the Employer.
ii. All additional costs and expenses properly incurred by
the Employer in taking over all or part of the
Consultancy, Operation & Maintenance Service in this
event shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the
Employer.
Confidentiality of Information
The Contractor shall not use or divulge, except for the purpose
of the Contract or with the written permission of the Employer,
any information relating to the Works or the Project provided in
the Contract or otherwise provided by the Employer, or the
Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that his sub-contractors
of any tier shall be bound by a similar confidentiality
undertaking.
5 Design Design

Undertaking
61 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) The Contractor shall be fully responsible, for the
suitability, adequacy, integrity, durability and
practicality of the Contractor’s proposal.
b) The Contractor warrants that the Contractor’s Proposals
meet the Employer’s Requirements and is fit for the
purpose thereof. Where there is any inadequacy,
insufficiency, impracticality or unsuitability in or of the
Employer’s Requirements or any part thereof, the
Contractor’s Proposal shall take into account, address or
rectify such inadequacy, insufficiency, impracticality or
unsuitability at Contractor’s own cost.
c) The Contractor shall also provide a guarantee from the
Designer for the design for suitability, adequacy,
practicality of design for Employer’s Requirements
d) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against

any damage, expense, liability, loss or claim, which the
Employer might incur, sustain or be subject to arising
from any breach of the Contractor’s design
responsibility and/or warranty set out in this Clause.
e) The Contractor further specifies and is deemed to have

checked and accepted full responsibility for the
Contractor’s Proposal and warrants absolutely that the
same meets the Employer’s Requirements:
i. Notwithstanding that such design may be or have
been prepared, developed or issued by the
Employer, any of the Contractor’s consultants, his
sub-contractors and/or his qualified
personnel/persons or cause to be prepared,
developed or issued by others.
ii. Notwithstanding any warranties, guaranties
and/or indemnities that may be or may have been
submitted by any other person.
62 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
iii. Notwithstanding that the same have been
accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Plants,
Materials, goods, workmanship, preparing, developing and
coordinating all design Works to enable that part of the Works
to be constructed and/or to be fully operational in accordance
with the Contract’s requirements.
Apart from the Contractor, the above warranty shall also be
applicable for his designer. This warranty shall be a part of his
sub contract with the designer and should be made available at
the time of signing of the Agreement.
No claim for additional payment or extension of time shall be
entertained and/or the Contractor shall not be relieved from any
obligation/liability under the Contract, for any delay,
suspension, impediment to or adverse effect upon the progress
of the Works due to any mistake, inaccuracy, discrepancy or
omission in or between the Contractor’s, the Definitive Design
and the final design, or any failure by the Contractor to prepare
any Design Data or submit the same to the Engineer in due time
and the Contractor shall promptly make good any such defect at
his own cost.
Intellectual Property Rights and Royalties
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer and the Engineer

from and against all claims and proceedings on account of
infringement (or alleged infringement) of any patent rights,
registered designs, copyright, design, trademark, trade name,
know-how or other intellectual property rights in respect of the
Works, the Contractor's Equipment, machines, work method, or
Plant, or Materials, or anything whatsoever required for the
Works and from and against all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.
63 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall, in the event of infringement of Intellectual
Property Rights, rectify, modify or replace at his own cost the
Works, Plant or materials or anything whatsoever required for
the Works so that infringement no more exist or in the
alternative shall procure necessary rights/license so that there
is no infringement of Intellectual Property Rights.
The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under
this Sub- Clause made against the Employer. The Contractor
shall, at his cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such
claim, and any litigation or arbitration that may arise from it. The
Employer or the Engineer shall not make any admission which
might be prejudicial to the Contractor, unless the Contractor has
failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations, litigation or
arbitration within a reasonable time after having been so
requested. In the event of the Contractor failing to act at the
Engineer notice, the Employer shall be at full liberty to deduct
any such amount of pending claim from any amount due to the
Contractor under this Contract or any other Contract.
Insofar as the patent, copyright or other intellectual property

rights in any Plant, Design Data, plans, calculations, drawings,
documents, Materials, know-how and information relating to
the Works shall be vested in the Contractor, the Contractor shall
grant to the Employer, his successors and assignees a royalty-
free, non-exclusive and irrevocable licence to use and reproduce
any of the works, designs or inventions incorporated and
referred to in such Plant, documents or Materials and any such
know-how and information for all purposes relating to the
Works (including without limitation the design, manufacture,
installation, reconstruction, Testing, commissioning,
completion, reinstatement, extension, repair and operation of
the Works) for the Employer’s own use.
If any patent, registered design or software is developed by the

Contractor specifically for the Works, the title thereto shall vest
64 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
in the Employer and the Contractor shall grant to the Employer
a non-exclusive irrevocable and royalty-free licence to use,
repair, copy, modify, enhance, adapt and translate in any form
such Software for Employer’s own use.
If the Contractor uses proprietary software for the purpose of

storing or utilising records the Contractor shall obtain at his
own expense the grant of a licence or sub-licence to use such
software in favour of the Employer and shall pay such licence fee
or other payment as the grantor of such licence may require
provided that the use of such software under the licence may be
restricted to use relating to the design, construction,
reconstruction, manufacture, completion, reinstatement,
extension, repair and operation of the Works or any part thereof.
The Contractor's permission referred to above shall be given,

inter alia, to enable the Employer to disclose (under conditions
of confidentiality satisfactory to the Contractor) programmes
and documentation for a third party to undertake the
performance of services for the Employer in respect of such
programmes and documentation.
If any software is developed under the Contract or used by the

Contractor for the purposes of storing or utilising records over
which the Contractor or a third party holds title or other rights,
the Contractor shall permit or obtain for the Employer (as the
case may require) the right to use and apply that Software free
of additional charge (together with any modifications,
improvements and developments thereof) for the purpose of the
design, manufacture, installation, reconstruction, testing,
commissioning, completion, reinstatement, extension, repair,
modification or operation of the Works, or any part thereof, or
for the purpose of any Dispute.
The Employer reserves the right to use other Software on or in

connection with the Works.
6 Staff and Staff and Labour
Labour
65 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.1 Engagement 6.1 Add Sub-Clause 6.1.1 as under:
of Staff and
The Contractor shall, at his own expenses, maintain sufficient
Labour
qualified and experienced supervisory staff etc. required for the
work and shall make his own arrangement for housing such
staff.
6.2 Rates of 6.2 Add to Sub-Clause 6.2 with the following:
Wages and
Conditions Full compliance of statutory requirements apart, the Contractor
of Labour
shall pay rates of wages and observe conditions of labour not
less favourable than those established for the trade or the
industry where the work is carried out.
The Contractor shall make him aware of all labour regulations

and their impact on the cost and build up the same in the
Contract Price. During the Contract Period no extra amount in
this regard shall be payable to the Contractor, for whatsoever
reason including any revision of rates payable to the labour due
to revision of rates payable in Minimum Wages Act.
Labour provided by the Contractor, either directly or through

sub-contractors, for the exclusive use of the Employer or the
Engineer, shall, for the purpose of this Sub-Clause, be deemed to
be employed by the Contractor.
In the event of default being made in the payment of any money

in respect of wages of any person employed by the Contractor or
any of its sub-contractors of any tier in and for carrying out of
this Contract and if a claim therefore is filed in the office of the
Labour Authorities and proof thereof is furnished to the
satisfaction of the Labour Authorities, the Employer may, failing
payment of the said money by the Contractor, make payment of
such claim on behalf of the Contractor to the said Labour
Authorities and any sums so paid shall be recovered by the
Employer from the Contractor.
66 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.3 Persons in 6.3 Add to Sub-Clause 6.3:
the Services
The Contractor either at the tendering stage or during
of Employer
construction stage will not employ any retired employee of
Employer in any capacity unless such employee has completed
at least two years post retirement period or has obtained the no-
objection certificate from Employer for being employed with the
Contractor. It will be responsibility of the Contractor to collect
the Employer’s no objection certification from such retired
employee and submit the same back to the Employer.
The contractor shall not poach any technically qualified
engineers from fellow contractor of same project.
6.4 Labour Laws 6.4 Add to Sub-Clause 6.4:
The Contractor shall be accountable for the violation of any

labour laws solely by themselves or their sub-contractors and
will pay any such claim/damage to the Relevant Authorities
forthwith on demand. If any moneys shall, as a result of any
instructions, directions or decisions from the Relevant
Authorities or claim or application made under any of the labour
laws or regulations, be directed to be paid by the Employer, such
moneys shall be deemed to be moneys payable to the Employer
by the Contractor and he will pay the same to the Employer
forthwith on demand, without demur and without asking for any
reasons/explanations from the Employer. On failure of the
Contractor to repay the Employer any moneys paid or to be paid
by it as aforesaid within seven days after the same shall have
been demanded, the Employer shall be entitled to recover the
amount from any moneys due or accruing to the Contractor
under this or any other Contract with the Employer.
The Employer is the main employer of labour for this Contract;

hence any issues related to labour can be issued directly from
the Government to the Employer who shall then copy to the
Engineer for distribution to the Contractor.
67 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Contractor shall formally register with the appropriate
labour department listing the Employer as the principle
employer of labour for this Contract.
All labour laws of government of Maharashtra and government
of India will prevail. The Employment of labour, and the labour
laws and regulations enumerated in Section 6 of Standard
General Conditions of Contract for Construction works
published by MCGM shall form part of this PCC and shall be
adhered to.
The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient numbers either
directly or through subcontractors to maintain the required rate
of progress and of quality to ensure workmanship of the degree
specified in the contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer
a) The Contractor shall not employ in connection with
works, any person who has not completed his eighteenth
year of age.
b) The Contractor shall not recruit or attempt to recruit his
staff and labour from amongst persons in the service of
the Employer or the Engineer or his representative.
c) The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer or his
representative, fortnightly distribution returns of the
number and description by category of works, for which
the labours are employed.
d) The Contractor shall pay to the labour employed by him,
either directly or through sub-contractors, wages not
less than fair wages as defined in the Contract Labour
Regulations as contained hereinafter in regard to
matters provided therein.
e) The Contractor shall at all times, indemnify the
Employer against all claims, damages of compensation
under the provision of Payments of Wages Act 1948,
Employees Liability Act 1938, Industrial Dispute Act
68 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
1947, Maternity Benefit Act 1961, Contract Labour
(Regulation of Abolition) Act 1970 and Inter State
Migrant Workman (Regulation of Employment and
Condition of Services) Act 1979, or any modifications
thereof or any other law relating thereto and rules made
there under from time to time, or as a consequence of
any accident or injury to any workman or other person
in or about works, whether in the employment of the
contractor or not and also against all costs, charges and
expenses or any suit action or proceedings arising out of
such accident or injury and against all sum or sum which
may, with the consent of the contractor be paid to
compromise or compound any such claim without
limiting his obligation and liabilities as above, and the
contractor shall insure against all claims, damages or
compensation payable under the Workmen’s
Compensation Act 1923, or any modifications thereof or
any other law relating thereto and the insurance
policy/policies shall be kept valid by the Contractor
throughout the period of Contract.
f) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against
any payment to be made under and for the observation
of the Regulations aforesaid without prejudice to his
right to claim indemnification from his Sub-Contractor.
g) The decision of the Engineer or his representative in
matters relating to the reports from the Inspecting
Officers as defined in “Contractor – Labour Regulation”
(Contained hereinafter) shall be final and binding and
deductions or recovery in regard to any amount payable
to the Contractor.
h) The Contractor shall be responsible for the return to the
place from where they were recruited or to their
domicile of all such persons as he recruited and
employed for the purpose of or in connection with the
69 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
contract and shall maintain such persons as are to be
referred in a suitable manner until they shall have left
the site.
i) The register of workmen and the register of wages cum
muster roll required to be maintained under these
Regulations shall be preserved for 3 years after the date
on which the last entry is made therein.
j) On any question as to the application, interpretations or
effect of these Rules, the decision of the Chief Labour
Commissioner or Deputy Labour Commissioner or any
other competent authority shall be final and binding.
Definitions: In these rules/regulations, unless otherwise
expressed or indicated, the following words and expressions
shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them.
a) ‘Labour’ would mean, “Workmen” as defined in Chapter 1 of
the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970 as
amended from time to time
b) ‘Fair Wage’ means Wages, which shall include wage for
weekly day of rest and other allowances whatever for time or
piece work taking into consideration prevailing market rates for
similar employment in the neighbourhood and shall not be less
than the minimum rates of wages fixed under Minimum Wages
Act.
c) ‘Contractor’ for the purpose of these Regulations shall include
an agent or subcontractor employing labour on the work taken
on Contract.
d) ‘Inspecting Officer’ means any Labour Enforcement Officer or
Assistant Labour Commissioner of the Chief Labour
Commissioner Organization.
e) ‘Form’ means a form appended to these Regulations.
f) ‘Work Place’ means a place at which on an average 20 or more
workers are employed.
70 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
g) ‘Large Work Place’ means a place at which on an average 500
or more workers are employed.
a) The Contractor shall during the currency of the Contract,
when called upon by the Engineer, engage and also ensure
engagement by the Sub-contractor and other employed by the
Contractor in connection with the works, such number of
Apprentices in the categories mentioned in Clause 6.4.2 C and
for such period as may be required by the Engineer.
b) The Contractor shall train them as required under the
Apprentice Act 1961 and shall be responsible for all obligations
of the Employer under the Act including the liability to make
payment to Apprentices as required under the Act.
c) The number of Apprentices to be engaged in different
categories shall be as required under “Apprentices Act 1961”
and rules and regulations made there under and as amended
from time to time.
d) The Contractor shall, duly comply with the provision of the
Apprentices Act 1961, the rules there under, and the order that
may be issued from time to time under the said Act and said
rules and on his failure or neglect to do so, he shall be subject to
all the liabilities and penalties provided by the said ‘Act and said
Rules’ valid by the contractor throughout the period of contract.
6.6 Facilities for 6.6 Sub-Clause 6.6 - Facilities for Staff and Labour
Staff and
Delete the first paragraph and replace by:
Labour
Except as otherwise stated in the Employer’s requirements, the
Contractor shall provide and maintain such accommodation and
amenities as he may consider necessary for all his staff and
labour, employed for the purposes of or in connection with the
Contract, inducing all fencing, water supply (both for drinking
and other purposes), electricity supply, sanitation, cook houses,
fire prevention and fire-fighting equipment, furniture and other
requirements in connection with such accommodation or
amenities. On completion of the Contract, unless otherwise
71 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
agreed with the Employer, the temporary camps/housing
provided by the Contractor shall be removed and the site
reinstated to its original condition, all to the approval of the
Engineer or his representative. The Contractor shall also
provide facilities for the Employer’s Personnel as stated in the
Employer’s Requirements.
6.7 Health and 6.7 Sub-Clause 6.7 - Health and Safety
Safety
Add
The Engineer will undertake the major roles of the

implementation including formulation of the HIV/AIDS
Prevention Program, co-working with other stakeholders,
supervision and management of the Program implementation
progress, undertaking of regular monitoring, evaluating and
reporting and supervision of the Contractor’s obligations.
HIV-AIDS Prevention.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-operating with the
Service Provider in implementing the HIV Prevention
Programme among the Contractor’s Personnel for the duration
of the Contractor’s contract and commencing as soon as
practicable after the Contractor’s Personnel arrive at the site(s)
in conjunction with occupational health staff of the Contractor
and the local health authorities involved in HIV/AIDS
prevention.
The Contractor shall conduct an HIV-AIDS awareness
programme via an approved service provider and shall
undertake such other measures as are specified in this Contract
to reduce the risk of the transfer of the HIV virus between and
among the Contractor’s Personnel and the local community, to
promote early diagnosis and to assist affected individuals.
6.8 Contractor’s 6.8 Sub-Clause 6.8 - Contractor's Superintendence
Superintend
The following shall be added to Clause 6.8
ence
The Contractor's Key Staff shall be approved by the Employer
before starting working on site. The Employer may require
interviewing and test the proposed staff before approval.
72 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
6.10` Records of 6.10 Sub-Clause 6.10 - Records of Contractor's Personnel and
Contractor’s
Equipment
Personnel
and Add the following:
Equipment
a) The Contractor shall maintain such records and make such
reports concerning safety, health and welfare of persons and
damage to property as the Engineer or his representative may
from time to time prescribe.
b) The Contractor shall report to the Engineer or his
representative details of any accident as soon as possible after
its occurrence. In the case of any fatality or serious accident, the
Contractor shall, in addition, notify the Engineer or his
representative immediately by the quickest available means.
Labour
Implementation of Labour Welfare Provisions to
Contractor's Personnel
“During continuance of the contract, the Contractor and his sub-
Contractors shall abide at all times by all existing labour
enactments and rules made there under, regulations,
notifications and bye laws of State or Central Government or
local authority and any other labour law (including rules),
regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notification that may
be issued under any labour law in future either by the State or
the Central Government or the local authority. Salient features
of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to
construction industry are given below. The Contractor shall
keep the Employer indemnified in case any action is taken
against the Employer by the competent authority on account of
contravention of any of the provisions of any Act or rules made
there under, regulations or notifications including amendments.
If the Employer is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as
may be necessary to cause or observe, or for non-observance of
the provisions stipulated in the notifications/bye
laws/acts/rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on
the part of the Contractor, the Engineer/Employer shall also
73 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
have right to recover from the contractor any sum required or
estimated to be required for making good the loss or damage
suffered by the Employer.
The employees of the Contractor and the sub-contractor in no
case shall be treated as the employees of the Employer at any
point of time.
SALIENT FEATURES OF SOME MAJOR LABOUR LAWS
APPLICABLE TO ESTABLISHMENTS ENGAGED IN
CONSTRUCTION WORK.
i. Workmen Compensation Act 1923
The Act provides for compensation in case of injury by
accident arising out of and during employment.
ii. Payment of Gratuity Act 1972

Gratuity is payable to an employee under the Act on
satisfaction of certain conditions on separation if an
employee has completed 5 years’ service or more or on
death at the rate of 15 days wages for every completed
year of service. The Act is applicable to all
establishments employing 10 or more employees.
iii. Employees PF and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952
The Act provides for monthly contributions by the
Contractor and his workers @ 10% or 8.33%. The
benefits payable under the Act are:
a) Pension or family pension on retirement or death as the
case may be.
b) Deposit linked insurance on the death in harness of the
worker.
c) Payment of PF accumulation on retirement/death etc.
iv. Maternity Benefit Act 1951
The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to
women employees in case of confinement or miscarriage
etc.
74 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
v. Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act
1970
The Act provides for certain welfare measures to be
provided by the contractor to contract labour and in case
the contractor fails to provide, the same are required to
be provided by the Principal Employer by Law. The
principal employer is required to take Certificate of
Registration and the Contractor is required to take a
License from the designated Officer. The Act is
applicable to the establishments or contractor of
principle employer if they employ 20 or more contract
labours.
vi. Minimum Wages Act 1948
An employer is supposed to pay not less than the
Minimum Wages fixed by appropriate Government as
per provisions of the act if the employment is a
scheduled employment. Construction of Buildings,
Roads, and Runways are scheduled employments.
vii. Payment of Wages Act 1936
It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be paid,
when it will be paid and what deductions can be made
from the wages of the workers.
viii. Equal Remuneration Act 1979
The Act provides for payment of equal wages for work of
equal nature to Male and Female workers and not for
making discrimination against Female employees in the
matters of transfers, training and promotions etc.
ix. Payment of Bonus Act 1965
The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 20
or more workmen. The Act provides for payment of
annual bonus subject to a minimum of 8.33% of wages
and maximum of 20% of wages to employees drawing
Rs.3, 500/- per month. or less. The bonus to be paid to
employees getting Rs.2, 500/- per month or above
75 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
uptoRs. 3,500/- per month shall be worked out by taking
wages as Rs. 2,500/- per month only. The Act does not
apply to certain establishments. The newly set up
establishments are exempted for five years in certain
circumstances. Some of the State Governments have
reduced the employment size from 20 to 10 for the
purpose of applicability of the Act.
x. Industrial Disputes Act 1947
The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for
resolution of industrial disputes, in what situations a
strike or lock-out becomes illegal and what are the
requirements for laying off or retrenching the
employees or closing down the establishment.
xi. Industrial Employment (standing orders) Act 1946

It is applicable to all establishments employing 100 or
more workmen (employment size reduced by some of
the States and Central Government to 50). The Act
provides for laying down rules governing the conditions
of employment by the employer on matters provided in
the Act and get the same certified by the designated
Authority.
xii. Trade Unions Act 1928
The Act lays down the procedure for registration of
trade unions of workmen and employers. The trade
unions registered under the Act have been given certain
immunities from civil and criminal liabilities.
xiii. Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act 1986
The Act prohibits employment of children below 14
years of age in certain occupations and processes and
provides for regulation of employment of children in all
other occupations and processes. Employment of child
labour is prohibited in Building and Construction
Industry.
76 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
xiv. Inter-State Migrant Workmen’s (Regulation of
Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 1979
The Act is applicable to an establishment which
employees 5 or more inter-state migrant workmen
through an intermediary (who has recruited workmen
in one state for employment in the establishment
situated in another state).The inter-state migrant
workmen, in an establishment to which this Act becomes
applicable, are required to be provided certain facilities
such as housing, medical aid, traveling expenses from
home upto the establishment and back, etc.
xv. The Building and other Construction Workers

(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of
Service) Act 1996 and the Cess Act 1996
All the establishments who carry on any building or
other construction work and employs 10 or more
workers are covered under this Act. All such
establishments are required to pay cess at rate as may
be notified by the Government. The Contractor
(employer of the establishment) is required to provide
safety measures at the Building or Construction work
and other welfare measures, such as Canteens, First-aid
facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodation for
Workers near the workplace etc. The employer to whom
the Act applies has to obtain a registration certificate
from the Registering Officer appointed by the
Government.
xvi. The Factories Act 1948
The Act lays down the procedure for approval of plans
before setting up a factory, health and safety provisions,
welfare provisions, working hours, annual earned leave
and rendering information regarding accidents or
dangerous occurrences to designated authorities. It is
77 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
applicable to premises employing 10 persons or more
with aid of power or 20 or more persons without the aid
of power engaged in manufacturing process.
6 Staff and 6.13 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.13 - Objection to Contractor's
Labour
Employees
If the proficiency in the English Language and capabilities
required of the Contractor's Key Staffis found not to be
acceptable, the Engineer may require the employee replaced by
one acceptable to the Engineer.
6 Staff and 6.15 Add Sub-Clause 6.14
Labour
Measures against Insect and Pest Nuisance
The Contractor shall always take the necessary precautions to
protect all staff and labour employed on the site from insect
nuisance, rats and other pests and reduce the dangers to health
and the general nuisance occasioned by the same. The
Contractor shall provide his staff and labour with suitable
prophylactics for the prevention of malaria and take steps to
prevent the formation of stagnant pools of water. He shall
comply with all the regulations of the local health authorities in
these respects and shall in particular arrange to spray
thoroughly with approved insecticide all buildings erected on
the Site. Such treatment shall be carried out at least once a year
or as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall warn his
staff and labour of the dangers of Bilharzias and wild animals.
6 Staff and 6.15 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.15 –
Labour
Supply of Water and Other requirements
The Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, having
regard to local conditions, provide on the Site an adequate
supply of drinking and other water for the use of his staff and
labour.
The Contractor shall not give, barter, or otherwise dispose of, to
any person, any arms or ammunition of any kind, or allow
Contractor's Personnel to do so.
Labour
78 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Festivals and Religious Customs
The Contractor shall respect the Country's recognized festivals,
days of rest and religious or other customs. The Contractor shall
in all dealings with his staff and labour have due regard to all
recognized festivals, days of rest and religious or other customs.
6 Staff and 6.17 Add a new 6.17
Labour
Prohibition of Child Labour
The Contractor shall not employ any child to perform any work
6 Staff and 6.18 Add a new Sub-Clause6.18
Labour
Employment Records of Workers
The Contractor shall keep complete and accurate records of the
employment of labour at the Site. The records shall include the
names, ages, genders, hours worked, and wages paid to all
workers. These records shall be summarized on a monthly basis
and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer during
normal working hours. These records shall be included in the
details to be submitted by the Contractor under Sub-Clause 6.10
[Records of Contractor’s Personnel and Equipment].
6 Staff and 6.19 Add a new Sub-Clause 6.19 :

Labour
The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report sets limits
for the impact of the Contractor’s activities and the Contractor’s
Environmental Plan must ensure that the construction activities
shall not exceed any of these limits. (A copy of the EIA Report
can be obtained from the Employer).
The EIA Report recommends specific mitigation measures. The

Contractor shall implement these measures where applicable.
The Employer will be undertaking Environmental Monitoring

and Audits during construction to measure the environmental
impacts. Should the impact measurements exceed the respective
limits detailed in the EIA Report, the Contractor shall be
required to review and to implement effective measures as
79 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
required to ensure that the impact of the construction works will
not exceed the respective limits set forth in the EIA report.
7 Plant, Plant, Materials and Workmanship
Materials
and
Workmansh
ip
7.4 Testing 7.4 Clause 7.4 -
Para 5 sub para (b) deleted
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Sub-Clause 7.4.1 as under:
Laboratory for Testing
The Contractor shall, for the purpose of testing the material,
establish a field Laboratory of adequate floor area as approved
by the Engineer or his representative at the Contractor’s cost.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment’s as per list attached
elsewhere in this document.
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Sub-Clause 7.4.2 as under: Office Laboratory Testing
The material, for which tests cannot be carried out at the field
laboratory, shall be tested at the laboratory approved by the
Engineer or his representative and in presence of the Engineer
7.4 Testing 7.4 Add Clause 7.4.3 with:
The expense of conducting all Tests and expenses towards travel
and accommodation for Employer or the Engineer attending the
test for the purpose of clause 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5 shall be borne by
the Contractor.
7 Plant, 7.9 Add a new Sub-Clause 7.9 as under: Taxation
Materials
The Contractor and his staff shall pay all taxes, duties, levies,
and
Workmansh outgoings etc. (present as well as future) of the Government of
ip
India and the Government of the State of Maharashtra or other
competent authorities as per the laws for the time being in force
and applicable in India or in the said State in relation to the work.
Sub-Clause 7.9.1
Add
Deduction of Income Tax and other taxes, if any, shall be made
from each certificate of payment as per the relevant provision of
80 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
the Income Tax Act or the rules framed there under and as per
the prevailing Tax laws
Sub-Clause 7.9.2
Add
Foreign Taxation
The Tendered Amount by the Contractor shall include all the
duties and other charges (present as well as future) imposed
outside the Employer’s country on the production, manufacture,
sale and transport of the Constructional Plant, Materials and
Supplies to be used on or furnished under the Contract and on
the service performed under the Contract. It shall be the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor to bear the same.
Sub-Clause 7.9.3
Add
Local Taxation
The Bid is deemed to include all excise duties, custom duties,
import duties, sale tax, Royalties, toll charges and other local
direct/indirect taxes etc. that may be levied according to the
laws and regulations for the time being in force, on the
construction plants materials and supplies (both permanent,
temporary and consumable) acquired for the purpose of the
contract and on the services performed under the contract.
Nothing in the contract shall relieve the Contractor from his
responsibilities to pay any tax that may be levied in the
Employer’s country on profits made by him in respect of the
contract.
Sub-Clause 7.9.4
Add
Income Tax on Staff
The Contractor’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay
personnel income taxes in the Employer’s country in respect of
such of their salaries and wages as are chargeable under the
81 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
laws and regulations in force and the Contractor shall perform
such duties in regard to such laws and regulations.
Sub-Clause 7.9.5
Add
Sales Tax
The Bid shall be deemed to be inclusive of the sales tax on all the
materials that he will have to purchase for performance of this
Contact.
a) The Bid shall also be inclusive of the tax leviable in respect
of works contract under the provision of Maharashtra
Sales Tax on transfer of property in goods involved in the
deduction of Works Contract Act 1985.
b) If the Contractor is a Sales Tax Assesse, he should produce
a valid Sales Tax Clearance Certificate before the payment
of the final bill otherwise the final payment to the
Contractor will be withheld. If the Contractor is not liable
to Sales Tax Assessment, a certificate to this effect from the
competent Sales Tax Authorities shall be produced before
the final payment to the Contractor.
8 Commencem Commencement, Delays and Suspension
ent, Delays
and
Suspension
8.1 Commencem 8.1 Replace Sub-Clause 8.1 with the following:
ent of
The Contractor shall commence the Works on the date specified
Works
in the Form FT – 1 of Volume 1. Thereafter the Contractor shall
proceed with due diligence, without delay, and in accordance
with the programme or any revised or modified programme of
the Works.
The Contractor shall not commence the construction,
manufacture or installation of the Works or of any part of the
Works unless and until the Engineer has endorsed the relevant
Construction Reference Drawings in accordance with the
82 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
8.2 Time for 8.2 Sub-Clause 8.2 Time for Completion

Completion
Add
The Contractor shall complete the sections of the works and

each section (with in the Mile – Stone given in Sub-Clause 8.7
below) so as to allow the use by the Traffic within the Time for
completion.
8.3 Programme 8.3 Add to Sub-Clause 8.3 with the following:
8.3.1Design Submission Programme
Design Submission Programme

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, the Design
Submission Programme and updated versions thereof in the
form and content and at the times prescribed in the Employer's
Requirements – Design, including the dates on which major
decisions should be made.
In the second and subsequent submissions of the Design
Submission Programme, the Contractor shall not, without the
prior written consent of the Engineer:
a.) Revise the description or content of any design package (as
referred to in the Employer’s Requirements -Design )
identified in the initial version of Design Submission
Programme;
b.) Reduce the periods provided for review by the
Employer/Engineer of any submission of Design Data as set
out in the initial version of the Design Submission
Programme;
c.) Revise the sequence of submission of Design Data shown in
revise the sequence of submissions of Design Data shown in

83 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Any amendment of the Design Submission Programme in breach
of the above requirements shall have no effect whatsoever
under the Contract.
Monthly Payment Curves
Within 30 days of the date of consent of works programme, the
Contractor shall, submit to the Engineer Monthly Payment
Curves. The Monthly Payment Curves shall be revised from time
to time as the Works Programme will be revised in accordance
with the above provision.
8.3.2 Three Month Rolling Programme
Three Month Rolling Programme

Within 45 days of the Commencement Date, & thereafter at the
end of each calendar month, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer his Three Month Rolling Programme for each agreed
major section of Works in the Contract, in the form and detail
prescribed in Part 2 - Employer's Requirements setting out the
work to be carried out during the following three months.
8.4 Extension of 8.4 Replace Sub-Clause 8.4 with the following:
Time for
Completion 8.4.1 Extension of Time
The Contractor may apply for an extension of the Time for

Completion if the Work is or will be delayed either before or
after the Time for Completion by any of the following causes:
a. “Force Majeure” referred to in Clause 19.0 (GCC)

b. Instruction of the Engineer to suspend the Works
and the Contractor not being in default as to
reasons of suspension.
c. Acts or omissions of other Designated Contractors
in executing work not forming part of this
Contract and on whose performance, the
performance of the Contractor necessarily
depends.
d. Any act of prevention or Breach of the Contract by
the Employer and not mentioned in this Clause
84 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
e. Any order of Court restraining the performance of
the Contract in full or in any part thereof and the
Contractor not being in default as to reason of
such order of court.
f. Any other event or occurrence which, according to
the Employer is not due to the Contractor’s
failure or fault and is beyond his control without
the Employer being responsible for the same.
8.4.2 Extension of Time not permissible
However, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of

time where the instructions or acts of the Employer or the
Engineer are necessitated by or intended to cure any default of
or breach of Contract by the Contractor or where any delay is
due to
a) the failure of sub-contractor, to commence or to carry out

work in due time,
b) non-availability, or shortage of Contractor’s equipment,
labour, utility services, Plant and Materials,
c) inclement weather conditions, other than once in 50 year
cycle, and
d) the Contractor not fulfilling his obligations under Sub-
Clause 4.6.
If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to an extension

of time for Completion, he shall give notice to the Engineer of
such intention as soon as possible and in any event within 28
days of the start of the event giving rise to the delay and full and
final supporting details of his application within 21 days of the
last day of delay, together with any notice required by the
Contract and relevant to such Clause. If the cause of delay
continued for a period exceeding 7 days, the Contractor shall
submit interim details at intervals of not more than 28 days
(from the first day of such delays).
85 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
The Engineer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 to

agree or determine either prospectively or retrospectively such
extension of the Time for Completion as may be due. The
Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly.
8.4.3 Extension of time for completion for other reasons

Whether or not the Contractor fails to achieve any Milestone by
reason of any delay shall not by itself be material to the
Contractor's entitlement to an extension of time.
Any extension to a Key Date shall not by itself entitle the
Contractor to an extension to any other Key Date and the Time
for Completion.
8.4.4 Extension of time for delays due to Contractor

If the delay in the completion of the whole Works or a portion of
the Works, for which an earlier completion period is stipulated,
is due to the Contractor’s failure or fault, and the Engineer is of
the view that the remaining Works or the portions of Works can
be completed by the Contractor in a reasonable and acceptable
short time, then, the Engineer may allow the Contractor
extension or further extension of time at its discretion with or
without penalty for the delay in achieving the Key Date, for
completion, as he may decide.
8.5 Delay 8.5 Please replace the last sentence by “sub paragraph (f) of PCC
caused by
Sub-Clause 8.4.1
Authorities
8.7 Delay 8.7 Sub-Clause 8.7 Delay damages for the Works
Damages As per Appendix to tender.
8.9 Consequenc 8.9 Add to Sub-Clause 8.9:
es of The Contractor shall not be entitled to extra cost (if any),
Suspension incurred by him, during the period of suspension of Work, if such
suspension is
a) provided for in the Contract, or
b) necessary for proper execution of Works or by reasons
of weather condition or by some default on the part of
the Contractor, or
c) necessary for the safety of Works or any part thereof or
86 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
d) necessary for the safety of adjoining public or other
property or safety of the public or workmen or those
who have to be at the site or
e) to ensure safety and to avoid disruption of traffic and
utilities, as also to permit fast repairs and restoration of
any damaged utilities.
The following are the details of compensation for various
periods of suspension.
Sl. Suspensi Extensi Compen Rema
No. on on of sation rks
Period Time for the
suspensi
on
period
1. Upto 14 NO NO Engin
days eer
may
give
exten
sion
of
time
in
excep
tional
circu
mstan
ces.
2. 15 - 30 YES NO Exten
days sion
of
time
as
consi
dered
prope
r by
the
Engin
eer
3. Above 30 YES -As per Comp
days Daily ensati
upto 90 rate of on as
days wages assess
for idle ed by
labour / the
employe Engin
es. eer on
-70% of submi
the rate ssion
87 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for hire of
charges docu
for idle menta
plant ry
and proof
machine by the
ry Contr
(excludi actor
ng cost to the
of fuel Engin
and eer’s
lubricant satisfa
s) ction
-15% and is
above all final.
these
items to
cover
overhea
d costs.
4. Above 90 NO NO Contract
days or may
ask for
closure of
the
Contract,
or
deletion
from the
Contract
of that
part of
works
which
has been
suspende
d.
10 Employer’s Employer’s Taking Over
Taking Over
10.2 Taking over 10.2 Add new Sub-Clause
of Parts of Sub-Clause 10.2 Taking over of Parts of the Works:
the Works Add as Second Para
Notwithstanding anything contained in the provisions of other
clauses of the contract, Parts of the Works of the Sections when
substantially completed shall be handed over by the Contractor
88 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
for use of the Employer without any cost to the Employer arising
out wear and tear, before carrying out “Tests after completion”
10.3 Interference 10.3 Sub-Clause 10.3 Interference with Tests on Completion:
with Tests
10.3 para 3 sub para (b) – deleted
on
Completion
10.3 Interference 10.3 Add Sub-Clause 10.3.1 as under: Prevention from Testing
with Tests
If the Contractor is prevented from carrying out the tests on
on
Completion completion by a cause for which the Employer or the Engineer
or his representative or other Contractors employed by the
Employer are responsible, the Employer shall be deemed to
have taken over the works on the date when the tests on
completion would have been completed. But for such
prevention, the Engineer or his representative shall issue a
Taking over Certificate accordingly, provided always that the
works shall not be deemed to have been taken over if they are
not substantially completed in accordance with the contract.
If the works are taken over under this Sub-Clause the contractor
shall nevertheless carry out the tests on completion during the
Defects Liability period. The Engineer or his representative shall
require the tests to be carried out by giving 14 days- notice.
Any additional costs to which the Contractor may be put, in
making the tests on completion during the Defects Liability
Period shall be added to contract price.
11 Defects Defects Liability
Liability
11 Defects 11.1 Add a Sub-Clause 11.1.1
Liability
Visit of Contractor during Defect Notification Period
The Contractor shall carry out inspection once in every 3 months
during the first year after completion of the work and carry
minimum 2 inspections per year for the remaining years of
Defect Liability Period. The inspection shall be in the company
of the representative of Engineer and representative of
Employer. The defects noticed during the inspections shall be
recorded and signed by the Contractor and representative of
Engineer and representative of Employer. The Contractor shall
89 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
rectify the defects, if any, within 15 days or such period as may
be notified by the Engineer or his representative. The defect
rectification period shall be 24 months.
11.2 Emergency 11.12 Add a new Sub-Clause 11.12:
defect
Emergency defect rectification
rectification
If any defect or damage is one requiring immediate attention
from safety, environmental or operational viewpoint, the
Engineer has the authority to proceed with rectification at the
cost of the contractor in any manner suitable and deduct such
sums from the Contract Price.
12 Test after Test after Completion
Completion
12.1 Procedure 12.1 Procedure for Tests after Completion:
for Test
12.1 Delete 12.1 (a)
After
Completion Add at the end of 12.1:
If the Contractor fails to carry out the Tests after Completion the
Employer may (at his option): Carryout the Tests himself or by
others, in a reasonable manner and at the Contractors Cost but
the Contractor shall have no responsibility for this Tests; and the
Contractor shall subject to Sub-Clause 2.5: Employer’s Claims,
pay to the Employer the costs reasonably incurred by the
Employer in carrying out the Tests.
12.4 Failure to 12.4 12.4 Failure to Pass Tests after Completion
pass Tests
Add at the end of 12.4:
after
Completion If the Contractor fails to carry out the adjustments or
modifications to pass a Test after Completion to the Works or
such Section, the Employer may (at his option):
Carryout the adjustments or modifications himself or through
some other agency, in a reasonable manner and at the
Contractors Cost but the Contractor shall have no responsibility
for this adjustments or modifications and the Contractor shall
subject to Sub-Clause 2.5 (Employer’s Claims) pay to the
Employer the costs reasonably incurred by the Employer in
carrying out the adjustments or modifications.
90 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
13 Variations Variations and Adjustment
and
Adjustment
13.1 Right to vary 13.1 Add to Sub-Clause 13.1 :
No Variation shall in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract.
The Contractor shall not make any alteration and/or
modification of the Works, unless and until the Engineer
instructs or gives consent to a Variation. If the Construction
and/or Manufacture Documents or Works are not in accordance
with the Contract, the rectification shall not constitute a
Variation.
13.3 Variation 13.3 Replace Sub-Clause 13.3 with the following:
Procedure
“Employer’s Variation” means a change in the Employer's
Requirements which makes necessary alteration or
modification of the Design, quality or scope of Works as
described by or referred to in the Employer's Requirements.
Changes to any sequence, method or timing of manufacture,
testing and Commissioning including Integrated Testing and
Commissioning and changes to any part of the Site or access
thereto will not constitute Employer's Variation.
An Employer's Variation shall be requested and implemented in

accordance with and subject to the following provisions:
a.) Within 14 days (or such other period as the Employer
/Engineer may allow) of the Employer /Engineer informing
the Contractor in writing of the intention to request an
Employer’s Variation, the Contractor shall notify the
Employer/Engineer in writing whether in his opinion the
Employer's Variation would, if ordered:
i. give rise to any entitlement to an extension of time; or
ii. affect the achievement of any Milestone; or
iii. give rise to any entitlement to additional payment; or
iv. affect the warranties of the Contractor set out in Clause
4.2
91 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
and shall submit his proposals as to the terms upon which he
would agree to implement the Employer's Variation. The
Contractor shall furnish sufficient information in terms of
rates/prices of the equipment/components manufactured by
the Contractor or sourced from the Vendors/Sub-contractors
such as: estimated man-hours, man-hours rates for
manufactured items, design costs, basic rate of materials, sub-
assemblies, taxes, duties, overheads & profits and inflation rate,
so as to establish the reasonableness of the variation price.
b.) any agreement between the Employer/Engineer and the

Contractor as to the terms upon which an Employer's
Variation may be implemented shall have no contractual or
other legal effect, until it is in writing and is signed by b.) the
Contractor and the Employer/Engineer. The Employer
/Engineer before signing such agreement shall take prior
approval of the Employer. The terms of this agreement will
be binding upon the Contractor and the Employer. This
agreement shall determine the amount which should be
added to or deducted from the relevant Cost Centre Amount
and/or the revisions (if any) which should be made to the
Milestone Payment Schedules as a result of the Variation.
In the event of the Employer/Engineer and the Contractor

failing to reach agreement on the revisions to be made to the
Cost Centre Amounts, the Employer/Engineer shall, with the
approval of the Employer, determine the amount which
should be added or deducted from the relevant Cost Centre
amount which shall be binding on the Contractor. In case the
Contractor supplies part/ incomplete information or refuses
to supply the required information, the Employer shall
determine the cost of Variation based on the information
available to him from any sources which in his judgment can
be used to determine the case. The Contractor will proceed
92 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
with the Work on this basis but may submit his Claim if
necessary, in accordance with Clause 20.
In assessing work covered by any sub-contract, the
Employer/Engineer will have, where he deems necessary,
access to the original sub-contract conditions, rates, prices
and details of the variation claimed, to assist in evaluating
any Variations.
c.) if the Employer/Engineer withdraws the request for an
Employer's Variation, the Contractor shall have no claim of
any kind whatsoever arising out of or in connection with any
of the proposals made or any failure to reach agreement. In
case the Employer’s Variation involves omission of part of
the Works, the agreement shall address the issue of
reduction in the Contract Price.
13.7 Taxes and 13.7 Add to Sub-Clause 13.7 :

Duties
Taxes and Duties
13.7.1
The Contract Price, subject to any adjustment thereto in
accordance with the Contract shall be inclusive of all taxes,
duties, royalties, cess, etc. including Value Added Tax
(VAT)/GST, paid under Maharashtra VAT Act 2002 where work
is done in Maharashtra and Value added tax(VAT) paid under
other state Governments VAT act work is done in that state.
13.7.2
Taxes and duties paid by the sub-vendors shall not be paid
separately and therefore are to be included in the price.
13.7.3
Nothing extra shall be payable over the quoted rates,
notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in any law for the
time being in force, save and except what is specifically provided
in the GCC.
13.7.4
93 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
In the event of exemption of custom duties, excise duties,
CST/VAT/GST or any other cess/levy being granted by the
Government in respect of the Works, the benefit of the same
shall be passed on to the Employer. The Contractor shall
therefore maintain meticulous records of all taxes and duties
paid and provide the same as and when required by the
Employer, so that the Employer is able to avail the
reimbursement for which the Employer may issue a procedure
order separately. Alternately, the Employer may direct the
Contractor to get the reimbursement based on exemption
certificate/ government’s order and it shall be obligatory on part
of the Contractor to get the reimbursement from the statutory
authorities and pass on the benefit to the Employer.
13.7.6
In case of Contractor’s failure in availing the exemption as
stipulated above, the recovery of equivalent amount will be
made from Contractor’s bills.
The contract price shall be adjusted to take into account of any
increase or decrease in cost resulting from a change in the Laws
of the Country/ State/ Urban Local Body (including the
introduction of new Laws and the repeal or modification of
existing laws) or in the judicial or official government
interpretation of such Laws, made after the Base Date (28 days
prior to Bid Due Date), which affect the contractor in the
performance of obligations under the Contract. This increase or
decrease in cost resulting from a change in the legislation shall
be evaluated as follows –
13.7.1. If as a result of change in Law, the Contractor suffers any
additional costs in the execution of the works or in relation to
the performance of its other obligations under this Agreement,
the Contractor shall notify the Authority of such additional cost
due to Change in Law.
13.7.2 If a result of Change in Law, the Contractor benefits from
any reduction in costs for the execution of this Agreement or in
94 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, either Party
shall notify the other Party of such reduction in cost due to
Change in Law.
12.7.3 The Authority’s Engineer shall on receipt of the notice
from the Contractor or the Authority determine any addition or
reduction to the Contract Price, as the case may be, due to the
Change in Law.
13.8 Price 13.8 Add to Sub-Clause 13.8:

Variation
13.8 Price Variation Adjustment
Adjustment
The rates and price as per Pricing document shall be applicable
till the completion of the Work and will be varied only to the
extent of permissible price variation under this Clause.
However, this adjustment shall be to the extent that full
compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the Contractor is not
covered by the Price variation formula, the rates and price in the
Pricing Document shall be deemed to include amounts to cover
the contingency of such rise or fall of costs.
Price Variation Adjustment Formula
Payment as per the Contract shall be subject to adjustment in
accordance with the following Price Variation formula, and
other terms given herein, to provide for variation in the market
rates of inputs like labour, materials and fuel / energy during the
currency of the Contract:
Price Adjustment:
Contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates
and prices of labour materials, fuels and lubricants in
accordance with the following principles and procedures and as
per formula given hereunder.
Formula for Price variationAdjustment :

Pn = a + b Ln + cEn + d Mn + e Sn + f Tn
Lo EoMo So To
95 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Pn= is the adjustment multiplier to be applied to the current
interim payment certificate (IPC) for increase/decrease in the
cost of the work done during the month.
a = Fixed co-efficient, representing non-adjustable portion in

IPC.
In this case ‘a’ = 15% (0.15)
b = Percentage of Labour components of the work is 25% (0.25)
LO =Consumer Price Index for industrial workers for Mumbai as
of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
Ln = Consumer Price Index for industrial workers for Mumbai as
available on the 1st day of the month preceding the month under
c = percentage of cement component of the work is 15% (0.15)
Eo = Wholesale price index for cement (cement lime and plaster)

of submission of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt.
of India.
Wholesale price index for cement (cement lime and plaster) for
Mumbai as available on the date of 28 days prior to the date of
submission of tender as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of
India.
En = wholesale price index for cement (cement, lime and plaster)

the month under consideration as published by Economic
Advisor Govt. of India.
wholesale price index for cement (cement, lime and plaster) for
Mumbai as available on the 1st day of the month preceding the
96 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
month under consideration as published by Economic Advisor
Govt. of India.
d = percentage of fuel and lubricant component of the work is
10% (0.10)
Mo = wholesale price index of Fuel and Power for Mumbai as

Mn= wholesale price index of Fuel and Power for Mumbai as on

consideration, as published by Economic Advisor, Govt. of India.
e = percentage of steel component of the work is 25% (0.25)
So = whole sale price index of mildsteel long for Mumbai as

Sn = whole sale price index of mild steel long for Mumbai as on

f = percentage of plant & machinery component of the work is

10% (0.10)
To =whole sale price index of construction machinery and parts

of submission of tender, as published in RBI Bulletin, Govt. of
India.
Tn= whole sale price index for construction machinery and parts
97 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
month under consideration as published in RBI Bulletin, Govt.
of India.
Period of Work under consideration will mean as under:
i.In the case of first Interim Payment the period from the
Commencement Date to the date of measurement of the first
Interim Payment.
ii.In the case of second and subsequent Interim Payment and Final
Payment, the Period from the date of measurement for previous
payment to the date of measurement of that Payment.
Procedure in case of Delay in Availability of Final RBI
Indices
Where the final Price Indices are not available in the Reserve
Bank of India Bulletins, while making payment towards Interim
Payments payment towards Price Variation will be made on
provisional basis based on the indices available, to be adjusted
in subsequent Payment as and when the final Indices figures
become available.
Limit of Adjustment on Account of Price Variation
Adjustment on account of Price Variations may be positive (in
which case extra amount shall be paid to the Contractor), or
negative (in which case the amount of Price Variation shall be
recovered from the Contractor). Adjustment on account of Price
Variation shall be calculated separately, for each period,
between two successive dates of measurements for Payments
and paid along with each Payment.
The maximum permissible price variations Adjustment
are limited to 30%.
Price Variation Adjustment during Extended Period of
Completion
The price adjustment as worked out above i.e. either increase or
decrease will be applicable up to the stipulated date of
completion of the work including the extended period of
98 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
completion where such extension has been granted under Sub-
Clause 8.4.1. However, where extension has been granted under
Sub-Clause 8.4.3, price adjustment will be due as follows:
In case the indices increase above the indices applicable to a

payment made on the last date of original completion period or
the extended period under Sub-Clauses 8.4., the price
adjustment for the period of extension under Sub-Clause 8.4.3
will be limited to the amount payable as per the indices
applicable to a Payment made on the last date of the original
completion period or the extended period under Sub-Clauses
8.4.1 as the case may be.
In case the indices fall below the indices applicable to a payment
made on the last date of the original or extended period of
completion, then the lower indices will be adopted for Price
Adjustment for the period of extension under Clause 8.4.3.
Price Variations Adjustment for Extra/Varied Item

Normally, no price variation clause shall be applicable to any
extra item/new rates not originally included in the accepted
Pricing Document and for which the rates are fixed separately
under Clause 12. It shall, however, be open to the
Employer/Engineer to accept Price Variation clause in such
cases where the rates are not based on actuals and the work is
likely to continue for more than one year.
14. Contract Contract Price and Payment

Price and
Payment
14.2 Advance 14.2 Replace Sub-Clause 14.2 with the following:
Payment
Add new Sub-Clauses:
14.2.1 Mobilisation Advance
Mobilisation Advance Payment shall be paid in Indian Rupees up
to 10% of the Contract Price in equal two instalments. The first
instalment shall be paid on Submission of BG and second shall
99 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
be paid after Engineer/ Employer has confirmed satisfactory
utilisation of the first advance payments and submission of BG.
Satisfactory utilisation means establishment of casting yard,
batching plant, mobilisation of important machineries,
construction of jetty, mobilisation and carrying out of works at
multiple fronts wherever necessary etc.
The Mobilisation Advance shall carry on interest at 13% and
shall be paid within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s
written request by the Employer and submission of the
Performance Guarantee and Bank Guarantees for 110% of
advance Payment.
14.2.2 Advance against Procurement of TBM
This advance is payable against procurement of TBM, provided
the same have reached the site, meant specifically for the works,
firm purchase order has been placed and the invoices received.
The TBM shall be valued by the Employer /the Engineer at 80%
of purchase price, and it should be new.
The total advance for TBM shall be limited to 10% of the
Contract Price and will be with interest @ 13% in Indian Rupees
against submission of Bank Guarantees for the like amount as
per format given in Schedule 8 to PCC from an Indian Schedule
bank or from a schedule Foreign Bank as defined in Section 2(e)
of RBI Act 1934 read with Second Schedule.
The Advance against TBM will be paid by the Employer within
30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s written request with
invoices / Letter of credit (in case of imported) and submission
of Bank Guarantees for Advance Payment.
14.2.3 Recovery of Advances
a) The recovery of the Mobilization and TBM Advances
shall each be made in equal instalments commencing
from when 20% of Contract Sum is paid and completed
before 85% of Work is paid or the original period of
completion whichever is earlier.
100 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
b) Bank Guarantee shall be submitted as per Schedule 8 of
PCC. Following 50% recovery by the Employer, the
Contractor may be permitted to submit a corresponding
Bank Guarantee at the discretion of the Employer.
14.2.4 Advances to be Used only for This Work.

The advances shall be used by the Contractor strictly for the
purpose of the Contract, and for the purpose for which they are
paid. Under no circumstances, shall the advances be diverted for
other purposes. Any such diversion shall be construed as a
breach of the Contract and the Contractor shall be asked to
return the advance at once. The Contractor shall return the
advance in one go without demur.
The Employer reserves the right for any other remedy
prescribed for breach of Contract in this regard.
The Contractor, if required by the Employer shall provide the
details of Mobilization advance expended or to be expended.
14.3 Application 14.3 Add to Sub-Clause 14.3:
for Interim
The Contractor shall not submit more than one request for
Payment
Certificates interim payment per month subject to the Contractor’s Monthly
Statement meeting the minimum value of 2% of Contract Price
or otherwise agreed by Employer / Engineer.
Add at end of Sub-Clause 14.3
The percentage of retention in each interim payment shall be
ten percent (10%) starting from the first IPC, until the limit of
Retention Money equal to five percent (5%) of the Contract
Price is reached.
14.5 Plant & 14.5 14.5 Plant & Machinery Intended for Works
Machinery
Delete Sub-Clause 14.5
Intended for
Works
14.7 Payment 14.7 Replace Sub-Clause 14.7 (b) with the following:
(b)
a) After scrutiny and certification by the Engineer within
28 days of submission of statement and supporting
101 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
documents, the payment of the certified interim amount
shall be made by the Employer within 21 days from the
date of issue of Interim Payment Certificate by the
Engineer.
b) All payments to the Contractor shall be made by
RTGS/NEFT. The Contractor is entitled to a simple
interest at 8% PA for any sum paid after 56 days from
the date of certification. This shall not apply to the final
payment.
14.9 Payment of 14.9 Replace Sub-Clause 14.9 with the following:
Retention
Retention money is 5% of the Contract Sum which will be
Money
recovered as stated in FT – 1, Volume 1 and retained by the
Employer.
The Retention monies shall be held by the Employer without
obligation to invest them or account for interest thereon or to
place them in a designated account. No interest of whatsoever
nature and type will be paid to the Contractor by the Employer
in respect of Retention monies.
The Retention monies shall become due to the Contractor
within 28 days of issuing the Performance Certificate.
14.15 Currencies 14.15 Replace Sub-Clause 14.15 with the following:
of Payment
All payments and deduction made by the Employer pursuant to
the terms of the Contract shall be in Indian Rupees (INR).
Tax 14.18 Add a new Sub-Clause14.18:
Deduction at
Tax Deduction at Source
Source
Tax deductions will be made at source as per statutory
requirement from every payment made to the Contractor at
rates notified from time to time.
Recovery of 14.20 Add a new Sub-Clause 14.20:
money due
Recovery of money due to the Employer
to the
Employer All damages (including, without limitation, liquidated
damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts, or sums for which
the Contractor is liable to the Employer under any provision of
the Contract may be deducted by the Employer from monies
102 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
due to the Contractor under the Contract including, without
limitation, and the Employer shall have the power to recover
any balance not so deducted from monies due to the Contractor
under any other contract between the Employer and the
Contractor.
15 Termination Termination by Employer
by Employer
15.2 Termination 15.2 Sub paragraph (c) of Sub-Clause 15.2 is replaced with the
by Employer
following:
(C) Without reasonable excuse fails to proceed with the
Works in accordance with Clause 8 [Commencement, Delays
and Suspension] and in the case of delay, incurs a delay in the
completion of the works and such delay is not remedied by the
contractor within 30 days from receipt by the Contractor of a
notice from the Employer of such delay. For purposes of this
Sub-Clause 15.2, the term “delay” shall mean a slippage of 10%
of the physical progress from the approved works programme,
Add a New Sub-Clause 15.2.2
On termination of Contract due to Contractor’s default, the
Employer shall be entitled to
a. forfeit the whole or such portion of the Performance
Guarantee amount as he may consider fit.
17 Risk and Risk and Responsibility
Responsibili
ty
Care of the
All operations necessary for the execution and completion of the
Works
works and the remedying of any defects therein shall, so far as
compliance with the requirements of the contract permits, be
carried on so asnot to interfere unnecessarily or improperly
with:
a) The convenience of the public, or
b) The access to use, and occupation of public or private
roads or railway and any other right of way and
footpaths to or of properties whether in the possession
103 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
of the Employer or of any other person or any other
departments.
The contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Employer
in respect of all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and
expenses whatsoever arising out of, or in relation to, any such
matters insofar as the Contractor is responsible therefore.
In case any operation connected with traffic necessitates
diversion, obstruction or closure of any road, existing road,
railway or any other right of way, the approval of the Engineer
or his representative and the concerned authorities shall be
obtained well in advance by the Contractor.
loads of heavy constructional plant and equipment, materials of
pre-constructed units or part of units of work over roads,
highways, Flyovers on which such oversized and over-weight
items are not normally allowed to be moved, the Contractor shall
obtain prior permission from the relevant authorities. Payments
for complying with the requirements, if any, for protection of or
strengthening of the roads, highway or Flyovers shall be made
by the Contractor and such expenses shall be deemed to be
included in his bid price.
17.5 Intellectual 17.5 Sub-Clause 17.5 Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights
and
Sub-Clause 17.5 is deleted in it’s entirely and replaced with the
Industrial
Property following;
Rights
17.5.1 Infringement
a. The Contractor agrees to defend or settle at its own
expense all suits for infringement of any patent,
copyright, trademark or other form of intellectual
property right in any country of the works, for the use
and operation of the Works as supplied by Contractor
and for any component part thereof or material or
equipment used therein (or the manufacture of any
104 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
material or the normal use thereof) provided by the
Contractor or on its behalf pursuant to this Contract
and will hold the Employer harmless from all expense
of defending any such suit and all payments for final
judgment assessed on account of such infringement,
except such infringement or claim arising from :
i. the contractor’s adherence to the Employer’s
directions in the design and configuration of
the Works or to use materials, parts or
equipment of the Employer’s selection;
ii. such material, parts or equipment furnished
to the contractor by the Employer, other
than in each case, items of the Contractor’s
design or selection or the same as any of the
Contractor’s commercial merchandise or in
processes or machines of the Contractor’s
design or selection used in the manufacture
of such standard products or parts;
iii. use of the Works or the materials, parts or
equipment furnished by contractor other
than for the purposes indicated in, or
reasonably to be inferred from, this
Contractor
iv. modification of the Works or the materials,
parts or equipment furnished by the
Contractor, or connection of the works to
another system by any person or entity other
than Contractor, without prior approval by
Contractor.
b. The Employer will, at its own expense, defend all suits
against the Contractor for such excepted infringement
and hold the Contractor harmless from all expense of
defending any such suit and from all payments by final
105 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
judgment assessed against the Contractor on account
of such excepted infringement.
c. The Parties agree to give each other prompt written
notice of claims and suits for infringement, full
opportunity and authority to assume the sole defence,
including appeals and, upon request and at its own
expense, the other agrees to furnish all information
and assistance available to it for such defence.
d. If all or any portion of the Work or any material, part
or equipment provided by the Contractor or on its
behalf is held to constitute an infringement (excluding
such excepted infringements specified in Sub-Clause
17.5.1(a)) and is subject to an injunction restraining
its use or any order providing for its delivery up to or
destruction, or it in respect of any such claim of
infringement the Contractor deems it advisable to do
so, the Contractor shall at its own expense either:
i. Procure for the Employer the right to retain and
continue to use the Work, the affected portion
thereof, or any such material, part or equipment
without interruption for the Employer;
ii. Replace or modify the Work, the affected
portion thereof, or any material, part or
equipment so that it becomes non-infringing
while continuing to meet the Employer’s
Requirements or
iii. If the remedies specified in Sub-Clause
17.5.1(d)(i) and 17.5.1(d)(ii) are not feasible,
refund to the Employer the full purchase price
paid for the Works, the affected portion thereof,
or any material, part of equipment found to be
infringing.
17.5.2 Safeguarding of Information and Technology
106 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) In performance of this Contract, it may be mutually
advantageous to the Parties hereto to share certain
specifications, designs, plans, drawings, software,
market research or operating data, prototypes, or other
business, financial, and /or technical information related
to products, services, or systems which are proprietary
to the disclosing Party or its affiliates (and in the case of
Contractor, Contractor’s Parent company) (together
with this Contract and related documents,
“Information”).The parties recognize and agree that
Information includes information that was supplied in
contemplation here of prior to execution of this Contract,
and further agree that information includes information
in both tangible and intangible form.
b) Unless such Information was previously known to the
Party receiving such Information free of any obligation
to keep it confidential, or such Information has been or
is subsequently made public through other than
unauthorized disclosure by the receiving Party or is
independently developed by the receiving Party (as
documented by the records of the receiving Party), it
shall be kept confidential by the party receiving such
information, shall be disclosed only in the performance
of this Contract, and may not be disclosed for any other
purposes except upon such terms as may be agreed upon
in writing by the Party owning such Information. The
receiving Party may disclose such Information to other
persons, upon the furnishing Party’s prior written
authorization, but solely to perform acts which this Sub-
Clause expressly authorizes the receiving Party to
perform itself and further provided such other person
agrees in writing (a copy of which writing will be
provided to the furnishing Party at its request) to the
same conditions respecting disclosure and use of
107 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Information contained in this Sub-Clause and to any
other reasonable conditions requested by the furnishing
Party. Nothing herein shall prevent a Party from
disclosing Information (i) upon the order of any court or
administrative agency, (ii) upon the request or demand
of, or pursuant to any regulation of, any regulatory
agency or authority, (iii) to the extent reasonably
required in connection with the exercise of any remedy
hereunder and (iv) to a Party’s legal counsel or
independent auditors.
17.6 Limitation of 17.6 Sub-Clause 17.6

Liability
Limitation of Liability
Add the following paragraph at the end of this Sub-Clause:
Notwithstanding anything stated elsewhere in this document,
the following provision shall prevail: reason and entrust this to
another agency for execution at the risk and cost of the
Contractor. In the event of Contractor going bankrupt, the
Employer at the recommendation of Engineer may withdraw
/omit part of the contract work, for whatever reason and entrust
this to another agency for execution at the risk and cost of the
Contractor. In the event of contractor failing to achieve any mile
stone, at the recommendation of Engineer, the Employer may
withdraw /omit part of the contract work, for whatever reason
and give this to another agency for execution at the risk and cost
of the Contractor.
17.7 Add new Sub-Clause 17.7
Urgent Repairs
If, by reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring
to or in connection with the Works, or any part thereof, either
during the execution of the Works, or during the Defects Liability
Period, any remedial or other work or repair shall, in the opinion
of the Engineer, be urgently necessary for the safety of the
Works and the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to do
108 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
such work or repair, the Employer may employ and pay any
other Contractor to carry out such work or repair as the
Engineer may consider necessary.
If the work or repair so done by the Employer is work which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor was liable to do at his
own expense under the Contract, all expenses properly incurred
by the Employer in so doing shall be recoverable from the
Contractor by the Employer, or may be deducted by the
Employer from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor. Provided always that the Engineer shall, as soon
after the occurrence of any such emergency as may be
reasonably practicable, notify the Contractor thereof in writing.
18 Insurance Insurance
18.1 General 18.1 Sub-Clause 18.1 General Requirements for Insurances
Requiremen
Add the following to the end of Sub-Clause 18.1:
t for
Insurances Insurances (Contractor All Risk Policy) obtained by the
Contractor under this Clause must meet the requirements of and
be acceptable to the Employer. The Contract Price is inclusive of
all costs related to these insurances.
18.1.1 The contractor whose tender is accepted will be required
to produce to satisfaction of the Concerned Authority valid and
current license issued in his favour under the provision of the
contract labour (Regulations and abolition) Act 1970 and in case
of failure to do so the acceptance of the tender would be liable to
be withdrawn and earnest money forfeited.
Contractor shall take out necessary Insurance Policy/Policies so

as to provide adequate insurance cover for execution of the
awarded contract work from the “Directorate of Insurance,
Maharashtra State, Mumbai - 400 051” only. Insurance Policy /
Policies taken out from any other insurance Company will not be
accepted. However, if the contractor desires to effect insurance
with the local office of any insurance company, the same should
be under the co-insurance-cum-servicing arrangements (with
109 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
G.I.F.’s share at 60% and insurance Company’s share at 40%)
approved by the Directorate of Insurance. If the policy taken out
by the contractor is not on co-insurance basis the same will not
be accepted and the amount of premium calculated by the
Directorate of Insurance will be recovered directly from the
amount payable to the contractors for the executed contract
work.

Insurance for Design
The Contractor shall effect and maintain professional indemnity
insurance for the amount in Indian Rupees stipulated in
Appendix to the Form of Tender in respect of any design of the
Works to be carried out by, or on behalf of the Contractor. This
insurance, which shall ensure the Contractor’s liability by reason
of professional negligence and errors in the design of the Works,
shall be valid from the date of commencement of Works, until
after the date of issue of Performance Certificate with a clause in
the Insurance Policy stipulating the discovery period of claim for
5 years from the date of issuance of Performance Certificate.
The Engineer will not issue Final Payment Certificate until the
Contractor has produced evidence that coverage of the
professional indemnity insurance has been provided for the
aforesaid period.
Sub-Clause 18.5 Insurance for Automobile Liability
Add the following to Sub-Clause 18.5:
The Contractor shall effect and maintain comprehensive (or
business) automobile liability insurance for all owned (if any),
non-owned and hired vehicles written in an amount with
combined single limits not less than the amount required by
Indian Laws.
19 Force Force Majeure
Majeure
110 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
Resumption of Work
The obligations under the Contract shall be resumed as soon as
practicable after the event has come to an end or ceased to exist.
In case of doubt or dispute, whether a particular occurrence
should be considered an “event” as defined under this clause, the
decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding.
Works that have already been measured shall be paid for by the
Employer even if the same is subsequently destroyed or
damaged as a result of the event. The cost of rebuilding or
replacing any work that has been measured shall be borne by
the Employer.
20 Claims, Claims, Disputes and Arbitration
Disputes
and
Arbitration
20.2 Appointmen 20.2 Replace Sub-Clause 20.2 with the following:
t of the
The Parties shall use their best efforts to settle amicably all
Dispute
Adjudication disputes arising out of or in connection with this Contract or the
Board
interpretation thereof. If any dispute or differences of any kind
whatsoever other than those in respect of which, the decision of
any person is, by the Contract, expressed to be final and binding
shall arise between the Employer and the Contractor or the
Engineer and the Contractor in connection with or arising out of
the Contract or carrying out of the Works (Whether during the
progress of the Works or after their completion and whether
before or after the termination, abandonment or breach of the
Contract), if the aggrieved party may refer such dispute within a
period of 7 days to the concerned Additional Municipal
Commissioner who shall constitute a committee comprising of
three officers i.e. concerned Deputy Municipal Commissioner or
Director (ES&P), Chief Engineer other than the Engineer of the
Contract and concerned Chief Accountant. The Committee shall
give decision in writing within 60 days. Appeal on the Order of
the Committee may be referred to the Municipal Commissioner
111 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
within 7 days. Thereafter the Municipal Commissioner shall
constitute a Committee comprising of three Additional
Municipal Commissioners including Addl. Municipal
Commissioner in charge of Finance Department. The Municipal
Commissioner shall give written notice of committee’s decision
to the Contractor as given in further clause.
20.3 Failure to 20.3 Replace Sub-Clause: 20.3 & 20.4 with the following :
Agree
If any dispute or differences of any kind whatsoever other than
Dispute
Adjudication those in respect of which, the decision of any person is, by the
Board
Contract, expressed to be final and binding) shall arise between
20.4 Obtaining
Dispute the Employer and the Contractor or the Engineer and the
Adjudication
Contractor in connection with or arising out of the Contract or
Board’s
Decision carrying out of the Works (Whether during the progress of the
Works or after their completion and whether before or after the
termination, abandonment or breach of the Contract) it shall in
the first place be referred to and settled by the Commissioner
who within a period of 90 days after being requested to do so
shall give written notice of his decision to the Contractor. Save
as herein provided such decision in respect of every matter so
referred shall be final and binding upon both parties until the
completion of the works and shall forthwith be given effect to by
the Contractor who shall proceed with the works with due
diligence, whether he requires arbitration as hereinafter
provided or not. If the Commissioner has given written notice of
his decision to the Contractor and no Claim to arbitration has
been communicated within a period of 90 days from receipt of
such notice the said decision shall remain final and binding upon
the Contractor.
20.6 Arbitration 20.6 Replace Sub-Clause:
20.6 Arbitration with the following:
If the Commissioner shall fail to give notice of his decision as
aforesaid within a period of 90 days after being requested as
aforesaid, or if the Contractor be dissatisfied with any such
decision, then and in any such case the Contractor may within
112 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
90 days after receiving notice of such decision or within 90
days after the expirations of the first named period of 90 days
(as the case may be) require that the matter or matters in
dispute be referred to arbitration as hereinafter provided. All
disputes or differences in respect of which the decision (if any)
of the Commissioner has not become final and binding as
aforesaid shall be finally settled by arbitration as follows:
Arbitration shall be effected by a single arbitrator agreed upon
by the parties. The sole arbitrator shall be appointed as follows:
The Employer will nominate a panel of three arbitrators. The
arbitrators shall be internationally / nationally recognised
technical experts or Engineers of repute with extensive
knowledge and experience in the area and in relation to the
matter of dispute. The Contractor will be asked to choose one
arbitrator from the panel, who will act as the sole arbitrator
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the
provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 as
amended from time to time, and shall be held at such place and
time within the limits of Brihan Mumbai as the arbitrator may
determine. The decision of the arbitrator shall be final and
binding upon the parties hereto and the expense of the
arbitration shall be paid as may be determined by the arbitrator.
Performance under the Contract shall, if reasonably be possible,
continued during the arbitration proceedings and payment due
to the Contractor by the Employer shall not be withheld unless
they are the subject matter of arbitration proceedings.
The said arbitrator shall have full power to open up, review and
revise any decision, opinion, direction, certification or valuation
of the Commissioner and neither party shall be limited in the
proceedings before such arbitrator to the evidence or
arguments put before the Commissioner for the purpose of
obtaining his said decision. No decision given by the
Commissioner in accordance with the foregoing provisions shall
disqualify him from being called as a witness and giving
113 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
evidence before the arbitrator on any matters whatsoever
relevant to the disputes or difference referred to the arbitrator
as aforesaid.
All awards shall be in writing and for claims equivalent to Rs
5,00,000 or more such awards shall state reasons for amounts
awarded.The expenditure of arbitration shall be paid as may be
determined by arbitrator. The arbitration expenditure shall be
shared equally between Employer and Contractor.
20.6 Arbitration 20.6 Add at the end of replaced Clause 20.6
Substitute Arbitrators
If for any reason an arbitrator is unable to perform his function, a
substitute shall be appointed in the same manner as the original
arbitrator.
No legal action till Dispute Settlement Procedure is exhausted
Any and all Disputes shall be settled in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 20. No action at law concerning or arising out
of any Dispute shall be commenced unless and until all applicable
Dispute resolution procedures set out in Clause 20 shall have been
finally exhausted in relation to that Dispute or any Dispute out of
which that Dispute shall have arisen with which it may be or may
have been connected.
Notice of Dispute
For notice of dispute, a Dispute shall be deemed to arise when one
party serves on the other party a notice in writing (hereinafter
called a "Notice of Dispute") stating the nature of the Dispute,
provided that no such notice shall be served later than 28 days
after the date of issue of Performance Certificate by the Engineer.

Rules for Arbitration & Jurisdiction of Court
Arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with
114 | P a g e

Clause Clause
No. No.
a) “The Arbitration and Conciliation Act -1996” and
amendment at 2015 and as amended from time to time.
b) The place of Arbitration shall be Mumbai
c) Courts at Mumbai shall have the exclusive jurisdiction to
try all disputes between the parties.
VOLUME – V
SCHEDULES TO PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (PCC)
115 | P a g e
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCHEDULES TO PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Schedule SCHEDULES: Description Page No.

No.
116 | P a g e
1 Contract Agreement
2 Performance Guarantee
3 Parent Company Undertaking
4 Parent Company Guarantee
5 Contractor’s Warranty
6 Designer’s Warranty
7 Sub-Contractor’s Warranty
8 Form of Bank Guarantee for Advance

Payments
Note: The Schedules as above may be modified as considered necessary at the time of
finalisation of the Contract.
117 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
118 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 2
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
119 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 3
120 | P a g e

THIS UNDERTAKING is made the day of
BY [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Parent

Company").
TO
The MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI together with its successors and
assigns, "the Employer") of:Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM), 2nd Floor,
Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort, Mumbai – 400 001.
WHEREAS
(A) By a Contract No. MCR/South/P IV dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between
(1) the MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI (“the Employer”) and
(2) [ ] ("the Contractor") the Contractor has agreed to design, execute,

complete and remedy any defects in the works ("the Works") upon the terms and
provision of an undertaking in the terms hereof.
(C) The Parent Company is the beneficial owner of [ ] % [see Note 1] of the issued share
capital of [the Contractor] [see Note 2].
(D) At the request of the Contractor, the Parent Company has agreed to provide this
undertaking.
NOW IT IS HEREBY UNDERTAKEN AND AGREED as follows:
Parent Company hereby undertakes to the Employer that, without the written consent
of the Employer, it will not [and will ensure that none of the companies referred to in
Recital (C) will] [see Note 5]:-
(a) sell transfer assign or otherwise dispose of or deal with ownership of the
whole or any part of EITHER [the shareholding or other interest in the
[Contractor] [see Note 3] OR [the shareholdings or other interests] [see Note
4] referred to in Recital (C) in any way which will affect the beneficial
ownership and control in [the Contractor] [see Note 3] of the Parent Company
[and the other companies referred to in Recital (C)] [see Note 5]; and
(b) take any action which may result in the Contractor being unable to comply
with his obligations or perform in any way his duties under the Contract [or
121 | P a g e
take any action which may result in [the subsidiary forming part of the
Contractor] [see Note 3] being unable to comply with his obligations or
perform in any way his duties under the [joint venture or other relevant]
agreement] [see Note 6]]
until such time as the Works shall have been completed, all the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract shall have been performed and the Maintenance and
Defects Liability Period (as defined in the Contract) for the whole and every part of the
Works shall have elapsed and further that it will ensure [that the subsidiary forming
part of the Contractor will take all steps necessary to ensure [see Note 6]] compliance
by the Contractor with the provisions of the Contract.
2. The obligations of the Parent Company under this Undertaking shall remain in full
force and effect and shall not be affected or discharged in any way and the Parent
Company hereby waives notice of:-
(a) any suspension of the Works, variation or amendment to the Contract

obligations [and/or the obligations of
[ ] [see Note 7];
or unenforceable;
(c) the termination of the Contract or of the employment of the Contractor
[and/or
[ ]] [see Note 7] under the Contract for any reason;
have against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 7] or negligence by the
Employer for any of the obligations of the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note
3. This Undertaking shall extend to any variation of or amendment to the Contract and
to any agreement supplemental thereto agreed between the Employer and the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 7] and for the avoidance of doubt the Parent
Company hereby authorises the Employer and the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note
7] to make any such amendment, variation or supplemental agreement.
4. All documents arising out of or in connection with this Undertaking shall be served:
(a) upon the Employer: Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM)

2nd Floor, Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort Mumbai – 400 001.
(b) upon the Parent Company, at [ ] India. [Note 8]
122 | P a g e
5. The Employer and the Parent Company may change their respective nominated
6. This Undertaking shall be governed by and construed according to the laws for the
time being in force in India and the Parent Company agrees to submit to the
jurisdiction of the courts of India.
IN WITNESS where of this Undertaking has been executed as a deed on the date first before
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
was affixed hereto
in the presence of:-
Notes: (for preparation of but not for inclusion in the engrossment of this Undertaking)
1. If the Parent Company is not the immediate parent company, the chain of ownership
must be recited, identifying each company in the chain and the shareholdings or other
interests in each subsidiary.
2. If the Contractor comprises more than one company, that fact and the joint venture or
other relevant agreement must be recited. In such case, insert the name of the
subsidiary forming part of the joint venture or partnership, and in respect of which
the parent company undertaking is being given.
3. If Note 2 applies, refer to the subsidiary of the Parent Company and not the Contractor.
4. If Note 1 applies, use this alternative.
123 | P a g e
7. If Note 2 applies, add this provision and insert the name of the subsidiary.
8. The address for service shall be in India.
124 | P a g e
VOLUME - 2
SCHEDULE 4
125 | P a g e

THIS GUARANTEE is made the day of
BETWEEN:-
(1) [ ] whose registered office is at [ ] [and [ ] whose registered

office is at [ ]] ("the Guarantor").
TO The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (together with its successors and
assigns, "the Employer") of:
Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C), Civic
Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali (E), Mumbai,
400066 India
WHEREAS
(A) By a contract MCR/South/ P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1)
the Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”) and
(2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the Contractor has agreed to design, execute, complete
and remedy any defects in the Works upon the terms and conditions contained in the
Contract.
provision of a guarantee in the terms hereof. [seeNote 1].
(C) At the request of the Contractor, the Guarantor has agreed to guarantee performance
of the Contract by the [Contractor] [see Note 2] as set out herein.
IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees to the Employer as a primary
obligation and not as a surety due performance by the [Contractor] [see Note 2] of all
of its obligations and liabilities under and in accordance with the Contract save that
nothing herein shall be construed as imposing greater obligations or liabilities on the
Guarantor than are imposed on the [Contractor] [see Note 2] in the Contract.
126 | P a g e
2. The obligations of the Guarantor under this Guarantee shall remain in full force and
effect and shall not be affected or discharged in any way by and the Guarantor hereby
waives notice of: -
(a) any suspension of the Works, variation to or amendment of the Contract

obligations [and/or the obligations of [
]] [see Note 3] under the Contract;
or unenforceable;
(c) the termination of the Contract or of the engagement of the Contractor [ and /
or [….]] [see Note 3] under the Contract for any reason;
have against the Contractor [ and / or [….]] [see Note 3] or negligence by the
Employer for any of the obligations of the Contractor [ and / or […..] [see Note
3. This Guarantee shall extend to any variation of or amendment to the Contract and to
any agreement supplemental thereto agreed between the Employer and the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] and for the avoidance of doubt the Guarantor
hereby authorizes the Employer and the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] to
make any such amendment, variation or supplemental agreement.
4. This Guarantee is a continuing guarantee and accordingly shall cover all of the
obligations and liabilities of the [Contractor] [see Note 2] under the Contract and
remain in full force and effect until all the said obligations and liabilities of the
Contractor shall have been carried out, completed and discharged in accordance with
the Contract. This Guarantee is in addition to any other security which the Employer
may at any time hold and may be enforced without first having recourse to any such
security or taking any steps or proceedings against the Contractor.
5. Until expiry of the Maintenance and Defects Liability Period (as defined in the
Contract) for the whole and every part of the Works, the Guarantor shall not on any
ground whatsoever make any claim or threaten to make any claim whether by
127 | P a g e
proceedings or otherwise against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] for the
recovery of any sum paid by the Guarantor pursuant to this Guarantee. Any such claim
shall be subordinate to any claims (contingent or otherwise) which the Employer may
have against the Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] arising out of or in connection
with the Contract until such time as such claims shall be satisfied by the Contractor
[and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] or the Guarantor as the case may be. To that intent the
Guarantor shall not claim or have the benefit of any security which the Employer holds
or may hold for any monies or liabilities due or incurred by the Contractor [and/or [
]] [see Note 3] to the Employer and, in case the Guarantor receives any sum from the
Contractor [and/or [ ]] [see Note 3] in respect of any payment by the Guarantor
hereunder, the Guarantor shall hold such sum in trust for the Employer for so long as
any sum is payable (contingently or otherwise) under this Guarantee.
6. The Employer shall be entitled to assign the benefit of this Guarantee at any time
without the consent of the Guarantor or the [Contractor] [see Note 2] being required.
7. All documents arising out of or in connection with this Guarantee shall be served:
(a) upon the Employer: Municipal Commissioner of Greater Mumbai (MCGM), 2nd
Floor, Municipal Head Office, Mahapalika Fort, Mumbai – 400 001.
(b) Upon the Guarantor, at [ ] India [Note 4]
8. The Employer and the Guarantor may change their respective nominated addresses
for service of documents to another address in India but only by prior written notice
to each other. All demands and notices must be in writing.
9. This Guarantee shall be governed by and construed according to the laws for the time
being in force in India and the Contractor agrees to submit to the jurisdiction of the
courts of India.
IN WITNESS whereof this Guarantee has been executed as a deed on the date first before
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
128 | P a g e
[ ]
)
)
the presence of: -
)
Notes (for preparation of but not inclusion in the engrossment of this Guarantee)
1. If the Contractor comprises more than one company, that fact, the joint venture or
other relevant agreement and the relationship of the Guarantor to its subsidiary
forming part of the Contractor must be recited.
2. If Note 1 applies, replace the word "Contractor" with name of the subsidiary being
guaranteed.
3. If Note 1 applies, add additional wording and insert the name of the subsidiary being
guaranteed.
4. The address for service shall be in India
129 | P a g e
VOLUME - 2
SCHEDULE 5
130 | P a g e
(Refer Sub-Clause 4.2 of GCC)
BY [ ] of [ ] [and [see Note 1]] ([jointly] "the Contractor")
TO [ ] [of]/[whose registered office is at] [ ] (together with its

successors and assigns, "the Employer")
WHEREAS
(A)
By a contract No. MCR/South/P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1) the
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai("the Employer") and (2) the Contractor, the
Testing and Commissioning ) and remedy any defect in the Works upon the terms and
(B) [See Note 3].
(C) At the request of the Employer and pursuant to the terms of the Contract the
Contractor has agreed to provide this Warranty.
NOW IT IS AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
1. The Contractor hereby warrants and undertakes that:
(a) the Contractor will design, execute, complete, test and commission (including
Integrated Testing and Commissioning) and remedy any defect in the Works
in accordance with the terms of the Contract; and
(b) the Contractor owes a duty of care to the Employer in relation to the
performance of its duties under the Contract; and
131 | P a g e
(c) the Contractor will replace free of cost to the Employer any defect or failure of
equipment provided in the Works for a period of 24 months from the date of
taking over of whole of the Works; and
(d) the Contractor agrees that should any design modification be required to any
equipment or component as a consequence of failure analysis, the period of 24
months shall re-commence from the date when the modified part is
commissioned into service if the date of modification is later than the date of
taking over of last whole of the Works, and such modification shall be carried
out free of cost to the Employer in the Works; and
(e) the Contractor shall maintain the manufacture & supply of spares (including
those of his Sub-Contractors/Vendors) for the equipment’s supplied in the
Contract for at least 10 years from the date of Completion of the Contract; and
(f) the Contractor has exercised and will continue to exercise in the design of the
Underground Stations and Tunnels including Ventilation and Air conditioning
all the skill and care to be expected of a professionally qualified and competent
designer experienced in work of similar nature and scope as the Works; and
(g) the Works will, when completed, comply in all respects with the Employer's
Requirements, the Contractor’s Technical Proposals, the Final Design
Document and the intended use of the Works; and
(h) the Works has been or will be designed, manufactured, installed and otherwise
constructed and to the highest standards available using internationally
proven up-to-date good practice; and
(i) the Works will, when completed, comply with enactments and regulations
relevant to the Works; and
(j) no Materials generally known to be deleterious or not in accordance with good

engineering practice have been or will be specified or selected or incorporated
in the Works by the Contractor.
(k) The design of the Works and manufacture of Plant have taken or will take full
account of the effects of the intended manufacturing and installation methods,
Temporary Works and Contactor’s Equipment.
2. The liability of [the companies comprising [see Note 3]] the Contractor under this
Warranty [shall be joint and several and [see Note 3]] shall not be released, diminished
or in any way affected by any independent inquiry or investigation into the Works or
132 | P a g e
any matter related to the Contract whether carried out by or on behalf of the Employer
or any liability or right of action which may arise out of such inquiry or investigation.
3. Insofar as the copyright or other intellectual property rights in any plans, calculations,
drawings, documents, materials, plant, know-how and other information relating to
the Works shall be vested in the Contractor, the Contractor grants to the Employer his
successors and assigns a royalty free, non-exclusive and irrevocable license (carrying
the right to grant sub-licenses) to use and reproduce any of the works designs or
inventions incorporated and referred to in such documents or materials and any such
know-how and information for all purposes relating to the Works or the Goregaon
Mulund Link Road including without limitation the design, manufacture, installation,
completion, testing and commissioning (including Integrated Testing and
Commissioning) reinstatement, extension and the remedy of any defect in the Works.
To the extent that beneficial ownership of any such copyright or other intellectual
property rights is vested in anyone other than the Contractor, the Contractor shall use
best endeavors to procure that the beneficial owner thereof shall grant a like license
to the Employer. For the avoidance of doubt, any such license granted shall not be
determined if the Contractor shall for any reason cease to be employed in connection
with the Works.
have against the Contractor, whether in tort or otherwise.
5. Nothing contained in this Warranty shall vary or affect the Contractor's rights and
obligations under the Contract.
6. The address for service of all documents arising out of or in connection with this
Warranty shall be: -
(a)
Upon the Employer Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai; Municipal

Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),Civic
Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali (E),
Mumbai, 400066 India
133 | P a g e
(b)
Upon the Contractor at [ ] India. [Note 4]
7. The Employer and the Contractor may change their respective nominated addresses
to another address in India but only by prior written notice to each other. All notices
must be in writing.
the Contractor arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty shall
be referred to arbitration in accordance with the Conciliation and Arbitration
rules set out in the General Conditions of Contract. “Dispute” as defined in the
Contract shall be deemed to include any such dispute or difference between
the Employer and Contractor.
9(1), the Employer may by notice in writing to the Contractor require and the
Contractor shall be deemed to have consented to the referral of such dispute
or difference to the arbitrator to whom the Contract Dispute has been or will
be referred.
statement of objections relating to the dispute.
(4) Subject to the foregoing provisions of this clause 9, the Employer and the
Contractor agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of India at Mumbai.
IN WITNESS whereof this Warranty has been executed as a deed on the date written at the
head hereof.
134 | P a g e
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
the presence of: -
Notes (for preparation of and not inclusion in the engrossment of this Warranty)
(1) If the Contractor comprises more than one company, each such company shall be a
party and liability under this warranty will be joint and several, with consequential
grammatical changes.
(2) If Note 1 applies, that fact and the joint venture or other relevant agreement must be
recited.
(3) Delete if Note 1 does not apply.
(4) The address for service shall be in India.
135 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 6
DESIGNER'S WARRANTY
136 | P a g e
DESIGNER’S WARRANTY
(Refer Clause 5.3 of the GCC)
BETWEEN:
(1) [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Designer"); and
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (together with its successors and assigns, "the
Employer") of Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.
& R.C), Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
(2)
WHEREAS:
(a)
By a contract ______dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1) Municipal Corporation

of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”) and (2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the Contractor
has agreed to design, execute, complete, test and commission (including Integrated Testing
and Commissioning) and remedy any defect in the Works upon the terms and conditions
(b) The _________Name of the Contractor/Designer_____ hereinafter called “Designer” has

had an opportunity of reading and noting the provisions of the Contract (other than
details of the Contractor's prices and rates).
(c) Pursuant to the Contract, the Contractor wishes to enter into an agreement with the
Designer and Designer agrees to the wishes of the Contractor (the Consultancy
agreement) to carry out the Contractor's obligations under the Contract in relation to
the design and functions ascribed to the Designer in the Contract.
(d) The Contract stipulates that [the Contractor shall ensure that] the Designer executes a
warranty agreement in favour of the Employer.
[ ] in case Contractor is the Designer also, the remarks within [ ] to be deleted
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows:
137 | P a g e
1. In consideration of the Employer not objecting to the Contractor and the Designer
entering into the Consultancy Agreement, the Designer warrants and undertakes to
the Employer that he has exercised and will continue to exercise all the skill and care
to be expected of a professionally qualified and competent designer experienced in
work of similar nature and scope as the Works in carrying out the design of the
temporary and Permanent Works and in performing the other duties and functions
ascribed to him in the Contract.
2. The Designer agrees that, in the event of the termination of the Contract by the
Employer, the Designer will, if so required by notice in writing given by the Employer,
accept subject to Clause 4 the instructions of the Employer or his appointee to the
exclusion of the Contractor in respect of the carrying out and completion of the Works
upon the terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement.
3. The Designer further agrees that he will not, without first giving the Employer not less
than 21 days' previous notice in writing, exercise any rights it may have to terminate
the Consultancy Agreement or to treat the same as having been as repudiated by the
Contractor or to discontinue the performance of any duties to be performed by the
Designer pursuant thereto. The Designer's right to terminate the Consultancy
Agreement or to treat the same as having been repudiated or to discontinue the
performance thereof shall cease if, within such period of notice and subject to Clause
4, the Employer shall give notice in writing to the Designer requiring the Designer to
accept the instructions of the Employer or his appointee to the exclusion of the
Contractor in respect of the carrying out and completion of the Contract Works upon
the terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement.
4. Any notice given by the Employer under Clause 2 or 3 shall state that the Employer or
his appointee accepts liability for payment of the fees payable to the Designer under
the Consultancy Agreement and for performance of the Contractor's obligations under
the Consultancy Agreement, including payment of any fees outstanding at the date of
such notice.
without the consent of the Designer being required.
138 | P a g e
(1)
upon the Employer: Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai; at

Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),
Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
(2) upon the Designer at [ ].
7. The Employer and the Designer may change their respective nominated addresses for
service of documents to another address in India but only by prior written notice to
each other. All demands and notices must be in writing.
9. Except to the extent (if any) expressly permitted by the Consultancy Agreement, the
Designer shall not sub-contract any of the Designer's obligations under the
Consultancy Agreement without the prior written consent of the Employer's
Representative.
10. Without prejudice to its obligations under this Warranty, the Designer shall maintain
with well-established underwriters of repute and on terms and conditions reasonably
acceptable to the Employer, Professional Indemnity Insurance (as per Sub-Clause 18.6
of the Particular Conditions of Contract and Form of Tender – Appendix FT-1) in
respect of the Designer and its sub-consultants in relation to his design of the Works
for any one occurrence or series of occurrences arising out of any one event from the
date of Letter of Acceptance until 5 years after the issue of Performance Certificate for
the whole of works. The Designer shall immediately inform the Employer if for any
reason Professional Indemnity Insurance is not maintained in accordance with this
Warranty or becomes void or unenforceable.
11. Insofar as the patent, copyright or other intellectual property rights in any Design Data
(as defined in the Contract), plans, calculations, drawings, documents, materials,
computer software, know-how and information relating to the Works shall be vested
in the Designer, the Designer grants to the Employer his successors and assigns a
royalty-free, non-exclusive and irrevocable license (carrying the right to grant sub-
licenses) to use and reproduce any of the works designs or inventions incorporated
139 | P a g e
and referred to in such documents or materials and any such know-how and
information for all purposes relating to the Works (including without limitation the
design, construction, reconstruction, completion, reinstatement, extension, repair and
operation of the Works). To the extent beneficial ownership of any such patent,
copyright or other intellectual property right is vested in anyone other than the
Designer or the Contractor, the Designer shall use his best endeavors to procure that
the beneficial owner thereof shall grant a like license to the Employer. Any such
license granted shall not be determined if the Designer shall for any reason cease to
be employed in connection with the Works.
the Designer arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty shall be
referred to arbitration in accordance with Clause 104 of PCC “Dispute” as
defined in the Contract shall be deemed to include any such dispute or
difference between the Employer and the Designer.
provided that an arbitrator has not already been appointed, the Employer may
by notice in writing to the Designer require and the Designer shall be deemed
to have consented to the referral of such dispute or difference to the arbitrator
to whom the Contract Dispute has been or will be referred.
direction, withholding of approval or consent, statement of objection,
determination, certificate, assessment or valuation by the Employer's
Representative or the Contractor, relating to the dispute or difference.
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
140 | P a g e
[Designer ]
the presence of:-
Note : In case of Contractor and Designer being the same, the wordings of the Para to be
suitably modified acceptable to the Employer.
141 | P a g e
VOLUME - V
SCHEDULE 7
142 | P a g e
SUB-CONTRACTOR’S / VENDOR’S WARRANTY
THIS AGREEMENT is made the day of
BETWEEN:
1. [ ] [whose registered office is at]/[of] [ ] ("the Sub-

contractor") and
TO
The Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai(together with its successors and assigns, "the
Employer") of: Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.
& R.C),Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near National Park, Borivali
WHEREAS
(A)
By a contract MCR/South/P IV- dated [ ] ("the Contract") made between (1 Municipal

Corporation of Greater Mumbai (“the Employer”)and (2) [ ] ("the Contractor"), the
Testing and Commissioning) and remedy any defects in works upon the terms and conditions
(B) The Sub-contractor has had an opportunity of reading and noting the provisions of the
Contract (other than details of the Contractor's prices and rates).
(C) Pursuant to the Contract, the Contractor wishes to enter into an agreement with the
Sub-contractor ("the Sub-contract") for the Sub-contractor to carry out and complete
a part of the Works as more particularly described in the Sub-contract ("the Sub-
contract Works").
143 | P a g e
(D) The Contract stipulates that the Contractor shall obtain the consent of the Employer's
Representative before entering into the Sub-contract, and that the Contractor shall
procure that the Sub-contractor executes a warranty agreement in favour of the
Employer.
144 | P a g e
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED as follows: -
1. In consideration of the Engineer consenting to the Contractor and the Sub-contractor

entering into the Sub-contract, the Sub-contractor warrants and undertakes to the
Employer that:
(a) he will execute and complete the Sub-contract Works, and will carry out each
and all of the obligations, duties and undertakings of the Sub-contractor under
the Sub-contract when and if such obligations, duties and undertakings shall
become due and performable, in accordance with the terms of the Sub-contract
(as the same may from time to time be varied or amended with the consent of
the Employer); and
(b) he will supply to the Contractor and in specific cases wherever required to the
Employer's Representative with all information as may be required from time
to time in relation to progress of the Sub-contract Works.
2. The Sub-contractor undertakes to indemnify the Employer against each and every
liability which the Employer may have to any person whatsoever and against any
claims, demands, proceedings, loss, damages, costs and expenses sustained, incurred
or payable by the Employer provided that the Sub-contractor shall have no greater
liability to the Employer by virtue of this Warranty than the liability of the Contractor
to the Employer under the Contract insofar as and to the extent that the same has
arisen by reason of any breach by the Sub-contractor of his obligations under the Sub-
contract.
3 No allowance of time by the Employer hereunder or by the Contractor under the Sub-
contract nor any forbearance or forgiveness in or in respect of any matter or thing
concerning this Warranty or the Sub-contract on the part of the Employer or the
Contractor, nor anything that the Employer or the Contractor may do or omit or
neglect to do, shall in any way release the Sub-contractor from any liability under this
Warranty.
4. The Sub-contractor agrees that he will not without first giving the Employer not less
than 21 day’s prior notice in writing exercise any right he may have to terminate the
Sub-contract or treat the same as having been repudiated by the Contractor or
withhold performance of its obligations under the Sub-contract.
5. (1) In the event that the Contract or the employment of the Contractor under the
145 | P a g e
Contract is terminated for any reason whatsoever and if so requested by the

Employer in writing within 21 days of such termination, the Sub-contractor
shall carry out and complete his obligations under this Warranty and shall
enter into a novation agreement with the Employer and the Contractor in
which the Sub-contractor will undertake inter alia to perform the Sub-contract
and be bound by its terms and conditions as if the Employer had originally
been named as a contracting party in place of the Contractor. The said
novation agreement will be in such form as the Employer may reasonably
require.
(2) In the event that the Employer does not require the Sub-contractor to enter
into a novation agreement as required by Sub-Clause 5(1), the Sub-contractor
shall have no claim whatsoever against the Employer for any damage, loss or
expense howsoever arising out of or in connection with this Warranty.
6. Insofar as the copyright or other intellectual property rights, in any plans, calculations,
drawings, documents, materials, know-how and information relating to the Sub-
contract Works shall be vested in the Sub-contractor, the Sub-contractor grants to the
Employer, his successors and assignees a royalty free, non-exclusive and irrevocable
licence (carrying the right to grant sub-licences) to use and reproduce any of the works
designs or inventions incorporated and referred to in such documents or materials
and any such know-how and information for all purposes relating to the Works of the
Goregaon Mulund Link Road Project, without limitation the design, manufacture,
installation, reconstruction, completion, reinstatement, extension, remedy of any
defect of the Works. To the extent beneficial ownership of any such copyright or other
intellectual property right is vested in anyone other than the Sub-contractor, the Sub-
contractor shall use best endeavors to procure that the beneficial owner thereof shall
grant a like license to the Employer. For the avoidance of doubt, any such license
granted shall not be determined if the Sub-contractor shall for any reason cease to be
employed in connection with the Sub-contract Works.
7. In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the terms of the Sub-contract and
this Warranty, the terms of this Warranty shall prevail.
have against the Sub-contractor whether in tort or otherwise.
146 | P a g e
9. Nothing contained in this Warranty shall vary or affect the Sub-contractor's rights and
obligations under the Sub-contract.
without the consent of the Sub-contractor being required.
(1)
Upon the Employer: Municipal Corporation of Greater MumbaiOffice of the Chief

Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),Civic Training Institute & Research Centre Abhinav Nagar, Near
National Park, Borivali (E), Mumbai, 400066 IndiaMarked for the attention of
Managing Director.
(2)
Upon the Sub-contractor, at [ ] India.
12. The Employer and the Sub-contractor may change their respective nominated
the Sub-contractor arising under out of or in connection with this Warranty
shall be referred to arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration as described
in the Contract.
14(1), the Employer may by notice in writing to the Sub-contractor require
and the Sub-contractor shall be deemed to have consented to the referral of
147 | P a g e
such dispute or difference to the arbitrator to whom the Contract Dispute has
been or will be referred.
statement of objection, assessment or valuation by the Employer's
Representative or the Contractor relating to the dispute or difference.
written.
THE COMMON SEAL of
[ ]
the presence of: - )
148 | P a g e
VOLUME – V
SCHEDULE 5
149 | P a g e

(Refer. Sub - Clause 14.2 of GCC)
Ref_________
Ba
nk Guarantee____________
Date __________
Dear Sir,
In consideration of M/s. ____ (hereinafter referred as the “Employer” \, which expression shall, unless repugnant
to the context or meaning thereof include it successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to M/s. _____
(hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context of meaning
thereof, include its successor, administrators, executors and assigns), a contract by issue of Contract Agreement
No.________ dated ______ and the same having been unequivocally accepted by the Contractor, resulting in a
Contract valued at ______ for ______Contract (hereinafter called the
“Contract”).
and the Employer having agreed to make an advance payment to the Contractor for performance of the above
Contract amount to _______ (in words and figures) as an advance against Bank Guarantee to be furnished by the
Contractor.
We _____ (Name of the Bank) having its Head Office at ______(hereinafter referred to as the Bank, which expression
shall unless repugnant to the context of meaning thereof, include its successors, administrators executors and
assigns) do hereby unconditionally, irrevocably and without demur guarantee and undertake to pay the
Employer immediately on demand any or, all monies payable by the Contractor to the extent of _____ as aforesaid
at any time upto ________@___ without any demur reservation, context, recourse or protest and or without any
150 | P a g e
reference to the Contractor. Any such demand made by the Employer on the Bank shall be conclusive and binding
notwithstanding any difference between the Employer and the Contractor or any dispute pending before any
Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any other authority. We agree that the Guarantee herein contained shall be
irrevocable and shall continue to be enforceable till the Employer discharges this guarantee.
151 | P a g e
The Employer shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of Bank under this Guarantee,
from time to time to vary the advance or to extend the time for performance of the contract by the Contractor.
The Employer shall have the fullest liberty without affecting this guarantee, to postpone from time to time the
exercise of any powers vested in them or of any right which they might have against the Employer and to exercise
the same at any time in any manner, and either to enforce or to forebear in enforce any convents, contained or
implied, in the Contract between the Employer and Contractor any other course or remedy or security available
to the Employer. The bank shall not be relieved of its obligation under these presents by any exercise by the
Employer of its liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or any of them or by reason of any other act or
forbearance or other acts of omission or commission on the part of the Employer or any other indulgence shown
by the Employer or by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law would but for this provision have
the effect of relieving the Bank.
The Bank also agrees that the Employer at his option shall be entitled to enforce this Guarantee against the Bank
as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the Contractor and notwithstanding any
security or other guarantee that the Employer may have in relation to the Contractor’s liabilities.
The outstanding liability of the Bank under this guarantee will reduce by such amounts as may be notified to the
Bank in your authorized writing and stated to be the reduction of this guarantee required to be made in
accordance with the Contract by reason of the repayments made by the Contractor.
Courts at Mumbai, India will have exclusive jurisdiction for contesting legal cases arising out of encashment of
the Guarantee.
152 | P a g e
Notwithstanding anything contained herein above, or liability under this guarantee is limited to ___ and it shall
remain in force until the Employer receive full repayment of the same amount from the Contractor and shall be
extended from time to time for such period as may be desired by M/s. ______ on whose behalf this guarantee has
been given.
Dated this _________ day of ________ 19 ___ at ____________________
WITNESS: ____________________________
_____________
(Signature)
(Signature)
___
_______________
(Name)
(Name)
Office Address:
_____________________
______________________
De
signation (with Bank stamp)
Att
orney as Power of
153 | P a g e
Att
orney No._________
Da
te ________________
@The date will be ninety (90) days after the date of completion of the Works.
Notes:
1. The stamp papers of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of the Bank, who issues the ‘Bank
Guarantee’.
2. The ‘Bank Guarantee’ shall be from an Indian Schedule bank (excluding Cooperative Banks) or from a
schedule Foreign Bank as defined in Section 2(e) of RBI Act 1934 read with Second Schedule.
154 | P a g e

MCGM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MCGM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Goregaon Mulund Link Road (GMLR) Contract Code.

Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai

Mumbai, Maharashtra, India

Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),

GOREGAON MULUND LINK ROAD PROJECT (GMLR)

Outline of Tender Documents

Volume 1 Bidding Guidelines

Section I Notice of Intimation to RFP e – Tender Notice

Section II Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)

Section III Form of Tenders

Volume 2 Condition of Contracts

Volume 3 Employer’s Requirement

Section VI Section A – General

Volume 4 Outline Design Specification

Volume 7 Pricing Document

Volume 8 Reference Document

Section VII Engineering and Geotechnical Investigation Report.

Section VIII Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Report

Section IX Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report.

Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai

Mumbai, Maharashtra, India

Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),

MUNICIPAL CORPORATION OF GREATER MUMBAI

Notice Inviting Tenderer (NIT)

2. In continuation to EOI-stage I, II & e-RFQ as above, the Municipal Corporation of Greater

Applicants may obtain further information from -

15. Key Details and Schedule of Submission are as follows: -

Sr.No. Particulars Schedule

Sr.No. Particulars Schedule

Note: - Any change in Venue of Pre-RFP conference will be published on

Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai

Mumbai, Maharashtra, India

Chief Engineer (C.T.I. & R.C),

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS FOR e-TENDERING

1. The e-Tendering process of MCGM is enabled through its Portal ‘http://www.mcgm.gov.in’.

a) Open the e-Tendering application by clicking the link available in ‘e-Tendering’

h) Before submission, Tenderers to verify/ensure that the documents are uploaded

14. Tender Submissions

(a) The e-Packet ‘A’ shall contain the following –

▪ A scanned copy of pre-qualification e-mail or letter of the Chief Engineer (C.T.I.

(b) The Physical Packet ‘A’ shall contain the following –

▪ The Original Bank Guarantee referred in 20 (a) above, in wax-sealed packets

(c) The e-Packet “B” shall contain the following –

▪ Complete set of Technical Proposals for as per the Employer’s Requirements,

(d) The e-Packet ‘C’ shall contain the following –

(e) e-Packet C1(Discount Quote)

size and uploaded serially to form a sequential part of submission as understandable

Start Date read as “Sale Date”

End Date read as “Submission Date”

Supplier read as “Contractor/ Tenderer”

Vendor read as “Contractor/Tenderer”

Vendor Quotation read as “Contractor’s Bid/ Tenderer’s Offer”

Purchaser read as “Department/MCGM”

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

1.1 Relevant information and scope of the works

More details are as follows:

e) Twin Bored Tunnels of minimum 13.6 m internal diameter (finish) accommodating

g) Cut and Cover Tunnel; and

j) Supply and installation of power system support in tunnel; and

k) Cable trays and ducts in tunnels; and

l) Emergency and maintenance walkways and railings within tunnels; and

o) Protection and relocation of existing utilities; and

u) Supply, installation and testing of Pumps including pipes for drainage/sewerage;